%#% extstart input preamble.tex
%
% memman.tex  Memoir class user manual (Part II only)  last updated 2009/09/07
%             Author: Peter Wilson
%             Copyright 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2008, 2009 Peter R. wilson
%
%   This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%   Maintainer: Lars Madsen (daleif at imf dot au dot dk)
%
%\listfiles
\documentclass[10pt,letterpaper,extrafontsizes]{memoir}
\listfiles
\usepackage{comment}


% For (non-printing) notes  \PWnote{date}{text}
\newcommand{\PWnote}[2]{} 
\PWnote{2009/04/29}{Added fonttable to the used packages}
\PWnote{2009/08/19}{Made Part I a separate doc (memdesign.tex).}

% same
\newcommand{\LMnote}[2]{} 


\usepackage{memsty}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\usepackage{titlepages}  % code of the example titlepages
\usepackage{memlays}     % extra layout diagrams
\usepackage{dpfloat}     % floats on facing pages
\usepackage{fonttable}[2009/04/01]   % font tables
%%%%\usepackage{xr-hyper} \externaldocument{memdesign} Doesn't work, 
%%%%                      Idea won't work in general for memman/memdesin
%%%%                      as at display time, who knows where everything
%%%%                      will be located on the individual's computer.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

%%%% Change section heading styles
%%%\memmansecheads

%%%% Use the built-in division styling
\headstyles{memman}

%%% ToC down to subsections
\settocdepth{subsection}
%%% Numbering down to subsections as well
\setsecnumdepth{subsection}

%%%% extra index for first lines
\makeindex[lines]


% this 'if' is used to determine whether we are compiling the memoir
% master in the subversion repository, or the public memman.tex
\newif\ifMASTER
\MASTERfalse
%\MASTERtrue

\ifMASTER

% add patch to fink, such that \AtEndFile still work
\makeatletter
\AtEndFile{fink.sty}{
  \typeout{patching fink} 
  \renewcommand{\InputIfFileExists}[2]{%
    \IfFileExists{##1}%
    {##2\@addtofilelist{##1}%
      \m@matbeginf{##1}%
      \fink@prepare{##1}%
      %\@@input \@filef@und
      \expandafter\fink@input%
      \expandafter\fink@restore\expandafter{\finkpath}%
     \m@matendf{##1}%
     \killm@matf{##1}}%
 }
}
\makeatother
% private package, not in circulation
% enables us to gather svn information on a single file basis
%\usepackage[filehooks]{svn-multi-private}
% use the current version
\usepackage[filehooks]{svn-multi}


% \svnidlong
% {}
% {$LastChangedDate: 2013-04-26 18:44:39 +0200 (Fri, 26 Apr 2013) $}
% {$LastChangedRevision: 447 $}
% {$LastChangedBy: daleif $}



\makeatletter
\newcommand\addRevisionData{%
  \begin{picture}(0,0)%
    \put(0,-20){%
      \tiny%
      \expandafter\@ifmtarg\expandafter{\svnfiledate}{}{%
        \textit{\textcolor{darkgray}{Chapter last updated \svnfileyear/\svnfilemonth/\svnfileday
         \enspace (revision \svnfilerev)}}
     }%
    }%
  \end{picture}%
}
\makeatother

% we add this to the first page of each chapter

\makepagestyle{chapter}
\makeoddfoot{chapter}{\addRevisionData}{\thepage}{}
\makeevenfoot{chapter}{\addRevisionData}{\thepage}{}

\else
% disable svn info collecting
\newcommand\svnidlong[4]{}
\fi



%% end preamble
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%#% extend

\usepackage[draft]{fixme}
\fxsetup{
  layout=marginnote
}
 
\begin{document}



%#% extstart input intro.tex





\tightlists
%\firmlists
\midsloppy
\raggedbottom
\chapterstyle{demo3}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

\input{memnoidxnum}

\frontmatter
\pagestyle{empty}


% half-title page
\vspace*{\fill}
\begin{adjustwidth}{1in}{1in}
\begin{flushleft}
\HUGE\sffamily The
\end{flushleft}
\begin{center}
\HUGE\sffamily  Memoir
\end{center}
\begin{flushright}
\HUGE\sffamily  Class
\end{flushright}
%%\begin{center}
%%\sffamily (Draft Edition 7)
%%\end{center}
\end{adjustwidth}
\vspace*{\fill}
\cleardoublepage

% title page
\vspace*{\fill}
\begin{center}
\HUGE\textsf{The Memoir Class}\par
\end{center}
\begin{center}
\LARGE\textsf{for}\par
\end{center}
\begin{center}
\HUGE\textsf{Configurable Typesetting}\par
\end{center}

\begin{center}
\Huge\textsf{User Guide}\par
\end{center}
\begin{center}
\LARGE\textsf{Peter Wilson}\par
\bigskip
\normalsize\textsf{Maintained by Lars Madsen}\par
\medskip
\normalsize\textsf{Corresponding to \theclass\ version \memversion}\par
\end{center}
\vspace*{\fill}
\def\THP{T\kern-0.2em H\kern-0.4em P}%   OK for CMR
\def\THP{T\kern-0.15em H\kern-0.3em P}%   OK for Palatino
\newcommand*{\THPress}{The Herries Press}%
\begin{center}
\settowidth{\droptitle}{\textsf{\THPress}}%
\textrm{\normalsize \THP} \\
\textsf{\THPress} \\[0.2\baselineskip]
\includegraphics[width=\droptitle]{anvil2.mps}
\setlength{\droptitle}{0pt}%
\end{center}
\clearpage

\PWnote{2009/06/26}{Updated the copyright page for 9th impression}
% copyright page
\begingroup
\footnotesize
\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
\setlength{\parskip}{\baselineskip}
%%\ttfamily
\textcopyright{} 2001 --- 2010 Peter R. Wilson \\
\textcopyright{} 2011 --- 2013 Lars Madsen \\
All rights reserved

The Herries Press, Normandy Park, WA.

Printed in the World 

The paper used in this publication may meet the minimum requirements
of the American National Standard for Information 
Sciences --- Permanence of Paper for Printed Library Materials, 
ANSI Z39.48--1984.

\PWnote{2009/07/08}{Changed manual date to 8 July 2009}
\begin{center}
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01\hspace{2em}19 18 17 16 15 14 13
\end{center}
\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{ll}
First edition:                        & 3 June 2001 \\
Second impression, with corrections:    & 2 July 2001 \\
Second edition:                       & 14 July 2001 \\
Second impression, with corrections:    & 3 August 2001 \\
Third impression, with minor additions: & 31 August 2001 \\
Third edition:                        & 17 November 2001 \\
Fourth edition:                       & 16 March 2002 \\
Fifth edition:                        & 10 August 2002 \\
Sixth edition:                        & 31 January 2004 \\
%%Draft Seventh edition:                & 31 January 2008 \\
Seventh edition:                       & 10 May 2008 \\
Eighth impression, with very minor corrections: & 12 July 2008 \\
Ninth impression, with additions and corrections: & 8 July 2009 \\
Eighth edition:                        & August 2009 \\
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
\ifMASTER
Manual last changed \svnyear/\svnmonth/\svnday
\fi

\endgroup

\clearpage
\vspace*{\fill}
\begin{quote}
\textbf{memoir,} \textit{n.} a written record set down as material
  for a history or biography: 
  a biographical sketch:
  a record of some study investigated by the writer:
  (in \textit{pl.}) the transactions of a society.
  [Fr. \textit{m\'{e}moire} --- L. \textit{memoria,} memory ---
   \textit{memor}, mindful.] \\[0.5\baselineskip]
  \hspace*{\fill} 
      \textit{Chambers Twentieth Century Dictionary, New Edition}, 1972.
\end{quote}

\vspace{2\baselineskip}

\begin{quote}
\textbf{memoir,} \textit{n.} [Fr. \textit{m\'{e}moire,} masc., a memorandum,
    memoir, fem., memory $<$ L. \textit{memoria,} \textsc{memory}]
  \hspace{1ex} \textbf{1.} a biography or biographical notice, 
      usually written by a relative or personal friend of the subject 
  \hspace{1ex} \textbf{2.} [\textit{pl.}] an autobiography, 
      usually a full or highly personal account
  \hspace{1ex} \textbf{3.} [\textit{pl.}] a report or record of 
      important events based on the writer's personal observation, 
      special knowledge, etc.
  \hspace{1ex} \textbf{4.} a report or record of a scholarly 
      investigation, scientific study, etc.
  \hspace{1ex} \textbf{5.} [\textit{pl.}] the record of the proceedings
      of a learned society \\[0.5\baselineskip]
  \hspace*{\fill} \textit{Webster's New World Dictionary, Second College Edition}.
\end{quote}

\vspace{2\baselineskip}


\begin{quote}
\textbf{memoir,} \textit{n.} a fiction designed to flatter the subject 
  and to impress the reader. \\[0.5\baselineskip]
\hspace*{\fill} With apologies to Ambrose Bierce % and Reuben Thomas
\end{quote}

\vspace*{\fill}

\cleardoublepage

% ToC, etc
%%%\pagenumbering{roman}
\pagestyle{headings}
%%%%\pagestyle{Ruled}

\setupshorttoc
\tableofcontents
\clearpage
\setupparasubsecs
\setupmaintoc
\tableofcontents
\setlength{\unitlength}{1pt}
\clearpage
\listoffigures
\clearpage
\listoftables
\clearpage
\listofegresults

%#% extend


%#% extstart include preface.tex
%\chapter{Foreword}

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-04-24 17:14:15 +0200 (Wed, 24 Apr 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 442 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}

\chapter{Preface}

    From personal experience and also from lurking on the \url{comp.text.tex}
newsgroup the major problems with using LaTeX are related to document
design. Some years ago most questions on \texttt{ctt} were answered by
someone providing a piece of code that solved a particular problem, and
again and again. More recently these questions are answered along the
lines of `Use the ---------{} package', and again and again.

    I have used many of the more common of these packages but my filing system
is not always well ordered and I tend to mislay the various user manuals,
even for the packages I have written. The \Pclass{memoir} class is an attempt
to integrate some of the more design-related packages with the LaTeX
\Pclass{book} class. I chose the \Pclass{book} class as the \Pclass{report} class
is virtually identical to \Pclass{book}, except that \Pclass{book} does
not have an \Ie{abstract} environment while \Pclass{report} does; however it is 
easy to fake an \Ie{abstract} if it is needed. With a little bit of tweaking,
\Pclass{book} class documents can be made to look just like \Pclass{article}
class documents, and the \Pclass{memoir} class is designed with tweaking very
much in mind.

    The \Pclass{memoir} class effectively incorporates the facilties that
are usually accessed by using external packages. In most cases the class
code is new code reimplementing package functionalities. The exceptions
tend to be where I have cut and pasted code from some of my packages.
I could not have written the \Pclass{memoir} class without the excellent 
work presented by the implementors of LaTeX and its many packages.

    Apart from packages that I happen to have written I have gained many
ideas from the other packages listed in the \bibname. One way or another
their authors have all contributed, albeit unknowingly. 
The participants in the
\url{comp.text.tex} newsgroup have also provided valuable input, partly
by questioning how to do something in LaTeX, and partly by providing
answers. It is a friendly and educational forum.

{\raggedleft{\scshape Peter Wilson} \\ Seattle, WA \\ June 2001\par}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\begin{comment}
\chapter{Introduction to the first edition}

    This is not a guide to the general use of LaTeX but rather concentrates
on where the \index{class}\Lclass{memoir} class differs from the standard LaTeX
\Lclass{book} and \Lclass{report} classes. There are other sources that deal with LaTeX in 
general, some of which are listed in the \bibname. Lamport~\cite{LAMPORT94}
is of course the original user manual for LaTeX, while the Companion
series, for example~\cite{COMPANION}, go into further details and auxiliary
programs. The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN) is a valuable source
of free information and the LaTeX system itself. For general questions see
the FAQ~\cite{FAQ} which also has pointers to information sources. Among
these are \btitle{The Not So Short Introduction to LaTeX2e}~\cite{LSHORT},
Keith Reckdahl's \btitle{Using imported graphics in LaTeX2e}~\cite{EPSLATEX}
and Piet van Oostrum's \btitle{Page layout in LaTeX}~\cite{FANCYHDR}.
The question of how to use different fonts with LaTeX is left strictly alone;
Alan Hoenig's book~\cite{HOENIG98} is the best guide to this that I know of
although Philipp Lehman's \btitle{The Font Installation Guide}~\cite{FONTINST} 
has much information.


    The first part of the manual discusses briefly some aspects of book
design and typography, independently of the means of typesetting. Among
the several books on the subject listed in the \bibname{} I prefer
Bringhurst's \btitle{The Elements of Typographic Style}~\cite{BRINGHURST99}.
I have used the LaTeX \Lclass{book} design, which is the default
\Lclass{memoir} class style, in typesetting Part~\ref{part:art}.

    The second part then goes into some detail on how the \Lclass{memoir}
class can be used to implement a particular design.

    With two exceptions, the \Lclass{memoir} class has all the capabilities
of the standard LaTeX \Lclass{book} class. These exceptions are:
\begin{itemize}
\item The old LaTeX v2.09 font commands --- 
      \cmd{\rm} (roman), 
      \cmd{\tt} (\texttt{typewriter}), 
      \cmd{\sf} (\textsf{sans}),
      \cmd{\bf} (\textbf{bold}), 
      \cmd{\sl} (\textsl{slanted}), 
      \cmd{\it} (\textit{italic}),
      and \cmd{\sc} (\textsc{small caps}) ---
      are not supported and will give error messages if used.
 
      The \cmd{\em} (\emph{emphasis}) command is supported but gives 
a warning message if used.

\item There are no commands for making titles. This is because title pages are
      usually designed individually for each book. The 
     \index{package}\Lpack{titling}
      package~\cite{TITLING} can be used if you want the titling commands.
      The package
      provides extended titling facilities when compared to those in the
      standard LaTeX classes.

\end{itemize}
I hope that, apart from these, the class supports everything that the 
\Lclass{book} class provides.

    The major extra functions provided by the class include:
\begin{itemize}
\item Font sizes for the main text of 9, 10, 11, 12 and 14pt.
\item A reasonably intuitive means of setting the page, text and margin sizes.
\item Page trimming marks.
\item If really required, typesetting as though in the olden typewriter days
      (double spaced, raggedright, no hyphenation, typewriter font).
\item Configurable sectional headings, with several predefined styles for
      chapter headings and simple methods for defining new ones.
\item `Anonymous' section breaks (e.g., a blank or decorated line or two).
\item Configurable page headers and footers, with several predefined styles
      and simple methods for defining new ones.
\item Configurable captions, with several predefined captioning styles and
      methods for defining new ones.
\item Ability to define new `\listofx' and new floats with their accompanying
      captions and `\listofx'.
\item Control over whether the `\listofx', bibliography, index, etc., appear
      in the Table of Contents.
\item Support for epigraphs.
\end{itemize}
Also, along the way you will find other more minor but still useful things.

    As Part~\ref{part:practice} progresses I demonstrate some of the changes
that the \Lclass{memoir} class lets you easily make to the normal LaTeX
page and titling style.

\section{Type conventions}

    The following conventions are used in the manual:
\begin{itemize}
\item \Pclass{The names of LaTeX classes\index{class} and 
              packages\index{package} are typeset in this font,
             as are class and package options\index{option}.}
\item \Ppstyle{The names of chapterstyles\index{chapterstyle} and 
               pagestyles\index{pagestyle} are typeset in this font.}
\item \texttt{LaTeX code is typeset in this font.}
\end{itemize}

\section{Caveats}

    At the moment both this manual and the class code are in a beta state.
That is, they hopefully serve the purposes they are intended for, but 
it is probable that there are errors, poor explanations and missing
elements. So, be warned that I'm sure that there will be further releases
and these may not be entirely compatible with the current release.

    That said, I will be grateful for any constructive comments that 
anyone\footnote{I have received valuable comments from
Javier Bezos (\url{jbezos@wanadoo.es}), 
Sven Bovin (\url{sven.bovin@chem.kuleuven.ac.be}),
Scott Pakin (\url{pakin@uiuc.edu}),
and
Paul Stanley (\url{pstanley@essexcourt-chambers.co.uk}).}
may have, especially regarding errors, mispeaking, and desireable 
enhancements. I can be reached by posting to \url{comp.text.tex}.

    TeX was designed principally for typesetting documents containing a 
lot of mathematics. In such works the mathematics breaks up the flow
of the text on the page, and the vertical space required for displayed
mathematics is arbitrary. Most non-technical books are typeset on a fixed
grid as they do not have arbitrary insertions into the text.

    TeX is designed to handle arbitrary sized inserts in an elegant manner,
and does this by allowing vertical spaces to stretch and shrink a little
so that the actual height of the typeblock is constant. Therefore LaTeX, being
built on top of TeX, does not typeset on a fixed grid, and it would be a 
very major task to try and make it do so; this has been tried but as far as 
I know nobody has been successful. Experimental work, though, is still ongoing.

    The manual includes many unbreakable names of LaTeX commands,
some of which stick out into the margin. The way of getting rid of these
is to rewrite the text so that they don't come at the end of a typeset
line. This is tedious and I haven't done it because I expect the manual
to be revised and that would throw off any hand tweaking done now.


\chapter{Introduction to the second edition}

    Since the first edition of the manual was published the \Lclass{memoir}
class has undergone some changes and extensions. The changes, to remove
some unfortunate errors, are upwards compatible. The extensions, by 
their nature, are not upward compatible.

    The main extensions and changes include:
\begin{itemize}
\item A \index{option}\Lopt{subfigure} option to counteract an unfortunate 
      interplay\footnote{Discovered by Ignasi Furi\'{o} Caldentey 
      (\url{ignasi@ipc4.uib.es}).}
      if the \Lpack{subfigure} package is used with the class.

\item An \Lopt{article} option so that \Lclass{article} class typesetting
      may be simulated.

\item Incorporation of the essential code from the \Lpack{titling}
      package~\cite{TITLING} (to support the \Lopt{article} option).

\item Incorporation of the essential code from the \Lpack{abstract}
      package~\cite{ABSTRACT} (to support the \Lopt{article} option).

\end{itemize}

    The description of how to modify the \prtoc, \prlof{} and \prlot{} headings
in the first edition was completely wrong, as was the corresponding
description of the \cmd{\newlistof} macro. No noticeable
changes have been made to the class code but the descriptions now
reflect reality. I must have been a few bricks short of a full load when
I wrote the original.

    There are other more minor changes and extensions\footnote{With thanks
to, among others, Kevin Lin (\url{kevinlin@runtop.com.tw}) and
Adriano Pascoletti (\url{pascolet@dimi.uniud.it}).} 
which you may find if you recall the first edition.

    There was no mention of typesetting verse in the first edition,
although the class does provide the normal LaTeX \Ie{verse}
environment. A poem
is usually individually typeset as the appearance often has an
effect on the emotional response when reading it. The \Lpack{verse}
package~\cite{VERSE} may be useful when typesetting poetry.

\chapter{Introduction to the third edition}

    Since the second  edition of the manual was published the \Lclass{memoir}
class has been upgraded from beta code to a production release. Extensions
have been made to both the class and this manual.

    The main extensions and changes include:
\begin{itemize}
\item An \Lopt{openleft} option to enable chapters to start
      on verso pages.

\item Incorporation of the essential code from the \Lpack{verse}
      package~\cite{VERSE} for more flexibility when typesetting
      poetry.

\item Replacement of the macro called \cmd{\makepshook} by
      \cmd{\makepsmarks}. Note that this is a non-upward compatible
      change.

\item The first part of the manual has been reorganised and
      extended, principally
      by providing more typesetting examples.

\item As usual, minor glitches have been removed from both the code
      and the manual; each revision, of course, eliminates the gap between
      advertisement and reality.

\end{itemize}


    There are other more minor changes and extensions\footnote{With thanks
to, among others, Ignasi Furi\'{o} Caldentey (\url{ignasi@ipc4.uib.es}),
Daniel Richard G. (\url{skunk@mit.edu}) and
Vladimir G. Ivanovi\'c (\url{vladimir@acm.org}).} 
which you may find if you recall the second edition.

\chapter{Introduction to the fourth edition}

    Since the third edition of the manual was published the \Lclass{memoir}
class has been upgraded from version~1.0 to version~1.1. Modifications 
have been made to both the class and this manual.

    The main extensions and changes include:
\begin{itemize}
\item The \Lopt{subfigure} option is no longer required.

\item Subfloats have been added to the class. Steve Cochran kindly gave
      permission for me to use some of his \Lpack{subfigure} package
      code for this.

\item Some packages still use the old, deprecated LaTeX version~2.09
      font commands. I have reluctantly introduced an option
      to enable the old, deprecated font commands to be used.

\item The class now works harmoniously with the \Lpack{natbib}
      package~\cite{NATBIB}.

\item As usual, minor glitches have been removed from both the code
      and the manual; each revision hopefully eliminates the gap between
      advertisement and reality.

\end{itemize}


    There are other more minor changes and extensions\footnote{With thanks
to, among others, 
William Adams (\url{WillAdams@aol.com})
Ignasi Furi\'{o} Caldentey (\url{ignasi@ipc4.uib.es}),
Steven Douglas Cochran (\url{sdc+@cs.cmu.edu}),
Henrik Holm (\url{henrik@tele.ntnu.no}),
and Rolf Niepraschk (\url{niepraschk@ptb.de}).
}
which you may find if you have used earlier editions.

\chapter{Introduction to the fifth edition}

    Since the fourth edition of the manual was published the \Lclass{memoir}
class has been upgraded from version~1.1 to version~1.2. Modifications 
have been made to both the class and this manual.

    The main extensions and changes include:
\begin{itemize}
\item The size options have been extended\footnote{At the
      request of Vittorio De Martino whose children use LaTeX
      for their school projects.}
      to include a \Lopt{17pt} option.

\item A few font sizes corresponding to the font size commands (e.g., \verb?\Large?)
      have been changed to give regular steps between sizes.

\item Boxes that can break over pages and/or contain verbatim text.

\item Several ways of dealing with verbatim text, including footnotes
      that can contain verbatim text.

\item Some control over the typesetting of footnotes. Unfortunately
      this necessitated some changes in the methods for styling
      thanks notes.

\item Comment environments.

\item Convenient methods for file input and output.

\item Additional \verb?\provide...? commands.

\item The \Ie{description} environment has been modified to match
      the appearance of the standard environment. The original
      \Lclass{memoir} form is still available as the \Ie{blockdescription}
      environment.

\item A new optional argument has been added to the \cmd{\chapter} and 
      \cmd{\chapter*} commands for setting header texts.

\end{itemize}

     As usual, minor glitches have been removed from both the code
and the manual. Hopefully, new ones have not been introduced.

\chapter{Introduction to the sixth edition}

    Since the fifth edition of the manual was published the \Lclass{memoir}
class has been upgraded from version~1.2 to version~1.6. 
Many new functions have
been added to the class and this manual has been updated to reflect all
the additions.

    The main extensions and changes include:
\begin{itemize}

\item Major extensions for typesetting arrays and tabulars, including
      continuous tabulars and automatic tabulation.

\item Major extensions to footnote styles and the ability to have
      multiple series of footnotes.

\item Major extensions for indexing, including one column and multiple indexes.

\item Major extensions to crop marks. 

\item \verb?\tableofcontents? and friends can be used multiple times.

\item Section titles (as well as numbers) can be referenced.

\item Sheet numbers and access to the numbers of the last sheet and last page.

\item Various methods for formatting numbers.

\item Better cooperation with the \Lpack{chapterbib} and \Lpack{natbib} packages.

\end{itemize}

     There are many more minor additions.
     As usual, glitches have been removed from both the code
and the manual. Hopefully, new ones have not been introduced.


     Many people have contributed to the \Lclass{memoir} class and this manual
in the forms of code, solutions to problems, suggestions for new functions, 
bringing my attention to errors and infelicities in the code 
and manual, and last but not least in simply being encouraging. 
I am very grateful to the following for all they have done, whether they
knew it or not:
Paul Abrahams,
William Adams,
Donald Arseneau,
Jens Berger,
Karl Berry,
Javier Bezos,
Sven Bovin,
Alan Budden,
Ignasi Furi\'{o} Caldentey,
Ezequiel Mart\'{\i}n C\'{a}mara,
David Carlisle,
Steven Douglas Cochran,
Michael Downes,
Victor Eijkhout,
Danie Els,
Robin Fairbairns,
Simon Fear,
Kai von Fintel,
Daniel Richard G,
Romano Giannetti,
Kathryn Hargreaves,
Sven Hartrumpf,
Florence Henry,
Cartsten Heinz,
Peter Heslin,
Morton H\o{}gholm,
Henrik Holm,
Vladimir Ivanovich,
Stefan Kahrs,
J\o{}gen Larsen,
Kevin Lin,
Matthew Lovell,
Daniel Luecking,
Lars Madsen,
Vittorio De Martino,
Frank Mittelbach,
Rolf Niepraschk,
Patrik Nyman,
Heiko Oberdiek, 
Scott Pakin,
Adriano Pascoletti,
Bernd Raichle,
Robert,
Chris Rowley,
Doug Schenck,
Rainer Sch\"{o}pf,
Paul Stanley,
Reuben Thomas,
Bastiaan Niels Veelo,
Emanuele Vicentini,
J\"{u}rgen Vollmer,
and others.

If I have inadvertently left anyone off the list I apologise, 
and please let me know so that I can correct the omisssion.

    Of course, none of this would have been possible without Donald Knuth's
TeX system and the subsequent development of LaTeX by Leslie Lamport.

\end{comment}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\begin{comment}
\chapter{Introduction to the seventh edition}

    The \Lclass{memoir} class and this manual have seen many changes since
they first saw the light of day. The major functions, and extensions to
them, were listed in the various
introductions to the previous editions of this manual and it would now be 
tedious to read them.

    The \Mname\ class was first released in 2001 and since then
has proven to be reasonably popular. The class can be used as a replacement
for the \Lclass{book} and \Lclass{report} classes, by default generating
documents virtually indistinguisable from ones produced by those classes.
The class includes some options to produce documents with other appearances;
for example an \Lclass{article} class look or one that looks as though 
the document was
produced on a typewriter with a single font, double spacing, no hyphenation, 
and so on. In the following I use the term `standard class'\index{standard class} to denote
the \Lclass{book} and \Lclass{report} classes and, when appropriate, the
\Lclass{article} class as well.

    The \Mname\ class includes the functionality of many packages, for
instance the \Lpack{tocloft} package for controlling the table of contents or
methods similar to the \Lpack{fancyhdr} package for designing your own
headers. The built-in package functions are mainly related to document
design and layout; \Mname\ does not touch upon areas like those that are 
covered by the \Lpack{babel} or \Lpack{hyperref} packages or any related to 
typesetting mathematics. On the other hand it is easy to configure a work
produced with \Mname\ 
to meet a university's thesis layout requirements.

    \Mname\ has improved substantially since it was first released ---
over 50 \ltx ers have provided code or suggestions for improvements.
The class is included in the \TeXUG\ \tx\ distributions and the latest 
version of the class and its supporting documentation is always
available from %
\ctan\ at \url{latex/contrib/memoir}.

    This is not a guide to the general use of \ltx\ but rather concentrates
on where the \index{class}\Lclass{memoir} class differs from the standard \ltx\
\Lclass{book} and \Lclass{report} classes. There are other sources that deal 
with \ltx\ in general, some of which are noted later.
I assume that you have already used \ltx\ and therefore know how to prepare
a \ltx\ manuscript, how to run \ltx\ and print the resulting document,
and that you can also use auxiliary programs like \Lmakeindex\ 
and \Lbibtex.


\section{General considerations}

    The class is a large one consisting of about 10,000 lines of \ltx\ code
documented in a 400 page report; there is no need for most users to look at 
this~\cite{MEMCODE}. However if you want to see exactly how some part, 
or all of, \Mname\ is defined it is there for you to peruse.
The document you are now reading is the separate comprehensive 
User Manual~\cite{MEMMAN} which runs to about 500 pages, and from time to 
time an Addendum~\cite{MEMADD} is released noting extensions to the class.
Again, if you want to see how something was done in this Manual, which
of course was prepared using \Mname\ itself, the source
is available for you to read.
There is also the \Lpack{memexsupp} package by Lars Madsen~\cite{MEMEXSUPP} 
which provides some extra facilities for the class.


The first part of this Manual discusses some aspects of book design 
and typography in
general, something that I haven't come across in the usual \ltx\ books
and manuals. This is intended to provide a little background for when
you design your own printed documents.

    The second, and by far the longer part, describes the capabilities
of \Mname\ and how to use them. This manual is not a \ltx\ tutorial; I assume
that you already know the basics. If you don't then there are several 
free tutorials available. In some instances I show you the internal code
for the class which may involve \ltx\ commands that you won't come
across in the tutorials and also sometimes basic \tx\ commands. Information
on these, if you want it, is obtained from reading the \ltx\ source itself
and the \txbook, and perhaps one of the free \tx\ manuals such as
\btitle{TeX for the Impatient}~\cite{IMPATIENT} or 
\btitle{TeX by Topic}~\cite{TEXBYTOPIC}.

\section{Class options}

    The standard classes provide point options of 10, 11, or 12 points for the
main body font. \Mname\ extends this by also providing a 9 point option, and 
options ranging from 14 to 60 points.
The width of the text block is automatically adjusted according to 
the selected point size to try and keep within generally accepted 
typographical limits for line lengths; you can override this if you wish. 
The class also provides easy methods for specifying the 
page layout parameters such as the margins --- both the side margins and 
those at 
the top and bottom of the page; the methods are similar to those of the
\Lpack{geometry} package.

    The page layout facilities also include methods, like those provided
by the \Lpack{fancyhdr} package, for defining your own
header and footer styles, and you can have as many different ones as you wish.
In fact the class provides seven styles to choose from before having to
create your own if none of the built-in styles suit you. 

   Sometimes it is useful, or even required, to place trimming marks on
each page showing the desired size of the final page with respect to the sheet
of paper that is used in the printer. This is provided by the \Lopt{showtrims}
option. A variety of trim marks are provided and you can define your own 
if you need some other kind.

\section{Sectioning styles}

    Handles are provided for designing and using your own styles for chapter
titles and such. The class comes with over 20 predefined chapter styles ranging
from the default look to a style that mimics that used in the 
\emph{Companion} series of \ltx\ books. There are even a couple which use
words instead of numerals for chapter numbers.
% The Manual shows 
%examples of these styles and about 30 are shown in Lars 
%Madsen's collection~\cite{MEMCHAPS}.

   For those who like putting quotations near chapter titles the 
\Ie{epigraph} environment can be used.

    The options for changing \cs{section} and lower level titles
are more constrained, but generally speaking document design, unless for
advertisements or other eye-catching ephemera, should be constrained.
The class does provide 9 integrated sets of sectional heading styles instead
of the usual single set.

    Sometimes, but particularly in novels, a sectional division is indicated
by just leaving a blank line or two between a pair of paragraphs, or there 
might be some decorative item like three or four asterisks, or a fleuron
or two. (A \emph{fleuron}\index{fleuron} is a printers ornament looking 
like a leaf, such as \ding{166} or \ding{167}.) Commands
are available for typesetting such anonymous divisions.

   In the standard classes the sectioning commands have an optional argument
which can be used to put a short version of the section title into the 
table of contents and the page header. \Mname\ extends this with a second 
optional argument so you can specify one short version for the contents and 
an even shorter one for page headers where space is at a premium.

\section{Captions}

    \Mname\ incorporates the code from my \Lpack{ccaption} package which
lets you easily modify the appearance of figure and table captions; bilingual
captions are available if required, as are captions placed at the side of
a figure or table or continuation captions from, say, one illustration to
another. Captioning can also be applied
to `non-floating' illustrations or as legends (i.e., unnumbered captions) to
the regular floats. The captioning system
also supports subfigures and subtables along the lines of the \Lpack{subfig}
package, plus letting you define your own new kinds of floats together
with the corresponding `\listofx'. 

\section{Tables}

    Code from the \Lpack{array}, \Lpack{dcolumn}, \Lpack{delarray} and
\Lpack{tabularx} packges is integrated within the class. To improve
the appearance of rules in tabular material the \Lpack{booktabs}
package is also included.

    Multipage tabulations are often set with the \Lpack{longtable} or
\Lpack{xtab} packages, which can of course be used with the class. For
simple tabulations that may continue from one page to the next, \Mname\
offers a `continuous tabular' environment. This doesn't have all the 
flexibility provided by the packages but can often serve instead
of using them.

    More interestingly, but more limited, the class provides `automatic 
tabulars'. For these you provide a list of simple entries, like a set of names,
 and a number of
columns and the entries are automatically put into the appropriate column.
You choose whether the entries should be added row-by-row, like this with
the \cs{autorows} command:

\begin{lcode}
\autorows{c}{5}{l}{one, two, three, four,
    five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
    eleven, twelve, thirteen }
\end{lcode}

\showit{
{\centering
\begin{tabular}{lllll}
one & two & three & four & five \\
six & seven & eight & nine & ten \\
eleven & twelve & thirteen \\
\end{tabular} 
\par}
}

 Or if you use the \cs{autocols} command the entries are listed 
column-by-column, like this :

\begin{lcode}
\autocols{c}{5}{l}{one, two, three, four,
    five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
    eleven, twelve, thirteen }
\end{lcode}

\showit{
{\centering
\begin{tabular}{lllll}
one &    four & seven & ten & thirteen \\
two &    five & eight & eleven &  \\
three &  six  & nine  & twelve &  \\
\end{tabular} 
\par}
}

\section{Verse}

    The standard classes provide a very simple \Ie{verse} environment for
typesetting poetry. This is greatly extended in \Mname. For example in the
standard classes the verse stanzas are at a fixed indentation from the 
left margin whereas \Mname\ lets you control the amount of indentation so 
that you can make a poem appear optically centered within the textwidth.

    Stanzas may be numbered, as can individual lines within a poem. There is
a special environment for stanzas where lines are alternately indented. Also
you can define an indentation pattern for stanzas when this is not regular 
as, for example, in a limerick where the 3rd and 4th of the five lines are 
indented with respect to the other three as shown below. 

\begin{lcode}
\indentpattern{00110}
\begin{verse}
\begin{patverse}
There was a young man of Quebec \\
Who was frozen in snow to his neck. \\
When asked: `Are you friz?' \\
He replied: `Yes, I is, \\
But we don't call this cold in Quebec.'
\end{patverse}
\end{verse}
\end{lcode}

\showit{
\begin{verse}
There was a young man of Quebec \\
Who was frozen in snow to his neck. \\
\hspace*{2em}When asked: `Are you friz?' \\
\hspace*{2em}He replied: `Yes, I is, \\
But we don't call this cold in Quebec.'
\end{verse}
}

    It is not always possible to fit
a line into the available space and you can specify the particular indentation
to be used when a `logical' verse line spills over the available textwidth, 
thus forming two or more typeset `physical' lines. On other occasions
where there are two half lines the poet might want the second half line
to start where the first one finished, like this:

\begin{lcode}
\begin{verse}
Come away with me. \\
\vinphantom{Come away with me.} Impossible!
\end{verse}
\end{lcode}

\showit{
\begin{verse}
Come away with me. \\
\leavevmode\phantom{Come away with me.} Impossible!
\end{verse}
}


\section{End matter}

    Normally appendices come after the main body of a book. The class provides
various methods for introducing appendices at the end, or you can place one or 
more appendices at the end of selected chapters if that suits you better.

    \Mname\ also lets you have more than one index and an index can be set in 
either the normal double column style or as a single column which would be more
appropriate, say, for an index of first lines in a book of poetry. The titles
of any bibliography or indexes are added to the table of contents, but you
can prevent this if you wish.

    The class provides a set of tools for making glossaries or lists of 
symbols, the appearance of which can, of course, be easily altered. The 
\Lmakeindex\ program is used to sort the entries. 
%An example is
%shown in the current version of the Addendum. A recent addition
Also, the class provides configurable end notes which can be used as well as, 
or instead of, footnotes. 


\section{Miscellaneous}

%    As already noted, the Manual for \Mname\ runs to some 300 pages and it
%is impossible to cover everything in a short article. 
%Suffice it to say that 
Hooks and macros are provided for most aspects of document layout; 
for instance,
footnotes can be as normal, typeset in two or three columns, or all run 
into a single paragraph. There is a \cs{sidepar} macro which
is a non-floating \cs{marginpar} as well as the \cs{sidebar} macro for
typesetting sidebars in the margin, starting at the top of the text block. 
You can create new verbatim-like environments, read 
and write information in external files, design your own style of 
\cs{maketitle}, convert numbers to words, reserve space at the bottom of a 
page, and so on and so forth.


%% \appendix
\section{Packages}

    Most packages work with the \Mname\ class, the main exception being
the \Lpack{hyperref} package. This package modifies
many of the internals of the standard classes but does not cater for all of
the differences between \Mname\ and the standard ones. If you wish to use
\Lpack{hyperref} with \Mname\ then you must use the \Lpack{memhfixc}
package\footnote{\Lpack{memhfixc} is supplied as part of the \Mname\
distribution.} after using \Lpack{hyperref}. For example like:
\begin{lcode}
\documentclass[...]{memoir}
...
\usepackage[...]{hyperref}
\usepackage{memhfixc}
...
\begin{document}
\end{lcode}
However, if you have a version of \Lpack{hyperref} dated 2006/11/15 or after, 
\Lpack{hyperref}
will automatically call in \Lpack{memhfixc} so that you don't have to do 
anything.

The \Mname\ class includes code either equivalent to, or extensions of, the 
following packages; that is, the set of commands and environments is at least
the same as those in the packages: 
%\begin{itemize}%\item 
\begin{lineitems}
      \Lpack{abstract}
\item \Lpack{appendix}
\item \Lpack{array}
\item \Lpack{booktabs}
\item \Lpack{ccaption}
\item \Lpack{chngcntr}
\item \Lpack{chngpage}
\item \Lpack{dcolumn}
\item \Lpack{delarray}
\item \Lpack{enumerate}
\item \Lpack{epigraph}
\item \Lpack{framed}
\item \Lpack{ifmtarg}
\item \Lpack{ifpdf}
\item \Lpack{index}
\item \Lpack{makeidx}
\item \Lpack{moreverb}
\item \Lpack{needspace}
\item \Lpack{newfile}
\item \Lpack{nextpage}
\item \Lpack{parskip}
\item \Lpack{patchcmd}
\item \Lpack{setspace}
\item \Lpack{shortvrb}
\item \Lpack{showidx}
\item \Lpack{tabularx}
\item \Lpack{titleref}
\item \Lpack{titling}
\item \Lpack{tocbibind}
\item \Lpack{tocloft}
\item \Lpack{verbatim}
\item \Lpack{verse}.
\end{lineitems}
%\end{itemize}
The class automatically ignores any 
\verb?\usepackage? or \verb?\RequirePackage? related to these. However, if
you want to specifically use one of these packages rather than the integrated
version then you can do so. For arguments sake, assuming you really want 
to use the \Lpack{titling} the package you can do this:
\begin{lcode}
\documentclass[...]{memoir}
\DisemulatePackage{titling}
\usepackage{titling}
\end{lcode}

    The \Mname\ class incorporates a version of the \Lpack{setspace} package, 
albeit using different names for the macros. The package enables documents
to be set double spaced but leaves some document elements, 
like captions for example, single spaced. To do this it has to make some 
assumptions about how the document class works. I felt that this kind
of capability should be part of the class and not depend on assumptions.
In the particular case of the \Lpack{setspace} package, even with the
standard classes, there can be some unexpected spacing around displayed
material; this has not occured with \Mname's implementation. 

The class also provides functions similar to those provided by the following 
packages, although the commands are different: 
%\begin{itemize}%\item 
\begin{lineitems}%\item 
\Lpack{crop}
\item \Lpack{fancyhdr}
\item \Lpack{geometry}
\item \Lpack{sidecap}
\item \Lpack{subfigure}
\item \Lpack{titlesec}.
\end{lineitems}
%\end{itemize}
You can use these packages 
if you wish, or just use the capabilities of the \Mname\ class.


\section{Resources} \label{sec:resources}


    Scattered throughout
%, but mainly in Part~\ref{part:art},
are comments about aspects of book design and typography, in some cases
accompanied by examples of better and poorer practice. If you want more
authorative remarks there are several books on the subject listed in 
the \bibname;  I prefer
Bringhurst's \textit{The Elements of Typographic Style}~\cite{BRINGHURST99}.


    \ltx\ is based on the \tx\ program which was designed principally 
for typesetting documents containing a 
lot of mathematics. In such works the mathematics breaks up the flow
of the text on the page, and the vertical space required for displayed
mathematics is highly dependent on the mathematical particularities. 
Most non-technical books are typeset on a fixed
grid as they do not have arbitrary insertions into the text; it is these
kinds of publications that typographers are most comfortable talking about.

    There are other sources that deal with \ltx\ in 
general, some of which are listed in the \bibname. Lamport~\cite{LAMPORT94}
is of course the original user manual for \ltx, while the Companion
series~\cite{COMPANION,GCOMPANION,WCOMPANION} go into further 
details and auxiliary
programs. George Gr\"{a}tzer's \textit{Math into \ltx} is valuable if you
typeset a lot of mathematics with excellent coverage of the American
Mathematical Society's packages.

   The \cTeXan{} (\pixctan) is an invaluable source
of free information and of the \ltx\ system itself. For general questions see
the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions, and answers) maintained by
Robin Fairbairns~\cite{FAQ}, which also has pointers to many information 
sources. Among
these are \textit{The Not So Short Introduction to \ltxe}~\cite{LSHORT},
Keith Reckdahl's \textit{Using imported graphics in \ltxe}~\cite{EPSLATEX}
and Piet van Oostrum's \textit{Page layout in \ltx}~\cite{FANCYHDR}.
Peter Flynn's \textit{Formatting information}~\cite{FLYNN02} is unique 
in that it describes how to install a \ltx\ system and editors for 
writing your documents as well as how to use \ltx. There are a myriad
of packages and software tools freely available to enhance any \ltx\ system;
the great majority of these are listed in Graham Williams' magnificent 
on line searchable catalogue~\cite{CATALOGUE}, which also links directly
to \pixctan. This is just one of the services offered by the \TeXUG{} (\pixtug)
and information on how to access it is available 
at \url{http://www.tug.org}
which is the homepage for the \TeXUG.

    The most recent crops of messages on the \url{comp.text.tex}
newsgroup (\pixctt) show an increasing interest in using a wider range
of fonts with \ltx. This is a question that I have left alone.
Alan Hoenig's book~\cite{HOENIG98} is the best guide to this that I know of.
\pixctan\ hosts Philipp Lehman's font installation guide~\cite{FONTINST}; 
this is well worth looking at just as an example of fine typesetting.

    The source code for the \Lclass{memoir} class is, of course,
freely available from \pixctan\ if you wish to see exactly what it does
and how it does it.

    For a more interactive resource you can ask questions on the
\url{comp.text.tex} newsgroup. If you are a newcomer to \pixctt\
please read the FAQ~\cite{FAQ} before asking a question, and also read
a few day's worth of messages to check that your question hasn't just
been answered.

\end{comment}

%#% extend

%#% extstart include intro-8.tex

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-05-21 16:33:04 +0200 (Tue, 21 May 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 469 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}

\chapter{Introduction to the eighth edition}

    The \Lclass{memoir} class and this manual have seen many changes since
they first saw the light of day. The major functions, and extensions to
them, were listed in the various
introductions to the previous editions of this manual and it would now be 
tedious to read them.

    The \Mname\ class was first released in 2001 and since then
has proven to be reasonably popular. The class can be used as a replacement
for the \Lclass{book} and \Lclass{report} classes, by default generating
documents virtually indistinguisable from ones produced by those classes.
The class includes some options to produce documents with other appearances;
for example an \Lclass{article} class look or one that looks as though 
the document was
produced on a typewriter with a single font, double spacing, no hyphenation, 
and so on. In the following I use the term `standard class'\index{standard class} to denote
the \Lclass{book} and \Lclass{report} classes and, when appropriate, the
\Lclass{article} class as well.

    The \Mname\ class includes the functionality of many packages, for
instance the \Lpack{tocloft} package for controlling the table of contents or
methods similar to the \Lpack{fancyhdr} package for designing your own
headers. The built-in package functions are mainly related to document
design and layout; \Mname\ does not touch upon areas like those that are 
covered by the \Lpack{babel} or \Lpack{hyperref} packages or any related to 
typesetting mathematics. On the other hand it is easy to configure a work
produced with \Mname\ 
to meet a university's thesis layout requirements.

    \Mname\ has improved substantially since it was first released ---
over 50 \ltx ers have provided code or suggestions for improvements.
The class is included in the \TeXUG\ \tx\ distributions and the latest 
version of the class and its supporting documentation is always
available from %
\ctan\ at \url{latex/contrib/memoir}.

    This is not a guide to the general use of \ltx\ but rather concentrates
on where the \index{class}\Lclass{memoir} class differs from the standard \ltx\
\Lclass{book} and \Lclass{report} classes. There are other sources that deal 
with \ltx\ in general, some of which are noted later.
I assume that you have already used \ltx\ and therefore know how to prepare
a \ltx\ manuscript, how to run \ltx\ and print the resulting document,
and that you can also use auxiliary programs like \Lmakeindex\ 
and \Lbibtex.


\section{General considerations}

    The class is a large one consisting of about 10,000 lines of \ltx\ code
documented in a 400 page report; there is no need for most users to look at 
this~\cite{MEMCODE}. However if you want to see exactly how some part, 
or all of, \Mname\ is defined it is there for you to peruse.
The document you are now reading is the separate comprehensive 
User Manual~\cite{MEMMAN} which runs to about 500 pages, and from time to 
time an Addendum %\cite{MEMADD} 
is released noting extensions to the class.\footnote{Currently not in use.}
Again, if you want to see how something was done in this Manual, which
of course was prepared using \Mname\ itself, the source
is available for you to read.
% There is also the \Lpack{memexsupp} package by Lars Madsen~\cite{MEMEXSUPP} 
% which provides some extra facilities for the class.

    The previous editions of the Manual consisted of two parts. The first
discussing some aspects of book design and typography in
general, something that I hadn't come across in the usual \ltx\ books
and manuals. That was intended to provide a little background for when
you design your own printed documents. The second, and by far the longest
part, described the capabilities of \Mname\ and how to use them. 

    The Manual kept growing until it was approaching 700 pages and I decided
that it was better to put the original discussion on typography into a
separate document~\cite{MEMDESIGN}, which is independent of \Mname, and in this
edition concentrate on how to use \Mname. This has reduced the size of
this document, but it is still large.

This manual is not a \ltx\ tutorial; I assume
that you already know the basics. If you don't then there are several 
free tutorials available. In some instances I show you the internal code
for the class which may involve \ltx\ commands that you won't come
across in the tutorials and also sometimes basic \tx\ commands. Information
on these, if you want it, is obtained from reading the \ltx\ source itself
and the \txbook, and perhaps one of the free \tx\ manuals such as
\btitle{TeX for the Impatient}~\cite{IMPATIENT} or 
\btitle{TeX by Topic}~\cite{TEXBYTOPIC}.

\section{Class options}

    The standard classes provide point options of 10, 11, or 12 points for the
main body font. \Mname\ extends this by also providing a 9 point option, and 
options ranging from 14 to 60 points.
The width of the text block is automatically adjusted according to 
the selected point size to try and keep within generally accepted 
typographical limits for line lengths; you can override this if you wish. 
The class also provides easy methods for specifying the 
page layout parameters such as the margins --- both the side margins and 
those at 
the top and bottom of the page; the methods are similar to those of the
\Lpack{geometry} package.

    The page layout facilities also include methods, like those provided
by the \Lpack{fancyhdr} package, for defining your own
header and footer styles, and you can have as many different ones as you wish.
In fact the class provides seven styles to choose from before having to
create your own if none of the built-in styles suit you. 

   Sometimes it is useful, or even required, to place trimming marks on
each page showing the desired size of the final page with respect to the sheet
of paper that is used in the printer. This is provided by the \Lopt{showtrims}
option. A variety of trim marks are provided and you can define your own 
if you need some other kind.

\section{Sectioning styles}

    Handles are provided for designing and using your own styles for chapter
titles and such. The class comes with over 20 predefined chapter styles ranging
from the default look to a style that mimics that used in the 
\emph{Companion} series of \ltx\ books. There are even a couple which use
words instead of numerals for chapter numbers.
% The Manual shows 
%examples of these styles and about 30 are shown in Lars 
%Madsen's collection~\cite{MEMCHAPS}.

   For those who like putting quotations near chapter titles the 
\Ie{epigraph} environment can be used.

    The options for changing \cs{section} and lower level titles
are more constrained, but generally speaking document design, unless for
advertisements or other eye-catching ephemera, should be constrained.
The class does provide 9 integrated sets of sectional heading styles instead
of the usual single set.

    Sometimes, but particularly in novels, a sectional division is indicated
by just leaving a blank line or two between a pair of paragraphs, or there 
might be some decorative item like three or four asterisks, or a fleuron
or two. (A \emph{fleuron}\index{fleuron} is a printers ornament looking 
like a leaf, such as \ding{166} or \ding{167}.) Commands
are available for typesetting such anonymous divisions.

   In the standard classes the sectioning commands have an optional argument
which can be used to put a short version of the section title into the 
table of contents and the page header. \Mname\ extends this with a second 
optional argument so you can specify one short version for the contents and 
an even shorter one for page headers where space is at a premium.

\section{Captions}

    \Mname\ incorporates the code from my \Lpack{ccaption} package which
lets you easily modify the appearance of figure and table captions; bilingual
captions are available if required, as are captions placed at the side of
a figure or table or continuation captions from, say, one illustration to
another. Captioning can also be applied
to `non-floating' illustrations or as legends (i.e., unnumbered captions) to
the regular floats. The captioning system
also supports subfigures and subtables along the lines of the \Lpack{subfig}
package, plus letting you define your own new kinds of floats together
with the corresponding `\listofx'. 

\section{Tables}

    Code from the \Lpack{array}, \Lpack{dcolumn}, \Lpack{delarray} and
\Lpack{tabularx} packges is integrated within the class. To improve
the appearance of rules in tabular material the \Lpack{booktabs}
package is also included.

    Multipage tabulations are often set with the \Lpack{longtable} or
\Lpack{xtab} packages, which can of course be used with the class. For
simple tabulations that may continue from one page to the next, \Mname\
offers a `continuous tabular' environment. This doesn't have all the 
flexibility provided by the packages but can often serve instead
of using them.

    More interestingly, but more limited, the class provides `automatic 
tabulars'. For these you provide a list of simple entries, like a set of names,
 and a number of
columns and the entries are automatically put into the appropriate column.
You choose whether the entries should be added row-by-row, like this with
the \cs{autorows} command:

\begin{lcode}
\autorows{c}{5}{l}{one, two, three, four,
    five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
    eleven, twelve, thirteen }
\end{lcode}

\showit{
{\centering
\begin{tabular}{lllll}
one & two & three & four & five \\
six & seven & eight & nine & ten \\
eleven & twelve & thirteen \\
\end{tabular} 
\par}
}

 Or if you use the \cs{autocols} command the entries are listed 
column-by-column, like this :

\begin{lcode}
\autocols{c}{5}{l}{one, two, three, four,
    five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
    eleven, twelve, thirteen }
\end{lcode}

\showit{
{\centering
\begin{tabular}{lllll}
one &    four & seven & ten & thirteen \\
two &    five & eight & eleven &  \\
three &  six  & nine  & twelve &  \\
\end{tabular} 
\par}
}

\section{Verse}

    The standard classes provide a very simple \Ie{verse} environment for
typesetting poetry. This is greatly extended in \Mname. For example in the
standard classes the verse stanzas are at a fixed indentation from the 
left margin whereas \Mname\ lets you control the amount of indentation so 
that you can make a poem appear optically centered within the textwidth.

    Stanzas may be numbered, as can individual lines within a poem. There is
a special environment for stanzas where lines are alternately indented. Also
you can define an indentation pattern for stanzas when this is not regular 
as, for example, in a limerick where the 3rd and 4th of the five lines are 
indented with respect to the other three as shown below. 

\begin{lcode}
\indentpattern{00110}
\begin{verse}
\begin{patverse}
There was a young man of Quebec \\
Who was frozen in snow to his neck. \\
When asked: `Are you friz?' \\
He replied: `Yes, I is, \\
But we don't call this cold in Quebec.'
\end{patverse}
\end{verse}
\end{lcode}

\showit{
\begin{verse}
There was a young man of Quebec \\
Who was frozen in snow to his neck. \\
\hspace*{2em}When asked: `Are you friz?' \\
\hspace*{2em}He replied: `Yes, I is, \\
But we don't call this cold in Quebec.'
\end{verse}
}

    It is not always possible to fit
a line into the available space and you can specify the particular indentation
to be used when a `logical' verse line spills over the available textwidth, 
thus forming two or more typeset `physical' lines. On other occasions
where there are two half lines the poet might want the second half line
to start where the first one finished, like this:

\begin{lcode}
\begin{verse}
Come away with me. \\
\vinphantom{Come away with me.} Impossible!
\end{verse}
\end{lcode}

\showit{
\begin{verse}
Come away with me. \\
\leavevmode\phantom{Come away with me.} Impossible!
\end{verse}
}


\section{End matter}

    Normally appendices come after the main body of a book. The class provides
various methods for introducing appendices at the end, or you can place one or 
more appendices at the end of selected chapters if that suits you better.

    \Mname\ also lets you have more than one index and an index can be set in 
either the normal double column style or as a single column which would be more
appropriate, say, for an index of first lines in a book of poetry. The titles
of any bibliography or indexes are added to the table of contents, but you
can prevent this if you wish.

    The class provides a set of tools for making glossaries or lists of 
symbols, the appearance of which can, of course, be easily altered. The 
\Lmakeindex\ program is used to sort the entries. 
%An example is
%shown in the current version of the Addendum. A recent addition
Also, the class provides configurable end notes which can be used as well as, 
or instead of, footnotes. 


\section{Miscellaneous}

%    As already noted, the Manual for \Mname\ runs to some 300 pages and it
%is impossible to cover everything in a short article. 
%Suffice it to say that 
Hooks and macros are provided for most aspects of document layout; 
for instance,
footnotes can be as normal, typeset in two or three columns, or all run 
into a single paragraph. There is a \cs{sidepar} macro which
is a non-floating \cs{marginpar} as well as the \cs{sidebar} macro for
typesetting sidebars in the margin, starting at the top of the text block. 
You can create new verbatim-like environments, read 
and write information in external files, design your own style of 
\cs{maketitle}, convert numbers to words, reserve space at the bottom of a 
page, and so on and so forth.


%% \appendix
\section{Packages}

    Most packages work with the \Mname\ class, the main exception being
the \Lpack{hyperref} package. This package modifies
many of the internals of the standard classes but does not cater for all of
the differences between \Mname\ and the standard ones. If you wish to use
\Lpack{hyperref} with \Mname\ then you must use the \Lpack{memhfixc}
package\footnote{\Lpack{memhfixc} is supplied as part of the \Mname\
distribution.} after using \Lpack{hyperref}. For example like:
\begin{lcode}
\documentclass[...]{memoir}
...
\usepackage[...]{hyperref}
\usepackage{memhfixc}
...
\begin{document}
\end{lcode}
However, if you have a version of \Lpack{hyperref} dated 2006/11/15 or after, 
\Lpack{hyperref}
will automatically call in \Lpack{memhfixc} so that you don't have to do 
anything.

The \Mname\ class includes code either equivalent to, or extensions of, the 
following packages; that is, the set of commands and environments is at least
the same as those in the packages: 
%\begin{itemize}%\item 
\begin{lineitems}
      \Lpack{abstract}
\item \Lpack{appendix}
\item \Lpack{array}
\item \Lpack{booktabs}
\item \Lpack{ccaption}
\item \Lpack{chngcntr}
\item \Lpack{chngpage}
\item \Lpack{dcolumn}
\item \Lpack{delarray}
\item \Lpack{enumerate}
\item \Lpack{epigraph}
\item \Lpack{framed}
\item \Lpack{ifmtarg}
\item \Lpack{ifpdf}
\item \Lpack{index}
\item \Lpack{makeidx}
\item \Lpack{moreverb}
\item \Lpack{needspace}
\item \Lpack{newfile}
\item \Lpack{nextpage}
\item \Lpack{parskip}
\item \Lpack{patchcmd}
\item \Lpack{setspace}
\item \Lpack{shortvrb}
\item \Lpack{showidx}
\item \Lpack{tabularx}
\item \Lpack{titleref}
\item \Lpack{titling}
\item \Lpack{tocbibind}
\item \Lpack{tocloft}
\item \Lpack{verbatim}
\item \Lpack{verse}.
\end{lineitems}
%\end{itemize}
The class automatically ignores any 
\verb?\usepackage? or \verb?\RequirePackage? related to these. However, if
you want to specifically use one of these packages rather than the integrated
version then you can do so. For arguments sake, assuming you really want 
to use the \Lpack{titling} package you can do this:
\begin{lcode}
\documentclass[...]{memoir}
\DisemulatePackage{titling}
\usepackage{titling}
\end{lcode}

    The \Mname\ class incorporates a version of the \Lpack{setspace} package, 
albeit using different names for the macros. The package enables documents
to be set double spaced but leaves some document elements, 
like captions for example, single spaced. To do this it has to make some 
assumptions about how the document class works. I felt that this kind
of capability should be part of the class and not depend on assumptions.
In the particular case of the \Lpack{setspace} package, even with the
standard classes, there can be some unexpected spacing around displayed
material; this has not occured with \Mname's implementation. 

The class also provides functions similar to those provided by the following 
packages, although the commands are different: 
%\begin{itemize}%\item 
\begin{lineitems}%\item 
\Lpack{crop}
\item \Lpack{fancyhdr}
\item \Lpack{geometry}
\item \Lpack{sidecap}
\item \Lpack{subfigure}
\item \Lpack{titlesec}.
\end{lineitems}
%\end{itemize}
You can use these packages 
if you wish, or just use the capabilities of the \Mname\ class.

    The class has built in support for the \Lpack{bidi} package for 
bidirectional typesetting~\cite{BIDI}.


\section{Resources} \label{sec:resources}


    Scattered throughout
%, but mainly in Part~\ref{part:art},
are comments about aspects of book design and typography, in some cases
accompanied by examples of better and poorer practice. If you want more
comments and examples there are some notes on the topic~\cite{MEMDESIGN},
and for 
authorative remarks there are several books on the subject listed in 
the \bibname;  I prefer
Bringhurst's \textit{The Elements of Typographic Style}~\cite{BRINGHURST99},
while Derek Birdsall's \textit{notes on book design}~\cite{BIRDSALL04}
is much more oriented to illustrated works, like museum
catalogues and art books.


    \ltx\ is based on the \tx\ program which was designed principally 
for typesetting documents containing a 
lot of mathematics. In such works the mathematics breaks up the flow
of the text on the page, and the vertical space required for displayed
mathematics is highly dependent on the mathematical particularities. 
Most non-technical books are typeset on a fixed
grid as they do not have arbitrary insertions into the text; it is these
kinds of publications that typographers are most comfortable talking about.

    There are other sources that deal with \ltx\ in 
general, some of which are listed in the \bibname. Lamport~\cite{LAMPORT94}
is of course the original user manual for \ltx, while the Companion
series~\cite{COMPANION,GCOMPANION,WCOMPANION} go into further 
details and auxiliary
programs. George Gr\"{a}tzer's \textit{Math into \ltx} is valuable if you
typeset a lot of mathematics with excellent coverage of the American
Mathematical Society's packages.

   The \cTeXan{} (\pixctan) is an invaluable source
of free information and of the \ltx\ system itself. For general questions see
the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions, and answers) maintained by
Robin Fairbairns~\cite{FAQ}, which also has pointers to many information 
sources. Among
these are \textit{The Not So Short Introduction to \ltxe}~\cite{LSHORT},
Keith Reckdahl's \textit{Using imported graphics in \ltxe}~\cite{EPSLATEX}
and Piet van Oostrum's \textit{Page layout in \ltx}~\cite{FANCYHDR}.
Peter Flynn's \textit{Formatting information}~\cite{FLYNN02} is unique 
in that it describes how to install a \ltx\ system and editors for 
writing your documents as well as how to use \ltx. There are a myriad
of packages and software tools freely available to enhance any \ltx\ system;
the great majority of these are listed in Graham Williams' magnificent 
on line searchable catalogue~\cite{CATALOGUE}, which also links directly
to \pixctan. This is just one of the services offered by the \TeXUG{} (\pixtug)
and information on how to access it is available 
at \url{http://www.tug.org}
which is the homepage for the \TeXUG.

    The most recent crops of messages on the \url{comp.text.tex}
newsgroup (\pixctt) show an increasing interest in using a wider range
of fonts with \ltx. This is a question that I have left alone.
Alan Hoenig's book~\cite{HOENIG98} is the best guide to this that I know of.
\pixctan\ hosts Philipp Lehman's font installation guide~\cite{FONTINST}; 
this is well worth looking at just as an example of fine typesetting.

    The source code for the \Lclass{memoir} class is, of course,
freely available from \pixctan\ if you wish to see exactly what it does
and how it does it.

    For a more interactive resource you can ask questions on the
\url{comp.text.tex} newsgroup. If you are a newcomer to \pixctt\
please read the FAQ~\cite{FAQ} before asking a question, and also read
a few day's worth of messages to check that your question hasn't just
been answered.

\section{Type conventions}

    The following conventions are used:
\begin{itemize}
\item \Pclass{The names of \ltx\ classes\index{class} and 
              packages\index{package} are typeset in this font.}
\item \Popt{Class options\index{option} are typeset in this font.}
\item \Ppstyle{The names of chapterstyles\index{chapterstyle} and 
               pagestyles\index{pagestyle} are typeset in this font.}
\item \texttt{\ltx\ code is typeset in this font.}
\item \Pprog{The names of programs are in this font.}
\end{itemize}
\begin{syntax}
Macro command syntax is enclosed in a rectangular box.\\
For referential purposes, arguments are denoted by \meta{arg} \\
\end{syntax}




\section{Acknowledgements}

     Many people have contributed to the \Lclass{memoir} class and this manual
in the forms of code, solutions to problems, suggestions for new functions, 
bringing my attention to errors and infelicities in the code 
and manual, and last but not least in simply being encouraging. 
I am very grateful to the following for all they have done, whether they
knew it or not:
Paul Abrahams,      % code
William Adams,      % typography
Tim Arnold,         % among other things, \leavespergathering in general
Donald Arseneau,    % code
Stephan von Bechtolsheim,
Jens Berger,
Karl Berry,         % code
Ingo Beyritz,       % bug report (tabularx in subtable)
Javier Bezos,
Stefano Bianchi,    % chaptersytyle
Sven Bovin,
Alan Budden,
Ignasi Furi\'{o} Caldentey,
Ezequiel Mart\'{\i}n C\'{a}mara,
David Carlisle,     % code
Gustafo Cevolani, 
Jean-C{\^o}me Charpentier,   % memmanadd typo fix
Michael A. Cleverly,       % code
Steven Douglas Cochran,    % code
Frederic Connes,           % code
\v{Z}arko F. \v{C}u\v{c}ej, % bug report (contcaption & hyperref)
Christopher Culver,       % chapterstyle
Iain Dalton,              % typos
Michael W. Daniels,       % code
Michael Downes,           % code
Christopher Dutchyn,
Thomas Dye,               % code, typos
Victor Eijkhout,          % code
Roman Eisele,             % fix of \parnopar (2008/09/13)
Danie Els,                % code
Robin Fairbairns,         % code
Simon Fear,               % code
Ant\'{o}nio Ferreira,     % many typos (2008/08/29)
Kai von Fintel,
Ivars Finvers,            % bug report
Ulrike Fischer,           % general code ideas
Matthew Ford,
Musa Furber,
Daniel Richard G,
Ignacio Fern{\'a}ndez Galv{\'a}n,
Gerardo Garcia,          % chapterstyle
Romano Giannetti,        % code
Kheng-Swee Goh,          % manual typo `docotoral' should be `doctoral'
Donald Goodman,          % manual typo (1/2 title page should be in pagination)
Gabriel Guernik,         % bug report & suggested fix
Matthias Haldiman,       % bug report, fixed by Heiko
Kathryn Hargreaves,      % code
Sven Hartrumpf,
hazydirk,                % code
Carsten Heinz,           % code
Florence Henry,
Peter Heslin,
Timo Hoenig,             % thank you letter
Morten H{\o}gholm,       % code
Henrik Holm,
Vladimir G. Ivanovi\'c,
Martin J{\o}rgensen,     % bug report
Stefan Kahrs,
Christian Keil,          % typos
Marcus Kohm,             % algorithm
Flavian Lambert,         % float type bug
J\o{}gen Larsen,         % bug reports and fix
Kevin Lin,
Matthew Lovell,
Daniel Luecking,         % codef
Anders Lyhne,            % chapterstyle
Lars Hendrik Gam Madsen, % extra space in Part title in ToC
Lars~Madsen,             % code
Vittorio De Martino,
Ben McKay,               % errors in pagenote instructions
Frank~Mittelbach,        % code
Wilhelm M\"{u}ller,      % bugs & suggested extensions
Vilar~Camara~Neto,
Rolf Niepraschk,
Patrik Nyman,    
Heiko~Oberdiek,          % code
Scott~Pakin,
Adriano~Pascoletti,
Paul,                    % bug report
Ted Pavlic,              % typo report
Troels Pedersen,         % chapterstyle
Steve Peter,
Fran\c{c}ois Poulain,    % typo in Magellan's voyage title
Erik Quaeghebeur,        % bug report
Bernd Raichle,           % code
Martin Reinders,         % requested titleref extensions
Aaron Rendahl,           % bug report and fix
Ren{\'e},                % correction (paper folding)
Alan Ristow,             % request for \leavespergathering
Robert,
Chris Rowley,
Gary Ruben,              % bug report
Robert Schlicht,         % code
Doug Schenck,
Dirk Schlimm,
Arnaud Schmittbuhl,
Rainer Sch\"{o}pf,       % code
Paul Stanley,
Per Starb{\"a}ck,        % boxedverbatim in narrow text bug, documentation
James Szinger,           % code
Jens Taprogge,
Ajit Thakkar,            % reference to an appendix, typo
Scott Thatcher,          % chapterstyle
Reuben Thomas,
Bastiaan Niels Veelo,    % code
Guy Verville,            % chapterstyle
Emanuele Vicentini,
J{\"o}rg Vogt,           % suggestion re verse
J\"{u}rgen Vollmer,
M J Williams,            % \input in tabular bug
and 
David Wilson.




If I have inadvertently left anyone off the list I apologise, 
and please let me know so that I can correct the 
omisssion.% \footnote{Peter is currently occasionably reachable via email
% at \texttt{herries dot press (at) earthlink dot net}, otherwise write
% the maintainer at \texttt{daleif at imf dot au dot dk}}
\footnote{Please write the maintainer at \texttt{daleif at imf dot au
    dot dk}} Along those lines, if you have any questions you may
direct them to the \url{comp.text.tex} newsgroup or post them om
\url{http://tex.stackexchange.com} as you are likely to get a
satisfactory and timely response.

    Of course, none of this would have been possible without Donald Knuth's
\tx\ system and the subsequent development of \ltx\ by Leslie Lamport.

\PWnote{2009/07/26}{Added `Remarks to the user' chapter}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\chapter{Remarks to the user}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

    The \Lclass{memoir} class gives you many ways to change the appearance of your
document, and also provides some ready-made styles that might be
appropriate for your purposes.

    As you can see, this manual is not slim and attempts to describe in
some detail how the various aspects of \Lclass{memoir} work and gives
examples of how you can change these to better match your needs. However,
there are a myriad of different things that users might wish to do and
it is not possible either for the class to provide ready made simple, 
or even complex, methods to directly support these, or for this manual
to give examples of how everything might be accomplished.

    If many want a particular facility that is not available, then it 
may be possible to add that. If it is only one who wishes it then, unless
the one is the author, it is unlikely to be provided. But don't let this stop
you from asking, especially if you can provide the necessary code.

    The complete documented code for the class is available in the file
\file{memoir.dtx}. If you want to know how something is done then you
can read the code for \emph{all} the details. If you want to do something
different, then the code is there for you to look at and experiment with.
You should, though, not change any of the code in the class. If you need
to do so, then copy the code you wish to change into the document's preamble
or a package of your own or a class of your own (with a different name)
and make the changes there. Do not expect any help if you change the
\Lclass{memoir} class code directly.

\fancybreak{}

As the years go by support for \Lclass{memoir} will devolve from one
person to another.\footnote{This is currently (July 2009) happening as
  Lars Madsen is taking over from Peter Wilson.}  Therefore it is
probably safer to ask questions, complain, make suggestions, etc., on
a Q\&A site like \url{http:://tex.stackexchange.com} or on the the
newsgroup \url{comp.text.tex}, which is archived and read by many,
than correspond directly with the maintainer, who might well be away
for some considerable time and perhaps not notice your email after
having returned to base.

In either case please include the word \texttt{\theclass} in the
subject, and if possible, please \emph{tag} the question with the
\texttt{\theclass} tag.  That will help the memoir maintainer keep
track of memoir related matters.

\fancybreak{}

\textit{From the maintainer:} It seems that traffic on
\url{comp.text.tex} is less frequent. So most \theclass\ related
questions should go to \url{http:://tex.stackexchange.com}, please
remember to tag them properly, that really helps locating the
\theclass\ related questions. If no-one comes up with an answer, you
can also write me directly via \texttt{daleif (at) imf dot au dot dk}.



%#% extend
%#% extstart include terminology.tex

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-04-24 17:14:15 +0200 (Wed, 24 Apr 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 442 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\chapter{Terminology}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

    Like all professions and trades, typographers and printers have their
specialised vocabulary.

    First there is the question of pages, leaves and sheets. 
The trimmed sheets of paper\index{paper} that make up a book are called 
\emph{leaves}\index{leaf},
and I will call the untrimmed sheets the \emph{stock}\index{stock} material. 
A leaf
has two sides, and a \emph{page}\index{page} is one side of a leaf. 
If you think of a book
being opened flat, then you can see two leaves. The front of the righthand
leaf, is called the \emph{recto}\index{recto} page of that leaf, 
and the side of the
lefthand leaf that you see is called the \emph{verso}\index{verso} page 
of that leaf. 
So, a leaf has a recto and a verso page. Recto pages are the odd-numbered 
pages and verso pages are even-numbered.

   Then there is the question of folios. The typographical term for
the number of a page is \emph{folio}\index{folio}.
This is not to be confused with
the same term as used in `Shakespeare's First Folio' where the reference is
to the height and width of the book, nor to its use in the phrase
`\emph{folio} signature'\index{signature} where the term refers to the 
number of times a printed sheet is folded. 
Not every page in a book has a printed
folio, and there may be pages that do not have a folio at all. Pages with
folios, whether printed or not, form the \emph{pagination}\index{pagination} 
of the book. Pages
that are not counted in the pagination have no folios.

 I have not been able to find what I think is a good
definition for `type' as it seems to be used in different contexts with
different meanings. It appears to be a kind of generic word; for instance
there are type designers, type cutters, type setters, type foundries,...
For my purposes I propose that \emph{type}\index{type|seealso{typeface}} is 
one or more printable characters (or variations or extensions to this idea).  
Printers use the term \emph{sort}\index{sort} to refer to one piece of lead
type.

   A \emph{typeface}\index{typeface} is a set of one or more fonts, in one
or more sizes, designed as a stylistic whole. 

   A \emph{font}\index{font} is a set of characters. In the days of 
metal type and hot lead a font meant a complete alphabet and auxiliary
characters in a given size. More recently it is taken to mean a complete
set of characters regardless of size. A font of roman type normally
consists of CAPITAL LETTERS, \textsc{small capitals}, lowercase letters,
numbers, punctuation marks, ligatures (such as `fi' and `ffi'), and a
few special symbols like \&.

   A \emph{font family}\index{font!family} is a set of fonts designed to
work harmoniously together, such as a pair of roman and italic fonts.

   The size of a font\index{font} is expressed in points\index{point} 
(72.27 points equals 1 inch
equals 25.4 millimeters). The size is a rough indication of the height
of the tallest character, but different fonts with the same size may have
very different actual heights. Traditionally font sizes were referred to
by names (see \tref{tab:fontsizes}) but nowadays just the number of points 
is used.


\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Traditional font size designations} \label{tab:fontsizes}
\begin{tabular}{cl@{\hspace{2em}}cl} \toprule
Points & Name & Points & Name \\ \midrule
%%3      & Excelsior \\
\phantom{0}3      & Excelsior &
11     &  Small Pica \\
\phantom{0}3\rlap{\slashfrac{1}{2}} & Brilliant &
12     & Pica \\
\phantom{0}4      & Diamond &
14     & English \\
\phantom{0}5      & Pearl &
18     & Great Primer \\
\phantom{0}5\rlap{\slashfrac{1}{2}} & Agate &
24     & Double (or Two Line) Pica \\
\phantom{0}6      & Nonpareil &
28     & Double (or Two Line) English \\
\phantom{0}6\rlap{\slashfrac{1}{2}} & Mignonette &
36     & Double (or Two Line) Great Primer \\
\phantom{0}7      & Minion &
48     & French Canon (or Four Line Pica) \\
\phantom{0}8      & Brevier &
60     & Five Line Pica \\
\phantom{0}9      & Bourgeois &
72     & Six line Pica \\
10     & Long Primer &
%%16     & Columbian \\
%%20     & Paragon \\
%%22     & Double Small Pica \\
%%32     & Four Line Brevier \\
%%40     & Double Paragon \\
%%44     & Meridian \\
96     & Eight Line Pica \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}



    The typographers' and printers' term for the vertical space between
the lines of normal text is \emph{leading}\index{leading}, which is also
usually expressed in points and is usually larger than the font size.
A convention for describing the font and leading is to give the font size 
and leading separated by a slash; for instance $10/12$ for a
10pt font set with a 12pt leading, or $12/14$ for a 12pt font set with a
14pt leading.

    The normal length of a line of text is often called the 
\emph{measure}\index{measure} and is normally specified in terms of
picas\index{pica} where 1 pica equals 12 points (1pc = 12pt).

    Documents may be described as being typeset with a particular font
with a particular size and a particular leading on a particular measure;
this is normally given in a shorthand form. 
A 10pt font with 11pt leading on a 20pc measure is described as
\abyb{10/11}{20}, and \abyb{14/16}{22} describes a 14pt font
with 16pt leading set on a a 22pc measure.

\section{Units of measurement}

    Typographers and printers use a mixed system of units, some of which
we met above. The fundamental unit is the point; \tref{tab:units} lists 
the most common units employed.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Printers units} \label{tab:units}
\begin{tabular}{ll} \toprule
Name (abbreviation) & Value \\ \midrule
point (pt)\index{point}\index{pt}          &            \\
pica (pc)\index{pica}\index{pc}           & 1pc = 12pt \\
inch (in)\index{inch}\index{in}           & 1in = 72.27pt \\
centimetre (cm)\index{centimetre}\index{cm}     & 2.54cm = 1in \\
millimetre (mm)\index{millimetre}\index{mm}     & 10mm = 1cm \\ 
big point (bp)\index{big point}\index{bp}      & 72bp = 72.27pt \\
didot point (dd)\index{didot point}\index{dd}    & 1157dd = 1238pt \\
cicero (cc)\index{cicero}\index{cc}         & 1cc = 12dd \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

    Points\index{point} and picas\index{pica} 
are the traditional printers units used in English-speaking countries. 
The didot point\index{didot point} and cicero\index{cicero} are the 
corresponding units used in continental Europe. In Japan `kyus'\index{kyus}
(a quarter of a millimetre) may be used as the unit of measurement.
Inches\index{inch} and centimetres\index{centimetre} are the units that we
are all, or should be, familiar with.

    The point system was invented by Pierre Fournier le jeune in 1737 with
a length of 0.349mm. Later in the same century Fran\c{c}ois-Ambroise Didot
introduced his point system with a length of 0.3759mm. This is the value
still used in Europe. Much later, in 1886, the American Type Founders
Association settled on 0.013837in as the standard size for the point, and
the British followed in 1898. Conveniently for those who are not entirely
metric in their thinking this means that 
six picas are approximately equal to one inch.

    The big point\index{big point} 
is somewhat of an anomaly in that it is a recent
invention. It tends to be used
in page markup languages, like \pscript\footnote{\pscript{} is a 
registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.\label{fn:ps}},
in order to make calculations quicker and easier.

    The above units are all constant in value. There are also some units
whose value depends on the particular font\index{font} being used. 
The \textit{em}\index{em}
is the nominal height of the current font; it is used as a width measure.
An \textit{en}\index{en} is half an em.
The \textit{ex}\index{ex} is
nominally the height of the letter `x' in the current font. You may also
come across the term \textit{quad}\index{quad}, often as in a phrase
like `starts with a quad space'. It is a length defined in terms of
an em, often a quad is 1em.


%#% extend

\cleardoublepage
\pagenumbering{arabic}

% body
\mainmatter


%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%\part{Practice} \label{part:practice}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

%#% extstart include start-off.tex


\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-04-24 17:14:15 +0200 (Wed, 24 Apr 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 442 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}

\chapter{Starting off} \label{chap:starting}


    As usual, the \Lclass{memoir} class is called by 
\cmd{\documentclass}\oarg{options}\texttt{\{memoir\}}. The \meta{options}\index{class options}
include being able to select a paper\indextwo{paper}{size} size from among a range of sizes, 
selecting a type size, selecting the kind of manuscript, and some related
specifically to the typesetting of mathematics.

\section{Stock paper size options}

    The stock\indextwo{stock}{size} size is the size of a single sheet of the 
paper\index{paper} you expect to put through the printer. There is a range of 
stock\indextwo{stock}{size} paper sizes from which to make a selection. 
These are listed in\index{class options!stock size} \tref{tab:sizeoptsmetric} 
through \tref{tab:sizeoptsbrit}. Also 
included in the tables are commands that will set the stock size or paper size to 
the same dimensions.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Class stock metric paper size options, and commands}\label{tab:sizeoptsmetric}
\begin{tabular}{llll} \toprule
Option & Size & stock size command & page size command \\ \midrule
\Lopt{a6paper}\index{paper!size!A6}\index{stock!size!A6} 
   & \abybm{148}{105}{mm} & \cmd{\stockavi} & \cmd{\pageavi} \\
\Lopt{a5paper}\index{paper!size!A5}\index{stock!size!A5}
   & \abybm{210}{148}{mm} & \cmd{\stockav} & \cmd{\pageav} \\
\Lopt{a4paper}\index{paper!size!A4}\index{stock!size!A4} 
    & \abybm{297}{210}{mm} & \cmd{\stockaiv} & \cmd{\pageaiv} \\
\Lopt{a3paper}\index{paper!size!A3}\index{stock!size!A3}
    & \abybm{420}{297}{mm} & \cmd{\stockaiii} & \cmd{\pageaiii} \\
\Lopt{b6paper}\index{paper!size!B6}\index{stock!size!B6} 
   & \abybm{176}{125}{mm} & \cmd{\stockbvi} & \cmd{\pagebvi} \\
\Lopt{b5paper}\index{paper!size!B5}\index{stock!size!B5} 
   &  \abybm{250}{176}{mm} & \cmd{\stockbv} & \cmd{\pagebv} \\
\Lopt{b4paper}\index{paper!size!B4}\index{stock!size!B4} 
   & \abybm{353}{250}{mm} & \cmd{\stockbiv} & \cmd{\pagebiv} \\
\Lopt{b3paper}\index{paper!size!B3}\index{stock!size!B3} 
   & \abybm{500}{353}{mm} & \cmd{\stockbiii} & \cmd{\pagebiii} \\
\Lopt{mcrownvopaper}\index{paper!size!metric crown octavo}\index{stock!size!metric crown octavo}
   & \abybm{186}{123}{mm} & \cmd{\stockmetriccrownvo} & \cmd{\pagemetriccrownvo} \\
\Lopt{mlargecrownvopaper}\index{paper!size!metric large crown octavo}\index{stock!size!metric large crown octavo}
   & \abybm{198}{129}{mm} & \cmd{\stockmlargecrownvo} & \cmd{\pagemlargecrownvo} \\
\Lopt{mdemyvopaper}\index{paper!size!metric demy octavo}\index{stock!size!metric demy octavo}
   & \abybm{216}{138}{mm} & \cmd{\stockmdemyvo} & \cmd{\pagemdemyvo} \\
\Lopt{msmallroyalvopaper}\index{paper!size!metric small royal octavo}\index{stock!size!metric small royal octavo}
   & \abybm{234}{156}{mm} & \cmd{\stockmsmallroyalvo} & \cmd{\pagemsmallroyalvo} \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\glossary(a6paperco)%
  {\Popt{a6paper}}%
  {Class option for A6 stock paper size.}%
\glossary(a5paperco)%
  {\Popt{a5paper}}%
  {Class option for A5 stock paper size.}%
\glossary(a4paperco)%
  {\Popt{a4paper}}%
  {Class option for A4 stock paper size.}%
\glossary(a3paperco)%
  {\Popt{a3paper}}%
  {Class option for A3 stock paper size.}%
\glossary(b6paperco)%
  {\Popt{b6paper}}%
  {Class option for B6 stock paper size.}%
\glossary(b5paperco)%
  {\Popt{b5paper}}%
  {Class option for B5 stock paper size.}%
\glossary(b4paperco)%
  {\Popt{b4paper}}%
  {Class option for B4 stock paper size.}%
\glossary(b3paperco)%
  {\Popt{b3paper}}%
  {Class option for B3 stock paper size.}%
\glossary(mcrownvopaperco)%
  {\Popt{mcrownvopaper}}%
  {Class option for metric crown octavo stock paper size.}%
\glossary(mlargecrownvopaperco)%
  {\Popt{mlargecrownvopaper}}%
  {Class option for metric large crown octavo stock paper size.}%
\glossary(mdemyvopaperco)%
  {\Popt{mdemyvopaper}}%
  {Class option for metric demy octavo stock paper size.}%
\glossary(msmallroyalvopaperco)%
  {\Popt{msmallroyalvopaper}}%
  {Class option for metric small royal octavo stock paper size.}%
\end{table}





\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Class stock US paper size options, and commands}\label{tab:sizeoptsus}
\begin{tabular}{llll} \toprule
Option & Size & stock size command & page size command \\ \midrule
\Lopt{dbillpaper}\index{paper!size!dollar bill}\index{stock!size!dollar bill} 
   & \abybm{7}{3}{in} & \cmd{\stockdbill} & \cmd{\pagedbill} \\
\Lopt{statementpaper}\index{paper!size!statement}\index{stock!size!statement} 
   & \abybm{8.5}{5.5}{in} & \cmd{\stockstatement} & \cmd{\pagestatement} \\
\Lopt{executivepaper}\index{paper!size!executive}\index{stock!size!executive} 
   & \abybm{10.5}{7.25}{in} & \cmd{\stockexecutive} & \cmd{\pageexecutive} \\
\Lopt{letterpaper}\index{paper!size!letterpaper}\index{stock!size!letterpaper} 
   & \abybm{11}{8.5}{in} & \cmd{\stockletter} & \cmd{\pageletter} \\
\Lopt{oldpaper}\index{paper!size!old}\index{stock!size!old} 
   & \abybm{12}{9}{in} & \cmd{\stockold} & \cmd{\pageold} \\
\Lopt{legalpaper}\index{paper!size!legal}\index{stock!size!legal} 
   & \abybm{14}{8.5}{in} & \cmd{\stocklegal} & \cmd{\pagelegal} \\
\Lopt{ledgerpaper}\index{paper!size!ledger}\index{stock!size!ledger} 
   & \abybm{17}{11}{in} & \cmd{\stockledger} & \cmd{\pageledger} \\
\Lopt{broadsheetpaper}\index{paper!size!broadsheet}\index{stock!size!broadsheet} 
   & \abybm{22}{17}{in} & \cmd{\stockbroadsheet} & \cmd{\pagebroadsheet} \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\glossary(dbillpaperco)%
  {\Popt{dbillpaper}}%
  {Class option for dollar bill stock paper size.}%
\glossary(statementpaperco)%
  {\Popt{statementpaper}}%
  {Class option for statement stock paper size.}%
\glossary(executivepaperco)%
  {\Popt{executivepaper}}%
  {Class option for executive-paper stock paper size.}%
\glossary(letterpaperco)%
  {\Popt{letterpaper}}%
  {Class option for letterpaper stock paper size.}%
\glossary(oldpaperco)%
  {\Popt{oldpaper}}%
  {Class option for old stock paper size.}%
\glossary(legalpaperco)%
  {\Popt{legalpaper}}%
  {Class option for legal-paper stock paper size.}%
\glossary(ledgerpaperco)%
  {\Popt{ledgerpaper}}%
  {Class option for ledger stock paper size.}%
\glossary(broadsheetpaperco)%
  {\Popt{broadsheetpaper}}%
  {Class option for broadsheet stock paper size.}%
\end{table}


\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Class stock British paper size options, and commands}\label{tab:sizeoptsbrit}
\begin{tabular}{llll} \toprule
Option & Size & stock size command & page size command \\ \midrule
\Lopt{pottvopaper}\index{paper!size!pott octavo}\index{stock!size!pott octavo} 
   & \abybm{6.25}{4}{in} & \cmd{\stockpottvo} & \cmd{\pagepottvo} \\
\Lopt{foolscapvopaper}\index{paper!size!foolscap octavo}\index{stock!size!foolscap octavo} 
   & \abybm{6.75}{4.25}{in} & \cmd{\stockfoolscapvo} & \cmd{\pagefoolscapvo} \\
\Lopt{crownvopaper}\index{paper!size!crown octavo}\index{stock!size!crown octavo} 
   & \abybm{7.5}{5}{in} & \cmd{\stockcrownvo} & \cmd{\pagecrownvo} \\
\Lopt{postvopaper}\index{paper!size!post octavo}\index{stock!size!post octavo} 
   & \abybm{8}{5}{in} & \cmd{\stockpostvo} & \cmd{\pagepostvo} \\
\Lopt{largecrownvopaper}\index{paper!size!large crown octavo}\index{stock!size!large crown octavo} 
   & \abybm{8}{5.25}{in} & \cmd{\stocklargecrownvo} & \cmd{\pagelargecrown
vo} \\
\Lopt{largepostvopaper}\index{paper!size!large post octavo}\index{stock!size!large post octavo} 
   & \abybm{8.25}{5.25}{in} & \cmd{\stocklargepostvo} & \cmd{\pagelargepostvo} \\
\Lopt{smalldemyvopaper}\index{paper!size!small demy octavo}\index{stock!size!small demy octavo} 
   & \abybm{8.5}{5.675}{in} & \cmd{\stocksmalldemyvo} & \cmd{\pagesmalldemyvo} \\
\Lopt{demyvopaper}\index{paper!size!demy octavo}\index{stock!size!demy octavo} 
   & \abybm{8.75}{5.675}{in} & \cmd{\stockdemyvo} & \cmd{\pagedemyvo} \\
\Lopt{mediumvopaper}\index{paper!size!medium octavo}\index{stock!size!medium octavo} 
   & \abybm{9}{5.75}{in} & \cmd{\stockmediumvo} & \cmd{\pagemediumvo} \\
\Lopt{smallroyalvopaper}\index{paper!size!small royal octavo}\index{stock!size!small royal octavo} 
   & \abybm{9.25}{6.175}{in} & \cmd{\stocksmallroyalvo} & \cmd{\pagesmallroyalvo} \\
\Lopt{royalvopaper}\index{paper!size!royal octavo}\index{stock!size!royal octavo} 
   & \abybm{10}{6.25}{in} & \cmd{\stockroyalvo} & \cmd{\pageroyalvo} \\
\Lopt{superroyalvopaper}\index{paper!size!super royal octavo}\index{stock!size!super royal octavo} 
   & \abybm{10.25}{6.75}{in} & \cmd{\stocksuperroyalvo} & \cmd{\pagesuperroyalvo} \\
\Lopt{imperialvopaper}\index{paper!size!imperial octavo}\index{stock!size!imperial octavo} 
   & \abybm{11}{7.5}{in} & \cmd{\stockimperialvo} & \cmd{\pageimperialvo} \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\glossary(pottvopaperco)%
  {\Popt{pottvopaper}}%
  {Class option for pott octavo stock paper size.}%
\glossary(foolscapvopaperco)%
  {\Popt{foolscapvopaper}}%
  {Class option for foolscap octavo stock paper size.}%
\glossary(crownvopaperco)%
  {\Popt{crownvopaper}}%
  {Class option for crown octavo stock paper size.}%
\glossary(postvopaperco)%
  {\Popt{postvopaper}}%
  {Class option for post octavo stock paper size.}%
\glossary(largecrownvopaperco)%
  {\Popt{largecrownvopaper}}%
  {Class option for large crown octavo stock paper size.}%
\glossary(largepostvopaperco)%
  {\Popt{largepostvopaper}}%
  {Class option for large post octavo stock paper size.}%
\glossary(smalldemyvopaperco)%
  {\Popt{smalldemyvopaper}}%
  {Class option for small demy octavo stock paper size.}%
\glossary(demyvopaperco)%
  {\Popt{demyvopaper}}%
  {Class option for demy octavo stock paper size.}%
\glossary(mediumvopaperco)%
  {\Popt{mediumvopaper}}%
  {Class option for medium octavo stock paper size.}%
\glossary(smallroyalvopaperco)%
  {\Popt{smallroyalvopaper}}%
  {Class option for small royal octavo stock paper size.}%
\glossary(royalvopaperco)%
  {\Popt{royalvopaper}}%
  {Class option for royal octavo stock paper size.}%
\glossary(superroyalvopaperco)%
  {\Popt{superroyalvopaper}}%
  {Class option for super royal octavo stock paper size.}%
\glossary(imperialvopaperco)%
  {\Popt{imperialvopaper}}%
  {Class option for imperial octavo stock paper size.}%
\end{table}


There are two options that don't really fit into the tables.

\begin{itemize}
\item[\Lopt{ebook}]\index{stock!size!ebook}  
     for a stock size of \abybm{6}{9}{inches}, principally
                    for `electronic books' intended to be displayed
                    on a computer monitor
\glossary(ebookco)%
  {\Popt{ebook}}%
  {Class option for elecronic book stock size.}
\item[\Lopt{landscape}] to interchange the height and width of the stock.
\glossary(landscapeco)%
  {\Popt{landscape}}%
  {Class option to interchange height and width of stock paper size.}
\end{itemize}

    All the options, except for \Lopt{landscape}, are mutually exclusive.
The default stock\indextwo{stock}{default} paper\indextwo{paper}{size} size is 
\Lopt{letterpaper}\index{paper!size!letterpaper}\index{stock!size!letterpaper}.

   If you want to use a stock size that is not listed there are methods for doing this,
which will be described later.

\section{Type size options}

    The type size option sets the default font size throughout the document. The class 
offers a wider range of type sizes\index{type size} than usual. These are:\index{class options!type size}
\begin{itemize}
\item[\Lopt{9pt}] for 9pt as the normal type size
\glossary(9ptco)%
  {\Popt{9pt}}%
  {Class option for a 9pt body font.}
\item[\Lopt{10pt}] for 10pt as the normal type size
\glossary(10ptco)%
  {\Popt{10pt}}%
  {Class option for a 10pt body font.}
\item[\Lopt{11pt}] for 11pt as the normal type size
\glossary(11ptco)%
  {\Popt{11pt}}%
  {Class option for a 11pt body font.}
\item[\Lopt{12pt}] for 12pt as the normal type size
\glossary(12ptco)%
  {\Popt{12pt}}%
  {Class option for a 12pt body font.}
\item[\Lopt{14pt}] for 14pt as the normal type size
\glossary(14ptco)%
  {\Popt{14pt}}%
  {Class option for a 14pt body font.}
\item[\Lopt{17pt}] for 17pt as the normal type size
\glossary(17ptco)%
  {\Popt{17pt}}%
  {Class option for a 17pt body font.}
\item[\Lopt{20pt}] for 20pt as the normal type size
\glossary(20ptco)%
  {\Popt{20pt}}%
  {Class option for a 20pt body font.}
\item[\Lopt{25pt}] for 25pt as the normal type size
\glossary(25ptco)%
  {\Popt{25pt}}%
  {Class option for a 25pt body font.}
\item[\Lopt{30pt}] for 30pt as the normal type size
\glossary(30ptco)%
  {\Popt{30pt}}%
  {Class option for a 30pt body font.}
\item[\Lopt{36pt}] for 36pt as the normal type size
\glossary(36ptco)%
  {\Popt{36pt}}%
  {Class option for a 36pt body font.}
\item[\Lopt{48pt}] for 48pt as the normal type size
\glossary(48ptco)%
  {\Popt{48pt}}%
  {Class option for a 48pt body font.}
\item[\Lopt{60pt}] for 60pt as the normal type size
\glossary(60ptco)%
  {\Popt{60pt}}%
  {Class option for a 60pt body font.}
\item[\Lopt{*pt}] for an author-defined size as the normal type size
\glossary(*ptco)%
  {\Popt{*pt}}%
  {Class option for an author-defined size for the body font.}
\item[\Lopt{extrafontsizes}] Using scalable fonts that can exceed 25pt.
\glossary(extrafontsizes)%
  {\Popt{extrafontsizes}}%
  {Class option for using scalable fonts that can exceed 25pt.}
\end{itemize}

    These options, except for \Lopt{extrafontsizes}, are mutually exclusive.
The default type size\indextwo{default}{type size} is \Lopt{10pt}.

    Options greater than \Lopt{17pt} or \Lopt{20pt} are of little use unless
you are using scalable fonts --- the regular Computer 
Modern\facesubseeidx{Computer Modern} bitmap fonts only go up
to 25pt. The option \Lopt{extrafontsizes} indicates that you will be using
scalable fonts that can exceed 25pt. By default this option makes 
Latin Modern in the \texttt{T1} encoding as the default font (normally
Computer Modern in the \texttt{OT1} encoding is the default).

\subsection{Extended font sizes}

    By default, if you use the \Lopt{extrafontsizes} option the default
font for the document is Latin Modern\facesubseeidx{Latin Modern} 
in the \texttt{T1} font encoding.
This is like putting 
\begin{lcode}
\usepackage{lmodern}\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\end{lcode}
in the documents's preamble (but with the \Lopt{extrafontsizes} option
you need not do this). 

\begin{syntax}
\verb?\newcommand*{\memfontfamily}?\marg{fontfamily} \\
\verb?\newcommand*{\memfontenc}?\marg{fontencoding} \\
\verb?\newcommand*{\memfontpack}?\marg{package} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(memfontfamily)%
  {\cs{memfontfamily}}%
  {Font family for the \Popt{extrafontsizes} class option (default \texttt{lmr})}
\glossary(memfontenc)%
  {\cs{memfontenc}}%
  {Font encoding for the \Popt{extrafontsizes} class option (default \texttt{T1})}
\glossary(memfontpack)%
  {\cs{memfontpack}}%
  {Font package for the \Popt{extrafontsizes} class option (default \texttt{lmodern})}
Internally the class uses \cmd{\memfontfamily} and \cmd{\memfontenc} as 
specifying
the new font and encoding, and uses \cmd{\memfontpack} as the name of the
package to be used to implement the font. The internal definitions are:
\begin{lcode}
\providecommand*{\memfontfamily}{lmr}
\providecommand*{\memfontenc}{T1}
\providecommand*{\memfontpack}{lmodern}
\end{lcode}
which result in the \texttt{lmr} font 
(Latin Modern)\facesubseeidx{Latin Modern}  in the \texttt{T1} 
encoding as the default font, which is implemented by the \Lpack{lmodern}
package. If you want a different default, say 
New Century Schoolbook\facesubseeidx{New Century Schoolbook}
(which comes in the \texttt{T1} encoding), then 
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\memfontfamily}{pnc}
\newcommand*{\memfontpack}{newcent}
\documentclass[...]{memoir}
\end{lcode}
will do the trick, where the \cs{newcommand*}s are put \emph{before} the 
\cs{documentclass} declaration (they will then override the \cs{provide...}
definitions within the class code).

    If you use the \Lopt{*pt} option then you have to supply a \file{clo}
file containing all the size and space specifications for your chosen font 
size, and also tell \Mname\ the name of the file. \emph{Before} the 
\cmd{\documentclass} command define two macros, \cmd{\anyptfilebase} and
\cmd{\anyptsize} like: \\
\verb?\newcommand*{\anyptfilebase}?\marg{chars}
\verb?\newcommand*{\anyptsize}?\marg{num} \\
\glossary(anyptsize)%
  {\cs{anyptsize}}%
  {Second part (the pointsize) of the name the \texttt{clo} file for the
   \Popt{*pt} class option (default \texttt{10}).}
\glossary(anyptfilebase)%
  {\cs{anyptfilebase}}%
  {First part of the name of the \texttt{clo} file  for the 
   \Popt{*pt} class option (default \texttt{mem}).}
  
When it comes time to get the font size and spacing information \Mname\
will try and input a file called \verb?\anyptfilebase\anyptsize.clo? which
you should have made available; the \cmd{\anyptsize} \meta{num} must be an
integer.\footnote{If it is not an integer then \tx\ could get confused
as to the name of the file --- it normally expects there to be only one
period (.) in the name of a file.} Internally, the class specifies
\begin{lcode}
\providecommand*{\anyptfilebase}{mem}
\providecommand*{\anyptsize}{10}
\end{lcode}
which names the default as \file{mem10.clo}, which is for a 10pt font. 
If, for example, you have an 18pt font you want to use, then
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\anyptfilebase}{myfont}
\newcommand*{\anyptsize}{18}
\documentclass[...*pt...]{memoir}
\end{lcode}
will cause \ltx\  to try and input the \texttt{myfont18.clo} file that
you should have provided. Use one
of the supplied \file{clo} files, such as \file{mem10.clo} or \file{mem60.clo}
as an example of what must be specified in your \file{clo} file.

\section{Printing options}

    This group of options\index{class options!printing} includes:

\begin{itemize}
\item[\Lopt{twoside}] for when the document will be published with printing
                        on both sides of the paper.
\glossary(twosideco)%
  {\Popt{twoside}}%
  {Class option for text on both sides of the paper.}
\item[\Lopt{oneside}] for when the document will be published with only
                        one side of each sheet being printed on.
\glossary(onesideco)%
  {\Popt{oneside}}%
  {Class option for text on only one side of the paper.}

                        The \Lopt{twoside} and \Lopt{oneside} options
                        are mutually exclusive.

\item[\Lopt{onecolumn}] only one column\index{column!single} of text on a page.
\glossary(onecolumnco)%
  {\Popt{onecolumn}}%
  {Class option for a single column.}
\item[\Lopt{twocolumn}] two equal width columns\index{column!double} of text on a page.
\glossary(twocolumnco)%
  {\Popt{twocolumn}}%
  {Class option for two columns.}

                        The \Lopt{onecolumn} and \Lopt{twocolumn} options
                        are mutually exclusive.

\item[\Lopt{openright}] each chapter\index{chapter} will start on a recto page.
\glossary(openrightco)%
  {\Popt{openright}}%
  {Class option for chapters to start on recto pages.}
\item[\Lopt{openleft}] each chapter\index{chapter} will start on a verso page.
\glossary(openleftco)%
  {\Popt{openleft}}%
  {Class option for chapters to start on verso pages.}
\item[\Lopt{openany}] a chapter\index{chapter} may start on either a recto or verso page.
\glossary(openanyco)%
  {\Popt{openany}}%
  {Class option for chapters to start on a recto or a verso page.}

                        The \Lopt{openright}, \Lopt{openleft} and 
                        \Lopt{openany} options
                        are mutually exclusive.

\item[\Lopt{final}] for camera-ready copy of your labours.
\glossary(finalco)%
  {\Popt{final}}%
  {Class option for final document.}
\item[\Lopt{draft}] this marks overfull lines with black bars and enables
                      some change marking to be shown. There may be other 
                      effects as well, particularly if some packages are used.
\glossary(draftco)%
  {\Popt{draft}}%
  {Class option for draft document.}
\item[\Lopt{ms}] this tries to make the document look as though it was 
                   prepared on a typewriter. Some publishers prefer to receive
                   poor looking submissions.
\glossary(msco)%
  {\Popt{ms}}%
  {Class option for `typewritten manuscript'.}

                   The \Lopt{final}, \Lopt{draft} and \Lopt{ms} options
                   are mutually exclusive.

\item[\Lopt{showtrims}] this option prints marks at the corners of the 
                   sheet so that you can see where the stock\index{stock} 
                   must be trimmed to produce the final page size.
\glossary(showtrimsco)%
  {\Popt{showtrims}}%
  {Class option for printing trimming marks.}

\end{itemize}

    The defaults among the printing options\index{default!printing options} 
are \Lopt{twoside}, \Lopt{onecolumn}, \Lopt{openright}, and \Lopt{final}.

\section{Other options}

    The remaining options are:
\begin{itemize}

\item[\Lopt{leqno}]\index{class options!math} 
     equations will be numbered at the left (the default is
     to number them at the right).
\glossary(leqnoco)%
  {\Popt{leqno}}%
  {Class option for numbering equations at the left.}

\item[\Lopt{fleqn}]\index{class options!math} 
     displayed math environments will be indented an amount
     \cmd{\mathindent} from the left margin\index{margin} (the default is to
     center the environments).
\glossary(fleqnco)%
  {\Popt{fleqn}}%
  {Class option for fixed indentation of displayed math.}

\item[\Lopt{openbib}]\index{class options!bibliography} 
     each part of a bibliography\index{bibliography} entry will start on a
                        new line, with second and succeding lines indented
                        by \cmd{\bibindent} (the default is for an entry
                        to run continuously with no indentations).
\glossary(openbibco)%
  {\Popt{openbib}}%
  {Class option for indenting continuation lines in a bibliography.}

\item[\Lopt{article}]\index{class options!article} 
  typesetting simulates the \Lclass{article} class,
  but the \cmd{\chapter} command is not disabled.
  Chapters\index{chapter} do not start a new page and chapter headings\index{heading!chapter} are typeset
  like a section heading\index{heading!sections}. The numbering of 
  figures\index{figure}, etc., is continuous
  and not per chapter. However, a \cmd{\part} command still puts
  its heading\index{heading!part} on a page by itself.
\glossary(articleco)%
  {\Popt{article}}%
  {Class option for simulating the \Pclass{article} class.}

\item[\Lopt{oldfontcommands}]\index{class options!fonts} 
  makes the old, deprecated LaTeX version~2.09
  font commands available. Warning messages will be produced whenever
  an old font command is encountered.
\glossary(oldfontcommandsco)%
  {\Popt{oldfontcommands}}%
  {Class option for permitting obsolete, deprecated font commands.}

\end{itemize}

    None of these options are defaulted.

\section{Remarks}

   Calling the class with no options is equivalent to:
\begin{lcode}
\documentclass[letterpaper,10pt,twoside,onecolumn,openright,final]{memoir}
\end{lcode}
   The source file for this manual starts
\begin{lcode}
\documentclass[letterpaper,10pt,extrafontsizes]{memoir}
\end{lcode}
which is overkill as both \Lopt{letterpaper} and \Lopt{10pt} are among
the default options.

    Actual typesetting only occurs within the \Ie{document} environment. The
region of the file between the \cmd{\documentclass} command and the start
of the \Ie{document} environment is called the 
\emph{preamble}\index{preamble}. This is where you ask for external packages
and define your own macros if you feel so inclined.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\flushbottom} \cmd{\raggedbottom} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(flushbottom)%
  {\cs{flushbottom}}%
  {Declaration for last line on a page to be at a constant height.}
\glossary(raggedbottom)%
  {\cs{raggedbottom}}%
  {Declaration allowing the last line on a page to be at a variable height.}
When the \Lopt{twoside} or \Lopt{twocolumn} option is selected then
typesetting is done with \cmd{\flushbottom}, otherwise it is done
with \cmd{\raggedbottom}.

    When \cmd{\raggedbottom} is in effect LaTeX makes little attempt to
keep a constant height for the typeblock\index{typeblock}; pages may run short.

    When \cmd{\flushbottom} is in effect LaTeX ensures that the typeblock\index{typeblock}
on each page is a constant height, except when a page break is deliberately
introduced when the page might run short. In order to maintain a constant
height it may stretch or shrink some vertical spaces 
(e.g., between paragraphs\index{paragraph}, around headings\index{heading} or 
 around floats\index{float} or other inserts like displayed maths).
This may have a deleterious effect on the color\index{page color} 
of some pages. 
% Serendipitously this has happened on \pref{chap:lpage} where
% there is additional space between the paragraphs\index{paragraph} (caused by the next sectional
% division having to be put at the top of the next page). You may wish to
% compare that page with the following one to see the difference in the 
% colors. 

%    I could have made the page run short by inserting \cmd{\raggedbottom}
% at an appropriate place, followed later by a \cmd{\flushbottom}.

    If you get too many strung out pages with \cmd{\flushbottom} you may
want to put \cmd{\raggedbottom} in the preamble\index{preamble}.

    If you use the \Lopt{ebook} option you may well also want to use the
\Lopt{12pt} and \Lopt{oneside} options.

%#% extend

\clearpage
\pagestyle{ruled}

%#% extstart include laying-out-page.tex

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-05-16 17:28:08 +0200 (Thu, 16 May 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 464 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}

\chapter{Laying out the page} \label{chap:layingpage}


Up until this chapter the \pstyle{headings} pagestyle\index{pagestyle}
has been used; pagestyles are described in \Sref{sec:pagestyles}.
This, and later chapters, are typeset with the \pstyle{ruled} pagestyle.

\section{Introduction}

    The class provides a default page 
layout\index{page layout}\indextwo{page layout}{default}, 
in which the page size is the
same as the stock\index{stock} size and the typeblock\index{typeblock} is 
roughly in the middle of the page.
    This chapter describes the commands provided by the class to help you
produce your own page layout if the default is inappropriate.

    If you are happy with the default layout you may skip the rest of this
chapter.

    The pages of a book carry the text which is intended to educate, entertain
and/or amuse the reader. The page must be designed to serve the purposes of
the author and to ease the reader's task in assimilating the author's ideas.
A good page design is one which the general reader does not notice. If the
reader is constantly noticing the page layout, even unconsciously, it distracts
from the purpose of the book. It is not the job of the designer to 
shout, or even to murmur, `look at my work'.

    There are three main parts to a page: the page itself, the 
typeblock\index{typeblock}, and 
the margins\index{margin} separating the typeblock\index{typeblock} from 
the edges of the page. Of slightly lesser importance are the running 
headers\index{header} and footers\index{footer}, 
and possibly marginal\index{marginalia} notes.
The art of page design is obtaining a harmonious balance or rhythm between
all these.

    Although the form is different, the facilities described in this chapter 
are similar to those provided by the \Lpack{geometry} 
package~\cite{GEOMETRY}.

\section{Stock material}

   Printing is the act of laying symbols onto a piece of stock\index{stock} 
material.
Some print on T shirts by a process called silk screening, where the shapes of
the symbols are made in a screen and then fluid is squeezed through the screen
onto the stock material --- in this case the fabric of the T shirt. Whether or
not this is of general interest it is not the sort of printing or stock
material that is normally used in book production. Books, except for the very
particular, are printed on paper\index{paper}. 

    In the desktop publishing world the stock\indextwo{stock}{paper}
paper\indextwo{stock}{size} is usually one from a range of standard sizes. 
In the USA it is typically
letterpaper\index{letterpaper}\index{stock!size!letterpaper} 
(11 by 8.5 inches) and in the 
rest of the world A4\index{A4 paper}\index{stock!size!A4} paper 
(297 by 210 mm), with one page per piece of stock\index{stock}. In commercial 
printing the stock\index{stock!commercial printing} material is 
much larger with several 
pages being printed on each stock\index{stock} piece; 
the stock\index{stock} is then folded, cut and trimmed to form
the final pages for binding. The class assumes that desktop publishing is 
the norm.


\section{The page}
 
    The class assumes that there will be only a single page on a side of
each piece of stock\index{stock}; two sides means that there can be two
pages, one on the front and the other on the back. 

\begin{figure}
\centering
\drawpage
\caption{\ltx\ page layout parameters for a recto page} \label{fig:anoddpage}
\end{figure}

    The parameters\index{page layout!LaTeX parameters?\ltx\ parameters} 
used by \ltx\ itself to define the page layout are 
illustrated in \fref{fig:anoddpage}. \ltx\ does not actually care about the
physical size of a page --- it assumes that, with respect to the top lefthand
corner, the sheet of paper\index{sheet} to be printed is infinitely wide 
and infinitely long. If you happen to have a typeblock\index{typeblock} 
that is too wide or too long for the sheet, \ltx\ will merrily position 
text outside the physical boundaries.

    The \ltx\ parameters are often not particularly convenient if, say, 
the top of the text must be a certain distance below the top of the page 
and the \foredge{} margin\index{margin!foredge?\foredge} must be twice 
the spine margin\index{margin!spine}. It is obviously possible
to calculate the necessary values for the parameters, but it is
not a pleasurable task.

    The class provides various means of specifying the page layout, which are
hopefully more convenient to use than the standard ones. Various
adjustable parameters\index{page layout!class parameters} are used that 
define the stock\indextwo{stock}{size} size, page\indextwo{page}{size} size, and so 
on. These differ in some respects from the parameters in the standard classes,
although the parameters for marginal notes are the same in both cases.
Figure~\ref{fig:oddstock} shows the main class layout parameters for a
recto page.
These may be changed individually by \cmd{\setlength} or by using the 
commands described below. Figure~\ref{fig:evenstock} illustrates the
same parameters on a verso page.


\begin{figure}
\centering
\oddpagelayoutfalse
\drawstock
\caption{The \textsf{memoir} class page layout parameters for a verso page} \label{fig:evenstock}
\end{figure}

\begin{figure}
\centering
%%%\drawmarginparsfalse
\drawstock
\caption{The \textsf{memoir} class page layout parameters for a recto page} \label{fig:oddstock}
\end{figure}



    The first step in designing the page layout\index{page layout!design} 
is to decide on the page size\indextwo{page}{size} and then pick an 
appropriate stock\indextwo{stock}{size} size. Selecting a standard 
stock\indextwo{stock}{size} size will
be cheaper than having to order specially sized stock\index{stock} material. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setstocksize}\marg{height}\marg{width} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setstocksize)%
  {\cs{setstocksize}\marg{height}\marg{width}}%
  {Set the stock paper size to be \meta{height} by \meta{width}.}
\glossary(stockheight)%
  {\ls{stockheight}}%
  {Height of the stock paper.}
\glossary(stockwidth)%
  {\ls{stockwidth}}%
  {Width of the stock paper.}
    The class options\index{stock paper size option} 
provide for some common stock\indextwo{stock}{size} sizes. 
If you have some other size that you want to use, the 
command \cmd{\setstocksize} can be used to
specify that the stock\index{stock!specifying size} size is 
\meta{height} \index{stock!height} by \meta{width}\index{stock!width}. 
For example the following specifies a stock\index{stock!size} of 9 by 4 inches:
\begin{lcode}
\setstocksize{9in}{4in}
\end{lcode}

The size of the page\indextwo{page}{size} must be no larger than the 
stock\indextwo{stock}{size} but 
may be smaller which means that after printing
the stock\index{stock!trimmed} must be trimmed down to the size of the page.
The page may 
be positioned anywhere within the bounds of the stock\index{stock}.

    Page layout should be conceived in terms of a double spread\index{spread};
when you open a book in the middle what you see is a double spread --- 
a verso page on the left and a recto page on the right with the spine 
between them. Most books when closed are taller\index{proportion!book} 
than they are wide; this makes them easier to hold when open
for reading. A squarish page when opened out into a wide spread 
makes for discomfort unless the book is supported on a table.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\settrimmedsize}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(settrimmedsize)%
  {\cs{settrimmedsize}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio}}%
  {Sets the size of the trimmed stock paper.}
\glossary(paperheight)%
  {\ls{paperheight}}%
  {The height of the trimmed stock paper.}
\glossary(paperwidth)%
  {\ls{paperwidth}}%
  {The width of the trimmed stock paper.}
Initially the page size\indextwo{page}{size} is made the same as the 
stock\indextwo{stock}{size} size, as set by the 
paper\index{stock paper size option} size option.
The command \cmd{\settrimmedsize}\index{page!specifying size} 
can be used to specify the height\index{page!height} and width\index{page!width} 
of the page (after any trimming). The \meta{ratio} argument is 
the amount by which the \meta{height} or the \meta{width} must be multiplied 
by to give the
width or the height. Only two out of the three possible arguments must be 
given values with the other (unvalued) argument given as \verb?*? 
(an asterisk). The lengths \lnc{\paperheight} and \lnc{\paperwidth} are 
calculated according to the given arguments. That is, the command enables
the \lnc{\paperheight} 
and \lnc{\paperwidth} to be specified directly or as one being in a given
ratio to the other. The potential combinations of arguments and the 
corresponding results are listed in \tref{tab:rectsize}.


\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Arguments and results for \cs{settrimmedsize} and \cs{settypeblocksize} } \label{tab:rectsize}
%\begin{tabular}{ccc|l} \hline
\begin{tabular}{cccl} \toprule
\meta{height} & \meta{width} & \meta{ratio} & Result \\ \midrule
 H   & W   & r   & ambiguous \\
 H   & W   & {*} & $H$, $W$  \\
 H   & {*} & r   & $W = rH$  \\
 H   & {*} & {*} & ambiguous \\
{*}  & W   & r   & $H = rW$  \\
{*}  & W   & {*} & ambiguous \\
{*}  & {*} & r   & ambiguous \\
{*}  & {*} & {*} & ambiguous \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

    If you have used \cmd{\setstocksize} to redefine the stock\index{stock}, 
then to get the same page size, do:
\begin{lcode}
\settrimmedsize{\stockheight}{\stockwidth}{*}
\end{lcode}
or for the page dimensions to be 90\% of the stock\index{stock} dimensions:
\begin{lcode}
\settrimmedsize{0.9\stockheight}{0.9\stockwidth}{*}
\end{lcode}

    The following are three different ways of defining an 8 by 5 inch page.
\begin{lcode}
\settrimmedsize{8in}{5in}{*}
\settrimmedsize{8in}{*}{0.625}  % 5 = 0.625 times 8
\settrimmedsize{*}{5in}{1.6}    % 8 = 1.6 times 5
\end{lcode}

If you look at a well bound hardback book you
can see that the sheets are folded so that they are continuous at the spine, 
where they are sewn together into the binding. The top of the pages should be
smooth so that when the book is upright on a bookshelf dust has a harder 
job seeping between the pages than if the top was all raggedy. Thus, if
the stock\index{stock!trimmed} is trimmed it will be trimmed at the top. 
It will also have been
cut at the \foredge s of the pages and at the bottom, otherwise the book
would be unopenable and unreadable.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\settrims}\marg{top}\marg{foredge} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(settrims)%
  {\cs{settrims}\marg{top}\marg{foredge}}%
  {Sets the amount to be trimmed from the top and \foredge{} of the stock paper.}
\glossary(trimtop)%
  {\ls{trimtop}}%
  {Amount to be trimmed from the top of the stock paper.}
\glossary(trimedge)%
  {\ls{trimedge}}%
  {Amount to be trimmed from the \foredge{} of the stock paper.}
The command \cmd{\settrims} can be used to specify 
the amount intended to be removed from the top 
(\meta{top}) and \foredge{} (\meta{foredge}) of the 
stock\index{stock!specifying trimming} 
material to produce the top and \foredge{} of a recto page. 
Note that the combination of \cmd{\settrims} and \cmd{\settrimmedsize}
locate the page\index{page} with respect to the stock\index{stock}.
By default the top and edge trims are zero, which means that if any trimming
is required it will be at the spine and bottom edges of the stock
unless \cmd{\settrims} is used to alter this.

    You can either do any trim calculation for youself or let \ltx\ do it for
you. For example, with an 8in by 5in page on 10in by 7in stock
\begin{lcode}
\settrims{2in}{2in}
\end{lcode}
specifies trimming 2in from the top and \foredge{} of the stock
giving the desired page size. Taking a design where, say, the page 
is 90\% of the stock size it's easy to get \ltx\ to do the calculation:
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\trimtop}{\stockheight}    % \trimtop = \stockheight
\addtolengh{\trimtop}{-\paperheight}  %          - \paperheight
\setlength{\trimedge}{\stockwidth}    % \trimedge = \stockwidth
\addtolength{\trimedge}{-\paperwidth} %           - \paperwidth
\end{lcode}
which will set all the trimming to be at the top and \foredge. 
If you wanted, say, equal trims at the top and bottom you could go 
on and specify
\begin{lcode}
\settrims{0.5\trimtop}{\trimedge}
\end{lcode}


\section{The typeblock} \label{sec:typeblock2}

    Like the page, the typeblock\index{proportion!typeblock} is normally 
rectangular with the height greater than the width.
%    Consider a typeblock that includes no illustrations\index{illustration} 
%or tables\index{table}.
The lines of text must be laid out so that they are easy to read.
Common practice, and more recently psychological testing, has shown that
long lines of text are difficult to read. Thus, there is a physiological
upper limit to the width of the typeblock. From a practical viewpoint,
a line should not be too short because then there is difficulty in justifying
the text.

    Experiments have shown that the number of characters in a line of
single column\index{column} text on a page should be
in the range 60 to 70 for ease of reading. The range may be as much
as 45 to 75 characters but 66 characters is often
considered to be the ideal number. Much shorter and the eye is dashing
back and forth between each line. Much longer and it is hard to pick up the
start of the next line if the eye has to jump back too far --- the same line
may be read twice or the following line may be inadvertently jumped over.
For double column\index{column!double} text the ideal number of characters 
is around 45, give or take 5 or so.

    Bringhurst\index{Bringhurst, Robert}~\cite{BRINGHURST99} gives a 
method for determining the number
of characters in a line for any font\index{font!measuring}: 
measure the length of the lowercase alphabet and use a 
copyfitting\index{copyfitting} 
table that shows for a given alphabet 
length and line length, the average number of characters in that line.
 Table~\ref{tab:copyfitting} is an
abridged version of Bringhurt's copyfitting table.
For example, it suggests that a font with a length of 130pt should be
set on a measure of about 26pc for a single column\index{column!single} 
or in an 18pc wide column if there are multiple\index{column!multiple} 
columns.
 

\begin{table}
%%%\DeleteShortVerb{\|}
\centering
\caption{Average characters per line} \label{tab:copyfitting}
\begin{tabular}{r !\quad rrrrrrrr} %|
  \toprule
Pts. & \multicolumn{8}{c}{Line length in picas} \\
\cmidrule{2-9}
     & 10 & 14 & 18 & 22 & 26  & 30  & 35 & 40 \\ 
\midrule
80   & \textit{40} & \textbf{56} & \textbf{72} & 88 & 104 &     &    &    \\
85   & \textit{38} & \textit{53} & \textbf{68} & 83 & 98 & 113 &    &    \\
90   & \textit{36} & \textit{50} & \textbf{64} & 79 & 86 & 107 &    &    \\
95   & 34 & \textit{48} & \textbf{62} & 75 & 89 & 103 &    &    \\
100  & 33 & \textit{46} & \textbf{59} & \textbf{73} & 86 & 99 & 116 &   \\
105  & 32 & \textit{44} & 57 & \textbf{70} & 82 & 95 & 111 &   \\
110  & 30 & \textit{43} & 55 & \textbf{67} & 79 & 92 & 107 &   \\
115  & 29 & \textit{41} & 53 & \textbf{64} & 76 & 88 & 103 &   \\
120  & 28 & \textit{39} & \textit{50} & \textbf{62} & 73 & 84 & 98 & 112 \\
125  & 27 & 38 & \textit{48} & \textbf{59} & \textbf{70} & 81 & 94 & 108 \\
130  & 26 & 36 & \textit{47} & 57 & \textbf{67} & 78 & 91 & 104 \\
135  & 25 & 35 & \textit{45} & 55 & \textbf{65} & 75 & 88 & 100 \\
140  & 24 & 34 & \textit{44} & 53 & \textbf{63} & 73 & 85 & 97 \\
145  & 23 & 33 & \textit{42} & 51 & \textbf{61} & \textbf{70} & 82 & 94 \\
150  & 23 & 32 & \textit{41} & \textit{51} & \textbf{60} & \textbf{69} & 81 & 92 \\
155  & 22 & 31 & \textit{39} & \textit{49} & 58 & \textbf{67} & 79 & 90 \\
160  & 22 & 30 & 39 & \textit{48} & 56 & \textbf{65} & 76 & 87 \\
165  & 21 & 30 & 38 & \textit{46} & 55 & \textbf{63} & 74 & 84 \\
170  & 21 & 29 & 37 & \textit{45} & 53 & \textbf{62} & 72 & 82 \\
175  & 20 & 28 & 36 & \textit{44} & 52 & \textbf{60} & \textbf{70} & 80 \\
180  & 20 & 27 & 35 & \textit{43} & 51 & 59 & \textbf{68} & 78 \\
185  & 19 & 27 & 34 & \textit{42} & \textit{49} & 57 & \textbf{67} & 76 \\
190  & 19 & 26 & 33 & 41 & \textit{48} & 56 & \textbf{65} & 74 \\
195  & 18 & 25 & 32 & 40 & \textit{47} & 54 & \textbf{63} & 72 \\
200  & 18 & 25 & 32 & 39 & \textit{46} & 53 & \textbf{62} & \textbf{70} \\ 
220  & 16 & 22 & 29 & 35 & \textit{41} & \textit{48} & 56 & \textbf{64} \\
240  & 15 & 20 & 26 & 32 & 38 & \textit{44} & 51 & 58 \\
260  & 14 & 19 & 24 & 30 & 35 & 41 & \textit{48} & 54 \\
280  & 13 & 18 & 23 & 28 & 33 & 38 & \textit{44} & 50 \\
300  & 12 & 17 & 21 & 26 & 31 & 35 & 41 & \textit{47} \\
320  & 11 & 16 & 20 & 25 & 29 & 34 & 39 & \textit{45} \\
340  & 10 & 15 & 19 & 23 & 27 & 32 & 37 & 42 \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
%%%\MakeShortVerb{\|}
\end{table}

    Morten H{\o}gholm\index{H{\o}gholm, Morten} has done some curve fitting
to the data. He determined that the expressions
\begin{equation}
L_{65} = 2.042\alpha + 33.41 \label{eq:L65}
\end{equation}
and
\begin{equation}
L_{45} = 1.415\alpha + 23.03 \label{eq:L45}
\end{equation}
fitted aspects of the data, where $\alpha$ is the length of the alphabet
in points, and $L_{i}$ is the suggested width in points, for a line with
$i$ characters (remember that 1pc = 12pt).



Table~\ref{tab:cmrlengths} gives the lowercase 
alphabet\index{alphabet length} lengths for 
some typefaces over a range of font sizes; this may be used in conjunction
with \tref{tab:copyfitting} on \pref{tab:copyfitting} when deciding
on an appropriate textwidth\index{textwidth}. I have grouped the 
listed typefaces into roman, sans-serif, and monospaced, and they are 
all available in a standard \ltx\ system. The 
Computer Modern Roman\facesubseeidx{Computer Modern},
Concrete Roman\facesubseeidx{Concrete Roman},
Computer Sans\facesubseeidx{Computer Sans},
and Typewriter\facesubseeidx{Computer Typewriter}
typefaces\index{typeface} were all designed by Donald Knuth 
using\index{font!Metafont} 
\metafont, specifically for use with \tx. The other font families are
\pscript{} outline fonts and can be used in many document publishing systems.
These particular fonts are available for use in \ltx\ via the packages
in the \Ppack{psnfss}\index{psnfss?\Ppack{psnfss}}
bundle. Be aware that the Knuthian\index{font!Knuthian} fonts were designed to form a 
font family --- 
that is, they were designed to work together and complement each other --- 
while the listed \pscript{}
fonts\index{font!PostScript} were designed by different people at different 
times and for different purposes. Bringhurst~\cite[p. 96]{BRINGHURST99}
memorably says `Baskerville\facesubseeidx{Baskerville}, 
Helvetica\facesubseeidx{Helvetica}, 
Palatino\facesubseeidx{Palatino} and 
Times Roman\facesubseeidx{Times Roman}, 
for example --- which are four of the most widely available 
typefaces --- are four faces with nothing to offer one another except
public disagreement'.


    The monospaced\index{font!monospaced}\index{monospaced font} fonts, 
Courier\facesubseeidx{Courier} and Typewriter\facesubseeidx{Typewriter}
have no place in high quality typesetting except when typesetting computer
code or the like, or when trying to fake text written on a real typewriter.
Ignoring these, a quick glance at the \tablerefname{} shows that 
Bookman\facesubseeidx{Bookman} is a broad font while 
Times\facesubseeidx{Times Roman} is narrow as befits its original 
design intent for typesetting narrow columns in newspapers. 
Computer Modern\facesubseeidx{Computer Modern}
tends towards the narrow end of the range.


\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\xlvchars} \lnc{\lxvchars} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(xlvchars)%
  {\ls{xlvchars}}%
  {Approximate length of 45 characters.}
\glossary(lxvchars)%
  {\ls{lxvchars}}%
  {Approximate length of 65 characters.}
Based on \tref{tab:cmrlengths}, the two lengths 
\lnc{\xlvchars} and 
\lnc{\lxvchars} are initially set to approximately the lengths of a 
line of text with
45\index{measure!45 characters} or 
65\index{measure!65 characters} characters, respectively, for  
Computer Modern Roman in the type size selected for the document.

    If you are using a different font or size you can use something like the 
following to calculate and print out the length for you.
\begin{lcode}
\newlength{\mylen}                % a length
\newcommand{\alphabet}{abc...xyz} % the lowercase alphabet
\begingroup                       % keep font change local
% font specification e.g., \Large\sffamily
\settowidth{\mylen}{\alphabet}
The length of this alphabet is \the\mylen. % print in document
\typeout{The length of the Large sans alphabet 
         is \the\mylen}                    % put in log file
\endgroup                         % end the grouping
\end{lcode}
The \cmd{\typeout} macro prints its argument to the terminal and the
log file. There is, however, an easier method.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setxlvchars}\oarg{fontspec} \\
\cmd{\setlxvchars}\oarg{fontspec} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setxlvchars)%
  {\cs{setxlvchars}\oarg{fontspec}}%
  {Sets \cs{xlvchars} to the length of 45 characters in the \meta{fontspec} 
   font (default \cs{normalfont}).}
\glossary(setlxvchars)%
  {\cs{setlxvchars}\oarg{fontspec}}%
  {Sets cs{lxvchars} to the length of 65 characters in the \meta{fontspec} 
   font (default \cs{normalfont}).}
The macros \cmd{\setxlvchars} and \cmd{\setlxvchars}, which were suggested
by Morten H{\o}gholm\index{H{\o}gholm, Morten}, 
set the lengths \lnc{\xlvchars} and \lnc{\lxvchars}
respecively for the font \meta{fontspec}. The default for \meta{fontspec}
is \cmd{\normalfont}. For example, the values of \lnc{\lxvchars} and
\lnc{\xlvchars} after calling:
\begin{lcode}
\setlxvchars \setxlvchars[\small\sffamily]
\end{lcode}
\begingroup
are: \setlxvchars\setxlvchars[\small\sffamily]
\lnc{\lxvchars} = \the\lxvchars, and \lnc{\xlvchars} = \the\xlvchars.
\endgroup

    Morten H{\o}gholm\footnote{Private communication} also commented:
\begin{quotation}
    \ldots I was defining some environments that had to have \lnc{\parindent}
as their indentation. For some reason I just wrote \verb?1.5em? instead
of \lnc{\parindent} because I `knew' that was the value. What I had 
overlooked was that I had loaded the \Lpack{mathpazo} package~\cite{MATHPAZO},
thus, among other things,  altering \lnc{\parindent}. Conclusion: the
environment would use 1.5em = 18.0pt, whereas the \lnc{\parindent}
was only 17.607pt.

    This, and other related situations can be avoided if one places
\begin{center}
\cmd{\RequirePackage}\marg{font-package}\cmd{\normalfont}
\end{center}
\emph{before} \cmd{\documentclass}.
\end{quotation}
Note that, in general, it is inadviseable to put any 
commands\index{packages before class} before
\cmd{\documentclass}.




\PWnote{2009/04/01}{Fixed errors in lowercase alphabet lengths for Utopia (2) and Avantgarde (1)}
\PWnote{2009/04/28}{Corrected font names of Avant Garde Gothic, Times Roman,
   New Century Schoolbook}
\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Lowercase alphabet lengths, in points, for various fonts}\label{tab:cmrlengths}
\begin{tabular}{lrrrrrrrr} \toprule
                                            & 8pt & 9pt & 10pt & 11pt & 12pt & 14pt & 17pt & 20pt \\ \midrule
\fontfamily{pbk}\selectfont Bookman         & 113 & 127 & 142 & 155 & 170 & 204 & 245 & 294 \\
\fontfamily{bch}\selectfont Charter         & 102 & 115 & 127 & 139 & 152 & 184 & 221 & 264 \\
\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont Computer Modern & 108 & 118 & 127 & 139 & 149 & 180 & 202 & 242 \\
\fontfamily{ccr}\selectfont Concrete Roman  & 109 & 119 & 128 & 140 & 154 & 185 & 222 & 266 \\
\fontfamily{pnc}\selectfont New Century Schoolbook     & 108 & 122 & 136 & 149 & 162 & 194 & 234 & 281 \\ 	
\fontfamily{ppl}\selectfont Palatino        & 107 & 120 & 133 & 146 & 160 & 192 & 230 & 276 \\ 	
\fontfamily{ptm}\selectfont Times Roman     &  96 & 108 & 120 & 131 & 143 & 172 & 206 & 247 \\
\fontfamily{put}\selectfont Utopia          & 107 & 120 & 134 & 146 & 161 & 193 & 232 & 277 \\
\fontfamily{pag}\selectfont Avant Garde Gothic  & 113 & 127 & 142 & 155 & 169 & 203 & 243 & 293 \\
\fontfamily{cmss}\selectfont Computer Sans  & 102 & 110 & 120 & 131 & 140 & 168 & 193 & 233 \\
\fontfamily{phv}\selectfont Helvetica       & 102 & 114 & 127 & 139 & 152 & 184 & 220 & 264 \\
\fontfamily{pcr}\selectfont Courier         & 125 & 140 & 156 & 170 & 187 & 224 & 270 & 324 \\
\fontfamily{cmtt}\selectfont Typewriter     & 110 & 122 & 137 & 149 & 161 & 192 & 232 & 277 \\
\bottomrule
\facesubseeidx{Bookman}\facesubseeidx{Charter}\facesubseeidx{Computer Modern}%
\facesubseeidx{Concrete Roman}\facesubseeidx{New Century Schoolbook}
\facesubseeidx{Palatino}\facesubseeidx{Times Roman}\facesubseeidx{Utopia}%
\facesubseeidx{Avant Garde Gothic}\facesubseeidx{Computer Sans}
\facesubseeidx{Helvetica}\facesubseeidx{Courier}%
\facesubseeidx{Computer Typewriter}%
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

    The height of the typeblock\index{typeblock!height} should be 
equivalent to an integral number of lines.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\settypeblocksize}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(settypeblocksize)%
  {\cs{settypeblocksize}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio}}%
  {Sets the size of the typeblock.}
\glossary(textheight)%
  {\ls{textheight}}%
  {The height of the typeblock.}
\glossary(textwidth)%
  {\ls{textwidth}}%
  {The width of the typeblock.}
The command \cmd{\settypeblocksize}\index{typeblock!specifying size} 
is similar to
\cmd{\settrimmedsize} except that it sets the \lnc{\textheight} and 
\lnc{\textwidth} for the typeblock\index{typeblock!height}\index{typeblock!width}. 
The potential combinations of arguments and the 
corresponding results are listed in \tref{tab:rectsize} on \pref{tab:rectsize}.
For instance, here are three ways of specifying
a 6in by 3in typeblock\index{typeblock}:
\begin{lcode}
\settypeblocksize{6in}{3in}{*}
\settypeblocksize{6in}{*}{0.5}
\settypeblocksize{*}{3in}{2}
\end{lcode}

    The typeblock\index{typeblock} has to be located on the page. There is 
a relationship between the page, typeblock\index{typeblock} and 
margins\index{margin}. The sum of the spine, or inner, 
margin\index{margin!spine}\index{margin!inner}, 
the \foredge, or outer, margin\index{margin!foredge?\foredge}\index{margin!outer} 
and the width of the 
typeblock\index{typeblock!width} must equal the width\index{page!width} 
of the page. 
Similarly the sum of the upper margin\index{margin!upper}, 
the lower margin\index{margin!lower} and the height of the 
typeblock\index{typeblock!height} 
must equal the height\index{page!height} of the page. 
The process of locating the 
typeblock\index{typeblock} with respect to the page can be viewed
either as positioning the typeblock\index{typeblock} with respect to the edges 
of the page or as setting the margins\index{margin} between the page and the 
typeblock\index{typeblock}.

    Remembering that the page layout should be defined in terms of the
appearance as a spread\index{spread}, the spine margin\index{margin!spine} 
is normally half the \foredge{} margin\index{margin!foredge?\foredge}, 
so that the white space is equally distributed around the sides of the text. 

\begin{note}
  One will often find that using \cmd{\settypeblocksize} without
  subsequent use of \cmd{\setlrmargins} and \cmd{\setulmargins} will
  result in errors as the relationships mentioned above are not met
  (the \lnc{\textwidth} has changed, but not the margins).

  We may add auto adjustments to a later version of \theclass.
\end{note}


    There is more latitude in choosing the 
proportions\index{proportion!margin} 
of the upper and lower margins, though usually the upper 
margin\index{margin!upper} is less than the lower margin\index{margin!lower}
so the typeblock\index{typeblock!location} is not vertically centered.

    Two methods are provided for setting the horizontal dimensions on a page.
One is where the width of the typeblock\index{typeblock!width} 
is fixed and the margins\index{margin} are adjustable. 
The other method is where the size of the margins\index{margin} determines 
the width of the typeblock\index{typeblock!width}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setlrmargins}\marg{spine}\marg{edge}\marg{ratio} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setlrmargins)%
  {\cs{setlrmargins}\marg{spine}\marg{edge}\marg{ratio}}%
  {Sets the spine and \foredge{} margins for the current typeblock width.}
The command \cmd{\setlrmargins}\index{margin!specify width} can be used to specify
the side margins\footnote{Only the spine margin is noted in
\fref{fig:oddstock} and~\ref{fig:evenstock}; 
the \foredge\ margin\index{margin!foredge?\foredge} is at the 
opposite side of the typeblock.} 
with the width of the page and the typeblock being fixed.
 
Not more than one one argument value is required, with any
unvalued arguments being denoted by an asterisk. There are several cases to 
consider and these are tabulated in \tref{tab:lrmargins}.

    In the \tablerefname, $S$ is the calculated spine 
margin\index{margin!spine}, 
$E$ is the calculated \foredge{} margin\index{margin!foredge?\foredge}, 
and $P_{w}$ and $B_{w}$ are respectively the page\index{page!width} and 
typeblock\index{typeblock!width} 
widths. The \cmd{\setlrmargins}\index{margin!specifying size} command maintains the relationship
\begin{displaymath}
S + E = K_{w}  = \textrm{constant} \mbox{\space} (= P_{w} - B_{w}).
\end{displaymath}


\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Arguments and results for \cs{setlrmargins} } \label{tab:lrmargins}
%\begin{tabular}{ccc|l} \hline
\begin{tabular}{cccl} \toprule
\meta{spine} & \meta{edge} & \meta{ratio} & Result \\ \midrule
 S   & E & r & ambiguous \\
 S   & E & * & ambiguous \\
 S   & * & r & ambiguous \\
 S   & * & * & $E = K_{w} - S$ \\
{*}  & E & r & ambiguous \\
{*}  & E & * & $S = K_{w} - E$ \\
{*}  & * & r & $E + S = K_{w}$, $E = rS$ \\
{*}  & * & * & $E + S = K_{w}$, $E = S$ \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

The cases marked ambiguous in the \tablerefname{} are where the particular combination
of argument values may make it impossible to guarantee the relationship.

    Assuming that we have a 3in wide typeblock\index{typeblock!width} on a 5in 
wide page and we want the spine margin\index{margin!spine} to be 0.8in and 
the \foredge{} margin\index{margin!foredge?\foredge} to be 1.2in 
(i.e., the \foredge{} margin is half as big again as the spine margin) 
this can be accomplished in three ways (with the \cmd{\paperwidth} and 
\lnc{\textwidth} being previously specified and fixed):
\begin{lcode}
% specify spine margin
    \setlrmargins{0.8in}{*}{*}   
% specify fore-edge margin
    \setlrmargins{*}{1.2in}{*}   
% specify fore-edge/spine ratio
    \setlrmargins{*}{*}{1.5}     
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setlrmarginsandblock}\marg{spine}\marg{edge}\marg{ratio}\\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setlrmarginsandblock)%
  {\cs{setlrmarginsandblock}\marg{spine}\marg{edge}\marg{ratio}}%
  {Sets the spine and \foredge{} margins, modifying the typeblock width to match.}
The command \cmd{\setlrmarginsandblock}\index{margin!specifying size}
can be used to specify the spine\index{margin!spine} and 
\foredge\ margins\index{margin!foredge?\foredge}, 
where the page width\index{page!width} is fixed and the width of the 
typeblock\index{typeblock!width} 
depends on the margins\index{margin}. Results
for this command are given in \tref{tab:lrblock}. The same notation is used,
but in this case \cmd{\setlrmarginsandblock} maintains the relationship 
\begin{displaymath}
S + B_{w} + E = \textrm{constant} \mbox{\space} (= P_{w}).
\end{displaymath}
The width of the typeblock\index{typeblock} is calculated 
from $B_{w} = P_{w} - S - E$.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Arguments and results for \cs{setlrmarginsandblock} } \label{tab:lrblock}
%\begin{tabular}{ccc|l} \hline
\begin{tabular}{cccl} \toprule
\meta{spine} & \meta{edge} & \meta{ratio} & Result \\ \midrule
 S   & E & r & $S$, $E$ \\
 S   & E & * & $S$, $E$ \\
 S   & * & r & $E = rS$ \\
 S   & * & * & $E = S$ \\
{*}  & E & r & $S = rE$ \\
{*}  & E & * & $S = E$ \\
{*}  & * & r & ambiguous \\
{*}  & * & * & ambiguous \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

    Assuming that we want a 3in wide typeblock\index{typeblock!width} on a 
5in wide page\index{page!width} and we want the spine 
margin\index{margin!spine} to be 0.8in and the \foredge{} 
margin\index{margin!foredge?\foredge} to be 1.2in 
(i.e., the \foredge\ margin is half as big again as the spine margin) 
this can be accomplished in the following ways (with the \lnc{\textwidth} 
being calculated from the previously specified \cmd{\paperwidth} and the 
specified margins):
\begin{lcode}
% specify both margins
    \setlrmarginsandblock{0.8in}{1.2in}{*}   
% specify spine & fore-edge/spine ratio
    \setlrmarginsandblock{0.8in}{*}{1.5}     
% specify fore-edge & spine/fore-edge ratio
    \setlrmarginsandblock{*}{1.2in}{0.667}   
\end{lcode}
If we wanted the margins\index{margin!specifying size} to be both 1in 
instead then any of the following 
will do it:
\begin{lcode}
% specify both margins
    \setlrmarginsandblock{1in}{1in}{*} 
% specify spine & fore-edge/spine ratio
    \setlrmarginsandblock{1in}{*}{1}   
% specify spine (fore-edge = spine)
    \setlrmarginsandblock{1in}{*}{*}   
% specify fore-edge & spine/fore-edge ratio
    \setlrmarginsandblock{*}{1in}{1}   
% specify fore-edge (spine = fore-edge)
    \setlrmarginsandblock{*}{1in}{*}   
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setbinding}\marg{length} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setbinding)%
  {\cs{setbinding}\marg{length}}%
  {Adds a binding allowance to the spine margin.}
In some cases, for example when doing a Japanese stab binding, it may be 
desireable to add a small allowance\index{binding allowance} 
to the spine margin for the binding.
You can use the command \cmd{\setbinding} for this purpose. It decreases the
effective page width by \meta{length} and later this length will be added
on to the spine margin, thus restoring the page width to its original value.
If you use \cmd{\setbinding} than it must be \emph{after} setting the page 
width and \emph{before} setting the spine and fore-edge margins.

    That completes the methods for specifying the horizontal spacings. There 
are similar commands for setting the vertical spacings which are 
described below.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setulmargins}\marg{upper}\marg{lower}\marg{ratio} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setulmargins)%
  {\cs{setulmargins}\marg{upper}\marg{lower}\marg{ratio}}%
  {Sets the upper and lower margins with the current typeblock height.}
The command \cmd{\setulmargins} can be used to 
specify\index{margin!specifying size}
the upper and lower margins\footnote{Only the upper margin is noted in
\fref{fig:oddstock} and~\ref{fig:evenstock}; 
the lower margin\index{margin!lower} is the distance between the bottom
of the typeblock\index{typeblock} and the bottom of the page.} 
where the heights of the page\index{page!height} and the 
typeblock\index{typeblock!height} are 
fixed. This is similar to \cmd{\setlrmargins}. Using a slightly 
different notation this time, with $U$ being the upper 
margin\index{margin!upper}, $L$ being the lower margin\index{margin!lower}, 
and $P_{h}$ and $B_{h}$ being the 
\emph{height} of the page\index{page!height} and 
typeblock\index{typeblock!height}, respectively, 
the results are shown in \tref{tab:ulmargins}.
The \cmd{\setulmargins} command maintains the relationship
\begin{displaymath}
U + L = K_{h}  = \textrm{constant} \mbox{\space} (= P_{h} - B_{h}).
\end{displaymath}

    Note that in terms of the traditional \ltx\ parameters memoir's 
\lnc{\uppermargin} is (\lnc{\topmargin} + \lnc{\headheight} + \lnc{\headsep}).

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Arguments and results for \cs{setulmargins} } \label{tab:ulmargins}
%\begin{tabular}{ccc|l} \hline
\begin{tabular}{cccl} \toprule
\meta{upper} & \meta{lower} & \meta{ratio} & Result \\ \midrule
 U   & L & r & ambiguous \\
 U   & L & * & ambiguous \\
 U   & * & r & ambiguous \\
 U   & * & * & $L = K_{h} - U$ \\
{*}  & L & r & ambiguous \\
{*}  & L & * & $U = K_{h} - L$ \\
{*}  & * & r & $L + U = K_{h}$, $L = rU$ \\
{*}  & * & * & $L + U = K_{h}$, $L = U$ \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setulmarginsandblock}\marg{upper}\marg{lower}\marg{ratio} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setulmarginsandblock)%
  {\cs{setulmarginsandblock}\marg{upper}\marg{lower}\marg{ratio}}%
  {Sets the upper and lower margins, modifying the typeblock height to match.}
The command \cmd{\setulmarginsandblock}
can be used to specify\index{margin!specifying size} 
the upper\index{margin!upper} and lower margins\index{margin!lower}, 
where the page height\index{page!height}
is fixed and the height of the typeblock\index{typeblock!height} 
depends on the margins. Results
for this command are given in \tref{tab:ulblock}. The same notation is used,
but in this case \cmd{\setulmarginsandblock} maintains the
relationship 
\begin{displaymath}
U + B_{h} + L = \textrm{constant} \mbox{\space} (P_{h}).
\end{displaymath}
The height of the typeblock\index{typeblock!specifying size} 
is calculated from $B_{h} = P_{h} - U - L$.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Arguments and results for \cs{setulmarginsandblock} } \label{tab:ulblock}
%\begin{tabular}{ccc|l} \hline
\begin{tabular}{cccl} \toprule
\meta{upper} & \meta{lower} & \meta{ratio} & Result \\ \midrule
 U   & L & r & $U$, $L$ \\
 U   & L & * & $U$, $L$ \\
 U   & * & r & $L = rU$ \\
 U   & * & * & $L = U$ \\
{*}  & L & r & $U = rL$ \\
{*}  & L & * & $U = L$ \\
{*}  & * & r & ambiguous \\
{*}  & * & * & ambiguous \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

\begin{note}
  Readers may find several folio designs in \cite{MEMDESIGN}.
\end{note}



\fancybreak{}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setcolsepandrule}\marg{colsep}\marg{thickness} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setcolsepandrule)%
  {\cs{setcolsepandrule}\marg{colsep}\marg{thickness}}%
  {Sets the width of the gutter and the thickness of the rule in the gutter.}
\glossary(columnsep)%
  {\ls{columnsep}}%
  {Width of the gutter between columns.}
\glossary(columnseprule)%
  {\ls{columnseprule}}%
 {Thickness of the rule in the gutter.}
    For twocolumn\index{column!double} text the width of 
the gutter\index{gutter}
between the columns must be specified. \ltx\ also lets you draw a 
vertical rule in the middle of the 
gutter. The macro \cmd{\setcolsepandrule} 
sets the gutter width\index{gutter!width}, \lnc{\columnsep}, to \meta{colsep} 
and the thickness of the rule, \lnc{\columnseprule}, 
to \meta{thickness}. A \meta{thickness} of 0pt means that the rule will be
invisible. Visible rules usually have a thickness\index{rule!thickness} 
of about 0.4pt. The total width of the twocolumns\index{column!double} 
of text and the gutter equals the width of the typeblock\index{typeblock}.

    This completes the methods for specifying the layout of the
main elements of the page --- the page\index{page!specifying size} 
size, the size of the typeblock\index{typeblock!specifying size} and the 
margins\index{margin!specifying size} 
surrounding the typeblock\index{typeblock!location}. 

\section{Headers, footers and marginal notes}
\label{sec:head-foot-marg}
\index{header|(}\index{footer|(}

    A page may have two additional items, and usually has at least one of 
these. They are the running header and running footer. If the page has a 
folio\index{folio} then it is located either in the header or in the footer. 
The word `in' is used rather lightly here as the folio\index{folio}
may not be actually \emph{in} the header or footer but is always located 
at some constant relative position. A common position for the 
folio\index{folio} is towards the \foredge\index{foredge?\foredge}\index{margin!outer} of the 
page, either in the header or the footer. This makes it easy to spot when 
thumbing through the book. It may be placed at the center of the footer, 
but unless you want to really annoy the reader do not place it near
the spine.

    Often a page header contains the current chapter title, with perhaps a 
section title on the opposite header, as aids to the reader in navigating 
around the book. Some books put the book title into one of the headers, 
usually the verso one, but I see 
little point in that as presumably the reader knows which particular book he
is reading, and the space would be better used providing more useful signposts.

\index{header!specifying size|(}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setheadfoot}\marg{headheight}\marg{footskip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setheadfoot)%
  {\cs{setheadfoot}\marg{headheight}\marg{footskip}}%
  {Sets the headheight and footskip.}
\glossary(headheight)%
  {\ls{headheight}}%
  {Height available for a header.}
\glossary(footskip)%
  {\ls{footskip}}%
  {Distance between the bottom of the typeblock and the bottom of a footer.}
The \cmd{\setheadfoot} macro sets the
\lnc{\headheight} parameter to the value \meta{headheight} and the
\lnc{\footskip} parameter to \meta{footskip}. It is usual to set the
\lnc{\headheight} to at least the value of the \lnc{\baselineskip} of
the normal body font.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setheaderspaces}\marg{headdrop}\marg{headsep}\marg{ratio} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setheaderspaces)%
  {\cs{setheaderspaces}\marg{headdrop}\marg{headsep}\marg{ratio}}%
  {Sets the spacing above and below a header.}
\glossary(headsep)%
  {\ls{headsep}}%
  {Distance between the bottom of a header and the top of the typeblock.}
\glossary(headdrop)%
  {\ls{headdrop}}%
  {Distance between the top of the trimmed page and the top of a header.}
The command \cmd{\setheaderspaces} is similar to \cmd{\setulmargins}.
Using the notation $U$ for the upper margin\index{margin!upper} (as before), $H_{h}$ for the
\lnc{\headheight}, $H_{s}$ for the \lnc{\headsep} and $D$ for the
\lnc{\headdrop}, where the \lnc{\headdrop} is the distance between the top
of the trimmed page and the top of the header\footnote{The head drop is not
shown in \fref{fig:oddstock} or~\ref{fig:evenstock}.}, 
then the macro \cmd{\setheaderspaces} maintains the relationship
\begin{displaymath}
D + H_{s} = C_{h}  = \textrm{constant} \mbox{\space} (= U - H_{h}).
\end{displaymath}

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Arguments and results for \cs{setheaderspaces} } \label{tab:headspaces}
%\begin{tabular}{ccc|l} \hline
\begin{tabular}{cccl} \toprule
\meta{headdrop} & \meta{headsep} & \meta{ratio} & Result \\ \midrule
 D   & $H_{s}$ & r & ambiguous \\
 D   & $H_{s}$ & * & ambiguous \\
 D   & *       & r & ambiguous \\
 D   & *       & * & $H_{s} = C_{h} - D$ \\
{*}  & $H_{s}$ & r & ambiguous \\
{*}  & $H_{s}$ & * & $D = C_{h} - H_{s}$ \\
{*}  & *       & r & $H_{s} + D = C_{h}$, $H_{s} = rD$ \\
{*}  & *       & * & $H_{s} + D = C_{h}$, $H_{s} = D$ \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

The macro \cmd{\setheaderspaces} is for specifying the spacing above and below
the page header.
The possible arguments and results are shown in \tref{tab:headspaces}. Typically,
the \lnc{\headsep} is of more interest than the \lnc{\headdrop}.

\index{header!specifying size|)}
\index{footer|)}\index{header|)}

\index{marginalia|(}
   Finally, some works have marginal notes. These really come last in the 
design scheme, providing the margins have been made big enough to accomodate 
them. Figure~\ref{fig:evenstock} shows the marginal note parameters on a verso
page, and also illustrates that some parameters control different 
positions on the stock\index{stock}.



\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setmarginnotes}\marg{separation}\marg{width}\marg{push} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setmarginnotes)%
  {\cs{setmarginnotes}\marg{separation}\marg{width}\marg{push}}%
  {Sets the length parameters for marginal notes.}
\glossary(marginparsep)%
  {\ls{marginparsep}}%
  {Horizontal distance between the edge of the typeblock and a marginal note.}
\glossary(marginparwidth)%
  {\ls{marginparwidth}}%
  {Maximum width of marginal note.}
\glossary(marginparpush)%
  {\ls{marginparpush}}%
  {Minimum vertical distance between marginal notes.}

The command \cmd{\setmarginnotes}
sets the parameters for marginal notes. The distance \lnc{\marginparsep} 
between the typeblock\index{typeblock} and any note is set 
to \meta{separation}, the 
maximum width for a note, \lnc{\marginparwidth}, is set to \meta{width}
and the minimum vertical distance between notes, \lnc{\marginparpush},
is set to \meta{push}.

\begin{note}
  As of \theclass\ v3.6k, we have added an auto adjustment feature for
  \lnc{\marginparwidth}, such that unless \cmd{\setmarginnotes} have
  been used to make a specific choice, the \lnc{\marginparwidth} is
  chosen according to the algorithm described in
  Section~\ref{sec:auto-csmarg}. The algorithm relies on
  \cmd{\marginparmargin} (if used) being set \emph{before}
  \cmd{\checkandfixthelayout}.

  We may add other auto adjusting features to future \theclass\ releases.
\end{note}


\index{marginalia|)} %|

\section{Putting it together}

    The page layout parameters\index{page layout!class parameters} 
just discussed are not always the same
as those that are expected by \ltx, or by \ltx\ packages. The parameters
that \ltx\ expects are shown in \fref{fig:anoddpage}. You can either use
the class commands for changing the page layout or change the \ltx\ 
parameters\index{page layout!LaTeX parameters?\ltx\ parameters}
directly using either \cmd{\setlength} or \cmd{\addtolength} applied to the
parameter(s) to be modified. If you choose the latter route, those class 
parameters which differ from the standard \ltx\ parameters will \emph{not} be
modified. 

    The general process of setting up your own page layout\index{page layout} 
is along these lines:
\begin{itemize}
\item Decide on the required finished page\indextwo{page}{size} size,
  and pick a stock\indextwo{stock}{size} size that is at least as
  large as the page.
\item If needed, use \cmd{\setstocksize}\index{stock!specifying size}
  to set the values of \lnc{\stockheight} and \lnc{\stockwidth},
  followed by \cmd{\settrimmedsize} to specify the values\ of
  \lnc{\paperheight} and \lnc{\paperwidth}.
  
  If you use and print on, say, A4, the \texttt{a4paper} class option
  is enough, not \cmd{\setstocksize} needed.
\item Decide on the location of the page\index{page!location} with
  respect to the stock\index{stock}. If the page and
  stock\index{stock} sizes are the same, then call
  \verb?\settrims{0pt}{0pt}?.  If they are not the same size then
  decide on the appropriate values for \lnc{\trimtop} and
  \lnc{\trimedge} to position the page on the stock\index{stock}, and
  then set\index{trim!specifying} these through \cmd{\settrims}.
\item Decide on the size of the typeblock\indextwo{typeblock}{size}
  and use \cmd{\settypeblocksize}\index{typeblock!specifying size} to
  specify the values of \lnc{\textheight} and \lnc{\textwidth}.
\item If you need a binding\index{binding allowance} allowance, now is
  the time for \cmd{\setbinding}.
\item Pick the value for the spine margin\index{margin!spine}, and use
  \cmd{\setlrmargins}\index{margin!specifying size} to set the values
  for the \lnc{\spinemargin} and \lnc{\foremargin}.

  An alternative sequence is to use \cmd{\setlrmarginsandblock} to set
  the \lnc{\textwidth} for a particular choice of side
  margins\index{margin}.

\item Pick the value for the upper margin\index{margin!upper} and use
  \cmd{\setulmargins} to set the values\index{margin!specifying size}
  for the \lnc{\uppermargin} and \cmd{\lowermargin}.

  An alternative sequence is to use \cmd{\setulmarginsandblock} to set
  the \lnc{\textheight} for a particular choice of upper and lower
  margins\index{margin}.

  The typeblock is now located\index{typeblock!location} on the page.

\item Pick the values for the \lnc{\headheight} and \lnc{\footskip}
  and use \cmd{\setheadfoot}\index{header!specifying size} to specify
  these.

\item Pick your value for \cmd{\headskip} and use
  \cmd{\setheaderspaces} to set this and \lnc{\headmargin}.

\item If you are going to have any marginal\index{marginalia} notes,
  use \cmd{\setmarginnotes} to specify the values for
  \lnc{\marginparsep}, \lnc{\marginparwidth} and \lnc{\marginparpush}.

\end{itemize}

    You can plan and specify your layout in any order that is 
convenient to you. Each of the page layout commands is independent of the 
others; also if
a value is set at one point, say the \lnc{\textwidth}, and is then
later changed in some way, only the last of the settings is used as the actual
value.


    Comparing \figurerefname s~\ref{fig:oddstock} and~\ref{fig:anoddpage} 
you can see the different layout\index{page layout!parameters} parameters 
provided by the class and used by standard
\ltx. For convenience, and because the figures do not show all
the parameters, the two sets of parameters are listed in \tref{tab:stockpage}.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{The class and \ltx\ page layout parameters}\label{tab:stockpage}
%\begin{tabular}{ll} \hline
\begin{tabular}{ll} \toprule
Class & \ltx\ \\ \midrule
\lnc{\stockheight}    &  \\
\lnc{\trimtop}        &  \\
\lnc{\trimedge}       &  \\
\lnc{\stockwidth}     &  \\
\lnc{\paperheight}    & \lnc{\paperheight}  \\
\lnc{\paperwidth}     & \lnc{\paperwidth}  \\
\lnc{\textheight}     & \lnc{\textheight}  \\
\lnc{\textwidth}      & \lnc{\textwidth}  \\
\lnc{\columnsep}      & \lnc{\columnsep}  \\
\lnc{\columnseprule}  & \lnc{\columnseprule}  \\
\lnc{\spinemargin}    &  \\
\lnc{\foremargin}     &  \\
                      & \lnc{\oddsidemargin}  \\
                      & \lnc{\evensidemargin}  \\
\lnc{\uppermargin}    &  \\
\lnc{\headmargin}     &  \\
                      & \lnc{\topmargin}  \\
\lnc{\headheight}     & \lnc{\headheight}  \\
\lnc{\headsep}        & \lnc{\headsep}  \\
\lnc{\footskip}       & \lnc{\footskip}  \\
\lnc{\marginparsep}   & \lnc{\marginparsep}  \\
\lnc{\marginparwidth} & \lnc{\marginparwidth}  \\
\lnc{\marginparpush}  & \lnc{\marginparpush}  \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

    Unless you are satisfied with the default page layout, after specifying 
the layout that you want you have to call the \cmd{\checkandfixthelayout}
command to finally implement your specification.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\checkandfixthelayout}\oarg{algorithm} \\
\cmd{\checkthelayout}\oarg{algorithm} \\
\cmd{\fixthelayout} \\
\lnc{\baselineskip} \lnc{\topskip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(checkandfixthelayout)%
  {\cs{checkandfixthelayout}\oarg{algorithm}}%
  {Command to check and implement the page layout specifications, adjusting
   the \cs{textheight} using \meta{algorithm} 
   (classic, fixed, lines, or nearest, the default being classic) 
   for the calculation.}%
\glossary(checkthelayout)%
  {\cs{checkthelayout}\oarg{algorithm}}%
  {Command to check the page layout specifications, adjusting
   the \cs{textheight} using \meta{algorithm} 
   (classic, fixed, lines, or nearest, the default being classic) 
   for the calculation.}%
\glossary(topskip)%
  {\ls{topskip}}%
  {The height of the first line of text on a page. This is usually
   less than the \cs{baselineskip}.}
\glossary(baselineskip)%
  {\ls{baselineskip}}%
  {The normal vertical distance between the baselines of adjacent lines 
   of text (depends on the size of the font).}

    The \cmd{\checkandfixthelayout} macro uses 
\cmd{\checkthelayout} to
check the page layout specification you have given, and then calls
\cmd{\fixthelayout} to finally implement it.

The \cmd{\checkthelayout} macro checks the class layout 
parameters\index{page layout!check parameters} to see whether  
they have `sensible' values (e.g., the \lnc{\textwidth} is not negative)
and, depending on the \meta{algorithm} argument, it may modify the 
\lnc{\textheight}. It does not actually implement the layout.

   When using \cmd{\flushbottom} \ltx\ expects that the \lnc{\textheight} 
is such that an integral number of text lines in the body font will fit
exactly into the height. If not, then it issues `underfull vbox' messages.
More precisely, if  $b$ is the \lnc{\baselineskip} and $t$ is the 
\lnc{\topskip}, $N$ is an integer (the number of lines in the typeblock), 
and $T$ is the
\lnc{\textheight} then to avoid underfull vboxes the following relationship
must hold
\begin{equation}
T = (N-1)b + t \label{eq:heightlines}
\end{equation}
By default \cmd{\checkthelayout} ensures that the final \lnc{\textheight} 
meets this criterion. The optional \meta{algorithm} argument lets you control
just how it does this. In the following $H$ is your requested value for
the \lnc{\textheight} and the other symbols are as before, with $T$ as
the adjusted value, and using integer arithmetic.\footnote{In this context 
`integer arithmetic' means that the result of a division will be rounded down.
For example $99/10$ in `real arithmetic' results in $9.9$, whereas with
integer arithmetic the result is 9, not 10.}
The permissible values for \meta{algorithm} are:
\begin{itemize}
\item[\texttt{fixed}] The \lnc{\textheight} is not altered. 
\begin{equation} T = H \end{equation}
If you use this option you may find that underfull vboxes are reported
for \cmd{\flushbottom} pages.
\item[\texttt{classic}] This is the default and is the one used by the standard
classes. 
\begin{equation} T = b \lfloor H/b \rfloor + t \end{equation}
The relationship (\ref{eq:heightlines}) is maintained. This algorithm
gets as close to $H$ as possible from below.
\item[\texttt{lines}] This is similar to \texttt{classic}, but results in a 
smaller final value.
\begin{equation} T = b \lfloor (H-b)/b \rfloor + t \end{equation}
The relationship (\ref{eq:heightlines}) is maintained.
\item[\texttt{nearest}] The calculated value is the nearest to the given value
while still maintaining the relationship (\ref{eq:heightlines}).
\begin{equation} 
  T = b \lfloor (H - t + b/2)/b \rfloor +  t 
\end{equation} 
In contrast to \texttt{classic}, \texttt{nearest}
will get as close to $H$ as possible even if this means that $T$ ends
up being slightly larger than $H$.
\end{itemize}

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Results from sample \cs{textheight} adjustments} \label{tab:textht}
\begin{tabular}{ccccc} \toprule
  & \multicolumn{4}{c}{Algorithm} \\ \cmidrule{2-5}
  &  fixed & classic & lines & nearest \\ 
Requested height & \multicolumn{4}{c}{adjusted height in pts, (lines) } \\ 
\midrule
10.0\cs{baselineskip} & 120.0pt, (10) & 130pt, (11) & 118pt, (10) & 118pt, (10) \\ 
10.2\cs{baselineskip} & 122.4pt, (10) & 130pt, (11) & 118pt, (10) & 118pt, (10) \\ 
10.4\cs{baselineskip} & 124.8pt, (10) & 130pt, (11) & 118pt, (10) & 130pt, (11) \\ 
10.6\cs{baselineskip} & 127.2pt, (10) & 130pt, (11) & 118pt, (10) & 130pt, (11) \\ 
10.8\cs{baselineskip} & 129.6pt, (10) & 130pt, (11) & 118pt, (10) & 130pt, (11) \\ 
11.0\cs{baselineskip} & 132.0pt, (11) & 142pt, (12) & 130pt, (11) & 130pt, (11) \\ 
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

    Table~\ref{tab:textht} shows the results from the various \lnc{\textheight}
adjustment calculations\footnote{For comparison the optimum heights from 
equation \ref{eq:heightlines} for 10, 11 and 12 lines are respectively
118pt, 130pt and 142pt.} where the \lnc{\baselineskip} is 12pt and 
the \lnc{\topskip} is 10pt, which are the normal values for a Computer 
Modern 10pt font.
In all cases the \texttt{fixed} algorithm resulted in 
underfull vboxes. If you know the number of lines that you want, say 42,
then requesting
\begin{lcode}
%% setting equivalent to \setlength{\textheight}{42\baselineskip}
\checkandfixthelayout[lines]
\end{lcode}
will result in the most appropriate \lnc{\textheight}.

    If you use the \Lpack{calc} package you can use constructs like 
the following in a page layout specification:
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\textheight}{41\baselineskip + \topskip}
\settypeblocksize{41\baselineskip + \topskip}{33pc}{*}
\end{lcode}

    The \cmd{\fixthelayout} macro finally implements the layout,
making due adjustement for any binding\index{binding allowance} allowance,
and calculates the values for all the standard \ltx\ layout 
parameters\index{page layout!LaTeX parameters?\ltx\ parameters} (such
that packages can use these expected values).
If you have used the class macros to change
the layout in any way, you must call \cmd{\checkandfixthelayout} after you have
made all the necessary changes. As an aid, the final layout parameter values
are displayed on the terminal and written out to the log file.

\LMnote{2010/09/17}{added \cs{\settypeoutlayoutunit}}
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\typeoutlayout} \\
\cmd{\typeoutstandardlayout} \\
\cmd{\settypeoutlayoutunit}\marg{unit} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(settypeoutlayoutunit)%
  {\cs{settypeoutlayoutunit}}%
  {Allows the user to set the unit in which to typeset the layout
    listing. Supported units: \texttt{pt}, \texttt{mm}, \texttt{cm},
    \texttt{in}, \texttt{bp}, \texttt{dd} and \texttt{cc}.}
\glossary(typeoutlayout)%
  {\cs{typeoutlayout}}%
  {Outputs the current values of the class layout parameters to the 
   terminal and log file.}
\glossary(typeoutstandardlayout)%
  {\cs{typeoutstandardlayout}}%
  {Outputs the current values of the standard \ltx\ layout parameters 
   to the terminal and log file.}
 \cmd{\typeoutlayout} writes the current class layout
parameter\index{page layout!class parameters} values to the terminal 
and the log file. It is called by \cmd{\checkandfixthelayout} but you can 
use it yourself at any time.
The macro \cmd{\typeoutstandardlayout} writes the
standard layout parameter\index{page layout!LaTeX parameters?\ltx\ parameters}
 values to the terminal and log file so that you can
compare the two sets of parameter values.

By using the macro \cmd{\settypeoutlayoutunit}, the user can change
the unit in which the layout list is shown. Very handy when designing
in, say, centimeters. Supported units are \texttt{pt}, \texttt{pc},
\texttt{mm}, \texttt{cm}, \texttt{in}, \texttt{bp}, \texttt{dd} and
\texttt{cc}, default being \texttt{pt}, see \tref{tab:units} for more
information about the units.

\section{Side margins}

    In \Lopt{twoside} printing the spine margin is normally the same on
both recto and verso pages and, unless the spine and \foredge{} margins are the
same, the typeblock is shifted side to side when printing the recto and 
verso pages. Additionally you can have different headers and footers for the
recto and verso pages. However, in \Lopt{oneside} printing the typeblock 
is not moved and the headers and footers are the same for both odd and 
even pages.

    Some documents are designed to have, say, a very wide righthand margin
in which to put illustrations; this leads to needing the spine margin on
verso pages to be much larger than the spine margin on recto pages. This
can be done with the \Lopt{oneside} option. However, different headers
and footers are required for the recto and verso pages, which can only be
done with the \Lopt{twoside} option. The way to get the desired effects
is like this (\Lopt{twoside} is the default class option):
\begin{lcode}
\documentclass{memoir}
%%% set up the recto page layout
\checkandfixthelayout%     or perhaps \checkandfixthelayout[lines]
\setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}% after \checkandfix...
...
\end{lcode}

\section{Printing and viewing}
  
    When \pdfltx\ is used to generate a \pixpdf\ version of a \Pclass{memoir}
document some special setup must be done.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\fixpdflayout} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(fixpdflayout)%
  {\cs{fixpdflayout}}%
  {Sets up page size information for \pdfltx.}
The macro \cmd{\fixpdflayout}\index{page layout!PDF} is automatically called after the preamble when
\pdfltx{} is used to generate \pixpdf. The default definition is effectively:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\fixpdflayout}{\ifpdf\ifnum\pdfoutput>0\relax
  \pdfpageheight=\the\stockheight
  \pdfpagewidth=\the\stockwidth
  \ifdim\pdforigin=0pt\pdforigin=1in\fi
  \ifdim\pdfhorigin=0pt\pdfhorigin=1in\fi
  \fi\fi}
\end{lcode}
The first settings (\verb?\pdfpage...?) ensure that \pdfltx{} knows
the size of the physical sheet\indextwo{stock}{size} for printing. 
The \verb?\...origin? settings
set the \pdf{} origin per the \tx\ origin, provided that their values are
0pt. If you have set the origin values yourself, either in a \pdfltx{} 
configuration\index{configuration file} file or earlier in the preamble, 
the \cmd{\fixpdflayout}
macro will not alter them (if you need an origin value to be 0 then
set it to 1sp, which is visually indistinguishable from 0pt).

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\fixdvipslayout} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(fixdvipslayout)%
  {\cs{fixdvipslayout}}%
  {Sets up page size information for dvi processors.}

The macro \cmd{\fixdvipslayout}\index{page layout!dvips} is automatically 
called after the preamble 
when \pixpdf{} output is not being produced. It provides the \Lprog{dvips} 
processor
with information about the stock\indextwo{stock}{size} size, 
which a viewer or printer may use.

    With a \Lopt{landscape} document and using the processing route
\verb?latex -> dvips? the resulting \file{ps} \pscript{} file may appear 
upside-down when viewed with, say, \Lprog{ghostview} 
(also known as \Lprog{gsview32}). If this happens
try putting the following in your preamble:
\begin{lcode}
\addtodef{\fixdvipslayout}{}{%
  \special{!TeXDict begin /landplus90{true}store end }}
\end{lcode}
If required, additional code can be added to \cmd{\fixdvipslayout} by repeated
applications of \cmd{\addtodef}. Some other potential specials for \pscript{}
printing may be\footnote{At least for an HP 5SiMx LaserJet duplex printer.}
\begin{lcode}
% specify duplex printing 
\special{!TeXDict begin <</Duplex true>> setpagedevice end} 
% specify short side binding
\special{!TeXDict begin <</Tumble true>> setpagedevice end} 
\end{lcode}
%<< because of emacs ...

\section{Example} \label{sec:pexamp}

    Suppose you want a page that will fit on both A4\index{paper!size!A4} 
and US letterpaper\index{paper!size!letterpaper} stock\index{stock},
wanting to do the least amount of trimming. The layout requirements
are as follows.

    The width of the 
typeblock\index{typeblock} should
be such that there are the optimum number of characters per line, and the 
ratio of the height to the width of the typeblock\index{typeblock} should 
equal the golden
section. The text has to start 50pt below the top of the page.
We will use the default \lnc{\headheight} and \lnc{\footskip}.
The ratio of the outer margin\index{margin!outer} to the inner
margin\index{margin!inner} should equal the
golden section\index{golden section}, 
as should the space above and below the header\index{header}. There is
no interest at all in marginal\index{marginalia} notes, so we can 
ignore any settings for these.

    We can either do the maths ourselves or get \ltx\ to do it for us. Let's
use \ltx. First we will work out the size of the largest sheet that can be
cut from A4\index{paper!size!A4} and 
letterpaper\index{paper!size!letterpaper}, 
whose sizes are \abybm{297}{210}{mm} and 
\abybm{11}{8.5}{in}; A4 is taller and narrower than letterpaper. 
\begin{lcode}
\settrimmedsize{11in}{210mm}{*}
\end{lcode}
The stocksize is defined by the class option, which could be either
\Lopt{letterpaper} or \Lopt{a4paper}, but we have to work out the
trims to reduce the stock\index{stock} to the page. To make life easier, 
we will only trim
the \foredge{} and the bottom of the stock\index{stock}, so the 
\lnc{\trimtop} is zero.
The \lnc{\trimtop} and \lnc{\trimedge} are easily specified by 
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\trimtop}{0pt} 
\setlength{\trimedge}{\stockwidth}
\addtolength{\trimedge}{-\paperwidth}
\end{lcode}
Or if you are using the \Lpack{calc} package, perhaps:
\begin{lcode}
\settrims{0pt}{\stockwidth - \paperwidth}
\end{lcode}
Specification of the size of the typeblock\index{typeblock} is also easy 
\begin{lcode}
\settypeblocksize{*}{\lxvchars}{1.618}
\end{lcode}
and now the upper and lower margins\index{margin!upper}\index{margin!lower} 
are specified by
\begin{lcode}
\setulmargins{50pt}{*}{*}
\end{lcode}
The spine and \foredge\ margins\index{margin!spine}\index{margin!foredge?\foredge} 
are specified just by the value of the golden section\index{golden section}, 
via 
\begin{lcode}
\setlrmargins{*}{*}{1.618}
\end{lcode}
The only remaining calculation to be done is the \lnc{\headmargin} and 
\lnc{\headsep}. Again this just involves using a ratio
\begin{lcode}
\setheaderspaces{*}{*}{1.618}
\end{lcode}
To finish off we have to make sure that the layout is changed 
\begin{lcode}
\checkandfixthelayout
\end{lcode}


\subsection{The page layout of this manual}

\begin{figure}
\setlayoutscale{0.49}
\currentstock
\oddpagelayouttrue
\twocolumnlayoutfalse
\drawmarginparstrue
\drawparametersfalse
\drawstock
\caption{The recto page layout for this manual}\label{fig:thispagelay}
\end{figure}



    The page layout for this manual is defined in the preamble\index{preamble} as:
\begin{lcode}
\settrimmedsize{11in}{210mm}{*}
\setlength{\trimtop}{0pt}
\setlength{\trimedge}{\stockwidth}
\addtolength{\trimedge}{-\paperwidth}
\settypeblocksize{7.75in}{33pc}{*}
\setulmargins{4cm}{*}{*}
\setlrmargins{1.25in}{*}{*}
\setmarginnotes{17pt}{51pt}{\onelineskip}
\setheadfoot{\onelineskip}{2\onelineskip}
\setheaderspaces{*}{2\onelineskip}{*}
\checkandfixthelayout
\end{lcode}

An illustration of the layout is shown in \fref{fig:thispagelay} which also
lists the parameter values resulting from the code above, to the nearest point.

I initially used the layout defined in \S\ref{sec:pexamp}, which I thought
looked reasonable, but then I decided to use the one above in order
to save paper\index{paper} when anyone printed out the manual. The wider
typeblock\index{typeblock} also makes it easier for TeX when dealing with 
lines that include unhyphenatable text, like the LaTeX code.

    Andreas Mathias, via Rolf Niepraschk,\footnote{Email 
from \url{niepraschk@ptb.de} on 2002/02/05.}
has suggested that the following might be better for typesetting the manual
on A4 paper.
\begin{lcode}
\documentclass[a4paper]{memoir}
...
\settrimmedsize{297mm}{210mm}{*}
\setlength{\trimtop}{0pt}
\setlength{\trimedge}{\stockwidth}
\addtolength{\trimedge}{-\paperwidth}
\settypeblocksize{634pt}{448.13pt}{*}
\setulmargins{4cm}{*}{*}
\setlrmargins{*}{*}{1.5}
\setmarginnotes{17pt}{51pt}{\onelineskip}
\setheadfoot{\onelineskip}{2\onelineskip}
\setheaderspaces{*}{2\onelineskip}{*}
\checkandfixthelayout
\end{lcode}

    However, the layout that I have provided will print on both letterpaper
and A4 sized stock even if it might look better if it was designed for always
being printed on one or the other.

\section{Predefined layouts}

    The class, like the standard classes, will automatically produce 
working layouts for \Lopt{letterpaper}
and \Lopt{a4paper} size options. They might be a bit problematic, though,
when the page is much smaller, particularly with respect to the space 
alloted for marginal notes. You perhaps will find the \Lpack{layouts}
package~\cite{LAYOUTS} useful for checking the page layout.

   Some non-default layouts are provided via the commands \cmd{\medievalpage},
\cmd{\isopage} and \cmd{\semiisopage}; these set the size and position of the
typeblock with respect to the page. After using any of these commands you
\emph{must} call \cmd{\checkandfixthelayout} (and after having made any other
changes to match the new layout).

\begin{figure}[p]
\begin{leftfullpage}
\centering
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.3}{1.62}{0.18}{1.13}{1.5}{0}
\end{minipage}
\caption{Default layout for letterpaper} \label{fig:pagefirstlay}

\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.3}{1.19}{0.11}{1.5}{2}{0}
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.3}{1.25}{0.08}{1.5}{2}{0}
\end{minipage}
\caption{Letterpaper layout: Left \cs{medievalpage}, Right \cs{medievalpage}\texttt{[12]}}

\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.3}{1.315}{0.11}{1.29}{2}{0}
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.3}{1.3}{0.08}{1.4}{2}{0}
\end{minipage}
\caption{Letterpaper layout: Left \cs{isopage}, Right \cs{isopage}\texttt{[12]}}

\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.3}{1.46}{0.11}{1}{2}{0}
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.3}{1.4}{0.08}{1}{2}{0}
\end{minipage}
\caption{Letterpaper layout: Left \cs{semiisopage}, Right \cs{semiisopage}\texttt{[12]}}
\end{leftfullpage}
\end{figure}
\begin{figure}[p]
\begin{fullpage}
\centering
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.41}{1.75}{0.17}{1.22}{1.5}{0}
\end{minipage}
\caption{Default layout for a4paper}

\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.41}{1.38}{0.11}{1.5}{2}{0}
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.41}{1.39}{0.08}{1.5}{2}{0}
\end{minipage}
\caption{A4paper layout: Left \cs{medievalpage}, Right \cs{medievalpage}\texttt{[12]}}

\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.41}{1.41}{0.11}{1.42}{2}{0}
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.41}{1.41}{0.08}{1.4}{2}{0}
\end{minipage} 
\caption{A4paper layout: Left \cs{isopage}, Right \cs{isopage}\texttt{[12]}}

\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.41}{1.62}{0.11}{1}{2}{0}
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.41}{1.55}{0.08}{1}{2}{0}
\end{minipage}
\caption{A4paper layout: Left \cs{semiisopage}, Right \cs{semiisopage}\texttt{[12]}} \label{fig:pagelastlay}
\end{fullpage}
\end{figure}





\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\medievalpage}\oarg{spine} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(medievalpage)%
  {\cs{medievalpage}\oarg{spine}}%
  {Generates a page layout according to the principles of early printers.}
The \cmd{\medievalpage} command generates the position and size of the 
typeblock according to the principles of medieval scribes and the early 
printers, as discovered and described by Jan Tschichold~\cite{TSCHICHOLD91}.
%%%some details about this were given earlier in \Sref{sec:gutenbergpage}. 
The basic principle is that the 
spine, top, \foredge\ and bottom margins 
around the typeblock are in the ratio 2:3:4:6. Typically the spine margin
was 1/9 the width of the page, which is what \cmd{\medievalpage} assumes
by default. This can be changed with the optional \meta{spine} argument. For
example, to get narrower margins with the spine being 1/12 the page width:
\begin{lcode}
\medievalpage[12]
\end{lcode}
Note that \meta{spine} must be an integer.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\isopage}\oarg{spine} \\
\cmd{\semiisopage}\oarg{spine} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(isopage)%
  {\cs{isopage}\oarg{spine}}%
  {Generates a page layout especially suited to ISO proportioned paper.}
\glossary(semiisopage)%
  {\cs{semiisopage}\oarg{spine}}%
  {Generates a page layout especially suited to ISO proportioned paper but with
   smaller margins than \cs{isopage}.}
Robert Bringhurst~\cite{BRINGHURST99} presented a page layout that was
especially suitable for ISO proportioned paper, although it can be applied to
any page proportion. The \cmd{\isopage} command implements this design. The
spine margin is normally 1/9 the page width and the top margin is 1/9 the
page height, and the \foredge\ and bottom margins are respectively twice the
spine and top margins. 

   The \cmd{\semiisopage} layout is similar where the spine margin by default 
is 1/9 the page width, but the top margin is the same as the spine margin.
Again the \foredge\ and bottom margins are respectively twice the
spine and top margins. 

The size of the spine (and top) margins can be changed by using the optional
\meta{spine} argument, which must be an integer. To set the spine margin to
be, for example, 1/8 of the page width:
\begin{lcode}
\semiisopage[8]% or \isopage[8]
\end{lcode}
The same factor applies to both the spine and top margins in the case
of \cmd{\isopage}.

    Spreads showing a variety of these layouts are in \fref{fig:pagefirstlay} 
through \ref{fig:pagelastlay}. These were produced with the aid of the
\Lpack{layouts} package.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setpagebl}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio} \\
\cmd{\setpageml}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio} \\
\cmd{\setpagetl}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setpagebl)%
  {\cs{setpagebl}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio}}%
  {Specifies a page of the given dimensions positioned at the bottom left
   of the stock; see \cs{settrimmedsize}.}
\glossary(setpagebl)%
  {\cs{setpageml}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio}}%
  {Specifies a page of the given dimensions positioned at the middle left
   of the stock; see \cs{settrimmedsize}.}
\glossary(setpagebl)%
  {\cs{setpagetl}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio}}%
  {Specifies a page of the given dimensions positioned at the top left
   of the stock; see \cs{settrimmedsize}.}
When your page is smaller than the stock it has to be positioned on
the stock by specifying the trims to give the desired size and location.
The macro \cmd{\setpagebl}, which takes the same arguments as 
\cmd{\settrimmedsize} (see \tref{tab:rectsize} on \pref{tab:rectsize}),
calculates the trims so that the page is located at the bottom left of
the stock. Similarly \cmd{\setpageml} and \cmd{\setpagetl} will locate
the page at the middle left and the top left, respectively, of the stock.
For instance, if you are using letterpaper stock but want the final trimmed
page size to be A5, then this will put page area at the bottom left of the
stock.
\begin{lcode}
\pagebv % sets page height and width for A5 paper
\setpagebl{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}{*}
...
\checkandfixthelayout
\end{lcode}
The above macros position the page at the left of the stock because usually 
trimming of the stock is limited to the top, right, and bottom, the left 
being the spine when the pages are finally assembled. To reposition the page to
the center of the stock the following will halve the top and edge
trims.
\begin{lcode}
\settrims{0.5\trimtop}{0.5\trimedge}
...
\checkandfixthelayout
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setpagetm}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio} \\
\cmd{\setpagetr}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio} \\
\cmd{\setpagemr}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio} \\
\cmd{\setpagebr}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio} \\
\cmd{\setpagebm}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio} \\
\cmd{\setpagecc}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setpagetm)%
  {\cs{setpagetm}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio}}%
  {Specifies a page of the given dimensions positioned at the top middle
   of the stock; see \cs{settrimmedsize}.}
\glossary(setpagetr)%
  {\cs{setpagetr}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio}}%
  {Specifies a page of the given dimensions positioned at the top right
   of the stock; see \cs{settrimmedsize}.}
\glossary(setpagemr)%
  {\cs{setpagemr}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio}}%
  {Specifies a page of the given dimensions positioned at the middle right
   of the stock; see \cs{settrimmedsize}.}
\glossary(setpagebr)%
  {\cs{setpagebr}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio}}%
  {Specifies a page of the given dimensions positioned at the bottom right
   of the stock; see \cs{settrimmedsize}.}
\glossary(setpagebm)%
  {\cs{setpagebm}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio}}%
  {Specifies a page of the given dimensions positioned at the bottom middle
   of the stock; see \cs{settrimmedsize}.}
\glossary(setpagecc)%
  {\cs{setpagecc}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio}}%
  {Specifies a page of the given dimensions positioned at the center
   of the stock; see \cs{settrimmedsize}.}

    The commands \cmd{\setpagetm}, \cmd{\setpagetr}, \cmd{\setpagemr},
\cmd{\setpagebr}, \cmd{\setpagebm}, \cmd{\setpagecc} are analagous to the
earlier ones and they set a page at the top middle, top right, middle right,
bottom right, bottom middle and centered with respect to the stock.


Remember that after you have finished defining the layout you want you
have to call \cmd{\checkandfixthelayout} for all the changes to take
effect.


%#% extend

%#% extstart include text-and-fonts.tex

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-04-24 17:14:15 +0200 (Wed, 24 Apr 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 442 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}


\chapter{Text and fonts}

    Presumably you will be creating a document that contains at least some
text. In this chapter I talk a little about the kinds of fonts that you might
use and how text appears on a page.


%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%


\section{Fonts} \label{sec:fonts}

    \alltx{} comes with a standard set of fonts, designed by Donald Knuth,
and known as the Computer Modern\index{font!Computer Modern} font family. 
The Knuthian
fonts\index{font!metafont?\metafont} were created via the \metafont{} 
program~\cite{METAFONT,CM}\index{metafont?\metafont}
and are in the form of bitmaps\index{bitmap}
(i.e., each character is represented as a bunch of tiny dots). Fonts of
this kind are called \emph{bitmap fonts}\indextwo{bitmap}{font}.
 There is also a wide range of \metafont{} fonts available, created by 
many others, in addition to the standard set.  More modern
digital fonts, such as \pscript\indexsupsubmain{font}{PostScript} or 
TrueType\indexsupsubmain{font}{TrueType} fonts are represented in terms
of the curves outlining the character, and it is the job of the printing
machine to fill in the outlines (with a bunch of tiny dots). Fonts of
this type are called \emph{outline fonts}\indextwo{outline}{font}.

\metafont\ fonts
are designed for a particular display resolution and cannot reasonably 
be scaled to match an arbitrary display device, whereas outline fonts can be 
scaled before they are physically displayed.

\PWnote{2009/04/27}{Extended the font use/installation references}
    There is an excessive number of \pscript\indexsupsubmain{font}{PostScript}
and TrueType\indexsupsubmain{font}{TrueType}
fonts available 
and these can all, with some amount of effort, be used with \ltx. How to do
that is outside the scope of this work; Alan Hoenig has written an excellent
book on the subject~\cite{HOENIG98} and there is the invaluable 
\btitle{The \ltx\ Companion} \cite[Chapter 7 Fonts and Encodings]{COMPANION}. 
The original \btitle{The \ltx\ Graphics Companion} had chapters on PostScript
fonts and tools but these were dropped in the second edition to keep it below
an overwhelming size. This material has been updated and is available
free from \url{http://xml.cern.ch/lgc2}; you can also get a 
`work in progress'\pagenote[`work in progress']{\pixxetx\ enables you to 
use Opentype fonts with \ltx, and supports both left-to-right and 
right-to-left typesetting. It has become very popular with those involved
in linguistics and non-Latin scripts.}
about \pixxetx, Unicode\index{Unicode}, and 
Opentype\indexsupsubmain{font}{Opentype}
fonts from the same source. 
There is less detailed, but also free, 
information available via \pixctan, for example Philipp Lehman's 
\textit{Font Installation Guide}~\cite{FONTINST}; even if you are not 
interested in
installing \pscript\ fonts this is well worth looking at just as an
example of the kind of elegant document that can be achieved with \ltx.
If you choose one of the popular
\pscript\indexsupsubmain{font}{PostScript} fonts, such as those built 
into \ixpscript\ printers, you may 
well find that the work has been done for you and it's just a question
of using the appropriate 
package.%
\pagenote[using the appropriate package]{I have found Christopher
League's\index{League, Christopher} \textit{\tx\ support for the FontSite
500 CD}, obtainable from \url{http:contrapunctus.net/fs500tex}, 
extremely useful in providing packages for a wide range of 
\pscript\indexsupsubmain{font}{PostScript} fonts for me to use. You do have 
to buy a CD containing the sources of the fonts from FontSite
(\url{http://www.fontsite.com}); it cost me
a total of \$37.12, including taxes and shipping, in 2002 for 512 
\pscript\ and TrueType\indexsupsubmain{font}{TrueType} professional
quality fonts that are legal and very reasonably priced.

    Many of the fonts fall into the Decorative/Display category but the book
fonts include:
\begin{description}

\item[Blackletter]\typesubidx{Blackletter}
Alte Schwabacher\facesubseeidx{Alte Schwabacher},
Engravers Old English\facesubseeidx{Engravers Old English},
Fette Fraktur\facesubseeidx{Fette Fraktur},
Fette Gotisch\facesubseeidx{Fette Gotisch}, and
Olde English\facesubseeidx{Olde English}.

\item[Uncial/Mediaeval]\typesubidx{Uncial}\typesubidx{Mediaeval}
American UncialXX{American Uncial},
Linden\facesubseeidx{Linden}, and
Rosslaire\facesubseeidx{Rosslaire}.

\item[Geralde/Venetian]\typesubidx{Geralde}\typesubidx{Venetian}
Bergamo\facesubseeidx{Bergamo} (also known as Bembo\facesubseeidx{Bembo}),
Caslon\facesubseeidx{Caslon}, 
Garamond\facesubseeidx{Garamond}, 
Goudy Old Style\facesubseeidx{Goudy Old Style},
Jenson Recut\facesubseeidx{Jenson Recut} (also known as Centaur\facesubseeidx{Centaur}),
URW Palladio\facesubseeidx{URW Palladio} (also known as Palatino\facesubseeidx{Palatino}),
Savoy\facesubseeidx{Savoy} (also known as Sabon\facesubseeidx{Sabon}),
Schnittger\facesubseeidx{Schnittger},
University Old Style\facesubseeidx{University Old Style}, and
Vendome\facesubseeidx{Vendome}.

\item[Transitional]\typesubidx{Transitional}
URW Antiqua\facesubseeidx{URW Antiqua}, 
Baskerville\facesubseeidx{Baskerville},
Century Old Style\facesubseeidx{Century Old Style},
ATF Clearface\facesubseeidx{ATF Clearface},
English Serif\facesubseeidx{English Serif},
Jessica\facesubseeidx{Jessica} (also known as Joanna\facesubseeidx{Joanna}),
Lanston Bell\facesubseeidx{Lanston Bell},
New Baskerville\facesubseeidx{New Baskerville}, and
Nicholas Cochin\facesubseeidx{Nicholas Cochin}.

\item[Modern/Didone]\typesubidx{Modern}\typesubidx{Didone}
Basel\facesubseeidx{Basel} (also known as Basilia\facesubseeidx{Basilia}),
Bodoni\facesubseeidx{Bodoni},
Modern\facesubseeidx{Modern}, and
Walbaum\facesubseeidx{Walbaum}.

\item[Free Form]\typesubidx{Free Form}
Barbedour\facesubseeidx{Barbedour},
Bernhard Modern\facesubseeidx{Bernhard Modern},
Della Robbia\facesubseeidx{Della Robbia},
Engravers Litho\facesubseeidx{Engravers Litho},
Flanders\facesubseeidx{Flanders}, and
Lydian\facesubseeidx{Lydian}.

\item[Sans Serif]\typesubidx{Sans Serif}
There are over 20 in this category but some of the ones I am most familiar
with are: 
Chantilly\facesubseeidx{Chantilly} (also known as Gill Sans\facesubseeidx{Gill Sans}),
Franklin Gothic\facesubseeidx{Franklin Gothic},
Function\facesubseeidx{Function} (also known as  Futura\facesubseeidx{Futura}),
Lanston Koch\facesubseeidx{Lanston Koch},
News Gothic\facesubseeidx{News Gothic},
Opus\facesubseeidx{Opus} (also known as Optima\facesubseeidx{Optima}),
Struktor\facesubseeidx{Struktor} (also known as Syntax\facesubseeidx{Syntax}), and
Unitus\facesubseeidx{Unitus} (also known as Univers\facesubseeidx{Univers}).

\item[Slab Serif]\typesubidx{Slab Serif}
Cheltenham\facesubseeidx{Cheltenham},
Clarendon\facesubseeidx{Clarendon},
Egyptian\facesubseeidx{Egyptian},
Glytus\facesubseeidx{Glytus} (also known as Glypha\facesubseeidx{Glypha}),
URW Latino\facesubseeidx{URW Latino} (also known as Melior\facesubseeidx{Melior}),
Litho Antique\facesubseeidx{Litho Antique},
Serific\facesubseeidx{Serific} (also known as Serifa\facesubseeidx{Serifa}).

\item[Script]\typesubidx{Script}
There are some sixteen Script fonts.

\item[Decorative]\typesubidx{Decorative}
There are over fifty Decorative fonts.

\item[Symbol]\typesubidx{Symbol}
There are a dozen miscellaneous symbol fonts which include, among others,
arrows, borders, fleurons\index{fleuron} and various icons.
\end{description}
}  % end pagenote

    A standard \ltx\ distribution includes some 
\pscript\indexsupsubmain{font}{PostScript} fonts and the packages to support
them are in the \Ppack{psnfss}\index{psnfss?\Ppack{psnfss}}
bundle. Most of the fonts are for normal text work but two supply
symbols rather than characters. Table~\ref{tab:palatinoglyphs}, although it
is specifically for Palatino\facesubseeidx{Palatino}, shows the glyphs 
typically available. Tables~\ref{tab:symbolglyphs} and~\ref{tab:dingglyphs}
show the glyphs in the two symbol fonts.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Glyphs in the \ltx\ supplied Palatino roman font}\label{tab:palatinoglyphs}
\nohexoct
\fonttable{pplr}
\end{table}

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Glyphs in the \ltx\ distributed Symbol font}\label{tab:symbolglyphs}
\nohexoct
\fonttable{psyr}
\end{table}

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Glyphs in the \ltx\ distributed Zapf Dingbat font}\label{tab:dingglyphs}
\nohexoct
\fonttable{pzdr}
\end{table}


These supplied \pscript\ fonts, their respective \ltx\ fontfamily\index{fontfamily} names,
and running text examples of each, are:
\begin{description}
\item[ITC Avant Garde Gothic\facesubseeidx{Avant Garde Gothic}] {\LXfont{pag} 
  is a geometric sans type designed 
  by Herb Lubalin\index{Lubalin, Herb} and Tom Carnase\index{Carnase, Tom} and 
  based on the logo of the \textit{Avant Garde} magazine. 
The fontfamily name is \pfontfam{pag}.

\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
\fox\par\Kafka\par\namesAZ
\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
}

\item[ITC Bookman\facesubseeidx{Bookman}] {\LXfont{pbk} was originally 
sold in 1860 by the Miller \&  Richard\index{Miller \& Richard} foundry 
in Scotland; it was designed by 
Alexander Phemister\index{Phemister, Alexander}. The ITC revival is by
Ed Benguiat\index{Benguiat, Ed}. 
The fontfamily name is \pfontfam{pbk}.


\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
\fox\par\Kafka\par\namesAZ
\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
}

\item[Bitstream Charter\facesubseeidx{Charter}] {\LXfont{bch} was designed
by Matthew Carter\index{Carter, Matthew} for display on low resolution
devices, and is useful for many applications, including bookwork.
The fontfamily name is \pfontfam{bch}.

\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
\fox\par\Kafka\par\namesAZ
\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
}

\item[Courier\facesubseeidx{Courier}] {\LXfont{pcr} is a monospaced font
that was originally
designed by Howard Kettler\index{Kettler, Howard} at IBM and then later
redrawn by Adrian Frutiger\index{Frutiger, Adrian}.
The fontfamily name is \pfontfam{pcr}.

\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
\fox\par\Kafka\par\namesAZ
\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
}

\item[Helvetica\facesubseeidx{Helvetica}] {\LXfont{phv} was originally 
designed for the Haas
foundry in Switzerland by Max Miedinger\index{Miedinger, Max}; it was later
extended by the Stempel foundry and further refined by 
Linotype\index{Linotype}.
The fontfamily name is \pfontfam{phv}.

\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
\fox\par\Kafka\par\namesAZ
\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
}

\item[New Century Schoolbook\facesubseeidx{New Century Schoolbook}] 
  {\LXfont{pnc}
was designed by Morris Benton\index{Benton, Morris} for ATF (American
Type Founders) in the early 20th century. As its name implies it was designed
for maximum legibility in schoolbooks.
The fontfamily name is \pfontfam{pnc}.

\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
\fox\par\Kafka\par\namesAZ
\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
}

\item[Palatino\facesubseeidx{Palatino}] 
  {\LXfont{ppl} was designed by Hermann 
Zapf\index{Zapf, Hermann} and is one of the most popular typefaces today.
The fontfamily name is \pfontfam{ppl}.

\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
\fox\par\Kafka\par\namesAZ
\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
}

\item[Times Roman\facesubseeidx{Times Roman}] 
  {\LXfont{ptm} is Linotype's version
of the Times New Roman\facesubseeidx{Times New Roman} face designed by 
Stanley Morison\index{Morison, Stanley} for the
Monotype Corporation for printing \emph{The Times} newspaper.
The fontfamily name is \pfontfam{ptm}.

\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
\fox\par\Kafka\par\namesAZ
\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
}

\item[Utopia\facesubseeidx{Utopia}] 
  {\LXfont{put} was designed by Robert 
Slimbach\index{Slimbach, Robert} and combines 
Transitional\indextwo{type}{Transitional} features and contemporary details.
The fontfamily name is \pfontfam{put}.

\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
\fox\par\Kafka\par\namesAZ
\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
}

\item[ITC Zapf Chancery\facesubseeidx{Zapf Chancery}] 
  {\LXfont{pzc} is a 
Script\indextwo{type}{Script} type fashioned after the chancery
handwriting styles of the Italian Renaissance. It was created by
Hermann Zapf\index{Zapf, Hermann}.
The fontfamily name is \pfontfam{pzc}.

\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
\fox\par\Kafka\par\namesAZ
\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
}

\item[Symbol\facesubseeidx{Symbol}]
  {\LXfont{psy} contains various symbols and Greek letters for 
  mathematical work; these are most easily accessible via
  the \Lpack{pifont} package.
The fontfamily name is \pfontfam{psy}.

    The available glyphs are shown in \tref{tab:symbolglyphs}.
}

\item[Zapf Dingbats]\facesubseeidx{Zapf Dingbats}
  {\LXfont{pzd} contains a variety of dingbats which, like the Symbol
   characters, are most easily 
   accessible via the \Lpack{pifont} package.
The fontfamily name is \pfontfam{pzd}.

    The available glyphs are shown in \tref{tab:dingglyphs}.
}


\end{description}

    In \ltx\ there are three characteristics that apply to a font. These are:
(a)~the shape\index{font characteristic!shape}, 
(b)~the series\index{font characteristic!series} 
(or weight),%\index{font characteristic!weight|see{series}}, 
and (c)~the family\index{font characteristic!family}. 
Table \ref{tab:fontcat} illustrates these and lists the relevant 
commands\index{font commands} to access the different font categories.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Font categorisation and commands} \label{tab:fontcat}
\begin{tabular}{ll} \toprule
\multicolumn{2}{c}{Shape}\index{font characteristic!shape} \\ \addlinespace
\textup{Upright shape}     & \cmd{\textup}\verb?{Upright shape}? \\
\textit{Italic shape}      & \cmd{\textit}\verb?{Italic shape}? \\
\textsl{Slanted shape}     & \cmd{\textsl}\verb?{Slanted shape}? \\
\textsc{Small Caps shape}  & \cmd{\textsc}\verb?{Small Caps shape}? \\ \addlinespace
\multicolumn{2}{c}{Series or weight}\index{font characteristic!series} \\ \addlinespace
\textmd{Medium series}     & \cmd{\textmd}\verb?{Medium series}? \\
\textbf{Bold series}       & \cmd{\textbf}\verb?{Bold series}? \\ \addlinespace
\multicolumn{2}{c}{Family}\index{font characteristic!family} \\ \addlinespace
\textrm{Roman family}      & \cmd{\textrm}\verb?{Roman family}? \\ 
\textsf{Sans serif family} & \cmd{\textsf}\verb?{Sans serif family}? \\ 
\texttt{Typewriter family} & \cmd{\texttt}\verb?{Typewriter family}? \\ 
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\glossary(textup)%
  {\cs{textup}\marg{text}}%
  {Typeset \meta{text} with an upright font.}
\glossary(textit)%
  {\cs{textit}\marg{text}}%
  {Typeset \meta{text} with an italic font.}
\glossary(textsl)%
  {\cs{textsl}\marg{text}}%
  {Typeset \meta{text} with a slanted (oblique) font.}
\glossary(textsc)%
  {\cs{textsc}\marg{text}}%
  {Typeset \meta{text} with a small caps font.}
\glossary(textmd)%
  {\cs{textmd}\marg{text}}%
  {Typeset \meta{text} with a medium font.}
\glossary(textbf)%
  {\cs{textbf}\marg{text}}%
  {Typeset \meta{text} with a bold font.}
\glossary(textrm)%
  {\cs{textrm}\marg{text}}%
  {Typeset \meta{text} with a Roman font.}
\glossary(textsf)%
  {\cs{textsf}\marg{text}}%
  {Typeset \meta{text} with a Sans serif font.}
\glossary(texttt)%
  {\cs{texttt}\marg{text}}%
  {Typeset \meta{text} with a Typewriter (monospaced) font.}
\end{table}

    The normal body font\index{body font} --- the font used for the bulk 
of the text ---
is an upright, medium, roman font of a size specified by the font size
option for the \cmd{\documentclass}.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\normalfont} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(normalfont)%
  {\cs{normalfont}}%
  {Declaration setting the font to the normal body font (upright, Roman,
and medium weight).} 
The declaration \cmd{\normalfont} sets the font to be the normal body font.

    There is a set of font declarations\index{font declarations}, as shown in \tref{tab:fontdecl},
that correspond to the commands listed in \tref{tab:fontcat}. The commands
are most useful when changing the font for a word or two, while the 
declarations are more convenient when you want to typeset longer passages
in a different font.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Font declarations} \label{tab:fontdecl}
\begin{tabular}{ll} \toprule
\multicolumn{2}{c}{Shape}\index{font characteristic!shape} \\ \addlinespace
\textup{Upright shape}     & \verb?{?\cmd{\upshape} \verb?Upright shape}? \\
\textit{Italic shape}      & \verb?{?\cmd{\itshape} \verb?Italic shape}? \\
\textsl{Slanted shape}     & \verb?{?\cmd{\slshape} \verb?Slanted shape}? \\
\textsc{Small Caps shape}  & \verb?{?\cmd{\scshape} \verb?Small Caps shape}? \\ \addlinespace
\multicolumn{2}{c}{Series or weight}\index{font characteristic!series} \\ \addlinespace
\textmd{Medium series}     & \verb?{?\cmd{\mdseries} \verb?Medium series}? \\
\textbf{Bold series}       & \verb?{?\cmd{\bfseries} \verb?Bold series}? \\ \addlinespace
\multicolumn{2}{c}{Family}\index{font characteristic!family} \\ \addlinespace
\textrm{Roman family}      & \verb?{?\cmd{\rmfamily} \verb?Roman family}? \\ 
\textsf{Sans serif family} & \verb?{?\cmd{\sffamily} \verb?Sans serif family}? \\ 
\texttt{Typewriter family} & \verb?{?\cmd{\ttfamily} \verb?Typewriter family}? \\ 
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\glossary(upshape)%
  {\cs{upshape}}%
  {Declaration for using an upright font.}
\glossary(itshape)%
  {\cs{itshape}}%
  {Declaration for using an italic font.}
\glossary(slshape)%
  {\cs{slshape}}%
  {Declaration for using a slanted font.}
\glossary(scshape)%
  {\cs{scshape}}%
  {Declaration for using a small caps font.}
\glossary(mdseries)%
  {\cs{mdseries}}%
  {Declaration for using a medium font.}
\glossary(bfseries)%
  {\cs{bfseries}}%
  {Declaration for using a bold font.}
\glossary(rmfamily)%
  {\cs{rmfamily}}%
  {Declaration for using a Roman font.}
\glossary(sffamily)%
  {\cs{sffamily}}%
  {Declaration for using a Sans serif font.}
\glossary(ttfamily)%
  {\cs{ttfamily}}%
  {Declaration for using a Typewriter (monospaced) font.}
\end{table}

    Do not go wild seeing how many different kinds of font you can cram into
your work as in example~\ref{egbadmf}.

\begin{egsource}{egbadmf}
Mixing \textbf{different series, \textsf{families}} and
\textsl{\texttt{shapes,}} \textsc{especially in one sentence,} 
is usually \emph{highly inadvisable!}
\end{egsource}
\index{mixing fonts}
\begin{egresult}[Badly mixed fonts]{egbadmf}
Mixing \textbf{different series, \textsf{families}} and
\textsl{\texttt{shapes,}} \textsc{especially in one sentence,} 
is usually \emph{highly inadvisable!}
\end{egresult}

    On the other hand there are occasions when several fonts may be used
for a reasonable effect, as in example~\ref{eg16}.
\begin{egsource}{eg16}
\begin{center}
\textsc{Des Dames du Temps Jardis}
\end{center}%
\settowidth{\versewidth}{Or yet in a year where they are}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth] \begin{itshape}
Prince, n'enquerez de sepmaine \\*
Ou elles sont, ne de cest an, \\*
Qu'a ce reffrain ne vous remaine: \\*
Mais ou sont les neiges d'antan?
\end{itshape}

Prince, do not ask in a week \\*
Or yet in a year where they are, \\*
I could only give you this refrain: \\*
But where are the snows of yesteryear?
\end{verse}
\begin{flushright}
{\bfseries Fran\c{c}ois Villon} [1431--1463?]
\end{flushright}
\end{egsource}

\begin{egresult}[Sometimes mixed fonts work]{eg16}
\begin{center}
\textsc{Des Dames du Temps Jardis}
\end{center}%
\settowidth{\versewidth}{Or yet in a year where they are}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth] \begin{itshape}
Prince, n'enquerez de sepmaine \\* \index[lines]{Prince, n'enquerez de sepmaine}
Ou elles sont, ne de cest an, \\*
Qu'a ce reffrain ne vous remaine: \\*
Mais ou sont les neiges d'antan?
\end{itshape}

Prince, do not ask in a week \\* \index[lines]{Prince, do not ask in a week}
Or yet in a year where they are, \\*
I could only give you this refrain: \\*
But where are the snows of yesteryear?
\end{verse}
\begin{flushright}
{\bfseries Fran\c{c}ois Villon} [1431--1463?]
\end{flushright}
\end{egresult}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\emph}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(emph)%
  {\cs{emph}\marg{text}}%
  {Use a change in font to emphasise \meta{text}.}
The \cmd{\emph}\index{emphasis} command is a font changing command that 
does not fit
into the above scheme of things. What it does is to typeset its \meta{text}
argument using a different font than the surrounding text. By default,
\cmd{\emph} switches between an upright shape and an italic shape. The
commands can be nested to produce effects like those in the next example.

\begin{egsource}{eg:emph}
The \verb?\emph? command is used to produce some text that 
should be \emph{emphasised for some reason and can be
\emph{infrequently interspersed} with some further emphasis} 
just like in this sentence.
\end{egsource}
 
\begin{egresult}[Emphasis upon emphasis]{eg:emph}
The \cmd{\emph} command is used to produce some text that 
should be \emph{emphasised for some reason and can be
\emph{infrequently interspersed} with some further emphasis} 
just like in this sentence.
\end{egresult}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\eminnershape}\marg{shape} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(eminnershape)%
  {\cs{eminnershape}\marg{shape}}%
  {Font shape for emphasized text within emphasized text.}%
If the \cmd{\emph} command is used within italic text then the
newly emphasized text will be typeset using the 
\cmd{\eminnershape} font shape. The default definition is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\eminnershape}{\upshape}
\end{lcode}
which you can change if you wish.



\section{Font sizes}

    The Computer Modern \metafont{} fonts come in a fixed number of 
sizes\index{font size}, with
each size being subtly different in shape so that they blend harmoniously.
Traditionally, characters were designed for each size to be cut, and
Computer Modern follows the traditional type design. For example, the smaller
the size the more likely that the characters will have a relatively larger
width.
Outline fonts\indextwo{outline}{font} can be scaled to any size, 
but as the scaling is typically 
linear, different sizes do not visually match quite as well.

    Computer Modern fonts come in twelve sizes which, rounded to a point,
are: 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 17, 20 and 25pt.
   In \ltx\ the size for a particular font is specifed by a macro name like
\cs{scriptsize} and not by points; for example \cs{scriptsize}, not 
7pt.\footnote{It is possible to use points but that is outside the scope
of this manual.} 
The actual size of, say, \cs{scriptsize} characters, is not fixed but depends
on the type size option given for the document. 

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Standard font size declarations} \label{tab:fontsize}
\begin{tabular}{llcll} \toprule
\cmd{\tiny} & {\tiny tiny} & & \cmd{\scriptsize} & {\scriptsize scriptsize} \\[5pt]
\cmd{\footnotesize} & {\footnotesize footnotesize} & & \cmd{\small} & {\small small} \\[5pt]
\cmd{\normalsize} & {\normalsize normalsize} & & \cmd{\large} & {\large large} \\[5pt]
\cmd{\Large} & {\Large Large} & & \cmd{\LARGE} & {\LARGE LARGE} \\[5pt]
\cmd{\huge} & {\huge huge} & & \cmd{\Huge} & {\Huge Huge} \\[5pt]
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

 Standard
\ltx\ provides ten
declarations, illustrated in \tref{tab:fontsize}, for setting the type size, 
which means that two of the sizes are
not easily accessible. Which two depend on the class and the 
selected point size option. However, for normal typesetting four different
sizes should cover the majority of needs, so there is plenty of scope with
a mere ten to choose from.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Standard font sizes} \label{tab:standardclassfontsize}
\begin{tabular}{lrrr} \toprule
Class option        & 10pt & 11pt & 12pt \\ \midrule
\cmd{\tiny}         &  5pt &  6pt &  6pt \\
\cmd{\scriptsize}   &  7pt &  8pt &  8pt \\
\cmd{\footnotesize} &  8pt &  9pt & 10pt \\
\cmd{\small}        &  9pt & 10pt & 11pt \\
\cmd{\normalsize}   & 10pt & 11pt & 12pt \\ 
\cmd{\large}        & 12pt & 12pt & 14pt \\
\cmd{\Large}        & 14pt & 14pt & 17pt \\
\cmd{\LARGE}        & 17pt & 17pt & 20pt \\
\cmd{\huge}         & 20pt & 20pt & 25pt \\
\cmd{\Huge}         & 25pt & 25pt & 25pt \\ 
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

    The \cmd{\normalsize} is the size that is set as the class 
option\index{class option} and is the size used for the body\index{body font} 
text. The \cmd{\footnotesize} is the size normally
used for typesetting footnotes\index{footnote}. The standard classes 
use the other sizes, usually the larger ones, for typesetting certain 
aspects of a document, for example sectional headings. 

With respect to the standard classes, the \Mname\ class 
provides a wider range of the document class type size options and
adds two extra font size declarations, namely \cmd{\miniscule}
and \cmd{\HUGE}, one at each end of the range.

    The \Mname\ class font size declarations names are given in 
\tref{tab:fsizenames} together with the name set in the specified size 
relative to the manual's \cs{normalsize} font.
font. The corresponding actual sizes are given in \tref{tab:fsizepoints}.

\begin{table}
\centering 
\caption{The \Mname\ class font size declarations} \label{tab:fsizenames}
\begin{tabular}{llll} \toprule
\cmd{\miniscule} & {\miniscule miniscule} & \cmd{\tiny} & {\tiny tiny} \\
\cmd{\scriptsize} & {\scriptsize scriptsize} & \cmd{\footnotesize} & {\footnotesize footnotesize} \\
\cmd{\small} & {\small small} & \cmd{\normalsize} & {\normalsize normalsize} \\
\cmd{\large} & {\large large} & \cmd{\Large} & {\Large\strut Large} \\ 
\cmd{\LARGE} & {\LARGE LARGE} & \cmd{\huge} & {\huge\strut huge} \\ 
\cmd{\Huge} & {\Huge Huge}    & \cmd{\HUGE} & {\HUGE\strut HUGE} \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

\begin{table}
\begin{adjustwidth}{-1in}{-1in}
\centering
\caption{The \Mname\ class font sizes} \label{tab:fsizepoints}
\begin{tabular}{lrrrrrrrrrrrr}\toprule
Class option & \Lopt{9pt} & \Lopt{10pt} & \Lopt{11pt} & \Lopt{12pt} & \Lopt{14pt} & \Lopt{17pt} & \Lopt{20pt} & \Lopt{25pt} & \Lopt{30pt} & \Lopt{36pt} & \Lopt{48pt} & \Lopt{60pt} \\ \midrule
\cmd{\miniscule}    &  4pt &  5pt &  6pt &  7pt &  8pt &  9pt & 
                      10pt & 11pt & 12pt & 14pt & 17pt & 20pt \\
\cmd{\tiny}         &  5pt &  6pt &  7pt &  8pt &  9pt & 10pt &
                      11pt & 12pt & 14pt & 17pt & 20pt & 25pt \\
\cmd{\scriptsize}   &  6pt &  7pt &  8pt &  9pt & 10pt & 11pt &
                      12pt & 14pt & 17pt & 20pt & 25pt & 30pt \\
\cmd{\footnotesize} &  7pt &  8pt &  9pt & 10pt & 11pt & 12pt &
                      14pt & 17pt & 20pt & 25pt & 30pt & 36pt \\
\cmd{\small}        &  8pt &  9pt & 10pt & 11pt & 12pt & 14pt &
                      17pt & 20pt & 25pt & 30pt & 36pt & 48pt \\
\cmd{\normalsize}   & 9pt & 10pt & 11pt & 12pt & 14pt & 17pt &
                      20pt & 25pt & 30pt & 36pt & 48pt & 60pt \\
\cmd{\large}        & 10pt & 11pt & 12pt & 14pt & 17pt & 20pt &
                      25pt & 30pt & 36pt & 48pt & 60pt & 72pt \\
\cmd{\Large}        & 11pt & 12pt & 14pt & 17pt & 20pt & 25pt &
                      30pt & 36pt & 48pt & 60pt & 72pt & 84pt \\
\cmd{\LARGE}        & 12pt & 14pt & 17pt & 20pt & 25pt & 30pt &
                      36pt & 48pt & 60pt & 72pt & 84pt & 96pt \\
\cmd{\huge}         & 14pt & 17pt & 20pt & 25pt & 30pt & 36pt &
                      48pt & 60pt & 72pt & 84pt & 96pt & 108pt \\
\cmd{\Huge}         & 17pt & 20pt & 25pt & 30pt & 36pt & 48pt &
                      60pt & 72pt & 84pt & 96pt & 108pt & 120pt \\
\cmd{\HUGE}         & 20pt & 25pt & 30pt & 36pt & 48pt & 60pt & 
                      72pt & 84pt & 96pt & 108pt & 120pt & 132pt \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{adjustwidth}
\end{table}

    Whereas the standard font sizes range from 5pt to 25pt, \Mname\  
provides for fonts ranging from 4pt to 132pt. That is: \par
{\fontsize{4}{5}\selectfont from the 4pt size (the 9pt \cs{miniscule} size)} \par
{\fontsize{9}{10}\selectfont through the 9pt normal size\raggedright\par}% \par
{\fontsize{60}{72}\selectfont through the 60pt normal size\raggedright\par}% \par
{\fontsize{132}{160}\selectfont \raggedright to the 132pt size (the 60pt
\cs{HUGE} size).\raggedright\par}


This extended range, though,
is only accessible if you are using outline\indextwo{outline}{font} fonts
and the \Lopt{extrafontsizes} class option.
If you are using bitmap fonts\indextwo{bitmap}{font} then, for example,
the \cmd{\HUGE} font will be automatically limited to 25pt, and the minimum
size of a \cmd{\miniscule} font is 5pt.


\section{Spaces}

\subsection{Paragraphs}

    In traditional typography the first line of a paragraph, unless it comes
immediately after a chapter or section heading, is indented. Also, there
is no extra space between paragraphs. Font designers go to great pains
to ensure that they look good when set with the normal leading. Sometimes,
such as when trying to meet a University's requirements for the layout
of your thesis, you may be forced to ignore the experience of centuries.

\index{space!inter-paragraph|(}
   If you like the idea of eliminating paragraph indentation and using extra
inter-paragraph space to indicate where paragraphs start and end, consider how
confused your reader will be if the last paragraph on the page ends with a full
line; how will the reader know that a new paragraph starts at the top of
the following page?

\begin{syntax}
\cs{par} \\
\lnc{\parskip} \\
\cmd{\abnormalparskip}\marg{length} \\
\cmd{\nonzeroparskip} \\
\cmd{\traditionalparskip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(par)%
  {\cs{par}}%
  {Ends a paragraph.}
\glossary(parksip)%
  {\cs{parskip}}%
  {Space between paragraphs.}
\glossary(abnormalparskip)%
  {\cs{abnormalparskip}\marg{length}}%
  {Sets the inter-paragraph spacing to \meta{length}.}
\glossary(nonzeroparskip)%
  {\cs{nonzeroparskip}}%
  {Sets the inter-paragraph spacing to a `perhaps not too unreasonable' non-zero value.}
\glossary(traditionalparskip)%
  {\cs{traditionalparskip}}%
  {Sets the interparagraph spacing to its traditional value.}
In the input text the end of a paragraph is indicated either by leaving
a blank line, or by the \cs{par} command. 
The length \lnc{\parskip} is the inter-paragraph spacing, and is normally 0pt.
You can change this by saying, for example:
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\parskip}{2\baselineskip}
\end{lcode}
but you are likely to find that many things have changed that you
did not expect, because \ltx\ uses the \cs{par} command in many
places that are not obvious.

If, in any event, you wish to do a disservice to your readers you can use 
\cmd{\abnormalparskip} to set the inter-paragraph spacing to
a value of your own choosing. Using the \cmd{\nonzeroparskip} will set
the spacing to  what might be a reasonable non-zero value.\footnote{Except
that all values except zero are unreasonable.} 
Both these macros try and eliminate the worst of the side effects that occur
if you just simply change \lnc{\parskip} directly.

Following the \cmd{\traditionalparskip} declaration all will be returned 
to their traditional values. 

    I based the code for these functions upon the NTG classes~\cite{NTG}
which indicated some of the pitfalls in increasing the spacing. The difficulty
is that \cs{par}, and hence \lnc{\parskip}, occurs in many places, some
unexpected and others deeply buried in the overall code.

\index{space!inter-paragraph|)}

\index{space!at start of paragraph|see{paragraph indentation}}

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\parindent} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(parindent)%
  {\cs{parindent}}
  {Indentation at the start of the first line of a paragraph.}
\index{paragraph indentation}
The length \lnc{\parindent} is the indentation at the start of a paragraph's
first line. This is usually of the order of 1 to 1\slashfrac{1}{2} em.
To make the first line of a paragraph flushleft set this to zero:
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
\end{lcode}

\subsection{Double spacing}

\index{double spacing|(}

    Some of those that have control over the visual appearance of academic
theses like them to be `double spaced'. This, of course, will make the thesis
harder to read\footnote{I certainly found them so when I was having to read
them before examining the candidates for their degrees. The writers of the
regulations, which were invariably single spaced, seemed immune to any
suggestions.} but perhaps that is the purpose, or maybe they have stock
(shares) in papermills and lumber companies, as the theses were usually 
required to be printed single sided as well.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\baselineskip} \lnc{\onelineskip} \\
\end{syntax}
The length \lnc{\baselineskip} is the space, or 
leading\index{leading}, between the baselines of adjacent text lines, 
and is constant
throughout a paragraph. The value  may change
depending on the size of the current font. More precisely, the 
\cmd{\baselineskip} depends on the font being used at the \emph{end} of 
the paragraph. The class also provides the length \lnc{\onelineskip}
which is the default leading for the normal body font.\footnote{That
  is \cmd{\onelineskip} is set in the \text{memX.clo} file
  corresponding to the font size class option. For \texttt{10pt}, the
  size is set via \texttt{mem10.clo}.} As far as the class
is concerned this is a constant value; that is, unlike \lnc{\baselineskip},
it never alters \lnc{\onelineskip}. You can use (fractions) of 
\lnc{\onelineskip} to specify vertical spaces in terms of normal text 
lines.

    The following is heavily based on the \Lpack{setspace} 
package~\cite{SETSPACE}, but
the names have been changed to avoid any clashes. Like the nonzero 
\lnc{\parskip}, the \lnc{\baselineskip} rears its head in many places, and 
it is hard for a package to get at the internals of the overlying class
and kernel code. This is not to say that all is well with trying to deal
with it at the class level.

\LMnote{2010/09/19}{Added description about the starred macros}
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\OnehalfSpacing} \cmd{\OnehalfSpacing*} \\
\cmd{\DoubleSpacing} \cmd{\DoubleSpacing*}\\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(OnehalfSpacing)%
  {\cs{OnehalfSpacing}}%
  {Declaration increasing the baseline to create the illusion of double spacing.}
\glossary(OnehalfSpacing*)%
  {\cs{OnehalfSpacing*}}%
  {Same as \cs{OnehalfSpacing} but also effects page note and floats.}
\glossary(DoubleSpacing)%
  {\cs{DoubleSpacing}}%
  {Declaration doubling the baselineskip.}
\glossary(DoubleSpacing*)%
  {\cs{DoubleSpacing*}}%
  {Same as \cs{DoubleSpacing} but also effects page notes and floats.}

  The declaration \cmd{\OnehalfSpacing} increases the spacing between
  lines so that they appear to be double spaced (especially to the
  thesis layout arbiters), while the declaration \cmd{\DoubleSpacing}
  really doubles the spacing between lines which really looks bad; but
  if you have to use it, it is there. The spacing in footnotes and
  floats (e.g., captions) is unaltered, which is usually required once
  the controllers see what a blanket double spacing brings. Sometimes
  it is also required to make page notes and floats (including
  captions) in `double' spacing. The starred version of the two macros
  above takes care of this. Alternatively the spacing in page notes
  (i.e. footnotes and friends) or floats an be set explicitly using
\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\setPagenoteSpacing}\marg{factor}\\
  \cmd{\setFloatSpacing}\marg{factor}
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setFloatSpacing)%
  {\cs{setFloatSpacing}}%
  {Explicitly set the spacing used inside floats.}
\glossary(setPagenoteSpacing)%
  {\cs{setPagenoteSpacing}}%
  {Explicitly set the spacing used inside page notes such including footnotes.}
\cs{setFloatSpacing} should go after say \cs{OnehalfSpacing*} if used.



\PWnote{2009/06/24}{Corrected \cs{SetSingleSpace} to \cs{setSingleSpace}}
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\SingleSpacing} \cmd{\setSingleSpace}\marg{factor} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(SingleSpacing)%
  {\cs{SingleSpacing}}%
  {Declaration restoring normal single spacing (or that set by \cs{setSingleSpace}).}
\glossary(setSingleSpace)%
  {\cs{setSingleSpace}\marg{factor}}%
  {Change the baselineskip by \meta{factor}.}
The \cmd{\setSingleSpace} command is meant to be used to
adjust \emph{slightly} the normal spacing betwen lines, perhaps because
the font being used looks too crampled or loose. The effect is that the 
normal \lnc{\baselineskip} spacing will be multiplied by \meta{factor}, which
should be close to 1.0. Using \cmd{\setSingleSpace} will also reset
the float and page note spacings.

The declaration \cmd{\SingleSpacing} returns everthing to normal, or at
least the setting from \cmd{\setSingleSpace} if it has been used. It
will also reset float and page note spacings to the same value.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{SingleSpace} ...\eenv{SingleSpace} \\
\senv{Spacing}\marg{factor} ... \eenv{Spacing} \\
\senv{OnehalfSpace} ... \eenv{OnehalfSpace} \\
\senv{OnehalfSpace*} ... \eenv{OnehalfSpace*} \\
\senv{DoubleSpace} ... \eenv{DoubleSpace} \\
\senv{DoubleSpace*} ... \eenv{DoubleSpace*} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(SingleSpace)%
  {\senv{SingleSpace}}%
  {Environment form of \cs{SingleSpacing}}
\glossary(Spacing)%
  {\senv{SingleSpace}\marg{factor}}%
  {Environment form of \cs{setSingleSpace}}
\glossary(OnehalfSpace)%
  {\senv{OnehalfSpace}}%
  {Environment form of \cs{OnehalfSpacing}}
\glossary(OnehalfSpace*)%
  {\senv{OnehalfSpace*}}%
  {Environment form of \cs{OnehalfSpacing*}}
\glossary(DoubleSpace)%
  {\senv{DoubleSpace}}%
  {Environment form of \cs{DoubleSpacing}}
\glossary(DoubleSpace*)%
  {\senv{DoubleSpace*}}%
  {Environment form of \cs{DoubleSpacing*}}

These are the environments corresponding to the declarations presented
earlier, for when you want to change the spacing locally.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setDisplayskipStretch}\marg{fraction} \\
\cmd{\memdskipstretch} \\
\cmd{\noDisplayskipStretch} \\
\cmd{\memdskips} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setDisplayskipStretch)%
  {\cs{setDisplayskipStretch}\marg{factor}}%
  {Increase the display skips by gmeta{factor}.}%
\glossary(noDisplayskipStretch)%
  {\cs{noDisplayskipStretch}}%
  {No increased display skips.}%
\glossary(memdskipstretch)%
  {\cs{memdskipstretch}}%
  {The current factor for increasing display skips.}%
\glossary(memdskips)%
  {\cs{memdskips}}%
  {Adjusts the display skips according to \cs{memdskipstretch}.}%


If you have increased the interlinear space in the text you may wish, or be
required, to increase it around displays (of maths). 
The declaration \cmd{\setDisplayskipStretch} will increase the before 
and after displayskips by \meta{fraction}, which must be at least 0.0. 
More precisely, it defines \cmd{\memdskipstretch} to be \meta{fraction}.
The \cmd{\noDisplayskipStretch} declaration
sets the skips back to their normal values. It is equivalent to
\begin{lcode}
\setDisplayskipStretch{0.0}
\end{lcode}
The skips are changed within the macro \cmd{\memdskips} which, in turn, is
called by \cmd{\everydisplay}. If you find odd spacing around displays then
redefine \cmd{\memdskips} to do nothing. Its orginal specification is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\memdskips}{%
  \advance\abovedisplayskip \memdskipstretch\abovedisplayskip
  \advance\belowdisplayskip \memdskipstretch\belowdisplayskip
  \advance\abovedisplayshortskip \memdskipstretch\abovedisplayshortskip
  \advance\belowdisplayshortskip \memdskipstretch\belowdisplayshortskip}
\end{lcode}

    If you need to use a \Ie{minipage} as a stand-alone item in a widely 
spaced text then you
may need to use the \Ie{vminipage} environment instead to get the before and
after spacing correct.


\section{Overfull lines}

\index{overfull lines|(}
\index{space!interword|(}


    \tx\ tries very hard to keep text lines justified while keeping the 
interword spacing as constant as possible, but sometimes fails and complains
about an overfull hbox.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\fussy} \cmd{\sloppy} \\
\senv{sloppypar} ... \eenv{sloppypar} \\
\cmd{\midsloppy} \\
\senv{midsloppypar} ... \eenv{midsloppypar} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(fussy)%
  {\cs{fussy}}%
  {Declaration for \tx\ to minimise interword space variations in justified text lines.}
\glossary(sloppy)%
  {\cs{sloppy}}%
  {Declaration for \tx\ to allow large interword space variations in justified 
   text lines.}%
\glossary(sloppypar)%
  {\senv{sloppypar}}%
  {Typeset contents of the enclosed paragraph(s) using \cs{sloppy}.}%
\glossary(midsloppy)%
  {\cs{midsloppy}}%
  {Declaration for \tx\ to allow moderate interword space variations in justified 
   text lines.}%
\glossary(midsloppypar)%
  {\senv{midsloppypar}}%
  {Typeset contents of the enclosed paragraph(s) using \cs{midsloppy}.}%

    The default mode for \ltx\ typesetting is \cmd{\fussy} where 
the (variation of) interword spacing in justified text is kept to a 
minimum. Following the \cmd{\sloppy}
declaration there may be a much looser setting of justified text. 
The \Ie{sloppypar} environment is equivalent to:
\begin{lcode}
{\par \sloppy ... \par}
\end{lcode}

    Additionally the class provides the \cmd{\midsloppy} declaration (and the
\Ie{midsloppypar} environment) which allows a setting somewhere between 
\cmd{\fussy} and \cmd{\sloppy}. Using \cmd{\midsloppy} you will get fewer 
overfull lines compared with \cmd{\fussy} and fewer obvious large 
interword spaces than with \cmd{\sloppy}.
I have used \cmd{\midsloppy} for this manual; it hasn't prevented 
overfull lines or noticeably different interword spaces, but has markedly 
reduced them compared with \cmd{\fussy} and \cmd{\sloppy} respectively.

\index{overfull lines|)}
\index{space!interword|)}

\section{Sloppybottom}

\indextwo{widow}{line}\indextwo{orphan}{line}
    \tx\ does its best to avoid widow and orphan lines --- a widow is where 
the last line of a paragraph ends up at the top of a page, and an 
orphan\footnote{Knuth uses the term `club' instead of the normal typographers'
terminology.} 
is when the first line of a paragraph is at the bottom of a page.

    The following is the generally suggested method of eliminating widows 
and orphans, but it may well result in some odd looking pages, especially
if \cmd{\raggedbottom} is not used.
\begin{lcode}
\clubpenalty=10000
\widowpenalty=10000
\raggedbottom
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\enlargethispage}\marg{length} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(enlargethispage)%
  {\cs{enlargethispage}\marg{length}}%
  {Increase (or decrease) the text height of the current page by \meta{length}.}
    You can use \cmd{\enlargethispage} to add or subtract to the text height
on a particular page to move a line forwards or backwards between two pages.


 Here is one person's view on the matter:
\begin{quote}
\ldots in experimenting with raggedbottom, widowpenalty, and clubpenalty,
I think that I have not found a solution that strikes me as particularly
desirable. I think what I would really like is that widows (i.e., left-over
single lines that begin on the following page) are resolved not by pushing
one extra line from the same paragraph also onto the next page, but by
stretching the textheight to allow this one extra at the bottom of the
same page. \\
\hfill /iaw (from CTT, \textit{widow handling?}, May 2006)
\end{quote}

As so often happens, Donald Arseneau\index{Arseneau, Donald} 
came up with a solution.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\sloppybottom} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(sloppybottom)%
  {\cs{sloppybottom}}%
  {Declaration for \tx\ to allow an extra line at the bottom of a page.
   The \cs{topskip} must have been increased beforehand.}%
The declaration \cmd{\sloppybottom} lets \tx\ put an extra line at
the bottom of a page to avoid a widow on the following page. 

    The \lnc{\topskip} must have been increased beforehand for this to
work (a 60\% increase is reasonable) and this will push the text
lower on the page. Run \cmd{\checkandfixthelayout} after the change (which
may reduce the number of lines per page). For example, in the preamble:
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\topskip}{1.6\topskip}
\checkandfixthelayout
\sloppybottom
\end{lcode}

\indextwo{widow}{line}\indextwo{orphan}{line}
    The late Michael Downes\index{Downes, Michael} provided the following 
(from CTT \textit{widow/orphan control package (for 2e)?}, 1998/08/31):
\begin{quote}
    For what it's worth here are the penalty values that I use when I don't
[want] to \emph{absolutely} prohibit widow/orphan break, but come
about as close as \tx\ permits otherwise. This is copied straight out
of some code that I had lying around. I guess I could wrap it into
package form and post it to CTAN. \\
\hfill Michael Downes
\end{quote}

\begin{lcode}
% set \clubpenalty, etc. to distinctive values for use
% in tracing page breaks. These values are chosen so that
% no single penalty will absolutely prohibit a page break, but 
% certain combinations of two or more will.
\clubpenalt=9996
\widowpenalty=9999
\brokenpenalty=4991
% Reiterate the default value of \redisplaypenalty, for
% completeness.
% Set postdisplaypenalty to a fairly high value to discourage a
% page break between a display and a widow line at the end of a
% paragraph.
\predisplaypenalty=10000
\postdisplaypenalty=1549
% And then \displaywidowpenalty should be at least as high as
% \postdisplaypenalty, otherwise in a situation where two displays
% are separated by two lines, TeX will prefer to break between the
% two lines, rather than before the first line.
\displaywidowpenalty=1602
\end{lcode}

\indextwo{widow}{line}\indextwo{orphan}{line}
    As you can see, perfect automatic widow/orphan control is problematic 
though typographers are typically more concerned about widows than orphans ---
a single line of a paragraph somehow looks worse at the top of a page than
at the bottom. If all else fails, the solution is either to live with the 
odd line or to reword the text.

\section{Text case}
\label{sec:text-case}

The standard kernel \cmd{\MakeUppercase}\marg{text} and
\cmd{\MakeLowercase}\marg{text} 
basically upper or lower case everything it can get its hands on. This
is not particularly nice if the \meta{text} contain, say, math.

In order to help with this we provide the \cmd{\MakeTextUppercase} and
\cmd{\MakeTextLowercase} macros from the \Lpack{textcase} package
(\cite{textcase}) by David Carlisle. The following is DCs own
documentation of the provided code changed to match the typography we
use.

\fancybreak{}

\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\MakeTextUppercase}\marg{text}\\
  \cmd{\MakeTextLowercase}\marg{text}
\end{syntax}
\glossary(MakeTextUppercase)
  {\cs{MakeTextUppercase}\marg{text}}
  {Upper case \meta{text} by leave math, references, citations and
    \cs{NoCaseChange}\marg{text} alone.}
\glossary(MakeTextLowercase)
  {\cs{MakeTextLowercase}\marg{text}}
  {Lower case \meta{text} by leave math, references, citations and
    \cs{NoCaseChange}\marg{text} alone.}
\cmd{\MakeTextUppercase} and \cmd{\MakeTextLowercase} are versions of
the standard \cmd{\MakeUppercase} and \cmd{\MakeLowercase} that do not
change the case of any math sections in their arguments.
\begin{verbatim}
\MakeTextUppercase{abc\ae\ \( a = b \)  and $\alpha \neq a$ 
  or even \ensuremath{x=y} and $\ensuremath{x=y}$}
\end{verbatim}
Should produce:
\begin{quotation}
 ABC\AE\ \( a = b \)  AND $\alpha \neq a$ 
  OR EVEN \ensuremath{x=y} AND $\ensuremath{x=y}$
\end{quotation}

We incorporates some changes suggested by Donald Arseneau so that as
well as math mode, the arguments of \cmd{\cite}, \cmd{\label} and
\cmd{\ref} are also prevented from being uppercased.  So you can now
go
\begin{verbatim}
\MakeTextUppercase{%
   Text in section~\ref{sec:text-case}, about \cite[pp 2--4]{textcase}}
\end{verbatim}
which produces
\begin{quotation}
\MakeTextUppercase{%
   Text in section~\ref{sec:text-case}, about \cite[pp 2--4]{textcase}}
\end{quotation}
If, instead, the standard \cmd{\MakeUppercase} were used here, the keys
`sec:text-case' and `textcase' would be uppercased and generate errors about
undefined references to SEC:TEXT-CASE  and TEXTCASE.

\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\NoCaseChange}\marg{text}
\end{syntax}
\glossary(NoCaseChange)
 {\cs{NoCaseChange}\marg{text}}
 {The argument of this macro is not touched by \cs{MakeTextUppercase}
   or \cs{MakeTextLowercase}.}
Sometimes there may be a special section of text that should not be
uppercased. This can be marked with \cmd{\NoCaseChange}, as follows.
\begin{verbatim}
\MakeTextUppercase{% 
   Text \NoCaseChange{More Text} yet more text}
\end{verbatim}
which produces
\begin{quotation}
\MakeTextUppercase{%
   Text \NoCaseChange{More Text} yet more text}
\end{quotation}

\cmd{\NoCaseChange} has other uses. If for some reason you need a
tabular environment within an uppercased section, then you need
to ensure that the name `tabular' and the preamble (eg `ll')
does not get uppercased:
\begin{verbatim}
\MakeTextUppercase{%
   Text \NoCaseChange{\begin{tabular}{ll}}%
                       table&stuff\\goes&here
        \NoCaseChange{\end{tabular}}
   More text}
\end{verbatim}
which produces
\begin{quotation}
\MakeTextUppercase{%
   Text \NoCaseChange{\begin{tabular}{ll}}%^^A
                       table&stuff\\goes&here
        \NoCaseChange{\end{tabular}}
   More text}
\end{quotation}

\subsection{Nested text}
The commands defined here only skip math sections and \cmd{\ref} arguments
if they are not `hidden' inside a \verb|{ }| brace group. All text inside
such a group will be made uppercase just as with the standard
\cmd{\MakeUppercase}.
\begin{verbatim}
\MakeTextUppercase{a b {c $d$} $e$}
\end{verbatim}
produces
\begin{quotation}
 \MakeTextUppercase{a b {c $d$} $e$}
\end{quotation}
Of course, this restriction does not apply to the arguments of the
supported commands \verb|\ensuremath|, \verb|\label|, \verb|\ref|, and
\verb|\cite|.

If you cannot arrange for your mathematics to be at the outer level of
brace grouping, you should use the following basic technique (which
works even with the standard \cmd{\MakeUppercase} command). Define a
new command that expands to your math expression, and then use that
command, with \cmd{\protect}, in the text to be uppercased. Note that
if the text being uppercased is in a section title or other moving
argument you may need to make the definition in the document preamble,
rather than just before the section command, so that the command is
defined when the table of contents file is read.
\begin{verbatim}
\MakeTextUppercase{%
       Text \fbox{$a=b$ and $x=y$}}%

\newcommand{\mathexprone}{$a=b$}
\newcommand{\mathexprtwo}{$x=y$}
\MakeTextUppercase{%
       Text \fbox{\protect\mathexprone\ and \protect\mathexprtwo}}%
\end{verbatim}
which produces
\begin{quotation}
\MakeTextUppercase{%
       Text \fbox{$a=b$ and $x=y$}}%

\newcommand{\mathexprone}{$a=b$}
\newcommand{\mathexprtwo}{$x=y$}
\MakeTextUppercase{%
       Text \fbox{\protect\mathexprone\ and \protect\mathexprtwo}}%
\end{quotation}


\fancybreak{}

See also \cite{textcase} for some information about upper casing
citations using a non-nummeric style.


% \subsubsection{Citations}
% As documented above, \cmd{\cite} and \cmd{\ref} commands are not
% uppercased by \cmd{\MakeTextUppercase}. If you are using a non-numeric
% citation scheme you may want the replacement text for \cmd{\cite} to
% be uppercased.

% It is difficult to arrange that \cmd{\MakeTextUppercase} uppercases
% such text, not least because this would lead to interaction with the
% many bibliography packages which redefine \cmd{\cite} one way or
% another. One possibility to achieve this is to use Donald Arseneau's
% cite package and to locally redefine \cmd{\citeform} to add
% \cmd{\MakeUppercase} around the final text string produced by \cmd{\cite}.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \MakeTextUppercase{%
%        Text \cite{bbb} and \cite{ccc}}

% {\renewcommand\citeform{\MakeUppercase}\MakeTextUppercase{%
%        Text \cite{bbb} and \cite{ccc}}}
% \end{verbatim}
% which produces\footnote{This is faked, so this document does not
%  rely on \texttt{cite.sty} being installed}
% \begin{quotation}
%  TEXT [1] AND [David Carlisle 1997]

%  TEXT [1] AND [DAVID CARLISLE 1997]
% \end{quotation}




%#% extend
%#% extstart include titles.tex

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-04-24 17:14:15 +0200 (Wed, 24 Apr 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 442 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}


\chapter{Titles}

   The standard classes provide little in the way of help in setting
the title page(s) for your work, as the \cmd{\maketitle} command
is principally aimed at generating a title for an article in a technical
journal; it provides little for titles for works like theses, reports or
books. For these I recommend that you design your own title page 
layout\footnote{If you are producing a thesis you are probably told 
just how it must look.}
using the regular \ltx\ commands to lay it out, and ignore \cmd{\maketitle}.

    Quoting from Ruari McLean~\cite[p. 148]{MCLEAN80} in reference to the 
title page he says:
\begin{quotation}
    The title-page states, in words, the actual title (and sub-title, if 
there is one) of the book and the name of the author and publisher, and
sometimes also the number of illustrations, but it should do more than that.
From the designer's point of view, it is the most important page in the
book: it sets the style. It is the page which opens communication with the
reader\ldots

    If illustrations play a large part in the book, the title-page opening 
should, or may, express this visually. If any form of decoration is used 
inside the book, e.g., for chapter openings, one would expect this to be
repeated or echoed on the title-page.

    Whatever the style of the book, the title-page should give a foretaste
of it. If the book consists of plain text, the title-page should at least 
be in harmony with it. The title itself should not exceed the width of the
type area, and will normally be narrower\ldots
\end{quotation}

    A pastiche of McLean's title page is shown in \fref{figure:titleTH}.

\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{showtitle}
\titleTH
\end{showtitle}
\caption{Layout of a title page for a book on typography}\label{figure:titleTH}
\end{figure}


\begin{comment}
Figures~\ref{fig:titleTH} and~\ref{fig:titleDB}, for example, 
show title pages created using normal \ltx, without bothering 
with \cmd{\maketitle}.
\end{comment}

   The typeset format of the \cmd{\maketitle} command is virtually fixed
within the \ltx\ standard classes. This class
provides a set of formatting commands that can be used to modify
the appearance of the title\index{title} information; that is, the contents of
the \cmd{\title}, \cmd{\author} and \cmd{\date} commands. 
It also keeps the values
of these commands so that they may be printed again later in the
document.
   The class also inhibits the normal automatic cancellation of titling
commands after \cmd{\maketitle}. This means that you can have multiple
instances of the same, or perhaps different, titles in one document;
for example on a half title page\index{half-title page} and the
full title page\index{title page}.
Hooks are provided so that additional titling elements can be defined
and printed by \cmd{\maketitle}.
  The \cmd{\thanks} command is enhanced to provide various configurations
for both the marker symbol and the layout of the thanks\index{thanks} notes.

\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{showtitle}
\titleDS
\end{showtitle}
\caption{Example of a mandated title page style for a doctoral thesis}\label{figure:titleDS}
\end{figure}

\begin{figure}%\setlength{\unitlength}{1pt}
\centering
%\begin{showtitle}
{\titleRB}
%\end{showtitle}
\caption{Example of a Victorian title page}\label{figure:titleRB}
\end{figure}

\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{showtitle}
\titleDB
\end{showtitle}
\caption{Layout of a title page for a book on book design}\label{figure:titleDB}
\end{figure}

\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{showtitle}
\titleGM
\end{showtitle}
\caption{Layout of a title page for a book about books}\label{figure:titleGM}
\end{figure}

    Generally speaking, if you want anything other than minor variations
on the \cmd{\maketitle} layout then it is better to ignore \cmd{\maketitle}
and take the whole layout into your own hands so you can place everthing 
just where you want it on the page.

\section{Styling the titling}


\index{title!styling|(}

   The facilities provided for typesetting titles are limited, essentially
catering for the kind of titles of articles published in technical journals.
They can also be used as a quick and dirty method for typesetting titles
on reports, but for serious work, such as a title page for a book or thesis,
each title page\index{title page} should be handcrafted. 
For instance, a student of mine, Donald Sanderson\index{Sanderson, Donald}
used \ltx\ to typeset his doctoral thesis, and \fref{figure:titleDS} shows 
the title page style mandated by Rensselear Polytechnic Institute as of 1994.
Many other examples of title pages, together with the code to create them,
are in~\cite{TITLEPAGES}.

    Another handcrafted title page\index{title page} from~\cite{TITLEPAGES} is 
shown in \fref{figure:titleRB}. This one is based on an old booklet I found 
that was 
published towards the end of the 19th century and exhibits the love of 
Victorian printers in displaying a variety of types; the rules are
an integral part of the title page. For the purposes of this manual I 
have used New Century\index{New Century Schoolbook} Schoolbook, which 
is part of the regular
\ltx\ distribution, rather than my original choice of 
Century Old Style\index{Century Old Style}
which is one of the commercial FontSite\index{FontSite} fonts licensed from 
the 
SoftMaker/ATF library, supported for \ltx\ through 
Christopher\index{League, Christopher}
League's estimable work~\cite{TEXFONTSITE}.

    The title page in \fref{figure:titleDB} follows the style of 
of \textit{The Design of Books}~\cite{ADRIANWILSON93}
and a page similar to Nicholas Basbanes \textit{A Gentle Madness: Bibliophiles, 
Bibliomanes, and the Eternal Passion for Books} is illustrated in 
\fref{figure:titleGM}. These are all from~\cite{TITLEPAGES} and handcrafted.

In contrast the following code produces the standard \cmd{\maketitle} layout.

\begin{egsource}{eg:maketitle}
\title{MEANDERINGS}
\author{T. H. E. River \and
        A. Wanderer\thanks{Supported by a grant from the 
        R. Ambler's Fund}\\
        Dun Roamin Institute, NY}
\date{1 April 1993\thanks{First drafted on 29 February 1992}}
...
\maketitle
\end{egsource}

\begin{egresult}[Example \cs{maketitle} title]{eg:maketitle}
%\begin{figure}
%\centering
%\caption{Example \cs{maketitle} title} \label{fig:maketitle}
%\rule{\textwidth}{0.4pt}
%
%\vspace*{2ex}
\begin{center}
\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
\begin{minipage}{0.75\textwidth}
\begin{center}
{\Large MEANDERINGS} \\
\vspace*{2ex}
T. H. E. River and A. Wanderer\textsuperscript{*} \\
Dun Roamin Institute, NY \\
\vspace*{2ex}
1 April 1993\textsuperscript{\dag}
\begin{displaymath}
\vdots
\end{displaymath}
\end{center}
\begin{footnotesize}
\rule{0.3\textwidth}{0.4pt} \\
\noindent
\textsuperscript{*} Supported by a grant from the R. Ambler's Fund \\
\textsuperscript{\dag} First drafted on 29 February 1992
\end{footnotesize}
\end{minipage}
\vspace{0.75\onelineskip}
\end{center}

%\rule{\textwidth}{0.4pt}
%\end{figure}
\end{egresult}

   This part of the class is a reimplementation of the \Lpack{titling}
package~\cite{TITLING}.

The class provides a configurable \cmd{\maketitle} command.
The \cmd{\maketitle} command as defined by the class 
is essentially
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\maketitle}{%
   \vspace*{\droptitle}
   \maketitlehooka
   {\pretitle \title \posttitle}
   \maketitlehookb
   {\preauthor \author \postauthor}
   \maketitlehookc
   {\predate \date \postdate}
   \maketitlehookd
   \thispagestyle{title}
}
\end{lcode}
where the \pstyle{title} pagestyle is initially the same as the
\pstyle{plain} pagestyle.
The various macros used within \cmd{\maketitle} are described below.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\pretitle}\marg{text} \cmd{\posttitle}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\preauthor}\marg{text} \cmd{\postauthor}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\predate}\marg{text} \cmd{\postdate}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(pretitle)%
  {\cs{pretitle}\marg{text}}%
  {Command processed before the \cs{title} in \cs{maketitle}.} 
\glossary(posttitle)%
  {\cs{postitle}\marg{text}}%
  {Command processed after the \cs{title} in \cs{maketitle}.} 
\glossary(preauthor)%
  {\cs{preauthor}\marg{text}}%
  {Command processed before the \cs{author} in \cs{maketitle}.} 
\glossary(postauthor)%
  {\cs{postauthor}\marg{text}}%
  {Command processed after the \cs{author} in \cs{maketitle}.} 
\glossary(predate)%
  {\cs{predate}\marg{text}}%
  {Command processed before the \cs{date} in \cs{maketitle}.} 
\glossary(postate)%
  {\cs{postdate}\marg{text}}%
  {Command processed after the \cs{date} in \cs{maketitle}.} 
These six commands each have a single argument, \meta{text},
which controls the typesetting of the 
standard elements of the document's \cmd{\maketitle}
command. The \cmd{\title} is effectively processed between the 
\cmd{\pretitle} and \cmd{\posttitle} commands; that is, like:
\begin{lcode}
{\pretitle \title \posttitle}
\end{lcode}
and similarly for the \cmd{\author} and \cmd{\date} commands. The 
commands are initialised to mimic the normal result of \cmd{\maketitle}
typesetting in the \Lclass{report} class.
That is, the default definitions of the commands are:
\begin{lcode}
\pretitle{\begin{center}\LARGE}
\posttitle{\par\end{center}\vskip 0.5em}
\preauthor{\begin{center}
           \large \lineskip 0.5em%
           \begin{tabular}[t]{c}}
\postauthor{\end{tabular}\par\end{center}}
\predate{\begin{center}\large}
\postdate{\par\end{center}}
\end{lcode}

They can be changed to obtain different effects. For example to get
a right justified sans-serif title and a left justifed small caps
date:
\begin{lcode}
\pretitle{\begin{flushright}\LARGE\sffamily}
\posttitle{\par\end{flushright}\vskip 0.5em}
\predate{\begin{flushleft}\large\scshape}
\postdate{\par\end{flushleft}}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\droptitle} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(droptitle)%
  {\cs{droptitle}}%
  {Length controlling the position of \cs{maketitle} on the page (default 0pt).}
 The \cmd{\maketitle} command puts the title at a particular height on the 
page. 
 You can change the vertical position of the title via the length
\lnc{\droptitle}. Giving this a positive value will lower the title and a
negative value will raise it. The default definition is: 
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\droptitle}{0pt}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\maketitlehooka} \cmd{\maketitlehookb} \\
\cmd{\maketitlehookc} \cmd{\maketitlehookd} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(maketitlehooka)%
  {\cs{maketitlehooka}}%
  {Hook into \cs{maketitle} applied before the \cs{title}.}
\glossary(maketitlehookb)%
  {\cs{maketitlehookb}}%
  {Hook into \cs{maketitle} applied between the \cs{title} and \cs{author}.}
\glossary(maketitlehookc)%
  {\cs{maketitlehookc}}%
  {Hook into \cs{maketitle} applied between the \cs{author} and \cs{date}.}
\glossary(maketitlehookd)%
  {\cs{maketitlehookd}}%
  {Hook into \cs{maketitle} applied after the \cs{date}.}
 These four hook commands are provided so that additional elements may
be added to \cmd{\maketitle}. These are initially defined to do nothing
but can be renewed. For example, some publications
want a statement about where an article is published immediately
before the actual titling text. The following defines a command
\cmd{\published} that can be used to hold the publishing information
which will then be automatically printed by \cmd{\maketitle}.
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\published}[1]{%
   \gdef\puB{#1}}
\newcommand{\puB}{}
\renewcommand{\maketitlehooka}{%
   \par\noindent \puB}
\end{lcode}
You can then say:
\begin{lcode}
\published{Originally published in 
          \textit{The Journal of ...}\thanks{Reprinted with permission}}
...
\maketitle
\end{lcode}
to print both the published and the normal titling information. Note
that nothing extra had to be done in order to use the \cmd{\thanks} command
in the argument to the new \cmd{\published} command.

\index{title page|(}

\begin{syntax}
\senv{titlingpage} text \eenv{titlingpage} \\
\senv{titlingpage*} text \eenv{titlingpage*} 
\end{syntax}
\glossary(titlingpage)%
  {\senv{titlingpage}}%
  {Environment for a title page, resets the page counter to 1 after it}
\glossary(titlingpage*)%
  {\senv{titlingpage*}}%
  {Like \senv{titlingpage}, but does not reset the page counter.}
   When one of the standard classes is used with the \Lopt{titlepage}
option, \cmd{\maketitle} puts the title elements on an unnumbered page
and then starts a new page numbered page 1. 
The standard classes also provide
a \Ie{titlepage} environment which starts a new unnumbered page and at the
end starts a new page numbered 1. You are entirely responsible
for specifying exactly what and where is to go on this title page.
If \cmd{\maketitle} is used  within the \Ie{titlepage} environment it
will start yet another page.

   This class provides neither a \Lopt{titlepage} option nor
a \Ie{titlepage} environment; instead it provides the \Ie{titlingpage}
environment which falls between the \Lopt{titlepage}
option and the \Ie{titlepage} environment. Within the \Ie{titlingpage}
environment you can use the \cmd{\maketitle} command, and any others 
you wish. The \pstyle{titlingpage} pagestyle is used, and 
at the end it starts another ordinary page numbered one
(\senv{titlingpage*} does note reset the page number). 
The \pstyle{titlingpage} pagestyle is initially defined to be the same
as the \pstyle{empty} pagestyle.

   For example, to put both the title and an abstract\index{abstract} 
on a title page,
with a \pstyle{plain} pagestyle:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{document}
\begin{titlingpage}
\aliaspagestyle{titlingpage}{plain}
\setlength{\droptitle}{30pt} lower the title
\maketitle
\begin{abstract}...\end{abstract}
\end{titlingpage}
\end{lcode}

However, it is not required to use \senv{titlingpage} to create a
title page, you can use regular \ltx\ typesetting without any special
environment.  That is like:
\begin{lcode}
\pagestyle{empty}
%%% Title, author, publisher, etc.,  here
\cleardoublepage
...
\end{lcode}

   By default, titling information is centered with respect to the
width of the typeblock\index{typeblock}.
   Occasionally someone asks on the \texttt{comp.text.tex} newsgroup how
to center the titling information on a title page 
with respect to the width of the physical 
page. If the typeblock\index{typeblock} is centered with respect to the physical page,
then the default centering suffices. If the typeblock\index{typeblock} is not physically
centered, then the titling information either has to be shifted 
horizontally or \cmd{\maketitle} has to be made to think that the typeblock\index{typeblock}
has been shifted horizontally. The simplest solution is to use the
\cmd{\calccentering} and \Ie{adjustwidth*} command and environment. For
example:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{titlingpage}
  \calccentering{\unitlength}
  \begin{adjustwidth*}{\unitlength}{-\unitlength}
    \maketitle
  \end{adjustwidth*}
\end{titlingpage}
\end{lcode}

\index{title page|)}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\title}\marg{text} \cmd{\thetitle} \\
\cmd{\author}\marg{text} \cmd{\theauthor} \\
\cmd{\date}\marg{text} \cmd{\thedate} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(title)
  {\cs{title}\marg{text}}%
  {Used by \cs{maketitle} to typeset \meta{text} as the document  title.}
\glossary(thetitle)
  {\cs{thetitle}}%
  {Copy of \meta{text} from \cs{title}.}
\glossary(author)
  {\cs{author}\marg{text}}%
  {Used by \cs{maketitle} to typeset \meta{text} as the document author.}
\glossary(theauthor)
  {\cs{theauthor}}%
  {Copy of \meta{text} from \cs{author}.}
\glossary(date)
  {\cs{date}\marg{text}}%
  {Used by \cs{maketitle} to typeset \meta{text} as the document date.}
\glossary(thedate)
  {\cs{thedate}}%
  {Copy of \meta{text} from \cs{date}.}

   In the usual document classes, the contents (\meta{text}) of
the \cmd{\title}, \cmd{\author} and \cmd{\date}
macros used for \cmd{\maketitle} are unavailable once \cmd{\maketitle} 
has been
issued. The class provides the \cmd{\thetitle},
\cmd{\theauthor} and \cmd{\thedate} commands that can be used for printing
these elements of the title later in the document, 
if desired. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\and} \cmd{\andnext} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(and)%
  {\cs{and}}%
  {Use within the argument to \cs{author} to separate author's names.}
\glossary(andnext)%
  {\cs{andnext}}%
  {Use within the argument to \cs{author} to insert a newline..}
   The macro \cmd{\and} is used within the argument to the
\cmd{\author} command to add some extra space between the author's names.
The class \cmd{\andnext} macro inserts a newline instead of a space.
Within the \cmd{\theauthor} macro both \cmd{\and} and \cmd{\andnext}
are replaced by a comma.

   The class does not follow the standard classes' habit
of automatically killing the titling
commands after \cmd{\maketitle} has been issued. You can have multiple
\cmd{\title}, \cmd{\author}, \cmd{\date} and \cmd{\maketitle} 
commands in your
document if you wish. For example, some reports are issued with
a title page, followed by an executive summary, and then they
have another, possibly modified, title at the start of
the main body of the report. This can be accomplished like this:
\begin{lcode}
\title{Cover title}
...
\begin{titlingpage}
\maketitle
\end{titlingpage}
...
\title{Body title}
\maketitle
...
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\killtitle} \cmd{\keepthetitle} \\
\cmd{\emptythanks} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(killtitle)%
  {\cs{killtitle}}%
  {Makes all aspects of \cs{maketitle} unavailable.}
\glossary(keepthetitle)%
  {\cs{keepthetitle}}%
  {Makes most aspects of \cs{maketitle} unavailable but keeps \cs{thetitle},
  \cs{theauthor} and \cs{thedate}.}
\glossary(emptythanks)%
  {\cs{emptythanks}}%
  {Discards any text from previous uses of \cs{thanks}.}
    The \cmd{\killtitle} macro makes all aspects of titling, including
\cmd{\thetitle} etc.,
unavailable from the point that it is issued (using this command will save
some macro space if the \cmd{\thetitle}, etc., commands are not required).
Using this command is the class's manual version
of the automatic killing performed by the standard classes.
The \cmd{\keepthetitle} command performs a similar function, except that
it keeps the \cmd{\thetitle}, \cmd{\theauthor} and \cmd{\thedate} commands,
 while killing everything else.

The \cmd{\emptythanks} command discards any text from prior use of 
\cmd{\thanks}.
This command is useful when \cmd{\maketitle} is used multiple times ---
the \cmd{\thanks} commands in each use just stack up the texts for output
at each use, so each subsequent use of \cmd{\maketitle} will output all 
previous \cmd{\thanks} texts together with any new ones. To avoid this,
put \cmd{\emptythanks} before each \cmd{\maketitle} after the first.

\index{title!styling|)}


\section{Styling the thanks} \label{sec:thanks}

\index{thanks}
\index{thanks!styling|(}

    The class provides a configurable \cmd{\thanks} command.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\thanksmarkseries}\marg{format} \\
\cmd{\symbolthanksmark} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(thanksmarkseries)%
  {\cs{thanksmarkseries}\marg{format}}%
  {Thanks marks will be printed using \meta{format} series of symbols.}
\glossary(symbolthanksmark)%
  {\cs{symbolthanksmark}}
  {Set the thanks marks to be printed using the footnote series of symbols.}
 Any \cmd{\thanks} are marked with symbols in the 
titling and footnotes\index{footnote}.
The command \cmd{\thanksmarkseries} 
can be used to change the marking style. The \meta{format} argument
is the name of one of the formats for printing a counter. The name 
is the same as that of a counter format but without the backslash.
To have the \cmd{\thanks} marks as lowercase letters instead of symbols 
do:
\begin{lcode}
\thanksmarkseries{alph}
\end{lcode}
Just for convenience the \cmd{\symbolthanksmark} command sets the series
to be footnote\index{footnote} symbols.
Using this class the potential names for \meta{format} are:
\texttt{arabic}, \texttt{roman}, \texttt{Roman}, \texttt{alph}, 
\texttt{Alph}, and \texttt{fnsymbol}. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\continuousmarks} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(continuousmarks)%
  {\cs{continuousmarks}}%
  {Specifies that the thanks/footnote marker is not zeroed after titling.}
The \cmd{\thanks} command uses the \Icn{footnote} counter, 
and normally the counter
is zeroed after the titling so that the footnote marks\index{footnote!mark} start from 1.
If the counter should not be zeroed, then just specify 
\cmd{\continuousmarks}.
This might be required if numerals are used as the thanks markers.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\thanksheadextra}\marg{pre}\marg{post} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(thanksheadextra)%
  {\cs{thanksheadextra}\marg{pre}\marg{post}}%
  {Inserts \meta{pre} and \meta{post} before and after thanks markers
   in the titling code.}
The \cmd{\thanksheadextra} command will insert
\meta{pre} and \meta{post} before and after the thanks markers in the
titling block. By default \meta{pre} and \meta{post} are empty.
For example, to put parentheses round the titling markers do:
\begin{lcode}
\thanksheadextra{(}{)}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\thanksmark}\marg{n} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(thanksmark)%
  {\cs{thanksmark}\marg{n}}%
  {Prints a thanks mark identical to the n'th (previously) printed mark.}
It is sometimes desireable to have the same thanks text be applied to,
say, four out of six authors, these being the first 3 and the last one.
The command \cmd{\thanksmark}\marg{n} is similar to 
\cmd{\footnotemark}\oarg{n} in that it prints a thanks mark identical
to that of the \meta{n}'th  \cmd{\thanks} command. No changes are made
to any thanks in the footnotes\index{footnote}. For instance, in the following
the authors Alpha and Omega will have the same mark:
\begin{lcode}
\title{The work\thanks{Draft}}
\author{Alpha\thanks{ABC},
        Beta\thanks{XYZ} and 
        Omega\thanksmark{2}} 
\maketitle
\end{lcode}

%\begin{syntax}
%\cmd{\thanksgap}\marg{length} \\
%\end{syntax}
%The marks in the titling block printed by the 
%\cmd{\thanks} and \cmd{\thanksmark}
%commands take zero space. This is acceptable if they come at the end of
%a line, but not in the middle of a line. Use the 
%\cmd{\thanksgap} command immediately after a mid-line
%\cmd{\thanks} or \cmd{\thanksmark} command to add \meta{length} amount of
%space before the next word. For example, if there are three authors
%from two different institutions:
%\begin{lcode}
%\author{Alpha\thanks{ABC},
%        Omega\thanks{XYZ}\thanksgap{1ex} and 
%        Beta\thanksmark{1}} 
%\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\thanksmarkstyle}\marg{defn} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(thanksmarkstyle)%
  {\cs{thanksmarkstyle}\marg{defn}}%
  {Sets the style for the thanks marks at the foot.}
By default the thanks mark at the foot is typeset as a superscript. In
the class this is specifed via
\begin{lcode}
\thanksmarkstyle{\textsuperscript{#1}}
\end{lcode}
where \verb?#1? will be replaced by the thanks mark symbol. You can change
the mark styling
if you wish. For example, to put parentheses round the
mark and typeset it at normal size on the baseline:
\begin{lcode}
\thanksmarkstyle{(#1)}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\thanksmarkwidth} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(thanksmarkwidth)%
  {\cs{thanksmarkwidth}}%
  {Width of box for the thanks marks at the foot.}
 The thanks mark in the footnote\index{footnote} is typeset right justified in a box
of width \lnc{\thanksmarkwidth}. The first line of the thanks text starts
after this box. The initialisation is 
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\thanksmarkwidth}{1.8em}
\end{lcode}
giving the default position.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\thanksmarksep} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(thanksmarksep)%
  {\cs{thanksmarksep}}%
  {Indentation of second and subsequent thanks text lines at the foot.}
The value of the length
 \lnc{\thanksmarksep} controls the indentation the
second and subsequent lines of the thanks text, with respect to
the end of the mark box. As examples: 
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\thanksmarksep}{0em}
\end{lcode}
 will align the left hand ends of of a multiline thanks text, while: 
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\thanksmarksep}{-\thanksmarkwidth}
\end{lcode}
will left justify any second and subsequent lines of the thanks text. 
This last
setting is the initialised value, giving the default appearance.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\thanksfootmark} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(thanksfootmark)%
  {\cs{thanksfootmark}}%
  {Typesets a thanks mark at the foot.}
    A thanks mark in the footnote\index{footnote} region is typeset by \cmd{\thanksfootmark}.
The code for this is roughly:
\LMnote{2012/07/02}{Text changed to reflect the actual code}
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\thanksfootmark}{%
  \hbox to\thanksmarkwidth{\hfil\normalfont%
     \thanksscript{\thefootnote}}}
\end{lcode}
You should not need to change the definition
of \cmd{\thanksfootmark} 
but you may want to change the default definitions of one or more
of the macros it uses.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\thanksscript}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(thanksfootmark)%
  {\cs{thanksfootmark}}%
  {Handle the inner part of the thanks mark at the foot.}
This is initially defined as: 
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\thanksscript}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}
\end{lcode}
so that \cmd{\thanksscript} typesets its argument as a superscript, which
is the default for thanks notes.



\begin{comment}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\thanksscript}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
Note that the thanks mark, together with the \verb?\...pre? and \verb?\...post?
commands form the \meta{text} argument to the \cmd{\thanksscript} command. 
This is initially defined as: 
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\thanksscript}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}
\end{lcode}
so that \cmd{\thanksscript} typesets its argument as a superscript, which
is the default for thanks notes. If you would prefer the mark to be
set at the baseline instead, for example, just do: 
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\thanksscript}[1]{#1}
\end{lcode}
 and if you also wanted very small symbols on the baseline you could do:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\thanksscript}[1]{\tiny #1}
\end{lcode}

Alternatively 
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\thanksscript}[1]{#1}
\thanksfootextra{\bfseries}{.}
\end{lcode}
will give a bold baseline mark followed by a dot.

   Using combinations of these macros you can easily define
different layouts for the thanks footnotes\index{footnote}. Here are some
sample, but to shorten them I have ignored any
\cs{renewcommand}s and \cs{setlength}s, leaving these to be implied
as necessary.
\begin{itemize}
\item Setting \verb?\thanksfootextra{}{\hfill}? left justifies the mark
    in its box:
   \begin{itemize}
   \item \verb?\thanksscript{\llap{#1\space}}}, \verb?\thanksmarkwidth{0em}? and \\
         \verb?\thanksmargin{0em}? puts the baseline mark in the margin\index{margin}
         and the text left justified.
   \item Using \verb?\thanksscript{#1}?, \verb?\thanksmarkwidth{1em}? and \\
         \verb?\thanksmargin{-\thanksmarkwidth}? makes the baseline mark 
         and text left adjusted.
   \item \verb?\thanksscript{#1}?, \verb?\thanksmarkwidth{1em}? and
         \verb?\thanksmargin{0em}? puts the baseline mark left adjusted
         and the text indented and aligned, like this marked
         sentence is typeset.
   \end{itemize}

\item Setting \verb?\thanksfootextra{ }? and \verb?\thanksscript{#1}? 
      right justifies the baseline mark and a space in the mark box:
   \begin{itemize}
   \item The normal style is
         defined by \verb?\thanksmarkwidth{1.8em}? and \\
         \verb?\thanksmargin{-\thanksmarkwidth}? which put the mark 
         indented and the text left adjusted, like a normal indented
         paragraph\index{paragraph!indentation}.
   \item \verb?\thanksmarkwidth{1.8em}? and
         \verb?\thanksmargin{0em}? put the mark indented 
         and the text indented and aligned.
   \end{itemize}

\end{itemize}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\end{comment}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makethanksmark} \\
\cmd{\makethanksmarkhook} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(makethanksmark)%
  {\cs{makethanksmark}}%
  {Typesets the thanks marker and text at the foot.}
\glossary(makethanksmarkhook)
  {\cs{makethanksmarkhook}}
  {Code hook into \cs{makethanksmark}.}
The macro \cmd{\makethanksmark} typesets both the thanks marker (via
\cmd{\thanksfootmark}) and the thanks text. You probably will not need
to change its default definition. Just in case, though, 
\cmd{\makethanksmark}
calls the macro \cmd{\makethanksmarkhook} before it does any typesetting.
The default definition of this is: 
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\makethanksmarkhook}{}
\end{lcode}
which does nothing.

   You can redefine \cmd{\makethanksmarkhook} to do something useful. For
example, if you wanted a slightly bigger baseline skip you could do:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\makethanksmarkhook}{\fontsize{8}{11}\selectfont}
\end{lcode}
where the numbers \texttt{8} and \texttt{11} specify the point size of the font 
and the baseline skip
respectively. In this example 8pt is the normal \cmd{\footnotesize} in
a 10pt document, and 11pt is the baselineskip for \cmd{\footnotesize}
text in an 11pt document (the normal baseline skip for \cmd{\footnotesize}
in a 10pt document is 9.5pt);
adjust these numbers to suit.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\thanksrule} \\
\cmd{\usethanksrule} \\
\cmd{\cancelthanksrule} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(thanksrule)%
  {\cs{thanksrule}}%
  {The rule to be typeset before the thanks in the foot.}
\glossary(usethanksrule)%
  {\cs{usethanksrule}}%
  {Specifies that the \cs{thanksrule} is to be typeset in the 
   \texttt{titlingpage} environment.}
\glossary(cancelthanksrule)%
  {\cs{cancelthanksrule}}%
  {Specifies that the \cs{footnoterule} is to be used from now on.}
By default, there is no rule above \cmd{\thanks}
text that appears in a \Ie{titlingpage} environment.
If you want a rule in that environment, put \cmd{\usethanksrule} 
before the \cmd{\maketitle} command, which will then print a rule according
to the current definition of \cmd{\thanksrule}.
\cmd{\thanksrule} is initialised to be a copy of \cmd{\footnoterule} as it 
is defined at the
end of the preamble\index{preamble}. The definition of \cmd{\thanksrule} can be changed
after \verb?\begin{document}?. If the definition of \cmd{\thanksrule} is modified
and a \cmd{\usethanksrule} command has been issued, then the redefined
rule may also be used for footnotes\index{footnote}. Issuing the command 
\cmd{\cancelthanksrule} will cause the normal \cmd{\footnoterule} definition
to be used from thereon; another \cmd{\usethanksrule}
command can be issued later
if you want to swap back again.

The parameters for the vertical positioning of footnotes\index{footnote} 
and thanks notes, and the default \cmd{\footnoterule} are the same
(see \fref{fig:fn} on \pref{fig:fn}).
You will have to change one or more of these if the vertical spacings of 
footnotes\index{footnote}
and thanks notes are meant to be different.

\index{thanks!styling|)}

%#% extend

%#% extstart include abstracts.tex

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-04-24 17:14:15 +0200 (Wed, 24 Apr 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 442 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}

\chapter{Abstracts}


    Abstracts\index{abstract} do not normally appear in books but 
they are often an essential
part of an article in a technical journal. Reports may or may not
include an abstract, but if so it will often be called a `Summary'.
There may be an even shorter abstract as well, often called an 
`Executive Summary', for those who feel that details are irrelevant.

    In the standard classes appearance of the \Ie{abstract} environment
is fixed. The class provides a set of controls adjusting the appearance of
an \Ie{abstract} environment.

    Questions about how to have a 
one-column\index{column!single} abstract\index{abstract} in a 
two-column\index{column!double} paper
seem to pop up fairly regularly on the
\texttt{comp.text.tex} newsgroup. While an answer based on responses
on \texttt{ctt} is provided in the FAQ,
the class provides a more author-friendly means
of accomplishing this. 

\section{Styling}

\index{abstract!styling|(}

    Much of this part of the class is a reimplementation of the 
\Lpack{abstract} package~\cite{ABSTRACT}.

   The typeset format of an \Ie{abstract} in a \Lclass{report} or 
\Lclass{article} class document depends on the class
options.\footnote{The \texttt{abstract} environment is not 
available for the \Lclass{book} class.} The formats are:
\begin{itemize}
\item \Lopt{titlepage} class option: The abstract 
    heading\indextwo{heading}{abstract} (i.e., value of 
   \cmd{\abstractname}) is typeset centered in a bold font; the text is set in
   the normal font and to the normal width.
\item \Lopt{twocolumn} class option: The abstract 
   heading\indextwo{heading}{abstract} is typeset like
   an unnumbered section; the text is set in the normal font and to the
   normal width (of a single column\index{column!single}). 
\item Default (neither of the above class options): The abstract 
   heading\indextwo{heading}{abstract}
   is typeset centered in a small bold font; the text is set in a small
   font and indented like the \Ie{quotation} environment.
\end{itemize}

   This class provides an \Ie{abstract} environment and
handles to modify the typesetting of an \Ie{abstract}.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{abstract} text \eenv{abstract} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(abstract)%
  {\senv{abstract}}%
  {Environment for typesetting an abstract.}
There is nothing special about using the \Ie{abstract} environment. 
Formatting is controlled by the macros described below.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\abstractcol} \\
\cmd{\abstractintoc} \\
\cmd{\abstractnum} \\
\cmd{\abstractrunin} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(abstractcol)%
  {\cs{abstractcol}}%
  {Declares that an abstract in a \Popt{twocolumn} document should be
   typeset like an unnumbered chapter.}
\glossary(abstractintoc)%
  {\cs{abstractintoc}}%
  {Specifies that the abstact's title is to be added to the ToC.} 
\glossary(abstractnum)%
  {\cs{abstractnum}}%
  {Specifies that an abstract is to be typeset like a numbered chapter.}
\glossary(abstractrunin)%
  {\cs{abstractrunin}}%
  {Specifies that the title of an abstract should be set as a run-in heading.}

    The normal format for an abstract is with a centered, bold title
and the text in a small font, inset from the margins\index{margin}.

The \cmd{\abstractcol} declaration specifies that an abstract in a
\Lopt{twocolumn} class option document should be typeset like a
normal, unnumbered chapter.
The \cmd{\abstractintoc} specifies that the abstract title should
be added to the \toc. The declaration \cmd{\abstractnum} specifies that the 
abstract should be typeset like a numbered chapter and 
\cmd{\abstractrunin} specifies that
the title of the abstract should look like a run-in heading; these two
declarations are mutually exclusive. Note that the \cmd{\abstractnum}
declaration has no effect if the abstract is in the \cmd{\frontmatter}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\abstractname} \\
\cmd{\abstractnamefont} \\
\cmd{\abstracttextfont} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(abstractname)%
  {\cs{abstractname}}%
  {An abstract's title.}
\glossary(abstractnamefont)%
  {\cs{abstractnamefont}}%
  {Font for typesetting and abstract's title (\cs{abstractname}).}
\glossary(abstracttextfont)%
  {\cs{abstracttextfont}}%
  {Font for typesetting the body text of an abstract.}
\cmd{\abstractname} (default `\abstractname') is used as the title for
the \Ie{abstract} environment and is set using the \cmd{\abstractnamefont}.
The body of the abstract is typeset using the \cmd{\abstracttextfont}.
These two commands can be redefined to change the fonts if you wish.
The default definitions are 
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\abstractnamefont}{\normalfont\small\bfseries}
\newcommand{\abstracttextfont}{\normalfont\small}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\absleftindent} \lnc{\absrightindent} \\
\lnc{\absparindent} \lnc{\absparsep} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(absleftindent)%
  {\cs{absleftindent}}%
  {Indentation of the left of the \Pe{abstract} text.}
\glossary(absrightindent)%
  {\cs{absrightindent}}%
  {Indentation of the right of the \Pe{abstract} text.}
\glossary(absparindent)%
  {\cs{absparindent}}%
  {Paragraph indent in the \Pe{abstract} environment.}
\glossary(absparsep)%
  {\cs{absparsep}}%
  {Paragraph separation in the \Pe{abstract} environment.}
   This version of \Ie{abstract} uses a \Ie{list} environment for typesetting
the text. These four lengths can be changed (via \cmd{\setlength}
 or \cmd{\addtolength}) to adjust
the left and right margins\index{margin}, the paragraph indentation\index{paragraph!indentation}, and the vertical skip
between paragraphs in this environment. 
The default values depend on whether or not the \Lopt{twocolumn}
class option is used. The general layout parameters for lists are illustrated
in \fref{fig:listlay}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\abslabeldelim}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(abslabeldelim)%
  {\cs{abslabeldelim}\marg{text}}%
  {\meta{text} is typeset immediately after \cs{abstractname} in a run-in
   heading.}
If the \cmd{\abstractrunin} declaration has been given, 
the heading is typeset as a run-in heading. That is, it is the 
first piece of text on the first line of the abstract text.
The \meta{text} argument of \cmd{\abslabeldelim} is typeset
immediately after the heading. By default it is defined to do nothing, but
if you wanted, for example, the \cmd{\abstractname} to be followed by 
a colon and some extra space you could specify
\begin{lcode}
\abslabeldelim{:\quad}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\absnamepos} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(absnamepos)%
  {\cs{absnamepos}}%
  {Position of a non run-in title for an \Pe{abstract} (\texttt{flushleft}, 
   \texttt{center}, or \texttt{flushright}).}
   If the \cmd{\abstractrunin} declaration is not used then the heading 
is typeset in its own environment, specified by 
\cmd{\absnamepos}. The default definition is
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\absnamepos}{center}
\end{lcode}
It can be defined to be one of \Ie{flushleft}, \Ie{center},
or \Ie{flushright} to give a left, centered or right aligned heading; 
or to any
other appropriate environment which is supported by a used package\index{package}.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\abstitleskip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(abstitleskip)%
  {\cs{abstitleskip}}
  {Space around the title of an \Pe{abstract}.}
   With the \cmd{\abstractrunin} declaration a horizontal space of length 
\lnc{\abstitleskip} is typeset
before the heading. For example, if \lnc{\absparindent} is non-zero, then:
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\abstitleskip}{-\absparindent}
\end{lcode}
 will typeset the heading flush left.

Without the \cmd{\abstractrunin} declaration, \lnc{\abstitleskip} is 
aditional vertical 
space (either positive
or negative) that is inserted between the abstract name and the text of
the abstract.

\index{abstract!styling|)}

\section{One column abstracts}

\index{abstract!one column|(}

   The usual advice~\cite{FAQ} about creating a 
one-column\index{column!double} 
\Ie{abstract} in a 
\Lopt{twocolumn} document is to write code like this:
\begin{lcode}
\documentclass[twocolumn...]{...}
...
\twocolumn[
   \begin{@twocolumnfalse}
     \maketitle               need full-width title
     \begin{abstract}
        abstract text...
     \end{abstract}
   \end{@twocolumnfalse}
]
... hand make footnotes for any \thanks commands
...
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\senv{onecolabstract} text \eenv{onecolabstract} \\
\cmd{\saythanks} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(onecolabstract)%
  {\senv{onecolabstract}}%
  {Environment for typesetting a one column abstract in a two column document.}
\glossary(saythanks)%
  {\cs{saythanks}}%
  {Following a \Pe{onecolabstract} it ensures that \cs{thanks} are printed.}
The class provides a \Ie{onecolabstract} environment that you can use
for a one column\index{column!single} abstract in a \Lopt{twocolumn} document, 
and it is used like this:
\begin{lcode}
\documentclass[twocolumn...]{memoir}
...
\twocolumn[
   \maketitle               need full-width title
   \begin{onecolabstract}
     abstract text...
   \end{onecolabstract}
]
\saythanks % typesets any \thanks commands
...
\end{lcode}
The command \cmd{\saythanks} ensures that any \cmd{\thanks} texts from
an earlier \cmd{\maketitle} are printed out as normal.

    If you want, you can use the \Ie{onecolabstract} environment in place
of the \Ie{abstract} environment --- it doesn't have to be within the 
optional argument of the \cmd{\twocolumn} command. In fact, 
\Ie{onecolabstract} internally uses \Ie{abstract} for the typesetting.


\index{abstract!one column|)}


%#% extend
%#% extstart include document-divisions.tex

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-05-13 16:55:11 +0200 (Mon, 13 May 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 459 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%   chapter style
%\renewcommand{\printchaptername}{}
%\renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
%\renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\sffamily}
%\renewcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\chapnumfont}
%\renewcommand{\afterchapternum}{\space}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%  section styles
%\setsecheadstyle{\Large\sffamily\raggedright}
%\setsubsecheadstyle{\large\sffamily\raggedright}
%\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalsize\sffamily\raggedright}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

\chapterstyle{pedersen}

\chapter{Document divisions}

For this chapter the \cstyle{pedersen} chapterstyle has been used in
order to demonstrate how it appears.


In this chapter I first discuss the various kinds of divisions within
a book and the commands for typesetting these.

After that I describe the class methods for modifying the appearance
of the chapter and other sectional titles (subheads)\index{subhead}.
The facilities described here provide roughly the same as you would
get if you used the \Lpack{titlesec}~\cite{TITLESEC} and
\Lpack{sectsty}~\cite{SECTSTY} packages together; the commands are
different, though.

\section{Logical divisions}

    As described earlier there are three main logical divisions to a book;
the \pixfrontmatter, \pixmainmatter\ and \pixbackmatter. There are three \ltx\
commands that correspond to these, namely \cmd{\frontmatter},
\cmd{\mainmatter} and \cmd{\backmatter}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\frontmatter} \cmd{\frontmatter*} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(frontmatter)%
  {\cs{frontmatter}}%
  {Sets folios to be printed in lowercase roman and prohibits sectional
   number.}
\glossary(frontmatter*)%
  {\cs{frontmatter*}}%
  {Same as \cs{frontmatter} except that folios are unaltered.}
The \cmd{\frontmatter} declaration sets the folios\index{folio} to be 
printed in lowercase roman numerals, starts the page numbering from~i, 
and prohibits any numbering
of sectional divisions. Caption\index{caption}, equations, etc., will be 
numbered continuously.  The starred version of the command,
\cmd{\frontmatter*}, is similar to the unstarred version except that it
makes no changes to the page numbering or the print style for the 
folios\index{folio}. Even though \cmd{\chapter} and other divisions will not
be numbered their titles will be added to the ToC.

    If it is to be used at all, the \cmd{\frontmatter} declaration should
come before any text is set, otherwise the pagination scheme will be
in disarray (in books pagination starts on the first page).

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\mainmatter} \cmd{\mainmatter*} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(mainmatter)%
  {\cs{mainmatter}}%
  {Sets folio numbers to arabic, starting with 1. Floats, etc., will be
   numbered per chapter and sectional divisions will be numbered.}
\glossary(mainmatter*)%
  {\cs{mainmatter*}}%
  {Same as \cs{mainmatter} except that folios are unaltered.}
The \cmd{\mainmatter} declaration, which is the default at the start of a 
document, sets the folios\index{folio} to be printed in arabic numerals, starts 
the page numbering from~1, and sections and above will be numbered. 
Float\index{float} captions\index{caption}, equations, etc., will be numbered 
per chapter\index{chapter}. The starred version of the command,
\cmd{\mainmatter*}, is similar to the unstarred version except that it
makes no changes to the page numbering or the print style for the 
folios\index{folio}.

\LMnote{2010/01/23}{Added the following paragraph, just stating what
  \cs{mainmatter} does, was not clear before.}
Please note that \cmd{\mainmatter} will not only change the folio
numbers to arabic and restart it at 1, it will also make sure it
starts at the next coming recto page. (Even when running under the
\texttt{openany} option).



\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\backmatter} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(backmatter)%
  {\cs{backmatter}}%
  {Prohibits sectional numbering and floats, etc., will be numbered continuously.}
The \cmd{\backmatter} declaration makes no change to the pagination or 
folios\index{folio} but does prohibit sectional division numbering, and 
captions\index{caption}, etc., will be numbered continuously.

\fancybreak{}

\LMnote{2009/06/29}{Added the following section}

If you have other types of floats that might be used in the front-
main- or backmatter, then you can change some internals to add these
to be numbered in the same manner as we do with figures and
tables. They are defined as 
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand\@memfront@floats{%
  \counterwithout{figure}{chapter}
  \counterwithout{table}{chapter}}
\newcommand\@memmain@floats{% 
   \counterwithin{figure}{chapter}
   \counterwithin{table}{chapter}}
\newcommand\@memback@floats{%
    \counterwithout{figure}{chapter}
    \counterwithout{table}{chapter}
    \setcounter{figure}{0}
    \setcounter{table}{0}}
\end{lcode}
%
The macros can also be changed in case you want to have consecutive
figure numbering throughout, i.e.,
\begin{lcode}
\makeatletter
\counterwithout{figure}{chapter}
\counterwithout{table}{chapter}
\renewcommand\@memfront@floats{}
\renewcommand\@memmain@floats{}
\newcommand\@memback@floats{}
\makeatletter
\end{lcode}
in the preamble.




\section{Sectional divisions}

    The \theclass{} class lets you divide a document up into eight levels
of named divisions. They range from book\index{book}, part\index{part} 
through chapter\index{chapter} and down to 
sub-paragraph. A particular sectional division is specified by one of
the commands \cmd{\book}, \cmd{\part}, \cmd{\chapter}, \cmd{\section}, 
\cmd{\subsection},
which is probably as deep as you want to go. If you really need finer
divisions, they are
 \cmd{\subsubsection}, \cmd{\paragraph} and lastly \cmd{\subparagraph}.
The sectional commands, except for \cmd{\book} and \cmd{\part},
have the same form, so rather than describing 
each one in turn I will use \cmd{\section} as model for all but the
two exceptions.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\section}\oarg{toc-title}\oarg{head-title}\marg{title}\\
\cmd{\section*}\marg{title}\\
\end{syntax} 
\glossary(section)%
  {\cs{section}\oarg{toc-title}\oarg{head-title}\marg{title}}%
  {Typesets a section subhead \meta{title}, adding \meta{title} to the ToC and 
   possibly the running headers. If given \meta{toc-title}
   is used instead of \meta{title} for the ToC and running header. If given
   \meta{head-title} is used for a running header.}
\glossary(section*)%
  {\cs{section*}\marg{title}}%
  {Typesets an unnumbered section subhead \meta{title}. There are no ToC or
   running header entries.}

There are two forms of the command; 
the starred version is simpler, so I'll describe its 
effects first --- it just typesets \meta{title} in the document in the format
for that particular sectional division. Like the starred version, the plain
version also typesets \meta{title} in the document, but it may be numbered.
Diferent forms of the division title are available for the 
Table of Contents (\toc) and a running header\index{header}, as follows:
\begin{itemize}
\item No optional argument: \meta{title} is used for the division title,
      the ToC title and a page header title.
\item One optional argument: \meta{title} is used for the division title;
      \meta{toc-title} is used for the ToC title and a page header\index{header} title.
\item Two optional arguments: \meta{title} is used for the division title;
      \meta{toc-title} is used for the ToC title; \meta{head-title}
      is used for a page header\index{header} title.
\end{itemize}

A \cmd{\section} command restarts the numbering of any \cmd{\subsection}s
from one.
For most of the divisions the \meta{title} is put on the page where the command
was issued. The \cmd{\book}, \cmd{\part} and \cmd{\chapter} commands behave 
a little differently.

    The \cmd{\book} and \cmd{\part} commands are simpler and both behave 
in the same way.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\book}\marg{title} \\
\cmd{\part}\marg{title} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(book)%
  {\cs{book}\marg{title}}%
  {Typesets a numbered book \meta{title} on a page by itself, adding
   \meta{title} to the ToC.}
\glossary(part)%
  {\cs{part}\marg{title}}%
  {Typesets a numbered part \meta{title} on a page by itself, adding
   \meta{title} to the ToC.}
The \cmd{\book}\marg{title} command puts the book name (default 
\texttt{\bookname}), number and \meta{title} on a page by itself. The
numbering of books\index{book!number} has no effect on the numbering of 
\cmd{\part}s\index{part!number} or \cmd{\chapter}s\index{chapter!number}.
Similarly the \cmd{\part}\marg{title} command puts the part name 
(default \texttt{Part}), number and \meta{title} on a page by itself. 
The numbering of parts\index{part!number} has no effect on the numbering of 
\cmd{\chapter}s\index{chapter!number}.

    Later I'll give a list of LaTeX's default names, like \texttt{Part}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\chapter}\oarg{toc-title}\oarg{head-title}\marg{title} \\
\cmd{\chapter*}\oarg{head-title}\marg{title} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(chapter)%
  {\cs{chapter}\oarg{toc-title}\oarg{head-title}\marg{title}}
  {Starts a new page and puts the chapter number and \meta{title} 
   at the top of the page, adding \meta{title} to the ToC and possibly
   the running headers. If given \meta{toc-title}
   is used instead of \meta{title} for the ToC and running header. If given
   \meta{head-title} is used for a running header.
   It restarts numbering of any subsidiary elements
   such as \cs{section} of floats.}
\glossary(chapter*)%
  {\cs{chapter*}\oarg{head-title}\marg{title}}
  {Starts a new page and puts an unnumbered chapter \meta{title} 
   at the top of the page. If given \meta{head-title} is used for a 
   running header.}

The \cmd{\chapter} command starts a new page and puts
the chapter name (default \texttt{Chapter}), number and \meta{title}
at the top of the page. It restarts the numbering of any \cmd{\section}s 
from one. If no optional arguments are specified, \meta{title}
is used as the \toc{} entry and for any page headings. If one optional
argument is specified this is \meta{toc-title} and is used for the
\toc{} entry and for page headings. If both optional arguments
are specified the \meta{head-title} is used for page headings.

The \cmd{\chapter*} command starts a new page and puts
\meta{title} at the top of the page. It makes no \toc{} entry, 
changes no numbers and by default changes no page headings.
If the optional \meta{head-title} argument is given, this is used
for page headings. Use of the optional argument has the side-effect
that the \Icn{secnumdepth} counter is set to \Icn{maxsecnumdepth} (see below
for an explanation of these).

    When the \Lopt{article} option is in effect, however, things are slightly
different. New chapters do not necessarily start on a new page.
The \cmd{\mainmatter} command
just turns on sectional numbering and starts arabic page numbering; the 
\cmd{\backmatter} command just turns off sectional numbering.
    The \cmd{\tableofcontents} command and friends, as well as any
other commands created via \cmd{\newlistof}, 
\emph{always}\footnote{This is a consequence of the internal
timing of macro calls.}
call \verb?thispagestyle{chapter}?. If you are using the 
\Lopt{article} option you
will probably want to ensure that the \pstyle{chapter} pagestyle is the
same as you normally use for the document.

    Unlike the standard classes the \meta{title} is typeset ragged right.
This means that if you need to force a linebreak in the \meta{title} you 
have to use \cmd{\newline} instead of the more usual \cmd{\\}. For instance
\begin{lcode}
\section{A broken\newline title}
\end{lcode}

    In the standard classes a \cmd{\section} or other 
subhead\index{subhead!near bottom of page}\index{subhead!moved}
that is too close to the bottom of a page is moved to the top of the
following page. If this happens and \cmd{\flushbottom} is in effect, the
contents of the short page are stretched to make the last line flush with
the bottom of the typeblock.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\raggedbottomsection} \\
\cmd{\normalbottomsection} \\
\lnc{\bottomsectionskip} \\
\cmd{\bottomsectionpenalty}
\end{syntax}
\glossary(raggedbottomsection)%
  {\cs{raggedbottomsection}}%
  {Pages will be typeset short because of a moved subhead as if
   \cs{raggedbottom} was in effect.}
\glossary(normalbottomsection)%
  {\cs{normalbottomsection}}%
  {Cancels any previous \cs{raggedbottomsection}.}
\glossary(bottomsectionskip)%
  {\cs{bottomsectionskip}}%
  {Amount of stretch on a \cs{raggedbottomsection} short page.}
\glossary(bottomsectionpenalty)%
  {\cs{bottomsectionpenalty}}%
  {Penalty on a \cs{raggedbottomsection} short page.}
The \cmd{\raggedbottomsection} declaration will typeset any pages that 
are short because of a moved subhead as though \cmd{\raggedbottom}
was in effect for the short page; other pages are not affected. The
length \lnc{\bottomsectionskip} controls the amount of stretch on the short
page. Setting it to zero allows the last line to be flush with the bottom
of the typeblock. The default setting of 10mm appears to remove any
stretch. \cmd{\bottomsectionpenalty} control the penalty it costs to
make a page break at this point. The detault is zero as the stretch is
usually enough, by setting it to
a negative integer one can be a bit more incouraging regarding a
possible page break.

The declaration \cmd{\normalbottomsection}, which is the default,
cancels any previous \cmd{\raggedbottomsection} declaration.

\subsection{Appendices} \label{sec:appendices}

Appendices\index{appendix} normally come after the main text and are 
often considered to be part
of the \cmd{\mainmatter} as they are normally numbered (the \cmd{\backmatter}
declaration turns off all sectional numbering).

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\appendix} \\
\cmd{\appendixname} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(appendix)%
  {\cs{appendix}}%
  {Sets chapter numbering to alphabetic and sets the chapter name to 
   \cs{appendixname}.}
\glossary(appendixname)%
  {\cs{appendixname}}%
  {Name given to chapters in appendices (default Appendix).}
The \cmd{\appendix} declaration changes the numbering of
chapters\index{chapter!number} to an alphabetic form and also changes 
the names of chapters from \cmd{\chaptername} (default \texttt{Chapter})
to the value of \cmd{\appendixname} (default \texttt{Appendix})\index{appendix}. 
Thus, the first and any subsequent \cmd{\chapter}s after 
the \cmd{\appendix} command
will be `Appendix A \ldots', `Appendix B \ldots', and so on. 
That is as far as the standard classes go but this class provides more ways
of dealing with appendices\index{appendix}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\appendixpage}\\
\cmd{\appendixpage*}\\
\cmd{\appendixpagename}\\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(appendixpage)
  {\cs{appendixpage}}%
  {Creates an unnumbered anonymous  part-like page with the title \cs{appendixpagename} and adds it to the ToC.}
\glossary(appendixpage*)
  {\cs{appendixpage*}}%
  {Like \cs{appendixpage} but makes no ToC entry.}
\glossary(appendixpagename)
  {\cs{appendixpagename}}%
  {Title used for an \cs{appendixpage} (default \texttt{Appendices}.}
The \cmd{\appendixpage} command generates a part-like page (but no name 
or number) with the title given by the value of \cmd{\appendixpagename} 
(default \texttt{Appendices})\index{appendix}. It also makes an entry in 
the \toc{} using 
\cmd{\addappheadtotoc} (see below). The starred version generates the 
appendix\index{appendix} page but makes no \toc{} entry.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\addappheadtotoc}\\
\cmd{\appendixtocname}\\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(addappheadtotoc)%
  {\cs{addappheadtotoc}}%
  {Adds ToC entry with the title \cs{appendixtocname}.}
\glossary(appendixtocname)%
  {\cs{appendixtocname}}%
  {Title of ToC entry added by \cs{addappheadtotoc} (default \texttt{Appendices}.}
The command \cmd{\addappheadtotoc} adds an entry to the \toc. The title is
given by the value of \cmd{\appendixtocname} (default \texttt{Appendices})\index{appendix}.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{appendices} text \eenv{appendices}\\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(appendices)%
  {\senv{appendices}}%
  {An environment form of \cs{appendix}; chapters are restored to their condition
   (including numbering) after the environment ends.}
The \Ie{appendices} environment acts like the \cmd{\appendix}\index{appendix} 
command in that it resets the numbering and naming of chapters\index{chapter}. 
However, at the end of the environment, chapters are restored to their original 
condition and any chapter numbers continue in sequence as though the 
\Ie{appendices} environment had never been there.

\LMnote{2010/11/18}{Wrong names for \cs{namedsubappendices} and
  \cs{unnamedsubappendices} fixed}
\begin{syntax}
\senv{subappendices} text \eenv{subappendices} \\
\cmd{\namedsubappendices} \cmd{\unnamedsubappendices} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(subappendices)%
  {\senv{subappendices}}%
  {Like the \Pe{appendices} environment but used at the end of a chapter
   for per-chapter sub-appendices.}
\glossary(namedsubappendices)%
  {\cs{namedsubappendices}}%
  {Precede sub-appendix numbers with the name \cs{appendixname}.}
\glossary(unnamedsubappendices)%
  {\cs{unnamedsubappendices}}%
  {Do not precede the sub-appendix number with any name (the default).}
The \Ie{subappendices}\index{appendix!subappendix} environment can be used to put appendices\index{appendix} at the end
of a chapter\index{chapter}. Within the environment \cmd{\section} starts a 
new sub-appendix\index{appendix}. You may put \cmd{\addappheadtotoc} at the start
of the environment if you want a heading entry in the \toc.
If you put the declaration \cmd{\namedsubappendices}
\emph{before} the \Ie{subappendices} environment, the sub-appendix number
in the body of the document will be preceded by the value of 
\cmd{\appendixname}. The \cmd{\unnamedsubappendices} declaration, which is the 
default, may be used to switch off this behaviour.

\LMnote{2010/11/19}{Added this caveat, following a question on ctt}
\textbf{Caveat:} The implementation of the named subappendices make
use of \cmd{\setsecnumformat}, thus if you have used this command to
change the formating of the section number you will need to re-do this
in a special manner inside the \Ie{subappendices}
environemt. Something like this (where a user wanted to use old style
numerials for sectioning numbers)
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{subappendices}
\setsecnumformat{\sectionname\ 
  \oldstylenums{\csname the#1\endcsname\quad}}
\end{verbatim}
The macro \cmd{sectionname} is a special macro that only lives inside
the \Ie{subappendices} environment and is only available when
\cmd{\namedsubappendices} is applied.



\section{Numbering} \label{sec:secnumbers}

    Each type of sectional division\index{division!sectional} has an 
associated \emph{level}\index{sectional division!level number} as shown 
in \tref{tab:seclevels}.
Divisions are numbered if the value of the \Icn{secnumdepth} counter
is equal to or greater than their level. For example, with
\begin{lcode}
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{2}
\end{lcode}
then subsections up to book\index{book!number} will be numbered.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Division levels} \label{tab:seclevels}
\begin{tabular}{lr} \toprule
Division       & Level \\ \midrule
\cmd{\book}           & -2 \\
\cmd{\part}           & -1 \\
\cmd{\chapter}        & 0 \\
\cmd{\section}        & 1 \\
\cmd{\subsection}     & 2 \\
\cmd{\subsubsection}  & 3 \\
\cmd{\paragraph}      & 4 \\
\cmd{\subparagraph}   & 5 \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setsecnumdepth}\marg{secname} \\
\cmd{\maxsecnumdepth}\marg{secname} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setsecnumdepth)%
  {\cs{setsecnumdepth}\marg{secname}}%
  {Sets division numbering level to \meta{secname}.}
\glossary(maxscnumdepth)%
  {\cs{maxsecnumdepth}\marg{secname}}%
  {Sets division numbering level in the \cs{mainmatter} to \meta{secname}.}
Instead of having to remember the levels if you want to change what
gets numbered you can use the \cmd{\setsecnumdepth} command. It
sets \Icn{secnumdepth} so that divisions \meta{secname} and above
will be numbered. The argument \meta{secname} is the name of a sectional
division without the backslash. For example, to have subsections
and above numbered:
\begin{lcode}
\setsecnumdepth{subsection}
\end{lcode}
You can also use \texttt{all} or \texttt{none} for \meta{secname} which
will either turn on numbering for all levels, or turn off numbering
altogether.

When used in the preamble\index{preamble} \cmd{\setsecnumdepth} also
calls \cmd{\maxsecnumdepth}, which is the numbering level used once
\cmd{\mainmatter} is called. You can use \cmd{\setsecnumdepth} anywhere
in the \cmd{\mainmatter} to (temporarily) change the numbering level.

    By default, the class sets:
\begin{lcode}
\setsecnumdepth{section}
\maxsecnumdepth{section}
\end{lcode}
The \cmd{\frontmatter} commands sets the numbering level to \texttt{none}.
The commands \cmd{\mainmatter} and \cmd{\mainmatter*} set the
numbering level to the value specified by \cmd{\maxsecnumdepth}.

    The number setting commands come from the \Lpack{tocvsec2}
package~\cite{TOCVSEC2}.

\section{Book and part headings}

\index{heading!book|(}
\index{heading!part|(}

    Book and part headings \emph{always} start on a new page with the 
\pstyle{book} and \pstyle{part} pagestyles, respectively. The typical
book and part heading consists of the name (e.g., `Book' or `Part') 
followed by a number represented as an uppercase Roman numeral. There is 
a vertical space after which the title is printed. Finally a new page is
started.

\PWnote{2009/07/30}{Updated description, etc., for Part and Book pages}
    Several aspects of the typesetting of the \cmd{\book} and \cmd{\part} 
title are configurable. Ignoring details, such as the optional argument,
the code for printing \cmd{\part} headings looks like this:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\part}[1]{%    % THIS IS A VERY SIMPLIFIED VERSION
  \cleardoublepage         % start a new recto page                    
  \thispagestyle{part}     % set the page style
  \beforepartskip          % space before Name and Number
  \printpartname\partnamenum\printpartnum
  \midpartskip             % space after Name and Number
  \printparttitle{#1}      % print the title
  \partpageend}            % finish off
\newcommand{\partpageend}{%  THIS IS SIMPLIFIED
  \afterpartskip
  % ifblankpage then blank next page and restore twocolumn if necessary
  }
\end{lcode}
The code for \cmd{\book} headings is similar.

    The general layout for \cmd{\book}, \cmd{\part} and \cmd{\chapter} headings
is similar and you may wish to refer to \fref{lay:chap} which, although
it shows the vertical layout for a \cmd{chapter} head, is also applicable
to \cmd{\book} and \cmd{\part} heads with appropriate changes in the
names of the commands.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\beforebookskip} \cmd{\afterbookskip} \\
\cmd{\beforepartskip} \cmd{\afterpartskip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(beforebookskip)%
  {\cs{beforebookskip}}%
  {Spacing above a \cs{book} title.}
\glossary(afterbookskip)%
  {\cs{afterbookskip}}%
  {Spacing below a \cs{book} title.}
\glossary(beforepartskip)%
  {\cs{beforepartskip}}%
  {Spacing above a \cs{part} title.}
\glossary(afterpartskip)%
  {\cs{afterbookskip}}%
  {Spacing below a \cs{part} title.}
These commands effectively control the spacing before and after the book
and  part titles. Their default definitions are:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\beforebookskip}{\null\vfil}
\newcommand*{\afterbookskip}{\vfil\newpage}
\newcommand*{\beforepartskip}{\null\vfil}
\newcommand*{\afterpartskip}{\vfil\newpage}
\end{lcode}
Together, these vertically center any typesetting on the page, and then start
a new page. To move the \cs{part} title upwards on the page, for example, 
you could do:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\beforepartskip}{\null\vskip 0pt plus 0.3fil}
\renewcommand*{\afterpartskip}{\vskip 0pt plus 0.7fil \newpage}
\end{lcode} 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\midbookskip} \\
\cmd{\midpartskip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(midbookskip)%
  {\cs{midbookskip}}%
  {Spacing between a \cs{book}'s number line and the title.}
\glossary(midpartskip)%
  {\cs{midpartskip}}%
  {Spacing between a \cs{part}'s number line and the title.}
The macros \cmd{\midbookskip} and \cmd{\midpartskip} are the spacings
between the number lines and the titles. The default definitions are:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\midbookskip}{\par\vspace 2\onelineskip}
\newcommand{\midpartskip}{\par\vspace 2\onelineskip}
\end{lcode}
and they can be changed.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\printbookname} \cmd{\booknamefont} \\
\cmd{\booknamenum} \\
\cmd{\printbooknum} \cmd{\booknumfont} \\
\cmd{\printpartname} \cmd{\partnamefont} \\
\cmd{\partnamenum} \\
\cmd{\printpartnum} \cmd{\partnumfont} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(printbookname)%
  {\cs{printbookname}}
  {Prints the book name (\cs{bookname}) using the \cs{booknamefont}.}
\glossary(booknamefont)%
  {\cs{booknamefont}}%
  {Font used by \cs{printbookname} for the book name.}
\glossary(booknamenum)%
  {\cs{booknamenum}}%
  {Called between printing a book name and number.}
\glossary(printbooknum)%
  {\cs{printbooknum}}%
  {Prints a book number using the \cs{booknumfont}.}
\glossary(booknumfont)%
  {\cs{booknumfont}}%
  {Font used by \cs{printbooknum} for the book number.}

\glossary(printpartname)%
  {\cs{printpartname}}
  {Prints the part name (\cs{partname}) using the \cs{partnamefont}.}
\glossary(partnamefont)%
  {\cs{partnamefont}}%
  {Font used by \cs{printpartname} for the part name.}
\glossary(partnamenum)%
  {\cs{partnamenum}}%
  {Called between printing a part name and number.}
\glossary(printpartnum)%
  {\cs{printpartnum}}%
  {Prints a part number using the \cs{partnumfont}.}
\glossary(partnumfont)%
  {\cs{partnumfont}}%
  {Font used by \cs{printpartnum} for the part number.}
The macro \cmd{\printbookname} typesets the book name (the value of 
\cmd{\bookname}) using the font specified by \cmd{\booknamefont}. 
The default is the \cmd{\bfseries} font in the \cmd{\huge} size. 
Likewise the book number is typeset by \cmd{\printbooknum}
using the font specified by \cmd{\booknumfont}, which has the same default as
\cmd{\booknamefont}. The macro \cmd{\booknamenum}, which is defined to be 
a space, is called between printing the book name and the number. All 
these can be changed to obtain different effects. 

    Similarly, the macro \cmd{\printpartname} typesets the part name 
(the value of \cmd{\partname}) using the font specified by 
\cmd{\partnamefont}. The default is the \cmd{\bfseries} font in
the \cmd{\huge} size. Likewise the part number is typeset by 
\cmd{\printpartnum} using the font specified by \cmd{\partnumfont}, 
which has the same default as \cmd{\partnamefont}. The macro 
\cmd{\partnamenum}, which is defined to be a space, is called between printing
the part name and the number. 

    For example, to set a \cmd{\part} in a large sans font with the part 
name flush left:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\partnamefont}{\normalfont\huge\sffamily\raggedright}
\renewcommand{\partnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\sffamily}
\end{lcode}
or to only print the part number in the default font:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\printpartname}{}
\renewcommand{\partnamenum}{}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\printbooktitle}\marg{title} \cmd{\booktitlefont} \\
\cmd{\printparttitle}\marg{title} \cmd{\parttitlefont} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(printbooktitle)%
  {\cs{printbooktitle}}%
  {Prints the book title using the \cs{booktitlefont}.}
\glossary(booktitlefont)%
  {\cs{booktitlefont}}%
  {Font used by \cs{printbooktitle} for the title.}
\glossary(printbooktitle)%
  {\cs{printbooktitle}}%
  {Prints the book title using the \cs{booktitlefont}.}
\glossary(booktitlefont)%
  {\cs{booktitlefont}}%
  {Font used by \cs{printbooktitle} for the title.}
\glossary(printparttitle)%
  {\cs{printparttitle}}%
  {Prints the part title using the \cs{parttitlefont}.}
\glossary(parttitlefont)%
  {\cs{parttitlefont}}%
  {Font used by \cs{printparttitle} for the title.}
A book's title is typeset by \cmd{\printbooktitle} using the font specified 
by \cmd{\booktitlefont}. 
By default this is a \cmd{\bfseries} font in the \cmd{\Huge} size. This can
be changed to have, say, the title set raggedleft in a small caps font by
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\booktitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\scshape\raggedleft}
\end{lcode}

    Similarly a part's title is typeset by \cmd{\printparttitle} using 
the font specified by \cmd{\parttitlefont}. 
By default this is a \cmd{\bfseries} font in the \cmd{\Huge} size. 

    The \cmd{\parttitlefont} font is also used by 
\cmd{\appendixpage}, or its starred version, when
typesetting an appendix\index{appendix} page.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bookpagemark}\marg{title} \\
\cmd{\partmark}\marg{title} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(bookpagemark)%
  {\cs{bookpagemark}\marg{title}}%
  {For setting any marks with the title from a \cs{book} for a running header.}
\glossary(partmark)%
  {\cs{partmark}\marg{title}}%
  {For setting any marks with the title from a \cs{part} for a running header.}
The \cmd{\book} code includes \cmd{\bookpagemark}\marg{title} for capturing
the \meta{title} of the book division if it is going to be used, 
for example, in page headers. Its definition is simply:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\bookpagemark}[1]{}
\end{lcode}
There is the corresponding \cmd{\partmark} for the title of \cmd{\part} 
divisions.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bookpageend} \cmd{\bookblankpage} \cmd{\nobookblankpage} \\
\cmd{\partpageend} \cmd{\partblankpage} \cmd{\nopartblankpage} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(bookpageend)%
  {\cs{bookpageend}}%
  {Code to finish off typesetting a book title page.}
\glossary(bookblankpage)%
  {\cs{bookblankpage}}%
  {Follow a book title page with a blank page (the default).}
\glossary(nobookblankpage)%
  {\cs{nobookblankpage}}%
  {Do not follow a book title page with a blank page.}
\glossary(partpageend)%
  {\cs{partpageend}}%
  {Code to finish off typesetting a part title page.}
\glossary(partlankpage)%
  {\cs{partblankpage}}%
  {Follow a part title page with a blank page (the default).}
\glossary(nopartblankpage)%
  {\cs{nopartblankpage}}%
  {Do not follow a part title page with a blank page.}

The macro \cmd{\bookpageend} finishes off a book title page. It first
calls \cmd{\afterbookskip}. If the \cmd{\nobookblankpage} is in effect
it does nothing more. If the declaration \cmd{\bookblankpage} (the default)
is in effect then it finishes the current page, outputs a blank page and then,
if twocolumn typesetting was in effect before \cmd{\book} then it restores
twocolumn typesetting. The macro \cmd{\partpageend} performs similar
functions for \cmd{\part} pages.

\LMnote{2011/02/06}{This now uncommented text is wrong!}
%     If, for example, you wish to put something on a \cmd{\part} page, and maybe
% something on the following normally blank page, then this is a possible way
% of doing it:\index{text on a part page}
So to add something on the back side of a \cmd{\part} page (assuming
twoside) use something similar to
\begin{lcode}
...
\nopartblankpage
\part{Title of the Part}
\thispagestyle{simple}
Text on the following (normally blank page)
\clearpage
...
\end{lcode}
    Alternatively you can redefine \cmd{\partpageend}.
 
   If you use the declaration \cmd{\nopartblankpage} (or \cmd{\nobookblankpage})
then you are responsible for setting everything correctly to end off the
\cmd{\part} (or \cmd{\book}) page. This is the default definition of 
\cmd{\partpageend} (that for \cmd{\bookpageend} is similar):
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\partpageend}{%
  \afterpartskip
  \ifm@mnopartnewpage%   set by \(no)partblankpage
  \else%                 default finish off
    \if@twoside
      \if@openright%     output blank page
        \null
        \thispagestyle{afterpart}%
        \newpage
      \fi
    \fi
  \fi
  \if@tempswa%   true if twocolumn was being used
    \twocolumn
  \fi}
\end{lcode}
Here with the default definitions, \cmd{\afterpartskip} ends off the
\cmd{\part} page, and then the rest of the code in \cmd{\partpageend}
takes care of typesetting the blank back side of the \cmd{\part} page
(or send us back to twocolumn mode).

\LMnote{2011/02/06}{Added the example below}
If on the other hand we actually want to write something below the
part title on the \cmd{\part} page, then we need a different
route. The `air' above and below the part title is by default defined as
\begin{lcode}
  \newcommand*{\beforepartskip}{\null\vfil}
  \newcommand*{\afterpartskip}{\vfil\newpage}
\end{lcode}
Thus we need to redefined this such that it does not change the page
and such that it add useful spacing above and below the part
titling. Something like this may do the trick
\begin{lcode}
\makeatletter
  \newcommand*{\beforepartskip}{\null\vskip4cm}
  \newcommand*{\afterpartskip}{\par\vskip1cm%
    \@afterindentfalse\@afterheading} 
\makeatother
\end{lcode}



\index{heading!part|)}
\index{heading!book|)}

\subsection{Leadpage}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\newleadpage}\oarg{page-style}\marg{cmdname}\marg{title} \\
\cmd{\newleadpage*}\oarg{page-style}\marg{cmdname}\marg{title} \\
\cmd{\renewleadpage}\oarg{page-style}\marg{cmdname}\marg{title} \\
\cmd{\renewleadpage*}\oarg{page-style}\marg{cmdname}\marg{title} \\
\end{syntax}
\cmd{\newleadpage} and associates are variants of the \cmd{\newcommand}
and companions.\footnote{The suggestions for these came from
Danie Els\index{Els, Danie} and Lars Madsen\index{Madsen, Lars}.}
The \cmd{\newleadpage} command defines a macro \verb?\cmdname? that when called
will typeset an Appendixpage-like page (see \Sref{sec:appendices}) with a 
title \meta{title}
using the \meta{page-style} as the pagestyle for the page. The default
is the \pstyle{empty} pagestyle. The macro \cmd{\renewleadpage} redefines
an existing leadpage command. As an example:
\begin{lcode}
\newleadpage{plates}{Picture Gallery}
\end{lcode}
creates the new command \cs{plates} which when called generates an unnumbered
part-like page with the title \textbf{Picture Gallery}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\leadpagetoclevel} \\
\end{syntax}
When \cs{(re)newleadpage} is used the resulting command adds \meta{title}
to the \toc\ as though it was an unnumbered \cmd{\leadpagetoclevel} entry,
whose definition is
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\leadpagetoclevel}{chapter}
\end{lcode}
If you wished them to be entered like a \cmd{\part} header then simply:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\leadpagetoclevel}{part}
\end{lcode}

    When the starred versions \cs{(re)newleadpage*} are used the resulting
command will not add \meta{title} to the \toc.

    The layout of the page matches that for unnumbered \cmd{\part} pages, and 
internally the resulting commands use \cmd{\partmark} in case you 
wish to capture the \meta{title} to use in running headers.



\section{Chapter headings}
\label{sec:chapter-headings}
\index{heading!chapter|(}

    The chapter headings are configurable in much the same way as book or part 
headings, but in addition there are some built in chapter styles that you may
wish to try, or define your own.

    Chapters, except when the \Lopt{article} class option is used,
 \emph{always} start on a new page with the \pstyle{chapter}
pagestyle. The particular page, recto or verso, that they start on is
mainly controlled by the class options. If the \Lopt{oneside} option is used
they start on the next new page, but if the \Lopt{twoside} option is
used the starting page may differ, as follows.
\begin{itemize}
\item[\Lopt{openright}] The chapter heading is typeset on the next recto page,
  which may leave a blank verso leaf.
\item[\Lopt{openleft}] The chapter heading is typeset on the next verso page,
  which may leave a blank recto leaf.
\item[\Lopt{openany}] The chapter heading is typeset on the next page and there
  will be no blank leaf.
\end{itemize}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\openright} \cmd{\openleft} \cmd{\openany} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(openright)%
  {\cs{openright}}%
  {Force chapters to start on a new recto page.}
\glossary(openleft)%
  {\cs{openleft}}%
  {Force chapters to start on a new verso page.}
\glossary(openany)%
  {\cs{openany}}%
  {Allow chapters to start on the next new page.}
These three declarations have the same effect as the options of the same name.
They can be used anywhere in the document to change the chapter opening page.

Ignoring many details, like the optional arguments, the code for 
printing a \cmd{\chapter} heading is similar to that for \cmd{\book} 
and \cmd{\part} (the \cs{chapterhead} command below is \emph{not}
part of the class).
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\chapterhead}[1]{ % THIS IS A SIMPLIFIED VERSION
  \clearforchapter        % move to correct page
  \thispagestyle{chapter} % set the page style
  \insertchapterspace     % Inserts space into LoF and LoT
  \chapterheadstart       % \beforechapskip space before heading
  \printchaptername\chapternamenum\printchapternum
  \afterchapternum        % \midchapskip space between number and title
  \printchaptertitle{#1}  % title
  \afterchaptertitle}     % \afterchapskip space after title
\end{lcode}
The general layout is shown in \fref{lay:chap}.

\begin{figure}
\setlayoutscale{1}
\centering
\chapterdiagram
\caption{Class layout parameters for chapter titles. Working with
  \cs{beforechapskip} need a little thought, see the text.} 
\label{lay:chap}
\end{figure}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\clearforchapter} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(clearforchapter)%
  {\cs{clearforchapter}}%
  {Selects a chapter's opening page.}
The actual macro that sets the opening page for a chapter is 
\cmd{\clearforchapter}. The class options \texttt{openright},
\texttt{openleft} and \texttt{openany} (or their macro equivalents
\cmd{\openright}, \cmd{\openleft} and
\cmd{\openany}) define \cmd{\clearforchapter} to be respectively
(see \S\ref{sec:moving}) 
\cmd{\cleartorecto}, \cmd{\cleartoverso} and \cmd{\clearpage}. You can
obviously change \cmd{\clearforchapter} to do more than just start a
new page.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\memendofchapterhook} 
\end{syntax}
\glossary(memendofchapterhook)%
  {\cs{memendofchapterhook}}%
  {Hook executed at the very end of the \cs{chapter} command.}
Where \cmd{\clearforchapter} comes at the very beginning,
\cmd{\memendofchapterhook} comes at the very end of the \cmd{\chapter}
command. It does nothing by default, but could be redefined to insert,
say, \cmd{\clearpage}:
\begin{verbatim}
\makeatletter
\renewcommand\memendofchapterhook{%
  \clearpage\m@mindentafterchapter\@afterheading}
\makeatother
\end{verbatim}


    Some books have the chapter headings on a verso page, with perhaps
an illustration\index{illustration} or epigraph\index{epigraph}, and 
then the text starts on the opposite
recto page. The effect can be achieved like:
\begin{lcode}
\openleft                % chapter title on verso page
\chapter{The title}      % chapter title
\begin{centering}        % include a centered illustration
\includegraphics{...}
\end{centering}
\clearpage               % go to recto page
Start of the text        % chapter body
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\chapterheadstart} \lnc{\beforechapskip} \\ 
\cmd{\afterchapternum} \lnc{\midchapskip} \\
\cmd{\afterchaptertitle} \lnc{\afterchapskip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(chapterheadstart)%
  {\cs{chapterheadstart}}%
  {Called at start of printing a chapter header; by default inserts \cs{beforechapskip} space.}
\glossary(beforechapskip)%
  {\cs{beforechapskip}}%
  {Space above chapter name and number.}
\glossary(afterchapternum)%
  {\cs{afterchapternum}}%
  {Called after printing a chapter number; by default inserts \cs{midchapskip} space.}
\glossary(midchapskip)%
  {\cs{midchapskip}}%
  {Space between chapter name and number and the title.}
\glossary(afterchaptertitle)%
  {\cs{afterchaptertitle}}%
  {Called after printing a chapter title; by default inserts \cs{afterchapskip} space.}
\glossary(afterchapskip)%
  {\cs{afterchapskip}}%
  {Space after chapter title.}

The macro \cmd{\chapterheadstart} is called just before printing a chapter
name and number. By default it inserts \lnc{\beforechapskip} space (default
50pt).

The macro \cmd{\afterchapternum} is called just after printing a chapter
number. By default it inserts \lnc{\midchapskip} space (default
20pt).

The macro \cmd{\afterchaptertitle} is called just after printing a chapter
title. By default it inserts \lnc{\afterchapskip} space (default
40pt).

The lengths \lnc{\beforechapskip}, \lnc{\midchapskip} and \lnc{\afterchapskip}
can all be changed by \cmd{\setlength} or \cmd{\addtolength}. Though
as mentioned in \fref{lay:chap} they need some explanation:
\begingroup
\medskip
\setlength\overfullrule{5pt}
\setlength\unitlength{\textwidth}
\addtolength\unitlength{-\labelsep}
\renewcommand\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep\parbox{\unitlength}{\cs{#1}}}
\begin{description}
\item[beforechapskip] See \fref{lay:chap}.  The actual distance
  between the first baseline of the chapter stuff to the top of the
  text block is
  \cmd{\beforechapskip}\,+\,\cmd{\topskip}\,+\,\cmd{\baselineskip}.
  But because the implementation of \cmd{\chapter} (via
  \cmd{\chapterheadstart}) make use of \cmd{\vspace*}, getting rid of
  \cmd{\beforechapskip} a strange endeavour. If you want to avoid any
  space before the first text in the chapter heading, use
  \begin{lcode}
    \setlength\beforechapskip{-\baselineskip}
  \end{lcode}
  or redefine \cmd{\chapterheadstart} to do nothing.
\item[midchapskip] 
\item[afterchapskip] 
  for both, one has to add \cmd{\baselineskip} to
  get the distance baseline to baseline.
\end{description}
\endgroup





\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\printchaptername} \cmd{\chapnamefont} \\
\cmd{\chapternamenum} \\
\cmd{\printchapternum} \cmd{\chapnumfont} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(printchaptername)%
  {\cs{printchaptername}}%
  {Prints the chapter name using the \cs{chapnamefont}.}
\glossary(chapnamefont)%
  {\cs{chapnamefont}}%
  {Font used by \cs{printchaptername}.}
\glossary(chapternamenum)%
  {\cs{chapternamenum}}%
  {Inserted between printing the chapter name and number. 
   It is usually a space.}
\glossary(printchapternum)%
  {\cs{printchapternum}}%
  {Prints the chapter number using the \cs{chapnumfont}.}
\glossary(chapnumfont)%
  {\cs{chapnumfont}}%
  {Font used by \cs{printchapternum}.}
The macro \cmd{\printchaptername} typesets the chapter name 
(default \texttt{Chapter} or \texttt{Appendix}) using the font 
specified by \cmd{\chapnamefont}. The default is the \cmd{\bfseries} font in
the \cmd{\huge} size. Likewise the chapter number is typeset by 
\cmd{\printchapternum} using the font specified by \cmd{\chapnumfont}, 
which has the same default as \cmd{\chapnamefont}. The macro 
\cmd{\chapternamenum}, which is defined to be a space, is called between 
printing the chapter name and the number. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\printchaptertitle}\marg{title} \cmd{\chaptitlefont} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(printchaptertitle)%
  {\cs{printchaptertitle}\marg{title}}%
  {Prints the chapter \meta{title} using the \cs{chaptitlefont}.}
\glossary(chaptitlefont)%
  {\cs{chaptitlefont}}%
  {Font used by \cs{printchaptertitle}.}
The title is typeset by \cmd{\printchaptertitle} using the font specified 
by \cmd{\chaptitlefont}. 
By default this is a \cmd{\bfseries} font in the \cmd{\Huge} size. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\printchapternonum} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(printchapternonum)%
  {\cs{printchapternonum}}%
  {Replaces printing the chapter name and number in unnumbered chapters.}
If a chapter is unnumbered, perhaps because it is in the \cmd{\frontmatter}
or because \cmd{\chapter*} is used, then when printing the command
\cmd{\printchapternonum} is called instead of printing the name and number,
as illustrated below:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\chapterhead}[1]{ % THIS IS A SIMPLIFIED VERSION
  \clearforchapter        % move to correct page
  \thispagestyle{chapter} % set the page style
  \insertchapterspace     % Inserts space into LoF and LoT
  \chapterheadstart       % \beforechapskip space before heading
  \printchaptername\chapternamenum\printchapternum
  \afterchapternum        % \midchapskip space between number and title
  \printchaptertitle{#1}  % title
  \afterchaptertitle}     % \afterchapskip space after title
\end{lcode}
%
%
%
\LMnote{2010/07/16}{added}
By default the first paragraph following a \cs{chapter} is \emph{not}
indented, this can be controlled by
\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\indentafterchapter}\\
  \cmd{\noindentafterchapter}
\end{syntax}
\glossary(indentafterchapter)%
{\cs{indentafterchapter}}%
{Specifies that the first paragraph after a \cs{chapter} should be indented}
\glossary(noindentafterchapter)%
{\cs{noindentafterchapter}}%
{Specifies that the first paragraph after a \cs{chapter} should \emph{not} be indented}
The default is not to indent the first paragraph following a
\cs{chapter}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\insertchapterspace} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(insertchapterspace)%
  {\cs{insertchapterspace}}%
  {Called by \cs{chapter} to insert space into LoF and LoT.}
By default a \cmd{\chapter} inserts a small amount of vertical space
into the List of Figures and List of Tables. It calls \cmd{\insertchapterspace}
to do this. The default definition is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\insertchapterspace}{%
  \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10pt}}%
  \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10pt}}%
}
\end{lcode}
If you would prefer no inserted spaces then 
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\insertchapterspace}{}
\end{lcode}
will do the job. 
Different spacing can be inserted by
changing the value of the length arguments to \cmd{\addvspace}.

By making suitable changes to the above macros you can make some
simple modifications to the layout.

\index{heading!chapter|)}

\subsection{Defining a chapter style} \label{sec:chapterstyle}

\index{chapterstyle|(}

    The class provides many ways in which you can implement your designs
for chapter headings.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\chapterstyle}\marg{style} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(chapterstyle)%
  {\cs{chapterstyle}\marg{style}}%
  {Sets chapter heading layout to \meta{style}.}
The macro \cmd{\chapterstyle} is rather like the \cmd{\pagestyle} command in 
that it sets the style of any subsequent chapter headings to be \meta{style}.

    The class provides some predefined chapter styles, including the 
\cstyle{default} style which is the familiar LaTeX \Lclass{book} class chapter
headings style. To use the chapterstyle \cstyle{fred} just issue the command
\begin{lcode}
\chapterstyle{fred}
\end{lcode}
Different styles can be used in the same document.

The simpler predefined styles include:
\LMnote{2011/05/25}{I've moved the chapter style images to the
  showcase appendix to save some space in the main part of the manual}
\begin{itemize}
\item[\cstyle{default}] 
\glossary(defaultcs)%
  {\Pcstyle{default}}%
  {The default \Ppack{book} class chapterstyle.}
The normal \ltx\ \Lclass{book} class chapter styling; shown in \fref{dcdefault}.
%\begin{demochap}[-3\onelineskip]{default}\end{demochap}

\item[\cstyle{section}] 
\glossary(sectioncs)%
  {\Pcstyle{section}}%
  {Simple chapterstyle looking like a section head.}
The heading is typeset like a section; that is, 
there is just the number and the title on one line. This is illustrated
in \fref{dcsection}. 
%%    See \Cref{chap:topsandtails} on \pref{chap:topsandtails} for an example.
%\begin{demochap}[2\onelineskip]{section}\end{demochap}

\item[\cstyle{hangnum}] 
\glossary(hangnumcs)%
  {\Pcstyle{hangnum}}%
  {Simple chapterstyle looking like a section head but with the number in the margin.}
Like the \pstyle{section} style except that the chapter
number is put in the margin\index{margin!left}, as shown in \fref{dchangnum}. 
%%    See \Cref{chap:captions} on \pref{chap:captions} for an example.
%\begin{demochap}[2\onelineskip]{hangnum}\end{demochap}

\item[\cstyle{companion}]
\glossary(companioncs)%
  {\Pcstyle{companion}}%
  {Chapterstyle like those in the \textit{LaTeX companion} series.}
 This produces chapter headings like those of the
\textit{LaTeX Companion} series of books. An example is in \fref{dccompanion}.
%%    See \Cref{chap:signposts} on \pref{chap:signposts} for an example.
%\begin{demochap}[2\onelineskip]{companion}\end{demochap}

\item[\cstyle{article}]
\glossary(articlecs)%
  {\Pcstyle{article}}%
  {Chapter style similar to a section head in the \Pclass{article} class but 
   with different
   sized fonts.}
 The heading is typeset like a \cmd{\section}
heading in the \Lclass{article} class. This is similar to the 
\cstyle{section} style but different fonts and spacings are used,
as shown in \fref{dcarticle}.
%\begin{demochap}[-1\onelineskip]{article}\end{demochap}

\item[\cstyle{reparticle}]
\glossary(reparticlecs)%
  {\Pcstyle{reparticle}}%
  {With the \Popt{article} class option it replicates a section head in 
   the \Pclass{article} class.}
   When the \Lopt{article} class option is used
    the default chapter and section styles are close, but not
    identical, to the corresponding division heads in the \Lclass{article}
    class. The \cstyle{reparticle} chapterstyle makes \cmd{\chapter}
    replicate the appearance of \cmd{\section} in the \Lclass{article}
    class.

%%\item[\cstyle{demo}] Try this one to see what it does. On the other
%%   hand you can look at \Cref{chap:verse} on \pref{chap:verse} to see
%%   what it looks like.
\end{itemize}

    If you use only the predefined chapterstyles there is no need to
plough through the rest of this section, except to look at the illustrations
of the remaining predefined chapterstyles shown a little later.

The various macros shown in the \cs{chapterhead} code above are initially 
set up as:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\chapterheadstart}{\vspace*{\beforechapskip}}
\newcommand{\printchaptername}{\chapnamefont \@chapapp}
\newcommand{\chapternamenum}{\space}
\newcommand{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont \thechapter}
\newcommand{\afterchapternum}{\par\nobreak\vskip \midchapskip}
\newcommand{\printchapternonum}{}
\newcommand{\printchaptertitle}[1]{\chaptitlefont #1}
\newcommand{\afterchaptertitle}{\par\nobreak\vskip \afterchapskip}
\end{lcode}

    A new style is specified by changing the definitions of this last set of 
macros and/or the various font and skip specifications.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makechapterstyle}\marg{style}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
Chapter styles are defined via the \cmd{\makechapterstyle} command, where
\meta{style} is the style being defined and \meta{text} is the LaTeX code 
defining the style.

    To start things off, here is the code for the \cstyle{default} chapter
style, which mimics the chapter heads in the standard \Lclass{book} and 
\Lclass{report} classes, as it appears in \file{memoir.cls}.
\begin{lcode}
\makechapterstyle{default}{%
  \def\chapterheadstart{\vspace*{\beforechapskip}
  \def\printchaptername{\chapnamefont \@chapapp}
  \def\chapternamenum{\space}
  \def\printchapternum{\chapnumfont \thechapter}
  \def\afterchapternum{\par\nobreak\vskip \midchapskip}
  \def\printchapternonum{}
  \def\printchaptertitle##1{\chaptitlefont ##1}
  \de\afterchaptertitle{\par\nobreak\vskip \afterchapskip}
}
\newcommand{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
\newcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
\newcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}
\newlength{\beforechapskip}\setlength{\beforechapskip}{50pt}
\newlength{\midchapskip}\setlength{\midchapskip}{20pt}
\newlength{\afterchapskip}\setlength{\afterchapskip}{40pt}
\chapterstyle{default}
\end{lcode}
(The mysterious \cmd{\@chapapp} is the internal macro that \ltx\ uses
to store normally the chapter name.\footnote{Remember, if you use
a macro that has an \texttt{@} in its name it must be in a place
where \texttt{@} is treated as a letter.} It will normally have 
different values,
set automatically, when typesetting a chapter in the main body 
(e.g., \texttt{Chapter}) or in the appendices\index{appendix} where
it would usually be set to \texttt{Appendix}, but you can specify
these names yourself.)

    As an example of setting up a simple chapterstyle, here is the code for 
defining the \cstyle{section} chapterstyle. In this case it is principally
a question of eliminating most of the printing and zeroing some spacing.
\begin{lcode}
\makechapterstyle{section}{%
  \renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{}
  \renewcommand*{\chapternamenum}{}
  \renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\chaptitlefont}
  \renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont \thechapter\space}
  \renewcommand*{\afterchapternum}{}
}
\end{lcode}
In this style, \cmd{\printchaptername} is vacuous, so the normal `Chapter'
is never typeset. The same font is used for the number and the title, and
the number is typeset with a space after it. The macro \cmd{\afterchapternum}
is vacuous, so the chapter title will be typeset immediately after the number.

    In the standard classes the title of an unnumbered chapter is typeset
at the same position on the page as the word `Chapter' for numbered chapters.
The macro \cmd{\printchapternonum} is called just before an unnumbered 
chapter title text is typeset. By default this does nothing but you can use
\cmd{\renewcommand} to change this. For example, if you wished the title
text for both numbered and unnumbered chapters to be at the same height on
the page then you could redefine \cmd{\printchapternonum} to insert
the amount of vertical space taken by any `Chapter N' line. For example,
as \cmd{\printchapternonum} is vaucuous in the \cstyle{default} chapterstyle
the vertical position of a title depends on whether or not it is numbered.

The \cstyle{hangnum} style, which is like \cstyle{section} except that it
puts the number in the margin, is defined as follows:
\begin{lcode}
\makechapterstyle{hangnum}{%
  \renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\chaptitlefont}
  % allow for 99 chapters!
  \settowidth{\chapindent}{\chapnumfont 999}
  \renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{}
  \renewcommand*{\chapternamenum}{}
  \renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\chaptitlefont}
  \renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{%
    \noindent\llap{\makebox[\chapindent][l]{%
    \chapnumfont \thechapter}}}
  \renewcommand*{\afterchapternum}{}
}
\end{lcode}
The chapter number is put at the left of a box wide enough for three digits.
The box is put into the margin, via \cmd{\llap}, for typesetting. The
chapter title is then typeset, starting at the left margin.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\chapindent} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(chapindent)%
  {\cs{chapindent}}%
  {A length you can use in a defining chapter style (or anything else).}
The length \lnc{\chapindent} is provided for use in specifying chapterstyles,
but you could use it for any other purposes.

    The definition of the \cstyle{companion} chapterstyle is more complicated.
\begin{lcode}
\makechapterstyle{companion}{%
  \renewcommand*{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\LARGE\scshape}
  \renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\Huge}
  \renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{%
    \raggedleft\chapnamefont \@chapapp}
  \setlength{\chapindent}{\marginparsep}
  \addtolength{\chapindent}{\marginparwidth}
  \renewcommand{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
    \begin{adjustwidth}{}{-\chapindent}
      \raggedleft \chaptitlefont ##1\par\nobreak
    \end{adjustwidth}}
}
\end{lcode}
\PWnote{2009/09/07}{Fixed adjuswidth typo.}
As shown in \fref{dccompanion} the chapter name is in small caps and set
flushright. The title is also set flushright aligned with the outermost 
part of the marginal notes. This is achieved by use of the \Ie{adjustwidth}
environment\footnote{See \S\ref{sec:adjustwidth}.} to make \ltx\ think
that the typeblock is locally wider than it actually is.

\subsection{Further chapterstyles}


    The class provides more chapterstyles, which are listed here. 
Some are mine and others are from postings to \ctt\ by \Pclass{memoir}
users. I have modified some of the posted ones to cater for things like 
appendices, multiline titles, and unnumbered chapters which were not 
considered in the originals. The code
for some of them is given later to help you see how they are done.
Separately, Lars Madsen\index{Madsen, Lars} has collected a wide variety of 
styles~\cite{CHAPSTYLES} and shows how they were created.

    If you want to try several chapterstyles in one document, request the
\cstyle{default} style before each of the others to ensure that a previous 
style's changes are not passed on to a following one.

\LMnote{2011/05/25}{I've moved the chapter style images to the
  showcase appendix to save some space in the main part of the manual}
\begin{itemize}

\item[\cstyle{bianchi}] 
\glossary(bianchics)%
  {\Pcstyle{bianchi}}%
  {A two line, centered chapterstyle with rules above and below.}
  This style was created by 
  Stefano\index{Bianchi, Stefano} Bianchi\footnote{\ctt,
  \textit{New chapter style: chapter vs chapter*}, 2003/12/09} and is a two 
  line centered arrangement with rules above and below the large bold 
  sanserif title line. 
  The chapter number line is in a smaller italic font. An example
is in \fref{dcbianchi}.

%\begin{demochap}[2\onelineskip]{bianchi}\end{demochap}
%\begin{demochap}[-2\onelineskip]{bianchi}\end{demochap}

\item[\cstyle{bringhurst}] The \cstyle{bringhurst} chapterstyle described
  in the manual and illustrated in \fref{dcbringhurst}.
\glossary(bringhurstcs)%
  {\Pcstyle{bringhurst}}%
  {A raggedright, unnumbered, small caps chapterstyle with a textwidth
   rule below.}

%\begin{demochap}{bringhurst}\end{demochap}


\item[\cstyle{brotherton}]
\glossary(brothertoncs)%
  {\Pcstyle{brotherton}}%
  {A chapterstyle like the default but with the number spelled out.}%
 A very simple style designed by 
William\index{Adams, William} Adams\footnote{\ctt, 
\textit{An example of a novel?}, 2006/12/09} for the science fiction novel 
\textit{Star Dragon} by Mike Brotherton. The novel is freely downloadable 
from Brotherton's web site. The style is the same as the \cstyle{default} 
except that the number is spelt out in words. It is demonstrated in
\fref{dcbrotherton}. In the novel the chapters are actually 
untitled i.e., via \verb?\chapter{}?.

%\begin{demochap}[2\onelineskip]{brotherton}\end{demochap}
%\begin{demochap}[-2\onelineskip]{brotherton}\end{demochap}


\item[\cstyle{chappell}] 
\glossary(chappellcs)%
  {\Pcstyle{chappell}}%
  { A centered chapterstyle with a rule between
   the number line (in a roman font) and the title line in italics.}
The name and number are centered above a rule and the
title in italics is below, again centered. It is illustrated in 
\fref{dcchappell}.

%\begin{demochap}{chappell}\end{demochap}

\item[\cstyle{crosshead}] 
\glossary(crossheadcs)%
  {\Pcstyle{crosshead}}%
  { A centered chapterstyle in a bold font.}
The number and title are centered and set with a large bold font.
It is illustrated in 
\fref{dccrosshead}.

%\begin{demochap}[-2\onelineskip]{crosshead}\end{demochap}


\item[\cstyle{culver}] 
\glossary(culvercs)%
  {\Pcstyle{culver}}%
  {One line, centered, bold chapterstyle using Roman numerals.}
A chapter style I created for 
  Christopher\index{Culver, Christopher}
  Culver\footnote{\ctt, \textit{"Biblical" formatting, how?}, 2004/03/29}
  based on the format of `ancient' texts.
 It is one line, centered, bold and with the number printed as Roman numerals,
as shown in \fref{dcculver}.

\begin{comment}
\makechapterstyle{culver}{
  \chapterstyle{default}
  \chapterstyle{article}
  \renewcommand*{\thechapter}{\Roman{chapter}}
  \renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{% center number/title
    \centering\chapnumfont \thechapter\space\space}%
  \renewcommand*{\printchapternonum}{\centering}
  \renewcommand*{\clearforchapter}{}% no new page
  \aliaspagestyle{chapter}{headings}% no special pagestyle
}
\end{comment}

%\begin{demochap}[-\onelineskip]{culver}\end{demochap}

    He also wanted sections to just start with the number and the text to 
immediately follow on the same line. That can be accomplished like this:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\thesection}{\arabic{section}}
\renewcommand*{\section}[1]{%
  \refstepcounter{section}%
  \par\noindent
  \textbf{\thesection.}%
  \space\nolinebreak}
\end{lcode}

\item[\cstyle{dash}]
\glossary(dashcs)%
  {\Pcstyle{dash}}%
  {Two line, centered, regular font, chapterstyle. The number has a dash on 
   either side.}
 A simple two line centered chapterstyle. There is a short
dash on either side of the number and a slightly larger
version of the regular font is used for both the number and the title.
This style is shown in \fref{dcdash}.

%\begin{demochap}[-2\onelineskip]{dash}\end{demochap}
%\begin{demochap}[-4\onelineskip]{dash}\end{demochap}

%\item[\cstyle{default}] This was already in the class but it has been revised
%     to re-initialize all the settings.
%\glossary(defaultcs)%
%  {\Pcstyle{default}}%
%  {The default \Ppack{book} class chapterstyle.}

\item[\cstyle{demo2}]
\glossary(demo2cs)%
  {\Pcstyle{demo2}}%
  {A two line chapterstyle with a large sanserif title; the number is above, 
   centered and written (e.g., Six instead of 6) in a bold font. 
   There are rules above and below the title.}
   A two line chapterstyle with a large sanserif title; the number is above, 
   centered and written (e.g., Six instead of 6) in a bold font. 
   There are rules above and below the title. An example is shown in 
  \fref{dcdemo2}.


%\begin{demochap}[-2\onelineskip]{demo2}\end{demochap}
%\begin{demochap}[-\onelineskip]{demo2}\end{demochap}

\item[\cstyle{demo3}]
\glossary(demo3cs)%
  {\Pcstyle{demo3}}%
  {A two line chapterstyle with a large sanserif title; the number is above, 
   centered and written (e.g., Six instead of 6) in an italic font. 
   There are rules above and below
   the title line. It is a modified version of the \Pcstyle{demo2} style.}
   The chapterstyle used in this document. It is a
  modified version of the \cstyle{demo2} chapterstyle, using an italic
  rather than bold font for the number.

\item[\cstyle{dowding}] 
\glossary(dowdingcs)%
  {\Pcstyle{dowding}}%
  { A centered two line chapterstyle in an italic font and the number
   is spelled out.}
A centered style where the name and number are set in a bold font, with the 
number spelled out. The title is below in a large italic font. The style
is based on the design used in Dowding's \textit{Finer Points}~\cite{DOWDING96}.
It is illustrated in 
\fref{dcdowding}.

%\begin{demochap}[-2\onelineskip]{dowding}\end{demochap}


\item[\cstyle{ell}] 
\glossary(ellcs)%
  {\Pcstyle{ell}}%
  {A raggedleft large sanserif chapterstyle with the number in the margin. An
   `L' shaped rule separates the number and title lines.}
  A raggedleft sanserif chapterstyle. 
  The number line is separated
  from the title by rules like an `L' on its side and the number is placed
  in the margin, as shown in \fref{dcell}. 
I will probably use this in my next book. 

%\begin{demochap}[6\onelineskip]{ell}\end{demochap}
%\begin{demochap}{ell}\end{demochap}

\item[\cstyle{ger}] 
\glossary(gercs)%
  {\Pcstyle{ger}}%
  {A raggedright, large, bold, two line chapterstyle with rules
   above and below.}
This style was created by 
Gerardo\index{Garcia, Gerardo} Garcia\footnote{\ctt,
  \textit{Fancy Headings, Chapter Headings}, 2002/04/12} and is a two line,
  raggedright, large bold style with rules above and below. It is
  demonstrated in \fref{dcger}.

%\begin{demochap}{ger}\end{demochap}
%\begin{demochap}[-4\onelineskip]{ger}\end{demochap}

\item[\cstyle{komalike}] 
\glossary(komalikecs)%
  {\Pcstyle{komalike}}%
  { A section-like chapterstyle in a sans serif font.}
A section-like style set with a sans serif type. It is like that in the
\Lclass{scrbook} class (part of the KOMA bundle). 
It is illustrated in 
\fref{dckomalike}.

%\begin{demochap}[-2\onelineskip]{komalike}\end{demochap}


\item[\cstyle{lyhne}] 
\glossary(lyhnecs)%
  {\Pcstyle{lyhne}}%
  {A raggedleft bold sanserif chapter title set between two rules, with the
   name and number above. It requires the \Ppack{graphicx} package.}
  A style created by Anders\index{Lyhne, Anders}
  Lyhne\footnote{\ctt, \textit{Glossary}, 2006/02/09} and shown in \fref{dclyhne}
  where the raggedleft
  sanserif title is between two rules, with the name and number above.
  I modified the original to cater for unnumbered chapters. It requires
  the \Lpack{graphicx} package.

%\begin{demochap}[-\onelineskip]{lyhne}\end{demochap}
%\begin{demochap}[-2\onelineskip]{lyhne}\end{demochap}

\item[\cstyle{madsen}] 
\glossary(madsencs)%
  {\Pcstyle{madsen}}%
  {A raggedleft large bold sanserif chapterstyle with the number in the
   margin and a rule between the number and title lines.
   It requires the \Ppack{graphicx} package.}
  This was created by 
  Lars\index{Madsen, Lars} Madsen\footnote{\ctt,
  \textit{New chapter style: chapter vs chapter*}, 2003/12/09}
  and is shown in \fref{dcmadsen}.
  It is a large sanserif raggedleft style with the number in the margin
  and a rule between the number and title lines. It requires the
  \Lpack{graphicx} package.

%\begin{demochap}[2\onelineskip]{madsen}\end{demochap}
%\begin{demochap}[-2\onelineskip]{madsen}\end{demochap}

\item[\cstyle{ntglike}] 
\glossary(ntglikecs)%
  {\Pcstyle{ntglike}}%
  { A smaller version of the standard chapterstyle.}
A smaller version of the standard chapterstyle; it is like that in the NTG 
classes (\Lclass{boek} class) developed by the Dutch \tx\ User Group.
It is illustrated in 
\fref{dcntglike}.

%\begin{demochap}[-3\onelineskip]{ntglike}\end{demochap}



\item[\cstyle{pedersen}] 
\glossary(pedersencs)%
  {\Pcstyle{pedersen}}%
  {A single line chapterstyle in large italics with the number set in the
  righthand margin. The title and/or number may be colored. The 
  \Ppack{graphicx} package is required and the \Ppack{color} 
  (or \Ppack{xcolor}) package if you want to color.}
  This was created by
  Troels\index{Pedersen, Troels} Pedersen\footnote{\ctt,
  \textit{Chapter style}, 2006/01/31} and requires the \Lpack{graphicx}
  package, and, to get the full effect, the \Lpack{color} package as well.
  The title is raggedright in large italics while the number is much larger
  and placed in the righthand margin (I changed the means of placing the 
  number). The head of this chapter is set with the \cstyle{pedersen} style,
  because it cannot be adequately demonstrated in an illustration.

%%%%\begin{demochap}{pedersen}\end{demochap}

\item[\cstyle{southall}] 
\glossary(southallcs)%
  {\Pcstyle{southall}}%
  { A raggedright chapterstyle with the number and title on the same line
   and a rule below.}
  This style was created by Thomas\index{Dye, Thomas} Dye. It
  is a simple numbered heading with the title set as a block 
  paragraph, and with a horizontal rule underneath. It is illustrated
  in \fref{dcsouthall}.

%\begin{demochap}[-\onelineskip]{southall}\end{demochap}

\item[\cstyle{tandh}] 
\glossary(tandhcs)%
  {\Pcstyle{tandh}}%
  {A simple section-like chapterstyle in a bold font.}
A simple section-like style in a bold font. It is based on the design used in
the Thames \& Hudson \textit{Manual of Typography}~\cite{MCLEAN80} and 
is illustrated in 
\fref{dctandh}.

%\begin{demochap}[-1\onelineskip]{tandh}\end{demochap}


\item[\cstyle{thatcher}] 
\glossary(thatchercs)%
  {\Pcstyle{thatcher}}%
  {A centered small caps chapterstyle with the number line separated from 
   the title by a short rule.}
A style created by 
  Scott\index{Thatcher, Scott} Thatcher\footnote{\ctt,
  \textit{memoir: chapter headings capitalize math symbols}, 2006/01/18} 
  which has the chapter name and number centered with the
  title below, also centered, and all set in small caps. There is a short rule
  between the number line and the title, as shown in \fref{dcthatcher}. 
  I have modified the original to
  cater for multiline titles, unnumbered chapters, and appendices.

%\begin{demochap}{thatcher}\end{demochap}



\item[\cstyle{veelo}]
\glossary(veelocs)%
  {\Pcstyle{veelo}}%
  {A raggedleft large bold chapterstyle with a large black square 
   in the margin by the number line. It requires the \Ppack{graphicx} package.}
   This style created by Bastiaan\index{Veelo, Bastiaan} Veelo 
  is shown in \fref{dcveelo} and is raggedleft, large, bold and with a
  black square in the margin by the number line. It requires the 
  \Lpack{graphicx} package.

%\cleardoublepage

%%\savefigcnt=1
%\demochapcnt=8
%\begin{demochap}{veelo}\end{demochap}
%\begin{demochap}[-2\onelineskip]{veelo}\end{demochap}

\item[\cstyle{verville}]
\glossary(vervillecs)%
  {\Pcstyle{verville}}%
  {A single line, large, centered, chapterstyle with rules above and below.}
 A chapterstyle I created for 
  Guy\index{Verville, Guy} Verville\footnote{\ctt,
  \textit{Headers and special formatting of sections}, 2005/01/18}. 
  It is a single line, large centered style with rules above 
  and below, as in \fref{dcverville}. Unlike my posted version, 
  this one properly caters for unnumbered chapters.

%\begin{demochap}{verville}\end{demochap}

\item[\cstyle{wilsondob}] 
\glossary(wilsondobcs)%
  {\Pcstyle{wilsondob}}%
  {A one line flushright chapterstyle in a large italic font.}
A one line flushright (raggedleft) section-like style in a large italic font. 
It is based on the design used in
Adrian Wilson's \textit{The Design of Books}~\cite{ADRIANWILSON93} and 
is illustrated in 
\fref{dcwilsondob}.

%\begin{demochap}[-1\onelineskip]{wilsondob}\end{demochap}

\end{itemize}


The code for some of these styles is given in
section~\ref{sec:chapter-styles} within the Showcase Appendix.  For
details of how the other chapter styles are defined, look at the
documented class code. This should give you ideas if you want to
define your own style.

Note that it is not necessary to define a new chapterstyle if you want
to change the chapter headings --- you can just change the individual
macros without putting them into a style.



\index{chapterstyle|)}

\subsection{Chapter precis}
\label{sec:chapter-precis}

\index{chapter!precis|(}


   Some old style novels, and even some modern text 
 books,\footnote{For example, Robert Sedgewick, \textit{Algorithms},
 Addison-Wesley, 1983.} include a short synopsis of the contents of 
 the chapter either immediately
 after the chapter heading\index{heading!chapter} or in the \toc, or in both places.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\chapterprecis}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(chapterprecis)%
  {\cs{chapterprecis}\marg{text}}%
  {Prints \meta{text} and also adds it to the ToC.}
     The command \cmd{\chapterprecis} prints its argument 
 both at the
 point in the document where it is called, and also adds it to the \file{.toc}
 file. For example:
 \begin{lcode}
 ...
 \chapter{}%  first chapter
 \chapterprecis{Our hero is introduced; family tree; early days.}
 ...
 \end{lcode}

    Now for the details.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\prechapterprecisshift} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(prechapterprecisshift)%
  {\cs{prechapterprecisshift}}%
  {Spacing between a chapter head and a chapter precis.}
The length \lnc{\prechapterprecisshift} controls the vertical spacing before
a \cmd{\chapterprecis}. If the precis immediately follows a \cmd{\chapter}
then a different space is required depending on whether or not the
\Lopt{article} class option is used. The class sets:
\begin{lcode}
\ifartopt
  \setlength{\prechapterprecisshift}{0pt}
\else
  \setlength{\prechapterprecisshift}{-2\baselineskip}
\fi
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\chapterprecishere}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\chapterprecistoc}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(chapterprecishere)%
  {\cs{chapterprecishere}\marg{text}}%
  {Typesets \meta{text} for a chapter precis.}
\glossary(chapterprecistoc)%
  {\cs{chapterprecistoc}\marg{text}}%
  {Adds \meta{text} for a chapter precis to the ToC.}
 The \cmd{\chapterprecis} command calls these two commands to print the
 \meta{text} in the document (the \cmd{\chapterprecishere} command) 
 and to put it into the \toc{} (the \cmd{\chapterprecistoc} command). 
 These can be used individually if required.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\precisfont} \\
\cmd{\prechapterprecis} \cmd{\postchapterprecis} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\chapterprecishere} macro is intended for use immediately after 
a \cmd{\chapter}. The \meta{text} argument is typeset in
the \cmd{\precisfont} font in a \Ie{quote} environment. The macro's 
definition is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\chapterprecishere}[1]{%
  \prechapterprecis #1\postchapterprecis}
\end{lcode}
where \cmd{\prechapterprecis}, \cmd{\postchapterprecis} and \cmd{\precisfont}
are defined as:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\prechapterprecis}{%
  \vspace*{\prechapterprecisshift}%
  \begin{quote}\precisfont}
\newcommand{\postchapterprecis}{\end{quote}}
\newcommand*{\precisfont}{\normalfont\itshape}
\end{lcode}
Any or all of these can be changed if another style of typesetting is required.

\LMnote{2010/06/09}{Changed a bit, and moved the glossary stuff here
  where it naturally belong}
Next the following macros control the formatting of the precis text in
the ToC.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\precistoctext}\marg{text} \cmd{\precistocfont} \cmd{\precistocformat} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(precistoctext)%
  {\cs{precistoctext}\marg{text}}%
  {ToC entry for chapter precis \meta{text}}
\glossary(precistocfont)%
  {\cs{precistocfont}}%
  {Font for typesetting \cs{precistoctext}.}
\glossary(precistocformat)%
  {\cs{precistocformat}}%
  {Format for typesetting \cs{precistoctext}.}
The \cmd{\chapterprecistoc} macro puts \cmd{\precistoctext}\marg{text} into 
the \pixfile{toc} file. The default definition similar to (but not
exactly\footnote{Internally we use a different name for \cs{leftskip}
  and \cs{rightskip} to make it easier to do right to left document
with the class and the \texttt{bidi} package.})
\begin{lcode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\precistoctext}[1]{%
  {\nopagebreak\leftskip \cftchapterindent\relax
    \advance\leftskip \cftchapternumwidth\relax
    \rightskip \@tocrmarg\relax
    \precistocformat\precistocfont #1\par}}
\end{lcode}
Effectively, in the \toc{} \cmd{\precistoctext} typesets its argument like 
a chapter title using the \cmd{\precistocfont} (default
\cmd{\itshape}), and \cmd{\precistocformat} (default \cmd{\noindent}).

\index{chapter!precis|)}


\section{Lower level headings}

\index{heading!sections|(}

    The lower level heads --- sections down to subparagraphs --- are also
configurable, but there is nothing corresponding to chapter styles.

    There are essentially three things that may be adjusted for these heads:
(a) the vertical distance between the baseline of the text above the heading to
the baseline of the title text, (b) the indentation of the heading from the
left hand margin\index{margin!left}, and (c) the style (font) used for the 
heading title. 
Additionally, a heading may be run-in to the text or as a display before 
the following text;
in the latter case the vertical distance between the heading and the 
following text may also be adjusted. Figure~\ref{fig:displaysechead} shows the
parameters controlling a displayed sectional heading and \fref{fig:runsechead}
shows the parameters for a run-in heading. The default values of the
parameters for the different heads are in \tref{tab:defdisplaySvals} for
the display heads and \tref{tab:defruninSvals} for the run-in heads.


\begin{figure}
\centering
\setlayoutscale{1}
\drawparameterstrue
\drawheading{}
\caption{Displayed sectional headings} \label{fig:displaysechead}
\end{figure}

\begin{figure}
\centering
\setlayoutscale{1}
\drawparameterstrue
\runinheadtrue
\drawheading{}
\caption{Run-in sectional headings} \label{fig:runsechead}
\end{figure}

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Default display sectioning layout parameter values}\label{tab:defdisplaySvals}
\begin{tabular}{lccc} \toprule
  & section & subsection & subsubsection \\ \midrule
beforeskip (-ex) & 3.5+1-.2 & 3.25+1-.2 & 3.25+1-.2 \\
indent          &    0     &      0    &     0     \\
afterskip (ex)  & 2.3+.2   & 1.5+.2    & 1.5+.2 \\
font   & \cs{Large}\cs{bfseries} & \cs{large}\cs{bfseries} & \cs{bfseries} \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}


\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Default run-in sectioning layout parameter values}\label{tab:defruninSvals}
\begin{tabular}{lcc} \toprule
  & paragraph & subparagraph \\ \midrule
beforeskip (+ex) & 3.25+1-.2 & 3.25+1-.2 \\
indent          &    0      &  \cs{parindent} \\
afterskip       & -1em       & -1em       \\
font            & \cs{bfseries} & \cs{bfseries} \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}


    In the following I will use \texttt{S} to stand for one of \texttt{sec},
\texttt{subsec}, \texttt{subsubsec}, \texttt{para} or \texttt{subpara}, 
which are in turn shorthand for \texttt{section} through to 
\texttt{subparagraph}, as summarised in \tref{tab:Sshort}.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Values for \texttt{S} in section styling macro names.} \label{tab:Sshort}
\ttfamily
\begin{tabular}{llllll}\toprule
S & sec & subsec & subsubsec & para & subpara \\
  & section & subsection & subsubsection & paragraph & subparagraph \\ 
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setbeforeSskip}\marg{skip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setbeforeSskip)%
  {\cs{setbeforeSskip}\marg{skip}}%
  {Sets the \cs{beforeskip} for an S head.}
\glossary(setbeforesecskip)%
  {\cs{setbeforesecskip}\marg{skip}}%
  {Sets the \cs{beforeskip} for a \cs{section} head.}
\glossary(setbeforesubsecskip)%
  {\cs{setbeforesubsecskip}\marg{skip}}%
  {Sets the \cs{beforeskip} for a \cs{subsection} head.}
\glossary(setbeforesubsubsecskip)%
  {\cs{setbeforesubsubsecskip}\marg{skip}}%
  {Sets the \cs{beforeskip} for a \cs{subsubsection} head.}
\glossary(setbeforeparaskip)%
  {\cs{setbeforeparaskip}\marg{skip}}%
  {Sets the \cs{beforeskip} for a \cs{paragraph} head.}
\glossary(setbeforesubparaskip)%
  {\cs{setbeforesubparaskip}\marg{skip}}%
  {Sets the \cs{beforeskip} for a \cs{subparagraph} head.}
The absolute value of the \meta{skip} length argument is the space to leave
above the heading. If the actual value is negative then the first line 
after the heading will not be indented. The default \meta{skip} depends on the
particular level of heading, but for a \cmd{\section} 
(i.e., when \verb?S = sec?) it is 
\begin{lcode}
-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex
\end{lcode}
where the plus and minus values are the
allowable stretch and shrink; note that all the values are negative so that 
there is no indentation of the following text. If you wanted indentation then
you could do
\begin{lcode}
\setbeforesecskip{3.5ex plus 1ex minus .2ex}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setSindent}\marg{length} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setSindent)
  {\cs{setSindent}\marg{length}}%
  {Sets the \cs{indent} for an S head.} 
\glossary(setsecindent)
  {\cs{setsecindent}\marg{length}}%
  {Sets the \cs{indent} for a \cs{section} head.} 
\glossary(setsubsecindent)
  {\cs{setsubsecindent}\marg{length}}%
  {Sets the \cs{indent} for a \cs{subsection} head.} 
\glossary(setsubsubsecindent)
  {\cs{setsubsubsecindent}\marg{length}}%
  {Sets the \cs{indent} for a \cs{subsubsection} head.} 
\glossary(setparaindent)
  {\cs{setparaindent}\marg{length}}%
  {Sets the \cs{indent} for a \cs{paragraph} head.} 
\glossary(setsubparaindent)
  {\cs{setsubparaindent}\marg{length}}%
  {Sets the \cs{indent} for a \cs{subparagraph} head.} 
The value of the \meta{length} length argument is the indentation of
the heading (number and title) from the lefthand margin\index{margin!left}. 
This is normally 0pt.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setSheadstyle}\marg{font} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setSheadstyle)%
  {\cs{setSheadstyle}\marg{font}}%
  {Sets the style (font) for an S head.}
\glossary(setsecheadstyle)%
  {\cs{setsecheadstyle}\marg{font}}%
  {Sets the style (font) for a section head.}
\glossary(setsubsecheadstyle)%
  {\cs{setsubsecheadstyle}\marg{font}}%
  {Sets the style (font) for a subsection head.}
\glossary(setsubsubsecheadstyle)%
  {\cs{setsubsubsecheadstyle}\marg{font}}%
  {Sets the style (font) for a subsubsection head.}
\glossary(setparaheadstyle)%
  {\cs{setparaheadstyle}\marg{font}}%
  {Sets the style (font) for a paragraph head.}
\glossary(setsubparaheadstyle)%
  {\cs{setsubparaheadstyle}\marg{font}}%
  {Sets the style (font) for a subparagraph head.}
This macro specifies the style (font) for the sectional number and title. 
As before, the default value of the \meta{font} argument depends on the
level of the heading. For a \cmd{\subsection} (i.e., \verb?S=subsec?) it is
\verb?\large\bfseries\raggedright?, to typeset in the \cmd{\bfseries} font
in the \cmd{\large} size; the title will also be set ragged right (i.e.,
there will be no hyphenation in a multiline title).

    Note that the very last element in the \meta{font} argument may be a 
macro that takes one argument (the number and title of the heading). So,
if for some reason you wanted \cmd{\subsubsection} titles to be all uppercase,
centered, and in the normal font, you can do
\begin{lcode}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\centering\MakeUppercase}
\end{lcode}

    As another example, although I don't recommend this, you can draw a
horizontal line under section titles via:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\ruledsec}[1]{%
  \Large\bfseries\raggedright #1 \rule{\textwidth}{0.4pt}}
\setsecheadstyle{\ruledsec}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setafterSskip}\marg{skip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setafterSskip)%
  {\cs{setafterSskip}\marg{skip}}%
  {Sets the \cs{afterskip} for an S head.}
\glossary(setaftersecskip)%
  {\cs{setaftersecskip}\marg{skip}}%
  {Sets the \cs{afterskip} for a section head.}
\glossary(setaftersubsecskip)%
  {\cs{setaftersubsecskip}\marg{skip}}%
  {Sets the \cs{afterskip} for a subsection head.}
\glossary(setaftersubsubsecskip)%
  {\cs{setaftersubsubsecskip}\marg{skip}}%
  {Sets the \cs{afterskip} for a subsubsection head.}
\glossary(setafterparaskip)%
  {\cs{setafterparaskip}\marg{skip}}%
  {Sets the \cs{afterskip} for a paragraph head.}
\glossary(setaftersubparaskip)%
  {\cs{setaftersubparaskip}\marg{skip}}%
  {Sets the \cs{afterskip} for a subparagraph head.}
If the value of the \meta{skip} length argument is positive it is the space 
to leave between the display heading and the following text. If it is negative,
then the heading will be run-in and the value is the horizontal space
between the end of the heading and the following text.
The default \meta{skip} depends on the
particular level of heading, but for a \cmd{\section} (i.e., when 
\verb?S = sec?) it is \verb?2.3ex plus .2ex?, 
and for a \cmd{\subparagraph} (i.e., \verb?S = subpara?), which is a run-in 
heading, it is \verb?-1em?.

\fancybreak{$*$}
\fancybreak{}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\@hangfrom}\marg{code} \\
\cmd{\sethangfrom}\marg{code} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(hangfromat)%
  {\cs{@hangfrom}\marg{code}}%
  {Kernel macro aiding the setting hanging paragraphs.}
\glossary(sethangfrom)%
  {\cs{sethangfrom}\marg{code}}%
  {User macro redefining \cs{@hangfrom} to \meta{code}.}
Internally all the titling macros use a macro called \cmd{\@hangfrom} which
by default makes multiline titles look like a hanging paragraph\index{paragraph!hanging}. The
default definition of \cmd{\@hangfrom} (in file \file{ltsect.dtx}) is
effectively:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\@hangfrom}[1]{\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{{#1}}%
  \hangindent \wd\@tempboxa\noindent\box\@tempboxa}
\end{lcode}
The argument is put into a box and its width is measured, then a hanging
paragraph\index{paragraph!hanging} is started with the argument as the 
first thing and second and later lines indented by the argument's width.

The \cmd{\sethangfrom} macro redefines \cmd{\@hangfrom} to be \meta{code}.
For example, to have the titles set as block paragraphs\index{paragraph!block} instead of hanging
paragraphs\index{paragraph!hanging}, simply do:
\begin{lcode}
\sethangfrom{\noindent #1}
\end{lcode}
Note that you have to use \verb?#1? at the position in the replacement
code for \cmd{\@hangfrom} where the argument to \cmd{\@hangfrom}
is to be located.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\@seccntformat}\marg{code} \\
\cmd{\setsecnumformat}\marg{code} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(seccntformatat)%
  {\cs{@seccntformat}\marg{code}}%
  {Kernel macro that formats the number in a sectional head.}
\glossary(setsecnumformat)%
  {\cs{setsecnumformat}\marg{code}}%
  {Redefines \cs{@seccntformat} to \meta{code}.}
Internally all the titling macros use a kernel macro called 
\cmd{\@seccntformat} 
which defines the formatting of sectional numbers in a title. Its
default definition (in file \file{ltsect.dtx}) is effectively:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\@seccntformat}[1]{\csname the#1\endcsname\quad}
\end{lcode}
which formats the sectional numbers as \verb?\thesec...? with a space 
afterwards.
The command \cmd{\setsecnumformat} redefines \cmd{\@seccntformat} 
to be \meta{code}.
For example, to put a colon and space after the number
\begin{lcode}
\setsecnumformat{\csname the#1\endcsname:\quad}
\end{lcode}
Note that you have to use \verb?#1? where you want the argument 
(sectional number) of \cmd{\@seccntformat} to go.

Note that \cmd{\setsecnumformat} applies to all \cmd{\section},
\cmd{\subsection}, etc. If you want to change it only for, say,
\cmd{\subsection}, use the \cmd{\setsubsechook} described below.


\fancybreak{$*$}
\fancybreak{}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\hangsecnum} \\
\cmd{\defaultsecnum} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(hangsecnum)%
  {\cs{hangsecnum}}%
  {Declaration making sectioning numbers hang in the margin.}
\glossary(defaultsecnum)%
  {\cs{defaultsecnum}}%
  {Declaration reversing the effect of \cs{hangsecnum}.}
The macro \cmd{\hangsecnum} is a declaration that makes sectional numbers hang
in the margin\index{margin!left}. The macro \cmd{\defaultsecnum} is a declaration that reverses the
effect of \cmd{\hangsecnum}, that is, sectional numbers will be typeset in 
their familiar places.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\Shook} \\
\cmd{\setShook}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(Shook)%
  {\cs{Shook}}%
  {Hook called immediately before typesetting the title of an S head.}
\glossary(setShook)%
  {\cs{setShook}\marg{text}}%
  {Redefines \cs{Shook} to be \meta{text}.}
\glossary(sechook)%
  {\cs{sechook}}%
  {Hook called immediately before typesetting the title of a section head.}
\glossary(setsechook)%
  {\cs{setsechook}\marg{text}}%
  {Redefines \cs{sechook} to be \meta{text}.}
\glossary(subsechook)%
  {\cs{subsechook}}%
  {Hook called immediately before typesetting the title of a subsection head.}
\glossary(setsubsechook)%
  {\cs{setsubsechook}\marg{text}}%
  {Redefines \cs{subsechook} to be \meta{text}.}
\glossary(subsubsechook)%
  {\cs{subsubsechook}}%
  {Hook called immediately before typesetting the title of a subsubsection head.}
\glossary(setsubsubsechook)%
  {\cs{setsubsubsechook}\marg{text}}%
  {Redefines \cs{subsubsechook} to be \meta{text}.}
\glossary(parahook)%
  {\cs{parahook}}%
  {Hook called immediately before typesetting the title of a paragraph head.}
\glossary(setparahook)%
  {\cs{setparahook}\marg{text}}%
  {Redefines \cs{parahook} to be \meta{text}.}
\glossary(subparahook)%
  {\cs{subparahook}}%
  {Hook called immediately before typesetting the title of a subparagraph head.}
\glossary(setsubparahook)%
  {\cs{setsubparahook}\marg{text}}%
  {Redefines \cs{subparahook} to be \meta{text}.}
The macro \cmd{\Shook} is called immediately before the typesetting of the
title; its default definition does nothing. The macro \cmd{\setShook} 
redefines \cmd{\Shook} to be \meta{text}. You can use this hook, for example,
to insert a \cmd{\sethangfrom} or \cmd{\setsecnumformat} command into the
definition of a particular section division command. In that case,
remember that if you want to refer to the \verb|#1| argument, in the
argument for \cmd{\setsecnumformat}, then you have to double the
\verb|#|, i.e. use \verb|##1|, see the example below.

Here are some example lower level heads and the code used to produce them.



\newcommand*{\shortcenter}[1]{%
  \sethangfrom{\noindent ##1}%
  \normalfont\boldmath\bfseries
  \centering
  \parbox{3in}{\centering #1}\par}

\begin{egsource}{egsubheads}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\bfseries\raggedright}
    \subsubsection*{Bold raggedright}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\scshape\raggedright}
    \subsubsection*{Small caps raggedright}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\itshape\raggedright}
    \subsubsection*{Italic raggedright}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\Large\centering}
    \subsubsection*{Large centered}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\large\centering\MakeUppercase}
    \subsubsection*{large centered uppercase}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\bfseries\centering}
    \subsubsection*{Bold centered}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\scshape\centering}
    \subsubsection*{Small caps centered}
\setsubsubsecindent{2\parindent}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\scshape\raggedright}
    \subsubsection*{Small caps indented}
\setsubsubsecindent{0pt}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\itshape\raggedleft}
    \subsubsection*{Italic flushright}
\newcommand*{\shortcenter}[1]{%
  \sethangfrom{\noindent ##1}%
  \normalfont\boldmath\bfseries
  \centering
  \parbox{3in}{\centering #1}\par}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\shortcenter}
\subsubsection*{Bold centered but taking up no more than 3 inches
                if a long title}
\end{egsource}

\FloatBlock


\begin{egresult}[A variety of subhead styles]{egsubheads}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\bfseries\raggedright}
\subsubsection*{Bold raggedright}

\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\scshape\raggedright}
\subsubsection*{Small caps raggedright}

\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\itshape\raggedright}
\subsubsection*{Italic raggedright}

\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\Large\centering}
\subsubsection*{Large centered}

\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\large\centering\MakeUppercase}
\subsubsection*{large centered uppercase}

\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\bfseries\centering}
\subsubsection*{Bold centered}

\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\scshape\centering}
\subsubsection*{Small caps centered}

\setsubsubsecindent{2\parindent}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\scshape\raggedright}
\subsubsection*{Small caps indented}

\setsubsubsecindent{0pt}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\itshape\raggedleft}
\subsubsection*{Italic flushright}

\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\shortcenter}
\subsubsection*{Bold centered but taking up no more than 3 inches
                if a long title}
\end{egresult}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%% back to default settings
%\setsubsubsecindent{0pt}
%\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\bfseries\raggedright}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%



\newcommand{\marginbox}[1]{%
  \parbox[t][0pt]{6em}{\itshape\raggedleft\mbox{} #1}}
\newcommand{\marginhead}[1]{%
  {\llap{\marginbox{#1}\kern0.5em}}}
\setparaindent{0em}
\setafterparaskip{0em}
\setparaheadstyle{\marginhead}
\setparahook{\setsecnumformat{\csname the##1\endcsname\ }}
%%%\setsecnumdepth{paragraph}
\paragraph{Hang the whole heading in the margin}%%%\setsecnumdepth{subsection}
A less traditional style is to put the whole heading into the margin.
I have done this here for a \cmd{\paragraph} heading (which is not otherwise
used in this manual). The code is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\marginbox}[1]{%
  \parbox[t][0pt]{6em}{\itshape\raggedleft\mbox{} #1}}
\newcommand{\marginhead}[1]{%
  {\llap{\marginbox{#1}\kern0.5em}}}
\setparaindent{0em}
\setafterparaskip{0em}
\setparaheadstyle{\marginhead}
\setparahook{\setsecnumformat{\csname the##1\endcsname\ }}
\paragraph{Hang the whole heading in the margin}%
\end{lcode}
The macro \cmd{\marginbox} puts its argument, raggedleft, into a zero height
\cmd{\parbox} of width 6em, aligned at the top. 
The \cmd{\marginhead} macro puts its argument into a 
\cmd{\marginbox} and puts the \cmd{\marginbox} 0.5em to the left. 
The \cmd{\paragraph} head style is then set to use \cmd{\marginhead} to 
typeset the heading. The format for the number is reset via 
\cmd{\setparahook} and \cmd{\setsecnumformat}.


\fancybreak{$*$}
\fancybreak{}


A different approach is to create new macros, each named by the type
of sectional macro it formats, and then make the number format call
these macros.
In this example we will provide separate formatting for \cmd{\section} and \cmd{\subsection}. 
\begin{lcode}
  \setsecnumformat{\csname #1secnumformat\endcsname}
  \newcommand\sectionsecnumformat{\thesection:\quad} 
  \newcommand\subsectionsecnumformat{\fbox{\enspace\thesubsection\enspace}\enspace}
\end{lcode}
Since the macro is only called in the proper context, we can use
\cmd{\thesection} directly in the code for \cmd{\section}.



\index{heading!sections|)}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%



\section{Fancy anonymous breaks}

    Often, in novels, there is a need to break up the text to indicate that
there is a major break in the story, but not enough to warrant starting a new
chapter. I have called these 
\emph{anonymous divisions}\index{anonymous division}\index{division!anonymous} 
as there is neither number nor title associated with them. 
    
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\plainbreak}\marg{num} \cmd{\plainbreak*}\marg{num}  \\
\cmd{\fancybreak}\marg{text} \cmd{\fancybreak*}\marg{text}   \\
\end{syntax} 
\glossary(plainbreak)%
  {\cs{plainbreak}\marg{num}}%
  {An anonymous division of \meta{num} blank lines and the following
   paragraph is not indented.}
\glossary(plainbreak*)%
  {\cs{plainbreak*}\marg{num}}%
  {Like \cs{plainbreak} except that the following paragraph is indented.}
\glossary(fancybreak)%
  {\cs{fancybreak}\marg{text}}%
  {An anonymous division with \meta{text} centered and the following
   paragraph is not indented.}
\glossary(fancybreak*)%
  {\cs{fancybreak*}\marg{text}}%
  {Like \cs{fancybreak} except that the following paragraph is indented.}

    The \cmd{\plainbreak} is an anonymous division. It puts \meta{num}
blank lines into the typescript and the first line of the following
paragraph is not indented\index{paragraph!indentation}. Another anonymous 
division is \cmd{\fancybreak} which puts \meta{text} centered into the 
typescript and the initial line of the following paragraph is not 
indented\index{paragraph!indentation}. For
example:
\begin{lcode}
\fancybreak{{*}\\{* * *}\\{*}}
\end{lcode}
typesets a little diamond made of asterisks.

    The starred versions of the commands indent the first line of the
following paragraph\index{paragraph!indentation}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\plainfancybreak}\marg{space}\marg{num}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\plainfancybreak*}\marg{space}\marg{num}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(plainfancybreak)%
  {\cs{plainfancybreak}\marg{space}\marg{num}\marg{text}}%
  {An anonymous division that acts like \cs{fancybreak} at the top
   of the page, or at the bottom if there is less than \meta{space}
   left on the page, otherwise it acts like \cs{plainbreak}.
   The following paragraph is not indented.}
\glossary(plainfancybreak*)%
  {\cs{plainfancybreak*}\marg{space}\marg{num}\marg{text}}%
  {Like \cs{plainfancybreak} except that the following paragraph is indented.}
If a plain break comes at the top or bottom of a page then it is very 
difficult for a reader to discern that there is a break at all.
If there is text on the page and enough space left to put some text
after a break the \cmd{\plainfancybreak} command will use a \cmd{\plainbreak}
with \meta{num} lines, 
otherwise (the break would come at the top or bottom of the page) it
will use a \cmd{\fancybreak} with \meta{text}. The \meta{space} argument is a
length specifying the space needed for the \meta{num} blank lines and some
number of text lines for after the plain break. The starred version of
the command uses the starred versions of the \cmd{\plainbreak} and
\cmd{\fancybreak} commands.


    Unfortunately there is an interaction between the requested, plain,
and fancy break spaces.
    Let $P$ be the space (in lines) required for the plain break, 
$F$ the space (in lines)
required for the fancy break, and $S$ the \meta{space} argument (in lines). 
From some experiments it appears that the condition for the plain break 
to avoid the top and bottom of the page is that $S - P > 1$. 
Also, the condition for the fancy break to avoid being put in the middle 
of a page (i.e., not at the top or bottom) is that  $S - F < 3$.
For example, if the plain and fancy breaks take the same vertical space
then $S = P +2$ is the only value that matches the conditions. In general, 
if $F = P + n$ then the condition is $1 < S-P < 3+n$, which means that 
for the \cmd{\plainfancybreak} command the
fancy break must always take at least as much space as the plain break.


\fancybreak{\pfbreakdisplay}

    The \cmd{\plainfancybreak} macro inserts a plain break in the middle of
a page or if the break would come at the bottom or top of a page it
inserts a fancy break instead.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\pfbreak} \cmd{\pfbreak*} \\
\lnc{\pfbreakskip} \\
\cmd{\pfbreakdisplay}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(pfbreak)
  {\cs{pfbreak}}%
  {An alternative for \cs{plainfancybreak} using \cs{pfbreakskip} 
   and \cs{pfbreakdisplay}.}
\glossary(pfbreak*)
  {\cs{pfbreak*}}%
  {An alternative for \cs{plainfancybreak*} using \cs{pfbreakskip} 
   and \cs{pfbreakdisplay}.}
\glossary(pfbreakskip)%
  {\cs{pfbreakskip}}%
  {Space for a \cs{pfbreak}'s \cs{plainbreak}.}
\glossary(pfbreakdisplay)%
  {\cs{pfbreakdisplay}\marg{text}}%
  {\meta{text} for a \cs{pfbreak}'s \cs{fancybreak}.}
  
The \cmd{\pfbreak} macro is an alternate for \cmd{\plainfancybreak} that may
be more convenient to use. The gap for the plain break is given by the
length \lnc{\pfbreakskip} which is initialised to produce two blank lines.
The fancy break, which takes the same vertical space, is given by the
\meta{text} argument of \cmd{\pfbreakdisplay}. The default definition:
\LMnote{2010/11/22}{typo, not spelled pfbt}
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\pfbreakdisplay}{*\quad*\quad*}
\end{lcode}
typesets three asterisks, as shown a few lines before this.

\index{anonymous division!styling|(}

%%\renewcommand{\pfbreakdisplay}{\huge \ding{167}\quad\ding{167}\quad\ding{167}}
\renewcommand{\pfbreakdisplay}{%
 \ensuremath{\clubsuit\quad\diamondsuit\quad\clubsuit}}
\fancybreak{\pfbreakdisplay}

    You can change the definition of \cmd{\pfbreakdisplay} for a different
style if you wish. The
fancy break just before this was produced via:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\pfbreakdisplay}{%
  \ensuremath{\clubsuit\quad\diamondsuit\quad\clubsuit}}
\fancybreak{\pfbreakdisplay}
\end{lcode}
I used \cmd{\fancybreak} as I'm not sure where the break will come on the
page and the simple \cmd{\pfbreak} macro might just have produced a couple
of blank lines instead of the fancy display.

  The paragraph following \cmd{\pfbreak} is not indented. If you want
it indented use the \cmd{\pfbreak*} starred version.

\renewcommand{\pfbreakdisplay}{\ding{167}\quad\ding{167}\quad\ding{167}}
\fancybreak{\pfbreakdisplay}

 The fancy break using 
fleurons\index{fleuron} just before this paragraph was produced by:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\pfbreakdisplay}{%
  \ding{167}\quad\ding{167}\quad\ding{167}}
\fancybreak{\pfbreakdisplay}
\end{lcode}
where the \cmd{\ding} command is from the \Lpack{pifont} package.

\makeatletter
\newcommand{\motif}[1]{\cleaders\hbox{#1}\hfil}
\newcommand{\chain}[2]{\leavevmode\hbox to #2{\motif{#1}}}
\newcommand{\diamondpattern}{\m@th$\mkern-.6mu \diamond \mkern-.6mu$}
\makeatother

\fancybreak{\chain{\diamondpattern}{0.25\textwidth}}

    The fancy break made with fleurons was simple to specify. There are 
many other symbols that you can
use in \ltx\ and these can be combined in potentially attractive ways to
produce a fancy break like the one just above.

    The following idea was originally suggested by Christina 
Thiele~\cite{ORNAMENTAL}, and can
be used to string together mathematical symbols. It works following the same
principles as the dot leaders in the Table of Contents.

    Define a macro called with the syntax \cs{motif}\marg{shape}, where
\meta{shape} is a symbol or other shape to be repeated in a chain,
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\motif}[1]{\cleaders\hbox{#1}\hfil}
\end{lcode}
The definition of \cs{motif} is basically taken from \tx, and is part of the
code for making things like dot leaders. \cmd{\hbox}\marg{stuff} puts
\meta{stuff} into a horizontal box, and \cmd{\cleaders}\meta{box} fills
a specified amount of space using whatever number of copies of the 
\meta{box} as is needed; if there is
too much space to be filled by a whole number of boxes, the spare space
is spread around equally. \cmd{\hfil} is stretchy space. The \cs{motif} macro
essentially says, fill up a space with with copies of \meta{shape}.

    We also need another macro, \cs{chain}\marg{shape}\marg{length}, 
where \marg{shape}
is a shape to be repeated as many times as it takes to fill up a distance
\meta{length}.
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\chain}[2]{\leavevmode\hbox to #2{\motif{#1}}}
\end{lcode}
The \cmd{\leavevmode} makes sure that we are typesetting horizontally, and
\cmd{\hbox} \verb?to? \verb?<length>{stuff}? puts \meta{stuff} into a horizontal 
box with the
fixed length of \meta{length}. Roughly, what \cs{chain} and \cs{motif}
do together is typeset enough copies of \meta{shape} to make up
a distance \meta{length}. 

    That is what we have been aiming for. All that
remains is to decide on what shape we might want to use. Here is one
consisting of diamonds.
\begin{lcode}
\makeatletter
\newcommand{\diamonds}{\m@th$\mkern-.6mu \diamond \mkern-.6mu$}
\makeatother
\end{lcode}
The \cmd{\diamond} symbol can only be used in math mode, hence it
is surrounded by the shorthand \verb?$...$?. \tx\ usually leaves a little
space around maths but the \cmd{\m@th} command stops that. \cmd{\mkern}
adjusts space in math mode, and in this case we are eliminating
the spaces\footnote{It is usually a matter for experiment to find
the right values for the kerning.\label{fn:kerning}} 
that would normally be on either 
side of the diamond symbol.
The whole effect gives us a diamond symbol with zero space around it.

    The fancy break at the start of this discussion was typeset by
\begin{lcode}
% define \motif, \chain, \diamonds and then
\fancybreak{\chain{\diamonds}{0.25\textwidth}}
\end{lcode}
The code is not part of the \Lclass{memoir} class; I defined it just
as indicated in the body of the book. It would more naturally go
into the preamble or a package. You might like to try specifying your
own pattern, say \cs{clubs}, using the \cmd{\club} math symbol but leaving
some space between them.

\index{anonymous division!styling|)}


\section{Footnotes in division headings}

\index{footnote!in heading|(}

    With the sectioning commands the text of the required argument
\meta{title} is used as the text for the section title in the body
of the document.

    When the optional argument \meta{toc-title} is used in a sectioning
command it is moving and any fragile\index{fragile command} 
commands must be \cmd{\protect}ed\index{protect},
while the \meta{title} argument is fixed. The \meta{toc-title} also
serves double duty:
\begin{enumerate}
\item It is used as the text of the title in the \toc;
\item It is used as the text in page headers\index{header}. 
\end{enumerate}

    If the optional argument is not present, then the \meta{title} is
moving and serves the triple duty of providing the text for the body and \toc{}
titles and for page headers\index{header}.

    Some folk feel an urge to add a footnote\index{footnote} to a sectioning 
title, which
should be resisted. If their flesh is weak, then the optional argument must
be used and the \cmd{\footnote} attached to the required argument only.
If the optional argument is not used then the footnote mark\index{footnote!mark} and text is
likely to be scattered all over the place, on the section page, in the \toc,
on any page that includes \meta{title} in its headers\index{header}. This is 
unacceptable to any reader. So, a footnoted\index{footnote} title should look like
this:
\begin{lcode}
\chapter[Title]{Title\footnote{Do you really have to do this?}}
\end{lcode}

\index{footnote!in heading|)}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

\section{Predefined heading styles}

   All \ltx\ classes for typesetting books and reports provide a particular
style for sectional headings. The \Mname\ class is unusual in that it provides
several sets of heading styles. Each set has different spacing around the
division heads, and different fonts in different sizes. 
    As a reference, \tref{tab:secfonts} lists the default fonts used
for the sectional headings. These fonts are all bold but in different
sizes depending on the division level.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Default fonts for sectional headings}\label{tab:secfonts}
\begin{tabular}{lll} \toprule
\cmd{\booknamefont}       & \verb?\huge\bfseries? & \huge\bfseries huge \\
\cmd{\booknumfont}        & \verb?\huge\bfseries? & \huge\bfseries huge \\
\cmd{\booktitlefont}      & \verb?\Huge\bfseries? & \Huge\bfseries Huge \\
\cmd{\partnamefont}       & \verb?\huge\bfseries? & \huge\bfseries huge \\
\cmd{\partnumfont}        & \verb?\huge\bfseries? & \huge\bfseries huge \\
\cmd{\parttitlefont}      & \verb?\Huge\bfseries? & \Huge\bfseries Huge \\
\cmd{\chapnamefont}       & \verb?\huge\bfseries? & \huge\bfseries huge \\
\cmd{\chapnumfont}        & \verb?\huge\bfseries? & \huge\bfseries huge \\
\cmd{\chaptitlefont}      & \verb?\Huge\bfseries? & \Huge\bfseries Huge \\
\cmd{\secheadstyle}       & \verb?\Large\bfseries? & \Large\bfseries Large \\
\cmd{\subsecheadstyle}    & \verb?\large\bfseries? & \Large\bfseries Large \\
\cmd{\subsubsecheadstyle} & \verb?\normalsize\bfseries? & \bfseries normal \\
\cmd{\paraheadstyle}      & \verb?\normalsize\bfseries? & \bfseries normal \\
\cmd{\subparaheadstyle}   & \verb?\normalsize\bfseries? & \bfseries normal \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makeheadstyles}\marg{name}\marg{code} \\
\cmd{\headstyles}\marg{name} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(makeheadstyles)%
  {\cs{makeheadstyles}\marg{name}\marg{code}}%
  {Create a new set of sectional division headstyles called \meta{name} 
   defined by \meta{code}.}
\glossary(headstyles)%
  {\cs{headstyles}\marg{name}}%
  {Use the \meta{name} set of headstyles for sectional division heads.}
The default sectional division head styles provided by \Mname\ form the
\hstyle{default} headstyles and give the same appearance as the standard
\Lclass{book} and \Lclass{report} classes. The set is created via the
\cmd{\makeheadstyles} macro and called for via the \cmd{headstyles} 
declaration. 
\begin{lcode}
\makeheadstyles{default}{%
  \renewcommand*{\booknamefont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
  %% and so on down to subparagraph specification
  \renewcommand*{\subparaheadstyle}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}
}
\headstyles{default}
\end{lcode}

    A somewhat different set of headstyles is used for this manual. When using
\cmd{\makeheadstyles} you only need to specify things that differ from
the \hstyle{default}. Within the class the \hstyle{memman} set of headstyles 
is defined as:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\addperiod}[1]{#1.}
\makeheadstyles{memman}{%
% book changes
  \renewcommand*{\booknamefont}{\normalfont\huge\sffamily}
  \renewcommand*{\booknumfont}{\normalfont\huge\sffamily}
  \renewcommand*{\booktitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\sffamily}
  \renewcommand*{\midbookskip}{\par\vskip 2\onelineskip}%
% part changes
  \renewcommand*{\partnamefont}{\normalfont\huge\sffamily}
  \renewcommand*{\partnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\sffamily}
  \renewcommand*{\parttitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\sffamily}
  \renewcommand*{\midpartskip}{\par\vskip 2\onelineskip}%
% chapter
  \chapterstyle{demo3}
% section
  \setbeforesecskip{-1.333\onelineskip 
                    \@plus -0.5\onelineskip \@minus -.5\onelineskip}%
  \setaftersecskip{0.667\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
  \setsecheadstyle{\normalfont\scshape\raggedright}%
% subsection
  \setbeforesubsecskip{-0.667\onelineskip 
                       \@plus -0.25\onelineskip \@minus -0.25\onelineskip}%
  \setaftersubsecskip{0.333\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
  \setsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\bfseries\raggedright}%
% subsubsection
  \setbeforesubsubsecskip{-0.667\onelineskip 
                          \@plus -0.25\onelineskip \@minus -0.25\onelineskip}%
  \setaftersubsubsecskip{0.333\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
  \setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape\raggedright}%
% paragraph
  \setbeforeparaskip{1.0\onelineskip 
                     \@plus 0.5\onelineskip \@minus 0.2\onelineskip}%
  \setafterparaskip{-1em}%
  \setparaheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape\addperiod}%
% subparagraph
  \setsubparaindent{\parindent}%
  \setbeforesubparaskip{1.0\onelineskip 
                        \@plus 0.5\onelineskip \@minus 0.2\onelineskip}%
  \setaftersubparaskip{-1em}%
  \setsubparaheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape\addperiod}}
\end{lcode}
    You can see the effect throughout this document. This chapter is
slightly different in that I have used the \cstyle{pederson} chapterstyle
instead of the \cstyle{demo3} chapterstyle that I have normally used.
    
\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Fonts used by different headstyles}\label{tab:headfonts}
\begin{tabular}{llllllll} \toprule
Headstyles & & chapter & section & subsec & subsubsec & para & subpara \\ \midrule
\hstyle{bringhurst} & & CAPS  & \textsc{s. caps} & \textit{Italic} & \textsc{s. caps} & \textit{Italic} & \textit{Italic} \\
\hstyle{crosshead}  & & \textbf{Bold}   & CAPS & \textbf{Bold} & \textsc{s. caps} & \textit{Italic} & \textsc{s. caps} \\
\hstyle{default}    & & \textbf{Bold}   & \textbf{Bold} & \textbf{Bold} & \textbf{Bold} & \textbf{Bold} & \textbf{Bold}   \\
\hstyle{dowding}    & & \textit{Italic} & CAPS & \textsc{s. caps} & \textit{Italic} & \textit{Italic} & \textit{Italic} \\
\hstyle{komalike}   & & \textsf{Sans} & \textsf{Sans} & \textsf{Sans} & \textsf{Sans} & \textsf{Sans} & \textsf{Sans}   \\
\hstyle{memman}     & & \textsf{Sans}   & \textsc{s. caps} & \textbf{Bold} & \textit{Italic} & \textit{Italic} & \textit{Italic} \\
\hstyle{ntglike}    & & \textbf{Bold}  & \textbf{Bold}  & \textbf{Bold}  & \textsl{Slanted} & \textsl{Slanted} & \textsl{Slanted}  \\
\hstyle{tandh}      & & \textbf{Bold}  & CAPS & \textit{Italic} & \textbf{Bold} & \textit{Italic} & \textit{Italic} \\
\hstyle{wilsondob}  & & \textit{Italic} & CAPS & \textit{Italic} & \textsc{s. caps } & \textit{Italic} & \textit{Italic} \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}


    Several other sets of headstyles are provided as well and the full list
is below. The different fonts used are given in \tref{tab:headfonts} and
generally speaking they start off being large for chapter heads but are
normal size by the time subsubsection heads are reached, or before.

\begin{itemize}
\item[\hstyle{bringhurst}] A set based on Bringhurst's \btitle{Elements of
     Typographic Style}~\cite{BRINGHURST99}. It uses the \cstyle{bringhurst}
     chapterstyle (\fref{dcbringhurst}).
\item[\hstyle{crosshead}] This set uses the \cstyle{crosshead} chapterstyle
     and the lower level division titles are set as crossheads.
\item[\hstyle{default}] The default set corresponding the \ltx\
     \Lclass{book} class.
\item[\hstyle{dowding}] A set based on Dowding's 
     \btitle{Finer Points}~\cite{DOWDING96}. It uses the \cstyle{dowding} 
     chapterstyle (\fref{dcdowding}).
\item[\hstyle{komalike}] A set based on the kind of headings used in
     the KOMA \Lclass{scrbook} class, where there are all in a bold sans serif font.
     It uses the \cstyle{komalike} chapterstyle (\fref{dckomalike}).
\item[\hstyle{memman}] The set used in this document, including the 
     \cstyle{demo3} chapterstyle.
\item[\hstyle{ntglike}] A set based on the kind of headings used in
     the NTG (Dutch TUG) \Lclass{boek} class. It uses the \cstyle{ntglike}
     chapterstyle (\fref{dcntglike}) and the headings are quiter than the 
     default.
\item[\hstyle{tandh}] A set based the heads used in Thames \& Hudson 
     \btitle{Manual of Typography}~\cite{MCLEAN80}. It uses the \cstyle{tandh}
     chapterstyle (\fref{dctandh})
\item[\hstyle{wilsondob}] A set based on those used in Adrian Wilson's
     \btitle{Design of Books}~\cite{ADRIANWILSON93}. It uses the \cstyle{wilsondob}
     chapterstyle (\fref{dcwilsondob}).

\end{itemize}



%#% extend
%#% extstart include pagination-and-headers.tex

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-05-21 16:33:04 +0200 (Tue, 21 May 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 469 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}

\chapterstyle{demo3}


%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\chapter{Pagination and headers} \label{chap:pagination}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

%\section{Introduction}

    The focus of this chapter is on marking the pages 
with signposts so that the reader can more readily navigate through
the document.

\section{Pagination and folios}

    Every page in a \ltx\ document is included in the 
pagination\index{pagination}. That is,
there is a number associated with every page and this is the value of
the \Icn{page} counter. This value\index{pagination!changing} 
can be changed at any time via either \cmd{\setcounter} or 
\cmd{\addtocounter}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\pagenumbering}\marg{rep} \\
\cmd{\pagenumbering*}\marg{rep} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(pagenumbering)%
  {\cs{pagenumbering}\marg{rep}}%
  {Resets the page number to 1, and causes the folios (page numbers) to be 
   printed using the \meta{rep}
   representation (e.g., \texttt{arabic}, \texttt{roman}, \ldots)}
\glossary(pagenumbering*)%
  {\cs{pagenumbering*}\marg{rep}}%
  {Like \cs{pagenumbering} except that the page number is not reset.}
The macros \cmd{\pagenumbering} and \cmd{\pagenumbering*} cause 
the folios\index{folio}\index{folio!changing representation} 
to be printed using the 
counter representation\index{counter representation}
\meta{rep} for the page number, where \meta{rep} can be one of: 
\pixcrep{Alph}, \pixcrep{alph}, \pixcrep{arabic}, \pixcrep{Roman} or 
\pixcrep{roman} for uppercase and lowercase letters, arabic numerals, and
uppercase and lowercase Roman numerals, 
respectively.\index{alphabetic numbering}\index{roman numerals} As there
are only 26~letters, \pixcrep{Alph} or \pixcrep{alph} can only be
used for a limited number of pages. Effectively, the macros redefine
\cmd{\thepage} to be \verb?\rep{page}?. 

    Additionally, the \cmd{\pagenumbering}\index{pagination!changing}
command resets the \Icn{page} counter to one; the starred version does not 
change the counter.
    It is usual to reset the page number back to one each time the style
is changed, but sometimes it may be desirable to have a continuous sequence
of numbers irrespective of their displayed form, which is where
the starred version comes in handy.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\savepagenumber} \\
\cmd{\restorepagenumber} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(savepagenumber)%
  {\cs{savepagenumber}}%
  {Saves the current page number.}
\glossary(restorepagenumber)%
  {\cs{restorepagenumber}}%
  {Sets the page number to that saved by the most recent \cs{savepagenumber}.}
The macro \cmd{\savepagenumber} saves the current page number, and the
macro \cmd{\restorepagenumber} sets the page number to the saved value.
This pair of commands may be used to apparently 
interrupt\index{pagination!interrupt} the pagination.
For example, perhaps some full page illustrations\index{illustration} 
will be electronically tipped in\index{tip in} to the document and 
pagination is not required for these.
This could be done along the lines of:
\begin{lcode}
\clearpage          % get onto next page
\savepagenumber     % save the page number
\pagestyle{empty}   % no headers or footers
%% insert the illustrations
\clearpage
\pagestyle{...}
\restorepagenumber
...
\end{lcode}
If you try this sort of thing, you may have to adjust the restored page 
number by one.
\begin{lcode}
\restorepagenumber
% perhaps \addtocounter{page}{1} or \addtocounter{page}{-1}
\end{lcode}
Depending on the timing of the \cs{...pagenumber} commands and \tx's 
decisions on page breaking, this may or may not be necessary.



\section{Page styles} \label{sec:pagestyles}

\index{pagestyle!specifying|(}

    The class provides a selection of pagestyles that you can use and if 
they don't suit, then there are means to define your own.

    These facilities were inspired by the \Lpack{fancyhdr} 
package~\cite{FANCYHDR}, although the command set is different.

    The standard classes provide for a footer\index{footer} and 
header\index{header} for odd and even 
pages. Thus there are four elements to be specified for a pagestyle.
This class partitions the headers\index{header} and footers\index{footer} 
into left, center and right
portions, so that overall there is a total of 12 elements that have 
to be specified
for a pagestyle. You may find, though, that one of the built in pagestyles
meets your needs so you don't have to worry about all these specifications.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\pagestyle}\marg{style} \\
\cmd{\thispagestyle}\marg{style} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(pagestyle)%
  {\cs{pagestyle}\marg{style}}%
  {Sets the current pagestyle to \meta{style}.}
\glossary(thispagestyle)%
  {\cs{thispagestyle}\marg{style}}%
  {Sets the pagestyle to \meta{style} for the current page only.}
   \cmd{\pagestyle} sets the current pagestyle to \meta{style}, where
\meta{style} is a word containing only letters. On a particular
page \cmd{\thispagestyle} can be used to override the current pagestyle for
the one page.

    Some of the class' commands automatically call \cmd{\thispagestyle}.
For example:
\begin{itemize}
\item the \Ie{titlingpage} environment calls 
      \begin{lcode}
\thispagestyle{titlingpagestyle}
      \end{lcode} 
\item if \cmd{\cleardoublepage} will result in an empty verso page it calls
      \begin{lcode}
\thispagestyle{cleared}
      \end{lcode}
      for the empty page.
\end{itemize}
For reference, the full list is given in \tref{tab:callthispagestyle}.

\PWnote{2009/07/26}{Added the simple pagestyle}
    The page styles provided by the class\index{pagestyle!class} are:
\begin{plainlist}
\item[\pstyle{empty}] The headers\index{header} and footers\index{footer} are empty.
\item[\pstyle{plain}] The header\index{header} is empty and the folio\index{folio} (page number)
     is centered at the bottom of the page.
\item[\pstyle{headings}] The footer\index{footer} is empty. The header\index{header} contains 
     the folio\index{folio} at the outer side of the page; on verso
     pages the chapter name, number and title, in slanted uppercase is
     set at the spine margin and on recto pages the section number
     and uppercase title is set by the spine margin.
\item[\pstyle{myheadings}] Like the \pstyle{headings} style the footer
     is empty. You have to specify what is to go in the headers\index{header}.
\item[\pstyle{simple}] The footer\index{footer} is empty and the 
     header\index{header} contains the folio\index{folio} (page number)
     at the outer side of the page. It is like the \pstyle{headings}
     style but without any title texts.
\item[\pstyle{ruled}] The footer\index{footer} contains the 
     folio\index{folio} at the outside. The header\index{header}
     on verso pages contains the chapter number and title in small caps
     at the outside; on recto pges the section title is typeset at the
     outside using the normal font. A line is drawn
     underneath the header\index{header}.
\item[\pstyle{Ruled}] This is like the \pstyle{ruled} style except that 
     the headers\index{header} and footers\index{footer} extend into 
     the \foredge\ margin\index{margin!foredge?\foredge}.
\item[\pstyle{companion}] This is a copy of the pagestyle in the 
     \textit{Companion} series (e.g., see~\cite{COMPANION}). It is
     similar to the \pstyle{Ruled} style in that the header has a rule which
     extends to the outer edge of the marginal notes. The folios are set 
     in bold at the outer ends of the header. The chapter title is set in
     a bold font flushright in the verso headers, and the section number 
     and title, again in bold, flushleft in the recto headers\index{header}. 
     There are no footers\index{footer}.
\item[\pstyle{book}] This is the same as the \pstyle{plain} pagestyle.
\item[\pstyle{chapter}]  This is the same as the \pstyle{plain} pagestyle.
\item[\pstyle{cleared}]  This is the same as the \pstyle{empty} pagestyle.
\item[\pstyle{part}] This is the same as the \pstyle{plain} pagestyle.
\item[\pstyle{title}]   This is the same as the \pstyle{plain} pagestyle.
\item[\pstyle{titlingpage}] This is the same as the \pstyle{empty} pagestyle.
\end{plainlist}

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{The use of \protect\cs{thispagestyle}} \label{tab:callthispagestyle}
\begin{tabular}{l !{\qquad} l} \toprule
Called from & Style \\ \midrule
\cmd{\book}    & \pstyle{book} \\
\cmd{\chapter} & \pstyle{chapter} \\
\cmd{\cleardoublepage} & \pstyle{cleared} \\
\cmd{\cleartorecto} & \pstyle{cleared} \\
\cmd{\cleartoverso} & \pstyle{cleared} \\
\cmd{\epigraphhead} & \pstyle{epigraph} \\
\cmd{\listoffigures} & \pstyle{chapter} \\
\cmd{\listoftables} & \pstyle{chapter} \\
\cmd{\maketitle} & \pstyle{title} \\
\cmd{\part}      & \pstyle{part} \\
\cmd{\tableofcontents} & \pstyle{chapter} \\
\Ie{thebibliography} & \pstyle{chapter} \\
\Ie{theindex} & \pstyle{chapter} \\
\Ie{titlingpage} & \pstyle{titlingpage} \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\uppercaseheads} \cmd{\nouppercaseheads}  \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(uppercaseheads)%
  {\cs{uppercaseheads}}%
  {Set the titles in the headings pagestyle in Uppercase.}
\glossary(nouppercaseheads)%
  {\cs{nouppercaseheads}}%
  {Do not uppercase the titles in the headings.}
    Following the declaration \cmd{\nouppercaseheads} the titles in the
\pstyle{headings} pagestyle will not be automatically uppercased. The default
is \cmd{\uppercaseheads} which specifies that the titles are to be
automatically uppercased.

\textbf{Change 2012:} The upper casing macro used by \cmd{\uppercaseheads} has
been changed into \cmd{\MakeTextUppercase} such that the upper casing
does not touch math, references or citations.


    For the \pstyle{myheadings} pagestyle above, you have to define your own
titles to go into the header\index{header}. Each sectioning command, 
say \cs{sec}, 
calls a macro called \cs{secmark}. A pagestyle usually defines this command
so that it picks up the title, and perhaps the number, of the \cs{sec}. The
pagestyle can then use the information for its own purposes. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\markboth}\marg{left}\marg{right} \\
\cmd{\markright}\marg{right} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(markboth)%
  {\cs{markboth}\marg{left}\marg{right}}%
  {Sets values of two markers to \meta{left} and \meta{right} respectively
   (see \cs{leftmark} and \cs{rightmark}).}
\glossary(markright)%
  {\cs{markright}\marg{right}}%
  {Sets value of one marker to \meta{right} (see \cs{rightmark}).}
    \cmd{\markboth} sets the values of two \emph{markers}\index{markers}
to \meta{left} and \meta{right} respectively, at the point in the text 
where it is called. Similarly, \cmd{\markright} sets the value of a
marker to \meta{right}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\leftmark} \cmd{\rightmark} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(leftmark)%
  {\cs{leftmark}}%
  {Contains the value of the \meta{left} argument of the last \cs{markboth}.}
\glossary(rightmark)%
  {\cs{rightmark}}%
  {Contains the value of the \meta{right} argument of the first \cs{markboth}
   or \cs{markright} on the page; if there is none then the value of the most
   recent \meta{right} argument.}
The macro \cmd{\leftmark} contains the value of the \meta{left} argument
of the \emph{last} \cmd{\markboth} on the page. The macro \cmd{\rightmark}
contains the value of the \meta{right} argument of the \emph{first}
\cmd{\markboth} or \cmd{\markright} on the page, or if there is not one it
contains the value of the most recent \meta{right} argument.

    A pagestyle can define the \cs{secmark} commands in terms of 
\cmd{\markboth} or \cmd{\markright}, and then use \cmd{\leftmark} and/or
\cmd{\rightmark} in the headers\index{header} or footers\index{footer}. 
I'll show examples of how this
works later, and this is often how the \pstyle{myheadings} style gets 
implemented.

    All the division commands include a macro that you can define to set
marks related to that heading. Other commands also include macros that
you can redefine for setting marks.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Mark macros for page headers} \label{tab:markmacros}
\begin{tabular}{ll} \toprule
Main macro & default mark definition \\ \midrule
\cs{book(*)}            & \verb?\newcommand*{\bookpagemark}[1]{}? \\
\cs{part(*)}            & \verb?\newcommand*{\partmark}[1]{}? \\
\cs{chapter(*)}         & \verb?\newcommand*{\chaptermark}[1]{}? \\
\cs{section(*)}         & \verb?\newcommand*{\sectionmark}[1]{}? \\
\cs{subsection(*)}      & \verb?\newcommand*{\subsectionmark}[1]{}? \\
\cs{subsubsection(*)}   & \verb?\newcommand*{\subsubsectionmark}[1]{}? \\
\cs{paragraph(*)}       & \verb?\newcommand*{\paragraphmark}[1]{}? \\
\cs{subparagraph(*)}    & \verb?\newcommand*{\subparagraphmark}[1]{}? \\
\cs{tableofcontents(*)} & \verb?\newcommand*{\tocmark}[1]{}? \\
\cs{listoffigures(*)}   & \verb?\newcommand*{\lofmark}[1]{}? \\
\cs{listoftables(*)}    & \verb?\newcommand*{\lotmark}[1]{}? \\
\cs{thebibliography}    & \verb?\newcommand*{\bibmark}{}? \\
\cs{theindex}           & \verb?\newcommand*{\indexmark}{}? \\
\cs{theglossary}        & \verb?\newcommand*{\glossarymark}{}? \\
\cs{PoemTitle}          & \verb?\newcommand*{\poemtitlemark}[1]{}? \\
\cs{PoemTitle*}         & \verb?\newcommand*{\poemtitlestarmark}[1]{}? \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

The \cs{...mark} commands are listed in \tref{tab:markmacros}. When they are 
called by the relevant main macro, those that take an argument are called with
the `title' as the argument's value. For example, the \cmd{\chapter} macro
calls \cmd{\chaptermark} with the value of the title specified as being 
for the header.

Please remember that the macros listed in \tref{tab:markmacros} are
`provider' macros, i.e. they provide information for \cmd{\leftmark}
and \cmd{\rightmark} for you to use later on. To gain access to the
section title, you do \emph{not} use \cmd{\sectionmark} in the header
or footer. It is a macro that provides information, but you need to
use \cmd{\leftmark} or \cmd{\rightmark} to access depending on how you
have defined \cmd{\sectionmark}.


\section{Making headers and footers}

    As mentioned, the class provides for left, center, and right slots in
even and odd headers\index{header} and footers\index{footer}. 
This section describes how you can make 
your own pagestyle using these 12 slots. The 6 slots for a page 
are diagrammed in \fref{lay:header}.

\begin{figure}
\setlayoutscale{1}
\centering
\headerfooterdiagram
\caption{Header and footer slots} \label{lay:header}
\end{figure}

    The class itself uses the commands from this section. For example,
the \pstyle{plain} pagestyle is defined as
\begin{lcode}
\makepagestyle{plain}
  \makeevenfoot{plain}{}{\thepage}{}
  \makeoddfoot{plain}{}{\thepage}{}
\end{lcode}
which centers the page number at the bottom of the page. 
    

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makepagestyle}\marg{style} \\
\cmd{\aliaspagestyle}\marg{alias}\marg{original} \\
\cmd{\copypagestyle}\marg{copy}\marg{original}\\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(makepagestyle)%
  {\cs{makepagestyle}\marg{style}}%
  {Used to define a pagestyle \meta{style}.}
\glossary(aliaspagestyle)%
  {\cs{aliaspagestyle}\marg{alias}{original}}%
  {Defines the \meta{alias} pagestyle to be the same as the \meta{original}
  pagestyle.}
\glossary(copypagestyle)%
  {\cs{copypagestyle}\marg{copy}{original}}%
  {Creates a new pagestyle called \meta{copy} using the \meta{original}
   pagestyle specification.}

The command \cmd{\makepagestyle} specifies a pagestyle \meta{style} which
is initially equivalent to the \pstyle{empty} pagestyle. On the other hand,
\cmd{\aliaspagestyle} defines the \meta{alias} pagestyle to be the same as
the \meta{original} pagestyle. As an example of the latter, the class includes
the code
\begin{lcode}
\aliaspagestyle{part}{plain}
\aliaspagestyle{chapter}{plain}
\aliaspagestyle{cleared}{empty}
\end{lcode}
The \cmd{\copypagestyle} command creates a new pagestyle called \meta{copy}
using the \meta{original} pagestyle specification.

    If an alias and a copy pagestyle are created based on the same 
\meta{original} and later the \meta{original} is modified, 
the alias and copy behave differently.
The appearance of the alias pagestyle will continue to match the
modified \meta{original} but the copy pagestyle is unaffected by any change
to the \meta{original}. You cannot modify an alias pagestyle but you can
modify a copy pagestyle.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makeevenhead}\marg{style}\marg{left}\marg{center}\marg{right} \\
\cmd{\makeoddhead}\marg{style}\marg{left}\marg{center}\marg{right} \\
\cmd{\makeevenfoot}\marg{style}\marg{left}\marg{center}\marg{right} \\
\cmd{\makeoddfoot}\marg{style}\marg{left}\marg{center}\marg{right} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(makeevenhead)%
  {\cs{makeevenhead}\marg{style}\marg{left}\marg{center}\marg{right}}%
  {Defines the \meta{left}, \meta{center} and \meta{right} parts of the
   even (verso) page header of the \meta{style} pagetstyle.}
\glossary(makeoddhead)%
  {\cs{makeoddhead}\marg{style}\marg{left}\marg{center}\marg{right}}%
  {Defines the \meta{left}, \meta{center} and \meta{right} parts of the
   odd (recto) page header of the \meta{style} pagetstyle.}
\glossary(makeevenfoot)%
  {\cs{makeevenfoot}\marg{style}\marg{left}\marg{center}\marg{right}}%
  {Defines the \meta{left}, \meta{center} and \meta{right} parts of the
   even (verso) page footer of the \meta{style} pagetstyle.}
\glossary(makeoddfoot)%
  {\cs{makeoddfoot}\marg{style}\marg{left}\marg{center}\marg{right}}%
  {Defines the \meta{left}, \meta{center} and \meta{right} parts of the
   odd (recto) page footer of the \meta{style} pagetstyle.}
The macro \cmd{\makeevenhead} defines the \meta{left}, \meta{center}, and
\meta{right} portions of the \meta{style} pagestyle header\index{header} 
for even numbered (verso) pages. 
Similarly \cmd{\makeoddhead}, \cmd{\makeevenfoot}, and
\cmd{\makeoddfoot} define the \meta{left}, \meta{center} and \meta{right}
portions of the \meta{style} header\index{header} for odd numbered 
(recto) pages, and the footers\index{footer} for verso and recto pages. 
These commands for \meta{style}
should be used after the corresponding \cmd{\makepagestyle} for \meta{style}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makerunningwidth}\marg{style}\oarg{footwidth}\marg{headwidth} \\
\lnc{\headwidth} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(makerunningwidth)%
  {\cs{makerunningwidth}\marg{style}\oarg{footwidth}\marg{headwidth}}%
  {Sets the width of the \meta{style} pagestyle headers to \meta{headwidth}.
   The footers are set to \meta{headwidth}, or \meta{footwidth} if it
   is given.}
\glossary(headwidth)%
  {\cs{headwith}}%
  {A (scratch) length normally used in the definition of headers and footers.}
The macro \cmd{\makerunningwidth} sets the widths of the \meta{style}
pagestyle headers\index{header} and footers\index{footer}. The header
width is set to \meta{headwidth}. If the optional \meta{footwidth} is
present, then the footer width is set to that, otherwise to \meta{headwidth}.
The header width is stored as the length \cs{\meta{style}headrunwidth}
and the footer width as \cs{\meta{style}footrunwidth}.

The \cmd{\makepagestyle} initialises the widths to be the textwidth, 
so the macro need only be used if some
other width is desired. The length \lnc{\headwidth} is provided as a
(scratch) length that may be used for headers\index{header} or 
footers\index{footer}, or any other purpose.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makeheadrule}\marg{style}\marg{width}\marg{thickness} \\
\cmd{\makefootrule}\marg{style}\marg{width}\marg{thickness}\marg{skip} \\
\cmd{\makeheadfootprefix}\marg{style}\marg{for headrule}\marg{for footrule}\\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(makeheadrule)%
  {\cs{makeheadrule}\marg{style}\marg{width}\marg{thickness}}%
  {Specifies the \meta{width} and \meta{thickness} of the rule drawn below the
   headers of the \meta{style} pagestyle.}%
\glossary(makefootrule)%
  {\cs{makefootrule}\marg{style}\marg{width}\marg{thickness}\marg{skip}}%
  {Specifies the \meta{width} and \meta{thickness} of the rule drawn 
  \meta{skip} (see \cs{footskip}) above the footers of the
  \meta{style} pagestyle.}% 
\glossary(makeheadfootruleprefix)
{\cs{makeheadfootruleprefix}\marg{style}\marg{for headrule}\marg{for
    footrule}}%
{Can be used to add alternative colors to the head/foot rule}%
A header\index{header} may have a rule drawn between it and the top of 
the typeblock\index{typeblock}, and similarly a rule may be drawn 
between the bottom of the typeblock\index{typeblock} and the 
footer\index{footer}. 
The \cmd{\makeheadrule} macro specifies the \meta{width}
and \meta{thickness} of the rule below the \meta{style} pagestyle 
header\index{header}, and the \cmd{\makefootrule} does the same for 
the rule above the footer\index{footer}; the
additional \meta{skip} argument is a distance that specifies the vertical
positioning of the foot rule (see \cmd{\footruleskip}).
The \cmd{\makepagestyle} macro initialises the \meta{width} to the 
\lnc{\textwidth} and the \meta{thickness} to 0pt, so by default no rules
are visible. The macro \cmd{\makeheadfootruleprefix} is intended for
adding alternative colors to the head/foot rules, e.g.
\begin{lcode}
  \makeheadfootruleprefix{mystyle}{\color{red}}{\color{blue}}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\normalrulethickness} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(normalrulethickness)%
  {\cs{normalrulethickness}}%
  {The normal thickness of a visible rule (default 0.4pt).}
\lnc{\normalrulethickness} is the normal\index{rule!thickness} 
thickness of a visible rule, by 
default 0.4pt. It can be changed using \cmd{\setlength}, although I suggest 
that you do not unless perhaps when using at least the \Lopt{14pt} class 
option. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\footruleheight} \\
\cmd{\footruleskip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(footruleheight)%
  {\cs{footruleheight}}%
  {Macro specifying the height of a normal rule above a footer.}
\glossary(footruleskip)%
  {\cs{footruleskip}}%
  {Macro specifying a distance sufficient to ensure that a rule above a footer
   will lie in the space between the footer and the typeblock.}
The macro \cmd{\footruleheight} is the height of a normal
rule above a footer\index{footer} (default zero). 
\cmd{\footruleskip} is a distance 
sufficient to ensure that a foot rule will be placed between the bottom
of the typeblock\index{typeblock} and the footer\index{footer}. 
Despite appearing to be lengths, if you really need to change the values 
use \cmd{\renewcommand}, not \cmd{\setlength}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makeheadposition}\marg{style}\\
    \marg{eheadpos}\marg{oheadpos}\marg{efootpos}\marg{ofootpos} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(makeheadposition)%
  {\cs{makeheadposition}\marg{style}\marg{eheadpos}\marg{oheadpos}\marg{efootpos}\marg{ofootpos}}%
  {Specifies the horizontal positioning of the even and odd headers and
   footers respectively for the \meta{style} pagestyle.}
The \cmd{\makeheadposition} macro specifies the horizontal positioning
of the even and odd headers\index{header} and footers\index{footer}, 
respectively, for the \meta{style} pagestyle. 
Each of the \meta{...pos} arguments may be \texttt{flushleft}, \texttt{center},
or \texttt{flushright}, with the obvious meanings. An empty, or unrecognised, 
argument is equivalent to \texttt{center}. This macro is really only of use 
if the header/footer\index{header}\index{footer} width is not the 
same as the \lnc{\textwidth}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makepsmarks}\marg{style}\marg{code} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(makepsmark)
  {\cs{makepsmarks}\marg{style}\marg{code}}%
  {Hook into the \meta{style} pagestyle, usually used for the \meta{code}
   setting any marks.}
The last thing that the \cmd{\pagestyle}\marg{style} does is call the
\meta{code} argument of the \cmd{\makepsmarks} macro for \meta{style}.
This is normally used for specifying non-default code 
(i.e., code not specifiable via any of the previous macros) for the 
particular pagestyle. The code normally defines the marks, if any, 
that will be used in
the headers\index{header} and footers\index{footer}.

\LMnote{2010/06/25}{Added a mentioning of \cs{makeheadfootstrut}}
\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\makeheadfootstrut}\marg{style}\marg{head strut}\marg{foot strut}
\end{syntax}
The headers and footers are each made up of three separate
entities. At the front and end of these a special \meta{style} related
strut is inserted. By default \cmd{\makepagestyle} will initialize
them to \cmd{\strut} (except the \pstyle{empty} style where the struts
are empty). One can use the macro above to change these struts to
something different.


\subsection{Example pagestyles}

    Perhaps when preparing drafts you want to note on each page
that it is a draft\index{draft document} document. Assuming that 
you are using the 
\pstyle{headings} page style and that the default \pstyle{plain}
page style is used on chapter openings, then you could define
the following in the preamble (\piif{ifdraftdoc} is provided by
the class and is set \ptrue\ when the \Lopt{draft} option is used).
\label{ex:draft.pagestyle}
\begin{lcode}
\ifdraftdoc
  \makeevenfoot{plain}{}{\thepage}{\textit{Draft: \today}}
  \makeoddfoot{plain}{\textit{Draft: \today}}{\thepage}{}
  \makeevenfoot{headings}{}{}{\textit{Draft: \today}}
  \makeoddfoot{headings}{\textit{Draft: \today}}{}{}
\fi
\end{lcode}
Now when the \Lopt{draft} option is used the word `Draft:' and the current
date will be typeset in italics at the bottom of each page by the spine
margin. If any \pstyle{empty} pages should be marked as well, specify
similar footers for that style as well.

    Here is part of the standard definition of the \pstyle{headings}
pagestyle for the \Lclass{book} class which uses many internal \ltx\ commands;
but note that \Mname\ does not use this.
\begin{lcode}
\def\ps@headings{%
  \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
  \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}%
  \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
  \def\chaptermark##1{%
    \markboth{\MakeUppercase{%
      \ifnum\c@secnumdepth > \m@ne
        \if@mainmatter
          \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ %
        \fi
      \fi
      ##1}}{}}%
  \def\sectionmark##1{%
    \markright{\MakeUppercase{%
      \ifnum\c@secnumdepth > \z@
        \thesection. \ %
      \fi
      ##1}}}}
\end{lcode}
You don't need to understand this but in outline the first three lines specify
the contents of the footers and headers, and the remainder of the code sets 
the marks that will be used in the headers. The \cmd{\leftmark} is specified to be
the word `chapter', 
followed by the number if it is in the \cmd{\mainmatter} and the \texttt{secnumdepth}
is such that chapters are numbered, followed by the chapter's title; all this 
is made to be in upper case (via the \cmd{\MakeUppercase} macro). Similarly
the other mark, \cmd{\rightmark}, is the section number, if there is one, and
the section's title, again all in upper case.

    A transliteration of this code into \Mname's original coding style is:
\begin{lcode}
\makepagestyle{headings}
\makeevenhead{headings}{\thepage}{}{\slshape\leftmark}
\makeoddhead{headings}{\slshape\rightmark}{}{\thepage}
\makepsmarks{headings}{%
  \def\chaptermark##1{%
    \markboth{\MakeUppercase{%
      \ifnum\c@secnumdepth > \m@ne
        \if@mainmatter
          \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ %
        \fi
      \fi
      ##1}}{}}%
  \def\sectionmark##1{%
    \markright{\MakeUppercase{%
      \ifnum\c@secnumdepth > \z@
        \thesection. \ %
      \fi
      ##1}}}
  \def\tocmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\contentsname}}{}}
  \def\lofmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\listfigurename}}{}}
  \def\lotmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\listtablename}}{}}
  \def\bibmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\bibname}}{}}
  \def\indexmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\indexname}}{}}
  \def\glossarymark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\glossaryname}}{}}}
\end{lcode}
As you can see, defining the marks for a pagestyle is not necessarily the
simplest thing in the world. However, courtesy of Lars\index{Madsen, Lars} Madsen,
help is at hand.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\createplainmark}\marg{type}\marg{marks}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\memUChead}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\uppercaseheads} \cmd{\nouppercaseheads} \\
\cmd{\createmark}\marg{sec}\marg{marks}\marg{show}\marg{prefix}\marg{postfix} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(createplainmark)%
  {\cs{createplainmark}\marg{type}\marg{marks}\marg{text}}%
  {Defines the \cs{typemark} macro using \meta{text} as the mark, where
  \meta{marks} is \texttt{left}, \texttt{both} or \texttt{right}.}
\glossary(createmark)%
  {\cs{createmark}\marg{sec}\marg{marks}\marg{show}\marg{prefix}\marg{postfix}}%
  {Defines the \cs{secmark} macro where \meta{show} (\texttt{shownumber} 
   or \texttt{nonumber}) controls whether the division number will be
   displayed within \cs{mainmatter}, \meta{marks} is \texttt{left}, 
   \texttt{both} or \texttt{right}, and \meta{prefix} and \meta{postfix}
   are affixed before and after the \meta{sec} (division) number.}
\glossary(memUChead)%
  {\cs{memUChead}\marg{text}}%
  {May uppercase \meta{text}, depending on \cs{uppercaseheads} and
  \cs{nouppercaseheads}.}
\glossary(uppercaseheads)%
  {\cs{uppercaseheads}}%
  {Defines \cs{memUChead} as equivalent to \cs{MakeUppercase}.}
\glossary(nouppercaseheads)%
  {\cs{nouppercaseheads}}%
  {Defines \cs{memUChead} as \cs{relax} (i.e., do nothing).}


The macro \cmd{\createplainmark} defines the \verb?\<type>mark?, where 
\meta{type} is an unnumbered division-like head, such as \texttt{toc},
\texttt{lof}, \texttt{index}, using \meta{text} as the mark value, and 
\meta{marks} is \texttt{left}, \texttt{both} or \texttt{right}. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\createplainmark{toc}{left}{\contentsname}
\createplainmark{lot}{right}{\listtablename}
\createplainmark{bib}{both}{\bibname}
\end{lcode}
is equivalent to
\begin{lcode}
\def\tocmark{\markboth{\memUChead{\contentsname}}{}}
\def\lotmark{\markright{\memUChead{\listtablename}}}
\def\lofmark{\markboth{\memUChead{\bibname}}{\memUChead{\bibname}}}
\end{lcode}

    Following the declaration \cmd{\uppercaseheads} the \cmd{\memUChead} 
command is equivalent to \cmd{\MakeUppercase} but after the 
\cmd{\nouppercaseheads} it is equivalent to \cmd{\relax} (which does nothing).
The \cmd{\createplainmark} macro wraps \cmd{\memUChead} around the \meta{text}
argument within the generated \cs{mark(both/right)} macro. By using the
\cs{(no)uppercaseheads} declarations you can control the uppercasing, or
otherwise, of the mark texts. The default is \cmd{\uppercaseheads}.

\LMnote{2010/02/08}{added the following paragraph}
Note that if you want to use a predefined page style, but would like
to not use automatic uppercasing, then issue \cs{nouppercaseheads} and
reload the page style, for example with the default page style in \theclass\
\begin{lcode}
  \nouppercaseheads
  \pagestyle{headings}
\end{lcode}


    The macro \cmd{\createmark}\marg{sec}\marg{marks}\marg{show}\marg{prefix}\marg{postfix}
defines the \verb?\<sec>mark? macro where \meta{sec} is a sectional division
such as \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter}, \texttt{section}, etc., 
and \meta{show} (\texttt{shownumber} 
or \texttt{nonumber}) controls whether the division number will be
displayed within \cs{mainmatter}. The \meta{marks} argument is \texttt{left}, 
\texttt{both} or \texttt{right}, and \meta{prefix} and \meta{postfix}
are affixed before and after the division number. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\createmark{section}{left}{nonumber}{}{}
\createmark{section}{both}{nonumber}{}{}
\createmark{section}{right}{nonumber}{}{}
\end{lcode}
is equivalent to, respectively
\begin{lcode}
\def\sectionmark#1{\markboth{#1}{}}
\def\sectionmark#1{\markboth{#1}{#1}}
\def\sectionmark#1{\markight{#1}}
\end{lcode}

The difference between \cmd{\createmark} and \cmd{\createplainmark} is
that the former create a macro that takes an argument, whereas
\cmd{\createplainmark} does not.


    Using these macros \Mname's current definition of 
\verb?\makepsmarks{headings}? is much simpler (it also leads to a 
slightly different result as the \texttt{toc} etc., marks set both
the \cmd{\leftmark} and \cmd{\rightmark} instead of just the 
\cmd{\leftmark}):
\begin{lcode}
\makepsmarks{headings}{%
  \createmark{chapter}{left}{shownumber}{\@chapapp\ }{. \ }
  \createmark{section}{right}{shownumber}{}{. \ }
  \createplainmark{toc}{both}{\contentsname}
  \createplainmark{lof}{both}{\listfigurename}
  \createplainmark{lot}{both}{\listtablename}
  \createplainmark{bib}{both}{\bibname}
  \createplainmark{index}{both}{\indexname}
  \createplainmark{glossary}{both}{\glossaryname}}
\end{lcode}


\LMnote{2010/02/08}{fixed typo}
When \Mname{} runs the marks part of page style, it does not zero out
old marks, i.e.\ if an old \cmd{\sectionmark} exist, it still exist
even if we do not change it.  This is both a good and a bad thing. To help
users redefine these marks to doing nothing we provide
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\clearplainmark}\marg{type}\\
\cmd{\clearmark}\marg{type}\\  
\end{syntax}
The used types are the same as for \cmd{\createplainmark} and \cmd{\createmark}.



\PWnote{2009/07/30}{Added sections on Document title and Part title in headers}
\subsubsection{Header with the document title}

    As mentioned before, some publishers like the title of the book 
to be in the header. A simple header is probably all that is needed 
as it is unlikely to be a technical publication. Here is a
use for \pstyle{myheadings}.
\begin{lcode}
\makevenhead{myheadings}{\thepage}{}{DOCUMENT TITLE}
\makeoddhead{myheadings}{Chapter~\thechapter}{}{\thepage}
\end{lcode}

\subsubsection{Part and chapter in the header}

    Some documents have both part and chapter divisions and in such
cases it may be useful for the reader to have the current part and chapter
titles in the header. The \pstyle{headings} pagestyle can be easily modified
to accomplish this by simply resetting the marks for part and chapter:
\begin{lcode}
\makepsmarks{headings}{%
  \createmark{part}{left}{shownumber}{\partname\ }{. \ }
  \createmark{chapter}{right}{shownumber}{\@chapapp\ }{. \ }
  \createplainmark{toc}{both}{\contentsname}
  \createplainmark{lof}{both}{\listfigurename}
  \createplainmark{lot}{both}{\listtablename}
  \createplainmark{bib}{both}{\bibname}
  \createplainmark{index}{both}{\indexname}
  \createplainmark{glossary}{both}{\glossaryname}}
\end{lcode}
  

\subsubsection{The Companion pagestyle}

    This example demonstrates most of the page styling commands.
In the \textit{\ltx\ Companion} series of 
books~\cite{COMPANION,GCOMPANION,WCOMPANION} the header\index{header} is wider 
than the typeblock\index{typeblock}, sticking out into the outer 
margin\index{margin!outer}, and has a rule underneath it. 
The page number is in 
bold and at the outer end of the header\index{header}.
Chapter titles are in verso headers\index{header} and section titles 
in recto headers\index{header}, both in bold font and at the inner 
margin\index{margin!inner}. The footers\index{footer} are empty.

    The first thing to do in implementing this style is to calculate 
the width of the headers\index{header}, which extend to cover any 
marginal\index{marginalia} notes.
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\headwidth}{\textwidth}
  \addtolength{\headwidth}{\marginparsep}
  \addtolength{\headwidth}{\marginparwidth}
\end{lcode}
Now we can set up an empty \pstyle{companion} pagestyle and start to change
it by specifying the new header\index{header} and footer\index{footer} width:
\begin{lcode}
\makepagestyle{companion}
\makerunningwidth{companion}{\headwidth}
\end{lcode}
and specify the width and thickness for the header\index{header} rule, 
otherwise it will be invisible.
\begin{lcode}
\makeheadrule{companion}{\headwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
\end{lcode}

    In order to get the header\index{header} to stick out into the \foredge\ 
margin\index{margin!foredge?\foredge}, verso headers\index{header} 
have to be flushright 
(raggedleft) and recto headers\index{header} to be flushleft (raggedright). 
As the footers\index{footer} are empty, their position is immaterial.
\begin{lcode}
\makeheadposition{companion}{flushright}{flushleft}{}{}
\end{lcode}

    The current chapter and section titles are obtained from the 
\cmd{\leftmark} and \cmd{\rightmark} macros which are defined via the
\cmd{\chaptermark} and \cmd{\sectionmark} macros. Remember that
\cmd{\leftmark} is the last \meta{left} marker and \cmd{\rightmark}
is the first \meta{right} marker\index{markers} on the page.

Chapter numbers are not
put into the header\index{header} but the section number, 
if there is one, is put into
the header\index{header}. We have to make sure that
the correct definitions are used for these as well as for the 
\toc\footnote{The \toc\ and friends are described in detail 
in \protect\Cref{chap:toc}.} 
and other similar elements, and this is where the 
\cmd{\makepsmarks} macro comes into play. 
\begin{lcode}
\makepsmarks{companion}{%
  \nouppercaseheads
  \createmark{chapter}{both}{nonumber}{}{}
  \createmark{section}{right}{shownumber}{}{. \space}
  \createplainmark{toc}{both}{\contentsname}
  \createplainmark{lof}{both}{\listfigurename}
  \createplainmark{lot}{both}{\listtablename}
  \createplainmark{bib}{both}{\bibname}
  \createplainmark{index}{both}{\indexname}
  \createplainmark{glossary}{both}{\glossaryname}
\end{lcode}

    The preliminaries have all been completed, and it just remains to specify
what goes into each header\index{header} and footer\index{footer} slot 
(but the footers\index{footer} are empty).
\begin{lcode}
\makeevenhead{companion}%
  {\normalfont\bfseries\thepage}{}{%
   \normalfont\bfseries\leftmark}
\makeoddhead{companion}%
  {\normalfont\bfseries\rightmark}{}{%
   \normalfont\bfseries\thepage}
\end{lcode}

    Now issuing the command \verb?\pagestyle{companion}? will produce pages 
typeset with \pstyle{companion} pagestyle headers\index{header}. This pagestyle
is part of the class.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\addtopsmarks}\marg{pagestyle}\marg{prepend}\marg{append} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(addtopsmarks)%
  {\cs{addtopsmarks}\marg{pagestyle}\marg{prepend}\marg{append}}%
  {Inserts \meta{prepend} and \meta{append} before and after the current
   definition of \cs{makepsmarks} for \meta{pagestyle}.}
\cmd{\addtopsmarks}\marg{pagestyle}\marg{prepend}\marg{append} is the last
of this group of helper macros. It inserts \meta{prepend} and \meta{append} 
before and after the current definition of \cs{makepsmarks} 
for \meta{pagestyle}. For instance, if you wanted \cs{subsection} titles to appear
in the page headers of the \pstyle{companion} pagestyle then this would be a way
of doing it:
\begin{lcode}
\addtopsmarks{companion}{}{%
  \createmark{subsection}{right}{shownumber}{}{. \space}}
\end{lcode}


\subsubsection{The ruled pagestyle}

    For practical reasons I prefer a page style with headings
where the chapter title is at least in the center 
of the page, and for technical works is at the \foredge. I also prefer the
page number to be near the outside edge. When picking up a book and skimming
through it, either to get an idea of what is in it or to find something more
specific, I hold it in one hand at the spine and use the other for flicking
the pages. The book is half closed while doing this and it's much easier
to spot things at the \foredge\ than those nearer the spine. 
The \pstyle{ruled} page style is like this. The general plan is defined as:
\begin{lcode}
\makepagestyle{ruled}
\makeevenfoot {ruled}{\thepage}{}{} % page numbers at the outside
\makeoddfoot  {ruled}{}{}{\thepage}
\makeheadrule {ruled}{\textwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
\makeevenhead {ruled}{\scshape\leftmark}{}{} % small caps
\makeoddhead  {ruled}{}{}{\rightmark}
\end{lcode}
The other part of the specification has to ensure that the \cmd{\chapter}
and \cmd{\section} commands make the appropriate marks for the headers.
I wanted the numbers to appear in the headers, but not those for sections. The following
code sets these up, as well as the marks for the other document elements.
\begin{lcode}
\makepsmarks{ruled}{%
  \nouppercaseheads
  \createmark{chapter}{left}{shownumber}{}{. \space}
  \createmark{section}{right}{nonumber}{}{}
  \createplainmark{toc}{both}{\contentsname}
  \createplainmark{lof}{both}{\listfigurename}
  \createplainmark{lot}{both}{\listtablename}
  \createplainmark{bib}{both}{\bibname}
  \createplainmark{index}{both}{\indexname}
  \createplainmark{glossary}{both}{\glossaryname}
}
\end{lcode}

\index{pagestyle!specifying|)}



\subsection{Index headers}

\index{pagestyle!index pages|(}

    If you look at the Index\index{index} you will see that the header\index{header} 
shows the first and last entries on the page.
A main entry in the index\index{index} looks like:
\begin{lcode}
\item \idxmark{entry}, page number(s)
\end{lcode}
and in the preamble\index{preamble} to this book \cmd{\idxmark} is defined as
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\idxmark}[1]{#1\markboth{#1}{#1}}
\end{lcode}
This typesets the entry and also uses the entry as markers so that
the first entry on a page is held in \cmd{\rightmark} and the last
is in \cmd{\leftmark}.

    As index\index{index} entries are usually very short, the 
Index\index{index} is set in two columns\index{column!double}. 
Unfortunately \ltx's marking mechanism can be very
fragile on twocolumn\index{column!double} pages, but the standard 
\Lpack{fixltx2e} package corrects this.

    The index\index{index} itself is called by\index{indexing}
\begin{lcode}
\clearpage
\pagestyle{index}
\renewcommand{\preindexhook}{%
The first page number is usually, but not always, 
the primary reference to
the indexed topic.\vskip\onelineskip}
\printindex
\end{lcode}

\makepagestyle{index}
  \makeheadrule{index}{\textwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
  \makeevenhead{index}{\rightmark}{}{\leftmark}
  \makeoddhead{index}{\rightmark}{}{\leftmark}
  \makeevenfoot{index}{\thepage}{}{}
  \makeoddfoot{index}{}{}{\thepage}

    The \pstyle{index} pagestyle, which is the crux of
this example, is defined here as:
\begin{lcode}
\makepagestyle{index}
  \makeheadrule{index}{\textwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
  \makeevenhead{index}{\rightmark}{}{\leftmark}
  \makeoddhead{index}{\rightmark}{}{\leftmark}
  \makeevenfoot{index}{\thepage}{}{}
  \makeoddfoot{index}{}{}{\thepage}
\end{lcode}
This, as you can hopefully see, puts the first and last index\index{index} 
entries on the page into the header\index{header} at the left and right, 
with the folios\index{folio} in the footers\index{footer} at the 
outer margin\index{margin!outer}.

\index{pagestyle!index pages|)}

\subsection{Float pages}

\index{pagestyle!float pages|(}
\index{float!page|(}

\begin{syntax}
\piif{ifonlyfloats}\marg{yes}\marg{no} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(ifonlyfloats)%
  {\cs{ifonlyfloats}\marg{yes}\marg{no}}%
  {Processes \meta{yes} on a page containing only floats, otherwise process
  \meta{no}.}
    There are occasions when it is desirable to have different 
headers\index{header} on pages that only contain figures\index{figure} 
or tables\index{table}. If the command \piif{ifonlyfloats}
is issued on a page that contains no text and only floats then the \meta{yes}
argument is processed, otherwise on a normal page the \meta{no} argument
is processed. The command is most useful when defining a pagestyle that 
should be different on a float-only page\index{page!of floats}.

    For example, assume that the \pstyle{companion} pagestyle is to be
generally used, but on float-only pages all that is required is a pagestyle
similar to \pstyle{plain}. Borrowing some code from the \pstyle{companion}
specification this can be accomplished like:
\begin{lcode}
\makepagestyle{floatcomp}
% \headwidth has already been defined for the companion style
\makeheadrule{floatcomp}{\headwidth}%
  {\ifonlyfloats{0pt}{\normalrulethickness}}
\makeheadposition{floatcomp}{flushright}{flushleft}{}{}
\makepsmarks{floatcomp}{\companionpshook}
\makeevenhead{floatcomp}%
             {\ifonlyfloats{}{\normalfont\bfseries\thepage}}%
             {}%
             {\ifonlyfloats{}{\normalfont\bfseries\leftmark}}
\makeoddhead{floatcomp}%
             {\ifonlyfloats{}{\normalfont\bfseries\rightmark}}%
             {}%
             {\ifonlyfloats{}{\normalfont\bfseries\thepage}}
\makeevenfoot{floatcomp}{}{\ifonlyfloats{\thepage}{}}{}
\makeoddfoot{floatcomp}{}{\ifonlyfloats{\thepage}{}}{}
\end{lcode}
The code above for the \pstyle{floatcomp} style should be compared with 
that for the earlier \pstyle{companion} style.

    The headrule is invisible\index{rule!thickness}\index{rule!invisible} 
on float pages by giving it zero thickness, 
otherwise it has the \cmd{\normalrulethickness}. The head position is 
identical for both pagestyles. However, the headers\index{header} are empty for
\pstyle{floatcomp} and the footers\index{footer} have centered page numbers 
on float pages; on ordinary pages the footers\index{footer} are empty 
while the headers\index{header}
are the same as the \pstyle{companion} headers\index{header}.

    The code includes one `trick'. The macro \cmd{\makepsmarks}\verb?{X}{code}?
is equivalent to
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\Xpshook}{code}
\end{lcode}
I have used this knowledge in the line:
\begin{lcode}
\makepsmarks{floatcomp}{\companionpshook}
\end{lcode}
which avoids retyping the code from 
\verb?\makepsmarks{companion}{...}?,
and ensures that the code is actually the same for the two pagestyles.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\mergepagefloatstyle}\marg{style}\marg{textstyle}\marg{floatstyle} \\
\end{syntax}
    If you have two pre-existing pagestyles, one that will be used for
text pages and the other that can be used for float pages, then the
\cmd{\mergepagefloatstyle} command provides a simpler means of 
combining\index{pagestyle!combining}
them than the above example code for \pstyle{floatcomp}. The argument
\meta{style} is the name of the pagestyle being defined. The
argument \meta{textstyle}
is the name of the pagestyle for text pages and \meta{floatstyle} is the
name of the pagestyle for float-only pages. Both of these must have been 
defined before calling \cmd{\mergepagefloatstyle}. So, instead of the long
winded, and possibly tricky, code I could have simply said:
\begin{lcode}
\mergepagefloatstyle{floatcomp}{companion}{plain}
\end{lcode}


    One author thought it would be nice to be able to have different 
page headings according
to whether the page was a floatpage, or there was a float at the top of 
the page, or a float at the bottom of a page or there was text at the 
top and bottom.

    This, I think, is not a common requirement and, further, that to provide 
this involves changing parts of the LaTeX output routine --- something only
to be tackled by the bravest of the brave. If it were to be done then were
best done in a package that could be easily ignored. The following is an
outline of what might be done; I do not recommend it and if you try this 
and all your work dissappears then on your own head be it.

\begin{lcode}
% notefloat.sty
\newif\iffloatattop
  \floatattopfalse
\newif\iffloatatbot
  \floatatbotfalse

\renewcommand*{\@addtotoporbot}{%
  \@getfpsbit \tw@
  \ifodd \@tempcnta
    \@flsetnum \@topnum
    \ifnum \@topnum>\z@
      \@tempswafalse
      \@flcheckspace \@toproom \@toplist
      \if@tempswa
        \@bitor\@currtype{\@midlist\@botlist}%
        \if@test
        \else
          \@flupdates \@topnum \@toproom \@toplist
          \@inserttrue
  \global\floatattoptrue
        \fi
      \fi
    \fi
  \fi
  \if@insert
  \else
    \@addtobot
  \fi}

\renewcommand*{\@addtobot}{%
  \@getfpsbit 4\relax
  \ifodd \@tempcnta
    \@flsetnum \@botnum
    \ifnum \@botnum>\z@
      \@tempswafalse
      \@flcheckspace \@botroom \@botlist
      \if@tempswa
        \global \maxdepth \z@
        \@flupdates \@botnum \@botroom \@botlist
        \@inserttrue
  \global\floatatbottrue
      \fi
    \fi
  \fi}

\let\p@wold@output\@outputpage
\renewcommand*{\@outputpage}{%
  \p@wold@output
  \global\floatattopfalse
  \global\floatatbotfalse}

\endinput
\end{lcode}
\cs{floatattop} is probably set \ptrue\ if there is a float at the 
top of the page and
\cs{floatatbot} is probably set \ptrue\ if there is a float at the bottom
of the page.


\index{float!page|)}
\index{pagestyle!float pages|)}

\section{The showlocs pagestyle}

    The \pstyle{showlocs} pagestyle is somewhat special as it is meant to be
used as an aid when designing a page layout. Lines are drawn showing the 
vertical positions of the headers and footers and a box is drawn around
the textblock. It is implemented using two 
zero-sized\index{zero-sized picture} pictures.\verbfootnote{A
zero-sized picture starts off with \verb?begin{picture}(0,0)...?.}
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\framepichead} \\
\cmd{\framepictextfoot} \\
\cmd{\framepichook} \\
\cmd{\showheadfootlocoff} \\
\cmd{\showtextblockoff} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(framepichead)%
  {\cs{framepichead}}%
  {Used by the \Ppstyle{showlocs} pagestyle to draw a line at the header 
   location.}
\glossary(framepictextfoot)%
  {\cs{framepictextfoot}}%
  {Used by the \Ppstyle{showlocs} pagestyle to draw a box around the textblock
   and a line at the footer location.}
\glossary(framepichook)%
  {\cs{framepichook}}%
  {First thing called inside the zero width pictures provided by
    \cs{framepichead} and \cs{framepictextfoot}. Empty by default.}%
\glossary(showtextblockoff)%
  {\cs{showtextblockoff}}%
  {Prevents \cs{framepictextfoot} from drawing a box around the textblock.}
\glossary(showheadfootlocoff)%
  {\cs{showheadfootlocoff}}%
  {Prevents \cs{framepichead} and \cs{framepictextfoot} from drawing
   lines at the header and footer locations.}
%
The macro \cmd{\framepichead} creates a zero-sized\index{zero-sized picture} 
picture that draws a line at the header location, and the macro 
\cmd{\framepictextfoot} creates a zero-sized\index{zero-sized picture} 
picture that draws a line at the footer location
and also draws a box around the typeblock. Following the declaration
\cmd{\showheadfootlocoff} the macros \cmd{\framepichead} and 
\cmd{\framepictextfoot} do not draw lines showing the header and footer
locations. The declaration \cmd{\showtextblockoff} prevents
\cmd{\framepictextfoot} from drawing a box around the textblock.

In case you want to change the color of the \pstyle{showlocs}, simply do
\begin{lcode}
  \renewcommnand\framepichook{\color{red}}
\end{lcode}



    If you generally want a box around the textblock you may want to create
your own pagestyle using \cmd{\framepictextfoot} and the \pstyle{showlocs}
code as a starting point, see \path{memoir.cls} for details.


\section{Other things to do with page styles}
\label{sec:other-things-do}

Back on \pref{ex:draft.pagestyle} we presented a way of adding some
draft information. Here is a more advanced example of this.

One interesting use for page styles is to provide extra information
below the footer. This might be some kind of copyright information. Or
if your document is under version control with a system like
Subversion, and you have all your chapter laying in seperate files,
then why not add information at the start of very chapter, specifying
who did the last change to this chapter at which time. See the
\texttt{svn-multi} package (\cite{svn-multi}) and the Prac\TeX{}
Journal article \cite{practex-2007-3-ms} by the same author. Then this
information can be added to the start of every chapter using something
like:
\begin{lcode}
\usepackage[filehooks]{svn-multi}
\makeatletter
% remember to define a darkgray color
\newcommand\addRevisionData{%
  \begin{picture}(0,0)%
    \put(0,-10){%
      \tiny%
      \expandafter\@ifmtarg\expandafter{\svnfiledate}{}{%
        \textcolor{darkgray}{Chapter last updated 
          \svnfileyear/\svnfilemonth/\svnfileday
         \enspace \svnfilehour:\svnfileminute\ (revision \svnfilerev)}
     }%
    }%
  \end{picture}%
}
\makeatother
% chapter is normally an alias to the plain style, we want to change
% it, so make it a real pagestyle
\makepagestyle{chapter} 
\makeoddfoot{chapter}{\addRevisionData}{\thepage}{}
\makeevenfoot{chapter}{\addRevisionData}{\thepage}{}
\end{lcode}


%#% extend
%#% extstart include paragraphs-and-lists.tex

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-05-22 16:29:23 +0200 (Wed, 22 May 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 470 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%



\chapter{Paragraphs and lists}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%\tightlists
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

    Within a sectional division the text is typically broken up into
paragraphs. Sometimes there may be text that is set off from the normal
paragraphing, like quotations\index{quotation} or lists.

\section{Paragraphs}

\index{paragraph|(} %|

    There are basically two parameters that control the appearance of normal
paragraphs.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\parindent} \lnc{\parskip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(parskip)%
  {\cs{parskip}}%
  {(Extra) vertical space between paragraphs (default 0pt).}
 
    The length \lnc{\parindent} is the indentation of the first line of a
paragraph\index{paragraph!indentation} and the length \lnc{\parskip} is the vertical spacing between
paragraphs, as illustrated in \fref{fig:para}. The value of \lnc{\parskip}
is usually 0pt, and \lnc{\parindent} is usually defined in terms of ems so
that the actual indentation depends on the font being used. If \lnc{\parindent}
is set to a negative length, then the first line of the paragraphs will be 
`outdented'\index{paragraph!outdentation} into the lefthand 
margin\index{margin!left}.

\begin{figure}
\centering
\drawparameterstrue
\drawparagraph
\caption{Paragraphing parameters}\label{fig:para}
\end{figure}

\subsection{Block paragraph}

    A block paragraph\index{paragraph!block} is obtained by setting 
\lnc{\parindent} to 0em; 
\lnc{\parskip} should be set to some positive value so that there is some
space between paragraphs to enable them to be identified. Most typographers
heartily dislike block paragraphs, not only on aesthetical grounds but also
on practical\index{paragraph!block!reasons against} considerations. 
Consider what happens if the last line of a block 
paragraph is full and also is the last line on the page. The following
block paragraph will start at the top of the next page but there will be
no identifiable space to indicate an inter-paragraph break.

    It is important to know that \ltx\ 
typesets\index{paragraph!typeset as a unit} 
paragraph by paragraph. 
For example, the \lnc{\baselineskip} that is used for a paragraph is the value
that is in effect at the end of the paragraph, and the font size used for a
paragraph is according to the size declaration (e.g., \cmd{\large} or 
\cmd{\normalsize} or \cmd{\small}) at the end of the paragraph, 
and the raggedness or otherwise of the whole paragraph depends on
the declaration (e.g., \cmd{\centering})  in effect at the end of 
the paragraph. If a pagebreak occurs in the middle of a paragraph \tx\
will not reset the part of the paragraph that goes onto the following
page, even if the textwidths on the two pages are different.

\subsection{Hanging paragraphs}

\index{paragraph!hanging|(} %|

    A hanging paragraph is one where the length of the first few lines differs
from the length of the remaining lines. (A normal indented paragraph 
may be considered 
to be a special case of a hanging paragraph where `few = one'). 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\hangpara}\marg{indent}\marg{num} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(hangpara)%
  {\cs{hangpara}\marg{indent}\marg{num}}%
  {Apply \meta{indent} for \meta{num} lines to the immediately following 
   paragraph.}

\hangpara{3em}{-3}%
 Using \cmd{\hangpara} at the start of a paragraph will cause the paragraph
to be hung. If the length \meta{indent} is positive the lefthand end of the 
lines will be indented but if it is negative the righthand ends will be 
indented by the specified amount.
    If the number \meta{num}, say N, is negative the first N lines of
the paragraph will be indented while if N is positive the N+1 th lines onwards
will be indented. This paragraph was set with \verb?\hangpara{3em}{-3}?. There 
should be no space between the \cmd{\hangpara} command and the start of the
paragraph.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{hangparas}\marg{indent}\marg{num} text \eenv{hangparas} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(hangparas)%
  {\senv{hangparas}\marg{indent}\marg{num}}%
  {Environment form of \cs{hangpara}, applying it to every paragraph in the
   environment.}
    The \Ie{hangparas} environment is like the \cmd{\hangpara} command except
that every paragraph in the environment will be hung.

    The code implementing the hanging paragraphs is the same as for
the \Lpack{hanging} package~\cite{HANGING}. Examples of some uses
can be found in~\cite{TTC199}.

    As noted eleswhere the sectioning commands use the internal 
macro \cmd{\@hangfrom} as part of the formatting of the titles.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\hangfrom}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(hangfrom)%
  {\cs{hangfrom}\marg{stuff}}%
  {Hangs a paragraph from \meta{stuff}.}
The \cmd{\hangfrom} macro is provided as an author's version of the
internal \cmd{\@hangfrom} macro used, among other things, in typesetting 
section titles.

\hangfrom{Simple hung paragraphs }(like this one) can be specified
using the \cmd{\hangfrom} macro. The macro puts \meta{text} in a box
and then makes a hanging paragraph of the following material. This
paragraph commenced with \\
\verb?\hangfrom{Simple hung paragraphs }(like ...? \\
and you are now reading the result.

    The commands for hanging paragraphs do not quite work as might be
expected when they are used in a list\index{paragraph!hanging!in list} 
environment, for example inside
an \Ie{enumerate}. If you wish for a hanging paragraph inside such an
environment you will have to define your own commands for this. If you
feel capable of doing so then, with my congratulations, move on to the
next section. If you are not so confident you could try using the following
non-guaranteed code, which is based on an idea by Patrik 
Nyman\index{Nyman, Patrick} which he posted on \ctt{} in January 2004.
\begin{lcode}
%\makeatletter
% A version of \hangpara for use in a list
%    \listhanging{indent}{num} text text text ...
\def\listhanging#1#2#3\par{%
  \@tempdima\textwidth \advance\@tempdima -\leftmargin
  \parbox{\@tempdima}{\hangpara{#1}{#2}#3}\par}
% A version of \hangfrom for use in a list
%    \listhangfrom{stuff} text text text ...
\def\listhangfrom#1#2\par{%
  \@tempdima\textwidth \advance\@tempdima -\leftmargin
  \parbox{\@tempdima}{\@hangfrom{#1}#2}\par}
%\makeatother
\end{lcode}
  

\index{paragraph!hanging|)}%|

\index{paragraph|)} %|

\section{Flush and ragged}

    Flushleft\index{flushleft} text has the lefthand end of the lines 
aligned vertically at the lefthand margin\index{margin!left} and
flushright\index{flushright} text has the righthand end of the lines 
aligned vertically at the righthand margin\index{margin!right}. The
opposites of these are raggedleft\index{raggedleft} text where the 
lefthand ends are not aligned
and raggedright\index{raggedright} where the righthand end of lines are 
not aligned. LaTeX normally typesets flushleft and flushright.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{flushleft} text \eenv{flushleft} \\
\senv{flushright} text \eenv{flushright} \\
\senv{center} text \eenv{center} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(flushleft)%
  {\senv{flushleft}}%
  {Text to be typeset flushleft and raggedright.}
\glossary(flushright)%
  {\senv{flushright}}%
  {Text to be typeset flushright and raggedleft.}
\glossary(center)%
  {\senv{center}}%
  {Text to be set raggedleft and raggedright, with each line centered.}
    Text in a \Ie{flushleft} environment is typeset flushleft and raggedright,
while in a \Ie{flushright} environment is typeset raggedleft and flushright.
In a \Ie{center} environment the text is set raggedleft and raggedright, 
and each line is centered. A small vertical space is put before and after 
each of these environments.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\raggedleft} \cmd{\raggedright} \cmd{\centering} \\
\end{syntax} 
\glossary(raggedleft)
  {\cs{raggedleft}}%
  {Declaration for text to be set raggedleft and flushright.}
\glossary(raggedright)
  {\cs{raggedright}}%
  {Declaration for text to be set flushleft and raggedright.}
\glossary(centering)%
  {\cs{centering}}%
  {Declaration for text to be set raggedleft and raggedright, 
   with each line centered.}
     The \cmd{\raggedleft} declaration can be used to have text typeset
raggedleft and flushright, and similary the declaration \cmd{\raggedright}
causes typesetting to be flushleft and raggedright. The declaration 
\cmd{\centering} typesets raggedleft and raggedright with each line centered.
Unlike the environments, no additional space is added. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\centerfloat} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(centerfloat)%
  {\cs{centerfloat}}%
  {Within a float, centers it with respect to the typeblock; the float 
   may extend into both margins.}
\indextwo{float}{centering}
The contents of floats like tables or figures are usually centered 
and \cmd{\centering}
should be used for this, not the \Ie{center} environment which adds extra,
usually undesired, vertical space. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
\centering
...
\caption{...}
\end{figure}
\end{lcode} 
However, if the float is wider than the
textblock then it is aligned with the left margin and extends into the right
margin. The command \cmd{\centerfloat} is a special version of \cmd{\center}
that when used in a wide float will center it with respect to the textblock,
i.e., it will extend equally into both margins. Note that \cmd{\centerfloat}
needs to be applied where there is a known width; if applied to a regular
text paragraph it will center the paragraph but put all the text on one line.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\raggedyright}\oarg{space} \\
\lnc{\ragrparindent} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(raggedyright)%
  {\cs{raggedyright}\oarg{space}}%
  {Version of \cs{raggedright} with \meta{space} providing control
   over the amount of raggedness.}
\glossary(ragrparindent)%
  {\cs{ragrparindent}}%
  {The \cs{parindent} for \cs{raggedyright} paragraphs.}
When using \cmd{\raggedright} in narrow columns the right hand edge tends to
be too ragged, and paragraphs are not indented. 
Text set \cmd{\raggedyright} usually fills more of the available
width and paragraphs are indented by \lnc{\ragrparindent}, which is initially
set to \lnc{\parindent}. The optional \meta{space} argument, whose default
is 2em, can be used to adjust the amount of raggedness. As examples:
\begin{lcode}
\raggedyright[0pt]   % typeset flushright 
\raggedyright[1fil]  % same as \raggedright
\raggedyright[0.5em] % less ragged than \raggedright
\end{lcode}

    Remember that \ltx\ typesets on a per-paragraph\index{paragraph!typeset as a unit}
 basis, so that putting
the sequence of \cmd{\centering}, \cmd{\raggedleft} declarations in the same
paragraph\index{paragraph} will cause the entire paragraph to be typeset 
raggedleft and 
flushright --- the \cmd{\centering} declaration is not the one in effect 
at the end of the paragraph.

\section{Quotations}

    LaTeX provides two environments that are typically used for typesetting
quotations\index{quotation}.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{quote} text \eenv{quote} \\
\senv{quotation} text \eenv{quotation} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(quote)%
  {\senv{quote}}%
  {Contents set justified in a narrower measure, with zero \cs{parindent}.}
\glossary(quotation)%
  {\senv{quotation}}%
  {Contents set justified in a narrower measure with normal \cs{parindent}.}

     In both of these environments the text is set flushleft and flushright
in a measure that is smaller than the normal textwidth. The only difference
between the two environments is that paragraphs\index{paragraph!indentation} 
are not indented in the \Ie{quote}
environment but normal paragraphing is used in the \Ie{quotation} environment.


\begin{egresult}[Setting the source of a quotation]{eg:quotesource}
\begin{quotation}
\hspace*{-0.5\parindent}This quotation has a short last line so there there is enough space 
for the source to be set at
the end of the line.\sourceatright{I. M. Short}
\end{quotation}

\begin{quotation}
The last line of this quotation turns out to be too long for
the source to be set at the end, so it is automatically
set flushright on the following line.\sourceatright{N. O. Space}
\end{quotation}
\end{egresult}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\sourceatright}\oarg{length}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(sourceatright)%
  {\cs{sourceatright}\oarg{length}\marg{text}}%
  {At the end of a paragraph puts \meta{text} at the end of the line
   if the line is short enough for a space \meta{length} and the \meta{text},
   otherwise puts \meta{text} flushright on the following line.}
Some quotations are completed by giving the source or author. Using
\cmd{\sourceatright} at the end of the quotation will typeset \meta{text}
flushright at the end of the line if there is enough space, otherwise it 
typesets it flushright on the next line. A space \meta{length} (default 2em)
is left between the end of the quote and \meta{text}.

\begin{egsource}{eg:quotesource}
\begin{quotation}
This quotation has a short last line so there there is enough space 
for the source to be set at
the end of the line.\sourceatright{I. M. Short}
\end{quotation}

\begin{quotation}
The last line of this quotation turns out to be too long for
the source to be set at the end, so it is automatically
set flushright on the following line.\sourceatright{N. O. Space}
\end{quotation}
\end{egsource}

\section{Some less common paragraph shapes}

    The paragraph shapes described in this section are based on a series
that I presented in my \emph{Glisterings} column~\cite{GLISTER07,GLISTER08}.
Like the earlier \cmd{\centering}, etc., paragraph style declarations, the
style that applies is the one in effect at the \emph{end} of the paragraph.
Thus the general usage is:
\begin{lcode}
\bgroup%    a group to keep changes local % or could be { or \begin...
\paragraphstyle
.... text
\par%       ensure the end of a paragraph
\egroup%    end the group % or could be } or \end...
\end{lcode}

    If you use one of these paragraph shapes then using \cmd{\\} to break
a line may give a surprising result. If so, the following may help.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\atcentercr} \\
\cmd{\break} \\
\cmd{\memorigdbs} \\
\cmd{\memorigpar} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(atcentercr)%
  {\cs{atcentercr}}%
  {Breaks a line in a (unusual) paragraph.}
\glossary(break)%
  {\cs{break}}%
  {TeX macro to break a line.}
\glossary(memorigdbs)%
  {\cs{memorigdbs}}%
  {Stores the original definition of \texttt{\bs}\texttt{\bs}.} % not \cs{\}
\glossary(memorigpar)%
  {\cs{memorigpar}}%
  {Stores the original definition of %\texttt{\bs}\texttt{par}.}
  \cs{par}.}
You could try \cmd{\atcentcr}, which is user level version of an internal
\ltx\ command used in some paragraph settings for line breaking, 
or \cmd{\break}, which is a \tx\ command to end a line.

   In some cases the paragraph shaping commands change the definitions 
of \cmd{\\} or \cs{par}. Just in case you need to restore them, copies
of the original definitions are in
\cmd{\memorigdbs} (for \cmd{\\}) and \cmd{\memorigpar} (for \cs{par}).

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\flushleftright} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(flushleftright)%
  {\cs{flushleftright}}%
  {Following this declaration paragraphs are set in their usual form.}

    If you use one of the shapes listed later in this section and things
go wrong, the declaration \cmd{\flushleftright} returns all paragraphing
parameters\footnote{Except for the \cs{parindent}, which it leaves at its
current value.} 
to their normal values, thus producing paragraphs as normal ---
justified left and right with the last line flushleft and raggedright.

    
\subsection{Last line not short}

    On occasion a paragraph may end with a single short word as the last
line.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\linenottooshort}\oarg{length} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(linenottooshort)%
  {\cs{linenottooshort}\oarg{length}}%
  {Following this declaration the last line of a paragraph will not be
   shorter than \meta{length} (default 2em).}
Following the \cmd{\linenottooshort} declaration paragraphs will be set
as normal, except that the last line will not be shorter than
\meta{length} (default 2em).


\begin{egresult}[Paragraph's line not too short]{eg:nottooshort}
\linenottooshort[4em]
The last line of this paragraph will be no shorter than a particular
length. a b c d e f g h i % j k l m n

The last line of this paragraph will be no shorter than a particular
length. a b c d e f g h i j k % l m n
\end{egresult}

\begin{egsource}{eg:nottooshort}
\linenottooshort[4em]
The last line of this paragraph will be no shorter than a particular
length. a b c d e f g h i % j k l m n

The last line of this paragraph will be no shorter than a particular
length. a b c d e f g h i j k % l m n
\end{egsource}

\subsection{Russian typography}

    Apparently in the Russian typographic tradition the last line of a
multiline paragraph must either be at least as long as the \lnc{\parindent}
and have at least \lnc{\parindent} at the end, or it must fill 
the whole line (i.e., flushleft and flushright).

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\russianpar} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(russianpar)%
  {\cs{russianpar}}%
  {Ending a paragraph with \cs{russianpar} causes it to be set
   following Russian typographic rules.}
Ending a paragraph with \cmd{\russianpar} causes it to be set following
Russian typographic rules.

If you have many such paragraphs it may be more convenient to do it like:
\begin{lcode}
\let\par\russianpar
... many paragraphs
\let\par\memorigpar
\end{lcode}
or as:
\begin{lcode}
\begingroup% start a group
\let\par\russianpar
... many paragraphs
\endgroup% end the group
\end{lcode}


\subsection{Fill with rules}

    In some legal documents there must be no space at the end of the lines
in order to prevent anyone inserting something at a later date. Typically 
it is only the last line in a paragraph that needs this treatment.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\lastlinerulefill} \\
\cmd{\lastlineparrule} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(lastlinerulefill)%
  {\cs{lastlinerulefill}}%
  {Ending a paragraph with this will cause any spaces at the ends of 
   the lines will be filled with a rule (\cs{lastlineparrule}).}
\glossary(lastlineparrule)%
  {\cs{lastlineparrule}}%
  {The rule used by \cs{lastlinerulefill} to eliminate spaces at 
   the ends of lines.}

\begin{egresult}[Rules for spaces]{eg:rulefill}
The last line of this paragraph will be be set by ending it with
a rule to fill up any space.\lastlinerulefill
\end{egresult}


\begin{egsource}{eg:rulefill}
The last line of this paragraph will be be set by ending it with
a rule to fill up any space.\lastlinerulefill
\end{egsource}


Using \cmd{\lastlinerulefill} to end a paragraph will cause any spaces
at the ends of the lines to be filled with the \cmd{\lastlineparrule} rule.
If you have many paragraphs of this kind then try:
\begin{lcode}
\let\par\lastlinerulefill
.... many paragraphs
\let\par\memorigpar
\end{lcode}
Remember that \ltx\ treats many constructs (like section headings or captions)
as paragraphs, so you may have to alternate between filled text paragraphs
and regular paragraphing.



\subsection{Some ragged paragraphs}

   A few paragraph shapes with unusual ragged lines are avaiable.

\begin{egresult}[Ragged paragraphs]{eg:raggeds}
\justlastraggedleft
Paragraphs following the \verb?\justlastraggedleft? declaration, as
this one does, have their lines justified except for the last which
is set raggedleft. The demonstration works best if there are three
or more lines.

\raggedrightthenleft
This paragraph is set following the \verb?\raggedrightthenleft?
declaration. The first line is set raggedright and all the remaining
lines are set raggedleft. The demonstration is better if there are three or 
more lines.

\leftcenterright
This paragraph is set following the \verb?\leftcenterright?
declaration. We really need three, \\ or four may be better, \\
lines to show the effect of this.
\everypar{}
\end{egresult}



\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\justlastraggedleft} \\
\cmd{\raggedrightthenleft} \\
\cmd{\leftcenterright} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(justlastraggedleft)%
  {\cs{justlastraggedleft}}%
  {Following this declaration paragraphs will be set justified except the
  last line will be set raggedleft.}
\glossary(raggedrightthenleft)%
  {\cs{raggedrightthenleft}}%
  {Following this declaration paragraphs will be
set with the first line raggedright and the rest raggedleft.}
\glossary(raggedrightthenleft)%
  {\cs{leftcenterright}}%
  {Following this declaration paragraphs will be
set with the first line raggedright, the last raggedleft, and those
 in the middle centered.}

  Following the \cmd{\justlastraggedleft}  declaration paragraphs will be 
set justified except the last line will be set raggedleft.

  Following the declaration \cmd{\raggedrightthenleft} paragraphs will be
set with the first line raggedright and the remainder set raggedleft.

  Following the declaration \cmd{\leftcenteright} paragraphs will be
set with the first line flushleft (and raggedright) and the last line
flushright (and raggedleft) and those in the middle will be centered.
This declaration should be used within a group; also \cmd{\everypar}\verb?{}?
should be called at the end.

\begin{egsource}{eg:raggeds}
\justlastraggedleft
Paragraphs following the \verb?\justlastraggedleft? declaration, as
this one does, have their lines justified except for the last which
is set raggedleft. The demonstration works best if there are three
or more lines.

\raggedrightthenleft
This paragraph is set following the \verb?\raggedrightthenleft?
declaration. The first line is set raggedright and all the remaining
lines are set raggedleft. The demonstration is better if there are three or 
more lines.

\leftcenterright
This paragraph is set following the \verb?\leftcenterright?
declaration. We really need three, \\ or four may be better, \\
lines to show the effect of this.
\everypar{}
\end{egsource}


\subsection{Left spring right}

    Typically the lines of a paragraph are both flushleft and flushright and
filled with text, but sometimes filling is not desired.

\begin{egresult}[A sprung paragraph]{eg:sprung}
\leftspringright{0.3}{0.6}%
  {Text at the left is set flushleft and raggedright.}
  {But the text at the right is set raggedleft and flushright.
   It's as though there was a spring pushing the lines apart.}
\vspace*{0.25\baselineskip}
\end{egresult}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\leftspringright}\marg{lfrac}\marg{rfrac}\marg{ltext}\marg{rtext} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(leftspringright)%
  {\cs{leftspringright}\marg{lfrac}\marg{rfrac}\marg{ltext}\marg{rtext}}%
  {Sets \meta{ltext} flushleft and raggedright, and \meta{rtext} raggedleft
   and flushright with horizontal space between the two texts.}
The \cmd{\leftspringright} macro sets \meta{ltext} flushleft and raggedright
in a column whose width is \meta{lfrac} of the textwidth and, in parallel,
it also sets \meta{rtext} raggedleft and flushright in a column that is
\meta{rfrac} of the textwidth; the effect is as though there are springs 
between the lines of the two texts. The sum of \meta{lfrac} and \meta{rfac} 
must be less than one.

\begin{egsource}{eg:sprung}
\leftspringright{0.3}{0.6}%
  {Text at the left is set flushleft and raggedright.}
  {But the text at the right is set raggedleft and flushright.
   It's as though there was a spring pushing the lines apart.}
\end{egsource}

\section{Changing the textwidth}\label{sec:adjustwidth}

    The \Ie{quote} and \Ie{quotation} environments both locally change the 
textwidth, or more precisely, they temporarily increase the left and right 
margins\index{margin!left}\index{margin!right} by equal amounts. 
Generally speaking it is not a 
good idea to change the textwidth but sometimes it may be called for.

The commands and environment described below are similar to those in
the originally found in the \Lpack{chngpage} package, but do differ in
some respects.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{adjustwidth}\marg{left}\marg{right} text \eenv{adjustwidth} \\
\senv{adjustwidth*}\marg{left}\marg{right} text \eenv{adjustwidth*} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(adjustwidth)%
  {\senv{adjustwidth}\marg{left}\marg{right}}%
  {Temporarily adds the lengths \marg{left} and \marg{right} to the left
   and right margins.}
\glossary(adjustwidth*)%
  {\senv{adjustwidth*}\marg{left}\marg{right}}%
  {A sophisticated form of \texttt{adjustwidth}. 
   Temporarily adds the lengths \marg{left} and \marg{right} to the spine
   and outer margins on odd (recto) pages, and on even (verso) pages adds
   them to the outer and spine margins, respectively.}
The \Ie{adjustwidth} environment temporarily adds the length \meta{left}
to the lefthand margin\index{margin!left} and \meta{right} to the righthand 
margin\index{margin!right}. That is, a positive length value increases the 
margin\index{margin} and hence reduces the textwidth,
and a negative value reduces the margin\index{margin} and increases the 
textwidth. The \Ie{quotation} environment is roughly equivalent to
\begin{lcode}
\begin{adjustwidth}{2.5em}{2.5em}
\end{lcode}

    The starred version of the environment, \Ie{adjustwidth*}, is really only
useful if the left and right margin\index{margin} adjustments are different. 
The starred version checks the page number and if it is odd then adjusts 
the left (spine) and right (outer) margins\index{margin} 
by \meta{left} and \meta{right} respectively; if the page number is even 
(a verso page) it adjusts the left (outer) and right (spine) 
margins\index{margin} by \meta{right} and \meta{left} respectively.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\strictpagecheck} \cmd{\lazypagecheck} \\
\end{syntax}

Odd/even page checking may be either strict (\cmd{\strictpagecheck})
or lazy (\cmd{\lazypagecheck}). Lazy checking works most of the time
but if it fails at any point then the strict checking should be used.

    As an example, if a figure\index{figure} is wider than the textwidth 
it will stick out into the righthand margin\index{margin!right}. It may be 
desireable to have any wide figure\index{figure} stick out into the 
outer margin\index{margin!outer} where there is usually more room than at
the spine margin\index{margin!spine}. This can be accomplished by
\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
\centering
\strictpagecheck
\begin{adjustwidth*}{0em}{-3em}
% the illustration
\caption{...}
\end{adjustwidth*}
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}

    A real example in this manual is \tref{tab:fpp} on \pref{tab:fpp},
which is wider than the typeblock\index{typeblock}. In that case I 
just centered it by using \Ie{adjustwidth} to decrease each 
margin\index{margin} equally. In brief, like
\begin{lcode}
\begin{table}
\begin{adjustwidth}{-1cm}{-1cm}
\centering
...
\end{adjustwidth}
\end{table}
\end{lcode}

    Note that the \Ie{adjustwidth} environment applies to complete paragraphs;
you can't change the width of part of a paragraph\index{paragraph} 
except for hanging paragraphs\index{paragraph!hanging} or more esoterically 
via \cmd{\parshape}. Further, if the adjusted paragraph crosses a
page boundary the margin\index{margin} changes are constant; a paragraph 
that is, say, wider at the right on the first page will also be wider at 
the right as it continues onto the following page.

    The \Ie{center} environment horizontally centers its contents
with respect to the typeblock\index{typeblock}. 
Sometimes you may wish to horizontally center some text with respect
to the physical page, for example when typesetting a 
colophon\index{colophon} which may look odd centered with respect
to the (unseen) typeblock\index{typeblock}.

    The calculation of the necessary changes to the spine and \foredge{}
margins\index{margin} is simple. Using the same symbols as earlier in 
\S\ref{sec:typeblock2} ($P_{w}$ and $B_{w}$ are the width of the trimmed 
page and the typeblock\index{typeblock}, respectively;
$S$ and $E$ are the spine and \foredge{} margins\index{margin}, 
respectively) then the amount $M$ to be added to the spine 
margin\index{margin} and subtracted from the
\foredge{} margin\index{margin} is calculated as:
\begin{displaymath}
 M = 1/2(P_{w} - B_{w}) - S
\end{displaymath}

For example, assume that the \lnc{\textwidth} is 5 inches and the 
\lnc{\spinemargin} is 1 inch. On US letterpaper\index{paper!size!letterpaper} 
(\lnc{\paperwidth} is 8.5 inches) the \foredge{} margin\index{margin} is 
then 2.5 inches, and 0.75 inches\footnote{On A4\index{paper!size!A4}
paper the result would be different.}  must be added to the spine 
margin\index{margin} and subtracted from the \foredge{} to center the 
typeblock\index{typeblock}. 
The \Ie{adjustwidth} environment can be used to make the (temporary) change.
\begin{lcode}
\begin{adjustwidth*}{0.75in}{-0.75in} ...
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\calccentering}\marg{length} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(calccentering)%
  {\cs{calccentering}\marg{length}}%
  {Sets the \meta{length} command to the value to add/subtract from margins
   to center text on the physical page.}
 If you don't want to do the above calculations by hand, 
\cmd{\calccentering} will do it for you. 
The \meta{length}
argument must be the name of a pre-existing length command, 
including the backslash. After calling 
\cmd{\calccentering}, \meta{length} is the amount to be added to the
spine margin\index{margin} and subtracted from the foredge margin\index{margin} to center the typeblock\index{typeblock}.
An example usage is
\begin{lcode}
\calccentering{\mylength}
\begin{adjustwidth*}{\mylength}{-\mylength}
text horizontally centered on the physical page
\end{adjustwidth*}
\end{lcode}

   You do not necessarily have to define a new length for the purposes
of \cmd{\calccentering}. Any existing length will do, such as
\lnc{\unitlength}, provided it will be otherwise unused between performing
the calculation and changing the margins\index{margin} (and that you can, 
if necessary reset it to its original value --- the default value for 
\lnc{\unitlength} is 1pt). 

\section{Lists}

\index{list|(} %|

    Standard \ltx\ provides four kinds of lists. There is a general \Ie{list}
environment which you can use to define your own particular kind of list,
and the \Ie{description}, \Ie{itemize} and \Ie{enumerate} lists (which are 
internally defined in terms of the general \Ie{list} 
environment\footnote{The \Ie{quote} and \Ie{quotation} environments are also
defined in terms of the general \Ie{list} environment. You may be 
surprised where it crops up.}).

\PWnote{2009/04/25}{Added the blockdescription, labelled and flexlabelled environments}

    This class provides the normal \Ie{description} list, plus a couple of others 
of the same kind, but the \Ie{itemize} 
and \Ie{enumerate} lists are extended versions of the normal ones.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{description} \cmd{\item}\oarg{label} ... \eenv{description} \\
\senv{blockdescription} \cmd{\item}\oarg{label} ... \eenv{blockdescription} \\
\cmd{\descriptionlabel}\meta{label} \\
\cmd{\blockdescriptionlabel}\meta{label} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(description)%
  {\senv{description}}%
  {A list of descriptions of \cs{item}s formatted as regular paragraphs.}
\glossary(blockdescription)%
  {\senv{blockdescription}}%
  {A list of descriptions of \cs{item}s formatted as indented block paragraphs.}
\glossary(item)%
  {\cs{item}\oarg{label}}%
  {Intoduces a new element in a list. The effect of \meta{label} depends
   on the particular list form.}
\glossary(descriptionlabel)%
  {\cs{descriptionlabel}\marg{label}}%
  {Specifies the format of the \meta{label} of an \cs{item} in a 
   \Pe{description} environment.}
\glossary(blockdescriptionlabel)%
  {\cs{blockdescriptionlabel}\marg{label}}%
  {Specifies the format of the \meta{label} of an \cs{item} in a 
   \Pe{blockdescription} environment.}
In a \Ie{description} list an \cs{item}'s \meta{label} is typeset by
\cmd{descriptionlabel}. The default definition is
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\hspace\labelsep
                                   \normalfont\bfseries #1}
\end{lcode}
which gives a bold label. To have, for example, a sans label instead, do
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\hspace\labelsep
                                     \normalfont\sffamily #1}
\end{lcode}

    The only noticeable difference between a \Ie{description} list and a 
\Ie{blockdescription} list is that the latter is set as indented block paragraphs;
invisibly, it also has its own \cmd{\blockdescriptionlabel}.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{labelled}\marg{name} \cmd{\item}\oarg{label} ... \eenv{labelled} \\
\senv{flexlabelled}\marg{name}\marg{labelwidth}\marg{labelsep}\marg{itemindent}\% \\
                   \marg{leftmargin}\marg{rightmargin} \\
\cmd{\item}\oarg{label} ... \eenv{flexlabelled} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(labelled)%
  {\senv{labelled}\marg{name}}%
  {A list of descriptions of \cs{item}s with the labels formatted according to \cs{name}}.
\glossary(flexlabelled)%
  {\senv{labelled}\marg{name}\marg{width}\marg{sep}\marg{indent}\marg{left}\marg{right}}%
  {A list of descriptions of \cs{item}s with the labels formatted according to \cs{name}
   and the overall layout specified by the other list length arguments.}

The \Ie{labelled} environment is like the \Ie{description} environment except that
you can specify the label format via the \meta{name} argument where \cs{name} is
the formatting macro. For example, if you wanted the item labels set in italics, then
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\itlabel}[1]{\hspace\labelsep \normalfont\itshape #1}
\begin{labelled}{itlabel}
\item[First] ...
...
\end{lcode}

    The \Ie{flexlabelled} environment adds additional controls to the \Ie{labelled} one.
The \meta{name} argument is the same as that for \Ie{labelled} and the remainder are
lengths that correspond to the dimensions shown in \fref{fig:listlay}. If you want
any of the dimensions to retain their current values, use \verb?*? instead of a length
as the value for that particular argument.

\begin{egsource}{eg:flexlabelled}
This example shows how the \texttt{flexlabelled} list can be used to
change the formatting of a description-like list.
\newcommand*{\sclabel}[1]{\normalfont\scshape #1}
\begin{flexlabelled}{sclabel}{0pt}{0.5em}{0.5em}{*}{\leftmargin}
\item[First] The labels should be typeset using smallcaps and the first
             paragraph should be set as block paragraph.

             Further paragraphs completing an \cs{item}'s descriptive text
             will be set with the normal paragraph indent.
\item[Second] The list should be indented from each margin like the
              \texttt{quote} and \texttt{quotation} environments.
\end{flexlabelled}
More major changes to a description-like list will probably involve writing 
the code for a new environment. 
\end{egsource}

\begin{egresult}[Smallcap quote style description list]{eg:flexlabelled}
This example shows how the \texttt{flexlabelled} list can be used to
change the formatting of a description-like list.
\newcommand*{\sclabel}[1]{\normalfont\scshape #1}
\begin{flexlabelled}{sclabel}{0pt}{0.5em}{0.5em}{*}{\leftmargin}
\item[First] The labels should be typeset using smallcaps and the first
             paragraph should be set as block paragraph.

             Further paragraphs completing an \cs{item}'s descriptive text
             will be set with the normal paragraph indent.
\item[Second] The list should be indented from each margin like the
              \texttt{quote} and \texttt{quotation} environments.
\end{flexlabelled}
More major changes to a description-like list will probably involve writing 
the code for a new environment. 
\end{egresult}



    The \Ie{itemize} and \Ie{enumerate} environments below are based on
the \Lpack{enumerate} package~\cite{ENUMERATE}.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{itemize}\oarg{marker} \cmd{\item} ... \eenv{itemize} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(itemize)%
  {\senv{itemize}\oarg{marker}}%
  {An unordered list of \cs{item}s. If given, the \meta{marker} overrides the
   default marker for the elements.}
The normal markers for \cmd{\item}s in an \Ie{itemize} list are: 
\begin{enumerate}
\item bullet (\textbullet \cmd{\textbullet}), 
\item bold en-dash ({\normalfont\bfseries \textendash} \cmd{\bfseries}\cmd{\textendash}),
\item centered asterisk (\textasteriskcentered \cmd{\textasteriskcentered}), and
\item centered dot (\textperiodcentered \cmd{\textperiodcentered}).
\end{enumerate}
The optional \meta{marker} argument can be used to specify the marker for the
list items in a particular list. If for some reason you wanted to use a 
pilcrow\index{pilcrow (\P)} symbol as the item marker for a particular list 
you could do
\begin{lcode}
\begin{itemize}[\P]
\item ...
...
\end{lcode}



\begin{syntax}
\senv{enumerate}\oarg{style} \cmd{\item} ... \eenv{enumerate} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(enumerate)%
  {\senv{enumerate}\oarg{style}}%
  {An ordered list of \cs{item}s. If \meta{style} is given it overrides the
   default scheme for indicating the item order.}
The normal markers for, say, the third item in an \Ie{enumerate} list are: 
3., c., iii., and C. The optional \meta{style} argument can be used to
specify the style used to typeset the item counter. An occurrence of
one of the special characters \texttt{A}, \texttt{a}, \texttt{I}, \texttt{i}
or \texttt{1} in \meta{style} specifies that the counter will be typeset using
uppercase letters (\texttt{A}), lowercase letters (\texttt{a}), 
uppercase Roman numerals (\texttt{I}), lowercase Roman numerals (\texttt{i}), 
or arabic numerals (\texttt{1}). These characters
may be surrounded by any LaTeX commands or characters, but if so the special
characters must be put inside braces (e.g., \verb?{a}?) if they are to be 
considered as ordinary characters instead of as special styling characters.
 For example, to have the
counter typeset as a lowercase Roman numeral followed by a single parenthesis
\begin{lcode}
\begin{enumerate}[i)] 
...
\end{lcode} 


\LMnote{2013/05/16}{Added hint about enumitem}
\begin{hint}
  \theclass\ does not provide high level interfaces to configure the
  appearance. We provide some simple tools to adjust vertical spacing,
  see below.

  Users seeking more control can have a look at the \Lpack{enumitem}
  package by Javier Bezos. If loaded as
  \begin{lcode}
    \usepackage[shortlabels]{enumitem}
  \end{lcode}
  then our
  \begin{lcode}
    \begin{enumerate}[i)] 
     \item \label{item:tst}  ...
  \end{lcode}
  syntax will work out of the box.

  One difference though: In \theclass\ \verb?\ref{item:tst}? will give you
  `i', whereas, if \Lpack{enumitem} is loaded the full formatting is
  returned from the cross reference, i.e., `i)'. This is fully
  configurable in \Lpack{enumitem}.
\end{hint}





\index{list!tight|(} %|


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\tightlists} \cmd{\defaultlists} \\
\cmd{\firmlists} \cmd{\firmlists*} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(tightlists)%
  {\cs{tightlists}}%
  {Declaration removing extra vertical space from \texttt{list}-based 
   environments.}
\glossary(defaultlists)%
  {\cs{defaultlists}}%
  {Declaration specifying the default vertical spacing \texttt{list}-based 
   environments.}
\glossary(firmlists)%
  {\cs{firmlists}}%
  {Declaration for some vertical spacing in \texttt{list}-based
   environments. There may be some extra space before and after the 
   environments.}
\glossary(firmlists*)%
  {\cs{firmlists*}}%
  {The same as \cs{firmlists} except that there is no space before and after
   the environments.}



The normal LaTeX \Ie{description}, \Ie{itemize} and \Ie{enumerate} lists 
have an open
look about them when they are typeset as there is significant vertical space
between the items in the lists. After the declaration \cmd{\tightlists} is
issued, the extra vertical spacing between the list items is deleted. The open
list appearance is used after the \cmd{\defaultlists} declaration is issued.
These declarations, if used, must come \emph{before} the relevant list 
environment(s). The class initially sets \cmd{\defaultlists}. This manual,
though, uses \cmd{\tightlists}. The spacing following the \cmd{\firmlists} 
declaration is intermediate between \cmd{\defaultlists} and \cmd{\tightlists}.
The starred version, \cmd{\firmlists*}, allows sligthly less space around 
the lists when they are preceded by a blank line than does the 
unstarred \cmd{\firmlists}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\firmlist} \cmd{\tightlist} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(firmlist)
  {\cs{firmlist}}%
  {In a standard list, sets the vertical spacing intermediate between
  the default and \cs{tightlist}(s).}
\glossary(tightlist)
  {\cs{tightlist}}%
  {In a standard list, removes extra vertical spacing.}
The command \cmd{\firmlist} or \cmd{\tightlist} can be used immediately
after the start of a list environment to reduce the vertical space within
that list. The \cmd{\tightlist} removes all the spaces while the
\cmd{\firmlist} produces a list that still has some space but not as much
as in an ordinary list.

\index{list!tight|)} %|


\begin{figure}
\centering
\drawparameterstrue
\drawlist
\caption{The layout parameters for general lists}\label{fig:listlay}
\end{figure}

\index{list!new|(} %|

\begin{syntax}
\senv{list}\marg{default-label}\marg{code} items \eenv{list} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(list)%
  {\senv{list}\marg{default-label}\marg{code}}%
  {The general \Pe{list} environment. \meta{default-label} is code that is
   used for an \cs{item} with no \meta{label} and \meta{code} is used to
   specify the list layout parameters.}
\ltx's list environments are defined in terms of a general \Ie{list}
environment; some other environments, such as the \Ie{quote}, \Ie{quotation}
and \Ie{adjustwidth} are also defined in terms of a \Ie{list}.
Figure~\ref{fig:listlay} shows the parameters controlling the layout
of the \Ie{list} environment.

    The \Ie{list} environment takes two arguments. The \meta{default-label}
argument is the code that should be used when the \cmd{\item} macro is
used without its optional \meta{label} argument. For lists like \Ie{enumerate}
this is specified but often it is left empty, such as for the \Ie{adjustwidth}
environment.

    The \meta{code} argument is typically used for setting the particular
values of the list layout parameters. When defining your own types of lists
it is advisable to set each of the parameters unless you know that the default
values are suitable for your purposes. These parameters can all be modified
with either the \cmd{\setlength} or \cmd{\addtolength} commands.

    As an example, here is the specification for a description-like list
that uses an italic rather than bold font for the items, and is somewhat
tighter than the normal \Ie{description} list.

\begin{lcode}
%%%%% An italic and tighter description environment
\newcommand{\itlabel}[1]{\hspace\labelsep\normalfont\itshape #1}
\newenvironment{itdesc}{%
  \list{}{%
    \setlength{\labelsep}{0.5em}
    \setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}
    \setlength{\leftmargin}{\parindent} 
    \setlength{\labelwidth}{\leftmargin}
    \addtolength{\labelwidth}{-\labelsep}
    \setlength{\listparindent}{\parindent}
    \setlength{\parsep}{\parskip}
    \setlength{\itemsep}{0.5\onelineskip}
    \let\makelabel\itlabel}}{\endlist}
\end{lcode}

    This gets used like any other list:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{itdesc}
\item[label] ....
\end{itdesc}
\end{lcode}

Here is another kind of list called \Ie{symbols} that might be used
for a list of symbols or other similar kind of listing.
\begin{lcode}
% Symbol list
\newenvironment{symbols}%
               {\list{}% empty label
                            {\setlength{\topsep}{\baselineskip}
                             \setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}
                             \setlength{\itemsep}{0.5\baselineskip}
                             \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}
                             \setlength{\leftmargin}{2em}
                             \setlength{\rightmargin}{0em}
                             \setlength{\listparindent}{1em}
                             \setlength{\itemindent}{0em}
                             \setlength{\labelwidth}{0em}
                             \setlength{\labelsep}{2em}}}%
               {\endlist}
\newcommand{\symb}[1]{\item[#1]\mbox{}\\\nopagebreak}
\end{lcode}
In this case it gets used like this
\begin{lcode}
\begin{symbols}
\symb{SYMBOL 1} definition
\symb{SYMBOL 2} ...
\end{symbols}
\end{lcode}

    In the code for the \Pe{symbols} list I used the command forms (i.e.,
\cmd{\list} and \cmd{\endlist}) for specifying the start and end of a list.
It is a matter of taste whether you use the command or \verb?\begin{...}?
and \verb?\end{...}? forms, but the latter does make it more obvious that
an environment is being dealt with.

\index{list!new|)} %|

    Several \ltx\ environments are defined in terms of a very simple list,
called a \Ie{trivlist}. Such a list has little internal structure
but like the \Ie{list} environment the vertical space before and after
a \Ie{trivlist} (or any list based on it) is set by \lnc{\topsep} and
\lnc{\partopsep}, as shown in \fref{fig:listlay}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\zerotrivseps} \cmd{\savetrivseps} \cmd{\restoretrivseps} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(zerotrivseps)%
  {\cs{zerotrivseps}}%
  {Eliminate space before and after a \Pe{trivlist}.}
\glossary(savetrivseps)%
  {\cs{savetrivseps}}%
  {Stores the current \cs{topsep} and \cs{partopsep} for \Pe{trivlist}s.}
\glossary(restoretrivseps)%
  {\cs{restoretrivseps}}%
  {Sets the current \cs{topsep} and \cs{partopsep} to the values saved
   by \cs{savetrivseps}.}
The \Ie{center} environment is one of several that is based on
a \Ie{trivlist}, and so has space before and after it. If you don't want this
the \cmd{\zerotrivseps} declaration eliminates those spaces. You can
think of it as being defined as:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\zerotrivseps}{%
  \setlength{\topsep}{0pt}%
  \setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}}
\end{lcode}
Before doing this, though, you might consider calling \cmd{\savetrivseps} 
which stores the current values of \lnc{\topsep} and \lnc{\partopsep};
it is initially defined to store the default values.
The command \cmd{\restoretrivseps} sets the current values of these
lengths to the ones saved by \cmd{\savetrivseps}.

\begin{egresult}[Changing space before and after lists]{eg:trivseps}
\restoretrivseps%% need this because egresult env reduces the trivseps
This example shows that the space around the \topsep=0.5\onelineskip
\begin{center}
CENTER AND OTHER LIST ENVIRONMENTS
\end{center}
can be minimised by using the \zerotrivseps
\begin{center}
\verb?\zerotrivseps? declaration.
\end{center}
The normal spacing can be restored by using the \restoretrivseps \topsep=0.5\onelineskip
\begin{center}
\verb?\restoretrivseps? command.
\end{center}
An alternative is to use the \verb?\centering? macro.
\end{egresult}


\begin{egsource}{eg:trivseps}
This example shows that the space around the
\begin{center}
CENTER AND OTHER LIST ENVIRONMENTS
\end{center}
can be minimised by using the \zerotrivseps
\begin{center}
\verb?\zerotrivseps? declaration.
\end{center}
The normal spacing can be restored by using the \restoretrivseps
\begin{center}
\verb?\restoretrivseps? command.
\end{center}
An alternative is to use the \verb?\centering? macro.
\end{egsource}

%%%%\enlargethispage{\onelineskip}
Among the environments defined in terms of a \Ie{trivlist} are:
\Ie{flushleft},
\Ie{center},
\Ie{flushright},
\Ie{verbatim}, and others.
The example (\ref{eg:trivseps}) shows how it is possible to change the
spacing around the \Ie{center} environment, but it applies equally to the 
other environments.

\index{list|)} %|

%#% extend

%#% extstart include content-lists.tex

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-05-08 17:14:46 +0200 (Wed, 08 May 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 457 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%\chapterstyle{section}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%\chapter{Tops and tails} \label{chap:topsandtails}
\chapter{Contents lists} \label{chap:toc}

This chapter describes how to change the appearance of the Table of Contents
(\toc) and similar lists like the List of Figures (\lof). In the standard
classes the typographic design of these is virtually fixed as it is buried
within the class definitions.

    As well as allowing these lists to appear multiple times in a
documant, the \Mname\ class gives handles to easily manipulate the design 
elements. The class also provides means for you to define your own new kinds of
`\listofx'. 

    The functionality described is equivalent to the combination
of the \Lpack{tocloft} and \Lpack{tocbibind} 
packages~\cite{TOCLOFT,TOCBIBIND}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\tableofcontents} \cmd{\tableofcontents*} \\
\cmd{\listoffigures} \cmd{\listoffigures*} \\
\cmd{\listoftables} \cmd{\listoftables*} \\
\end{syntax}
The commands \cmd{\tableofcontents}, \cmd{\listoffigures} and 
\cmd{\listoftables} typeset, repectively, the Table of Contents (\toc),
List of Figures (\lof) and List of Tables (\lot). In \Mname, unlike the 
standard classes, the unstarred versions add their respective titles to 
the \toc. The starred versions act like the standard classes' unstarred 
versions as they don't add their titles to the \toc.

    This chapter explains the inner workings behind the \toc\ and friends,
how to change their appearance and the apperance of the entries, and how to
create new \listofx. If you don't need any of these then you can
skip the remainder of the chapter.

 \section{General \prtoc\ methods}

 In \S\ref{sec:class-prtoc-methods} we will provide the class
 configuration interface for the various parts of the ToC. 

 In order to understand how these macros are used, we start by
 providing some background information this is a general description
 of how the standard \ltx\ classes process a Table of Contents (\toc).
 As the processing of List of Figures (\lof) and List of Tables (\lot)
 is similar I will just discuss the \toc. You may wish to skip this
 section on your first reading.

    The basic process is that each sectioning command writes out information
about itself --- its number, title, and page --- to the \pixfile{toc} file.
The \cmd{\tableofcontents} command reads this file and typesets the contents.

    First of all, remember that each sectional division has an associated
level as listed in in \tref{tab:seclevels} on 
\pref{tab:seclevels}. \ltx\ will not typeset an entry in the \toc{}
unless the value of the \Icn{tocdepth} counter is equal to or greater
than the level of the entry. The value of the \Icn{tocdepth} counter
can be changed by using \cmd{\setcounter} or \cmd{\settocdepth}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\addcontentsline}\marg{file}\marg{kind}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(addcontentsline)%
  {\cs{addcontentsline}\marg{file}\marg{kind}\marg{text}}%
  {Writes heading/caption data to the \meta{file} in the form of
   the \cs{contentsline} macro.}
    \ltx\ generates a \pixfile{toc} file if the document contains a
 \cmd{\tableofcontents} command. The sectioning 
 commands\footnote{For figures and tables it is the 
 \cmd{\caption} command
 that populates the \pixfile{lof} and \pixfile{lot} files.}
 put entries into the \pixfile{toc} file by calling the 
 \cmd{\addcontentsline} 
 command, where \meta{file} is the file extension (e.g., \texttt{toc}),
 \meta{kind} is the kind of entry (e.g., \texttt{section} or \texttt{subsection}),
 and \meta{text} is the (numbered) title text. In the cases where
 there is a number, the \meta{text} argument is given in the
 form \verb?{\numberline{number}title text}?.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\contentsline}\marg{kind}\marg{text}\marg{page} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(contentsline)%
  {\cs{contentsline}\marg{kind}\marg{text}\marg{page}}%
  {An entry in a `\listofx' file for a \meta{kind} entry, with
  \meta{text} being the title which was on \meta{page}.}
     The \cmd{\addcontentsline} command writes an entry to the given file
 in the form: \\
 \cmd{\contentsline}\marg{kind}\marg{text}\marg{page} \\
 where \meta{page} is the page number.

    For example, if \verb?\section{Head text}? was typeset as 
`\textbf{3.4 Head text}' on page 27, then there would be the following
entry in the \pixfile{toc} file:
\begin{lcode}
\contentsline{section}{\numberline{3.4} Head text}{27}
\end{lcode}
Extracts from \pixfile{toc}, \pixfile{lof} and \pixfile{lot} files are shown in
\fref{fig:tocloflotfiles}.

\begin{figure}
\centering
Parts of a \file{toc} file:
\begin{lcode}
...
\contentsline{section}{\numberline{10.1}The spread}{77}
\contentsline{section}{\numberline{10.2}Typeblock}{89}
\contentsline{subsection}{\numberline{10.2.1}Color}{77}
...
\contentsline{chapter}{Index}{226}

\end{lcode}

Part of a \file{lof} file:

\begin{lcode}
...
\contentsline{figure}{\numberline{8.6}Measuring scales}{56}
\addvspace{10pt}
\addvspace{10pt}
\contentsline{figure}{\numberline{10.1}Two subfigures}{62}
\contentsline{subfigure}{\numberline{(a)}Subfigure 1}{62}
\contentsline{subfigure}{\numberline{(b)}Subfigure 2}{62}
...
\end{lcode}

Part of a \file{lot} file:

\begin{lcode}
...
\contentsline{table}{\numberline{1.7}Font declarations}{11}
\contentsline{table}{\numberline{1.8}Font sizes}{13}
\addvspace
\contentsline{table}{\numberline{3.1}Division levels}{21}
...
\end{lcode}
\caption{Example extracts from \file{toc}, \file{lof} and \file{lot} files}
\label{fig:tocloflotfiles}
\end{figure}

     For each \meta{kind} that might appear in a \file{toc} 
(\file{lof}, \file{lot}) file, \ltx\ provides a command: \\
 \cmd{\l@kind}\marg{title}\marg{page} \\
which performs the actual typesetting of the \cmd{\contentsline} entry. 


\begin{figure}
\setlayoutscale{0.8}
\drawtoc
\caption{Layout of a \prtoc{} (\prlof, \prlot) entry} \label{fig:ltoc}
\end{figure}

 
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\@pnumwidth}\marg{length} \\
\cmd{\@tocrmarg}\marg{length} \\
\cmd{\@dotsep}\marg{number} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(@pnumwidth)%
  {\cs{@pnumwidth}\marg{length}}%
  {Space for a page number in the \prtoc\ etc.}
\glossary(@tocrmarg)%
  {\cs{@tocrmarg}\marg{length}}%
  {Right hand margin for titles in the \prtoc\ etc.}
\glossary(@dotsep)%
  {\cs{@docsep}\marg{num}}%
  {Distance, as \meta{num} math units, bewteen dots in the dotted lines 
   in the \prtoc\ etc.}
The general layout of a typeset entry is illustrated in \fref{fig:ltoc}. 
There are three
internal \ltx\ commands that are used in the typesetting. The page
number is typeset flushright in a box of width \cmd{\@pnumwidth}, and the box
is at the righthand margin\index{margin!right}. If the page number is too long 
to fit into  the box it will stick out into the righthand 
margin\index{margin!right}.
The title text is indented from the righthand margin\index{margin!right} by an 
amount given by \cmd{\@tocrmarg}.
Note that \cmd{\@tocrmarg} should be greater than \cmd{\@pnumwidth}. Some
entries are typeset with a dotted leader between the end of the title
title text and the righthand margin\index{margin!right} indentation. 
The distance, in
\index{math unit}\emph{math units}\footnote{There are 18mu to 1em.} 
between the dots in the leader is given by the value of \cmd{\@dotsep}. 
In the standard classes the same values are used for the \toc, \lof{} and 
the \lot.

    The standard values for these internal commands are:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item \cmd{\@pnumwidth} = 1.55em
 \item \cmd{\@tocrmarg} = 2.55em 
 \item \cmd{\@dotsep} = 4.5
 \end{itemize}
 The values can be changed by using \cmd{\renewcommand}, in spite of the
 fact that the first two appear to be lengths.

    Dotted leaders are not available for Part\index{part} and 
Chapter\index{chapter} \toc{} entries.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\numberline}\marg{number} \\
\end{syntax}
    Each \cmd{\l@kind} macro is responsible for setting the general 
 \textit{indent} from the lefthand margin\index{margin!left}, and the 
\textit{numwidth}.
The \cmd{\numberline} macro is responsible for typesetting the number 
flushleft in a box of width \textit{numwidth}. If the number is too long 
for the box then it will protrude into the title text. The title text is 
indented by (\textit{indent + numwidth}) from the lefthand 
margin\index{margin!left}. That is, the title text is typeset in a 
block of width \\
(\lnc{\linewidth} - \textit{indent} - \textit{numwidth} - \cmd{\@tocrmarg}). 

 \begin{table}
 \centering
 \caption[Indents and Numwidths]{Indents and Numwidths (in ems)} \label{tab:indents}
 \begin{tabular}{lcrrrr} \toprule
 Entry & Level & \multicolumn{2}{c}{Standard} & \multicolumn{2}{c}{\Lclass{memoir} class} \\
       &       & indent & numwidth & indent & numwidth \\ \midrule
 book          & -2 & ---  & --- & 0    & --- \\
 part          & -1 & 0    & --- & 0    & 1.5 \\
 chapter       & 0  & 0    & 1.5 & 0    & 1.5 \\
 section       & 1  & 1.5  & 2.3 & 1.5  & 2.3 \\
 subsection    & 2  & 3.8  & 3.2 & 3.8  & 3.2 \\
 subsubsection & 3  & 7.0  & 4.1 & 7.0  & 4.1 \\
 paragraph     & 4  & 10.0 & 5.0 & 10.0 & 5.0 \\
 subparagraph  & 5  & 12.0 & 6.0 & 12.0 & 6.0 \\
 figure/table  & (1) & 1.5 & 2.3 & 0    & 1.5 \\ 
 subfigure/table & (2) & ---& ---& 1.5  & 2.3 \\ 
\bottomrule
 \end{tabular}
 \end{table}

 Table~\ref{tab:indents} lists the standard values for the \textit{indent}
and \textit{numwidth}. There is no explicit \textit{numwidth} for a
part\index{part}; instead a gap of 1em is put between the number and the 
title text. 
Note that for a sectioning command the values
depend on whether or not the document class provides the \cmd{\chapter}
command; the listed values are for the \Lclass{book} and \Lclass{report} 
classes --- in the \Lclass{article} class a \cmd{\section} is treated
like a \cmd{\chapter}, and so on. Also, which somewhat surprises me, the 
table\index{table} and figure\index{figure} entries are all indented.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\@dottedtocline}\marg{level}\marg{indent}\marg{numwidth} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(@dottedtocline)%
  {\cs{@dottedtocline}\marg{level}\marg{indent}\marg{numwidth}}%
  {For a \prtoc, (\prlof, \prlot) entry at \meta{level} specifies the
   \meta{indent} and \meta{numwidth} and draws a dotted line between
   the title and page number.}
    Most of the \verb?\l@kind? commands are defined in terms of the
 \cmd{\@dottedtocline} command. This command takes three arguments: 
the \meta{level} argument is the level as shown in \tref{tab:indents},
and \meta{indent} and \meta{numwidth} are the \textit{indent} and 
\textit{numwidth} as illustrated in \fref{fig:ltoc}.
 For example, one definition of the \cmd{\l@section} command is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\l@section}{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
\end{lcode}
If it is necessary to change the default typesetting of the entries,
then it is usually necessary to change these definitions, but \Mname\ 
gives you handles to easily alter things without having to know the \ltx\
internals.

    You can use the \cmd{\addcontentsline} command to add 
\cmd{\contentsline} commands to a file. 
\index{add to contents}\index{insert in contents}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\addtocontents}\marg{file}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(addtocontents)%
  {\cs{addtocontents}\marg{file}\marg{text}}%
  {Inserts \meta{text} into \meta{file} (\prtoc, etc).}
    \ltx\ also provides the \cmd{\addtocontents}
 command that will insert \meta{text} into \meta{file}. You can use
 this for adding extra text and/or macros into the file, for processing
 when the file is typeset by \cmd{\tableofcontents} (or whatever other
 command is used for \meta{file} processing, such as \cmd{\listoftables}
 for a \file{lot} file).

 As \cmd{\addcontentsline} and \cmd{\addtocontents} write their arguments to a
 file, any fragile commands used in their arguments must be \cmd{\protect}ed.
 
    You can make certain adjustments to the \toc, etc., layout by modifying
some of the above macros. Some examples are:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item If your page numbers stick out into the righthand margin\index{margin!right}
  \begin{lcode}
  \renewcommand{\@pnumwidth}{3em} 
  \renewcommand{\@tocrmarg}{4em}
  \end{lcode}
 but using lengths appropriate to your document.

 \item To have the (sectional) titles in the \toc, etc., typeset ragged 
right with no  hyphenation
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand{\@tocrmarg}{2.55em plus1fil}
 \end{lcode}
 where the value \texttt{2.55em} can be changed for whatever 
margin\index{margin} space you want.

 \item The dots in the leaders can be eliminated by increasing \cmd{\@dotsep}
 to a large value:
  \begin{lcode}
  \renewcommand{\@dotsep}{10000}
  \end{lcode}

 \item To have dotted leaders in your \toc\ and \lof\ but not in your \lot:
 \begin{lcode}
 ...
 \tableofcontents
 \makeatletter \renewcommand{\@dotsep}{10000} \makeatother
 \listoftables
 \makeatletter \renewcommand{\@dotsep}{4.5} \makeatother
 \listoffigures
 ...
 \end{lcode}

 \item To add a horizontal line across the whole width of the \toc\ below 
 an entry for a Part\index{part}:
 \begin{lcode}
 \part{Part title}
 \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\mbox{}\protect\hrulefill\par}
 \end{lcode}
 As  said earlier any fragile commands in the arguments to 
\cmd{\addtocontents} and \cmd{\addcontentsline} must be protected
 by preceding each fragile command with \cmd{\protect}. 
 The result of the example above
 would be the following two lines in the \file{.toc} file (assuming that it
 is the second Part and is on page 34):
 \begin{lcode}
 \contentsline {part}{II\hspace {1em}Part title}{34}
 \mbox {}\hrulefill \par
 \end{lcode}
 If the \cmd{\protect}s were not used, then the second line would 
instead be:
 \begin{lcode}
 \unhbox \voidb@x \hbox {}\unhbox \voidb@x \leaders \hrule \hfill 
         \kern \z@ \par
 \end{lcode}
which would cause \ltx\ to stop and complain because of the commands
that included the \texttt{@}\idxatincode\ (\seeatincode).
If you are modifying any command that includes an 
\texttt{@}\idxatincode\
sign then this must be done in either a \file{.sty} file or if in the 
document itself it must be surrounded by \cmd{\makeatletter} and 
\cmd{\makeatother}. For example, if you
 want to modify \cmd{\@dotsep} in the preamble\index{preamble} to your 
document you have to do it like this:
 \begin{lcode}
 \makeatletter
 \renewcommand{\@dotsep}{9.0}
 \makeatother
 \end{lcode}

\item To change the level of entries printed in the \toc\ (for example
      when normally subsections are listed in the \toc\ but for
      appendices\index{appendix} only the main title is required)
  \begin{lcode}
  \appendix
  \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{0}}
  \chapter{First appendix}
  ...
  \end{lcode}

 \end{itemize}
 
 \section{The class \prtoc{} methods} 
 \label{sec:class-prtoc-methods}

  The class provides various means of changing the look of the \toc, etc.,
without having to go through some of the above. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\tableofcontents} \cmd{\tableofcontents*} \\
\cmd{\listoffigures} \cmd{\listoffigures*} \\
\cmd{\listoftables} \cmd{\listoftables*} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(tableofcontents)%
  {\cs{tableofcontents}}%
  {Typeset the \prtoc, adding its title to the \prtoc\ itself.}
\glossary(tableofcontents*)%
  {\cs{tableofcontents*}}%
  {Typeset the \prtoc.}
\glossary(listoffigures)%
  {\cs{listoffigures}}%
  {Typeset the \prlof, adding its title to the \prtoc.}
\glossary(listoffigures*)%
  {\cs{listoffigures*}}%
  {Typeset the \prlof.}
\glossary(listoftables)%
  {\cs{listoftables}}%
  {Typeset the \prlot, adding its title to the \prtoc.}
\glossary(listoftables*)%
  {\cs{listoftables*}}%
  {Typeset the \prlot.}
 The \toc, \lof, and \lot\ are printed at the point in the document where
 these commands are called, as per normal \ltx.
    You can use \cmd{\tableofcontents}, \cmd{\listoffigures}, etc., more
than once in a \Lclass{memoir} class document.


However, there are
 two differences between the standard \ltx\ behaviour and the behaviour
 with this class. In the standard \ltx\ classes
 that have \cmd{\chapter} headings\index{heading}, the \toc, \lof\ and \lot\ 
each appear on a new page. With this class they do not necessarily
 start new pages; if you want them to be on new pages you may have to
 specifically issue an appropriate command beforehand. For example:
 \begin{lcode}
  ...
 \clearpage
 \tableofcontents
 \clearpage
 \listoftables
 ...
 \end{lcode}
Also, the unstarred versions of the commands put their headings\index{heading} 
into the \toc, while the starred versions do not.

% \PWnote{2009/08/09}{Added description of KeepFromToc}
\begin{syntax}
\senv{KeepFromToc} \cs{listof...} \eenv{KeepFromToc} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(KeepFromToc)%
  {\senv{KeepFromToc}}%
  {Stop the titles of the enclosed \cs{listof...} commands from
   being added to the ToC.}

There is at least one package that uses \cs{tableofcontents} for its
own \listofx. When used with the class this will put the package's 
\listofx\ 
title into the \toc, and the package doesn't seem to know about 
\cs{tableofcontents*}.
The heading of any \cs{listof...} command that is in the \Ie{KeepFromToc} 
environment will not be added to the \toc. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{KeepFromToc}
\listoffigures
\end{KeepFromToc}
\end{lcode}
is equivalent to \cs{listoffigures*}.


\PWnote{2009/03/17}{Added \cs{(one|two|doc)coltocetc} descriptions.}
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\onecoltocetc} \\
\cmd{\twocoltocetc} \\
\cmd{\doccoltocetc} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(onecoltocetc)%
  {\cs{onecoltocetc}}%
  {Set the ToC, etc., in one column.}
\glossary(twocoltocetc)%
  {\cs{twocoltocetc}}%
  {Set the ToC, etc., in two columns.}
\glossary(doccoltocetc)%
  {\cs{doccoltocetc}}%
  {Set the ToC, etc., in one or two columns according to the class option.}


In the standard classes the \toc, etc., are set in one column even if the
document as a whole is set in two columns. This limitation is removed.
Following the \cmd{\onecoltocetc} declaration, which is the default, the
\toc\ and friends will be set in one column but after the \cmd{\twocoltocetc}
declaration they will be set in two columns. Following the \cmd{\doccoltocetc}
declaration they will be set in either one or two columns to match the 
document class \Lopt{onecolumn} or \Lopt{twocolumn} option. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\maxtocdepth}\marg{secname} \\
\cmd{\settocdepth}\marg{secname} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(maxtocdepth)%
  {\cs{maxtocdepth}\marg{secname}}%
  {Sets the maximum value of the \Pcn{tocdepth} counter.}
\glossary(settocdepth)%
  {\cs{settocdepth}\marg{secname}}%
  {Sets the value of the \Pcn{tocdepth} counter in the \file{toc} file.}
% The class \cmd{\maxtocdepth} command sets the maximum 
% allowable value
% for the \Icn{tocdepth} counter. If used, the command must appear
% before the \cmd{\tableofcontents} command. By default, the class
% sets \verb?\maxtocdepth{section}?.
\LMnote{2013/04/24}{As far as I can see \cs{maxtocdepth} is not used
  anywhere. Manual clarified, see http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/97018/3929}
The class \cmd{\maxtocdepth} command sets the \Icn{tocdepth}
counter. It is currently not used in the \Lclass{memoir} class.


The \Lclass{memoir} class command \cmd{\settocdepth} is somewhat
analagous to the \cmd{\setsecnumdepth} command described in
\S\ref{sec:secnumbers}.  It sets the value of the \Icn{tocdepth}
counter and puts it into the \toc{} to (temporarily) modify what will
appear.  The \cmd{\settocdepth} and \cmd{\maxtocdepth} macros are from
the \Lpack{tocvsec2} package~\cite{TOCVSEC2}.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\phantomsection} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(phantomsection)
  {\cs{phantomsection}}%
  {A macro to be put before \cs{addcontentsline} when the \Ppack{hyperref} 
   package is used.}
\Note{} The \Lpack{hyperref} package~\cite{HYPERREF} appears to dislike 
authors using 
 \cmd{\addcontentsline}. To get it to work properly with \Lpack{hyperref}
 you normally have to put \cmd{\phantomsection} (a macro defined within
this class and the \Lpack{hyperref} package) immediately 
 before \cmd{\addcontentsline}.

 \subsection{Changing the titles} \label{sec:titles}

    Commands are provided for controlling the appearance of the
\toc, \lof\ and \lot\ titles. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\contentsname} \cmd{\listfigurename} \cmd{\listtablename} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(contentsname)%
  {\cs{contentsname}}%
  {The title for the Table of Contents.}
\glossary(listfigurename)%
  {\cs{listfigurename}}%
  {The title for the List of Figures.}
\glossary(listtablename)%
  {\cs{listtablename}}%
  {The title for the List of Tables.}
Following \ltx\ custom, the title texts are the values
of the \cmd{\contentsname}, \cmd{\listfigurename} and \cmd{\listtablename}
commands.

 The commands for controlling the typesetting of the \toc, \lof\ and \lot\ 
titles all follow a similar pattern, so for convenience (certainly mine, 
and hopefully yours) in the following descriptions I will use \texttt{X},
as listed in \tref{tab:Xlistofxtitles},
to stand for the file extension for the appropriate \listofx. That is, any
of the following:
\begin{itemize}
\item \texttt{toc} or
\item \texttt{lof} or
\item \texttt{lot}. 
\end{itemize}
For example, \verb?\Xmark? stands for \cmd{\tocmark} or \cmd{\lofmark} or 
\cmd{\lotmark}.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Values for \texttt{X} in macros for styling the titles of \listofx}
\label{tab:Xlistofxtitles}
\begin{tabular}{cccc}\toprule
\texttt{toc} & \texttt{lof} & \texttt{lot} & \texttt{\ldots} \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

    The code for typesetting the \toc\ title looks like:
\begin{lcode}
\tocheadstart
\printtoctitle{\contentsname}
\tocmark
\thispagestyle{chapter}
\aftertoctitle
\end{lcode}
where the macros are described below.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\Xheadstart} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(Xheadstart)%
  {\cs{Xheadstart}}%
  {Generic macro called before printing a 'X List of' title.}
\begin{comment}
\glossary(tocheadstart)%
  {\cs{tocheadstart}}%
  {Called before printing the \prtoc\ title.}
\glossary(lofheadstart)%
  {\cs{lofheadstart}}%
  {Called before printing the \prlof\ title.}
\glossary(lotheadstart)%
  {\cs{lotheadstart}}%
  {Called before printing the \prlot\ title.}
\end{comment}
This macro is called before the title is actually printed.
Its default definition is
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\Xheadstart}{\chapterheadstart}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\printXtitle}\marg{title} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(printXtitle)%
  {\cs{printXtitle}\marg{title}}%
  {Generic macro printing \meta{title} as the title for the `X List of'.}
\begin{comment}
\glossary(printtoctitle)%
  {\cs{printtoctitle}\marg{title}}%
  {Prints \meta{title} as the title for the \prtoc.}
\glossary(printloftitle)%
  {\cs{printloftitle}\marg{title}}%
  {Prints \meta{title} as the title for the \prlof.}
\glossary(printlottitle)%
  {\cs{printlottitle}\marg{title}}%
  {Prints \meta{title} as the title for the \prlot.}
\end{comment}
The title is typeset via \cmd{\printXtitle}, which defaults to
using \cmd{\printchaptertitle} for the actual typesetting. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\Xmark} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(Xmark)%
  {\cs{Xmark}}%
  {Generic macro setting the marks for the 'X List of'.}
\begin{comment}
\glossary(tocmark)%
  {\cs{tocmark}}%
  {Macro setting the marks for the \prtoc.}
\glossary(lofmark)%
  {\cs{lofmark}}%
  {Macro setting the marks for the \prlof.}
\glossary(lotmark)%
  {\cs{lotmark}}%
  {Macro setting the marks for the \prlot.}
\end{comment}
 These macros sets the marks for use by the running heads on the \toc, \lof, and
 \lot\ pages. The default definition is equivalent to:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\Xmark}{\markboth{\...name}{\...name}}
\end{lcode}
where \verb?\...name? is \cmd{\contentsname} or \cmd{\listfigurename} or
\cmd{\listtablename} as appropriate. You probably don't need to change these, and
in any case they may well be changed by the particular \cmd{\pagestyle} in
use.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\afterXtitle} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(afterXtitle)%
  {\cs{afterXtitle}}%
  {Generic macro called after typesetting the title of the `X List of'.}
\begin{comment}
\glossary(aftertoctitle)%
  {\cs{aftertoctitle}}%
  {Macro called after typesetting the title of the \prtoc.}
\glossary(afterloftitle)%
  {\cs{afterloftitle}}%
  {Macro called after typesetting the title of the \prlof.}
\glossary(afterlottitle)%
  {\cs{afterlottitle}}%
  {Macro called after typesetting the title of the \prlot.}
\end{comment}
 This macro is called after the title is typeset and by
default it is defined to be \cmd{\afterchaptertitle}.

    Essentially, the \toc, \lof\ and \lot\ titles use the same format
as the chapter titles, and will be typeset according to the current
chapterstyle. You can modify their appearance by either using a
different chapterstyle for them than for the actual chapters, or
by changing some of the macros. As examples:
\begin{itemize}
\item Doing
      \begin{lcode}
      \renewcommand{\printXtitle}[1]{\hfill\Large\itshape #1}
      \end{lcode}
      will print the title right justified in a Large italic font.
\item For a Large bold centered title you can do
      \begin{lcode}
      \renewcommand{\printXtitle}[1]{\centering\Large\bfseries #1}
      \end{lcode}
\item Writing
      \begin{lcode}
      \renewcommand{\afterXtitle}{%
                        \thispagestyle{empty}\afterchaptertitle}
      \end{lcode}
      will result in the first page of the listing using the \pstyle{empty}
      pagestyle instead of the default \pstyle{chapter} pagestyle.
\item Doing
      \begin{lcode}
      \renewcommand{\afterXtitle}{%
        \par\nobreak \mbox{}\hfill{\normalfont Page}\par\nobreak}
      \end{lcode}
      will put the word `Page' flushright on the line following
      the title.
\end{itemize}


 \subsection{Typesetting the entries} \label{sec:entries}

 Commands are also provided to enable finer control over the typesetting
 of the different kinds of entries. The parameters defining the default
 layout of the entries are illustrated as part of the \Lpack{layouts}
 package~\cite{LAYOUTS} or in~\cite[p. 51]{COMPANION}, and are repeated in
 \fref{fig:ltoc}.

    Most of the commands in this section start as \cs{cft...}, where
\texttt{cft} is intended as a mnemonic for \textit{Table of \textbf{C}ontents, 
List of \textbf{F}igures, List of \textbf{T}ables}.

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\cftdot} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cftdot)%
  {\cs{cftdot}}%
 {The `dot' in the dotted leaders in \listofx.}
  In the default \toc{} typesetting only the more minor entries have dotted
 leader lines between the sectioning title and the page number. The
 class provides for general leaders for all entries.
 The `dot' in a leader is given by the value of \cmd{\cftdot}. Its default
 definition is \verb?\newcommand{\cftdot}{.}? which gives the default
 dotted leader. By changing \cmd{\cftdot} you can use symbols other than
 a period in the leader. For example 
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand{\cftdot}{\ensuremath{\ast}}
 \end{lcode}
 will result in a dotted leader using asterisks as the symbol.

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\cftdotsep} \\
 \cmd{\cftnodots} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cftdotsep)%
  {\cs{cftdotsep}}%
  {The separation between dots in a dotted leader in a \listofx.}
\glossary(cftnodots)%
  {\cs{cftnodots}}%
  {A separation between dots in a dotted leader in a \listofx\
   that is too large for any dots to occur.}
    Each kind of entry can control the separation between the dots
 in its leader (see below). For consistency though, all dotted leaders
 should use the same spacing. The macro \cmd{\cftdotsep} specifies the
 default spacing. 
 However, if the separation is too large
 then no dots will be actually typeset. The macro \cmd{\cftnodots} is
 a separation value that is `too large'. 

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\setpnumwidth}\marg{length} \\
 \cmd{\setrmarg}\marg{length} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setpnumwidth)%
  {\cs{setpnumwidth}\marg{length}}%
  {Sets the width of the page number box (\cs{@pnumwidth}) in a \listofx\ to 
   \meta{length}.}
\glossary(setrmarg)%
  {\cs{setrmarg}\marg{length}}%
  {Sets the right hand title margin (\cs{@tocrmarg}) in a \listofx\ to
   \meta{length}.}
 The page numbers are typeset in a fixed width box. The command
 \cmd{\setpnumwidth} can be used to change the width
 of the box (LaTeX 's internal \cmd{\@pnumwidth}). 
 The title texts will end before reaching the righthand 
margin\index{margin!right}.
 \cmd{\setrmarg} can be used to set this distance 
 (LaTeX 's internal \cmd{\@tocrmarg}).
 Note that the length used in \cmd{\setrmarg} should be greater
 than the length set in \cmd{\setpnumwidth}. These values should remain
 constant in any given document.

    This manual requires more space for the page numbers than the default,
so the following was set in the preamble\index{preamble}:
\begin{lcode}
\setpnumwidth{2.55em}
\setrmarg{3.55em}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\cftparskip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cftparskip)%
  {\cs{cftparskip}}%
  {The \cs{parskip} to be used in a \listofx.}
 Normally the \lnc{\parskip} in the \toc, etc., is zero. This may be changed
 by changing the length \lnc{\cftparskip}. Note that the current value
 of \lnc{\cftparskip} is used for the \toc, \lof\ and \lot, but you can change
 the value before calling \cmd{\tableofcontents} or \cmd{\listoffigures} or
 \cmd{\listoftables} if one or other of these should have different values
 (which is not a good idea).


    Again for convenience, in the following I will use \texttt{K} to stand 
for the \emph{kind} of entry, as listed in \tref{tab:Klistofxtitles}; that is, 
any of the following:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item \texttt{book} for \cmd{\book} titles.
 \item \texttt{part} for \cmd{\part} titles
 \item \texttt{chapter} for \cmd{\chapter} titles
 \item \texttt{section} for \cmd{\section} titles
 \item \texttt{subsection} for \cmd{\subsection} titles
 \item \texttt{subsubsection} for \cmd{\subsubsection} titles
 \item \texttt{paragraph} for \cmd{\paragraph} titles
 \item \texttt{subparagraph} for \cmd{\subparagraph} titles
 \item \texttt{figure} for figure \cmd{\caption} titles
 \item \texttt{subfigure} for subfigure \cmd{\caption} titles
 \item \texttt{table} for table \cmd{\caption} titles
 \item \texttt{subtable} for subtable \cmd{\caption} titles
 \end{itemize}

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Value of \texttt{K} in macros for styling entries in a \listofx}
\label{tab:Klistofxtitles}
\begin{tabular}{llcll} \toprule
\multicolumn{1}{c}{\texttt{K}} & \multicolumn{1}{c}{Kind of entry} & & 
\multicolumn{1}{c}{\texttt{K}} & \multicolumn{1}{c}{Kind of entry} \\ \midrule
\texttt{book} & \cmd{\book} title & & \texttt{subparagraph} & \cmd{\subparagraph} title \\
\texttt{part} & \cmd{\part} title & & \texttt{figure} & figure caption  \\
\texttt{chapter} & \cmd{\chapter} title & & \texttt{subfigure} & subfigure caption \\
\texttt{section} & \cmd{\section} title & & \texttt{table} & table caption \\
\texttt{subsection} & \cmd{\subsection} title & & \texttt{subtable} & subtable caption \\
\texttt{subsubsection} & \cmd{\subsubsection} title & & \texttt{\ldots} & \ldots  \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftbookbreak} \\
\cmd{\cftpartbreak} \\
\cmd{\cftchapterbreak} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cftbookbreak)%
  {\cs{cftbookbreak}}%
  {Starts a \cs{book} entry in the \prtoc.}
\glossary(cftpartbreak)%
  {\cs{cftpartbreak}}%
  {Starts a \cs{part} entry in the \prtoc.}
\glossary(cftchapterbreak)%
  {\cs{cftchapterbreak}}%
  {Starts a \cs{chapter} entry in the \prtoc.}
When \cmd{\l@book} starts to typeset a \cmd{\book} entry in the
\toc{} the first thing it does is to call the macro \cmd{\cftbookbreak}.
This is defined as:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\cftbookbreak}{\addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}}
\end{lcode}
which encourages a page break before rather than after the entry. As usual,
you can change \cmd{\cftbookbreak} to do other things that you feel might
be useful. The macros \cmd{\cftpartbreak} and \cmd{\cftchapterbreak} apply
to \cmd{\part} and \cmd{\chapter} entries, respectively, and have the same
default definitions as \cmd{\cftbookbreak}.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\cftbeforeKskip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cftbeforeKskip)%
  {\cs{cftbeforeKskip}}%
  {Generic vertical space before a `K' entry in a \listofx.}
 This length controls the vertical space before an entry. It can be changed
 by using \cmd{\setlength}. 

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\cftKindent} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cftKindent)%
  {\cs{cftKindent}}%
  {Generic indent of an `K' entry from the left margin in a \listofx.}
 This length controls the indentation of an entry from the left 
margin\index{margin!left} (\textit{indent} in \fref{fig:ltoc}). It
 can be changed using \cmd{\setlength}. 

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\cftKnumwidth} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cftKnumwidth)%
  {\cs{cftKnumwidth}}%
  {Generic space for the number of a `K' entry in a \listofx.}
 This length controls the space allowed for typesetting title numbers 
 (\textit{numwidth} in \fref{fig:ltoc}). It can
 be changed using \cmd{\setlength}. Second and subsequent lines of a multiline
 title will be indented by this amount.

 The remaining commands are related to the specifics of typesetting
 an entry.
 This is a simplified pseudo-code version for the typesetting of numbered 
 and unnumbered entries.
\LMnote{2012/07/29}{Added extra brace pair}
 \begin{lcode}
 {\cftKfont {{\cftKname \cftKpresnum SNUM\cftKaftersnum\hfil} \cftKaftersnumb TITLE}}
         {\cftKleader}{\cftKformatpnum{PAGE}}\cftKafterpnum\par

 {\cftKfont TITLE}{\cftKleader}{\cftKformatpnum{PAGE}}\cftKafterpnum\par
 \end{lcode}
 where \texttt{SNUM} is the section number, \texttt{TITLE} is the title text 
and \texttt{PAGE} 
 is the page number. In the numbered entry the pseudo-code
\begin{lcode}
{\cftKpresnum SNUM\cftaftersnum\hfil}
\end{lcode}
 is typeset within a box of width \lnc{\cftKnumwidth}, see the
 \cs{...numberlinebox} macros later on.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftKfont} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cftKfont)%
{\cs{cftKfont}}%
{Controls the appearance of the number and title of a `K' entry in a \listofx.}
This controls the appearance of the title (and its preceding number, 
if any). It may be changed using \cmd{\renewcommand}. 

\cmd{\cftKfont} takes no arguments as such, but the the number and
title is presented to it as an argument. Thus one may end
\cmd{\cftKfont} with a macro taking one argument, say
\cmd{\MakeUppercase}, and which then readjust the text as needed.

\begin{caveat}
  Please read the section entitled
  \emph{\titleref{sec:about-upper-og}} on
  page~\pageref{sec:about-upper-og} if you consider using upper/lower
  cased TOC entries and especially if you are also using the
  \Lpack{hyperref} package.
\end{caveat}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftKname} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cftKname)
  {\cs{cftKname}}%
  {Called as the first element of the  `K' entry line in a \listofx.}
    The first element typeset in an entry is 
\cmd{\cftKname}.\footnote{Suggested by Danie\index{Els, Danie} Els.}
Its default definition is 
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\cftKname}{}
\end{lcode}
so it does nothing. However, to put the word `Chapter' before each chapter 
number in a \toc\ and `Fig.' before each figure number in a \lof\ do:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\cftchaptername}{Chapter\space}
\renewcommand*{\cftfigurename}{Fig.\space}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftKpresnum} \cmd{\cftKaftersnum} \cmd{\cftKaftersnumb} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cftKpresnum)%
  {\cs{cftKpresnum}}%
  {Called immediately before typesetting the number of a `K' entry in a \listofx.} 
\glossary(cftKaftersnum)%
  {\cs{cftKaftersnum}}%
  {Called immediately after typesetting the number of a `K' entry in a \listofx.} 
\glossary(cftKaftersnumb)%
  {\cs{cftKaftersnumb}}%
  {Called immediately after typesetting the number box of a `K' entry in a \listofx.} 
 The section number is typeset within a box of width \lnc{\cftKnumwidth}.
 Within the box the macro \cmd{\cftKpresnum} is first called, then the
 number is typeset, and the \cmd{\cftKaftersnum}
 macro is called after the number is typeset. The last command
 within the box is \cmd{\hfil} to make the box contents flushleft.
 After the box is
 typeset the \cmd{\cftKaftersnumb} macro is called before typesetting
 the title text. All three of these can be changed by \cmd{\renewcommand}.
 By default they are defined to do nothing.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\numberline}\marg{num} \\
\cmd{\partnumberline}\marg{num} \\
\cmd{\partnumberline}\marg{num} \\
\cmd{\chapternumberline}\marg{num} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(numberline)
  {\cs{numberline}\marg{num}}
  {Typeset sectional number for \cs{section} and siblings in ToC}
\glossary(partnumberline)
  {\cs{partnumberline}\marg{num}}
  {Typeset part number in ToC}
\glossary(booknumberline)
  {\cs{booknumberline}\marg{num}}
  {Typeset book number in ToC}
\glossary(chapternumberline)
  {\cs{chapternumberline}\marg{num}}
  {Typeset chapter number in ToC}
In the \toc, the macros \cmd{\booknumberline}, \cmd{\partnumberline} and 
\cmd{\chapternumberline}
are responsible respectively for typesetting the \cmd{\book}, \cmd{\part} 
and \cmd{\chapter}
numbers, whereas \cmd{\numberline} does the same for the sectional
siblings. Internally they use \cmd{\cftKpresnum}, \cmd{\cftKaftersnum}
and \cmd{\cftKaftersnumb} as above. If you do not want, say, 
the \cmd{\chapter} number to appear you
can do:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\chapternumberline}[1]{}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\numberlinehook}\marg{num}\\
  \cmd{\cftwhatismyname}\\
  \cmd{\booknumberlinehook}\marg{num}\\
  \cmd{\partnumberlinehook}\marg{num}\\
  \cmd{\chapternumberlinehook}\marg{num}\\
  \cmd{\numberlinebox}\marg{length}\marg{code}\\
  \cmd{\booknumberlinebox}\marg{length}\marg{code}\\
  \cmd{\partnumberlinebox}\marg{length}\marg{code}\\
  \cmd{\chapternumberlinebox}\marg{length}\marg{code}\\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(numberlinehook)
 {\cs{numberlinehook}\marg{num}}
 {The first thing to be called within \cs{numberline}, does nothing by
 default.}
\glossary(cftwhatismyname)
 {\cs{cftwhatismyname}}
 {Since \cs{numberline} is shared by \cs{section} and siblings, 
   \cs{cftwhatismyname} can be used to tell which section type is
   calling \cs{numberlinehook}}
\glossary(partnumberlinehook)
 {\cs{partnumberlinehook}\marg{num}}
 {The first thing to be called within \cs{partnumberline}, does nothing by
 default.}
\glossary(booknumberlinehook)
 {\cs{booknumberlinehook}\marg{num}}
 {The first thing to be called within \cs{booknumberline}, does nothing by
 default.}
\glossary(chapternumberlinehook)
 {\cs{chapternumberlinehook}\marg{num}}
 {The first thing to be called within \cs{chapternumberline}, does nothing by
 default.}
\glossary(numberlinebox)
 {\cs{numberlinebox}\marg{length}\marg{code}}
 {The box command used to typeset the sectional number within the ToC,
   note that it will automatically align to the left}
\glossary(partnumberlinebox)
 {\cs{partnumberlinebox}\marg{length}\marg{code}}
 {The box command used to typeset the part number within the ToC, 
   note that it will automatically align to the left}
\glossary(booknumberlinebox)
 {\cs{booknumberlinebox}\marg{length}\marg{code}}
 {The box command used to typeset the book number within the ToC, 
   note that it will automatically align to the left}
\glossary(chapternumberlinebox)
 {\cs{chapternumberlinebox}\marg{length}\marg{code}}
 {The box command used to typeset the chapter number within the ToC, 
   note that it will automatically align to the left}
Inside the four \cs{...numberline} macros, the first thing we do is to
give the \cs{...numberline} argument to a hook. By default this hook
does nothing. But, with the right
tools,\footnote{Which we do not currently supply\dots, but have a look
at Sniplet~\ref{snip:autotoc} on page~\pageref{snip:autotoc}.}
they can be used to record the widths of the sectional number. Which then
can be used to automatically adjust the various \meta{numwidth} and
\meta{indent} within the \cs{cftsetindents} macro. In order to 
tell the section types apart (they all use \cmd{\numberline}), the
value of the \cmd{\cftwhatismyname} macro will locally reflect the
current type. 

As mentioned earlier, the \cmd{\book}, \cmd{\part} and \cmd{\chapter}
numbers are typeset inside a box of certain fixed withs. Sometimes it
can be handy \emph{not} having this box around. For this you can
redefine one of the four \cs{...numberlinebox} macros listed
above. For example via
\begin{lcode}
  \renewcommand\chapternumberlinebox[2]{#2}
\end{lcode}
The first argument is the width of the box to be made.  All four
macros are defined similar to this (where \texttt{\#1} is a length)
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand\chapternumberlinebox[2]{%
  \hb@xt@#1{#2\hfil}}
\end{lcode}


\begin{comment}
\Note{}  Because the \Lpack{hyperref} package~\cite{HYPERREF} 
does not understand
the \cmd{\partnumberline} and \cmd{\chapternumberline} commands,
if you use the \Lpack{hyperref} package you will also have to use
the \Lpack{memhfixc} package, which comes with memoir.
\end{comment}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftKleader} \\
\cmd{\cftKdotsep} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cftKleader)
  {\cs{cftKleader}}%
  {Leader between the title and page number of a `K' entry in a \listofx.} 
\glossary(cftKdotsep)
  {\cs{cftKdotsep}}%
  {Separation between dots in a leader between the title and page number of a `K' entry in a \listofx.} 
 \cmd{\cftKleader} defines the leader between the title and the page number;
 it can be changed by \cmd{\renewcommand}.
 The spacing between any dots in the leader is controlled by \cmd{\cftKdotsep} 
 (\cmd{\@dotsep} in \fref{fig:ltoc}).
 It can be changed by \cmd{\renewcommand} and its value must be either a
 number (e.g., 6.6 or \cmd{\cftdotsep}) or \cmd{\cftnodots} (to
 disable the dots). The spacing is in terms of \emph{math units} where
 there are 18mu to 1em. 

The default leaders macro is similar to
\begin{lcode}
  \newcommand{\cftsectionleader}{\normalfont\cftdotfill{\cftsectiondotsep}}
\end{lcode}
Note that the spacing of the dots is affected by the font size (as the
math unit is affected by the font size). Also note that the
\cmd{\cftchapterleader} is bold by default.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftKformatpnum}\marg{pnum} \\
\cmd{\cftKformatpnumhook}\marg{num}\\
\cmd{\cftKpagefont} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cftKformatpnum)%
  {\cs{cftKformatpnum}\marg{pnum}}%
  {Typesets the page number \meta{pnum} of a  `K' entry in a \listofx.} 
\glossary(cftKpagefont)%
  {\cs{cftKpagefont}}%
  {Font for the page number of a  `K' entry in a \listofx.} 
\glossary(cftKformatpnumhook)%
 {\cs{cftKformatpnumhook}\marg{num}}%
 {When formatting the page number in the ToC (via
   \cs{cftKformatpnum}) this hook is given the page value. Does nothing by default}%
The macro \cmd{\cftKformatpnum} typesets an entry's page number, using
the \cmd{\cftKpagefont}.\footnote{This addition to the class was suggested
by Dan\index{Luecking, Daniel} Luecking, \ctt\ \textit{Re: setting numbers in toc in their natural width box,} 2007/08/15.}
The default definition is essentially:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\cftKformatpnum}[1]{%
  \cftKformatpnumhook{#1}%
  \hbox to \@pnumwidth{\hfil{\cftKpagefont #1}}}
\end{lcode}
which sets the number right justified in a box \lnc{\@pnumwidth} wide.
To have, say, a \cmd{\part} page number left justified in its box, do:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\cftpartformatpnum}[1]{%
  \cftpartformatpnumhook{#1}%
  \hbox to \@pnumwidth{{\cftpartpagefont #1}}}
\end{lcode}
The \cmd{\cftKformatpnumhook} does nothing by default (other than
eating the argument), but could be redefined to record the widest page
number and report it back, even reusing it to auto adjust on the next
run to set \cs{@pnumwidth} (see \cmd{\setpnumwidth}).


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftKafterpnum} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cftKafterpnum)
  {\cs{cftKafterpnum}}%
  {Called after typesetting the page number of a  `K' entry in a \listofx.} 
 This macro is called after the page number has been typeset. Its default
 is to do nothing. It can be changed by \cmd{\renewcommand}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftsetindents}\marg{kind}\marg{indent}\marg{numwidth} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cftsetindents)%
  {\cs{cftsetindents}\marg{kind}\marg{indent}\marg{numwidth}}%
  {Set the \meta{kind} entry \textit{indent} to \meta{indent} and
   its \textit{numwidth} to \meta{numwidth}.}
 The command 
 \cmd{\cftsetindents} sets the \meta{kind} entries \textit{indent} to the 
length \meta{indent} and its
 \textit{numwidth} to the length \meta{numwidth}. The \meta{kind} argument
 is the name of one of the standard entries (e.g., \texttt{subsection}) or the 
name of entry that has been defined within the document.
 For example 
\begin{lcode}
 \cftsetindents{figure}{0em}{1.5em}
\end{lcode}
 will make figure\index{figure} entries left justified.

    This manual requires more space for section numbers in the \toc{} than
the default (which allows for three digits). Consequently the preamble\index{preamble}
contains the following:
\begin{lcode}
\cftsetindents{section}{1.5em}{3.0em}
\cftsetindents{subsection}{4.5em}{3.9em}
\cftsetindents{subsubsection}{8.4em}{4.8em}
\cftsetindents{paragraph}{10.7em}{5.7em}
\cftsetindents{subparagraph}{12.7em}{6.7em}
\end{lcode}
Note that changing the indents at one level implies that any lower level
indents should be changed as well.


 Various effects can be achieved by changing the definitions of \cmd{\cftKfont},
 \cmd{\cftKaftersnum}, \cmd{\cftKaftersnumb}, \cmd{\cftKleader} and 
\cmd{\cftKafterpnum}, 
 either singly or in combination.
 For the sake of some examples, assume that we have the following initial
 definitions
 \begin{lcode}
 \newcommand*{\cftKfont}{}
 \newcommand*{\cftKaftersnum}{}
 \newcommand*{\cftKaftersnumb}{}
 \newcommand*{\cftKleader}{\cftdotfill{\cftKdotsep}}
 \newcommand*{\cftKdotsep}{\cftdotsep}
 \newcommand*{\cftKpagefont}{}
 \newcommand*{\cftKafterpnum}{}
 \end{lcode}
Note that the same font should be used for the title, leader and page 
 number to provide a coherent appearance.

 \begin{itemize}
 \item To eliminate the dots in the leader:
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand*{\cftKdotsep}{\cftnodots}
 \end{lcode}

 \item To put something (e.g., a name) before the title (number):
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand*{\cftKname}{SOMETHING }
 \end{lcode}

 \item To add a colon after the section number:
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand*{\cftKaftersnum}{:}
 \end{lcode}

 \item To put something before the title number, add a double colon after 
    the title number, set everything in bold font,
 and start the title text on the following line:
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand*{\cftKfont}{\bfseries}
 \renewcommand*{\cftKleader}{\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftKdotsep}}
 \renewcommand*{\cftKpagefont}{\bfseries}
 \renewcommand*{\cftKname}{SOMETHING }
 \renewcommand{\cftKaftersnum}{::}
 \renewcommand{\cftKaftersnumb}{\\}
 \end{lcode}

    If you are adding text in the number box in addition to the number,
 then you will probably have to increase the width of the box so that
 multiline titles have a neat vertical alignment; changing box widths
 usually implies that the indents will require modification as 
 well. One possible method of adjusting the box width for the above example
 is:
 \begin{lcode}
 \newlength{\mylen}                  % a "scratch" length
 \settowidth{\mylen}{\bfseries\cftKaftersnum}
 \addtolength{\cftKnumwidth}{\mylen} % add the extra space
 \end{lcode} 

\LMnote{2012/07/29}{Added this example}
\item To set the chapter number and title as just
  `NUM\enspace\textperiodcentered\enspace TITLE', i.e. un-boxed number
  plus a symbolic separator, use
  \begin{lcode}
  \renewcommand\cftchapteraftersnumb{\enspace\textperiodcentered\enspace}
  \renewcommand\chapternumberlinebox[2]{#2}  
  \end{lcode}
  -- of couse, it works best, only if the TITLE is a single line.


\item Make chapter titles lower case small caps
  \begin{lcode}
    \renewcommand\cftchapterfont{\scshape\MakeTextLowercase}
  \end{lcode}
  -- here we do not touch the case of any math.

 \item To set the section numbers flushright:
 \begin{lcode}
 \setlength{\mylen}{0.5em}    % extra space at end of number
 \renewcommand{\cftKpresnum}{\hfill} % note the double `l'
 \renewcommand{\cftKaftersnum}{\hspace*{\mylen}}
 \addtolength{\cftKnumwidth}{\mylen}
 \end{lcode}
 In the above, the added initial \cmd{\hfill} in the box overrides the
 final \cmd{\hfil} in the box, thus shifting everything to the right hand
 end of the box. The extra space is so that the number is not typeset
 immediately at the left of the title text.

 \item To set the entry ragged left (but this only looks good for single
       line titles):
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand{\cftKfont}{\hfill\bfseries}
 \renewcommand{\cftKleader}{}
 \end{lcode}

\item To set the titles ragged right instead of the usual flushright.
      Assuming that there are more than 100 pages in the document (otherwise
      adjust the length):
\begin{lcode}
\setrmarg{3.55em plus 1fil}
\end{lcode}
where the last four characters before the closing brace are: digit 1, 
lowercase F, lowercase I, and lowercase L.

 \item To set the page number immediately after the entry text instead of at
       the righthand margin\index{margin!right}:
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand{\cftKleader}{}
 \renewcommand{\cftKafterpnum}{\cftparfillskip}
 \end{lcode}

\end{itemize}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftparfillskip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cftparfillskip)%
  {\cs{cftparfillskip}}%
  {Fills the last line in a paragraph in a \listofx.}
 By default the \cmd{\parfillskip} value is locally set to fill up the last
 line of a paragraph\index{paragraph}. Just changing \cmd{\cftKleader} as
in the above example puts horrible interword
 spaces into the last line of the title. The \cmd{\cftparfillskip} 
 command  is provided just so that the above effect can be achieved.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftpagenumbersoff}\marg{kind} \\
\cmd{\cftpagenumberson}\marg{kind} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cftpagenumbersoff)%
  {\cs{cftpagenumbersoff}\marg{kind}}%
  {Eliminates page numbers for the \meta{kind} entries in a \listofx.}
\glossary(cftpagenumberson)%
  {\cs{cftpagenumberson}\marg{kind}}%
  {Reverses the effect of \cs{cftpagenumbersoff}.}
 The command \cmd{\cftpagenumbersoff} will
 eliminate the page numbers for \meta{kind} entries in the listing, where
 \meta{kind} is the name of one of the standard
 kinds of entries (e.g., \texttt{subsection}, or \texttt{figure}) or the 
 name of a new entry defined in the document.

    The command \cmd{\cftpagenumberson} reverses
 the effect of a corresponding \cmd{\cftpagenumbersoff} for \meta{kind}.
 
    For example, to eliminate page numbers for appendices\index{appendix} 
in the \toc:
 \begin{lcode}
 ...
 \appendix
 \addtocontents{toc}{\cftpagenumbersoff{chapter}}
 \chapter{First appendix}
 \end{lcode}
 If there are other chapter type headings\index{heading!chapter} to go 
into the \toc{} after the  appendices\index{appendix} (perhaps a 
bibliography\index{bibliography} or an index\index{index}), 
 then it will be necessary to do a similar 
 \begin{lcode}
 \addtocontents{toc}{\cftpagenumberson{chapter}}
 \end{lcode}
 after the appendices\index{appendix} to restore the page numbering in 
the \toc.

 Sometimes it may be desirable to make a change to the global parameters
 for an individual entry. For example, a figure\index{figure} might be 
placed on the end paper\index{paper!end} of a book (the inside of the front 
or back cover), and this needs to be placed in a \lof\ with the page number 
set as, say,  `inside front cover'. If `inside front cover' is typeset as 
an ordinary page number it will stick out into the margin\index{margin}. 
Therefore, the parameters for this particular entry need to be changed.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftlocalchange}\marg{ext}\marg{pnumwidth}\marg{tocrmarg} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cftlocalchange)%
  {\cs{cftlocalchange}\marg{ext}\marg{pnumwidth}\marg{tocrmarg}}%
  {Writes commands to the \meta{ext} \listofx\ file resetting
   \cs{@pnumwidth} and \cs{@tocrmarg} to the specified values.}
 The command \cmd{\cftlocalchange} 
 will write an entry into the file with extension \meta{ext} to reset 
the global \cmd{\@pnumwidth} and \cmd{\@tocrmarg} parameter lengths. 
 The command should be called again after any special entry to reset
 the parameters back to their usual values. Any fragile commands used
 in the arguments must be protected.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftaddtitleline}\marg{ext}\marg{kind}\marg{title}\marg{page} \\
\cmd{\cftaddnumtitleline}\marg{ext}\marg{kind}\marg{num}\marg{title}\marg{page} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cftaddtitleline)%
  {\cs{cftaddtitleline}\marg{ext}\marg{kind}\marg{title}\marg{page}}%
  {Writes a \cs{contentsline} to the \listofx\ \meta{ext} file for
   a \meta{kind} entry with \meta{title} and \meta{page} number.}
\glossary(cftaddnumtitleline)%
  {\cs{cftaddnumtitleline}\marg{ext}\marg{kind}\marg{num}\marg{title}\marg{page}}%
  {Writes a \cs{contentsline} to the \listofx\ \meta{ext} file for
   a \meta{kind} entry with number \meta{number} and \meta{title} and 
   \meta{page} number.}
 The command \cmd{\cftaddtitleline} 
 will write a \cmd{\contentsline} entry into \meta{ext} for a \meta{kind}
 entry with title \meta{title} and page number \meta{page}. 
 Any fragile commands used in the arguments must be protected.
That is,
 an entry is made of the form: 
\begin{lcode}
\contentsline{kind}{title}{page}
\end{lcode}
 The command \cmd{\cftaddnumtitleline}
 is similar to \cmd{\cftaddtitleline} except that it also includes 
\meta{num} as the argument to
 \cmd{\numberline}. That is, an entry is made of the form
\begin{lcode}
\contentsline{kind}{\numberline{num} title}{page}
\end{lcode}

 As an example of the use of these commands, 
 noting that the default LaTeX values for 
 \cmd{\@pnumwidth} and \cmd{\@tocrmarg} are 1.55em and 2.55em respectively, 
 one might do the following for a figure\index{figure} on the 
frontispiece\index{frontispiece} page.
 \begin{lcode}
 ...
  this is the frontispiece page with no number
  draw or import the picture (with no \caption)
 \cftlocalchange{lof}{4em}{5em} % make pnumwidth big enough for 
                                % frontispiece and change margin
 \cftaddtitleline{lof}{figure}{The title}{frontispiece}
 \cftlocalchange{lof}{1.55em}{2.55em} % return to normal settings
 \clearpage
 ...
 \end{lcode}
    Recall that a \cmd{\caption} command will put an entry in the \file{lof}
file, which is not wanted here. If a caption\index{caption} is required, 
then you can  either craft one youself or, assuming that your general 
captions\index{caption} are not too exotic, use the \cmd{\legend} command 
(see later). If the illustration\index{illustration} is numbered, use 
\cmd{\cftaddnumtitleline} instead of \cmd{\cftaddtitleline}.


\LMnote{2010/06/09}{Thought we needed a break here}
\subsubsection{Inserting stuff into the content lists}
\label{sec:inserting-stuff-into}


The next functions were suggested by Lars\index{Madsen, Lars} Madsen who
found them useful if, for example, you had two versions of the
\toc\ and you needed some aspects to be formatted differently.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftinsertcode}\marg{name}\marg{code} \\
\cmd{\cftinserthook}\marg{file}\marg{name} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cftinsertcode)
  {\cs{cftinsertcode}\marg{name}\marg{code}}%
  {Defines Toc (LoF, LoT) \meta{name} insertion to be \meta{code}.}
\glossary(cftinserthook)
  {\cs{cftinserthook}\marg{file}\marg{name}}%
  {Inserts code \meta{name} into \meta{file} (e.g., \texttt{toc}, \texttt{lof}, etc.}
The \cmd{\cftinserthook} is somewhat like \cmd{\addtocontents} in that it 
enables you to insert a code hook into the \toc, etc., where \meta{file} is 
the (\texttt{toc}, \texttt{lof}, \ldots) file and \meta{name} is the `name'
of the hook. The \meta{code} for the hook is specified via \cmd{\cftinsertcode}
where \meta{name} is the name you give to the hook. These can be used to make
alterations to a \listofx\ on the fly. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\cftinsertcode{A}{%
  \renewcommand*{\cftchapterfont}{\normalfont\scshape}
  ... }% code for ToC
...
\frontmatter
\tableofcontents
\cftinsertcode{G}{...}% code for LoF
\cftinsertcode{F}{...}% code for LoF
\listoffigures
...
\cftinserthook{lof}{G}
...
\chapter{...}
...
\mainmatter
\cftinserthook{toc}{A}
\cftinserthook{lof}{F}
\chapter{...}
...
\end{lcode}
If you do not use \cmd{\cftinsertcode} \emph{before} calling the command to
type the \listofx\ that it is intended for then nothing will happen. No
harm will come if a matching \cmd{\cftinserthook} is never used. No harm
occurs either if you call \cmd{\cftinserthook} and there is no prior
matching \cmd{\cftinsertcode}.

One use of these \toc{} hooks is reusing the \toc{} data to, say,
create chapter \toc's. The code for this is shown in
Sniplet~\ref{snip:chaptertoc} on page~\pageref{snip:chaptertoc}. In
the sniplet we use the following two hooks that are executed right
before and right after \cmd{\chapter}, \cmd{\part}, \cmd{\book},
\cmd{\appendixpage}  writes to the \toc{}. By default
they do nothing.\footnote{More hooks may be added in later releases.}
\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\mempreaddchaptertotochook}\\
  \cmd{\mempostaddchaptertotochook}\\
  \cmd{\mempreaddparttotochook}\\
  \cmd{\mempostaddparttotochook}\\
  \cmd{\mempreaddbooktotochook}\\
  \cmd{\mempostaddbooktotochook}\\
  \cmd{\mempreaddapppagetotochook}\\
  \cmd{\mempostaddapppagetotochook}
\end{syntax}
\glossary(mempreaddchaptertotochook)%
  {\cs{mempreaddchaptertotochook}}%
  {Hook executed right \emph{before} \cs{chapter} writes to the \protect\toc{}}
\glossary(mempostaddchaptertotochook)%
  {\cs{mempostaddchaptertotochook}}%
  {Hook executed right \emph{after} \cs{chapter} writes to the \protect\toc{}}
\glossary(mempreaddparttotochook)%
  {\cs{mempreaddparttotochook}}%
  {Hook executed right \emph{before} \cs{part} writes to the \protect\toc{}}
\glossary(mempostaddparttotochook)%
  {\cs{mempostaddparttotochook}}%
  {Hook executed right \emph{after} \cs{part} writes to the \protect\toc{}}
\glossary(mempreaddbooktotochook)%
  {\cs{mempreaddbooktotochook}}%
  {Hook executed right \emph{before} \cs{book} writes to the \protect\toc{}}
\glossary(mempostaddbooktotochook)%
  {\cs{mempostaddbooktotochook}}%
  {Hook executed right \emph{after} \cs{book} writes to the \protect\toc{}}
\glossary(mempreaddapppagetotochook)%
  {\cs{mempreaddapppagetotochook}}%
  {Hook executed right \emph{before} \cs{appendixpage} writes to the \protect\toc{}}
\glossary(mempostaddapppagetotochook)%
  {\cs{mempostaddapppagetotochook}}%
  {Hook executed right \emph{after} \cs{appendixpage} writes to the \protect\toc{}}



\LMnote{2010/06/09}{Ineffective to have this seceral places in the manual.}
\subsubsection{Extra chapter material in the ToC}
\label{sec:extra-chapt-mater}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\precistoctext}\marg{text} \cmd{\precistocfont} \cmd{\precistocformat}\\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\chapterprecistoc} macro puts  \cmd{\precistoctext}\marg{text} into 
the \pixfile{toc} file. Further information as to the definition of
this macro can be found in section~\ref{sec:chapter-precis}.


\LMnote{2012/09/21}{added}
\subsubsection{About upper og lower casing TOC entries}
\label{sec:about-upper-og}

Some designs call for upper (or lower casing) TOC entries. This
\emph{is} possible but the solution depends on whether the
\Lpack{hyperref} package is used or not.

Without \Lpack{hyperref} one can simply end the \cs{cftKfont} with say
\cs{MakeTextUppercase} and the \texttt{K}-type entry will be upper cased.

With \Lpack{hyperref} the possibilities are limited. Explanation: The
upper/lower casing macros are not that robust, and need the content to
be simple.\footnote{For some definition of simple.} When
\Lpack{hyperref} is used, the hyperlink is wrapped around the entry
before \cs{cftKfont} gains access to it, and is thus generally too
complicated for, say, \cs{MakeTextUppercase} to handle. The follow
workaround draw inspiration from
\url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/q/11892/3929}.
\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\settocpreprocessor}\marg{type}\marg{code}
\end{syntax}
\glossary(settocpreprocessor)%
  {\cs{settocpreprocessor}\marg{type}\marg{code}}
  {Provide a method for preprocessing certain TOC entries before they
    are written to the \texttt{.toc} file.}
Here \meta{type} is one of \texttt{chapter}, \texttt{part} or
\texttt{book}.\footnote{If needed we will attempt to add a similar
  feature to the rest of the sectional types, please write the
  maintainer.} And \meta{code} can be something like this example:
\begin{verbatim}
\makeatletter
\settocpreprocessor{chapter}{%
  \let\tempf@rtoc\f@rtoc%
  \def\f@rtoc{%
    \texorpdfstring{\MakeTextUppercase{\tempf@rtoc}}{\tempf@rtoc}}%
}
\makeatother
\end{verbatim}
Where \cs{f@rtoc} is a placeholder inside \cmd{\chapter}, \cmd{\part}
and \cmd{\book}, holding the material to be written to the actual TOC
file before \Lpack{hyperref} accesses it. This way the upper casing is
sneaked into the TOC file, and the bookmark part of \Lpack{hyperref}
will not complain about the \cmd{\MakeTextUppercase} in the data. Of
course, you will not have upper cased titles in the bookmark list.





%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%


\subsection{Example: No section number}

    There are at least two ways of listing section titles in the \toc\
without displaying their numbers and both involve the \cmd{\numberline}
command which typesets the number in a box. 


    The first method redefines \cmd{\numberline} so it throws away the
argument. We do this by modifying the \cmd{\cftKfont} macro which is called
before \cmd{\numberline} and the \cmd{\cftKafterpnum} which is called after
the page number has been typeset.
\begin{lcode}
\let\oldcftsf\cftsectionfont%  save definition of \cftsectionfont
\let\oldcftspn\cftsectionafterpnum% and of \cftsectionafterpnum
\renewcommand*{\cftsectionfont}{%
  \let\oldnl\numberline%       save definition of \numberline
  \renewcommand*{\numberline}[1]{}% change it
  \oldcftsf}                 % use original \cftsectionfont
\renewcommand*{\cftsectionafterpnum}{%
  \let\numberline\oldnl%     % restore orginal \numberline
  \oldcftspn}                % use original \cftsectionafterpnum
\end{lcode}

    Probing a little deeper, the \cmd{\numberline} macro is called to
typeset section numbers and is defined as:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\numberline}[1]{%
  \hb@xt@\@tempdima{\@cftbsnum #1\@cftasnum\hfil}\@cftasnumb}
\end{lcode}
Each
kind of heading \cmd{\let}s the \cmd{\@cftbsnum} macro to \cmd{\cftKpresnum},
and the \cmd{\@cftasnum} macro to \cmd{\cftKaftersnum}, and the
\cmd{\@cftasnumb} macro to \cmd{\cftKaftersnumb} as appropriate for the
heading. The second method for killing the number uses a \tx\ method 
for defining a macro with
a delimited argument.
\begin{lcode}
\def\cftsectionpresnum #1\@cftasnum{}
\end{lcode}
The interpretation of this is left as an exercise for anyone who might 
be interested.

\subsection{Example: Multicolumn entries}

    If the subsection entries, say, in the \toc\ are going to be very 
short it might be worth setting them in multiple columns. Here is one way
of doing that which depends on using the \Lpack{multicol}
package~\cite{MULTICOL}. This assumes that subsections will be the lowest
heading in the \toc.
\begin{lcode}
\newcounter{toccols}
\setcounter{toccols}{3}
\newenvironment{mysection}[1]{%
  \section{#1}%
  \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\begin{multicols}{\value{toccols}}}}%
  {\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\end{multocols}}}
\end{lcode}

The counter \texttt{toccols} controls the number of columns to be used.
For each section where you want subsections to be typeset in multiple columns
in the \toc, use the \texttt{mysection} environment instead of \cmd{\section},
like:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{mysection}{Columns}
...
\subsection{Fat}
...
\subsection{Thin}
...
\end{mysection}
\end{lcode}

Any \toc\ entries generated from within the environment will be enclosed
in a \Ie{multicols} environment in the \toc. The \cmd{\protect}s have to be
used because environment \cmd{\begin} and \cmd{\end} commands are 
fragile\index{fragile}.
  

\subsection{Example: Multiple contents}

\PWnote{2009/03/17}{Added bit about simple short \& long ToC.}
    It is easy to have two \toc s, one short and one long, when they are
of the same style, like this:
\begin{lcode}
...
\renewcommand*{\contentsname}{Short contents}
\setcounter{tocdepth}{0}%  chapters and above
\tableofcontents
% \clearpage
\renewcommand*{\contentsname}{Contents}
\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}%  subsections and above
\tableofcontents
\end{lcode}
(Note that you can't use \cmd{\settocdepth} in this case as that writes the 
change into the \toc, so that the second use would override the first.)


    This book has both a short and a long \toc, neither of which look like
those typically associated with \ltx. This is how they were done.

    The general style for the \toc, etc., is specified in the \Lpack{memsty}
package file.

\begin{lcode}
%%% need more space for ToC page numbers
\setpnumwidth{2.55em}
\setrmarg{3.55em}
%%% need more space for ToC section numbers
\cftsetindents{section}{1.5em}{3.0em}
\cftsetindents{subsection}{4.5em}{3.9em}
\cftsetindents{subsubsection}{8.4em}{4.8em}
\cftsetindents{paragraph}{10.7em}{5.7em}
\cftsetindents{subparagraph}{12.7em}{6.7em}
%%% need more space for LoF & LoT numbers
\cftsetindents{figure}{0em}{3.0em}
\cftsetindents{table}{0em}{3.0em}
%%% remove the dotted leaders
\renewcommand{\cftsectiondotsep}{\cftnodots}
\renewcommand{\cftsubsectiondotsep}{\cftnodots}
\renewcommand{\cftsubsubsectiondotsep}{\cftnodots}
\renewcommand{\cftparagraphdotsep}{\cftnodots}
\renewcommand{\cftsubparagraphdotsep}{\cftnodots}
\renewcommand{\cftfiguredotsep}{\cftnodots}
\renewcommand{\cfttabledotsep}{\cftnodots}
\end{lcode}

Three macros are defined to control the appearance of the short and 
the long \toc. First, the macro \cmd{\setupshorttoc} for the short 
version.
The first few lines ensure that only chapter or part titles will be set,
and any chapter precis text or \Icn{tocdepth} changes will be ignored.
The rest of the code specifies how the chapter titles are to be typeset,
and finally the part and book titles.
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\setupshorttoc}{%
  \renewcommand*{\contentsname}{Short contents}
  \let\oldchangetocdepth\changetocdepth
  \renewcommand*{\changetocdepth}[1]{}
  \let\oldprecistoctext\precistoctext
  \renewcommand{\precistoctext}[1]{}
  \let\oldcftchapterfillnum\cftchapterfillnum
  \setcounter{tocdepth}{0}% chapters and above
  \renewcommand*{\cftchapterfont}{\hfill\sffamily}
  \renewcommand*{\cftchapterleader}{ \textperiodcentered\space}
  \renewcommand*{\cftchapterafterpnum}{\cftparfillskip}
%%  \setpnumwidth{0em}
%%  \setpnumwidth{1.5em}
  \renewcommand*{\cftchapterfillnum}[1]{%
    {\cftchapterleader}\nobreak
    \hbox to 1.5em{\cftchapterpagefont ##1\hfil}\cftchapterafterpnum\par}
  \setrmarg{0.3\textwidth}
  \setlength{\unitlength}{\@tocrmarg}
  \addtolength{\unitlength}{1.5em}
  \let\oldcftpartformatpnum\cftpartformatpnum
  \renewcommand*{\cftpartformatpnum}[1]{%
    \hbox to\unitlength{{\cftpartpagefont ##1}}}}
  \let\oldcftbookformatpnum\cftbookformatpnum
  \renewcommand*{\cftbookformatpnum}[1]{%
    \hbox to\unitlength{{\cftbookpagefont ##1}}}}
\end{lcode}

    You can do many things using the \cs{cft...} macros to change the 
appearance of a \toc\ but they can't be entirely coerced into specifying
the paragraphing of the \cmd{\subsection} titles. The
\cmd{\setupparasubsecs} also went in the preamble.
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\setupparasubsecs}{%
  \let\oldnumberline\numberline
  \renewcommand*{\cftsubsectionfont}{\itshape}
  \renewcommand*{\cftsubsectionpagefont}{\itshape}
  \renewcommand{\l@subsection}[2]{%
    \def\numberline####1{\textit{####1}~}%
    \leftskip=\cftsubsectionindent
    \rightskip=\@tocrmarg
%% \advance\rightskip 0pt plus \hsize % uncomment this for raggedright
%% \advance\rightskip 0pt plus 2em    % uncomment this for semi-raggedright
    \parfillskip=\fill
    \ifhmode ,\ \else\noindent\fi
    \ignorespaces 
    {\cftsubsectionfont ##1}~{\cftsubsectionpagefont##2}%
    \let\numberline\oldnumberline\ignorespaces}
}
\AtEndDocument{\addtocontents{toc}{\par}
\end{lcode}
The above code changes the appearance of subsection titles in the \toc, 
setting each group as a single paragraph (each is normally set with 
a paragraph to itself). By uncommenting or commenting the noted lines 
in the code you can change the layout a little. 

    Normally, section titles (and below) are set as individual 
paragraphs. Effectively the first thing that is done is to end any 
previous paragraph, and also the last thing is to end the current 
paragraph. Notice that the main code above neither starts nor finishes 
a paragraph. If the group of subsections is followed by a section title, 
that supplies the paragraph end. The last line above ensures that
the last entry in the \file{toc} file is \piif{par} as this might be
needed to finish off a group of subsections if these are the last 
entries.

And thirdly for the main \toc, the macro \cmd{\setupmaintoc} reverts 
everything back to normal.
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\setupmaintoc}{%
  \renewcommand{\contentsname}{Contents}
  \let\changetocdepth\oldchangetocdepth
  \let\precistoctext\oldprecistoctext
  \let\cftchapterfillnum\oldcftchapterfillnum
  \addtodef{\cftchapterbreak}{\par}{}
  \renewcommand*{\cftchapterfont}{\normalfont\sffamily}
  \renewcommand*{\cftchapterleader}{%
                 \sffamily\cftdotfill{\cftchapterdotsep}}
  \renewcommand*{\cftchapterafterpnum}{}
  \renewcommand{\cftchapterbreak}{\par\addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}}
  \setpnumwidth{2.55em}
  \setrmarg{3.55em}
  \setcounter{tocdepth}{2}}
  \let\cftpartformatpnum\oldcftpartformatpnum
    \addtodef{\cftpartbreak}{\par}{}
  \let\cftbookformatpnum\oldcftbookformatpnum
    \addtodef{\cftbookbreak}{\par}{}
\end{lcode}
The first few lines restore some macros to their original definitions.
\begin{lcode}
\addtodef{\cftchapterbreak}{\par}{}
\end{lcode}
ensures that a chapter entry starts off with a \piif{par}; this is needed
when the previous entry is a group of subsections and their paragraph
has to be ended. The remaining code lines simply set the appearance of 
the chapter titles and restore that for parts and books, as well as ensuring
that they start off new paragraphs.

In the document itself, \cmd{\tableofcontents} was called twice, 
after the appropriate setups:
\begin{lcode}
...
\setupshorttoc
\tableofcontents
\clearpage
\setupparasubsecs
\setupmaintoc
\tableofcontents
\setlength{\unitlength}{1pt}
...
\end{lcode}
After all this note that I ensured that \lnc{\unitlength} was set 
to its default value (it had been used as a scratch length in the 
code for \cmd{\setupparasubsecs}).


%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%



 \section{New \listofx\ and entries}

\index{list!new list of|(}

 \begin{syntax}
\cmd{\newlistof}\marg{listofcom}\marg{ext}\marg{listofname} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(newlistof)%
  {\cs{newlistof}\marg{listofcom}\marg{ext}\marg{listofname}}%
  {Creates two new List of \ldots commands, \cs{listofcom} 
   and \cs{listofcom*}, which use
   a file with extension \meta{ext} and \meta{listofname} for the
  title.}
 The command \cmd{\newlistof} 
 creates a new \listofx, and assorted commands to go along with it.
 The first argument, \meta{listofcom} is used to define a new
 command called \verb?\listofcom? which can then be used like 
\verb?\listoffigures?
to typeset the \listofx. The \meta{ext} argument is the file 
extension to
be used for the new listing. The last argument, \meta{listofname} is
the title for the \listofx. Unstarred and starred versions of
\verb?\listofcom? are created. The unstarred version, \verb?\listofcom?, 
will add \meta{listofname} to the \toc, while the starred version, 
\verb?\listofcom*?, makes no entry in the \toc.

 As an example:
 \begin{lcode}
 \newcommand{\listanswername}{List of Answers}
 \newlistof{listofanswers}{ans}{\listanswername}
 \end{lcode}
 will create a new \cmd{\listofanswers} command that can be used
to typeset a listing of answers under the
title \cmd{\listanswername}, where the answer titles are in an \file{ans}
file. 
   It is up to the author of the document to specify the `answer' code
for the answers in the document. For example:
 \begin{lcode}
 \newcounter{answer}[chapter]
 \renewcommand{\theanswer}{\arabic{answer}}
 \newcommand{\answer}[1]{
   \refstepcounter{answer}
   \par\noindent\textbf{Answer \theanswer. #1}
   \addcontentsline{ans}{answer}{\protect\numberline{\theanswer}#1}\par}
 \end{lcode}
 which, when used like:
\begin{lcode}
\answer{Hard} The \ldots
\end{lcode}
 will print as:
\begin{syntax}
 \textbf{Answer 1. Hard} \\
 \hspace*{2em} The \ldots \\
\end{syntax}

    As mentioned above, the \cmd{\newlistof} command creates several 
new commands in addition to \verb?\listofcom?, most of which you should 
now be familiar with. For convenience,
assume that \verb?\newlistof{...}{X}{...}? has been issued so that
\texttt{X} is the new file extension and corresponds to the \texttt{X} in
\S\ref{sec:titles}. Then in addition to \verb?\listofcom? the following 
new commands will be made available.

 The four commands, \verb?\Xmark?, 
 \verb?\Xheadstart?, 
\verb?\printXtitle?, and
\verb?\afterXtitle?, 
are analagous to the commands of the same names
described in \S\ref{sec:titles} (internally the class uses
the \cmd{\newlistof} macro to define the \toc, \lof\ and \lot). 
In particular the default definition of \verb?\Xmark? is equivalent to:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\Xmark}{\markboth{listofname}{listofname}}
\end{lcode}
However, this may well be altered by the particular \cmd{\pagestyle} in
use.

\begin{syntax}
\verb?Xdepth? \\
\end{syntax}
 The counter \verb?Xdepth? is analagous to the standard
 \Icn{tocdepth} counter, in that it specifies that entries
 in the new listing should not be typeset if their numbering level 
 is greater
 than \verb?Xdepth?. The default definition is equivalent to
\begin{lcode}
\setcounter{Xdepth}{1}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\insertchapterspace} \\
\cmd{\addtodef}\marg{macro}\marg{prepend}\marg{append} \\
\end{syntax}
Remember that the \cmd{\chapter} command uses \cmd{\insertchapterspace}
to insert vertical spaces into the \lof{} and \lot. If you want similar
spaces added to your new listing then you have to modify
\cmd{\insertchapterspace}. The easiest way to do this is via
the \cmd{\addtodef} macro, like:
\begin{lcode}
\addtodef{\insertchapterspace}{}%
  {\addtocontents{ans}{\protect\addvspace{10pt}}}
\end{lcode}
The \cmd{\addtodef} macro is described later in \S\ref{sec:addtodef}.

    The other part of creating a new \listofx, is to specify the 
formatting of the entries, i.e., define an appropriate \verb?\l@kind? 
macro.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\newlistentry}\oarg{within}\marg{cntr}\marg{ext}\marg{level-1} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(newlistentry)%
  {\cs{newlistentry}\oarg{within}\marg{cntr}\marg{ext}\marg{level-1}}%
  {Creates the commands for typesetting an entry in a \listofx.
   \meta{cntr} is the new counter for the entry, which may be reset
   by the \meta{within} counter. \meta{ext} is the file extension
   and \meta{level-1} is one less than the entry's level.}

 The command \cmd{\newlistentry} creates the commands necessary for
typesetting an entry in a \listofx.
 The first required argument, \meta{cntr} is used to define a new
 counter called \texttt{cntr}, unless \texttt{cntr} is already defined. 
The optional \meta{within} argument can be used so that \texttt{cntr} 
gets reset to one every time the counter called \texttt{within} is changed. 
That is, the first two arguments when \texttt{cntr} is not
already defined, are equivalent to calling 
\cmd{\newcounter}\marg{cntr}\oarg{within}. If \texttt{cntr} is already
defined, \cmd{\newcounter} is not called. \texttt{cntr} is used for the 
number that goes along with the title of the entry.

The second required argument, \meta{ext}, is the file extension for
the entry listing.  The last argument, \meta{level-1}, is a number
specifying the numbering level minus one, of the entry in a listing.


Calling \cmd{\newlistentry} creates several new commands used to
configure the entry. So in order to configure the list look of  our
previous answer example we would add
\begin{lcode}
\newlistentry{answer}{ans}{0}  
\end{lcode}

Assuming that \verb?\newlistentry? is called as
 \verb?\newlistentry[within]{K}{X}{N}?, where \texttt{K} and
 \texttt{X} are similar to the previous uses of them (e.g., \texttt{K}
 is the kind of entry \texttt{X} is the file extension), and
 \texttt{N} is an integer number, then the following commands are made
 available.


  The set of commands \verb?\cftbeforeKskip?, 
 \verb?\cftKfont?, 
 \verb?\cftKpresnum?, 
 \verb?\cftKaftersnum?, 
 \verb?\cftKaftersnumb?, 
 \verb?\cftKleader?, 
 \verb?\cftKdotsep?, 
 \verb?\cftKpagefont?, and
 \verb?\cftKafterpnum?,
 are analagous to the commands of the same names
 described in \Sref{sec:entries}. Their default values are also
 as described earlier.

 The default values of \verb?\cftKindent? and \verb?\cftKnumwidth? are 
set according to the value of the \meta{level-1} argument 
(i.e., \texttt{N} in this example). For \verb?N=0? the settings 
correspond to those for figures\index{figure} and tables\index{table}, 
as listed in \tref{tab:indents} for the \Lclass{memoir} class.
For \verb?N=1? the settings correspond to subfigures\index{figure!sub-}, 
and so on. For values of \verb?N? less than zero or greater than four, 
or for non-default values, use the \cmd{\cftsetindents} command to 
set the values.

  \verb?\l@K? is an internal command that typesets an entry in the list, 
and is defined in terms of the above \verb?\cft*K*? commands. It will 
not typeset an entry if \verb?Xdepth? is \texttt{N} or less, where 
\texttt{X} is the listing's file extension.

 The command \verb?\theK? prints the value of the \texttt{K} counter. 
It is initially defined so that it prints arabic numerals. If the 
optional \meta{within} argument is used, \verb?\theK? is defined as 
\begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand{\theK}{\thewithin.\arabic{K}}
\end{lcode}
 otherwise as
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\theK}{\arabic{K}}
\end{lcode}

 As an example of the independent use of \cmd{\newlistentry}, the 
following will set up for sub-answers.
 \begin{lcode}
 \newlistentry[answer]{subanswer}{ans}{1}
 \renewcommand{\thesubanswer}{\theanswer.\alph{subanswer}}
 \newcommand{\subanswer}[1]{
    \refstepcounter{subanswer}
    \par\textbf{\thesubanswer) #1}
    \addcontentsline{ans}{subanswer{\protect\numberline{\thesubanswer}#1}}
 \setcounter{ansdepth}{2}
 \end{lcode}
 And then:
 \begin{lcode}
 \answer{Harder} The \ldots
   \subanswer{Reformulate the problem} It assists \ldots
 \end{lcode}
 will be typeset as:
\begin{syntax}
\textbf{Answer 2. Harder} \\
\hspace*{2em} The \ldots \\
\hspace*{2em} \textbf{2.a) Reformulate the problem} It assists \ldots \\
\end{syntax}

     By default the answer entries will appear in the List of Answers 
listing (typeset by the \cs{listofanswers} command).
In order to get the subanswers to appear, 
the \verb?\setcounter{ansdepth}{2}? command was used above.

 To turn off page numbering for the subanswers, do
\begin{lcode}
\cftpagenumbersoff{subanswer}
\end{lcode}

    As another example of \cmd{\newlistentry}, suppose that an extra 
sectioning division below \texttt{subparagraph} is required, 
called \texttt{subsubpara}. The \verb?\subsubpara? command itself can 
be defined via the \ltx\ kernel \cmd{\@startsection} command. 
Also it is necessary to define a \verb?\subsubparamark? macro,
a new \texttt{subsubpara} counter, a \verb?\thesubsubpara? macro and a 
\verb?\l@subsubpara?  macro. Using \cmd{\newlistentry} takes care of 
most of these as shown below; remember the caveats about commands 
with \idxatincode\texttt{@} signs in them (\seeatincode).
\begin{lcode}
 \newcommand{\subsubpara}{\@startsection{subpara}
    {6}                              %                    level
    {\parindent}                     %  indent from left margin
    {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}  %     skip above heading
    {-1em}       run-in heading with % 1em between title & text
    {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape} % italic number and title 
 }
 \newlistentry[subparagraph]{subsubpara}{toc}{5}
 \cftsetindents{subsubpara}{14.0em}{7.0em}
 \newcommand*{\subsubparamark}[1]{}  % gobble heading mark
 \end{lcode}

     Each \listofx\ uses a file to store the list entries, and these
 files must remain open for writing throughout the document processing.
\tx\ has only a limited number of files that it can keep open, and this
 puts a limit on the number of listings that can be used. For a document
 that includes a \toc\ but no other extra ancilliary files (e.g., no
 index\index{index} or bibliography\index{bibliography} output files) 
the maximum number of LoX's, including a \lof\ and \lot, is no more 
than about eleven. If you try and create too many new listings \ltx\ 
will respond with the error message: 
 \begin{center}
 \texttt{No room for a new write} 
 \end{center}
 If you get such a message the only recourse is to redesign your 
document.

\subsection{Example: plates}

    As has been mentioned earlier, some illustrations\index{illustration}
may be tipped in\index{tip in} to a book. Often, these are called 
\emph{plates}\index{plates} if they are on glossy paper\index{paper} 
and the rest of the book is on ordinary paper\index{paper}.
We can define a new kind of Listing for these.

\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\listplatename}{Plates}
\newlistof{listofplates}{lop}{\listplatename}
\newlistentry{plate}{lop}{0}
\cftpagenumbersoff{plate}
\end{lcode}
This code defines the \cmd{\listofplates} command to start the listing 
which will be titled `Plates' from the \cmd{\listplatename} macro. 
The entry name is \texttt{plate} and the file extension is \texttt{lop}. 
As plate pages typically do not have printed folios\index{folio}, 
the \cmd{\cftpagenumbersoff} command has been used to prohibit page 
number printing in the listing.

    If pages are tipped in, then they are put between a verso and 
a recto page. The \Lpack{afterpage} package~\cite{AFTERPAGE} lets 
you specify something that should happen after the current page 
is finished. The next piece of code uses the package and its 
\cmd{\afterpage} macro to define two macros which let you specify 
something that is to be done after the next verso (\cmd{\afternextverso})
or recto (\cmd{\afternextrecto}) page has been completed.
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\afternextverso}[1]{%
  \afterpage{\ifodd\c@page #1\else\afterpage{#1}\fi}}
\newcommand{\afternextrecto}[1]{%
  \afterpage{\ifodd\c@page\afterpage{#1}\else #1\fi}}
\end{lcode}


    The \cmd{\pageref}\marg{labelid} command typesets the page number
corresponding to the location in the document where 
\cmd{\label}\marg{labelid} is specified. The following code defines
two macros\footnote{These only work for arabic page numbers.} 
that print the page number before (\cmd{\priorpageref}) or after 
(\cmd{\nextpageref}) that given by \cmd{\pageref}.
\begin{lcode}
\newcounter{mempref}
\newcommand{\priorpageref}[1]{%
  \setcounter{mempref}{\pageref{#1}}\addtocounter{mempref}{-1}\themempref}
\newcommand{\nextpageref}[1]{%
  \setcounter{mempref}{\pageref{#1}}\addtocounter{mempref}{1}\themempref}
\end{lcode}

    With these preliminaries out of the way, we can use code like the 
following for handling a set of physically tipped in plates.
\begin{lcode}
\afternextverso{\label{tip}
  \addtocontents{lop}{%
    Between pages \priorpageref{tip} and \pageref{tip}
    \par\vspace*{\baselineskip}}
  \addcontentsline{lop}{plate}{First plate}
  \addcontentsline{lop}{plate}{Second plate}
  ...
  \addcontentsline{lop}{plate}{Nth plate}
}
\end{lcode}
This starts off by waiting until the next recto page is started, which
will be the page immediately after the plates, and then inserts the 
label \texttt{tip}. The \cmd{\addtocontents} macro puts its argument
into the plate list \texttt{lop} file, indicating the page numbers 
before and after the set of plates. With the plates being physically 
added to the document it is not possible to use \cmd{\caption}, 
instead the \cmd{\addcontentsline} macros are used to add the plate 
titles to the \texttt{lop} file.

    With a few modifications the code above can also form the basis 
for listing plates that are electronically tipped in but do not have 
printed folios\index{folio} or \cmd{\caption}s.

\index{list!new list of|)}



\LMnote{2010/06/09}{Why do we have this exact section in two different
chapters? No this links to the version i document-divisions.tex }
\section{Chapter precis}

See section~\ref{sec:chapter-precis} on page~\pageref{sec:chapter-precis}.


% \index{chapter!precis|(}

%    Some old style novels, and even some modern text 
%  books,\footnote{For example, Robert Sedgewick, \textit{Algorithms},
%  Addison-Wesley, 1983.} include a short synopsis of the contents of 
%  the chapter either immediately
%  after the chapter heading\index{heading!chapter} or in the \toc, or in both places.

% \begin{syntax}
% \cmd{\chapterprecis}\marg{text} \\
% \end{syntax}
%      The command \cmd{\chapterprecis} prints its argument 
%  both at the
%  point in the document where it is called, and also adds it to the \file{.toc}
%  file. For example:
%  \begin{lcode}
%  ...
%  \chapter{}  first chapter
%  \chapterprecis{Our hero is introduced; family tree; early days.}
%  ...
%  \end{lcode}

% \begin{syntax}
% \cmd{\chapterprecishere}\marg{text} \\
% \cmd{\chapterprecistoc}\marg{text} \\
% \end{syntax}
%  The \cmd{\chapterprecis} command calls these two commands to print the
%  \meta{text} in the document (the \cmd{\chapterprecishere} command) 
%  and to put it into the \toc{} (the \cmd{\chapterprecistoc} command). 
%  These can be used individually if required.

% \begin{syntax}
% \cmd{\prechapterprecis} \cmd{\postchapterprecis} \\
% \end{syntax}
% The \cmd{\chapterprecishere} macro is intended for use immediately after 
% a \cmd{\chapter}. The \meta{text} argument is typeset in
% italics in a \Ie{quote} environment. The macro's definition is:
% \begin{lcode}
% \newcommand{\chapterprecishere}[1]{%
%   \prechapterprecis #1\postchapterprecis}
% \end{lcode}
% where \cmd{\prechapterprecis} and \cmd{\postchapterprecis} are defined
% as:
% \begin{lcode}
% \newcommand{\prechapterprecis}{%
%   \vspace*{\prechapterprecisshift}%
%   \begin{quote}\normalfont\itshape}
% \newcommand{\postchapterprecis}{\end{quote}}
% \end{lcode}
% The \cmd{\prechapterprecis} and \cmd{\postchapterprecis} macros can be 
% changed if another style of typesetting is required.

% \begin{syntax}
% \cmd{\precistoctext}\marg{text} \cmd{\precistocfont} \\
% \end{syntax}
% The \cmd{\chapterprecistoc} macro puts the macro \cmd{\precistoctext} into 
% the \pixfile{toc} file. The default definition is
% \begin{lcode}
% \DeclareRobustCommand{\precistoctext}[1]{%
%   {\leftskip \cftchapterindent\relax
%    \advance\leftskip \cftchapternumwidth\relax
%    \rightskip \@tocrmarg\relax
%    \precistocfont #1\par}}
% \end{lcode}
% Effectively, in the \toc{} \cmd{\precistoctext} typesets its argument like 
% a chapter title using the \cmd{\precistocfont} (default \cmd{\itshape}).

% \index{chapter!precis|)}


\section{Contents lists and bookmarks}
\label{sec:cont-lists-bookm}

\LMnote{2009/06/29}{Added section about contents lists and bookmarks}

With the \Lpack{hyperref} package, the table of contents is often
added as a list of bookmarks thus providing a nice navigation for the
user. There is one slight problem though: when using, say, parts in
the document, all chapters in that part ends up as a child of this
part bookmark---including the index and bibliography. A simple fix to
this is to add
\begin{lcode}
  \makeatletter
  \renewcommand*{\toclevel@chapter}{-1}
  \makeatother
\end{lcode}
just before the material you would like to pull out of the part tree.

\LMnote{2010/06/09}{Heikos own recommendation}
A better solution is the \Lpack{bookmark} package, add it to the
preamble, and add 
\begin{lcode}
  \bookmarksetup{startatroot}
\end{lcode}
before the stuff you want to have moved out of, say, a part.


%#% extend
%#% extstart include flosts-and-captions.tex

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-05-10 17:06:52 +0200 (Fri, 10 May 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 458 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}


%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%\chapterstyle{hangnum}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 \chapter{Floats and captions} \label{chap:captions}


    A float\index{float} environment is a particular kind of 
box\index{box}  --- one that \ltx\ decides where it should go although
you can provide hints as to where it should be placed; 
all other boxes are put at the point where they are defined. 
Within reason you can put what you like within a float but it is 
unreasonable, for example, to put a float inside 
another float. The standard classes provide two kinds of float 
environments, namely \Ie{figure} and \Ie{table}. The only difference
between these is the naming and numbering of any caption\index{caption} 
within the environments --- a \cmd{\caption} in a \Ie{figure} 
environment uses \cmd{\figurename} while a \cmd{\caption} in a 
\Ie{table} environment uses \cmd{\tablename}. Figures and tables are 
numbered sequentially but the two numbering schemes are independent 
of each other.

    The class provides means of defining new kinds of floats. It also
provides additional forms of captions for use both within and outside 
float environments together with handles for changing the style 
of captions.

\section{New float environments} \label{sec:newfloat}

    It is often forgotten that the \ltx\ float environments come
in both starred and unstarred forms. The unstarred form typesets the 
float contents\index{float!single column} in one column, which is 
the most usual form for a book. The starred form typesets the contents 
of the float across the top of both columns\index{float!double column} 
in a \Lopt{twocolumn} document. In a \Lopt{onecolumn} document there 
is no difference between the starred and unstarred forms.

\index{float!new|(} %)| emacs

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\newfloat}\oarg{within}\marg{fenv}\marg{ext}\marg{capname} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(newfloat)%
  {\cs{newfloat}\oarg{within}\marg{fenv}\marg{ext}\marg{capname}}%
  {Creates new float environments, \texttt{fenv} and \texttt{fenv*},
   using counter \texttt{fenv}, which may be restarted by the 
   \meta{within} counter, putting captioning information into the
   file with extension \meta{ext}, and using \meta{capname} as the
   name for a caption.}
 The \cmd{\newfloat} command creates two new floating environments 
called \meta{fenv} and \meta{fenv*}. If there
is not already a counter\index{counter} defined for \meta{fenv} a new 
one will be created to be restarted by the counter \meta{within}, 
if that is specified.  A caption\index{caption} within the environment 
will be written out to a file with extension \meta{ext}.
The caption, if present, will start with \meta{capname}. For example, 
the \texttt{figure} float\index{figure!float definition} for the class 
is defined as:
\begin{lcode}
\newfloat[chapter]{figure}{lof}{\figurename}
\renewcommand{\thefigure}{%
  \ifnum\c@chapter>\z@ \thechapter.\fi \@arabic\c@figure}
\end{lcode}
The last bit of the definition is internal code to make sure that if a
figure\index{figure} is in the document before chapter numbering starts, 
then the figure\index{figure} number will not be preceeded by a 
non-existent chapter number.

 The captioning style\index{caption!style} for floats defined 
with \cmd{\newfloat} is the same as
for the figures\index{figure} and tables\index{table}.

    The \cmd{\newfloat} command generates several new commands, some of
which are internal \ltx\ commands. For convenience, assume that the 
command was called as 
\begin{lcode}
\newfloat{F}{X}{capname}
\end{lcode}
so \texttt{F} is the name of the float environment and also the name of 
the counter for the caption, and \texttt{X} is the file extension.
The following float environment and related commands are then created.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{F} float material \eenv{F} \\
\senv{F*} float material \eenv{F*} \\
\end{syntax}
 The new float environment is called \texttt{F}, and can be used as 
either \senv{F} or \senv{F*}, with the matching \eenv{F} or \eenv{F*}.
It is given the standard default position\index{float!position} 
specification of 
[\textsf{t}\ixposarg{t}\textsf{b}\ixposarg{b}\textsf{p}\ixposarg{p}].

\begin{syntax}
 \Icn{Xdepth} \\
\end{syntax}
 The \Icn{Xdepth} counter is analogous to the standard \Icn{tocdepth} 
counter in that it specifies that entries in a listing should not be
typeset\index{ToC!controlling entries} if their numbering level is 
greater than \Icn{Xdepth}. The default definition is 
\begin{lcode}
\setcounter{Xdepth}{1}
\end{lcode}
To have a subfloat of \texttt{X} appear in the listing do
\begin{lcode}
\setcounter{Xdepth}{2}
\end{lcode}


    As an example, suppose you wanted both figures\index{figure} 
(which come with the class), and diagrams\index{float!new diagram}. 
You could then do something 
like the following.
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\diagramname}{Diagram}
\newcommand{\listdiagramname}{List of Diagrams}
\newlistof{listofdiagrams}{dgm}{\listdiagramname}
\newfloat{diagram}{dgm}{\diagramname}
\newlistentry{diagram}{dgm}{0}
\begin{document}
 ...
\listoffigures
\listfofdiagrams
 ...
\begin{diagram}
\caption{A diagram} \label{diag1}
 ...
\end{diagram}
As diagram~\ref{diag1} shows ...
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\setfloatadjustment}\marg{floatname}\marg{code}
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setfloatadjustment)%
  {\cs{setfloatadjustment}\marg{floatname}\marg{code}}%
  {Add global internal adjustment to a given type of float. Empty by
    default, but can easily be used to make all floats centered or all
  tables in a smaller font size.}
Often it is useful to add some global configuration to a given type of
float such that one will not have to add this to each and every
float. For example to have all (floating) figures and tables automatically
centered plus have all (floating) tables typeset in \cmd{\small} use
\begin{lcode}
  \setfloatadjustment{figure}{\centering}
  \setfloatadjustment{table}{\small\centering}
\end{lcode}
\LMnote{2011/02/18}{I've removed the figure*adjustment feature, so
  there is no differenting between starred and non starred floats when
it comes to inner adjustment}


\subsection{Margin floats}
\label{sec:margin-floats}

We also provide two environments to insert an image or table into the
margin (using \cmd{\marginpar}). The construction is inspired by the
Tufte \LaTeX\ collection.
\begin{syntax}
  \senv{marginfigure}\oarg{len} float material \eenv{marginfigure} \\
  \senv{margintable}\oarg{len} float material \eenv{margintable} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(marginfigure)%
  {\senv{marginfigure}\oarg{length}}%
  {Environment which inserts its contents into the margin, and enables
  figure captions. The optional argument should be a length and is used
to perform manual up/down adjustments to the placement.}
\glossary(margintable)%
  {\senv{margintable}\oarg{length}}%
  {Environment which inserts its contents into the margin, and enables
  figure captions.The optional argument should be a length and is used
to perform manual up/down adjustments to the placement.}
Because this is inserted differently than the ordinary \Ie{figure} or
\Ie{table} floats, one might get into the situation where a figure
float inserted before a margin float, might float \emph{past} the
margin float and thus have different caption numbering. For this
reason the margin float contain a float blocking device such that any
unplaced floats are forced to be placed before we start typesetting a
margin figure.

\fancybreak{}

The \Ie{marginfigure} and \Ie{margintable} environments can of course
be adjusted using \cmd{\setfloatadjustment}, default
\begin{lcode}
  \setfloatadjustment{marginfigure}{\centering}
  \setfloatadjustment{margintable}{\centering}
\end{lcode}
It may be useful to adjust the captioning separately, for this we have
added
\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\setmarginfloatcaptionadjustment}\marg{float}\marg{code}
\end{syntax}
where \meta{float} is \verb?figure? or \verb?table?. The intent is to
enable the user to choose a different captioning style (or similar)
within a margin float, for example typesetting the caption ragged
left/right depending on the page.

This \emph{left/right depending on the page} is a little hard to do,
so for the \cmd{\marginpar} (which the margin float use internally) we
provide the following two macros
\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\setmpjustification}\marg{at left of textblock}\marg{at right
    of textblock}\\
  \cmd{\mpjustification}
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setmpjustification)%
  {\cs{setmpjustification}\marg{at left of textblock}\marg{at right
    of textblock}}%
  {Loads the \cs{mpjustification} command to execute the left part
    when placed at the left of the text block and vice versa.}%
\glossary(mpjustification)%
  {\cs{mpjustification}}%
  {Specialized macro to be used within \cs{marginpar}s}
Basically \cmd{\mpjustification} execute \meta{at left of textblock}
when it is executed at the left of the text block and vice versa. For
it to work the margin into which the \cmd{marginpar} should do,
\emph{has} to be specified using \cmd{marginparmargin}. The default is
\begin{lcode}
  \setmpjustification{\raggedleft}{\raggedright}
\end{lcode}
To have both a margin figure and its caption typeset ragged against
the text block, use
\begin{lcode}
  \setfloatadjustment{marginfigure}{\mpjustification}
  \setmarginfloatcaptionadjustment{figure}{\captionstyle{\mpjustification}}
\end{lcode}
It may be useful to allow hyphenation within the raggedness, which can
be done using the \Lpack{ragged2e} package and
\begin{lcode}
  \setmpjustification{\RaggedLeft}{\RaggedRight}
\end{lcode}







\index{float!new|)} %|

\section{Setting off a float} \label{sec:floatsetoff}

\index{float!set off|(} %|

    Sometimes it is desireable to set off a float, more probably
an illustration than a tabular, from its surroundings. The \Ie{framed}
environment, described later in \Cref{chap:bvf}, might come in handy 
for this.

    The following code produces the example\indextwo{framed}{float} 
\figurerefname s~\ref{fig:framef} and~\ref{fig:framefcap}.

\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{framed}\centering
FRAMED FIGURE
\end{framed}
\caption{Example framed figure}\label{fig:framef}
\end{figure}

\begin{figure}
\begin{framed}\centering
FRAMED FIGURE AND CAPTION
\caption{Example framed figure and caption}\label{fig:framefcap}
\end{framed}
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}

\begin{figure}
%\begin{shadefigure}
\centering
\begin{framed}\centering
FRAMED FIGURE
\end{framed}
\caption{Example framed figure}\label{fig:framef}
%\end{shadefigure}
\end{figure}

\begin{figure}
\begin{framed}\centering
FRAMED FIGURE AND CAPTION
\caption{Example framed figure and caption}\label{fig:framefcap}
\end{framed}
\end{figure}

    If framing seems overkill then you can use 
rules\indextwo{ruled}{float} instead, as in the example code below
which produces 
\figurerefname s~\ref{fig:rulef} and~\ref{fig:rulefcap}.

\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
\centering
\hrule\vspace{\onelineskip}
RULED FIGURE
\vspace{\onelineskip}\hrule
\vspace{\onelineskip}
\caption{Example ruled figure}\label{fig:rulef}
\end{figure}

\begin{figure}
\centering
\hrule\vspace{\onelineskip}
RULED FIGURE AND CAPTION
\vspace{\onelineskip}\hrule
\vspace{0.2pt}\hrule
\vspace{\onelineskip}
\caption{Example ruled figure and caption}\label{fig:rulefcap}
\hrule
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}

\begin{shadefigure}
%\centering
%\definecolor{shadecolor}{gray}{0.75}
%\begin{shaded}
\hrule\vspace{\onelineskip}
RULED FIGURE
\vspace{\onelineskip}\hrule
\vspace{\onelineskip}
\caption{Example ruled figure}\label{fig:rulef}
%\end{shaded}
\end{shadefigure}

\begin{shadefigure}
%\centering
%\definecolor{shadecolor}{gray}{0.75}
%\begin{shaded}
\hrule\vspace{\onelineskip}
RULED FIGURE AND CAPTION
\vspace{\onelineskip}\hrule
\vspace{0.2pt}\hrule
\vspace{\onelineskip}
\caption{Example ruled figure and caption}\label{fig:rulefcap}
\hrule
%\end{shaded}
\end{shadefigure}

\index{float!set off|)}%|

 \section{Multiple floats} \label{sec:multfloats}

\index{float!multiple|(}%|

You can effectively put what you like inside a float box. Normally there 
is just a single picture or tabular in a float but you can include 
as many of these as will fit inside the box.

% \begin{figure}
 \begin{shadefigure}
 \centering
 \hspace*{\fill} 
   {ILLUSTRATION 1} \hfill {ILLUSTRATION 2} 
 \hspace*{\fill}
 \caption{Example float with two illustrations} \label{fig:mult1}
 \end{shadefigure}
% \end{figure}

    Three typical cases of multiple figures\index{figure}/tables\index{table} 
in a single float come to mind:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item Multiple illustrations\index{illustration}/tabulars with a single 
caption.
 \item Multiple illustrations\index{illustration}/tabulars each 
individually captioned.
 \item Multiple illustrations\index{illustration}/tabulars with one 
main caption and individual subcaptions.
 \end{itemize}

    Figure~\ref{fig:mult1} is an example of multiple 
illustrations\index{illustration!multiple} in a single float 
with a single caption. The figure was produced by the following code.
 \begin{lcode}
 \begin{figure}
 \centering
 \hspace*{\fill} 
   {ILLUSTRATION 1} \hfill {ILLUSTRATION 2} 
 \hspace*{\fill}
 \caption{Example float with two illustrations} \label{fig:mult1}
 \end{figure}
 \end{lcode}
 The \verb?\hspace*{\fill}? and \cmd{\hfill} commands were used to 
space the two illustrations\index{illustration} equally. Of course 
\cmd{\includegraphics} 
or \Ie{tabular} environments could just as well be used instead of the 
\verb?{ILLUSTRATION N}? text.

    The following code produces \figurerefname s~\ref{fig:mult2} 
and~\ref{fig:mult3} which are examples of two separately 
captioned\index{caption!multiple}
illustrations\index{illustration} in one float.
 \begin{lcode}
 \begin{figure}
 \centering
 \begin{minipage}{0.4\textwidth}
   \centering
   GRAPHIC 1
   \caption{Graphic 1 in a float} \label{fig:mult2}
 \end{minipage} 
 \hfill
 \begin{minipage}{0.4\textwidth}
   \centering
   GRAPHIC 2
   \caption{Graphic 2 in same float} \label{fig:mult3}
 \end{minipage} 
 \end{figure}
 \end{lcode}
 In this case the illustrations\index{illustration} (or graphics or 
tabulars) are put into separate \Ie{minipage} 
environments\index{minipage!in float} within the float, 
and the captions are also put within the \Ie{minipage}s. Note that 
any required \cmd{\label} must also be inside the \Ie{minipage}. 
If you wished, you could add yet another (main) caption after the end 
of the two \Ie{minipage}s.

%\begin{figure}
 \begin{shadefigure}
 \centering
 \begin{minipage}{0.4\textwidth}
   \centering
   GRAPHIC 1
   \caption{Graphic 1 in a float} \label{fig:mult2}
 \end{minipage} 
 \hfill
 \begin{minipage}{0.4\textwidth}
   \centering
   GRAPHIC 2
   \caption{Graphic 2 in same float} \label{fig:mult3}
 \end{minipage} 
 \end{shadefigure}
% \end{figure}

    It is slightly more complex if you want to put, say, both a 
tabulation captioned as a table and a graph, captioned as a figure, 
which illustrates the tabulation, as a 
float\index{float!multiple!table and figure} 
only permits one kind of caption. The class solves this problem by 
letting you define `fixed' captions\index{caption!fixed} which are
independent of the particular kind of the float. These are described in 
detail later.

    Things do get a little trickier, though, if the bodies and/or
the captions in a float are different heights 
(as in \figurerefname s~\ref{fig:mult2} and~\ref{fig:mult3}) 
and you want to align them horizontally.
Here are some examples.


    This code produces \figurerefname s~\ref{fig:left1} 
and~\ref{fig:right1}. The new \cmd{\hhrule} macro produces a rule
twice as thick as \cmd{\hrule} does.
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\hhrule}{\hrule height 0.8pt}% double thickness

\begin{figure}
\hhrule \vspace{\onelineskip}
\null\hfill\parbox{0.45\linewidth}{%
  \centering
  Aligned to the center of the right figure
}\hfill
\parbox{0.45\linewidth}{%
  \centering
   This is the right figure which is taller
   than the first one (the one at the left)
}\hfill\null
\vspace{\onelineskip}\hrule
\null\hfill\parbox[t]{0.4\linewidth}{%
  \caption{Left figure}\label{fig:left1}%
}\hfill
\parbox[t]{0.4\linewidth}{%
  \caption{Right figure. This has more text than the adjacent
           caption (\ref{fig:left1}) so the heights are unequal}%
           \label{fig:right1}%
}\hfill\null
\hhrule
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}

\newcommand*{\hhrule}{\hrule height 0.8pt}% double thickness

%\begin{figure}
\begin{shadefigure}
\hhrule \vspace{\onelineskip}
\null\hfill\parbox{0.45\linewidth}{%
  \centering
  Aligned to the center of the right figure
}\hfill
\parbox{0.45\linewidth}{%
  \centering
   This is the right figure which is taller
   than the first one (the one at the left)
}\hfill\null
\vspace{\onelineskip}\hrule
\null\hfill\parbox[t]{0.4\linewidth}{%
  \caption{Left center aligned}\label{fig:left1}%
}\hfill
\parbox[t]{0.4\linewidth}{%
  \caption{Right figure. This has more text than the adjacent
           caption (\ref{fig:left1}) so the heights are unequal}%
           \label{fig:right1}%
}\hfill\null
\hhrule
\end{shadefigure}
%\end{figure}


    The following code produces \figurerefname s~\ref{fig:left2} 
and~\ref{fig:right2}.
\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
\hhrule \vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
\null\hfill\parbox[t]{0.45\linewidth}{%
  \centering
  Aligned to the top of the right figure
}\hfill
\parbox[t]{0.45\linewidth}{%
  \centering
   This is the right figure which is taller
   than the first one (the one at the left)
}\hfill\null
\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}\hrule
\null\hfill\parbox[t]{0.4\linewidth}{%
  \caption{Left top aligned}\label{fig:left2}%
}\hfill
\parbox[t]{0.4\linewidth}{%
  \caption{Right figure. This has more text than the adjacent
           caption (\ref{fig:left2}) so the heights are unequal}%
           \label{fig:right2}%
}\hfill\null
\hhrule
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}

%\begin{figure}
\begin{shadefigure}
\hhrule \vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
\null\hfill\parbox[t]{0.45\linewidth}{%
  \centering
  Aligned to the top of the right figure
}\hfill
\parbox[t]{0.45\linewidth}{%
  \centering
   This is the right figure which is taller
   than the first one (the one at the left)
}\hfill\null
\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}\hrule
\null\hfill\parbox[t]{0.4\linewidth}{%
  \caption{Left top aligned}\label{fig:left2}%
}\hfill
\parbox[t]{0.4\linewidth}{%
  \caption{Right figure. This has more text than the adjacent
           caption (\ref{fig:left2}) so the heights are unequal}%
           \label{fig:right2}%
}\hfill\null
\hhrule
\end{shadefigure}
%\end{figure}

    The next code produces \figurerefname s~\ref{fig:left3} 
and~\ref{fig:right3}.
\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
\hhrule \vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
\null\hfill\parbox[b]{0.45\linewidth}{%
  \centering
  Aligned to the bottom of the right figure
}\hfill
\parbox[b]{0.45\linewidth}{%
  \centering
   This is the right figure which is taller
   than the first one (the one at the left)
}\hfill\null
\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}\hrule
\null\hfill\parbox[t]{0.4\linewidth}{%
  \caption{Left bottom aligned}\label{fig:left3}%
}\hfill
\parbox[t]{0.4\linewidth}{%
  \caption{Right figure. This has more text than the adjacent
           caption (\ref{fig:left3}) so the heights are unequal}%
           \label{fig:right3}%
}\hfill\null
\hhrule
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}

%\begin{figure}
\begin{shadefigure}
\hhrule \vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
\null\hfill\parbox[b]{0.45\linewidth}{%
  \centering
  Aligned to the bottom of the right figure
}\hfill
\parbox[b]{0.45\linewidth}{%
  \centering
   This is the right figure which is taller
   than the first one (the one at the left)
}\hfill\null
\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}\hrule
\null\hfill\parbox[t]{0.4\linewidth}{%
  \caption{Left bottom aligned}\label{fig:left3}%
}\hfill
\parbox[t]{0.4\linewidth}{%
  \caption{Right figure. This has more text than the adjacent
           caption (\ref{fig:left3}) so the heights are unequal}%
           \label{fig:right3}%
}\hfill\null
\hhrule
\end{shadefigure}
%\end{figure}


\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\newsubfloat}\marg{float} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(newsubfloat)%
  {\cs{newsubfloat}\marg{float}}%
  {Creates subcaptions for use in the \meta{float} float.}
 The \cmd{\newsubfloat} command\index{float!new subfloat}  
creates subcaptions\index{caption!new subcaption}
(\cmd{\subcaption}, \cmd{\subtop} and \cmd{\subbottom})
for use within the float environment \meta{fenv} previously
defined via \cmd{\newfloat}\oarg{...}\marg{fenv}\marg{...}. 
Subcaptions are discussed below in \Sref{sec:subcaps}. 
\PWnote{2009/08/23}{Improved cross references between \cs{newsubfloat} 
and \cs{subcaption}.}

\index{float!multiple|)}%|

 \section{Where \ltx\ puts floats} \label{sec:floatplace}

\index{float!placement|(}%|

 The general format for a float environment is: \\
 \senv{float}\oarg{loc} ... \eenv{float} 
or for double column\index{float!double column} floats: \\
 \senv{float*}\oarg{loc} ... \eenv{float*} \\
where the optional argument \meta{loc}, consisting of one or more characters,
specifies a location where the float may be placed. Note that the 
\Lpack{multicol}\index{column!multiple} package only supports the 
starred floats and it will not let you have a single 
column\index{float!single column} float. The possible \meta{loc} values 
are one or more of the following:
\begin{itemize}
\item[\textsf{b}\ixposarg{b}] \emph{bottom}: at the bottom\index{float!bottom}
    of a page. 
    This does not apply to double column\index{float!double column} floats 
    as they may only be placed at the top of a page.
\item[\textsf{h}\ixposarg{h}] \emph{here}: if possible exactly where 
  the float\index{float!here} environment is defined. 
  It does not apply to double 
  column\index{float!double column} floats.
\item[\textsf{p}\ixposarg{p}] \emph{page}: on a separate page
  containing only floats\index{float!page} (no text); this is called
  a \emph{float page}.
\item[\textsf{t}\ixposarg{t}] \emph{top}: at the top\index{float!top} 
    of a page. 
\item[\textsf{!}] make an extra effort to place the float at the 
  earliest place specified by the rest of the argument.
\end{itemize}
The default for \meta{loc} is \textsf{t}\textsf{b}\textsf{p}, 
so the float may be placed at the top, or bottom, or on a 
float\index{float!page} page; the default works well 95\% of the time.
Floats of the same kind are output in
definition order, except that a double column\index{float!double column} float 
may be output before
a later single column\index{float!single column} float of the same kind, or 
\textit{vice-versa}\footnote{This little quirk
is fixed by the \Lpack{fixltx2e} package, at least for tables and figures.
The package is part of a normal \ltx\ distribution.}. 
A float is never put on an earlier page than its definition but may be 
put on the same or later page of its definition. If a float cannot be 
placed, all suceeding floats will be held up, and \ltx\ can store no 
more than 16 held up floats. A float cannot be placed if it would cause 
an overfull page, or it otherwise cannot be fitted according the  
float placement parameters.
A \cmd{\clearpage} or \cmd{\cleardoublepage} or \eenv{document} 
flushes\index{float!flush}
out all unprocessed floats, irrespective of the \meta{loc} and float
parameters, putting them on float-only\index{float!page} pages. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setfloatlocations}\marg{float}\marg{locs} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setfloatlocations)%
  {\cs{setfloatlocations}\marg{float}\marg{locs}}%
  {Sets the default location for the \meta{float} (e.g., \Pe{table})
   to \meta{locs} (default \texttt{tbp}).}
You can set the location for all floats of type \meta{float} to
\meta{locs} with the \cs{setfloatlocations} declaration. The class
initialises these using:
\begin{lcode}
\setfloatlocations{figure}{tbp}
\setfloatlocations{table}{tbp}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\suppressfloats}\oarg{pos} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(suppressfloats)%
  {\cs{suppressfloats}\oarg{pos}}%
  {Suppresses any floats on the current page at the given \meta{pos} placement.}
    You can use the command \cmd{\suppressfloats} to 
suppress\index{float!suppress} floats
at a given \meta{pos} on the current page. 
\cmd{\suppressfloats}\verb?[t]? 
prevents any floats at the top\index{float!suppress top} of the page and 
\cmd{\suppressfloats}\verb?[b]? 
prevents any floats at the bottom\index{float!suppress bottom} of the page. 
The simple \cmd{\suppressfloats} prevents both top and bottom floats.

\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\FloatBlock}\\
  \cmd{\FloatBlockAllowAbove}\\
  \cmd{\FloatBlockAllowBelow}
\end{syntax}
\glossary(FloatBlock)%
  {\cs{FloatBlock}}%
  {Force \LaTeX\ to place all unplaced floats before proceeding this point.}
\glossary(FloatBlockAllowAbove)%
  {\cs{FloatBlockAllowAbove}}%
  {Lessens the restriction by \cs{FloatBlock} such that a float
    inserted \emph{after} a \cs{FloatBlock} can appear at the top of
    the same page as \cs{FloatBlock}.}
\glossary(FloatBlockAllowBelow)%
  {\cs{FloatBlockAllowBelow}}%
  {Lessens the restriction by \cs{FloatBlock} such that a float
    inserted \emph{before} a \cs{FloatBlock} can appear at the bottom of
    the same page as \cs{FloatBlock}.}
Contrary to \cmd{\suppressfloats} \cmd{\FloatBlock}\footnote{Yes, it
  \emph{is} the same as \cs{FloatBarrier} from the
  \Lpack{placeins} package, kudos to Donald Arseneau. For various
  reasons we cannot emulate the \Lpack{placeins} package and its
  options, thus we have verbatimly copied and renamed it instead.} will block
floats from passing this point, i.e.\ it demands \LaTeX\ to place any
unprocessed floats before proceeding. It is similar to
\cmd{\clearpage} but it does not necessarily introduce a page break
before proceeding.

\cmd{\FloatBlockAllowAbove} lessens the restriction a little, in a
situation like this
\begin{lcode}
  \FloatBlock
  some float here
\end{lcode}
\cmd{\FloatBlockAllowAbove} will allow the float to be placed at the
top of the same page as \cmd{\FloatBlock}. \cmd{\FloatBlockAllowAbove}
is the reverse situation.

It may be beneficial to be able to add \cmd{\FloatBlock} to sectional
commands. This can be done via
\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\setFloatBlockFor}\marg{sectional name}
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setFloatBlockFor)%
{\cs{setFloatBLockFor}\marg{sectional name}}%
{Adds \cs{FloatBlock} within the \cs{\meta{section name}} macro.}
where \meta{sectional name} is \emph{withput} the \cs{}, i.e.\
\begin{lcode}
  \setFloatBlockFor{section}
\end{lcode}



 
\fancybreak{}

    The \Lpack{flafter} package, which should have come with your \ltx\
distribution, provides a means of preventing floats from moving
backwards from their definition position in the text. This can be useful to
ensure, for example, that a float early in a \verb?\section{...}? is not 
typeset before the section heading\index{heading}.

\begin{figure}
\centering
\drawparameterstrue
\drawfloatpage
\caption{Float and text page parameters}\label{fig:fpp}
\end{figure}

\begin{figure}
\centering
\drawparameterstrue
\setlayoutscale{0.9}
\drawfloat
\caption{Float parameters}\label{fig:flp}
\end{figure}

 \begin{table}
\begin{adjustwidth}{-3cm}{-3cm}
 \centering
%% \captionnamefont{\small\sffamily}
%% \captiontitlefont{\small\sffamily}
 \setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{10pt}
 \caption{Float placement parameters}\label{tab:fpp}
 \begin{tabular}{lp{0.5\textwidth}r} \toprule
 Parameter & Controls & Default \\ \midrule
 \multicolumn{3}{c}{Counters --- change with \cs{setcounter} } \\ \midrule
 \Icn{topnumber}  & max number of floats at top of a page & 2 \\
 \Icn{bottomnumber} & max number of floats at bottom of a page & 1 \\
 \Icn{totalnumber} & max number of floats on a text page & 3 \\
 \Icn{dbltopnumber} & like \Icn{topnumber} for double column 
                      floats\index{float!double column} & 2 \\ \midrule
 \multicolumn{3}{c}{Commands --- change with \cs{renewcommand} } \\ \midrule
 \cmd{\topfraction} & max fraction of page reserved for top 
                      floats\index{float!top} & 0.7 \\
 \cmd{\bottomfraction} & max fraction of page reserved for bottom 
                         floats\index{float!bottom} & 0.3 \\
 \cmd{\textfraction} & min fraction of page that must have text & 0.2 \\
 \cmd{\dbltopfraction} & like \cmd{\topfraction} for double column
                         floats\index{float!double column} floats & 0.7 \\
 \cmd{\floatpagefraction} & min fraction of a float page that must have float(s) & 0.5 \\
 \cmd{\dblfloatpagefraction} & like \cmd{\floatpagefraction} for double column
                              floats\index{float!double column} & 0.5 \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{adjustwidth}
\end{table}


 \begin{table}
\begin{adjustwidth}{-3cm}{-3cm}
 \centering
%% \captionnamefont{\small\sffamily}
%% \captiontitlefont{\small\sffamily}
 \setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{10pt}
 \caption{Float spacing parameters}\label{tab:fsp}
 \begin{tabular}{lp{0.5\textwidth}r} \toprule
 Parameter & Controls & Default \\ \midrule
 \multicolumn{3}{c}{Text page lengths --- change with \cs{setlength} } \\ \midrule
 \lnc{\floatsep} & vertical space between floats & 12pt \\
 \lnc{\textfloatsep} & vertical space between a top (bottom) float and 
                       suceeding (preceeding) text & 20pt  \\
 \lnc{\intextsep} & vertical space above and below an \texttt{h} 
                    float\index{float!here} & 12pt \\
 \lnc{\dblfloatsep} & like \lnc{\floatsep} for double column
                      floats\index{float!double column} & 12pt \\
 \lnc{\dbltextfloatsep} & like  \lnc{\textfloatsep} for double column
                          floats\index{float!double column} & 20pt \\ \midrule
 \multicolumn{3}{c}{Float page lengths --- change with \cs{setlength} } \\ \midrule
 \lnc{\@fptop} & space at the top of the page & \verb?0pt plus 1fil? \\
 \lnc{\@fpsep} & space between floats & \verb?8pt plus 2fil? \\
 \lnc{\@fpbot} & space at the bottom of the page & \verb?0pt plus 1fil? \\
 \lnc{\@dblfptop} & like \lnc{\@fptop} for double column
                    floats\index{float!double column} & \verb?0pt plus 1fil? \\
 \lnc{\@dblfpsep} & like \lnc{\@fpsep} for double column 
                    floats\index{float!double column} & \verb?8pt plus 2fil? \\
 \lnc{\@dblfpbot} & like \lnc{\@fpbot} for double column 
                    floats\index{float!double column} & \verb?0pt plus 1fil? \\ 
\bottomrule
 \end{tabular}
\end{adjustwidth}
 \end{table}

 Figures~\ref{fig:fpp} and~\ref{fig:flp} illustrate the many float 
parameters\index{float!parameters}
and \tref{tab:fpp} lists the float parameters and the typical 
standard default values. The lengths controlling the spaces surroundind
floats are listed
in \tref{tab:fsp}; typical values are shown as they depend on both
the class and the size option.

    Given the displayed defaults, the height of a top float must be 
less than 70\% of the textheight and there can be no more than 2 top 
floats\index{float!top}
on a text page. Similarly, the height of a bottom float must not
exceed 30\% of the textheight and there can be no more than 1 bottom
float\index{float!bottom} on a text page. There can be no more than 
3 floats (top, bottom and here\index{float!here})
on the page. At least 20\% of a text page with floats must be text.
On a float page\index{float!page} (one that has no text, only floats) 
the sum of the heights
of the floats must be at least 50\% of the textheight. The floats on a float
page should be vertically centered.

    Under certain extreme and unlikely conditions and with the defaults
\ltx\ might have trouble finding a place for a float. 
Consider what will happen if a float is specified as a bottom float and
its height is 40\% of the textheight and this is followed by a float whose
height is 90\% of the textheight. The first is too large to actually 
go at the bottom of a text page but too small to go on a float page by 
itself. The second has to go on a float page but it is too large to share 
the float page with the first float. \ltx\ is stuck!

    At this point it is worthwhile to be precise about the effect of a
 one character \meta{loc} argument:
\begin{itemize}
\item[\textsf{b}\ixposarg{b}] means: 
      `put the float at the bottom of a page with some
      text above it, and nowhere else'. 
      The float must fit into the \cmd{\bottomfraction} space 
      otherwise it and subsequent floats will be held up.
\item[\textsf{h}\ixposarg{h}] means: 
      `put the float at this point and nowhere else'. 
      The float must fit into the space left on the page 
      otherwise it and subsequent floats will be held up.
\item[\textsf{p}\ixposarg{p}] means: 
      `put the float on a page that has no text but may
      have other floats on it'. 
      There must be at least `\cmd{\floatpagefraction}' worth of 
      floats to go on a float only page before the float will be output.
\item[\textsf{t}\ixposarg{t}] means: 
      `put the float at the top of a page with some
      text below it, and nowhere else'. 
      The float must fit into the \cmd{\topfraction} space 
      otherwise it and subsequent floats will be held up.
\item[\textsf{!...}] means: 
      `ignore the \cs{...fraction} values for this float'.
\end{itemize}

 You must try and pick a combination from these that will let \ltx\ find
a place to put your floats. However, you can 
also change the float parameters to make it easier to find places
to put floats. Some examples are:
\begin{itemize}
\item Decrease \cmd{\textfraction} to get more `float' on a text page, 
  but the sum of \cmd{\textfraction} and \cmd{\topfraction} and the sum 
  of \cmd{\textfraction} and \cmd{\bottomfraction} should not exceed 1.0, 
  otherwise the placement algorithm falls apart. A minimum value for 
  \cmd{\textfraction} is about 0.10 --- a page with less than 10\% text 
  looks better with no text at all, just floats.

\item Both \cmd{\topfraction} and \cmd{\bottomfraction} can be increased, 
  and it does not matter if their sum exceeds 1.0. A good typographic 
  style is that floats are encouraged to go at the top of a page, and 
  a better balance is achieved if the float space on a page is larger
  at the top than the bottom.

\item Making \cmd{\floatpagefraction} too small might have the effect of a
 float page just having one small float. However, to make sure that a float
 page never has more than one float on it, do: 
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\floatpagefraction}{0.01}
\setlength{\@fpsep}{\textheight}
\end{lcode}

\item Setting \lnc{\@fptop} and \lnc{\@dblftop} to \texttt{0pt}, 
      \lnc{\@fpsep} to \texttt{8pt}, 
       and \lnc{\@fpbot} and \lnc{\@dblfpbot} to \texttt{0pt plus 1fil} 
       will force floats on 
       a float page to start at the top of the page.


\item Setting \lnc{\@fpbot} and \lnc{\@dblfpbot} to \texttt{0pt}, 
      \lnc{\@fpsep} to \texttt{8pt},
       and \lnc{\@fptop} and \lnc{\@dblfptop} to \texttt{0pt plus 1fil} 
       will force floats on 
       a float page to the bottom of the page.
\end{itemize}

     If you are experimenting, a reasonable starting position is:
\begin{lcode}
\setcounter{topnumber}{3}
\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2}
\setcounter{totalnumber}{4}
\renewcommand{\topfraction}{0.85}
\renewcommand{\bottomfraction}{0.5}
\renewcommand{\textfraction}{0.15}
\renewcommand{\floatpagefraction}{0.7}
\end{lcode}
and similarly for double column\index{float!double column} floats if you will 
have any. Actually, there is no need
to try these settings as they are the default for this class.

    One of \ltx's little quirks is that on a text page, the `height' of 
a float is its actual height plus \lnc{\textfloatsep} or \lnc{\floatsep}, 
while on a float page the `height' is the actual height. This means that 
when using the default \meta{loc} of \verb?[tbp]? at least one of the text 
page float fractions (\cmd{\topfraction} and/or \cmd{\bottomfraction}) 
must be larger than the \cmd{\floatpagefraction} by an amount sufficient 
to take account of the maximum text page separation value.
 

\index{float!placement|)} % |

\section{Captions}

\index{caption|(} %)|

 Some publishers require, and some authors prefer, captioning styles
other than the one style provided by standard \ltx. 
Further, some demand that documents that include multi-part
tables\index{table} use a \textit{continuation caption} on all but the first
part of the multi-part table\index{table}. For the times where such 
a table\index{table} is specified by the author as a set of 
tables\index{table}, the class provides a simple `continuation' 
caption\index{caption!continuation} command to meet this 
requirement. It also provides a facility for an `anonymous' 
caption\index{caption!anonymous}
which can be used in any float\index{float} environment. 
Captions can be defined that are suitable for use in non-float
environments, such as placing a picture in a minipage and captioning
it just as though it had been put into a normal 
figure\index{figure} environment.

    The commands described below are very similar to
those supplied by the \Lpack{ccaption} package~\cite{CCAPTION}.

\section{Caption styling} 

\index{caption!style|(} %)|

    Just as a reminder, the default appearance of a caption for, say,
a table looks like this:
\begin{center}
Table 11.7: Title for the table
\end{center}
That is, it is typeset in the normal body font, with a colon after
the number.

    The class uses the following to specify the standard \ltx\ caption
style:
\begin{lcode}
\captionnamefont{}
\captiontitlefont{}
\captionstyle{}
\captionwidth{\linewidth}
\normalcaptionwidth
\normalcaption
\captiondelim{: }
\end{lcode}
These macros are explained in detail below.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\captiondelim}\marg{delim} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(captiondelim)%
  {\cs{captiondelim}\marg{delim}}%
  {Specifies \meta{delim} to be the delimeter between the number and title in a caption.}
 The default captioning style is to put a delimeter\index{caption!delimeter} 
in the form of a colon between the caption
number and the caption title. The command \cmd{\captiondelim}
can be used to change the delimeter. For example, to have an en-dash instead
of the colon, \verb?\captiondelim{-- }? will do the trick. 
Notice that no space is put between the delimeter and the title unless 
it is specified in the \meta{delim} parameter. 
The class initially specifies \verb?\captiondelim{: }? to give the normal 
delimeter.
% \begin{syntax}
%   \cmd{\captiondelimnocap}\marg{code}
% \end{syntax}
% \glossary(captiondelimnocap)%
%   {\cs{captiondelimnocap}\marg{code}}%
%   {Used as the delimiter after the caption number when the caption is
%     empty. Empty by default.}
% Whenever the caption text is empty, it looks a little strange to have
% \texttt{Figure 2.3:} and nothing else. Instead, in this case we replace
% \cmd{\captiondelim} by \cmd{\captiondelimnocap}, which is empty by
% default, i.e., we end up with \texttt{Figure 2.3} instead.



\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\captionnamefont}\marg{fontspec} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(captionnamefont)%
  {\cs{captionnamefont}\marg{fontspec}}%
  {Set the font for the first part (name and number) of a caption, upto and including
   the delimeter.}
 The \meta{fontspec} specified by \cmd{\captionnamefont} is used
for typesetting the caption\index{caption!font} name; 
that is, the first part of the caption
up to and including the delimeter (e.g., the portion `Table 3:').
\meta{fontspec} can be any kind of font specification and/or command and/or 
text. This first part of the caption is treated like: 
\begin{lcode}
{\captionnamefont Table 3: }
\end{lcode}
so font declarations, not font text-style commands, are needed for 
\meta{fontspec}. For instance, 
\begin{lcode}
\captionnamefont{\Large\sffamily}
\end{lcode} 
to specify a large sans-serif font. The class initially specifies 
\verb?\captionnamefont{}? to give the normal font.
 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\captiontitlefont}\marg{fontspec} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(captiontitlefont)%
  {\cs{captiontitlefont}\marg{fontspec}}%
  {Set the font for the caption title text.}
 Similarly, the \meta{fontspec} specified by \cmd{\captiontitlefont}
is used for typesetting the title text\index{caption!font} of a caption. 
For example,
\verb?\captiontitlefont{\itshape}? for an italic title text.
The class initially specifies \verb?\captiontitlefont{}?
to give the normal font.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\captionstyle}\oarg{short}\marg{style} \\
\cmd{\raggedleft} \cmd{\centering} \cmd{\raggedright} \cmd{\centerlastline} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(captionstyle)%
  {\cs{captionstyle}\oarg{short}\marg{style}}%
  {Set the paragraph style for the caption. The optional \meta{short} is
   the style for captions shorter than a full line.}
   By default the name and title of a caption are typeset as a block 
(non-indented) paragraph\index{paragraph!block}. 
\cmd{\captionstyle} can be used to alter this.
Sensible values for \meta{style} are: \cmd{\centering}, \cmd{\raggedleft} or
\cmd{\raggedright} for styles\index{caption!paragraph style} 
corresponding to these declarations. 
The \cmd{\centerlastline} style gives a block paragraph\index{paragraph!block}
but with the last line centered.
The class initially specifies \verb?\captionstyle{}?
to give the normal block paragraph style.

    If a caption is less than one line in length it may look odd if the
\meta{style} is \cmd{\raggedright}, say, as it will be left justified. 
The optional \meta{short} argument to \cmd{\captionstyle} can be used to
specify the style\index{caption!short style} for such short captions 
if it should differ from that for multiline\index{caption!multiline} 
captions. For example, I think that short captions look better 
centered:
\begin{lcode}
\captionstyle[\centering]{\raggedright}
\end{lcode} 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\hangcaption} \\
\cmd{\indentcaption}\marg{length} \\
\cmd{\normalcaption} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(hangcaption)%
  {\cs{hangcaption}}%
  {Multiline captions will be typeset as a hanging paragraph.}
\glossary(indentcaption)%
  {\cs{indentcaption}\marg{length}}%
  {Multiline captions will be typeset as a hanging paragraph hung by \meta{length}.}
\glossary(normalcaption)%
  {\cs{normalcaption}}%
  {Multiline captions will be typeset as a block paragraph.}
\PWnote{2009/06/25}{Hang/indent no longer affects short captions}
 The declaration \cmd{\hangcaption} causes captions to be typeset with 
the second and later lines of a multiline\index{caption!multiline} 
caption title indented by 
the width of the caption name. 
The declaration \cmd{\indentcaption} will indent title lines after 
the first by \meta{length}. These commands are independent of 
the \cmd{\captionstyle}\verb?{...}? and have no effect on short captions.
Note that a caption will not 
be simultaneously hung and indented. The \cmd{\normalcaption} declaration 
undoes any previous \cmd{\hangcaption} or \cmd{\indentcaption} declaration.
The class initially specifies \cmd{\normalcaption} to give the normal 
 non-indented paragraph\index{paragraph!indentation} style.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\changecaptionwidth} \\
\cmd{\captionwidth}\marg{length} \\
\cmd{\normalcaptionwidth} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(changecaptionwidth)%
  {\cs{changecaptionwidth}}%
  {Captions will be set within the width specified by \cs{captionwidth}.}
\glossary(captionwidth)%
  {\cs{captionwidth}\marg{length}}%
  {Set the caption width to \meta{length}.}
\glossary(normalcaptionwidth)%
  {\cs{normalcaptionwidth}}%
  {Captions will be set to the full width.}
   Issuing the declaration \cmd{\changecaptionwidth} causes the captions to
be typeset within a total width\index{caption!width} \meta{length} 
as specified by \cmd{\captionwidth}. 
Issuing the declaration \cmd{\normalcaptionwidth}
causes captions to be typeset as normal full width captions.
The class initially specifies
\begin{lcode}
\normalcaptionwidth
\captionwidth{\linewidth}
\end{lcode}
to give the normal width. If a caption is being set within the 
side captioned\index{caption!side caption} environments from 
the \Lpack{sidecap} package~\cite{SIDECAP}
then it must be a \cmd{\normalcaptionwidth} caption.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\precaption}\marg{pretext} \\
\cmd{\captiontitlefinal}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\postcaption}\marg{posttext} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(precaption)%
  {\cs{precaption}\marg{pretext}}%
  {\meta{pretext} will be processed at the start of a caption.}
\glossary(captiontitlefinal)%
  {\cs{captiontitlefinal}\marg{text}}%
  {\meta{text} will be put immediately at the end of a caption title,
   but will not appear in a \listofx.}
\glossary(postcaption)%
  {\cs{postcaption}\marg{posttext}}%
  {\meta{posttext} will be processed at the end of a caption.}

  The commands \cmd{\precaption} and  \cmd{\postcaption}
specify \meta{pretext} and \meta{posttext} that will be processed at the
start and end of a caption. For example 
\begin{lcode}
\precaption{\rule{\linewidth}{0.4pt}\par}
\postcaption{\rule{\linewidth}{0.4pt}}
\end{lcode}
  will draw a horizontal line\index{caption!ruled} above and below 
the captions.
The class initially specifies
\begin{lcode}
\precaption{}
\postcaption{}
\end{lcode}
to give the normal appearance.

    The argument to \cmd{\captiontitlefinal} is put immediately after the 
title text but will not appear in the LoF or LoT. The default is
\begin{lcode}
\captiontitlefinal{}
\end{lcode}
but it could be used instead as, say
\begin{lcode}
\captiontitlefinal{.}
\end{lcode}
to put a period (full stop) after the title.
 
    If any of the above commands are used in a float\index{float}, 
or other, environment their effect is limited to the environment. 
If they are used in the preamble\index{preamble}
or the main text, their effect persists until replaced by a similar
command with a different parameter value. The commands do not affect the
appearance of the title in any \listofx.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\\}\oarg{length} \\
\cmd{\\*}\oarg{length} \\
\end{syntax}
 The normal \ltx\  command \cmd{\\} can be used within the
caption text to start a new line. Remember that \cmd{\\} is a fragile 
command, so if it is used within text that will be added to a \listofx\
it must be protected.
 As examples: 
\begin{lcode}
\caption{Title with a \protect\\ new line in 
         both the body and List of}
\caption[List of entry with no new line]%
        {Title with a \\ new line}
\caption[List of entry with a \protect\\ new line]%
        {Title text}
\end{lcode}

 Effectively, a caption is typeset as though it were:
 \begin{lcode}
 \precaption
 {\captionnamefont NAME NUMBER\captiondelim}
 {\captionstyle\captiontitlefont THE TITLE\captiontitlefinal}
 \postcaption
 \end{lcode}
 Replacing the above commands by their defaults leads to the simple
 format: \\
 \verb?{NAME NUMBER: }{THE TITLE}?

 As well as using the styling commands to make simple changes to the
captioning style, more noticeable modifications can also be made.
To change the captioning style so that the name and title are typeset in
a sans font\index{caption!font} it is sufficient to do:
 \begin{lcode}
 \captionnamefont{\sffamily}
 \captiontitlefont{\sffamily}
 \end{lcode}

 \begin{shadetable}
% \centering
 \captionnamefont{\sffamily}
 \captiondelim{}
 \captionstyle{\\}
 \captiontitlefont{\scshape}
 \setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{10pt}
 \caption{Redesigned table caption style} \label{tab:style}
 \begin{tabular}{lr} \toprule
  three & III \\
  five  & V \\
  eight & VIII \\ \bottomrule
  \end{tabular}
 \end{shadetable}

 A more obvious change in styling is shown in \tref{tab:style},
 which was coded as:
 \begin{lcode}
 \begin{table}
 \centering
 \captionnamefont{\sffamily}
 \captiondelim{}
 \captionstyle{\\}
 \captiontitlefont{\scshape}
 \setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{10pt}
 \caption{Redesigned table caption style} \label{tab:style}
 \begin{tabular}{lr} \toprule
  ...
 \end{table}
 \end{lcode}
This leads to the approximate caption format 
(processed within \cmd{\centering}): 
\begin{lcode}
{\sffamily NAME NUMBER}{\\ \scshape THE TITLE}
\end{lcode}
 Note that the newline command (\cmd{\\}) cannot be put in the first part
 of the format (i.e., the \verb?{\sffamily NAME NUMBER}?); it has to go into
 the second part, which is why it is specified via \verb?\captionstyle{\\}?
 and not \verb?\captiondelim{\\}?.

    If a mixture of captioning styles will be used you may want to
define a special caption command for each non-standard style. For
example for the style of the caption in \tref{tab:style}:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\mycaption}[2][\@empty]{
  \captionnamefont{\sffamily\hfill}
  \captiondelim{\hfill}
  \captionstyle{\centerlastline\\}
  \captiontitlefont{\scshape}
  \setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{10pt}
  \ifx \@empty#1 \caption{#2}\else \caption[#1]{#2}\fi}
\end{lcode}
Remember that any code that involves the \idxatincode\texttt{@} sign must 
be either in
a package (\file{sty}) file or enclosed between a \cmd{\makeatletter} \ldots
\cmd{\makeatother} pairing (\seeatincode).

 The code for the \tref{tab:style} example can now be written as:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{table}
\centering
\mycaption{Redesigned table caption style} \label{tab:style}
\begin{tabular}{lr} \toprule
 ...
\end{table}
\end{lcode}
 Note that in the code for \cs{mycaption} I have added two
\cmd{\hfill} commands and \cmd{\centerlastline} compared with the original
specification.
It turned out that the original definitions
worked for a single line caption but not for a 
multiline\index{caption!multiline} caption.
The additional commands makes it work in both cases, forcing the
name to be centered as well as the last line of a multiline title,
thus giving a balanced appearence.

 \index{caption!style|)}%|


 \section{Continuation captions and legends}

\index{caption!continued|(}%|

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\contcaption}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(contcaption)%
  {\cs{contcaption}\marg{text}}%
  {A continued caption, replacing the original title with \meta{text}.}
    The \cmd{\contcaption} command can be used to put 
 a `continued' or `concluded'
 caption into a float\index{float} environment. It neither increments the
 float number nor makes any entry into a float listing, but it
 does repeat the numbering of the previous \cmd{\caption} command.
 

   Table~\ref{tab:m} illustrates the use of the \cmd{\contcaption}
 command. The table\index{table} was produced from the following code.
 \begin{lcode}
   \begin{table}
   \centering
   \caption{A multi-part table} \label{tab:m}
   \begin{tabular}{lc} \toprule
    just a single line & 1 \\ \bottomrule
   \end{tabular}
   \end{table}

   \begin{table}
   \centering
   \contcaption{Continued}
   \begin{tabular}{lc} \toprule
    just a single line & 2 \\ \bottomrule
   \end{tabular}
   \end{table}

   \begin{table}
   \centering
   \contcaption{Concluded}
   \begin{tabular}{lc} \toprule
    just a single line & 3 \\ \bottomrule
   \end{tabular}
   \end{table}
 \end{lcode}

   \begin{shadetable}
%   \centering
   \caption{A multi-part table} \label{tab:m}
   \begin{tabular}{lc} \toprule
    just a single line & 1 \\ \bottomrule
   \end{tabular}
   \end{shadetable}

   \begin{shadetable}
%   \centering
   \contcaption{Continued}
   \begin{tabular}{lc} \toprule
    just a single line & 2 \\ \bottomrule
   \end{tabular}
   \end{shadetable}

   \begin{shadetable}
%   \centering
   \contcaption{Concluded}
   \begin{tabular}{lc} \toprule
    just a single line & 3 \\ \bottomrule
   \end{tabular}
   \end{shadetable}

\index{caption!continued|)}%|

\index{legend}
\index{caption!anonymous|(}%|

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\legend}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(legend)%
  {\cs{legend}\marg{text}}%
  {A legend (an anonymous caption).}
  The \cmd{\legend} command is intended to be used to put an 
anonymous caption, or legend\index{legend} into a float\index{float} 
environment, but may be used anywhere.

   \begin{shadetable}
%   \centering
   \caption{Another table} \label{tab:legend}
   \begin{tabular}{lc} \toprule
    A legendary table & 5 \\
    with two lines    & 6 \\ \bottomrule
   \end{tabular}
   \legend{The legend}
   \end{shadetable}

    For example, the following code was used to produce the two-line
\tref{tab:legend}. The \cmd{\legend} command can be used within a 
float\index{float}
independently of any \cmd{\caption} command.
\begin{lcode}
\begin{table}
  \centering
  \caption{Another table} \label{tab:legend}
  \begin{tabular}{lc} \toprule
  A legendary table & 5 \\
  with two lines    & 6 \\ \bottomrule
  \end{tabular}
  \legend{The legend}
\end{table}
\end{lcode}

     \marginpar{\definecolor{shadecolor}{gray}{0.75}\begin{shaded}\legend{LEGEND}
                This is a marginal note with a legend.\end{shaded}}

  Captioned floats\index{float} are usually thought of in terms of the 
\Ie{table} and \Ie{figure} environments. There can be other kinds of 
float\index{float}.
As perhaps a more interesting example, the following code produces
the titled marginal\index{marginalia} note which should be displayed near here.
\begin{lcode}
     \marginpar{\legend{LEGEND}
                This is a marginal note with a legend.}
\end{lcode}

%You can even \legend{Legend in running text} use the \cmd{\legend}
%command in running text, as has been done in this sentence, 
%but I'm not sure why one might want to do that as \ltx\ already
%provides the \Ie{center} environment.

 If you want the legend text to be included\index{legend!in list of} 
in the \listofx{}
you can do it like this with the \cmd{\addcontentsline} macro.
\begin{lcode}
\legend{Legend title}
% left justified
\addcontentsline{lot}{table}{Legend title}    % or
% indented
\addcontentsline{lot}{table}{\protect\numberline{}Legend title}
\end{lcode}
The first of these forms will align the first line of the legend text
under the normal table\index{table} numbers. The second form will align 
the first line of the legend text under the normal \Ie{table} titles. 
In either case, second and later lines of a multi-line text will be 
aligned under the normal title lines.

   \begin{shadetable}
%   \centering
   \captiontitlefont{\sffamily}
   \legend{Legendary table}
   \addcontentsline{lot}{table}{Legendary table (toc 1)}
   \addcontentsline{lot}{table}{\protect\numberline{}
                                Legendary table (toc 2)}
   \begin{tabular}{lc} \toprule
    An anonymous table & 5 \\
    with two lines     & 6 \\ \bottomrule
   \end{tabular}
   \end{shadetable}

 As an example, the \textsf{Legendary table} is produced by the following code:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{table}
\centering
\captiontitlefont{\sffamily}
\legend{Legendary table}
\addcontentsline{lot}{table}{Legendary table (toc 1)}
\addcontentsline{lot}{table}{\protect\numberline{}
                             Legendary table (toc 2)}
\begin{tabular}{lc} \toprule
   An anonymous table & 5 \\
   with two lines     & 6 \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}
\end{lcode}
 Look at the List of Tables to see how the two forms of \cmd{\addcontentsline}
are typeset.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\namedlegend}\oarg{short-title}\marg{long-title} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(namedlegend)%
  {\cs{namedlegend}\oarg{short}\marg{long}}%
  {Like \cs{caption} but no number and no \listofx\ entry.}
 As a convenience, the \cmd{\namedlegend}\index{legend!named}
command is like the \cmd{\caption} command except that it does not number
the caption and, by default, puts no entry into a \listofx{} file. Like
the \cmd{\caption} command, it picks up the name to be prepended to the
title text from the float\index{float} environment in which it is called (e.g.,
it will use \cmd{\tablename} if called within a \Ie{table} environment). The
following code is the source of the \textit{Named legendary table}.
 \begin{lcode}
 \begin{table}
 \centering
 \captionnamefont{\sffamily}
 \captiontitlefont{\itshape}
 \namedlegend{Named legendary table}
 \begin{tabular}{lr} \toprule
 seven & VII \\
 eight & VIII \\ \bottomrule
 \end{tabular}
 \end{table}
 \end{lcode}

 \begin{shadetable}
% \centering
 \captionnamefont{\sffamily}
 \captiontitlefont{\itshape}
 \namedlegend{Named legendary table}
 \begin{tabular}{lr} \toprule
 seven & VII \\
 eight & VIII \\ \bottomrule
 \end{tabular}
 \end{shadetable}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\flegfloat}\marg{name} \\
\cmd{\flegtocfloat}\marg{title} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(flegfloat)%
  {\cs{flegfloat}\marg{name}}%
  {Where \texttt{float} is a float type (e.g. \texttt{table}), defines the \meta{name} used by \cs{namedlegend}.}
\glossary(flegtocfloat)%
  {\cs{flegtocfloat}\marg{title}}%
  {Where \texttt{float} is a float type (e.g., \texttt{figure}), called by 
   \cs{namedlegend} to add \meta{title} to a \listofx.}
 The macro \cmd{\flegfloat}, where \texttt{float} is the name 
of a float\index{float} environment
(e.g., \texttt{figure}) is called by the \cmd{\namedlegend} macro. 
It is provided as a hook that defines the \meta{name} to be used as 
the name in \cmd{\namedlegend}. Two defaults are provided, \cmd{\flegtable}
and \cmd{\flegfigure} defined as:
 \begin{lcode}
 \newcommand{\flegtable}{\tablename}
 \newcommand{\flegfigure}{\figurename}
 \end{lcode}
\glossary(flegtable)%
  {\cs{flegtable}}%
  {The name for a \cs{legend} in a \texttt{table}.}
\glossary(flegfigure)%
  {\cs{flegfigure}}%
  {The name for a \cs{legend} in a \texttt{figure}.}
which may be altered via \cmd{\renewcommand} if desired. 

The macro \cmd{\flegtocfloat}, where again \texttt{float} is the name 
of a float\index{float} environment
(e.g., \texttt{table}) is also called by the \cmd{\namedlegend} macro. 
It is provided as a hook that can be used to add \meta{title} to the \listofx.
Two examplars are provided, \cmd{\flegtocfigure} and \cmd{\flegtoctable}.
By default they are defined to do nothing, and can be changed via
\cmd{\renewcommand}. For instance, one could be changed for 
tables\index{table} as:
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand{\flegtoctable}[1]{
   \addcontentsline{lot}{table}{#1}}
 \end{lcode}

\index{caption!anonymous|)}%|
\index{caption!outside a float|(}%|

  The \cmd{\legend} command produces a plain, unnumbered heading. It can also
be useful sometimes to have named and numbered captions outside
a floating\index{float} environment, perhaps in a \Ie{minipage},
if you want the table\index{table} or picture\index{illustration} 
to appear at a precise location in your document.


\index{caption!fixed|(}%|

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\newfixedcaption}\oarg{capcommand}\marg{command}\marg{float} \\
\cmd{\renewfixedcaption}\oarg{capcommand}\marg{command}\marg{float} \\
\cmd{\providefixedcaption}\oarg{capcommand}\marg{command}\marg{float} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(newfixedcaption)%
  {\cs{newfixedcaption}\oarg{capcommand}\marg{command}\marg{float}}%
  {Defines a captioning command \cs{command} that may used outside the
   \meta{float} float as though it was inside it. The \cs{capcommand}
  must have been previously defined as a captioning command for \meta{float}.}
\glossary(renewfixedcaption)%
  {\cs{renewfixedcaption}\oarg{capcommand}\marg{command}\marg{float}}%
  {A `renew' version of \cs{newfixedcaption}.}
\glossary(providefixedcaption)%
  {\cs{providefixedcaption}\oarg{capcommand}\marg{command}\marg{float}}%
  {A `provide' version of \cs{newfixedcaption}.}
 The \cmd{\newfixedcaption} command, and its friends, can be used 
to create or modify a captioning \meta{command} that may be used 
outside the float\index{float} environment \meta{float}.
Both the environment \meta{float} and a captioning command, 
\meta{capcommand}, for that environment must have been defined before
calling \cmd{\newfixedcaption}. Note that \cmd{\namedlegend} can be used
as \meta{capcommand}.
% The \cmd{\renewfixedcaption} and \cmd{\providefixedcaption} commands 
% take the same arguments as \cmd{\newfixedcaption}; the three commands 
% are analagous to those in the \cmd{\newcommand} family.

 For example, to define a new \cs{figcaption} command for captioning pictures
 outside the \Ie{figure} environment, do
\begin{lcode}
 \newfixedcaption{\figcaption}{figure}
\end{lcode}
 The optional \meta{capcommand} argument is the name of the float\index{float}
captioning command that is being aliased. It defaults to \cmd{\caption}.
As an example of where the optional argument is required, if you
want to create a new continuation\index{caption!continued!outside a float} 
caption command for non-floating
tables\index{table}, say \cs{ctabcaption}, then do
\begin{lcode}
 \newfixedcaption[\contcaption]{\ctabcaption}{table}
\end{lcode}

 Captioning commands created by \cmd{\newfixedcaption} will be named and
 numbered in the same style as the original \meta{capcommand}, can
 be given a \cmd{\label}, and will appear in the appropriate 
 \listofx. They can also be used within floating\index{float}
 environments, but will not use the environment name as a guide to
 the caption name or entry into the \listofx. For
 example, using \cs{ctabcaption} in a \Ie{figure} environment will still
 produce a \textbf{Table\ldots} named caption.

   Sometimes captions are required on the 
opposite\index{caption!on opposite page} page to a 
figure\index{figure}, and a fixed caption can be useful in this context. 
For example, if figure\index{figure} captions should be placed on an 
otherwise empty page immediately before the actual figure\index{figure}, 
then this can be accomplished by the following hack:
\begin{lcode}
\newfixedcaption{\figcaption}{figure}
 ...
\afterpage{ % fill current page then flush pending floats
  \clearpage
  \begin{midpage}  %  vertically center the caption
  \figcaption{The caption} %  the caption
  \end{midpage}
  \clearpage
  \begin{figure}THE FIGURE, NO CAPTION HERE\end{figure}
  \clearpage
 }  % end of \afterpage
 \end{lcode}
 Note that the \Lpack{afterpage} package~\cite{AFTERPAGE} is needed, 
which is part of the required tools bundle. 
The \Lpack{midpage} package supplies the \verb?midpage?
environment, which can be simply defined as:
\begin{lcode}
\newenvironment{midpage}{\vspace*{\fill}}{\vspace*{\fill}}
\end{lcode}
The code, in particular the use of \cmd{\clearpage}, might need 
adjusting\index{start new page} to meet your particular requirements.
\begin{itemize}
\item \cmd{\clearpage} gets you to the next page, which may be odd or even.
\item \cmd{\cleardoublepage} gets you to the next odd-numbered page.
\item \cmd{\cleartoevenpage} ensures that you get to the next
even-numbered page.
\end{itemize}

    As a word of warning, if you mix both floats and fixed environments 
with the same kind of caption you have to ensure that they get printed 
in the correct order in the final document. If you do not do this, then 
the \listofx\ captions will come out in the wrong order (the lists are 
ordered according the
page number in the typeset document, \emph{not} your source input order).


\index{caption!fixed|)}%|

\index{caption!outside a float|)}%|

 \section{Bilingual captions}

\index{caption!bilingual|(}%|
\index{bilingual captions|(}%|

    Some documents require bilingual (or more) captions. The class 
 provides a set of commands for bilingual captions. Extensions to the
 set, perhaps to support trilingual captioning, are left as an exercise
 for the document author.
Essentially, the bilingual commands call the \cmd{\caption}
command twice, once for each language.

    Several commands for bilingual captions are provided. They all produce
the same appearance in the text but differ in what they put into 
the \listofx. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bitwonumcaption}\oarg{label}\marg{short1}\marg{long1}\% \\
                      \marg{NAME}\marg{short2}\marg{long2} \\
\cmd{\bionenumcaption}\oarg{label}\marg{short1}\marg{long1}\% \\
                      \marg{NAME}\marg{short2}\marg{long2} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(bitwonumcaption)%
  {\cs{bitwonumcaption}\oarg{label}\marg{short1}\marg{long1}\marg{NAME}\marg{short2}\marg{long2}}%
  {A bilingual caption with both captions numbered in the float and in the \listofx.}
\glossary(bionenumcaption)%
  {\cs{bionenumcaption}\oarg{label}\marg{short1}\marg{long1}\marg{NAME}\marg{short2}\marg{long2}}%
  {A bilingual caption with both captions numbered in the float but only the first in the \listofx.}

  Bilingual captions can be typeset by the \cmd{\bitwonumcaption} 
 command which has six arguments. 
 The first, optional argument \meta{label}, is the name of a label, if
 required.
 \meta{short1} and \meta{long1} are the short (i.e., equivalent
 to the optional argument
 to the \cmd{\caption} command) and long caption texts for
 the main language of the document. The value of the \meta{NAME} argument
 is used as the caption name for the second language caption, while
 \meta{short2} and \meta{long2} are the short and long caption texts
 for the second language. For example, if the main and secondary languages
 are English and German and a figure\index{figure} is being captioned:
\begin{lcode}
\bitwonumcaption{Short}{Long}{Bild}{Kurz}{Lang}
\end{lcode}
If the short title text(s) is not required, then leave the appropriate
argument(s) either empty or as one or more spaces, like:
\begin{lcode}
\bitwonumcaption[fig:bi1]{}{Long}{Bild}{  }{Lang}
\end{lcode}
Both language texts are entered into the 
appropriate\index{caption!bilingual!in list of} \listofx,
and both texts are numbered.

 Figure~\ref{fig:bi1}, typeset from the following code, is an example.
\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
\centering
EXAMPLE FIGURE WITH BITWONUMCAPTION
\bitwonumcaption[fig:bi1]%
    {}{Long \cs{bitwonumcaption}}%
    {Bild}{  }{Lang \cs{bitwonumcaption}} 
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}

 \begin{shadefigure}
% \centering
 EXAMPLE FIGURE WITH BITWONUMCAPTION
 \bitwonumcaption[fig:bi1]{}{Long \cs{bitwonumcaption}}{Bild}{  }{Lang \cs{bitwonumcaption}} 
 \end{shadefigure}

  Both \cmd{\bionenumcaption} and \cmd{\bitwonumcaption} take the same 
arguments.
The difference between the two commands is that \cmd{\bionenumcaption} does
not number the second language text in the \listofx.
Figure~\ref{fig:bi3}, typeset from the following, is an example of this.
\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
\centering
EXAMPLE FIGURE WITH BIONENUMCAPTION
\bionenumcaption[fig:bi3]%
    {}{Long English \cs{bionenumcaption}}%
    {Bild}{  }{Lang Deutsch \cs{bionenumcaption}} 
 \end{figure}
\end{lcode}

 \begin{shadefigure}
% \centering
 EXAMPLE FIGURE WITH BIONENUMCAPTION
 \bionenumcaption[fig:bi3]%
    {}{Long English \cs{bionenumcaption}}%
    {Bild}{  }{Lang Deutsch \cs{bionenumcaption}} 
 \end{shadefigure}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bicaption}\oarg{label}\marg{short1}\marg{long1}\% \\
                \marg{NAME}\marg{long2} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(bicaption)%
  {\cs{bicaption}\oarg{label}\marg{short1}\marg{long1}\marg{NAME}\marg{long2}}%
  {A bilingual caption in a float but only the first added to the \listofx.}

When bilingual captions are typeset via the \cmd{\bicaption} 
command the second language text is not put into
the \listofx. 
The command takes 5 arguments. 
The optional \meta{label} is for a label if required.
\meta{short1} and \meta{long1} are the short and long caption texts for
the main language of the document. The value of the \meta{NAME} argument
is used as the caption name for the second language caption. The last
argument, \meta{long2}, is the caption text
for the second language (which is not put into the \listofx). 

 For example, if the main and secondary languages are English and German: 
\begin{lcode}
\bicaption{Short}{Long}{Bild}{Langlauf}
\end{lcode}
If the short title text is not required, then leave the appropriate
argument either empty or as one or more spaces.

 Figure~\ref{fig:bi2} is an example of using \cmd{\bicaption} and was 
 produced by the following code:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
\centering
   EXAMPLE FIGURE WITH A RULED BICAPTION
\precaption{\rule{\linewidth}{0.4pt}\par}
\midbicaption{\precaption{}%
              \postcaption{\rule{\linewidth}{0.4pt}}}
\bicaption[fig:bi2]%
    {Short English \cs{bicaption}}{Longingly}%
    {Bild}{Langlauf}
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}

 \begin{shadefigure}
% \centering
 EXAMPLE FIGURE WITH A RULED BICAPTION
 \precaption{\rule{\linewidth}{0.4pt}\par}
 \midbicaption{\precaption{}%
               \postcaption{\rule{\linewidth}{0.4pt}}}
 \bicaption[fig:bi2]{Short English \cs{bicaption}}{Longingly}%
    {Bild}{Langlauf}
 \end{shadefigure}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bicontcaption}\marg{long1}\% \\
                    \marg{NAME}\marg{long2} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(bicontcaption)%
  {\cs{bicontcaption}\marg{long1}\marg{NAME}\marg{long2}}%
  {A continued bilingual caption.}
 Bilingual continuation captions can be typeset via the \cmd{\bicontcaption} 
command. In this case, neither language text is put into the \listofx. 
The command takes 3 arguments.
\meta{long1} is the caption text for
the main language of the document. The value of the \meta{NAME} argument
is used as the caption name for the second language caption. The last
argument, \meta{long2}, is the caption text
for the second language.
For example, if the main and secondary languages
are again English and German:
\begin{lcode}
\bicontcaption{Continued}{Bild}{Fortgefahren}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\midbicaption}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(midbicaption)%
  {\cs{midbicaption}\marg{text}}%
  {In bilingual captions, \meta{text} is inserted after the first \cs{caption}
   and immediately before the second \cs{caption}.}
 The bilingual captions are implemented by calling \cmd{\caption} twice,
 once for each language. The command \cmd{\midbicaption}, 
 which is similar to the \cmd{\precaption} and \cmd{\postcaption} commands,
 is executed 
 just before calling the second \cmd{\caption}. Among other things,
 this can be used to
 modify the style\index{caption!bilingual!styling} of the second 
caption with respect to the first.
 For example, if there is a line above and below normal
 captions, it is probably undesirable to have a double line in the
 middle of a bilingual caption. So, for bilingual captions the
 following may be done within the float\index{float} before the caption:
\begin{lcode}
\precaption{\rule{\linewidth}{0.4pt}\par}
\postcaption{}
\midbicaption{\precaption{}%
              \postcaption{\rule{\linewidth}{0.4pt}}}
\end{lcode}
 This sets a line before the first of the two captions, then the
\cmd{\midbicaption}\verb?{...}? nulls the pre-caption line and adds 
a post-caption line for the second caption. The class initially specifies
\verb?\midbicaption{}?.

\index{bilingual captions|)}%|
\index{caption!bilingual|)}%|

 \section{Subcaptions}  \label{sec:subcaps}

\index{caption!subcaption|(}%|
\index{figure!subfigure|(}%|
\index{table!subtable|(}%|
\index{float!subfloat|(}%|

     The \Lpack{subfigure} package enables the captioning of 
sub-figures within a larger figure\index{figure}, 
and similarly for tables\index{table}.
The \Lpack{subfigure} package may be used with the class, or you
can use the class commands described below; these commands can only
be used inside a float environment for which a 
subfloat\footnote{See \Sref{sec:multfloats}.} has been specified
via \cmd{\newsubfloat}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\subcaption}\oarg{list-entry}\marg{subtitle} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(subcaption)%
  {\cs{subcaption}\oarg{list-entry}\marg{subtitle}}%
  {Analagous to \cs{caption} but for an identified subcaption within a float.}
The \cmd{\subcaption} command is similar to the \cmd{\caption} command
and can only be used inside a float environment.
It typesets an identified \meta{subtitle}, where the identification
is an alphabetic character enclosed in parentheses. If the optional
\meta{list-entry} argument is present, \meta{list-entry} is added to
the caption listings for the float. If it is not present, then
\meta{subtitle} is added to the listing.

    The \meta{subtitle} is typeset within a box which is the width of
the surrounding environment, so \cmd{\subcaption} should only be used
within a fixed width box of some kind, for example a \Ie{minipage} as shown
below.
\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{minipage}{0.3\textwidth}
  \verb?Some verbatim text?
  \subcaption{First text}
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}{0.3\textwidth}
  \verb?More verbatim text?
  \subcaption{Second text}
\end{minipage}
\caption{Verbatim texts}
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}
As the example code shows, the \cmd{\subcaption} command provides a 
means of putting verbatim elements into subfigures.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\subtop}\oarg{list-entry}\oarg{subtitle}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\subbottom}\oarg{list-entry}\oarg{subtitle}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(subtop)%
  {\cs{subtop}\oarg{list-entry}\oarg{subtitle}\marg{text}}%
  {Puts a subcaption identifier, and optionally \meta{subtitle}, on top of \meta{text}.}
\glossary(subbottom)%
  {\cs{subbottom}\oarg{list-entry}\oarg{subtitle}\marg{text}}%
  {Puts a subcaption identifier, and optionally \meta{subtitle}, below \meta{text}.}
The command \cmd{\subtop} puts a subcaption identifier on top of
\meta{text}. If both optional arguments are present, \meta{list-entry}
will be added to the appropriate\index{caption!subcaption!in list of} 
listing, and \meta{subtitle} is
placed above the \meta{text} with the identifier. If only one optional
argument is present this is treated as being \meta{subtitle}; the
identifier and \meta{subtitle} are placed above the \meta{text}
and \meta{subtitle} is added to the listing. Regardless of the optional
arguments the identifier is always added to the listing and placed above
the \meta{text}.

    The \cmd{\subbottom} command is identical to \cmd{\subtop} except
that the identifier, and potentially the \meta{subtitle}, is placed
below the \meta{text}. Note that verbatim text cannot be used
in the \meta{text} argument to \cmd{\subbottom} or \cmd{\subtop}.

    The main caption can be at either the top or the bottom of the float.
The positioning of the main and subcaptions are independent.
For example
\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
  \subbottom{...}   % captioned as (a) below
  \subtop{...}      % captioned as (b) above
  \caption{...}
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}


    If a figure that\index{figure} includes subfigures
is itself continued then it may be desirable to
continue the captioning of the subfigures. For example, if Figure~3
has three subfigures, say A, B and C, and Figure~3 is continued then
the subfigures in the continuation should be D, E, etc.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\contsubcaption}\oarg{list-entry}\marg{subtitle} \\
\cmd{\contsubtop}\oarg{list-entry}\oarg{subtitle}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\contsubbottom}\oarg{list-entry}\oarg{subtitle}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\subconcluded} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(contsubcaption)%
  {\cs{contsubcaption}\oarg{list-entry}\marg{subtitle}}%
  { A continued \cs{subcaption}.}
\glossary(contsubtop)%
  {\cs{contsubtop}\oarg{list-entry}\oarg{subtitle}\marg{text}}%
  { A continued \cs{subtop}.}
\glossary(contsubbottom)%
  {\cs{contsubbottom}\oarg{list-entry}\oarg{subtitle}\marg{text}}%
  { A continued \cs{subbottom}.}
\glossary(subconcluded)%
  {\cs{subconcluded}}
  {Indicates (to \ltx) that a continued subfloat is finished.}

The \cmd{\contsubcaption}, \cmd{\contsuptop} and \cmd{\contsubbottom}
commands are the continued\index{caption!subcaption!continued} 
versions of the respective subcaptioning
commands. These continue the subcaption numbering scheme across
(continued) floats. In any event, the main caption can 
 be at the top or bottom of the float\index{float}.
 The \cmd{\subconcluded} command is used to indicate that the continued 
 (sub) float has been concluded and the numbering
 scheme is reinitialized. The command should be placed immediately
 before the end of the last continued environment.
    For example:
 \begin{lcode}
 \begin{figure}
 \subbottom{...}  captioned as (a) below
 \subbottom{...}  captioned as (b) below
 \caption{...}
 \end{figure}
 \begin{figure}
 \contsubtop{...}  captioned as (c) above
 \contsubtop{...}  captioned as (d) above
 \contcaption{Concluded}
 \subconcluded
 \end{figure}
 ...
 \begin{table}
 \caption{...}
 \subtop{...}     captioned as (a) above
 \subbottom{...}  captioned as (b) below
 \end{table}
 \end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\label}\parg{bookmark}\marg{labstr} \\
\cmd{\subcaptionref}\marg{labstr} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(label)%
  {\cs{label}\parg{bookmark}\marg{labstr}}%
  {Associates \meta{labstr} with the current (section, caption, etc.)
   number and page number. If used inside a subfloat and with the 
  \Ppack{hyperref} package the optional \meta{bookmark} (note the parentheses
  not square brackets) is available to specify a hyperref bookmark.}
\glossary(subcaptionref)%
  {\cs{subcaptionref}\marg{labstr}}%
  {Print the subcaption identifer for a \meta{labstr} labelled subcaption.}
A \cmd{\label} command may be included in the \meta{subtitle} argument
of the subcaptioning\index{caption!subcaption!referencing} commands. 
Using the normal \cmd{\ref} macro to
refer to the label will typeset the number of the float (obtained
from a \cmd{\label}ed main \cmd{\caption}) and the subcaption
identifier. If the \cmd{\subcaptionref} macro is used instead of 
\cmd{\ref} then only the subcaption identifier is printed.

    In cases where the \Lpack{hyperref} package is used, the \cmd{\label}
command when used inside the \meta{subtitle} argument can take an optional
\meta{bookmark} argument, 
\emph{enclosed in parenthese \emph{not} square brackets},
which will create a bookmark field of the form `Subfigure 4.7(d)'.

    As an example to show the difference between \cmd{\subcaptionref} and
\cmd{\ref}, \fref{fig:twosubfig} and the paragraph immediately
following this one were produced by the code shown below.

    Figure \ref{fig:twosubfig} has two subfigures,
namely \ref{sf:1} and \subcaptionref{sf:2}.
\begin{shadefigure}
%\centering
\subbottom[Subfigure 1]{\fbox{SUBFIGURE ONE}\label{sf:1}}
\hfill
\subbottom[Subfigure 2]{\fbox{SUBFIGURE TWO}\label{sf:2}}
\caption{Figure with two subfigures} \label{fig:twosubfig}
\end{shadefigure}
\begin{lcode}
    Figure \ref{fig:twosubfig} has two subfigures,
namely \ref{sf:1} and \subcaptionref{sf:2}.
\begin{figure}
\centering
\subbottom[Subfigure 1]{\fbox{SUBFIGURE ONE}\label{sf:1}}
\hfill
\subbottom[Subfigure 2]{\fbox{SUBFIGURE TWO}\label{sf:2}}
\caption{Figure with two subfigures} \label{fig:twosubfig}
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\tightsubcaptions} \cmd{\loosesubcaptions} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(tightsubcaptions)%
  {\cs{tightsubcaptions}}%
  {Specifies the default vertical space around subcaptions.}
\glossary(loosesubcaptions)%
  {\cs{loosesubcaptions}}%
  {Specifies extra vertical space around subcaptions.}
As with many other aspects of typesetting the style of 
subcaptions\index{caption!subcaption!styling} may 
be specified. There is a small amount of vertical space 
surrounding a subcaption. More space is used after the \cmd{\loosesubcaptions}
declaration compared to that produced after the default
\cmd{\tightsubcaptions} declaration.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\subcaptionsize}\marg{size} \\
\cmd{\subcaptionlabelfont}\marg{fontspec} \\
\cmd{\subcaptionfont}\marg{fontspec} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(subcaptionsize)%
  {\cs{subcaptionsize}\marg{size}}%
  {Font size for subcaptions.}
\glossary(subcaptionlabelfont)%
  {\cs{subcaptionlabelfont}\marg{fontspec}}%
  {Font for subcaption identifiers.}
\glossary(subcaptionfont)%
  {\cs{subcaptionfont}\marg{fontspec}}%
  {Font for subcaption titles.}

The size of the font used for subcaptions is specified by 
\cmd{\subcaptionsize}, and the fonts for the identifier and text
are specified by \cmd{\subcaptionlabelfont} for the identifier and by
\cmd{\subcaptionfont} for the title text. The defaults are:
\begin{lcode}
\subcaptionsize{\footnotesize}
\subcaptionlabelfont{\normalfont}
\subcaptionfont{\normalfont}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\subcaptionstyle}\marg{style} \\
\cmd{\raggedleft} \cmd{\centering} \cmd{\raggedright} \cmd{\centerlastline} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(subcaptionstyle)%
  {\cs{subcaptionstyle}\marg{style}}%
  {Paragraph \meta{style} for subcaptions.}
The identifier and title of a subcaption is typeset as a block (i.e.,
non-indented) paragraph by specifying
\begin{lcode}
\subcaptionstyle{}
\end{lcode}
Other styles are available by calling \cmd{\subcaptionstyle}
with a styling \meta{cmd}. Values that you might use are:
\cmd{\centering} for a centered paragraph, \cmd{\raggedleft} or
\cmd{\raggedright} for ragged left or right paragraphs, or
\cmd{\centerlastline} which calls for a block paragraph with the last
line centered.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\hangsubcaption} \\
\cmd{\shortsubcaption} \\
\cmd{\normalsubcaption} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(hangsubcaption)%
  {\cs{hangsubcaption}}%
  {The subcaption version of \cs{hangcaption}.}
\glossary(shortsubcaption)%
  {\cs{shortsubcaption}}%
  {The subcaption version of \cs{shortcaption}.}
\glossary(normalsubcaption)%
  {\cs{normalsubcaption}}%
  {The subcaption version of \cs{normalcaption}.}
The \cmd{\hangsubcaption} declaration causes subcaptions to be typeset
with the identifier above the title. Following the \cmd{\shortsubcaption}
declaration subcaptions that are less than a full line in length are
typeset left justified instead of centered. The \cmd{\normalsubcaption}
declaration, which is the default, undoes any previous \cmd{\hangsubcaption}
or \cmd{\shortsubcaption} declaration, so that subcaptions are normally
centered.

\index{float!subfloat|)}%|
\index{table!subtable|)}%|
\index{figure!subfigure|)}%|
\index{caption!subcaption|)}%|

\section{Side captions}

\index{caption!side|(}%|

    Typically captions are put either above or below the element they
are describing. Sometimes it is desireable to put a caption at the
side of the element instead.


\begin{syntax}
\senv{sidecaption}\oarg{fortoc}\marg{title}\oarg{label} \\
 the body of the float \\
\eenv{sidecaption} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(sidecaption)%
  {\senv{sidecaption}\oarg{fortoc}\marg{title}\oarg{label}}%
  {Environment for setting a sidecaption.}%
    The \Ie{sidecaption} environment is used for a sidecaption rather than a
macro. The body of the float is put inside the environment. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
  \begin{sidecaption}{An illustration}[fig:ill]
    \centering
    \includegraphics{...}
  \end{sidecaption}
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}
whereby the caption, `Figure N: An illustration', will be placed in the 
margin alongside the graphic, and for reference purposes will be given 
given the \cs{label} \texttt{fig:ill}.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\sidecapwidth} \lnc{\sidecapsep} \\
\cmd{\setsidecaps}\marg{sep}\marg{width} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(sidecapwidth)%
  {\cs{sidecapwidth}}%
  {Length specifying the maximum width of a sidecaption.}%
\glossary(sidecapsep)%
  {\cs{sidecapsep}}%
  {Length specifying the horizontal separation between a sidecaption and the float.}%
\glossary(setsidecaps)%
  {\cs{setsidecaps}\marg{sep}\marg{width}}%
  {Sets the lengths \cs{sidecapsep} and \cs{sidcapwidth} to the given
   values.}%

The caption is set in a box \lnc{\sidecapwidth} wide (the default is
\lnc{\marginparwidth}) offset \lnc{\sidecapsep} (default \lnc{\marginparsep})
into the margin.
The command \cmd{\setsidcaps} sets the \lnc{\sidecapsep} and 
\lnc{\sidecapwidth} to the given values. Changing the marginpar parameters,
for example with \cmd{\setmarginnotes}, will not change the side caption
settings. Note also that \cmd{\checkandfixthelayout}
neither checks nor fixes the side caption parameters.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\sidecapmargin}\marg{margin} \\
\piif{ifscapmargleft} \piif{scapmarglefttrue} \piif{scapmargleftfalse} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(sidecapmargin)%
  {\cs{sidecapmargin}\marg{margin}}%
  {Sets the margin for sidecaptions.}%
\glossary(ifsidecapleft)%
  {\cs{ifsidecapleft}}%
  {\ptrue\ if sidecaptions will be set in the left margin,
    otherwise they will be set in the right margin.}%

    If the float is a single column float in a twocolumn document then
the caption is 
always\footnote{Well, nearly always. See the \cs{overridescapmargin} command 
later.}
placed in the adjacent margin, otherwise the \cmd{\sidecapmargin} command
controls the margin where the sidecaption will be placed. 
The possible values for \meta{margin} are one of: 
\texttt{left}, 
\texttt{right},
\texttt{inner}, or
\texttt{outer}.
If \texttt{left} or \texttt{right} is specified the caption will go into
the left or right margin. If \texttt{inner} or \texttt{outer} is specified
then in a two sided document the caption will be on different sides of the
typeblock according to whether it is a recto or verso page; in a one sided
document the caption margin is fixed. The left margin is the default.

    When the caption is to be set in the left margin, \piif{ifscapmargleft} is
set \ptrue, and for a right margin it is set \pfalse.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setsidecappos}\marg{pos} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setsidcappos)%
  {\cs{setsidcappos}\marg{pos}}%
  {Declaration of the vertical position of a sidecaption with respect
   to the float.}%
By default a sidecaption is vertically centered with respect to the float
it is captioning. This can be altered by using the \cmd{\setsidecappos}
declaration. The allowed values for \meta{pos} are:
\begin{description}
\item[\texttt{t}] --- the top of the caption is aligned 
                      with the top of the float
\item[\texttt{c}] --- (the default) the center of the caption is aligned 
                      with the center of the float
\item[\texttt{b}] --- the bottom of the caption is aligned 
                      with the bottom of the float
\end{description}

    The other kinds of simple captions can also be put at the side
of a float. The positioning and styling commands for these are exactly
those for \Ie{sidecaption}. 
Bilingual captions, which are not considered to be simple, can only be 
placed above or below a float; 
no facilities are provided for setting them at the side..

\begin{syntax}
\senv{sidecontcaption}\marg{title}\oarg{label} \\
 the body of the float \\
\eenv{sidecontcaption} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(sidecontcaption)%
  {\senv{sidecontcaption}\marg{title}\oarg{label}}%
  {Environment for setting a continued sidecaption.}%
Sidecaptions may be continued with the \Ie{sidecontcaption} environment.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{sidenamedlegend}\oarg{fortoc}\marg{title} \\
 the body of the float \\
\eenv{sidenamedlegend} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(sidenamedlegend)%
  {\senv{sidenamedlegend}\marg{title}\oarg{label}}%
  {Environment for setting a named legend kind of sidecaption.}%
Named legends may be set at the side with the \Ie{sidenamedlegend} environment.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{sidelegend}\marg{title} \\
 the body of the float \\
\eenv{sidelegend} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(sidelegend)%
  {\senv{sidelegend}\marg{title}\oarg{label}}%
  {Environment for setting a legend kind of sidecaption.}%
Legends may be set at the side with the \Ie{sidelegend} environment.




\subsection{Tweaks}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\sidecapstyle} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(sidecapstyle)%
  {\cs{sidecapstyle}}%
  {Style settings for a sidecaption.}%
Just before the caption is set, the \cmd{\sidecapstyle} command is called.
This may be used to set the styling for the particular caption. By default
it sets captions that are in the left margin raggedleft, and those
that are in the right margin are set raggedright. The default definition
is:
%\begin{lcode}
\begin{shadecode}
\newcommand*{\sidecapstyle}{%
%%  \captionnamefont{\bfseries}
  \ifscapmargleft
    \captionstyle{\raggedleft}%
  \else
    \captionstyle{\raggedright}%
  \fi}
\end{shadecode}
%\end{lcode}
 You can change the command to suit your purposes; for example, uncommenting
the \cmd{\captionnamefont} line would result in the caption's float name being
set in a bold font. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\overridescapmargin}\marg{margin} \\
\lnc{\sidecapraise} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(overridescapmargin)%
  {\cs{overridescapmargin}\marg{margin}}%
  {A one-time override of \cs{sidecapmargin}.}%
\glossary(sidecapraise)%
  {\cs{sidecapraise}}%
  {Vertical distance added to the default vertical placement of a sidecaption.}%
Sometimes the caption may not be placed exactly where you want it --- it
may be in the wrong margin or at the wrong height.

The command \cmd{\overridescapmargin} will force the following caption into
the \meta{margin} you specify which can only be \texttt{left} or
\texttt{right}. In a twosided document where \cmd{\sidecapmargin}
is \texttt{inner} or \texttt{outer} and the caption goes in the wrong margin,
it is likely that the declaration \piif{strictpagecheck} will solve
the problem. The wrong margin might be chosen in a twocolumn document
where the float is in the second column; use 
\begin{lcode}
\overridescapmargin{right}
\end{lcode}
to fix this.

    The caption may not be at quite the height you want with respect to the
float. The caption will be raised by the length \lnc{\sidecapraise} 
in addition to the calculated movement (or lowered if \lnc{\sidecapraise}
is negative). 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\sidecapfloatwidth}\marg{length} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(sidecapfloatwidth)%
  {\cs{sidecapfloatwidth}\marg{length}}%
  {Macro holding the width of a float with a sidecaption.}%

    The float is set in a \Ie{minipage} with width \cmd{sidecapfloatwidth},
whose default definition is
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\sidecapfloatwidth}{\linewidth}
\end{lcode}
That is, the normal width is the same as the current \lnc{\linewidth}.
For a narrow table, say, you may want to reduce this, for example to
half by
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\sidecapfloatwidth}{0.5\linewidth}
\end{lcode}
    Note that \cmd{\sidecapfloatwidth} is a macro, not a length, 
so it must be altered by using a \cmd{\renewcommand*}, 
\emph{not} by \cmd{\setlength}.

    If you do reduce the \cmd{\sidecapfloatwidth} you may notice that the
sidecaption is actualy placed a distance \lnc{\sidecapsep} with respect
to the float's \Ie{minipage}, not with respect to the text block.

\newlength{\mylength}
\setlength{\mylength}{\linewidth}
\addtolength{\mylength}{-\sidecapsep}
\addtolength{\mylength}{-\sidecapwidth}
\begin{shadetable}
  \sidecapmargin{left}%
  \renewcommand*{\sidecapfloatwidth}{\mylength}%
  \raggedleft
  \begin{sidecaption}{%
    Permitted arguments for some sidecaption related commands}[scap:one]
  \centering
%  \begin{tabular}{ccc} \toprule
%  \cs{setsidecappos} & \cs{sidecapmargin} & \cs{overridescapmargin} \\ \midrule
%  \texttt{t}         & \texttt{left}      & \texttt{left}       \\
%  \texttt{c}         & \texttt{right}     & \texttt{right}       \\
%  \texttt{b}         & \texttt{inner}      &  \\
%                     & \texttt{outer}      &  \\ \bottomrule
%  \end{tabular}
  \begin{tabular}{cc} \toprule
  \cs{sidecapmargin} & \cs{overridescapmargin} \\ \midrule
  \texttt{left}      & \texttt{left}       \\
  \texttt{right}     & \texttt{right}       \\
  \texttt{inner}      &  \\
  \texttt{outer}      &  \\ \bottomrule
  \end{tabular}
\end{sidecaption}
\end{shadetable}

Table~\ref{scap:one} was created by the following code.
%\begin{lcode}
\begin{shadecode}
\newlength{\mylength}
\setlength{\mylength}{\linewidth}
\addtolength{\mylength}{-\sidecapsep}
\addtolength{\mylength}{-\sidecapwidth}
\begin{table}
  \sidecapmargin{left}%
  \renewcommand*{\sidecapfloatwidth}{\mylength}%
  \raggedleft
  \begin{sidecaption}{%
    Permitted arguments for some sidecaption related commands}[scap:one]
  \centering
  \begin{tabular}{cc} \toprule
  \cs{sidecapmargin} & \cs{overridescapmargin} \\ \midrule
  \texttt{left}      & \texttt{left}       \\
  \texttt{right}     & \texttt{right}       \\
  \texttt{inner}     &  \\
  \texttt{outer}     &  \\ \bottomrule
  \end{tabular}
\end{sidecaption}
\end{table}
\end{shadecode}
%\end{lcode} 

    The calculations on the \cs{mylength} length are so that the sidecaption
and float will just fit inside the typeblock.

Note that the \cmd{\raggedleft} command before the \Ie{sidecaption} environment
makes the float's \Ie{minipage} be placed raggedleft (i.e., moved across to
the right hand edge of the typeblock) while the \cmd{\centering} centers
the \Ie{tabular} within the minipage. You can get a variety of horizontal
placements by judicious use of \cmd{\raggedright}, \cmd{\centering}
and \cmd{\raggedleft} commands. If you do move the float sideways to leave
space for the caption make sure that the caption will go to the side you
want. In the example code I `moved' the float to the right so I made
sure that the caption would go on the left by explicitly setting
\begin{lcode}
\sidecapmargin{left}
\end{lcode}

    As far as \tx\ is concerned a sidecaption takes no horizontal space. If
you use a sidecaption in a wrapped float from, say, the \Lpack{wrapfig} 
package, make sure that the sidecaption gets placed where it won't be 
overlaid by the main text.

\index{caption!side|)}%|

 \section{How \ltx\ makes captions} \label{sec:ltx}%|

\index{caption!\ltx\ methods|(}%|

 This section provides an overview of how \ltx\ creates captions and
 gives some examples of how to change the captioning style directly.
 The section need not be looked at more than once unless you like 
 reading \ltx\ code
 or you want to make changes to \ltx's style of captioning not supported
by the class.

 The \ltx\ kernel provides tools to help in the definition of captions,
 but it is the particular class that decides on their format.

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\caption}\oarg{short}\marg{long} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(caption)%
  {\cs{caption}\oarg{short}\marg{long}}%
  {Typeset a caption with title \meta{long}, and add it, or \meta{short}
   instead if given, to a \listofx.} 
 The kernel (in \file{ltfloat.dtx}) defines the caption command via 
\begin{lcode}
\def\caption{%
    \refstepcounter\@captype \@dblarg{\@caption\@captype}}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\@captype} \\
\end{syntax}
 \cmd{\@captype} is defined by the code that creates a new float\index{float} 
environment and is set to the environment's name (see the code for 
\cmd{\@xfloat} in \file{ltfloat.dtx}). For a \Ie{figure} environment,
 there is an equivalent to 
\begin{lcode}
\def\@captype{figure}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\@caption}\marg{type}\oarg{short}\marg{long} \\
\end{syntax}
 The kernel also provides the \cmd{\@caption} macro as:
\begin{lcode}
\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{\par
  \addcontentsline{\csname ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}%     <-
    {\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
     {\ignorespaces #2}}
  \begingroup
    \@parboxrestore
    \if@minipage
      \@setminipage
    \fi
    \normalsize
    \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}%         <-
                 {\ignorespaces #3}\par
  \endgroup}
 \end{lcode}
 where \meta{type} is the name of the environment in which the caption
 will be used. Putting these three commands together results in the user's 
view of the caption command as \cmd{\caption}\oarg{short}\marg{long}.

 It is the responsibilty of the class (or package) which defines 
floats\index{float} to provide definitions for \cmd{\ext@type}, 
\cmd{\fnum@type} and \cmd{\@makecaption} which appear in the 
definition of \cmd{\@caption} (in the lines marked \verb?<-? above).

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\ext@type} \\
\end{syntax}
 This macro holds the name of the extension for a \listofx{} file.
 For example for the \Ie{figure} float\index{float} environment there is the
 definition equivalent to 
\begin{lcode}
 \newcommand{\ext@figure}{lof}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\fnum@type} \\
\end{syntax}
 This macro is responsible for typesetting the caption number. For example,
 for the \Ie{figure} environment there is the definition equivalent to
\begin{lcode}
 \newcommand{\fnum@figure}{\figurename~\thefigure}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\@makecaption}\marg{number}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
 The \cmd{\@makecaption} macro, where \meta{number}
 is a string such as `Table~5.3' and \meta{text} is the caption text,
 performs the typesetting of the caption, and
 is defined in the standard classes (in \file{classes.dtx}) as the
 equivalent of:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\@makecaption}[2]{
  \vskip\abovecaptionskip         <- 1
  \sbox\@tempboxa{#1: #2}         <- 2
  \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize
    #1: #2\par                    <- 3
  \else
    \global \@minipagefalse
    \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}
  \fi
  \vskip\belowcaptionskip}        <- 4
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
 \lnc{\abovecaptionskip}
 \lnc{\belowcaptionskip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(abovecaptionskip)%
  {\cs{abovecaptionskip}}%
  {Vertical space above a caption.}
\glossary(belowcaptionskip)%
  {\cs{belowcaptionskip}}%
  {Vertical space below a caption.}
  Vertical space is added before and after a caption (lines marked 1 and 4
in the code for \cmd{\@makecaption} above) and the amount of space is given
by the lengths \lnc{\abovecaptionskip}\index{caption!space above} 
and \lnc{\belowcaptionskip}. The
standard classes set these to 10pt and 0pt respectively. If you want
to change the space before or after a caption, use \cmd{\setlength} to change
the values. In figures\index{figure}, the caption is usually placed below the
illustration\index{illustration}. The actual space between the bottom 
of the illustration\index{illustration} and the baseline of the first 
line of the caption\index{caption!space above} is 
the \lnc{\abovecaptionskip} plus the 
\lnc{\parskip} plus the \lnc{\baselineskip}.
If the illustration\index{illustration} is in a \Ie{center} environment 
then additional space will be added by the \eenv{center}; it is usually 
better to use the \cmd{\centering} command rather than the 
\Ie{center} environment.

 The actual typesetting of a caption is effectively performed by the code
in lines marked 2 and 3 in the code for \cmd{\@makecaption}; note that
these are where the colon that is typeset after the number is specified. 
If you want to
make complex changes to the default captioning style you may have to
create your own version of \cmd{\@caption} using 
\cmd{\renewcommand}. On the other hand, many such changes can be achieved
by changing the definition of the 
the appropriate \cmd{\fnum@type} command(s). For example, to make the 
figure\index{figure} name and number\index{caption!font} bold: 
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\fnum@figure}{\textbf{\figurename~\thefigure}}
\end{lcode}

 REMEMBER: If you are doing anything involving commands that include
the \idxatincode\texttt{@} character, and it's not in a class or package 
file, you have
to do it within a \cmd{\makeatletter} and \cmd{\makeatother} pairing
(\seeatincode). So,
if you modify the \cmd{\fnum@figure} command anywhere in your document
it has to be done as:
\begin{lcode}
 \makeatletter
 \renewcommand{\fnum@figure}{......}
 \makeatother
\end{lcode}

 \makeatletter
\let\oldfnum@figure\fnum@figure
 \renewcommand{\fnum@figure}{\textsc{\figurename~\thefigure}}
 \makeatother
 \begin{shadefigure}
 \centering
 A THOUSAND WORDS\ldots
 \caption{A picture is worth a thousand words}\label{fig:sc}
 \end{shadefigure}

 As an example, \fref{fig:sc} was created by the following code:
\begin{lcode}
 \makeatletter
 \renewcommand{\fnum@figure}{\textsc{\figurename~\thefigure}}
 \makeatother
 \begin{figure}
 \centering
 A THOUSAND WORDS\ldots
 \caption{A picture is worth a thousand words}\label{fig:sc}
 \end{figure}
\end{lcode}

 As another example, suppose that you needed to typeset the \cmd{\figurename}
and its number in a bold font, replace the 
colon\index{caption!delimeter} that normally appears
after the number by a long dash, and typeset the actual title 
text\index{caption!font} in
a sans-serif font, as is illustrated by the caption for 
\fref{fig:sf}. The following code does this.

 \makeatletter
 \renewcommand{\fnum@figure}[1]{\textbf{\figurename~\thefigure} --- \sffamily}
 \makeatother
 \begin{shadefigure}
  \centering
  ANOTHER THOUSAND WORDS\ldots
 \caption{A different kind of figure caption}\label{fig:sf}
 \end{shadefigure}

\begin{lcode}
 \makeatletter
 \renewcommand{\fnum@figure}[1]{\textbf{\figurename~\thefigure} 
                                --- \sffamily}
 \makeatother
 \begin{figure}
  \centering
  ANOTHER THOUSAND WORDS\ldots
 \caption{A different kind of figure caption}\label{fig:sf}
 \end{figure}
\end{lcode}
 Perhaps a little description of how this works is in order.
 Doing a little bit of \tx's macro processing by hand, the typesetting
 lines in \cmd{\@makecaption} (lines 2 and 3) get instantiated like:
\begin{lcode}
\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure}: text
\end{lcode}
 Redefining \cmd{\fnum@figure} to take one argument and then not using the
 value of the argument essentially gobbles up the colon. Using
\begin{lcode}
\textbf{\figurename~\thefigure}
\end{lcode}
in the definition causes \cmd{\figurename} and the number to be typeset in
a bold font. After this comes the long dash. Finally, putting \cmd{\sffamily}
at the end of the redefinition causes any following text (i.e., the actual 
title) to be typeset using the sans-serif font.

 If you do modify \cmd{\@makecaption}, then spaces in the definition may be
important; also you must use the comment (\%) character in the same
places as I have done above. Hopefully, though, the class provides the
tools that you need to make most, if not all, of any likely caption styles.

\makeatletter
\let\fnum@figure\oldfnum@figure
\makeatother

\index{caption!\ltx\ methods|)}%|


 \section{Footnotes in captions}

\index{caption!footnote|(}%|
\index{footnote!in caption|(}%|

    If you want to have a caption with a footnote, think long and hard
 as to whether this is really essential. It is not normally considered
 to be good typographic practice, and to rub the point in \ltx\ does not
 make it necessarily easy to do. However, if you (or your publisher)
 insists, read on.

    If it is present, the optional argument to \cmd{\caption} is put into
the \listofx\ as appropriate. If the argument is not present, then the
text of the required argument is put into the \listofx. In the first case,
the optional argument is moving, and in the second case the required
argument is moving. The \cmd{\footnote} command\index{footnote!fragile} 
is fragile and must be
\cmd{\protect}ed (i.e., \verb?\protect\footnote{}?) if it is used in a moving 
argument. If you don't want the footnote to appear in 
the \listofx, use a
footnoteless optional argument and a footnoted required argument.

   You will probably be surprised if you just do, for example:
 \begin{lcode}
 \begin{figure}
 ...
 \caption[For LoF]{For figure\footnote{The footnote}}
 \end{figure}
 \end{lcode}
because (a) the footnote number may be greater than you thought, and (b)
the footnote text has vanished. This latter is because \ltx\ won't typeset
footnotes\index{footnote!in float} from a float\index{float}. 
To get an actual footnote within the float you have to use a minipage, 
like:
 \begin{lcode}
 \begin{figure}
 \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
 ...
 \caption[For LoF]{For figure\footnote{The footnote}}
 \end{minipage}
 \end{figure}
 \end{lcode}
 If you are using the standard classes you may now find that you get two 
footnotes for the price of one. Fortunately this will not occur with this 
class, nor will an unexpected increase of the footnote number.

    When using a minipage as above, the footnote text is typeset at the
bottom of the minipage (i.e., within the float\index{float}). 
If you want the footnote text typeset at the bottom of the page, 
then you have to use the
\cmd{\footnotemark} and \cmd{\footnotetext} commands like:
 \begin{lcode}
 \begin{figure}
 ...
 \caption[For LoF]{For figure\footnotemark}
 \end{figure}
 \footnotetext{The footnote}
 \end{lcode}
 This will typeset the argument of the \cmd{\footnotetext} command at the
bottom of the page where you called the command. 
Of course, the figure\index{figure} might have floated\index{float} to a 
later page, and then it's a matter of some manual fiddling to get everything 
on the same page, and possibly to get the footnote 
marks\index{footnote!mark} to match correctly with the 
footnote\index{footnote!text} text.

 At this point, you are on your own.
\index{footnote!in caption|)}%|
\index{caption!footnote|)}%|


\section{The class versus the caption package (and its friends)}
\label{sec:class-versus-caption}

For some, the configurations for captions provided by the class, are
either a bit too complicated or not complicated enough.

The \Lpack{caption} package by Alex Sommerfeldt may provide a simpler
and much more extensive configuration interface for captions. The
package can be used with the class, but there are a few caveats:
\begin{enumerate}[(a)]
\item All of the special configuration macros provided by the class
  will no longer have any effect (\Lpack{caption} overwrites the core,
  and thus our interfaces will have no effect),
\item \cmd{\abovecaptionskip} will be reset to 10\,pt, and
  \cmd{\belowcaptionskip} to zero. (The class would set both to
  0.5\cmd{\onelineskip}, so if you need to change these, move the
  change until after \Lpack{caption} has been loaded) 
\end{enumerate}








\index{caption|)}%|


%#% extend


%#% extstart include rows-and-columns.tex

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-04-24 17:14:15 +0200 (Wed, 24 Apr 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 442 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}


%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%% Original memman

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% end original memman
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%\DeleteShortVerb{\|}
%%%%\MakeShortVerb{\=}
%%%%\input{tabmanbody}  %% rows & columns
%%%%  tabmanbody.tex

 \chapter{Rows and columns}

    The class provides extensions to the standard \Ie{array} and \Ie{tabular}
environments. These are based partly on a merging of the
 \Lpack{array}~\cite{ARRAY}, 
 \Lpack{dcolumn}~\cite{DCOLUMN},
 \Lpack{delarray}~\cite{DELARRAY}, 
 \Lpack{tabularx}~\cite{TABULARX}, and 
 \Lpack{booktabs}~\cite{BOOKTABS} 
 packages. 
    Much of the material in this chapter strongly reflects the
documentation of these packages.

 Additionally, new kinds of tabular environments are also provided.


\section{General}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\[} \senv{array}\oarg{pos}\marg{preamble} rows \eenv{array} \cmd{\]} \\
\senv{tabular}\oarg{pos}\marg{preamble} rows \eenv{tabular} \\
\senv{tabular*}\marg{width}\oarg{pos}\marg{preamble} rows \eenv{tabular*} \\
\senv{tabularx}\marg{width}\oarg{pos}\marg{preamble} rows \eenv{tabularx} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(array)%
  {\senv{array}\oarg{pos}\marg{preamble}}%
  {Environment for setting math elements in an array form.}
\glossary(tabular)%
  {\senv{tabular}\oarg{pos}\marg{preamble}}%
  {Environment for setting text elements in a tabular form.}
\glossary(tabular*)%
  {\senv{tabular*}\marg{width}\oarg{pos}\marg{preamble}}%
  {Environment for setting text elements in a tabular form within an overall 
  \meta{width}; intercolumn spacing is adjusted to suit.}
\glossary(tabularx)%
  {\senv{tabularx}\marg{width}\oarg{pos}\marg{preamble}}%
  {Environment for setting text elements in a tabular form within an overall
   \meta{width}; column widths are adjusted to suit.}
The \Ie{array} and \Ie{tabular} environments are traditional and the others
are extensions. The \Ie{array} is for typesetting
math and has to be within a math environment of some kind. The \Ie{tabular}
series are for typesetting ordinary text.

    The optional \meta{pos} argument can be one of \texttt{t}, \texttt{c},
or \texttt{b} (the default is \texttt{c}), and controls the vertical position
of the array or tabular; either the \texttt{t}op or the \texttt{c}enter,
or the \texttt{b}ottom is aligned with the baseline. 
Each row consists of elements separated by
\&, and finished with \cmd{\\}. There may be as many rows as desired.
The number and style of the columns is specified by the \meta{preamble}.
The width of each column is wide enough to contain its longest entry and
the overall width of the \Ie{array} or \Ie{tabular} is sufficient to contain
all the columns. However, the \Ie{tabular*} and \Ie{tabularx} environments
provide more control over the width through their \meta{width} argument.

\section{The preamble}

    You use the \meta{preamble} argument to the array and tabular 
environments to specify the number of columns and how you want column
entries to appear. The preamble consists of a sequence of options, which
are listed in \tref{tab:tabpream}.

 \begin{table}
\begin{adjustwidth}{-5mm}{-5mm}
 %\begin{center}
\centering
 \caption{The array and tabular preamble options.} \label{tab:tabpream}
    \setlength{\extrarowheight}{1pt}
    \begin{tabular}{cp{9cm}} \toprule
 \texttt{l}             &  Left adjusted column. \\
 \texttt{c}             &  Centered adjusted column. \\
 \texttt{r}             &  Right adjusted column. \\
 \texttt{p}\marg{width} &  Equivalent to \verb?\parbox[t]?\marg{width}. \\
 \texttt{m}\marg{width} &  Defines a column of width \meta{width}.
                           Every entry will be centered in proportion to
                           the rest of the line. It is somewhat like
                           \cmd{\parbox}\marg{width}. \\
 \texttt{b}\marg{width} &  Coincides with \verb?\parbox[b]?\marg{width}. \\
 \texttt{>}\marg{decl}  &  Can be used before an \texttt{l}, \texttt{r},
                           \texttt{c}, \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} or a
                           \texttt{b} option. It inserts \meta{decl}
                           directly in front of the entry of the column.
                           \\
 \texttt{<}\marg{decl}  &  Can be used after an \texttt{l}, \texttt{r},
                           \texttt{c}, \verb?p{..}?, \verb?m{..}? or a 
                           \verb?b{..}?
                           option.  It inserts \meta{decl} right
                           after the entry of the column.  \\
 \texttt{|}             &  Inserts a vertical line. The distance between
                           two columns will be enlarged by the width of
                           the line. \\
 \texttt{@}\marg{decl}  &  Suppresses inter-column space and inserts
                           \meta{decl} instead. \\
 \texttt{!}\marg{decl}  &  Can be used anywhere and corresponds with the
                           \texttt{|} option. The difference is that
                           \meta{decl} is inserted instead of a
                           vertical line, so this option doesn't
                           suppress the normally inserted space between
                           columns in contrast to \verb?@{...}?.\\
 \texttt{*}\marg{num}\marg{opts} & Equivalent to \meta{num} copies of
                                   \meta{opts} \\
 \texttt{D}\marg{ssep}\marg{osep}\marg{places} & Column entries aligned
                           on a `decimal point' \\
       \bottomrule
    \end{tabular}
% \end{center}
\end{adjustwidth}
 \end{table}

    Examples of the options include:
 \begin{itemize}
    \item A flush left column with bold font can be specified
          with \verb?>{\bfseries}l?.
%% Companion, page 106.
%\begin{egsource}{eg:tabcols}
\begin{lcode}
\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{>{\large}c >{\large\bfseries}l >{\large\itshape}c} 
                \toprule
A   & B  & C \\ 
100 & 10 & 1 \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
\end{lcode}
%\end{egsource}

%\begin{egresult}[Different column styles in a \Pe{tabular}]{eg:tabcols}
\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{>{\large}c >{\large\bfseries}l >{\large\itshape}c} 
                \toprule
A   & B  & C \\ 
100 & 10 & 1 \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
%\end{egresult}

    \item
       In columns which have been generated with \texttt{p}, \texttt{m}
       or \texttt{b}, the default value of \lnc{\parindent} is
       0pt.

%Companion, page 106.

\begin{lcode}
\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{m{1cm}m{1cm}m{1cm}} \toprule
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 &
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2         &
3 3 3 3                 \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
\end{lcode}

\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{m{1cm}m{1cm}m{1cm}} \toprule
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 &
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2         &
3 3 3 3                 \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{center}

       The \lnc{\parindent} for a particular column can be changed with, 
for example
\begin{lcode}
>{\setlength{\parindent}{1cm}}p
\end{lcode}

%%Companion, page 107.

\begin{lcode}
\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{>{\setlength{\parindent}{5mm}}p{2cm} p{2cm}} \toprule
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 &
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
\end{lcode}

\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{>{\setlength{\parindent}{5mm}}p{2cm} p{2cm}} \toprule
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 &
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{center}

    \item
       The specification \verb?>{$}c<{$}? generates a column in math
       mode in a \Ie{tabular} environment. When used in an \Ie{array}
       environment the column is in LR mode (because the additional
       \$'s cancel the existing \$'s).
    \item
       Using \verb?c!{\hspace{1cm}}c? you get space between two
       columns which is enlarged by one centimeter, while
       \verb?c@\hspace{1cm}}c? gives you exactly one centimeter
       space between two columns.
\item Elsewhere reasons are given why you should not use vertical
      lines (e.g., the \texttt{|} option) in tables. Any examples
      that use vertical lines are for illustrative purposes only where
      it is advantageous to denote column boundaries, for example
      to show different spacing effects.
 \end{itemize}

 \subsection{D column specifiers} \label{sec:dcolumns}

    In financial tables dealing with pounds
and pence or dollars and cents, column entries
should be aligned on the separator between the numbers. The \texttt{D}
column specifier is provided for columns which are to be aligned on 
a `decimal point'. The specifier takes three arguments.
\begin{syntax}
 \texttt{D}\marg{ssep}\marg{osep}\marg{places} \\
\end{syntax}
\begin{itemize}
\item[\meta{ssep}] is the single character which is used as the
 separator in the source \texttt{.tex} file. Thus it will usually 
be `\texttt{.}' or  `\texttt{,}'.

\item[\meta{osep}] is the separator in the output, this may
 be the same as the first argument, but may be any math-mode
 expression, such as \cmd{\cdot}. A \texttt{D} column
 always uses math mode for the digits as well as the separator.

\item[\meta{places}] should be the maximum number of decimal places
 in the column (but see below for more on this). 
If this is negative, any number of decimal places can
 be used in the column, and all entries will be centred on 
 (the leading edge of) the 
 separator. Note that this can cause a column to be too wide; for instance, 
compare  the first two columns in the example below. 
\end{itemize}

    Here are some example specifications which, for convenience, employ
the \cmd{\newcolumntype} macro described later.

\begin{lcode}
\newcolumntype{d}[1]{D{.}{\cdot}{#1}}
\end{lcode}
    This defines \texttt{d} to be a column specifier taking a single argument 
specifying the number of decimal places, 
and the \file{.tex} file should use `\texttt{.}' as the separator, with
\cmd{\cdot} ($\cdot$) being used in the output.

\begin{lcode}
\newcolumntype{.}{D{.}{.}{-1}}
\end{lcode}
The result of this is that `\texttt{.}' specifies a column of entries to 
be centered on the~`$.$'.

\begin{lcode}
\newcolumntype{,}{D{,}{,}{2}}
\end{lcode}
And the result of this is that `\texttt{,}' specifies a column of 
entries with at most two decimal places after a~`$,$'.

 \newcolumntype{d}[1]{D{.}{\cdot}{#1}}
 \newcolumntype{.}{D{.}{.}{-1}}
 \newcolumntype{,}{D{,}{,}{2}}

 The following table is typeset from this code:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{center}
 \begin{tabular}{|d{-1}|d{2}|.|,|}
 1.2   & 1.2   &1.2    &1,2    \\
 1.23  & 1.23  &12.5   &300,2  \\
 1121.2& 1121.2&861.20 &674,29 \\
 184   & 184   &10     &69     \\
 .4    & .4    &       &,4     \\
       &       &.4     &
 \end{tabular}
 \end{center}
\end{lcode}

 \begin{center}
 \begin{tabular}{|d{-1}|d{2}|.|,|}
 1.2   & 1.2   &1.2    &1,2    \\
 1.23  & 1.23  &12.5   &300,2  \\
 1121.2& 1121.2&861.20 &674,29 \\
 184   & 184   &10     &69     \\
 .4    & .4    &       &,4     \\
       &       &.4     &
 \end{tabular}
 \end{center}

 Note that the first column, which had a negative \meta{places}
 argument is wider than the second column, so that the decimal point
 appears in the middle of the column.

 The third
 \meta{places} argument may specify \emph{both} the number of
 digits to the left and to the right of the decimal place. The third
 column in the next table below is set with \verb?D{.}{.}{5.1}? and in the
 second  table,  \verb?D{.}{.}{1.1}?, to specify
 `five places to the left and one to the right' and `one place to the
 left and one to the right' respectively.  (You may use `,' or other
 characters, not necessarily `.' in this argument.) The column of figures
 is then positioned such that a number with the specified numbers of
 digits is centred in the column.
 
     Be careful if you have table headings inserted, say, with 
\begin{lcode}
\multicolumn{1}{c}{...}
\end{lcode}
 to over-ride the \texttt{D} column type, as the overall result may not look
quite as good as you might expect. In the next pair of tabulars the first
column is set with
\begin{lcode}
D{.}{.}{-1}
\end{lcode}
to produce a column centered on the `.', and the second column is set with
\begin{lcode}
D{.}{.}{1}
\end{lcode}
to produce a right aligned column.

%\begin{lcode}
\begin{egsource}{eg:tabwidehead}
\begin{center}\small
\begin{tabular}[t]{|D..{-1}|D..{1}|D..{5.1}|}
\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{head} &
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{head}  &
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{head}    \\[3pt]
1       & 2       & 3        \\
1.2     & 1.2     & 1.2      \\
11212.2 & 11212.2 & 11212.2  \\
.4      & .4      & .4         
\end{tabular}
\hfill
\begin{tabular}[t]{|D..{-1}|D..{1}|D..{1.1}|}
\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{wide heading} &
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{wide heading} &
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{wide heading} \\[3pt]
1       & 2       & 3             \\
1.2     & 1.2     & 1.2           \\
.4      & .4      & .4  
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
\end{egsource}
%\end{lcode}

\begin{egresultplain}[Tabular with narrow and wide headings]{eg:tabwidehead}
 \begin{center}\small
 \begin{tabular}[t]{|D..{-1}|D..{1}|D..{5.1}|}
\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{head}&
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{head}&
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{head}\\[3pt]
1       & 2       & 3        \\
1.2     & 1.2     &1.2 \\
11212.2 & 11212.2 &11212.2  \\
 .4     & .4      &.4         
 \end{tabular}
 \hfill
 \begin{tabular}[t]{|D..{-1}|D..{1}|D..{1.1}|}
\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{wide heading}&
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{wide heading}&
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{wide heading}\\[3pt]
1       & 2       & 3        \\
1.2     & 1.2     & 1.2 \\
.4      & .4      & .4  
 \end{tabular}
 \end{center}
\end{egresultplain}

 In both of these tables the first column is set with \verb?D{.}{.}{-1}?
 to produce a column centered on the `\texttt{.}', and the second column is
 set with \verb?D{.}{.}{1}? to produce a right aligned column.

 The centered (first) column produces columns that are wider than necessary
 to fit in the numbers under a heading as it has to ensure that the
 decimal point is centered. The right aligned (second) column does not have
 this drawback, but under a wide heading a column of small right
 aligned figures is somewhat disconcerting.

 The notation for the \meta{places} argument also enables columns that 
are centred on the mid-point
 of the separator, rather than its leading edge; for example 
\begin{lcode}
D{+}{\,\pm\,}{3,3}
\end{lcode}
 will give a symmetric layout of up to three
 digits on either side of a $\pm$ sign.

 \subsection{Defining new column specifiers}

     You can easily type
 \begin{quote}
   \verb?>{?\meta{some declarations}\verb?}{c}<{?\meta{some more
   declarations}\verb?}?
 \end{quote}
when you have a one-off column in a table, but it gets tedious
 if you often use columns of this form. 
The \cmd{\newcolumntype} lets you define a new column option like, say
 \begin{quote}
   \verb?\newcolumntype{x}{>{?\meta{some declarations}\verb?}{c}<{?\meta{some
   more declarations}\verb?}}?\hspace*{-3cm} 
 \end{quote}
and you can then use the \texttt{x} column specifier in the preamble wherever
you want a column of this kind.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\newcolumntype}\marg{char}\oarg{nargs}\marg{spec} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(newcolumntype)
  {\cs{newcolumntype}\marg{char}\oarg{nargs}\marg{spec}}%
  {Creates a new column type \meta{char} according to \meta{spec} (which has
   \meta{nargs} number of arguments).}
The \meta{char} argument is the character that identifies the option 
and \meta{spec}
is its specification in terms of the regular preamble options.
The \cmd{\newcolumntype} command is similar to \cmd{\newcommand} --- 
\meta{spec} itself can take arguments with the optional \meta{nargs}
argument declaring their number. 

    For example, it is commonly required to have both math-mode and text 
columns in the same alignment. Defining:
\begin{lcode}
\newcolumntype{C}{>{$}c<{$}}
\newcolumntype{L}{>{$}l<{$}}
\newcolumntype{R}{>{$}r<{$}}
\end{lcode}
 Then \texttt{C} can be used to get centred text in an
\Ie{array}, or centred math-mode in a \Ie{tabular}. Similarly
\texttt{L} and \texttt{R} are for left- and right-aligned columns.

 The \meta{spec} in a \cmd{\newcolumntype} command may refer to any of
 the primitive column specifiers (see table \ref{tab:tabpream} on page
 \pageref{tab:tabpream}), or to any new letters defined in other
\cmd{\newcolumntype} commands.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\showcols} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(showcols)%
  {\cs{showcols}}%
  {Writes a list of all \cs{newcolumntype}s to the terminal and log file.}
   A list of all the currently active
\cmd{\newcolumntype} definitions is sent to the terminal and log file if
 the \cmd{\showcols} command is given.

\subsection{Surprises}

 \begin{itemize}
 \item A preamble of the form \verb?{wx*{0}{abc}yz}? is treated as \verb?{wxyz}?

 \item An incorrect positional argument, such as \texttt{[Q]}, 
 is treated as \texttt{[t]}.

 \item A preamble such as \verb?{cc*{2}}? with an error in
 a $*$-form will generate an error message 
 that is not particularly helpful.

 \item Error messages generated when parsing the column specification
   refer to the preamble argument \emph{after} it has been re-written
   by the \cmd{\newcolumntype} system, not to the preamble entered by the
   user.  

 \item Repeated \texttt{<} or \texttt{>} constructions
 are allowed.  \texttt{>}\marg{decs1}\texttt{>}\marg{decs2}
 is treated the same as \texttt{>}\marg{decs2}\marg{decs1}.

   The treatment of multiple \texttt{<} or \texttt{>}
declarations may seem strange. Using the obvious ordering
of \texttt{>}\marg{decs1}\marg{decs2} has the disadvantage
of not allowing the settings of a  \cmd{\newcolumntype} 
defined using these declarations to be overriden.

 \item The \cmd{\extracolsep} command may be used in \texttt{@}-expressions 
 as in standard \ltx, and also in \texttt{!}-expressions.

   The use of \cmd{\extracolsep} is subject to the following
   two restrictions.  There must be at most one \cmd{\extracolsep}
   command per \texttt{@}, or \texttt{!} expression and the command must be
   directly entered into the \texttt{@} expression, not as part of a macro
   definition. Thus
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\ef}{\extracolsep{\fill}} ... @{\ef}
\end{lcode}
 does not work. However you can use
   something like
\begin{lcode}
\newcolumntype{e}{@{\extracolsep{\fill}}
\end{lcode}
instead.

 \item As noted by the \ltx\ book~\cite{LAMPORT94}, a 
   \cmd{\multicolumn}, with the exception of the first column,
   consists of the entry and the \emph{following} inter-column
   material. This means that in a tabular with the preamble
   \verb?|l|l|l|l|? input such as \verb?\multicolumn{2}{|c|}? in
   anything other than the first column is incorrect.

   In the standard array/tabular implementation this error is not 
   noticeable as a \verb?|? takes no horizontal space. But in the class the
   vertical lines take up their natural width and you will see two lines if
   two are specified --- another reason to avoid using \verb?|?.

 \end{itemize}

\section{The array environment}

    Mathematical arrays are usually produced using the \Ie{array} environment.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\[} \senv{array}\oarg{pos}\marg{preamble} rows \eenv{array} \cmd{\]} \\
\cmd{\[} \senv{array}\oarg{pos}\meta{left}\marg{preamble}\meta{right} rows \eenv{array} \cmd{\]} \\
\end{syntax}
    Math formula are usually centered in the columns, but a column of 
numbers often looks best flush right, or aligned on some distinctive
feature. In the latter case the \texttt{D} column scheme is very handy.
\begin{lcode}
\[ \begin{array}{lcr}
   a +b +c & d - e - f & 123 \\
   g-h     &  j k      & 45 \\
    l      &   m       & 6
  \end{array} \]
\end{lcode}

\[ \begin{array}{lcr}
   a +b +c & d - e - f & 123 \\
   g-h     &  j k      & 45 \\
    l      &   m       & 6
  \end{array} \]

    Arrays are often enclosed in brackets or vertical lines or brackets 
or other symbols to
denote math constructs like matrices. The delimeters are often large and have
to be indicated using \cmd{\left} and \cmd{\right} commands.
\begin{lcode}
\[ \left[ \begin{array}{cc}
          x_{1} & x_{2} \\
          x_{3} & x_{4}
          \end{array} \right] \]
\end{lcode}

\[ \left[ \begin{array}{cc}
          x_{1} & x_{2} \\
          x_{3} & x_{4}
          \end{array} \right] \]


    The class's \Ie{array} environment is an extension of the standard 
environment in that it provides a system of implicit \cmd{\left} \cmd{\right} 
pairs. If you want an array surrounded by parentheses, you can enter:
\begin{lcode}
 \[  \begin{array}({cc})a&b\\c&d\end{array}   \]
\end{lcode}

 \[  \begin{array}({cc})a&b\\c&d\end{array}   \]

Or, a litle more complex
\begin{lcode}
\[ \begin{array}({c})
     \begin{array}|{cc}|
       x_{1} & x_{2} \\
       x_{3} & x_{4}
     \end{array} \\
         y \\
         z
   \end{array} \]
\end{lcode}

\[ \begin{array}({c})
     \begin{array}|{cc}|
       x_{1} & x_{2} \\
       x_{3} & x_{4}
     \end{array} \\
         y \\
         z
   \end{array} \]

    And you can do things like this:
\begin{lcode}
\[ a = {\begin{array}|{*{20}{c}}|
        x-\lambda & 1         & 0 \\
        0         & x-\lambda & 1 \\
        0         &           & x-\lambda \\
        \end{array}
       }^{2} \]
\end{lcode}

\[ a = {\begin{array}|{*{20}{c}}|
        x-\lambda & 1         & 0 \\
        0         & x-\lambda & 1 \\
        0         &           & x-\lambda \\
        \end{array}
       }^{2} \]



 As another example, a construct equivalent to plain \tx's \cmd{\cases} 
could be defined by:\\
\begin{lcode}
 \[  f(x)=\begin{array}\{{lL}.
           0         & if $x=0$\\
           \sin(x)/x & otherwise
           \end{array}  \]
\end{lcode}

 \newcolumntype{L}{>{$}l<{$}}
 \[  f(x)=\begin{array}\{{lL}.
           0         & if $x=0$\\
           \sin(x)/x & otherwise
           \end{array}  \]

 Here \texttt{L} denotes a column of left aligned L-R text, as described
earlier.
 Note that as the delimiters must always be used in pairs, the  `\texttt{.}'
 must be used to denote a  `null delimiter'.

 This feature is especially useful if the \verb?[t]? or \verb?[b]?
 arguments are also used. In these cases the result is not equivalent
 to surrounding the environment by \cmd{\left}\ldots\cmd{\right}, as
 can be seen from the following example:
\begin{lcode}
 \begin{array}[t]({c}) 1\\2\\3 \end{array}
 \begin{array}[c]({c}) 1\\2\\3 \end{array}
 \begin{array}[b]({c}) 1\\2\\3 \end{array}
 \quad\mbox{not}\quad
 \left(\begin{array}[t]{c} 1\\2\\3 \end{array}\right)
 \left(\begin{array}[c]{c} 1\\2\\3 \end{array}\right)
 \left(\begin{array}[b]{c} 1\\2\\3 \end{array}\right)
\end{lcode}


 \[
 \begin{array}[t]({c}) 1\\2\\3 \end{array}
 \begin{array}[c]({c}) 1\\2\\3 \end{array}
 \begin{array}[b]({c}) 1\\2\\3 \end{array}
 \quad\mbox{not}\quad
 \left(\begin{array}[t]{c} 1\\2\\3 \end{array}\right)
 \left(\begin{array}[c]{c} 1\\2\\3 \end{array}\right)
 \left(\begin{array}[b]{c} 1\\2\\3 \end{array}\right)
 \]



\section{Tables}

    A table is one way of presenting a large amount of information
in a limited space. Even a simple table can presents facts that could
require several wordy paragraphs --- it is not only a picture that is worth
a thousand words.

    A table should have at least two columns, otherwise it is really a list,
and many times has more. The leftmost column is often called the 
\emph{stub}\index{table!column!stub}
and it typically contains a vertical listing of the information categories
 in the other columns. The columns\index{table!column!head} 
have \emph{heads} (or \emph{headings}) at
the top indicating the nature of the entries in the column, although
it is not always necessary to provide a head for the stub if the
heading is obvious from the table's caption. Column heads
may include subheadings, often to specify the unit of measurement for numeric
data. 

   A less simple table may need two or more levels of headings, in which
case \emph{decked heads} are used. 
A decked head\index{table!column!decked head} consists of a 
\emph{spanner head}\index{table!column!spanner head} and the two or 
more column heads it applies to. A horizontal 
\emph{spanner rule}\index{table!column!spanner rule} is set between the  
spanner and column heads to 
show which columns belong to the spanner.

  Double decking, and certainly triple decking or more, should be avoided
as it can make it difficult following them down the table. It may be possible
to use a \emph{cut-in head}\index{table!column!cut-in head} instead of 
double decking. A cut-in head is
one that cuts across the columns of the table and applies to all the 
matter below it. To try and clarify, the parts of a table
are shown diagrammatically in \tref{tab:tabparts}.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Demonstrating the parts of a table} \label{tab:tabparts}
\begin{tabular}{lcccc} \toprule
     &    & \multicolumn{2}{c}{spanner} &  \\ \cmidrule{3-4}
     & head & head & head & head        \\
stub & subhead & subhead &       &      \\ \midrule
A    &   a     &   b     &   c   &   d  \\
B    &   e     &   f     &   g   &   h  \\ \cmidrule{2-5}
     & \multicolumn{4}{c}{cut-in head}  \\ \cmidrule{2-5}
C    &   i     &   j     &   k   &   l  \\
D    &   m     &   n     &   o   &   p  \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

   No mention has been made of vertical\index{table!rule!vertical} 
rules in a table, and this is
deliberate. There should be no vertical rules in a table. Rules, 
if used at all, should be horizontal\index{table!rule!horizontal} only, 
and these should be single, 
not double or triple. It's not that ink is expensive, or that practically
no typesetting is done by hand any more, it is simply that the visual 
clutter should be eliminated. 

    For example, in \tref{tab:twoviews} which was produced from the code below,
\tref{tab:before} is from the \ltx\ book and 
\tref{tab:after} is how Simon Fear~\cite{BOOKTABS} suggests it
should be cleaned up. Notice how both the revised code and the table 
are generally simpler than the originals.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Two views of one table} \label{tab:twoviews}
\subtop[Before]{\label{tab:before}%
 \begin{tabular}{||l|lr||} \hline
 gnats     & gram      & \$13.65 \\ \cline{2-3}
           & each      & .01 \\ \hline
 gnu       & stuffed   & 92.50 \\ \cline{1-1} \cline{3-3}
 emu       &           & 33.33 \\ \hline
 armadillo & frozen    & 8.99 \\ \hline
 \end{tabular}}
\hfill
\subtop[After]{\label{tab:after}%
 \begin{tabular}{@{}llr@{}} \toprule
 \multicolumn{2}{c}{Item} \\ \cmidrule(r){1-2}
 Animal & Description & Price (\$)\\ \midrule
 Gnat  & per gram  & 13.65 \\
       & each      & 0.01 \\
 Gnu   & stuffed   & 92.50 \\
 Emu   & stuffed   & 33.33 \\
 Armadillo & frozen & 8.99 \\ \bottomrule
 \end{tabular}
}
\end{table}

\begin{lcode}
\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Two views of one table} \label{tab:twoviews}
\subtop[Before]{\label{tab:before}%
 \begin{tabular}{||l|lr||} \hline
 gnats     & gram      & \$13.65 \\ \cline{2-3}
           & each      & .01 \\ \hline
 gnu       & stuffed   & 92.50 \\ \cline{1-1} \cline{3-3}
 emu       &           & 33.33 \\ \hline
 armadillo & frozen    & 8.99 \\ \hline
 \end{tabular}}
\hfill
\subtop[After]{\label{tab:after}%
 \begin{tabular}{@{}llr@{}} \toprule
 \multicolumn{2}{c}{Item} \\ \cmidrule(r){1-2}
 Animal & Description & Price (\$)\\ \midrule
 Gnat   & per gram    & 13.65 \\
        & each        & 0.01 \\
 Gnu    & stuffed     & 92.50 \\
 Emu    & stuffed     & 33.33 \\
 Armadillo & frozen   & 8.99 \\ \bottomrule
 \end{tabular}
}
\end{table}
\end{lcode}
 

    Columns of numbers often end with a line giving the total or result.
A horizontal rule\index{table!rule} may be drawn to separate the result 
from the rest but
a small amount of white space may do just as well, as in \tref{tab:micawber}.

Some other points are:
 \begin{itemize}
   \item Put the units in the column heading (not in the body of
           the table).
   \item Always precede a decimal point by a digit; thus 0.1
       \emph{not} just .1.
   \item Do not use `ditto' signs or any other such convention to
       repeat a previous value. In many circumstances a blank
       will serve just as well. If it won't, then repeat the value.
 \end{itemize}

    Not every table requires all the elements mentioned above.
For instance, in Charles Dicken's \emph{David Copperfield} (1849--1850) 
Mr Wilkins Micawber states:
\begin{quote}
`Annual income twenty pounds, annual expenditure nineteen six, 
result hapiness.
Annual income twenty pounds, annual expenditure twenty pounds ought and six, 
result misery.'
\end{quote}
This can also be represented in tabular 
form\footnote{%
But putting Josh Billings' (Henry Wheeler Shaw) corollary: 
`Live within your income, even if you have to borrow to do it.'
into tabular form would not work.}
 as in \tref{tab:micawber}.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Micawber's law} \label{tab:micawber}
\begin{tabular}{lrr} \toprule
Income     & \pounds{20-0-0}  & \pounds{20-0-0} \\
Expenditure & \pounds{19-0-6} & \pounds{20-0-6} \\ \addlinespace
Result      & happiness & misery \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

    Long narrow tables do not look well on the page. In such cases
the table\index{table!half and half} could be set half and half 
instead, as in \tref{tab:halfhalf}.

\settowidth{\versewidth}{Relative contents of odd isotopes for heavy elements}
\addtolength{\versewidth}{2mm}
\begin{table}
\begin{adjustwidth}{-5mm}{-5mm}
\centering \addtolength{\cmidrulekern}{0.25em}
\caption{A narrow table split half and half} \label{tab:halfhalf}
\begin{tabularx}{\versewidth}{lclXlcl@{}} 
\multicolumn{7}{c}{Relative contents of odd isotopes for heavy elements}\\ \toprule
Element & Z & \multicolumn{1}{c}{$\gamma$} & & 
Element & Z & \multicolumn{1}{c}{$\gamma$} \\ \cmidrule{1-3}\cmidrule(r){5-7}
Sm & 62 & 1.480 & & W  & 74 & 0.505 \\
Gd & 64 & 0.691 & & Os & 76 & 0.811 \\
Dy & 66 & 0.930 & & Pt & 78 & 1.160 \\
\ldots & &      & & \ldots & &      \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabularx}
\end{adjustwidth}
\end{table}

\section{Fear's rules}

    Simon Fear disapproves of the default \ltx\ table\index{table!rule} 
rules and
wrote the \Lpack{booktabs} package~\cite{BOOKTABS} to provide
better horizontal rules. Like many typographers, he abhors vertical rules.
The following is taken almost verbatim from the \Lpack{booktabs} package.

\index{table!rule|(}

 In the simplest of cases a table begins with a top rule, has
 a single row of column headings, then a dividing rule, 
and after the columns of data it is finished
off with a final rule. The top and bottom rules are normally
set heavier (i.e., thicker or darker) than any intermediate rules.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\toprule}\oarg{width} 
\cmd{\bottomrule}\oarg{width} 
\lnc{\heavyrulewidth} \\
\cmd{\midrule}\oarg{width} 
\lnc{\lightrulewidth} \\
\lnc{\aboverulesep} \lnc{\belowrulesep} \lnc{\doublerulesep} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(toprule)%
  {\cs{toprule}\oarg{width}}%
  {Draws a rule across a tabular, default width \cs{heavyrulewidth}.}
\glossary(bottomrule)%
  {\cs{bottomrule}\oarg{width}}%
  {Draws a rule across a tabular, default width \cs{heavyrulewidth}.}
\glossary(midrule)%
  {\cs{midrule}\oarg{width}}%
  {Draws a rule across a tabular, default width \cs{lightrulewidth}.}
\glossary(heavyrulewidth)%
  {\cs{heavyrulewidth}}%
  {Default width for a heavy tabular rule.}
\glossary(lightrulewidth)%
  {\cs{lightrulewidth}}%
  {Default width for a light tabular rule.}
\glossary(aboverulesep)%
  {\cs{aboverulesep}}%
  {Space above a tabular rule.}
\glossary(belowrulesep)%
  {\cs{belowrulesep}}%
  {Space below a tabular rule.}
\glossary(doublerulesep)%
  {\cs{doublerulesep}}%
  {Space between adjacent rules in a tabular, or an array.}
 All the rule commands here go immediately after the closing
\cmd{\\} of the preceding row (except of course \cmd{\toprule}, which
 comes right after the start of the environment). Each rule has an optional
length argument, \meta{width}, which you can use to locally change the default 
width of the rule.

 \cmd{\toprule} draws a rule (with a default width of \lnc{\heavyrulewidth}), 
and \lnc{\belowrulesep} vertical space inserted below it.

   \cmd{\midrule} draws a rule (default \lnc{\lightrulewidth} width) 
with \lnc{\aboverulesep} space above it and \lnc{\belowrulesep}
below it. 


\cmd{\bottomrule} draws a rule with a default width of \lnc{\heavyrulewidth}.
There is \lnc{\aboverulesep} space above it and \lnc{\belowrulesep} space 
below it.

   If a rule immediately follows another the space between them is
\lnc{\doublerulesep}, but as you are not going to use double rules you
won't be concerned about this.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cmidrule}\oarg{width}\parg{trim}\marg{m--n} \\
\lnc{\cmidrulewidth} \lnc{\cmidrulekern} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cmidrule)%
  {\cs{cmidrule}\oarg{width}\parg{trim}\marg{m--n}}%
  {Draws a rule, default thickness \cs{cmidrulewidth}, across tabular
   columns \meta{m} to \meta{n}; the ends may be \meta{trim}ed by
   \cs{cmidrulekern}.}
\glossary(cmidrulewidth)%
  {\cs{cmidrulewidth}}%
  {Default width for a \cs{cmidrule} tabular rule.}
\glossary(cmidrulekern)
  {\cs{cmidrulekern}}
  {Trim amount for \cs{cmidrule}.}
Spanner rules do not extend the full width of the table, and the
\cmd{\cmidrule} is provided for that purpose. This draws a rule,
default thickness \lnc{\cmidrulewidth}, across columns \meta{m}
to \meta{n} inclusive (where \meta{m} and \meta{n} are column numbers,
with \meta{m} not greater than \meta{n}).

 Generally, this rule
 should not come to the full width of the end columns, and this
 is especially the case if you have to begin a \cmd{\cmidrule}
 straight after the end of another one. You can use the
optional trimming argument commands, which are \verb?(r)?, \verb?(l)? and \verb?(rl)?
 or \verb?(lr)?, indicated whether the right and/or left ends of the
 rule should be trimmed. Note the exceptional use of parentheses
 instead of brackets for this optional argument.


   \cmd{\cmidrule} draws a rule from column $m$ to $n$ with a default 
thickness of \lnc{\cmidrulewidth}. Adjacent \cmd{\cmidrule}s,
for example
\begin{lcode}
... \\ \cmidrule{2-3}\cmidrule{5-7}
\end{lcode}
have the same vertical alignment. It is best not to leave any space between
these commands. The space above and below
is normally \lnc{\aboverulesep} and \lnc{\belowrulesep}.

    If you are forced into having double spanner rules then you will
reluctantly have
to insert the command \cmd{\morecmidrules} between the commands for
the upper and lower rules. For example:
\begin{lcode}
... \\ \cmidrule{2-3}\cmidrule{5-7}\morecmidrules\cmidrule{2-3}
\end{lcode}
will draw double rules across columns 2 and 3. You must finish off
the rules for one row before starting the lower set of rules. There
must not be any space surrounding the \cmd{\morecmidrules} macro.
The upper and lower rules are separated by \lnc{\cmidrulesep}.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\addlinespace}\oarg{width}
\lnc{\defaultaddspace} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(addlinespace)%
  {\cs{addlinespace}\marg{width}}%
  {Puts extra space, default \cs{defaultaddspace}, between a pair of tabular
   rows.}
\glossary(defaultaddspace)%
  {\cs{defaultaddspace}}%
  {Default space for \cs{addlinespace}.}


 Occasionally extra space between certain rows of a table may be helpful; 
for example, before the last row if this is a total.
This is simply a matter of inserting \cmd{\addlinespace}
 after the \cmd{\\} alignment marker.
You can think
 of \cmd{\addlinespace} as being a white rule of width \meta{width}.
 The default space is \cmd{\defaultaddspace} which gives rather
 less than a whole line space. If another rule follows 
the amount of whitespace is increased by \lnc{\doublerulesep}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\specialrule}\marg{width}\marg{abovespace}\marg{belowspace} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(specialrule)%
  {\cs{specialrule}\marg{width}\marg{abovespace}\marg{belowspace}}%
  {Draws a rule with the given parameters across a tabular.}
    You can, but should not, generate peculiar spacing between
rules by using \cmd{\specialrule}. The three required arguments are the
width, \meta{width}, of the rule and the spaces above (\meta{abovespace})
and below (\meta{belowspace}). \cmd{\specialrule} ignores a preceding rule
but if there is a following one then \meta{belowspace}
will be increased by \lnc{\doublerulesep}.

 The default dimensions are
 \begin{quote}
   \lnc{\heavyrulewidth} = 0.08em \\
   \lnc{\lightrulewidth} = 0.05em \\
   \lnc{\cmidrulewidth}  = 0.03em \\
   \lnc{\belowrulesep}   = 0.65ex \\
   \lnc{\aboverulesep}   = 0.4ex \\
   \lnc{\defaultaddspace} = 0.5em \\
   \lnc{\cmidrulekern}   = 0.25em
 \end{quote}
 The last of these, \lnc{\cmidrulekern}, is the amount by which a
 \cmd{\cmidrule} is trimmed at the ends indicated in the \verb?()?
 option. In the construction
 \begin{quote}
   \verb?\cmidrule(r){1-2}\cmidrule(l){3-4}?
 \end{quote}
 there is a total of 0.5em separating the two rules. Currently
 the only way to get special effects is to reset \lnc{\cmidrulekern}
 as appropriate; the amount of trimming is not available as an
 argument in the current implementation of \cmd{\cmidrule}.


 An example of the commands in use was given by the code to
 produce \tref{tab:after} on \pref{tab:after}:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{tabular}{@{}llr@{}} \toprule
\multicolumn{2}{c}{Item} \\ \cmidrule(r){1-2}
Animal & Description & Price (\$)\\ \midrule
Gnat   & per gram  & 13.65 \\
       & each      & 0.01 \\
Gnu    & stuffed   & 92.50 \\
Emu    & stuffed   & 33.33 \\
Armadillo & frozen & 8.99 \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{lcode}

\index{table!rule|)}

\subsection{Fills}

\index{table!row fill|(}
\index{array!row fill|(}

    The rules described previously go between rows. Sometimes it may be 
desirable to to put a rule or something similar within a 
row.
    
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\downbracefill} \cmd{\hrulefill} \cmd{\upbracefill} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(downbracefill)%
  {\cs{downbracefill}}%
  {Fills a tabular column with a down brace.}
\glossary(hrulefill)%
  {\cs{hrulefill}}%
  {Fills a tabular column with a rule.}
\glossary(upbracefill)%
  {\cs{upbracefill}}%
  {Fills a tabular column with an up brace.}

Examples of \cmd{\downbracefill}, \cmd{\hrulefill}, and \cmd{\upbracefill}
are illustrated in \tref{tab:fills}, typeset from the code below. 
Surprisingly these are
ordinary text commands, not math mode commands.


\begin{lcode}
\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Example table with fills} \label{tab:fills}
\begin{tabular}{rrrrr}
1 & 2   & 3   & 4    & 5 \\
Q &     & fgh & jklm & qwerty \\
v & as  & x   &    y &      z \\
g & nnn & \multicolumn{3}{c}{\upbracefill} \\
\multicolumn{3}{c}{\downbracefill} & pq & dgh \\
k & j   & t   & co   & ytrewq \\
1 & 2   & 3   & \multicolumn{2}{c}{\hrulefill}
\end{tabular}
\end{table}
\end{lcode}

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Example table with fills} \label{tab:fills}
\begin{tabular}{rrrrr}
1 & 2   & 3   & 4    & 5 \\
Q &     & fgh & jklm & qwerty \\
v & as  & x   &    y &      z \\
g & nnn & \multicolumn{3}{c}{\upbracefill} \\
\multicolumn{3}{c}{\downbracefill} & pq & dgh \\
k & j   & t   & co   & ytrewq \\
1 & 2   & 3   & \multicolumn{2}{c}{\hrulefill}
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

    Here are the same fills, but this time in an \Ie{array} environment.
are shown afterwards. Notice the \texttt{\$}s in the array surrounding
the fills. Normally \verb?$...$? is used to typeset a small
amount of math mode material
in the middle of text. In this case, as the \Ie{array} is already in math mode
the \verb?$...$? are used to typeset a small amount of text material
within math mode.

\begin{lcode}
\begin{displaymath}
\begin{array}{rrrrr}
1 & 2   & 3   & 4    & 5 \\
Q &     & fgh & jklm & qwerty \\
v & as  & x   &    y &      z \\
g & nnn & \multicolumn{3}{c}{$\upbracefill$} \\
\multicolumn{3}{c}{$\downbracefill$} & pq & dgh \\
k & j   & t   & co   & ytrewq \\
1 & 2   & 3   & \multicolumn{2}{c}{\hrulefill}
\end{array}
\end{displaymath}
\end{lcode}

\begin{displaymath}
\begin{array}{rrrrr}
1 & 2   & 3   & 4    & 5 \\
Q &     & fgh & jklm & qwerty \\
v & as  & x   &    y &      z \\
g & nnn & \multicolumn{3}{c}{$\upbracefill$} \\
\multicolumn{3}{c}{$\downbracefill$} & pq & dgh \\
k & j   & t   & co   & ytrewq \\
1 & 2   & 3   & \multicolumn{2}{c}{\hrulefill}
\end{array}
\end{displaymath}

    You can define your own `fill'. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\upbracketfill}{%
  \vrule height 4pt depth 0pt\hrulefill%
  \vrule height 4pt depth 0pt}
\end{lcode}
is a fill that has the appearance of a (horizontal) bracket. It can
be used like this:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{displaymath}
\begin{array}{cccc}
1 & 2 & 3 & 4 \\
a & \multicolumn{2}{c}{\upbracketfill} & d \\
A & B & C & D
\end{array}
\end{displaymath}
\end{lcode}

\newcommand*{\upbracketfill}{%
  \vrule height 4pt depth 0pt\hrulefill\vrule height 4pt depth 0pt}

\begin{displaymath}
\begin{array}{cccc}
1 & 2 & 3 & 4 \\
a & \multicolumn{2}{c}{\upbracketfill} & d \\
A & B & C & D
\end{array}
\end{displaymath}

\index{array!row fill|)}
\index{table!row fill|)}

\section{Tabular environments}

\index{tabular|(}

\begin{syntax}
\senv{tabular}\oarg{pos}\marg{format} rows \eenv{tabular} \\
\senv{tabular*}\marg{width}\oarg{pos}\marg{format} rows \eenv{tabular*} \\
\senv{tabularx}\marg{width}\oarg{pos}\marg{format} rows \eenv{tabularx} \\
\end{syntax}

    A table created using the \Ie{tabular} environment comes out as
wide as it has to be to accomodate the entries. On the other hand,
both the \Ie{tabular*} and \Ie{tabularx} environments let you specify
the overall width\index{tabular!controlling width} 
of the table via the additional \meta{width} atrgument.

    The \Ie{tabular*} environment makes any necessary adjustment by altering
the intercolumn\index{tabular!intercolumn space} spaces while the 
\Ie{tabularx} environment alters
the column\index{tabular!column width} widths. Those columns that can 
be adjusted are noted by
using the letter \texttt{X}\index{tabular!X column} as the column 
specifier in the \meta{format}.
Once the correct column widths have been calculated the \texttt{X}
columns are converted to \texttt{p} columns.

 \subsection{Examples}

    The following code is used for a regular \Ie{tabular}.
\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
\centering
\caption{Example of a regular \texttt{tabular}}
\begin{tabular}{|c|p{5.5pc}|c|p{5.5pc}|}  \hline
\multicolumn{2}{|c|}{Multicolumn entry!} & THREE & FOUR \\ \hline
one &
\raggedright\arraybackslash The width of this column is fixed 
(5.5pc). & three &
\raggedright\arraybackslash Column four will act in the same 
way as column two, with the same width.\\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}

\begin{figure}
\centering
\caption{Example of a regular \texttt{tabular}}
\begin{tabular}{|c|p{5.5pc}|c|p{5.5pc}|}   \hline
\multicolumn{2}{|c|}{Multicolumn entry!} & THREE & FOUR \\  \hline
one &
\raggedright\arraybackslash The width of this column is fixed (5.5pc). &
three &
\raggedright\arraybackslash Column four will act in the same way as
  column two, with the same width.\\
 \hline
\end{tabular}
\end{figure}


    The following examples use virtually the same contents, the major
differences are the specifications of the environment.


\begin{figure}
\centering
\caption{Example \texttt{tabularx} and \texttt{tabular*} with widths of 250pt}
\verb?\begin{tabularx}{250pt}{|c|X|c|X|}?

 \begin{tabularx}{250pt}{|c|X|c|X|}
 \hline
 \multicolumn{2}{|c|}{Multicolumn entry!}&
 THREE&
 FOUR\\
 \hline
 one&
 \raggedright\arraybackslash The width of this column depends on the
 width of the table.\footnote{You can use footnotes in a \texttt{tabularx}!}
&
 three&
 \raggedright\arraybackslash Column four will act in the same way as
 column two, with the same width.\\
 \hline
 \end{tabularx}
\vspace{\onelineskip}

\verb? \begin{tabular*}{250pt}{|c|p{5.5pc}|c|p{5.5pc}|}? 

 \begin{tabular*}{250pt}{|c|p{5.5pc}|c|p{5.5pc}|}
 \hline
 \multicolumn{2}{|c|}{Multicolumn entry!}&
 THREE&
 FOUR\\
 \hline
 one&
 \raggedright\arraybackslash The width of this column is fixed (5.5pc). &
 three &
 \raggedright\arraybackslash Column four will act in the same way as
 column two, with the same width.\\
 \hline
 \end{tabular*}
\end{figure}

Note that the horizontal rules\index{tabular!rule} extend beyond the 
last column.
There are no \texttt{X} columns and the total width required to set
the \Ie{tabular*} is less than the 250pt specified for the width.


Compare the previous narrow \Ie{tabular*} with the next one which is set with 
\begin{lcode}
 \begin{tabular*}{300pt}%
       {|@{\extracolsep{\fill}}c|p{5.5pc}|c|p{5.5pc}|}
\end{lcode}

\begin{figure}
\centering
\caption{Example \texttt{tabularx} and \texttt{tabular*} with widths of 300pt}
\verb?\begin{tabularx}{300pt}{|c|X|c|X|}?

 \begin{tabularx}{300pt}{|c|X|c|X|}
 \hline
 \multicolumn{2}{|c|}{Multicolumn entry!}&
 THREE&
 FOUR\\
 \hline
 one&
 \raggedright\arraybackslash The width of this column depends on the
 width of the table.&
 three&
 \raggedright\arraybackslash Column four will act in the same way as
 column two, with the same width.\\
 \hline
 \end{tabularx}

\vspace{\onelineskip}
\verb?\begin{tabular*}{300pt}%? \\
\verb?      {|@{\extracolsep{\fill}}c|p{5.5pc}|c|p{5.5pc}|}?
 
 \begin{tabular*}{300pt}{|@{\extracolsep{\fill}}c|p{5.5pc}|c|p{5.5pc}|}
 \hline
 \multicolumn{2}{|c|}{Multicolumn entry!}&
 THREE&
 FOUR\\
 \hline
 one&
 \raggedright\arraybackslash The width of this column's text is fixed (5.5pc). &
 three &
 \raggedright\arraybackslash Column four will act in the same way as
 column two, with the same width.\\
 \hline
 \end{tabular*}
\end{figure}



     The main differences between the \Ie{tabularx} and \Ie{tabular*}
environments are:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item \Ie{tabularx} modifies the widths\index{tabular!column width} 
 of the \emph{columns},
 whereas \Ie{tabular*} modifies the widths of the 
 intercolumn\index{tabular!intercolumn space}  \emph{spaces}.
 \item \Ie{tabular} and \Ie{tabular*} environments may be
 nested with no restriction, however if one \Ie{tabularx}
 environment occurs inside another, then the inner one \emph{must} be
 enclosed by \verb?{ }?.
 \item The body of the \Ie{tabularx} environment is in fact the
 argument to a command, and so certain constructions which are not
 allowed in command arguments (like \cmd{\verb}) may not be used.\footnote
 {Actually, \cs{verb} and \cs{verb*} may be used, but they may 
 treat spaces incorrectly, and the
 argument can not contain an unmatched {\ttfamily\char`\{} or
 {\ttfamily\char`\}}, or a  {\ttfamily\char`\%} character.}
 \item \Ie{tabular*} uses a primitive capability of \tx\ to
 modify the inter column space of an alignment. \Ie{tabularx}
 has to set the table several times as it searches for the best column
 widths, and is therefore much slower. Also the fact that the body is
 expanded several times may break certain \tx\ constructs.
 \end{itemize}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\tracingtabularx} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(tracingtabularx)%
  {\cs{tracingtabularx}}%
  {Writes information about the changing column widths while setting
   a \texttt{tabularx}.}
Following the \cmd{\tracingtabularx} declaration all
later \Ie{tabularx} environments will print information
 about column widths as they repeatedly re-set the tables to find the
 correct widths.


 By default the \texttt{X} specification is turned into
 \verb?p?\marg{some value}. Such narrow columns often
 require a special format, which can be achieved by using the \verb?>? syntax.
For example, \verb?>{\small}X?. Another format which is useful in narrow 
columns is  raggedright\index{tabular!raggedright}, 
however \ltx's \cmd{\raggedright} macro redefines
\cmd{\\} in a way which conflicts with its use in  \Ie{tabular} or 
\Ie{array}  environments.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\arraybackslash} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(arraybackslash)%
  {\cs{arraybackslash}}%
  {Use instead of \Vprint{\\} in a tabular column.}
 For this reason the command \cmd{\arraybackslash} is provided;
this may be used after a \cmd{\raggedright}, \cmd{\raggedleft}  or
\cmd{\centering} declaration. Thus a \Ie{tabularx} format may include
\begin{lcode}
>{\raggedright\arraybackslash}X
\end{lcode}
 These format specifications may of course be saved using the
 command, \cmd{\newcolumntype}\index{tabular!new column type}. 
After specifying, say,
\begin{lcode}
\newcolumntype{Y}{>{\small\raggedright\arraybackslash}X}
\end{lcode}
then \texttt{Y} could be used in the \Ie{tabularx} format
 argument.

 
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\tabularxcolumn} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(tabularxcolumn)%
  {\cs{tabularxcolumn}}%
  {Column type for an \texttt{X} column in a \texttt{tabularx}.}
 The \texttt{X} columns are set using the \texttt{p} column, which
 corresponds  to \cmd{\parbox}\verb?[t]?. You may want them set using, say, the
\texttt{m} column, which corresponds to \cmd{\parbox}\verb?[c]?. It is not
 possible to change the column type using the \texttt{>} syntax, so another
 system is provided.  \cmd{\tabularxcolumn} should be defined to be a macro
 with one argument, which expands to the \Ie{tabular} format
 specification that you want to correspond to \texttt{X}. The
 argument will be replaced by the calculated width of a column.

 The default definition is
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\tabularxcolumn}[1]{p{#1}}
\end{lcode}
This may be changed, for instance
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\tabularxcolumn}[1]{>{\small}m{#1}}
\end{lcode}
so that \texttt{X} columns will be typeset as \texttt{m} columns using
the \cmd{\small} font.

 Normally all \texttt{X} columns\index{tabular!X column} 
in a single table are set to the
 same width, however it is possible to make \Ie{tabularx} set
 them to different widths.
 A format argument of 
\begin{lcode}
{>{\hsize=.5\hsize}X>{\hsize=1.5\hsize}X}
\end{lcode}
 specifies two columns, where the second will be three times as wide as the
 first. If you think you need to do things like this try and redesign 
your table. However, if you must you should follow these two rules.
 \begin{itemize}
 \item Make sure that the sum of the widths of all the \texttt{X}
 columns is unchanged. (In the above example, the new widths still add
 up to twice the default width, the same as two standard \texttt{X}
 columns.)
 \item Do not use \cmd{\multicolumn} entries which cross any \texttt{X}
 column.
 \end{itemize}


 \Ie{tabularx} will not set \texttt{X} columns to a negative width.
If the widths of the `normal' columns of the table already total more 
than the requested total width you will get the warning 
`\texttt{X columns too narrow (table too wide)}'.\index{X columns too narrow (table too wide)}
 The \texttt{X} columns will be set to a width of 1em
 and so the table itself will be wider than the requested total width
 given in the argument to the environment.
% This behaviour of the package can be customised slightly
% as noted in the documentation of the code section.

    The standard \cmd{\verb} macro does not work inside a \Ie{tabularx},
just as it does not work in the argument to any macro.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\TX@verb} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(TX@verb)%
  {\cs{TX@verb}}%
  {A poor man's \cs{verb} for use in a \texttt{tabularx}.}
The `poor man's \cmd{\verb}' (and
 \cmd{\verb*}) defined here is based on page 382 of the \btitle{\tx book}. As
 explained there, doing verbatim this way means that spaces are not
 treated correctly, and so \cmd{\verb*} may well be useless. 
 The mechanism is quite general, and any macro which wants to allow a
 form of \cmd{\verb} to be used within its argument may
\begin{lcode}
\let\verb=\TX@verb
\end{lcode}
It must ensure that the real definition is restored afterwards.

    This version of \cmd{\verb} and \cmd{\verb*} are subject to the 
following restictions:
 \begin{enumerate}
 \item Spaces in the argument are not read verbatim, but may be skipped
       according to \tx's usual rules.
 \item Spaces will be added to the output after control words, even if
       they were not present in the input.
 \item Unless the argument is a single space, any trailing space,
       whether in the original argument, or added as in (2),
       will be omitted.
 \item The argument must not end with \verb?\?, so \verb?\verb|\|? is not
      allowed, however, because of (3), \verb?\verb|\ |? produces
      \verb?\?.
 \item The argument must be balanced with respect to \verb?{? and \verb?}?. So
      \verb?\verb|{|? is not allowed.
 \item A comment character like \verb?%? will not appear verbatim. It will
       act as usual, commenting out the rest of the input line!
 \item The combinations \verb=?`= and \verb?!`? will appear as
       {\ttfamily?`} and {\ttfamily!`} if the Computer Typewriter\index{Typewriter}
       font is  being used.
 \end{enumerate}


\index{tabular|)}

\section{Spaces and rules}

\subsection{Spacing}

    Sometimes tabular rows appear vertically challenged.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\arraystretch} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(arraystretch)%
  {\cs{arraystretch}}%
  {Multiplication factor for the normal row spacing in tabulars and arrays.}
The macro \cmd{\arraystretch} controls the spacing between 
rows.\index{array!row spacing}\index{tabular!row spacing} The normal
space is multiplied by the value of \cmd{\arraystretch}, whose default
definition is
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\arraystretch}{1.0}
\end{lcode}
If this is changed to 1.25, for example, the row spacing is increased by 25\%.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\extrarowheight} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(extrarowheight)%
  {\cs{extrarowheight}}%
  {Length added to the normal row height in tabulars and arrays.}
If the length \lnc{\extrarowheight} is positive, its value is added
to the normal height of every row of the array or table, while
the depth will remain the same. This is important for tables
with horizontal lines because those lines normally touch the
capital letters. For example
\begin{lcode}
\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{The array and tabular format options.}%
 \label{tab:tabpream}
    \setlength{\extrarowheight}{1pt}
\begin{tabular}{cp{9cm}} \toprule
...
\end{lcode}
was used for \tref{tab:tabpream}.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\arraycolsep} \lnc{\tabcolsep} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(arraycolsep)%
  {\cs{arraycolsep}}%
  {Half the space between columns in an array.}
\glossary(tabcolsep)%
  {\cs{tabcolsep}}%
  {Half the space between columns in a tabular.}
The length \lnc{\arraycolsep} is half the width of the horizontal space
between columns\index{array!intercolumn space} in an \Ie{array} environment 
and similarly the length
\lnc{\tabcolsep} is half the space between 
columns\index{tabular!intercolumn space} in an \Ie{tabular}
or \Ie{tabular*} environment.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\arrayrulewidth} \lnc{\doublerulesep} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(arrayrulewidth)%
  {\cs{arrayrulewidth}}%
  {Width of lines (e.g., \cs{hline}, \cs{vline}, etc.) in an array or tabular.}
The length \lnc{\arrayrulewidth} is the width of the line created by
a \verb?|? in the format, or by an \cmd{\hline}, \cmd{\cline} or
\cmd{\vline} command. The length \lnc{\doublerulesep} is the space
between lines created by two successive \verb?|? options in the format
or by successive \cmd{\hline} commands.


\subsection{Special variations on horizontal lines}

 The family of \texttt{tabular} environments allows
vertical positioning\index{tabular!vertical position} 
with respect to the baseline of
the text in which the environment appears.  By default the
environment appears centered, but this can be changed to
align with the first or last line in the environment by
supplying a \texttt{t} or \texttt{b} value to the
optional position argument. However, this does not work
when the first or last element in the environment is a
\cmd{\hline} command --- in that case the environment is
aligned at the horizontal rule.

 \pagebreak[3]

 Here is an example:
 \begin{center}
 \begin{minipage}[t]{.4\linewidth}
 Tables
 \begin{tabular}[t]{l}
   with no\\ hline\\ commands 
 \end{tabular} versus \\ tables
 \begin{tabular}[t]{|l|}
  \hline
  with some\\ hline\\ commands\\
  \hline
 \end{tabular} used.
 \end{minipage}
 \begin{minipage}[t]{.52\linewidth}
 \begin{verbatim}
 Tables
 \begin{tabular}[t]{l}
  with no\\ hline\\ commands
 \end{tabular} versus tables
 \begin{tabular}[t]{|l|}
  \hline
  with some\\ hline\\ commands\\
  \hline
 \end{tabular} used.
 \end{verbatim}
 \end{minipage}
\end{center}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\firsthline} \cmd{\lasthline} \\
\lnc{\extratabsurround} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(firsthline)%
  {\cs{firsthline}}%
  {An \cs{hline} (the first) that does not effect vertical alignment of an 
   array or tabular.}
\glossary(lasthline)%
  {\cs{lasthline}}%
  {An \cs{hline} (the last) that does not effect vertical alignment of an 
   array or tabular.}
\glossary(extratabsurround)%
  {\cs{extratabsurround}}
  {Adds additional space for \cs{firsthline} and \cs{lasthline}.}

 Using \cmd{\firsthline} and \cmd{\lasthline} will 
 cure the problem, and the tables will align properly as long
 as their first or last line does not contain extremely large
 objects.
 \begin{center}
 \begin{minipage}[t]{.4\linewidth}
 Tables
 \begin{tabular}[t]{l}
   with no\\ line \\ commands 
 \end{tabular} versus \\ tables
 \begin{tabular}[t]{|l|}
  \firsthline
   with some\\ line \\ commands \\
  \lasthline
 \end{tabular} used.
 \end{minipage} 
 \begin{minipage}[t]{.52\linewidth}
 \begin{verbatim}
 Tables
 \begin{tabular}[t]{l}
   with no\\ line\\ commands
 \end{tabular} versus tables
 \begin{tabular}[t]{|l|}
  \firsthline
   with some\\ line\\ commands\\
  \lasthline
 \end{tabular} used.
 \end{verbatim}
 \end{minipage}
 \end{center}

 The implementation of these two commands contains an extra
 dimension, which is called \cmd{\extratabsurround}, to add some
 additional space at the top and the bottom of such an environment.
 This is useful if such tables are nested.

 \subsection{Handling of rules}
 
 There are two possible approaches to the handling of horizontal and
 vertical rules in tables:
 \begin{enumerate}
   \item rules can be placed into the available space without
   enlarging the table, or
   \item rules can be placed between columns or rows thereby enlarging
   the table.
 \end{enumerate}
 The class implements the second possibility while the
 default implementation in the \ltx\ kernel implements the first
 concept. 

   With standard \ltx\ adding rules to a table will not affect the
   width or height of the table (unless double rules are used), e.g.,
   changing a format from \verb?lll? to \verb?l|l|l? does not
   affect the document other than adding rules to the table. In
   contrast, with the class a table that just fits the
   \lnc{\textwidth} might now produce an overfull box.
(But you shouldn't have vertical rules in the first place.)


\section{Free tabulars}

\index{tabular!free|(}

    All the tabular environments described so far put the table
into a box\index{box}, which \ltx\ treats like a large complex
character, and characters are not broken across\index{page!break} pages. 
If you
have a long table\index{table!long} that runs off the bottom of 
the page you can turn
to, say, the \Lpack{longtable}~\cite{LONGTABLE} or \Lpack{xtab}~\cite{XTAB}
packages which will automatically break tables across page boundaries.
These have various bells and whistles, such as automatically putting
a caption at the top of each page, repeating the column heads, and 
so forth. 

\subsection{Continuous tabulars}

\index{tabular!continuous}

\begin{syntax}
\senv{ctabular}\oarg{pos}\marg{format} rows \eenv{ctabular} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(ctabular)%
  {\senv{ctabular}\oarg{pos}\marg{format}}%
  {Like \texttt{tabular} except that it will continue over a page break.}
The \Ie{ctabular} environment is similar to \Ie{tabular}, but with a 
couple of differences, the main one 
being that the table will merrily continue across page\index{page!break} 
breaks.
The \meta{format} argument is the same as for the previous \Ie{array}
and \Ie{tabular} environments, but the optional \meta{pos} argument
controls the horizontal position\index{tabular!continuous!position} 
of the table, not the vertical. The
possible argument value is one of the following characters:
\begin{itemize}
\item[\pixposarg{l}] left justified, 
\item[\pixposarg{c}] centered, or
\item[\pixposarg{r}] right justified; 
\end{itemize}
the default is \pixposarg{c}.

\begin{lcode}
\begin{ctabular}{lcr}  \toprule
LEFT & CENTER & RIGHT \\  \midrule
l & c & r \\
l & c & r \\
l & c & r \\
l & c & r \\  \bottomrule
\end{ctabular}
\end{lcode}
  
\begin{ctabular}[c]{lcr}  \toprule
LEFT & CENTER & RIGHT \\  \midrule
l & c & r \\
l & c & r \\
l & c & r \\
l & c & r \\  \bottomrule
\end{ctabular}
  
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\begin{comment}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
    The \Ie{ctabular*} has an extra \meta{width} argument. The table will be
placed within \meta{width} from the lefthand margin. Essentially
the following are equivalent:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{ctabular}[c]{...}
\begin{ctabular*}[c]{\textwidth}{...}
\end{lcode}
but \ldots
\begin{lcode}
\begin{ctabular*}[c]{0.5\textwidth}{lcr}  \toprule
LEFT & CENTER & RIGHT \\  \midrule
l & c & r \\
l & c & r \\
l & c & r \\
l & c & r \\  \bottomrule
\end{ctabular*}
\end{lcode}

\begin{ctabular*}[c]{0.5\textwidth}{lcr}  \toprule
LEFT & CENTER & RIGHT \\  \midrule
l & c & r \\
l & c & r \\
l & c & r \\
l & c & r \\  \bottomrule
\end{ctabular*}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\end{comment}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

An example use is for setting two texts\index{parallel texts} in parallel, 
for instance a
poem and it's translation, without having to be concerned about page
breaks.

\begin{ctabular}{lcl}
Je suis Fran\c{c}oys, dont il me pois, &
\index[lines]{Je suis Fran\c{c}oys, dont il me pois}%
\index[lines]{I am Fran\c{c}ois, which is unfortunate}& 
I am Fran\c{c}ois, which is unfortunate, \\
N\'{e} de Paris empr\`{e}s Pointoise, & & born in Paris near Pointoise, \\
Et de la corde d'une toise            & & and with a six-foot stretch of rope, \\
S\c{c}aura mon col que mon cul poise. & & my neck will know my arse's weight. \\
\multicolumn{3}{r}{Fran\c{c}ois Villon, 1431--1463?}
\end{ctabular}

    The \Ie{ctabular} environment will probably not be used within
a \Ie{table} environment (which defeats the possibility of the table
crossing page boundaries). To caption a \Ie{ctabular} you can define a 
fixed\index{tabular!free!caption} caption\index{caption!fixed}. 
For example:
\begin{lcode}
\newfixedcaption{\freetabcaption}{table}
\end{lcode}
And then \cmd{\freetabcaption} can be used like the normal \cmd{\caption}
within a \Ie{table} float.
\newfixedcaption{\freetabcaption}{table}


\subsection{Automatic tabulars}

    A tabular format may be used just to list things, for example the
names of the members of a particular organisation, or the names of
\ltx\ environments. 

\index{tabular!automatic|(}

    Especially when drafting a document, or when the number of entries
is likely to change, it is convenient to be able to tabulate a list
of items without having to explicitly mark the end of each row.

\index{tabular!automatic!by row}
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\autorows}\oarg{width}\marg{pos}\marg{num}\marg{style}\marg{entries} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(autorows)%
  {\cs{autorows}\oarg{width}\marg{pos}\marg{num}\marg{style}\marg{entries}}%
  {Lists the \meta{entries} in rows across \meta{num} columns in a tabular 
   fashion.}
The \cmd{\autorows} macro lists the \meta{entries} in rows; that is,
the entries are typeset left to right and top to bottom. The
\meta{num} argument is the number of columns.
The \meta{entries} argument is a comma-separated list of the names to be
tabulated; there must be no comma after the last of the names before the
closing brace.
Table~\ref{tab:autorows} was set by \cmd{\autorows} using:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
\freetabcaption{Example automatic row ordered table}
               \label{tab:autorows}
\autorows{c}{5}{c}{one, two, three, four, five,
                   six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
                   eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen }
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}

\begin{figure}
\freetabcaption{Example automatic row ordered table} \label{tab:autorows}
\autorows{c}{5}{c}{one, two, three, four, five,
                   six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
                   eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen }
\end{figure}

    The \meta{pos} argument controls the horizontal 
position\index{tabular!automatic!position} of the
tabular and the \meta{style} argument specifies the location of the
entries in the columns; each column\index{tabular!automatic!column style} 
is treated identically. The value
of a \meta{pos} or \meta{style} argument is one of the following
characters:
\begin{itemize}
\item[\pixposarg{l}] left justified, 
\item[\pixposarg{c}] centered, or
\item[\pixposarg{r}] right justified. 
\end{itemize}

 Each column is normally the same 
width,\index{tabular!automatic!column width}\index{tabular!automatic!table width}
which is large enough to accomodate
the widest entry in the list.
A positive \meta{width} (e.g., \verb?{0.8\textwidth}?), defines the overall
width of the table, and the column width is calculated by dividing \meta{width}
by the number of columns. Any negative value for the \meta{width} width lets 
each column be wide enough for the widest entry in that column; 
the column width is no longer a constant. 

   The examples in \fref{fig:arw} illustrate the effect of the \meta{width} 
argument (the default value is 0pt). The principal elements of the code
for the \figurerefname{} are:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
...
\autorows[-1pt]{c}{5}{c}{one, two, three, four, five,
                   six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
                   eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen }
...
\autorows[0pt]{c}{5}{c}{one, two, three, 
                            ... fourteen }
...
\autorows[0.9\textwidth]{c}{5}{c}{one, two, three, 
                                      ... fourteen }
\caption{Changing the width of a row ordered table} 
         \label{fig:arw}
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}

\begin{figure}
\centering
\meta{width} = \verb?-1pt? 
\autorows[-1pt]{c}{5}{c}{one, two, three, four, five,
                   six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
                   eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen }

\meta{width} = \verb?0pt? (the default)
 \autorows[0pt]{c}{5}{c}{one, two, three, four, five,
                   six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
                   eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen }

\meta{width} = \verb?0.9\textwidth? 
\autorows[0.9\textwidth]{c}{5}{c}{one, two, three, four, five,
                   six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
                   eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen }
\caption{Changing the width of a row ordered table} \label{fig:arw}
\end{figure}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\autocols}\oarg{width}\marg{pos}\marg{num}\marg{style}\marg{entries} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(autocols)%
  {\cs{autocols}\oarg{width}\marg{pos}\marg{num}\marg{style}\marg{entries}}%
  {Lists the \meta{entries} down \meta{num} columns in a tabular 
   fashion.}
The \cmd{\autocols} macro lists its \meta{entries} in 
columns,\index{tabular!automatic!by column} proceeding
top to bottom and left to right. The arguments, 
are the same as for \cmd{\autorows}, except that a negative
\meta{width} is treated as if it were zero. The column 
width\index{tabular!automatic!column width}\index{tabular!automatic!table width}
is always constant 
throughout the table and is normally sufficient for the
widest entry. A positive or zero \meta{width} has the same effect as for 
\cmd{\autorows}.

    If you need to include a comma within one of the entries in the list
for either \cmd{\autorows} or \cmd{\autocols} you have to use a macro. 
For instance:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\comma}{,}
\end{lcode}
\newcommand*{\comma}{,}

The examples in \fref{fig:acw}, from the following code elements, 
illustrate these points.

\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
...
\autocols{c}{5}{c}{one\comma{} two, three, four, five,
                   six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
                   eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen }
...
\autocols[0.9\textwidth]{c}{5}{c}{one\comma{} two, three, 
                                            ... fourteen }
\caption{Changing the width of a column ordered table} 
\label{fig:acw}
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}

\begin{figure}
\begin{adjustwidth}{-10mm}{-10mm}
\centering
\meta{width} = \verb?0pt? (the default)
\autocols{c}{5}{c}{one\comma{} two, three, four, five,
                   six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
                   eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen }

\meta{width} = \verb?0.9\textwidth? 
\autocols[0.9\textwidth]{c}{5}{c}{one\comma{} two, three, four, five,
                   six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
                   eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen }
\caption{Changing the width of a column ordered table} \label{fig:acw}
\end{adjustwidth}
\end{figure}

\index{tabular!automatic|)}
\index{tabular!free|)}

%#% extend
%#% extstart include page-notes.tex

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-05-02 16:10:51 +0200 (Thu, 02 May 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 454 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}

\chapter{Page notes} \label{chap:mnotes}

   The standard classes provide the \cmd{\footnote} command for notes
at the bottom of the page. The class provides several styles of footnotes
and you can also have several series of footnotes for when the material
gets complicated. The normal \cmd{\marginpar} command puts notes into
the margin, which may float around a little if there are other
\cmd{\marginpar}s on the page. The class additionally supplies commands
for fixed marginal notes and sidebars.


\section{Footnotes}

    A footnote can be considered to be a special kind of float\index{float} 
that is put at the bottom of a page.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\footnote}\oarg{num}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(footnote)
  {\cs{footnote}\oarg{num}\marg{text}}%
  {Put \meta{text} as a footnote.}
In the main text, the \cmd{\footnote} command puts a marker at the
point where it is called, and puts the \meta{text}, preceded by the same
mark, at the bottom of the page. If the optional \meta{num} is used
then its value is used for the mark, otherwise the \Icn{footnote}
counter is stepped and provides the mark's value. The \cmd{\footnote}
command should be used in paragraph mode where it puts the note at the
bottom of the page, or in a \Ie{minipage} where it puts the note
at the end of the \Ie{minipage}. Results are likely to be peculiar if
it is used anywhere else (like in a \Ie{tabular}).

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\footnotemark}\oarg{num} \\
\cmd{\footnotetext}\oarg{num}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(footnotemark)%
  {\cs{footnotemark}\oarg{num}}%
  {Typesets a footnote mark.}
\glossary(footnotetext)%
  {\cs{footnotetext}\oarg{num}\marg{text}}%
  {Typesets \meta{text} as a footnote at the bottom of the page but does 
   not put a mark in the main text.}
    You can use \cmd{\footnotemark} to put a marker in the main text; the value
is determined just like that for \cmd{\footnote}. Footnote text can be put 
at the bottom of the page via \cmd{\footnotetext}; if the optional \meta{num}
is given it is used as the mark's value, otherwise the value of the
\Icn{footnote} counter is used.
   It may be helpful, but completely untrue, to think of \cmd{\footnote} being
defined like:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\footnote}[1]{\footnotemark\footnotetext{#1}}
\end{lcode}
In any event, you can use a combination of \cmd{\footnotemark} and 
\cmd{\footnotetext} to do footnoting where \ltx\ would normally get upset.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\footref}\marg{label} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(footref)%
  {\cs{footref}{labstr}}%
  {Reference a labelled footnote.}
    On occasions it may be desireable to make more than one reference
to the text of a footnote\index{footnote!reference}. This can be done by 
putting a \cmd{\label} in the footnote and then using \cmd{\footref} to refer 
to the label; this prints the footnote mark. For example:
\begin{comment}
%%% in memdesign, not memman
\begin{lcode}
...\footnote{... adults or babies.\label{fn:rabbits}}
...
... The footnote\footref{fn:rabbits} on \pref{fn:rabbits} ...
\end{lcode}
In this manual, the last line above prints:
\begin{syntax}
... The footnote\footref{fn:rabbits} on \pref{fn:rabbits} ... \\
\end{syntax}
\end{comment}
\begin{lcode}
...\footnote{...values for the kerning.\label{fn:kerning}} ...
...
... The footnote\footref{fn:kerning} on \pref{fn:kerning} ... \\
\end{lcode}
In this manual, the last line above prints:
\begin{syntax}
... The footnote\footref{fn:kerning} on \pref{fn:kerning} ... \\
\end{syntax}


%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%% from membook

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\multfootsep} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(multfootsep)%
  {\cs{multfootsep}}%
  {Separator between adjacent footnote marks.}
In the standard classes if two or more footnotes are applied 
sequentially\footnote{One footnote}\footnote{Immediately followed by another}
then the markers in the text are just run together. The class, like the
\Lpack{footmisc}~\cite{FOOTMISC} and \Lpack{ledmac} packages, inserts a 
separator\index{footnote!marker separator}
between the marks. In the class the macro \cmd{\multfootsep} is used as
the separator. Its default definition is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\multfootsep}{\textsuperscript{\normalfont,}}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\feetabovefloat} \\
\cmd{\feetbelowfloat} \\
\end{syntax}
\label{interest:feetbelowfloat}
\glossary(feetabovefloat)%
  {\cs{feetabovefloat}}%
  {Typeset footnotes above bottom floats (the default).}
\glossary(feetbelowfloat)%
  {\cs{feetbelowfloat}}%
  {Typeset footnotes below bottom floats.}
In\fxnote{this needs checking} the standard classes, footnotes on a page that has a float at the
bottom are typeset before the float. I think that this looks
peculiar. Following the \cmd{\feetbelowfloat} declaration footnotes 
will be typeset at the bottom of the page below any bottom 
floats;\index{footnote!bottom float} 
they will also be typeset at the bottom of \cmd{\raggedbottom} pages 
as opposed to being
put just after the bottom line of text. The standard positioning is
used following the \cmd{\feetabovefloat} declaration, which is the default.

\subsection{A variety of footnotes}

 \begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\verbfootnote}\oarg{num}\marg{text} \\
 \end{syntax}
\glossary(verbfootnote)%
  {\cs{verbfootnote}\oarg{num}\marg{text}}%
  {Like \cs{footnote} except that \meta{text} can contain verbatim material.}
 The macro \cmd{\verbfootnote} is like the normal \cmd{\footnote}
except that its \meta{text} agument\index{footnote!verbatim text} 
can contain verbatim material.
For example, the next two paragraphs are typeset by this code:
 \begin{lcode}
    Below, footnote~\ref{fn1} is a \verb?\footnote? while
footnote~\ref{fn2} is a \verb?\verbfootnote?.

    The \verb?\verbfootnote? command should 
appear\footnote{There may be some problems if color is
		 used.\label{fn1}}
to give identical results as the normal \verb?\footnote?, 
but it can include some verbatim 
text\verbfootnote{The \verb?\footnote? macro, like all 
                  other macros except for \verb?\verbfootnote?, 
                  can not contain verbatim text in its 
                  argument.\label{fn2}}
in the \meta{text} argument.
\end{lcode}

     Below, footnote~\ref{fn1} is a \verb?\footnote? while
 footnote~\ref{fn2} is a \verb?\verbfootnote?.

     The \verb?\verbfootnote? command should 
 appear\footnote{There may be some problems if color is
		 used.\label{fn1}}
 to give identical results as the normal \verb?\footnote?, but it
 can include some verbatim 
 text\verbfootnote{The \verb?\footnote? macro, like all other macros
		   except for \verb?\verbfootnote?, can not contain
		   verbatim text in its argument.\label{fn2}}
 in the \meta{text} argument.



\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\plainfootnotes} \\
\cmd{\twocolumnfootnotes} \\
\cmd{\threecolumnfootnotes} \\
\cmd{\paragraphfootnotes} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(plainfootnotes)%
  {\cs{plainfootnotes}}%
  {Typeset footnotes as separate marked paragraphs (the default).}
\glossary(twocolumnfootnotes)%
  {\cs{twocolumnfootnotes}}%
  {Typeset footnotes in two columns.}
\glossary(threecolumnfootnotes)%
  {\cs{threecolumnfootnotes}}%
  {Typeset footnotes in three columns.}
\glossary(paragraphfootnotes)%
  {\cs{paragraphfootnotes}}%
  {Typeset footnotes as a single paragraph.}

Normally, each footnote\index{footnotes!as paragraphs} 
starts a new paragraph. The class provides three
other\index{footnote!styles} styles, making four in all. 
Following the \cmd{\twocolumnfootnotes}\index{footnotes!as two columns}
declaration footnotes will be typeset in two columns, and similarly
they are typeset in three columns\index{footnotes!as three columns} 
after the \cmd{\threecolumnfootnotes}
declaration. Footnotes are run together as a single 
paragraph\index{footnotes!as a paragraph} after the
\cmd{\paragraphfootnotes} declaration. The default style is used after
the \cmd{\plainfootnotes} declaration. 

   The style can be changed at any 
time but there may be odd effects if the change is made in the middle of
a page when there are footnotes before and after the declaration. You may
find it interesting to try changing styles in an article type document 
that uses \cmd{\maketitle} and \cmd{\thanks}, and some footnotes on the 
page with the title:
\begin{lcode}
\title{...\thanks{...}}
\author{...\thanks{...}...}
...
\begin{document}
\paragraphfootnotes
\maketitle
\plainfootnotes
...
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\footfudgefiddle} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(footfudgefiddle)%
  {\cs{footfudgefiddle}}%
  {Integer number (default 64) to help when typesetting \cs{paragraphfootnotes}.}
Paragraphed footnotes may overflow\index{footnote!too long} 
the bottom of a page. \tx\ has
to estimate the amount of space that the paragraph will require once
all the footnotes are assembled into it. It then chops off the main text
to leave the requisite space at the bottom of the page, following which
it assembles and typesets the paragraph. If it underestimated the size
then the footnotes will run down the page too far. If this happens then
you can change \cmd{\footfudgefiddle} to make \tx\ be more generous in
its estimation. The default is 64 and a value about 10\% higher should
fix most overruns.
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\footfudgefiddle}{70}
\end{lcode}
You must use an integer in the redefinition as the command is going to be 
used in a place where \tx\ expects an integer.

\LMnote{2010/09/17}{removed the text below, I see no reason for adding
this to memoir, so it is now removed from the manual}
% \begin{syntax}
% \cmd{\footnoteA}\marg{text} \\
% \cmd{\footnoteB}\marg{text} \\
% \cmd{\footnoteC}\marg{text} \\
% \end{syntax}
% \glossary(footnoteA)%
%   {\cs{footnoteA}\marg{text}}%
%   {A series A footnote.}
% \glossary(footnoteB)%
%   {\cs{footnoteB}\marg{text}}%
%   {A series B footnote.}
% \glossary(footnotec)%
%   {\cs{footnoteC}\marg{text}}%
%   {A series C footnote.}
%
%     In addition to the regular \cmd{\footnote} the class provides 
% three further\index{footnote!series} series 
% of footnotes, namely the `A', `B', and `C' series which are
% distinguished by appending the series' uppercase letter at the end of
% the command, like \cmd{\footnoteB} for the `B' series.
% Perhaps the normal footnotes are required, 
% marked\index{footnote!marker} flagged with arabic numerals, and another 
% kind of footnote flagged with roman numerals. Each series has its own
% \cmd{\footnotemarkB}, \cmd{\footnotetextB} and so on matching the regular
% commands.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\newfootnoteseries}\marg{series} \\
\cmd{\plainfootstyle}\marg{series} \\
\cmd{\twocolumnfootstyle}\marg{series} \\
\cmd{\threecolumnfootstyle}\marg{series} \\
\cmd{\paragraphfootstyle}\marg{series} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(newfootnoteseries)%
  {\cs{newfootnoteseries}\marg{series}}%
  {Create a new footnote \meta{series}.}
\glossary(plainfootstyle)%
  {\cs{plainfootstyle}\marg{series}}%
  {Set the \meta{series} footnotes to be typeset plain style.}
\glossary(twocolumnfootstyle)%
  {\cs{twocolumnfootstyle}\marg{series}}%
  {Set the \meta{series} footnotes to be typeset in two column style.}
\glossary(threecolumnfootstyle)%
  {\cs{threecolumnfootstyle}\marg{series}}%
  {Set the \meta{series} footnotes to be typeset in three column style.}
\glossary(paragraphfootstyle)%
  {\cs{paragraphfootstyle}\marg{style}}%
  {Set the \meta{series} footnotes to be typeset in single paragraph style.}

    If you need further series you can create you own.
A new footnote series\index{footnote!new series} is
created by the \cmd{\newfootseries} macro, where \meta{series} is an
alphabetic identifier for the series. This is most conveniently a 
single (upper case) letter, for example \texttt{P}. 

    Calling, say, \verb?\newfootnoteseries{Q}? creates a set of macros
equivalent to those for the normal \cmd{\footnote} but with the \meta{series}
appended. These include \cs{footnoteQ}, \cs{footnotemarkQ},
\cs{footnotetextQ} and so on. These are used just like the normal
\cmd{\footnote} and companions.

    By default, a series is set to typeset using the normal style
of a paragraph per note. The series' style can be changed by using one
of the \cs{...footstyle} commands.\index{footnote!style}

    For example, to have a `P' (for paragraph) series using roman numerals 
as markers which, in the main text are superscript with a closing parenthesis
and at the foot are on the baseline followed by an endash, and the text is
set in italics at the normal footnote size:
\begin{lcode}
\newfootnoteseries{P}
\paragraphfootstyle{P}
\renewcommand{\thefootnoteP}{\roman{footnoteP}}
\footmarkstyleP{#1--}
\renewcommand{\@makefnmarkP}{%
              \hbox{\textsuperscript{\@thefnmarkP)}}}
\renewcommand{\foottextfontP}{\itshape\footnotesize}
\end{lcode}
This can then be used like:
\begin{lcode}
.... this sentence\footnoteP{A `p' footnote\label{fnp}} 
includes footnote~\footrefP{fnp}.
\end{lcode}

   The \cmd{\newfootnoteseries} macro does not create series versions
of the footnote-related length commands, such as \lnc{\footmarkwidth}
and \lnc{\footmarksep}, nor does it create versions of \cmd{\footnoterule}.

   At the foot of the page footnotes are grouped according to their series;
all ordinary footnotes are typeset, then all the first series footnotes 
(if any), then the second series, and so on. The ordering corresponds to
the order of \cmd{\newfootnoteseries} commands.

     If you can't specify a particular footnote style using the
class facilities the \Lpack{footmisc}
package~\cite{FOOTMISC} provides a range of styles. 
A variety of styles also comes with the \Lpack{ledmac} package~\cite{LEDMAC} 
which additionally provides several classes of footnotes that can be mixed
on a page.



\subsection{Styling}

\index{footnote!styling|(}
     The parameters controlling the vertical spacing of footnotes are 
 illustrated in \fref{fig:fn}.

 \begin{figure}
 \centering
 \drawparameterstrue
 \setlayoutscale{0.4}
 \drawfootnote
 \caption{Footnote layout parameters}\label{fig:fn}
 \end{figure}

     There is a discussion in \Sref{sec:thanks} starting on
\pref{sec:thanks} about how to style the \cmd{\thanks} command; footnotes
can be similarly styled. 

    The \cmd{\footnote} macro (and its relations) essentially does three 
things:
\begin{itemize}
\item Typesets a marker\index{footnote!marker} at the point where 
      \cmd{\footnote} is called;
\item Typesets a marker\index{footnote!marker} at the bottom of the page 
      on which \cmd{\footnote} is called;
\item Following the marker at the bottom of the page, typesets the 
      text \index{footnote!text} of the footnote.
\end{itemize}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\@makefnmark} \\
\cmd{\@thefnmark} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(@makefnmark)%
  {\cs{@makefnmark}}%
  {Typesets the footnote marker where \cs{footnote} is called.}
\glossary(@thefnmark)%
  {\cs{@thefnmark}}%
  {Value of the footnote marker.}

The \cmd{\footnote} macro calls the kernel command \cmd{\@makefnmark} to
typeset the footnote marker at the point where \cmd{\footnote} is called
(the value of the marker is kept in the macro \cmd{\@thefnmark}
which is defined by the \cmd{\footnote} or \cmd{\footnotemark} macros). 
The default definition typesets the mark\index{footnote!marker!styling} 
as a superscript and is effectively
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\@makefnmark}[1]{\hbox{\textsuperscript{#1}}}
\end{lcode}
You can change this if, for example,
 you wanted the marks to be in parentheses at the baseline.
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand*{\@makefnmark}[1]{{\footnotesize (#1)}}
 \end{lcode}
 or, somewhat better to take account of the size of the surrounding text
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand*{\@makefnmark}[1]{\slashfracstyle{(#1)}}
 \end{lcode}



\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\footfootmark} \\
\cmd{\footmarkstyle}\marg{arg} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(footfootmark)%
  {\cs{footfootmark}}%
  {Typsets the footnote mark at the bottom of the page.}
\glossary(footmarkstyle)%
  {\cs{footmarkstyle}\marg{style}}%
  {Style of the footnote mark at the bottom of the page.}
The class macro for typesetting the marker at the foot of the page is
\cmd{\footfootmark}.  The appearance of the mark is controlled by
\cmd{\footmarkstyle}. The default specification is
\begin{lcode}
\footmarkstyle{\textsuperscript{#1}}
\end{lcode}
where the \verb?#1? indicates the position of \cmd{\@thefnmark} in the style.
The default results in the mark being set as a superscript.
For example, to have the marker set on the baseline 
and followed by a right parenthesis, do
\begin{lcode}
\footmarkstyle{#1) }
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\footmarkwidth} \lnc{\footmarksep} \lnc{\footparindent} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(footmarkwidth)%
  {\cs{footmarkwidth}}%
  {Width of footnote mark box.}
\glossary(footmarksep)%
  {\cs{footmarksep}}%
  {Offset from the footnote mark box for lines after the first.}
\glossary(footparindent)%
  {\cs{footparindent}}%
  {Paragraph indent for multiparagraph footnote text.}
The mark is typeset in a box of width \lnc{\footmarkwidth}
If this is negative, the mark is outdented
into the margin, if zero the mark is flush left, and when positive
the mark is indented. The mark is followed by the 
text\index{footnote!text} of the footnote. Second and later lines of the
text are offset by the length \lnc{\footmarksep} from the end of the box.
The first line of a paragraph within a footnote is indented by
\lnc{\footparindent}. 
 The default values for these lengths are:
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\footmarkwidth}{1.8em}
\setlength{\footmarksep}{-\footmarkwidth}
\setlength{\footparindent}{1em}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\foottextfont} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(foottextfont)%
  {\cs{foottextfont}}%
  {Font for footnote text.}
The text in the footnote\index{footnote!text!font} is typeset using 
the \cmd{\foottextfont} font. The default is \cmd{\footnotesize}.


    Altogether, the class specifies
\begin{lcode}
\footmarkstyle{\textsuperscript{#1}}
\setlength{\footmarkwidth}{1.8em}
\setlength{\footmarksep}{-1.8em}
\setlength{\footparindent}{1em}
\newcommand{\foottextfont}{\footnotesize}
\end{lcode}
to replicate the standard footnote layout. 

    You might like to try the
combinations of \lnc{\footmarkwidth} and \lnc{\footmarksep} listed
in \tref{tab:fnstyle} to see which you might prefer.
Not listed in the \tablerefname, to get the marker flushleft and then 
the text set as a block paragraph you can try:
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\footmarkwidth}{1.8em}
\setlength{\footmarksep}{0em}
\footmarkstyle{#1\hfill}
\end{lcode}

\begin{table}
\begin{adjustwidth}{-5mm}{-5mm}
\centering
\caption{Some footnote text styles}\label{tab:fnstyle}
\begin{tabular}{cc>{\raggedright\arraybackslash}p{0.5\textwidth}} \toprule
\lnc{\footmarkwidth} & \lnc{\footmarksep} & Comment \\ \midrule
1.8em & -1.8em & Flushleft, regular indented paragraph (the default) \\
1.8em & 0em    & Indented, block paragraph hung on the mark \\
%1.8em & 1.8em  & Indented, outdented paragraph \\
%0em   & -1.8em & Regular indented paragraph, first line flushleft \\
0em   & 0em    & Flushleft, block paragraph \\
%0em   & 1.8em  & Outdented paragraph, first line flushleft \\
%-1.8em & -1.8em & Regular indented paragraph, starting in the margin \\
%-1.8em & 0em & \\
-1.8em & 1.8em & Block paragraph, flushleft, mark in the margin \\
\LMnote{2010/02/05}{added -1sp trick}
-1sp   & 0em   & Block paragraph, flushleft, mark in the margin but
flush against the text
\\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{adjustwidth}
\end{table}

    As an example of a rather different scheme, in at least one discipline
the footnoted text in the main body has a 
marker\index{footnote!marker!multiple} at each end. It is possible 
to define a macro to do this:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\wrapfootnote}[1]{\stepcounter\@mpfn%
  %  marks in the text
  \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}% 
  \@footnotemark #1\@footnotemark%
  %  marks at the bottom
  \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn--\thempfn}% 
  \@footnotetext}
\end{lcode}
\makeatletter
\newcommand{\wrapfootnote}[1]{\stepcounter\@mpfn%
  % marks in the text
  \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}% 
  \@footnotemark #1\@footnotemark%
  % marks at the bottom
  \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn--\thempfn}%
  \@footnotetext}
\makeatother
The macro is based on a posting to \ctt{} by Donald 
Arseneau\index{Arseneau, Donald} in November 2003, 
and is used like this:
\begin{lcode}
Some 
\wrapfootnote{disciplines}{For example, Celtic studies.} 
require double marks in the text.
\end{lcode}
Some 
\wrapfootnote{disciplines}{For example, Celtic studies.} 
require double marks in the text.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\fnsymbol}\marg{counter} \\
\cmd{\@fnsymbol}\marg{num} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(fnsymbol)%
  {\cs{fnsymbol}\marg{counter}}%
  {Typesets the representation of the footnote marker.}
\glossary(@fnsymbol)%
  {\cs{@fnsymbol}\marg{num}}%
  {Converts \meta{num} to the footnote marker representation.}

    Any footnotes after this point will be set according to:
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\footmarkwidth}{-1.0em}
\setlength{\footmarksep}{-\footmarkwidth}
\footmarkstyle{#1}
\end{lcode}
\setlength{\footmarkwidth}{-1.0em}
\setlength{\footmarksep}{-\footmarkwidth}
\footmarkstyle{#1}

The \cmd{\fnsymbol} macro typesets the representation of the 
counter \meta{counter} like a footnote\index{footnote!symbol} symbol. 
Internally it uses the kernel \cmd{\@fnsymbol} macro which converts 
a positive integer \meta{num} to a symbol. If you are not fond of
the standard ordering\index{footnote!symbol!order} of the footnote 
symbols, this is the macro to change. Its
original definition is:
\begin{lcode}
\def\@fnsymbol#1{\ensuremath{%
  \ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or 
  \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or 
  \dagger\dagger \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\@ctrerr\fi}}
\end{lcode}
\makeatletter
\let\m@mold@fnsymbol\@fnsymbol
\def\@fnsymbol#1{\ensuremath{%
  \ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or 
  \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or 
  \dagger\dagger \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\@ctrerr\fi}}
\makeatother
This, as shown by \verb?\@fnsymbol{1},...\@fnsymbol{9}? produces the series:
\begin{center}
 \makeatletter
\@fnsymbol{1},
\@fnsymbol{2},
\@fnsymbol{3},
\@fnsymbol{4},
\@fnsymbol{5},
\@fnsymbol{6},
\@fnsymbol{7},
\@fnsymbol{8}, and
\@fnsymbol{9}.
%\@fnsymbol{10}  % out of bounds
\makeatother 
\end{center}

\makeatletter
\renewcommand*{\@fnsymbol}[1]{\ensuremath{%
  \ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or
  \mathsection\or \|\or \mathparagraph\or **\or \dagger\dagger
  \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\@ctrerr\fi}}
\makeatother
    Robert Bringhurst quotes the following as the traditional 
ordering\index{footnote!symbol!order} (at least up
to \makeatletter\@fnsymbol{6}\makeatother):
\begin{center}
 \makeatletter
\@fnsymbol{1},
\@fnsymbol{2},
\@fnsymbol{3},
\@fnsymbol{4},
\@fnsymbol{5},
\@fnsymbol{6},
\@fnsymbol{7},
\@fnsymbol{8}, and
\@fnsymbol{9}.
\makeatother 
\end{center}
You can obtain this sequence by redefining \cmd{\@fnsymbol} as:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\@fnsymbol}[1]{\ensuremath{%
  \ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or
  \mathsection\or \|\or \mathparagraph\or **\or \dagger\dagger
  \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\@ctrerr\fi}}
\end{lcode}
not forgetting judicious use of \cmd{\makeatletter} and \cmd{\makeatother}
if you do this in the preamble\index{preamble}. Other authorities or publishers
may prefer other sequences and symbols.
\makeatletter\let\@fnsymbol\m@mold@fnsymbol\makeatother

    To get the footnote reference marks\index{reference mark} set with
symbols use:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
\end{lcode}
or to use roman numerals instead of the regular arabic numbers:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\thefootnote}{\roman{footnote}}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\footnoterule} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(footnoterule)%
{\cs{footnoterule}}%
{Rule separating footnotes from the main text.}

    The rule separating footnotes from the main text is specified 
by \cmd{\footnoterule}:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\footnoterule}{%
  \kern-3pt%
  \hrule width 0.4\columnwidth
  \kern 2.6pt}
\end{lcode}
If you don't want a rule (but you might later), then the easiest method is:
\begin{lcode}
\let\oldfootnoterule\footnoterule
\renewcommand*{\footnoterule}{}
\end{lcode}
and if you later want rules you can write:
\begin{lcode}
\let\footnoterule\oldfootnoterule
\end{lcode} 


\index{footnote!styling|)}

\index{footnote|)}

 \section{Marginal notes}

\LMnote{2010/01/**}{added a reference back to \cs{setmarginnotes}}
     Some marginalia can also be considered to be kinds of floats. 
The class provides the standard margin notes\index{margin note} 
via \cmd{\marginpar}. Remember that the width of the margin note, the
separation from the text, and the separation from one \cmd{\marginpar}
to another is controlled by \cmd{\setmarginnotes}, see
Section~\ref{sec:head-foot-marg} on
page~\pageref{sec:head-foot-marg}. 

 \begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\marginpar}\oarg{left-text}\marg{text} \\
 \cmd{\marginparmargin}\marg{placement}\\
 \cmd{\reversemarginpar} \\
 \cmd{\normalmarginpar} \\
 \end{syntax}
\glossary(marginpar)%
  {\cs{marginpar}\oarg{left-text}\marg{text}}%
  {Puts \meta{text} into the margin; if given, \meta{left-text} will be
   used instead of \meta{text} for the left margin.}
\glossary(marginparmargin)%
  {\cs{marginparmargin}\marg{placement}}%
  {Provides a more textual
    interface for the user to specify in which margin the margin note
    should be placed.}
\glossary(reversemarginpar)%
  {\cs{reversemarginpar}}%
  {Reverses the normal margins used by \cs{marginpar}.}
\glossary(normalmarginpar)%
  {\cs{normalmarginpar}}%
  {Sets the normal margins used by \cs{marginpar}(the default).}
 Just as a reminder, the \cmd{\marginpar} macro puts \meta{text} into
the margin alongside the typeblock --- the particular margin depends
on the document style and the particular page. 

\LMnote{2010/01/**}{explained why the need for the
  \cs{marginparmargin} macro}
The interface for specifying which margin \cmd{\marginpar} (and
friends) write to, have long been quite cluttered, so we have in 2010 
adopted a more textual and natural interface. For \cmd{\marginpar} the
macro is named \cmd{\marginparmargin}\marg{placement} with possible
placements: \emph{left}, \emph{right}, \emph{outer}, and
\emph{inner}. The interpretation of which is explained in \fref{fig:xmargin}.
The default corresponds to \verb?\marginparmargin{outer}?.


\LMnote{2010/01/**}{instead of explaining the algorithm, each time the
  algorithm is explaine donce and for all in a figure, then we can
  simply refer to it}
\begin{figure}[htbp]
  \centering
  \begin{minipage}{0.9\linewidth}
    \cs{Xmargin}\marg{placement} for possible placements: \emph{left},
    \emph{right}, \emph{outer}, and \emph{inner}\\
    \renewcommand\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep\normalfont\sffamily\bfseries #1}
    \begin{description}
     \small
    \item[Two column document] If the note is placed in the first
      column, to the left, otherwise  to the right, irrespective the
      document being one- or two-side and of the users choices
\item[One sided document] If user specified \emph{left}, notes are
  placed to the left, otherwise to the right. 
\item[Two sided document] depends on whether a recto or verso page:
   \begin{description}
   \item[Recto (odd) page] note is placed on the right if the user
     specified \emph{right} or \emph{outer}, otherwise the note is
     placed on the left.
   \item[Verso (even) page] note is placed on the left if the user
     specified \emph{left} or \emph{outer}, otherwise the note is
     placed on the right.
   \end{description}
\end{description}
  \end{minipage}
  \caption{Interpretation of the arguments to the \cs{Xmargin}
    commands for specifying the side in which to place side note like
    material. \texttt{X} here equals \texttt{marginpar},
    \texttt{sidepar}, \texttt{sidebar}, or \texttt{sidefoot}.} 
  \label{fig:xmargin}
\end{figure}

\fancybreak{}

\LMnote{2010/02/07}{Removed the explanation of the old interface for
  specifying the margin the \cs{marginpar} should go to. The original
  text is still available via subversion.}
The original convoluted methods of specifying the margin for
\cmd{\marginpar} is deprecated, although still supported; if you need
to know what they are then you can read all about them in \texttt{memoir.dtx}.

     Sometimes \ltx\ gets confused near a page break and a note just after
a break may get put into the wrong\index{margin note!wrong margin} margin 
(the wrong margin for the current 
page but the right one if the note fell on the previous page). If this occurs
then inserting the \cmd{\strictpagecheck} declaration before 
any \cmd{\marginpar}
command is used will prevent this, at the cost of at least one additional
\ltx\ run.


\section{Side notes}

    The vertical position of margin notes\index{margin note!moved} 
specified via \cmd{\marginpar}
is flexible so that adjacent notes are prevented from overlapping.

\LMnote{2010/01/**}{side note section extended with \cs{sidenotefont}
  and \cs{sidenotemargin}}
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\sidepar}\oarg{left}\marg{right} \\
\cmd{\sideparmargin}\marg{placement}\\
\cmd{\sideparfont}\\
\cmd{\sideparform}\\
\lnc{\sideparvshift} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(sidepar)%
  {\cs{sidepar}\oarg{left}\marg{right}}%
  {Like \cs{marginpar} except that the note does not move vertically.}
\glossary(sideparvshift)%
  {\cs{sideparvshift}}%
  {Move a \cs{sidepar} up/down by this amount.}
\glossary(sideparmargin)%
{\cs{sideparmargin}\marg{placement}}%
{Specify into which margin the \cs{sidepar} goes.}
\glossary(sideparfont)%
{\cs{siderparfont}}%
{The font which the \cs{sidepar}s are typeset.}
\glossary(sideparform)
{\cs{sideparform}}%
{Macro holding placement like \cs{raggedright} and such.}

    The \cmd{\sidepar} macro is similar to \cmd{\marginpar} except that
it produces side notes\index{side note} that do not float --- 
they may overlap. 

The same spacing is used for both \cmd{\marginpar} and \cmd{\sidepar},
namely the lengths \lnc{\marginparsep} and \lnc{\marginparwidth}. See
\cmd{\setmarginnotes}, in Section~\ref{sec:head-foot-marg} on
page~\pageref{sec:head-foot-marg}.

The length
\lnc{\sideparvshift} can be used to make vertical 
adjustments\index{side note!adjust position} to the
position of \cmd{\sidepar} notes. By default this is set to a value
of 0pt which should align the top of the note with the text line.

The command \cmd{\sideparfont} is used to specify the font used for
the \cmd{\sidepar}, default is \cmd{\normalfont}\cmd{\normalsize}.

\LMnote{2010/02/05}{added description of \cs{sideparform}}
While \cmd{\sideparfont} holds the font settings for the sidepar, the
local adjustment is kept in \cmd{\sideparform}, the default is
\begin{lcode}
  \newcommand*{\sideparform}{%
    \ifmemtortm\raggedright\else\raggedleft\fi}
\end{lcode}
Which is a special construction the makes the text go flush against the
text block on side specified via \cmd{\sideparmargin}. Since the
margin par area is usually quite narrow it might be an idea to use a
ragged setup which enables hyphenation. This can be achieved by
\begin{lcode}
  \usepackage{ragged2e}
  \newcommand*{\sideparform}{%
    \ifmemtortm\RaggedRight\else\RaggedLeft\fi}
\end{lcode}


\LMnote{2010/01/**}{Fixed the typo, such that it IS now stated that
  the default is left, not right as was earlier stated}
The macro \cmd{\sideparmargin}\marg{placement} can be used to specify
which margin the side note should go to. \meta{placement} should be
one of \emph{left}, \emph{right}, \emph{outer}, or
\emph{inner}. Interpretation of which is explained in
\fref{fig:xmargin}. For some now forgotten reason the default
corresponds to \verb?\sideparmargin{left}?.\footnote{As not to change
  existing documents, we have decided to leave it like that.}


    By default the \meta{right} argument is put in the 
%right
left%
\index{side note!text for particular margin} margin. When
the \Lopt{twoside} option is used the \meta{right} argument is put into
the %left 
right 
margin on the verso (even numbered) pages; however, for these pages
the optional \meta{left} argument is used instead if it is present. For
two column text the relevent argument is put into the `outer' margin with 
respect to the column.

\fancybreak{}

\LMnote{2010/02/07}{Removed the explanation of the old interface for
  specifying the margin the \cs{sidepar} should go to. The original
  text is still available via subversion.}  The original convoluted
methods of specifying the margin for \cmd{\sidepar} is deprecated,
although still supported; if you need to know what they are then you
can read all about them in \texttt{memoir.dtx}.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\parnopar} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(parnopar)%
  {\cs{parnopar}}%
  {Forces a new paragraph, but with no apparent break in the text.}
    When \ltx\  is deciding where to place the side notes it checks whether
it is on an odd or even page and sometimes TeX doesn't realise that it has just
moved onto the next page. Effectively TeX typesets paragraph by paragraph 
(including any side notes) and at the end of each paragraph sees if there
should have been a page break in the middle of the paragraph. If there was
it outputs the first part of the paragraph, inserts the page break, and retains
the second part of the paragraph, without retypesetting it, for eventual
output at the top of the new page. This means that side notes for any given
paragraph are in the same margin, either left or right. A side note at the
end of a paragraph may then end up in the wrong margin. The macro 
\cmd{\parnopar} forces a new paragraph\index{paragraph break!invisible} 
but without appearing to (the first
line in the following paragraph follows immediately after the last element
in the prior paragraph with no line break). You can use \cmd{\parnopar}
to make TeX to do its page break calculation when you want it to, by splitting
what appears to be one paragraph into two paragraphs.

\LMnote{2010/02/09}{Moved the veelo example to the new sniplet chapter}
    Bastiaan Veelo\index{Veelo, Bastiaan} has kindly provided example code 
for another form of a side note, the code is shown in
\snipletref{snip:veelo}. 

    Bastiaan also noted that it provided an example of using the
\lnc{\foremargin} length.
    If you want to try it out, either put the code in your preamble,
or put it into a package (i.e., \file{.sty} file) without the 
\cs{makeat...} commands. 


\section{Sidebars}

    Sidebars\index{sidebar} are typeset in the margin and usually 
contain material that is ancilliary to the main text. They may be long 
and extend for more than one page.\footnote{Donald 
Arseneau's\index{Arseneau, Donald} help has been invaluable in getting
the sidebar code to work.}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\sidebar}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(sidebar)%
  {\cs{sidebar}\marg{text}}%
  {Typesets \meta{text} in a sidebar.}
The \cmd{\sidebar} command is like \cmd{\marginpar} in that it sets
the \meta{text} in the margin. However, unlike \cmd{\marginpar} the
\meta{text} will start near the top of the page, and may continue onto
later pages if it is too long to go on a single page. If multiple
\cmd{\sidebar} commands are used on a page, the several \meta{text}s
are set one after the other.

\LMnote{2010/02/07}{dropped \cs{ifsidebaroneside} as it is not used anymore}
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\sidebarmargin}\marg{margin} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(sidebarmargin)%
  {\cs{sidebarmargin}\marg{margin}}%
  {Specifies the \meta{margin}(s) for sidebars.}

\LMnote{2010/02/07}{just adapted the explanation from the other
  \cs{Xmargin} macros}
The macro \cmd{\sidebarmargin}\marg{placement} can be used to specify
which margin the side note should go to. \meta{placement} should be
one of \emph{left}, \emph{right}, \emph{outer}, or
\emph{inner}. Interpretation of which is explained in
\fref{fig:xmargin}. The default corresponds to \verb?\sidebarmargin{outer}?.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\sidebarfont} \cmd{\sidebarform} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(sidebarfont)%
  {\cs{sidebarfont}}%
  {Font used for sidebars.}
\glossary(sidebarform)%
  {\cs{sidebarform}}%
  {Form (e.g., \cs{raggedright}) used for sidebars.}
The sidebar \meta{text} is typeset using the \cmd{\sidebarfont}, whose initial
definition is
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\sidebarfont}{\normalsize\normalfont}
\end{lcode}
Sidebars\index{sidebar!styling} are normally narrow so the text is 
set raggedright\index{raggedright} to 
reduce hyphenation\index{hyphenation}
problems and stop items in environments like \Ie{itemize} from overflowing. 
\LMnote{2010/02/05}{added description of \cs{sidebarform}}
\LMnote{2010/02/06}{fixed typo}
More accurately, the text is set according to \cmd{\sidebarform} which is 
defined as:
\begin{lcode}
  \newcommand*{\sidebarform}{%
    \ifmemtortm\raggedright\else\raggedleft\fi}
\end{lcode}
Which is a special construction the makes the text go flush against the
text block on side specified via \cmd{\sideparmargin}. Since the
margin par area is usually quite narrow it might be an idea to use a
ragged setup which enables hyphenation. This can be achieved by
\begin{lcode}
  \usepackage{ragged2e}
  \newcommand*{\sidebarform}{%
    \ifmemtortm\RaggedRight\else\RaggedLeft\fi}
\end{lcode}



% which is ragged right but with less raggedness than \cmd{\raggedright}
% would allow. As usual, you can change \cmd{\sidebarform}, for example:
% \begin{lcode}
% \renewcommand{\sidebarform}{}            % justified text
% \end{lcode}





    You may run into problems if the \cmd{\sidebar} command comes near 
a pagebreak, or if the sidebar text gets typeset alongside main text that
has non-uniform line spacing (like around a \cmd{\section}). Further,
the contents of sidebars may not be typeset if they are too near to the
end of the document.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\sidebarwidth} \lnc{\sidebarhsep} \lnc{\sidebarvsep} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(sidebarwidth)%
  {\cs{sidebarwidth}}%
  {Width of sidebars.}
\glossary(sidebarhsep)%
  {\cs{sidebarhsep}}%
  {Space between the edge of the main text and sidebars.}
\glossary(sidebarvsep)%
  {\cs{sidebarvsep}}%
  {Vertical space between sidebars that fall on the same page.}
The \meta{text} of a \cmd{\sidebar} is typeset in a column of width 
\lnc{\sidebarwidth} and there is a horizontal gap of \lnc{\sidebarhsep}
between the main text and the sidebar. The length \lnc{\sidebarvsep}
is the vertical gap between sidebars that fall on the same page; it also
has a role in controlling the start of sidebars with respect to the
top of the page.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\sidebartopsep} \\
\cmd{\setsidebarheight}\marg{height} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(sidebartopsep)%
  {\cs{sidebartopsep}}%
  {Controls the vertical position of a sidebar. The default is 0pt which
   aligns the tops of the typeblock and the sidebar.}
\glossary(setsidebarheight)%
  {\cs{setsidebarheight}\marg{height}}%
  {Sets the height of sidebars. The default is \cs{textheight}.}
The length \lnc{\sidebartopsep} controls the vertical position of the top
of a sidebar. The default is 0pt which aligns it with the top of the
typeblock.
The command \cmd{\setsidebarheight} sets the height of sidebars to
\meta{height}, without making any allowance for \lnc{\sidebartopsep}.
The \meta{length} argument should be equivalent to an integral number 
of lines. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\setsidebarheight{15\onelineskip}
\end{lcode}
The default is the \lnc{\textheight}.

    Perhaps you would like sidebars to start two lines below the top of
the typeblock but still end at the bottom of the typeblock? If so, and
you are using the \Lpack{calc} package~\cite{CALC}, then the following
will do the job:
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\sidebartopskip}{2\onelineskip}
\setsidebarheight{\textheight-\sidebartopskip}
\end{lcode}


    The alignment of the text in a sidebar with the main text may not
be particularly good and you may wish to do some experimentation
(possibly through a combination of \lnc{\sidebarvsep} and 
\cmd{\setsidebarheight}) to improve matters.

    Although you can set the parameters for your sidebars individually it
is more efficient to use the \cmd{\setsidebars} command; it \emph{must} be 
used if you change the font and/or the height.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setsidebars}\marg{hsep}\marg{width}\marg{vsep}\marg{topsep}\marg{font}\marg{height} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setsidebars)%
  {\cs{setsidebars}\marg{hsep}\marg{width}\marg{vsep}\marg{topsep}\marg{font}\marg{height}}%
  {Sets the several sidebar parameters.}

The \cmd{\setsidebars} command can be used to set the sidebar parameters.
\lnc{\sidebarhsep} is set to \meta{hsep}, \lnc{\sidebarwidth} is set to
\meta{width}, \lnc{\sidebarvsep} is set to \meta{vsep}, \lnc{\sidebartopsep}
is set to \meta{topsep}, \cmd{\sidebarfont} is set to \meta{font}, 
and finally \cmd{\setsidebarheight} is used to set the height to \meta{height}.
The default is:
\LMnote{2010/02/07}{the default was wrong compared to the class}
\begin{lcode}
\setsidebars{\marginparsep}{\marginparwidth}{\onelineskip}%
            {0pt}{\normalsize\normalfont}{\textheight}
\end{lcode}
Any, or all, of the arguments can be a \verb?*?, in which case the parameter
corresponding to that argument is unchanged. Repeating the above example of 
changing the topskip and the height, assuming that the other defaults are 
satisfactory except that the width should be 3cm and an italic font should 
be used:
\begin{lcode}
\setsidebars{*}{3cm}{*}{2\onelineskip}{\itshape}%
            {\textheight-\sidebartopsep}
\end{lcode}

   Changing the marginpar parameters, for example with \cmd{\setmarginnotes},
will not affect the sidebar parameters.

   Note that \cmd{\checkandfixthelayout} neither checks nor fixes any of
the sidebar parameters. This means, for instance, that if you change the
\lnc{\textheight} from its default value and you want sidebars to have 
the same height then after changing the \lnc{\textheight} you have to 
call \cmd{\checkandfixthelayout}  and then call \cmd{\setsidebars} with
the (new) \lnc{\textheight}. For instance:
\begin{lcode}
...
\settypeblocksize{40\baselineskip}{5in}{*}
...
\checkandfixthelayout
\setsidebars{...}{...}{...}{...}{...}{\textheight}
\end{lcode}

    Unfortunately if a sidebar is on a double column page that either includes
a double column float or starts a new chapter then the top of the sidebar
comes below the float or the chapter title. I have been unable to eliminate 
this `feature'.


\section{Side footnotes}
\label{sec:side-footnotes}

Besides three already mentioned macros for writing in the margin
(\cmd{\marginpar}, \cmd{\sidepar}, and \cmd{\sidebar}) \theclass\ also
provide a functionality to add side footnotes. Actually two ways: one
is to internally make \cmd{\footnote} use \cmd{\marginpar} to write
in the margin, the other is to collect all side footnotes bottom up in
the margin.
\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\footnotesatfoot}\\
  \cmd{\footnotesinmargin}\\
\end{syntax}
\cmd{\footnotesatfoot} (the default) causes \cmd{\footnote} to place
its text at the bottom of the page. By issuing \cmd{footnotesinmargin}
\cmd{\footnote} (and friends like \cmd{\footnotetext})will internally
use \cmd{\marginpar} to write the footnote to the page.



\subsection{Bottom aligned side footnotes}
\label{sec:bottom-aligned-side}

Bottom aligned footnotes works just like regular footnotes, just with
a separate macro \cmd{\sidefootenote}\marg{text}, and here the side
footnotes are placed at the bottom of the specified margin (more or
like as if one had taken the footnotes from the bottom of the page and
moved it to the margin instead). All the major functionality is the
same as for the normal \cmd{\footnote}
command.\footnote{\cs{sidefootnote} does not make sense inside
  minipages\dots}
\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\sidefootnote}\oarg{num}\marg{text}\\
  \cmd{\sidefootnotemark}\oarg{num}\\
  \cmd{\sidefootnotetext}\oarg{num}\marg{text}\\
\end{syntax}

By default the regular footnotes and the side footnotes use different
counters. If one would like them to use the same counter, issue the
following in the preamble:
\begin{lcode}
  \letcountercounter{sidefootnote}{footnote}
\end{lcode}


\subsection{Setting the layout for
  \texorpdfstring{\cs{sidefootnote}}{sidefootnote}} 
\label{sec:sett-layo-texorpdfst}



There are several possibilities to change the appearance of the
\cmd{\sidefootnote}:

Specifying the margin in which the side footnote should go, is done by 
\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\sidefootmargin}\marg{keyword}\\
\end{syntax}
where \meta{keyword} can be \emph{left}, \emph{right}, \emph{outer}, and
\emph{inner}, and their meaning is explained in
\fref{fig:xmargin}. The default is \emph{outer}.

\begin{syntax}
  \lnc{\sidefoothsep}\\
  \lnc{\sidefootwidth}\\
  \lnc{\sidefootvsep}\\
\end{syntax}
\cmd{\sidefoothsep} is a length controlling the separation from the
text to the side footnote column, default
\cmd{\marginparsep}. \cmd{\sidefootwidth} is length controlling the
width of the side footnote column, default \cmd{\marginparwidth}, and
\cmd{\sidefootvsep} is the vertical distance between two side
footnotes, default \cmd{\onelineskip}.

\begin{syntax}
  \lnc{\sidefootadjust}\\
  \cmd{\setsidefootheight}\marg{height}\\
  \cmd{\sidefootfont}\\
\end{syntax}
\cmd{\sidefootadjust} is a length which specifies the placement of the
side footnote column in relation to the bottom of the text block, the
default is 0pt. \cmd{\setsidefootheight} sets the maximal height of
the side footnote column, default \cmd{textwidth}. Lastly
\cmd{\sidefootfont} holds the general font setting for the side
footnote,\footnote{There is a similar macro to control the font of the
  text alone.} default \verb?\normalfont\footnotesize?.


The macro
\begin{syntax}
   \cmd{\setsidefeet}\marg{hsep}\marg{width}\marg{vsep}\marg{adj}\marg{font}\marg{height}\\
\end{syntax}
sets the specifications all six settings above in one go.. An `*'
means `use the current value'. So \theclass\ internally use the
following default
\begin{lcode}
  \setsidefeet{\marginparsep}{\marginparwidth}%
  {\onelineskip}{0pt}%
  {\normalfont\footnotesize}{\textheight}%
\end{lcode}
It is recommended to use this macro along with the other macros in the
preamble to specify document layout.

\subsection{Styling 
  \texorpdfstring{\cs{sidefootnote}}{sidefootnote}} 


\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\sidefootmarkstyle}\marg{code}\\
\end{syntax}
controls how the side footnote counter is typeset in the side
footnote. The default is
\begin{lcode}
  \sidefootmarkstyle{\textsuperscript{#1}}
\end{lcode}

The mark is typeset in a box of width \lnc{\sidefootmarkwidth}
If this is negative, the mark is outdented
into the margin, if zero the mark is flush left, and when positive
the mark is indented. The mark is followed by the 
text\index{side footnote!text} of the footnote. Second and later lines of the
text are offset by the length \lnc{\sidefootmarksep} from the end of the box.
The first line of a paragraph within a footnote is indented by
\lnc{\sidefootparindent}. The default values for these lengths are:
\begin{lcode}
  \setlength{\sidefootmarkwidth}{0em}
  \setlength{\sidefootmarksep}{0em}
  \setlength{\sidefootparindent}{1em}
\end{lcode}


\fancybreak{}

Caveat: It is natural to specify a length as \lnc{\sidefootparindent}
as a \LaTeX\ length, but it has a down side. If, as we do here, set
the value to 1em, then since the size of the em unit changes with the
current font size, one will actually end up with an indent
corresponding to the font size being used when the
\begin{lcode}
  \setlength{\sidefootparindent}{1em}
\end{lcode}
was issued, not when it has used (where the font size most often will
be \cmd{\footnotesize}).

At this point we consider this to be a \emph{feature} not an
error. One way to get pass this problem it the following
\begin{lcode}
\begingroup% keep font change local
\sidefoottextfont
\global\setlength\sidefootparindent{1em}
\endgroup  
\end{lcode}
Then it will store the value of em corresponding to the font being
used. 


\LMnote{2010/02/07}{explained the rest, left the side footnote hook
  out of it for now}
\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\sidefoottextfont}\\
\end{syntax}
holds the font being used by the side footnote, default
\verb+\normalfont\footnotesize+. 
\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\sidefootform}\\
\end{syntax}
is used to specify the raggedness of the text. Default
\begin{lcode}
  \newcommand*{\sidefootform}{\rightskip=\z@ \@plus 2em}
\end{lcode}
which is much like \cs{raggedright} but allows some hyphenation. One
might consider using
\begin{lcode}
  \usepackage{ragged2e}
  \newcommand*{\sidefootform}{\RaggedRight}
\end{lcode}
Which does something similar.





\subsection{Side footnote example}
\label{sec:side-footn-example}



In the margin you will find the result of the following code:
\begin{verbatim}
  Testing\sidefootnote{This is test} bottom aligned
  footnotes.\sidefootnote{This is another side 
  footnote, spanning several lines.

  And several paragraphs}\sidefootnote{And number three}
\end{verbatim}
  Testing\sidefootnote{This is test} bottom aligned
  footnotes.\sidefootnote{This is another side 
  footnote, spanning several lines.

  And several paragraphs}\sidefootnote{And number three}


\LMnote{2013/05/02}{Moved here from backmatter.tex}

\section{Endnotes}
\label{sec:endnotes}

\LMnote{2010/10/28}{several \cs{printpagenotes} was spelled wrong}

\reimplemented{December 2010}{The former implementation had some
  difficulties handling certain types of input. A few of the macros
  used to format the output are no longer supported/used in the new
  implementation.}


    Endnotes are often used instead of footnotes so as not to interrupt the
flow of the main text. Although endnotes are normally put at the end of 
the document, they may instead be put at the end of each chapter.

    The \Lpack{endnotes} package already uses the command \cmd{\endnote} for
an endnote, so the class uses \cmd{\pagenote} for an endnote so as not 
to clash if you prefer to use the package. 
\LMnote{2011/01/23}{The implementation has nothing to do with the
  current pagenote package, thus the remark is removed}
% The following was originally supplied as the \Lpack{pagenote}
% package~\cite{PAGENOTE}. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makepagenote} \\
\cmd{\pagenote}\oarg{id}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\printpagenotes} \cmd{\printpagenotes*} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(makepagenote)%
  {\cs{makepagenote}}%
  {Preamble command for enabling page/end notes.}%
\glossary(printpagenotes)%
  {\cs{printpagenotes}}%
  {Input the pagenote \file{ent} file for printing, then close it to any 
   more notes.}%
\glossary(printpagenotes*)%
  {\cs{printpagenotes*}}%
  {Input the pagenote \file{ent} file for printing, then empty it ready for 
   further notes.}%

   The general principle is that notes are written out to a file which
is then input at the place where the notes are to be printed. The note 
file has an \pixfile{ent} extension, like the table of contents file
has a \pixfile{toc} extension.

    You have to put \cmd{\makepagenote} in your preamble if you want 
endnotes. This will open the \pixfile{ent} note file which is called
\verb?\jobname.ent?.

   In the body of the text use use \cmd{\pagenote} to create an endnote, just
as you would use \cmd{\footnote} to create a footnote. In the books that I have
checked there are two common methods of identifying an endnote:
\begin{enumerate}
\item Like a footnote, put a number in the text at the location 
of the note and use the same number to identify the note when it
finally gets printed.\label{pagenote:id1}
\item Put no mark in the text, but when it is finally 
      printed\pagenote[Put no mark \ldots finally printed]{This manual uses
      both footnotes and endnotes. For identifying the endnotes I have used the
      `words' method for identifying the parent location of an endnote, so as not
      to start confusing the reader with two sets of note marks in the body of the
      text. Typically either footnotes or endnotes are used, not both, so the
      question of distinguishing them does not normally arise.}
use a few words from the text to identify the origin of the note. The page number
is often used as well with this method.\label{pagenote:id2}
\end{enumerate}
The \meta{text} argument of \cmd{\pagenote} is the contents of the note and
if the optional \meta{id} argument is not used the
result is similar to having used \cmd{\footnote} --- a number in the main text
and the corresponding number in the endnotes listing (as 
in \ref{pagenote:id1} above). For the second reference style 
(\ref{pagenote:id2} above) use the 
optional \meta{id} argument for the `few words', and no mark will be put
into the main text but \meta{id} will be used as the identification in
the listing.

   For one set of endnotes covering the whole document put 
\cmd{\printpagenotes} where you want them printed, typically before
any bibliography or index. The \cmd{\printpagenotes} macro inputs the
\pixfile{ent} endnote file for printing and then closes it to any further
notes.

For notes
at the end of each chapter put \cmd{\printpagenotes*}, which inputs
the \pixfile{ent} file for printing then empties it ready for more notes,
at the end of each chapter.

   The simple use is like this:
\begin{lcode}
\documentclass[...]{memoir}
...
\makepagenote
...
\begin{document}
\chapter{One}
...\pagenote{An end note.} ...
...\pagenote{Fascinating information.}
...
\chapter{Last}% chapter 9
...\pagenote{Another note.}% 30th note
...
...
\printpagenotes
...
\end{document}
\end{lcode}
This will result in an endnote listing looking like \fref{fig:endnote}.

\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{minipage}{0.8\textwidth}
\begin{framed}
\noindent{\bfseries\Large Notes}\\[\baselineskip]
{\bfseries Chapter 1 One} \\[\baselineskip]
1. An end note \\
2. Fascinating information. \\
.............. \\[\baselineskip]
{\bfseries Chapter 9 Last} \\[\baselineskip]
1. Another note \\[\baselineskip]
\end{framed}
\end{minipage}
\caption{Example endnote listing}\label{fig:endnote}
\end{figure}

For notes at the end of each chapter:
\begin{lcode}
\documentclass[...]{memoir}
...
\makepagenote
...
\begin{document}
\chapter{One}
...\pagenote{An end note.} ...
...
\printpagenotes*
\chapter{Last}
...\pagenote{Another note.} ...
...
\printpagenotes*
%%% no more chapters
...
\end{document}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\continuousnotenums} \\
\cmd{\notepageref} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(continuousnotenums)%
  {\cs{continuousnotenums}}%
  {Declaration to make the numbering of endnotes continuous throughout the
   document.}%
\glossary(notepageref)%
  {\cs{notepageref}}%
  {Declaration that page numbers are available to notes in the endnote listing.}
   The \Icn{pagenote} counter is used for the notes. By default the endnotes 
are numbered per chapter. If you want the numbering
to be continuous throughout the document use the \cmd{\continuousnotenums}
declaration. Normally the information on which page a note was created is
discarded but will be made available to notes in the endnote listing
following the \cmd{\notepageref} declaration.  Both
\cmd{\continuousnotenums} and \cmd{\notepageref} can only be used in
the preamble.

\LMnote{2011/01/23}{Because of the new implementation this is no
  longer needed as the writing to file is no longer delayed.}
% Because of how TeX writes information to files, when the
% \cmd{\notepageref} declaration is used there must be no notes on the
% page where \cmd{\printpagenotes} or \cmd{\printpagenotes*} closes the
% \pixfile{ent} file.  If necessary, a \cmd{\clearpage} or similar must
% be used before the print command.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\notesname} \\
\cmd{\notedivision} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(notesname)%
  {\cs{notesname}}%
  {Name for endnotes, default \texttt{Notes}.}%
\glossary(notedivision)%
  {\cs{notedivision}}%
  {Heading printed by the \cs{printpagenotes} and \cs{printpagenotes*} macros.}

  When \cmd{\printpagenotes} (or \cmd{\printpagenotes*}) is called the
  first thing it does is call the macro \cmd{\notedivision}. By
  default this is defined as:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\notedivision}{\chapter{\notesname}}
\end{lcode}
with
\begin{lcode}
  \newcommand*{\notesname}{Notes}
\end{lcode}
In other words, it will print out a heading for the notes that will be read
from the \file{ent} file. \verb?\print...? then closes the \pixfile{ent} file 
for writing and after this \verb?\input?s it to get and process the notes.


\subsection{Changing the appearance}

\subsubsection{In the text}
\label{sec:in-the-text}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\notenumintext}\marg{num} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(notenumintext)%
  {\cs{notenumintext}\marg{num}}%
  {Typesets the number \meta{num} of a page note in the main text.}%
The \Icn{pagenote} counter is used for pagenotes. The macro
\cmd{\notenumintext} is called by \cmd{\pagenote} with the value of the
\Icn{pagenote} counter as the \meta{num} argument to print the
value of the \Icn{pagenote} counter in the main text. By default it is 
printed as a 
superscript, but this can be changed, or even eliminated.
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\notenumintext}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}
\end{lcode}

\subsubsection{In the page note list}
\label{sec:page-note-list}

  
\LMnote{2011/01/23}{Added to make the formating code easier to understand}

To better understand how a page note entry is formatted in the page
note list, we start with the following  pseudo code (it is not exactly
what you will see in the \texttt{.ent} file, but macros will end up
being called in this manner)
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\prenoteinnotes}\\
\cmd{\noteidinnotes}\marg{notenum}\marg{id}\\
\cmd{\pageinnotes}\marg{auto generated note label key}\\
\cmd{\prenotetext}\\
\quad\meta{Page note text}\\
\cmd{\postnotetext}\\
\cmd{\postnoteinnotes}
\end{syntax}
At the start and end we have the two macros \cmd{\prenoteinnotes} and
\cmd{\postnoteinnotes}, they take care of preparing for and ending an
entry in the list. The list is typeset in a manner where each item is
(at least) a paragraph, so the default definition is
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\prenoteinnotes}{\par\noindent}
\newcommand{\postnoteinnotes}{\par}
\end{lcode}
\glossary(prenoteinnotes)%
  {\cs{prenoteinnotes}}%
  {Called by \cs{noteentry} to initialise the printing of an endnote.}%
\glossary(postnoteinnotes)%
  {\cs{postnoteinnotes}}%
  {Called by \cs{noteentry} to finish the printing of an endnote.}%
A user could change this to make it look a bit more like a list
construction. For example the following would give a hanging
indentation
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\prenoteinnotes}{\par\noindent\hangindent 2em}
\end{lcode}

\fancybreak{}


The \cmd{\noteidinnotes} calls \cmd{\idtextinnotes} to print the note \meta{id}
if it was given as the optional argument to \cmd{pagenote}, 
otherwise it calls \cmd{\notenuminnotes} to print the note number.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\noteidinnotes}\marg{notenum}\marg{id} \\
\cmd{\idtextinnotes}\marg{id} \\
\cmd{\notenuminnotes}\marg{num} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(noteidinnotes)%
  {\cs{noteidinnotes}\marg{notenum}\marg{id}}%
  {Prints an endnote's number or id in the endnote listing.}%
\glossary(idtextinnotes)%
  {\cs{idtextinnotes}\marg{id}}%
  {Prints an endnote's \meta{id} text}%
\glossary(notenuminnotes)%
  {\cs{notenuminnotes}\marg{num}}%
  {Typesets the number \meta{num} of a page note in the note listing.}%
These are defined respectively as:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\idtextinnotes}[1]{[#1]\space}
\newcommand*{\notenuminnotes}[1]{\normalfont #1.\space}
\end{lcode}

\fancybreak{}

Next we execute \cmd{\pageinnotes}\marg{note label key} which does
nothing by default. But if \cmd{\notepageref} is issued in the
preamble two things happen, (1) each page note issues a label such
that we can refer back to its page, and (2) \cmd{\pageinnotes} calls
\cmd{\printpageinnotes} (or if \Lpack{hyperref} is loaded
\cmd{\printpageinnoteshyperref}) 
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\pageinnotes}\marg{auto generated note label key}\\
\cmd{\printpageinnotes}\marg{auto generated note label key}\\  
\cmd{\printpageinnoteshyperref}\marg{auto generated note label key}
\end{syntax}
\glossary(pageinnotes)%
{\cs{pageinnotes}\marg{pagenum}}%
{Controls the printing of an endnote's page reference number.}%
\glossary(printpageinnotes)%
{\cs{printpageinnotes}\marg{pagenum}}%
{Prints an endnote's page reference number.}%
\glossary(printpageinnoteshypreref)%
{\cs{printpageinnoteshyperref}\marg{pagenum}}%
{Prints an endnote's page reference number whenever the
  \protect\Lpack{hyperref} package is used, it will include a
  hyperlink back to the page in question.}%
Default definitions
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\printpageinnotes}[1]{%
    (\pagerefname\ \pageref{#1})\space}
\newcommand\printpageinnoteshyperref[1]{%
   (\hyperref[#1]{\pagerefname\ \pageref*{#1}})\space}
\end{lcode}
That is if \Lpack{hyperref} is loaded the entire text \meta{page 3}
will be the text of a hyperlink.

\bigskip

\begin{syntax}
  \cmd{\prenotetext}\\
  \cmd{\postnotetext}\\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(prenotetext)%
  {\cs{prenotetext}}%
  {Called within a page note list entry to initialise the printing
    of the text part of an endnote.}%
\glossary(postnotetex)%
  {\cs{postnotetext}}%
  {Called within a page note list entry to finish the printing of an
    endnote.}%
The actual text part of the page note is enclosed by
\cmd{\prenotetext} and \cmd{postnotetext}. By default they do nothing,
but could easily be redefined such that (only) the entry text would be
in italic: 
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand\prenotetext{\begingroup\itshape}
\renewcommand\postnotetext{\endgroup}
\end{lcode}



%%%%%%%%%%%


\LMnote{2011/01/25}{Covered above}
% \begin{syntax}
% \cmd{\notenuminnotes}\marg{num} \\
% \end{syntax}
% \glossary(notenuminnotes)%
%   {\cs{notenuminnotes}\marg{num}}%
%   {Typesets the number \meta{num} of a page note in the note listing.}%
% In the note listing \cmd{\notenuminnotes} is used to print the number
% of a note. The default definitions are:

% \begin{lcode}
% \newcommand*{\notenuminnotes}[1]{\normalfont #1.\space}
% \end{lcode}



\LMnote{2011/01/25}{Covered above, \cmd{\noteentry} is not used anymore}
% \begin{syntax}
% \cmd{\noteentry}\marg{notenum}\marg{id}\marg{text}\marg{pagenum} \\
% \cmd{\prenoteinnotes} \\
% \cmd{\postnoteinnotes} \\
% \end{syntax}
% \glossary(noteentry)%
%   {\cs{noteentry}\marg{notenum}\marg{id}\marg{text}\marg{pagenum}}%
%   {Typesets a pagenote with number \meta{notenum}, identifier \meta{id},
%    contents \meta{text}, created on page \meta{pagenum}.}
% \glossary(prenoteinnotes)%
%   {\cs{prenoteinnotes}}%
%   {Called by \cs{noteentry} to initialise the printing of an endnote.}
% \glossary(postnoteinnotes)%
%   {\cs{postnoteinnotes}}%
%   {Called by \cs{noteentry} to finish the printing of an endnote.}
% The \cmd{\pagenote} macro writes \cmd{\noteentry}, with the appropriate 
% values for the arguments, to the \pixfile{ent} file, 
% where \meta{notenum} is the note number (from the \Icn{pagenote} counter),
% \meta{id} and \meta{text} are as supplied to
% \cmd{\pagenote}, and if the \cmd{\notepageref} declaration option is used, 
% \meta{pagenum} is the page number, otherwise it is empty. 
% The \cmd{\noteentry} macro controls the typesetting of the note.

% The default definition of \cmd{\noteentry} is
% \begin{lcode}
% \newcommand{\notentry}[4]{%
%   \prenoteinnotes
%   \noteidinnotes{#1}{#2}\pageinnotes{#4}\noteinnotes{#3}%
%   \postnoteinnotes}
% \end{lcode}
% and the definitions of other macros are:
% \begin{lcode}
% \newcommand{\prenoteinnotes}{\par\noindent}
% \newcommand{\postnoteinnotes}{\par}
% \end{lcode}
% so that (the first paragraph of) each note is printed as a non-indented 
% paragraph.

%     If you would prefer, say, hanging paragraphs try:
% \begin{lcode}
% \renewcommand{\prenoteinnotes}{\par\noindent\hangindent 2em}
% \end{lcode}

% \begin{syntax}
% \cmd{\noteidinnotes}\marg{notenum}\marg{id} \\
% \cmd{\idtextinnotes}\marg{id} \\
% \cmd{\notenuminnotes}\marg{num} \\
% \end{syntax}
% \glossary(noteidinnotes)%
%   {\cs{noteidinnotes}\marg{notenum}\marg{id}}%
%   {Prints an endnote's number or id in the endnote listing.}%
% \glossary(idtextinnotes)%
%   {\cs{idtextinnotes}\marg{id}}%
%   {Prints an endnote's \meta{id} text}%
% The \cmd{\noteidinnotes} calls \cmd{\idtextinnotes} to print the note \meta{id}
% if it was given as the optional argument to \cmd{pagenote}, 
% otherwise it calls \cmd{\notenuminnotes} to print the note number.
% These are defined respectively as:
% \begin{lcode}
% \newcommand*{\idtextinnotes}[1]{[#1]\space}
% \newcommand*{\notenuminnotes}[1]{\normalfont #1.\space}
% \end{lcode}

% \begin{syntax}
% \cmd{\pageinnotes}\marg{pagenum} \\
% \cmd{\printpageinnotes}\marg{pagenum} \\
% \end{syntax}
% \glossary(pageinnotes)%
%   {\cs{pageinnotes}\marg{pagenum}}%
%   {Controls the printing of an endnote's page reference number.}%
% \glossary(printpageinnotes)%
%   {\cs{printpageinnotes}\marg{pagenum}}%
%   {Prints an endnote's page reference number.}%
% The macro \cmd{\pageinnotes} controls the printing of a note's page 
% reference. If the
% \cmd{\notepageref} declaration has been used it calls
% \cmd{\printpageinnotes} to do the actual printing. Its definition is:
% \begin{lcode}
% \newcommand*{\printpageinnotes}[1]{%
%   (\pagerefname\ #1)\space}
% \end{lcode}

% \begin{syntax}
% \cmd{\noteinnotes}\marg{text} \\
% \end{syntax}
% \glossary(noteinnotes)%
%   {\cs{noteinnotes}\marg{text}}%
%   {Prints the text of an endnote.}%
% The macro \cmd{\noteinnotes}\marg{text} is simply:
% \begin{lcode}
% \newcommand{\noteinnotes}[1]{#1}
% \end{lcode}
% and is used to print the text of a note.




\bigskip



\LMnote{2011/01/25}{rewritten a bit}
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\addtonotes}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(addtonotes)%
  {\cs{addtonotes}\marg{text}}%
  {Inserts \meta{text} into the endnotes \file{ent} file.}%
The macro \cmd{\addtonotes} inserts \meta{text} into the \pixfile{ent}
file. 

\begin{note}
  As the argument to \cmd{\pagenote} and \cmd{\addtonotes} is moving
  you may have to \cmd{\protect} any fragile commands. If you get
  strange error messages, try using \cmd{\protect} and see if they go
  away.
\end{note}
\fancybreak{}

Internally in \cmd{\pagenote} \cmd{\addtonotes} is used to provide
chapter devisions into the note list. It will detect both numbered and
unnumbered chapters. The actual text is provided using
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\pagenotesubhead}\marg{chapapp}\marg{num}\marg{title} \\
\cmd{\pagenotesubheadstarred}\marg{chapapp}\marg{num}\marg{title} \\
\cmd{\pnchap} \cmd{\pnschap} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(pagenotesubhead)%
  {\cs{pagenotesubhead}\marg{chapapp}\marg{num}\marg{title}}%
  {Typesets a subheading for notes from chapter or appendix \meta{chapapp} 
   \meta{num} called \meta{title}.}%
\glossary(pagenotesubheadstarred)%
  {\cs{pagenotesubheadstarred}\marg{chapapp}\marg{num}\marg{title}}%
  {Typesets a subheading for notes from unnumbered chapter or appendix
    \meta{chapapp}  \meta{num} called \meta{title}.}%
\glossary(pnchap)%
  {\cs{pnchap}}%
  {Chapter title for \cs{pagenotesubhead}. Defaults to the ToC entry.}
\glossary(pnschap)%
{\cs{pnschap}}%
{Starred chapter title for \cs{pagenotesubhead}. Defaults to the regular title.}
  
The macro \cmd{\pagenotesubhead} typesets the subheadings in an
endnote list.  The \meta{chapapp} argument is normally
\cmd{\chaptername} but if the notes are from an appendix then
\cmd{\appendixname} is used instead. \meta{num} is the number of the
chapter, or blank if there is no number. Lastly, \meta{title} is
\cmd{\pnchap} for regular chapters which defaults to the ToC entry, or
\cmd{\pnschap} for starred chapters which defaults to the normal
title. The default definition of \cmd{\pagenotesubhead} is very
simply:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\pagenotesubhead}[3]{%
  \section*{#1 #2 #3}}
\newcommand\pagenotesubheadstarred{\pagenotesubhead} % i.e. the same
\end{lcode}
By default this means that the header for starred chapters will be
something like >>Chapter Title<<, which may look odd. In that case
redefine \cmd{\pagenotesubheadstarred} to something similar to 
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand\pagenotesubheadstarred{\section*{#3}}
\end{lcode}
Just remember that unless you have specified \cmd{\continuousnotenums}
in the preamble the note counter (\Icn{pagenote}) will only be reset
at the start of any numbered chapters (because it is tied to changes
in the chapter counter).

The scheme is set up under the assumption that notes will only be
printed at the end of the document. If you intend to put them at the
end of each chapter, then you will probably want to change the
definitions of the \cmd{\notedivision} and \cmd{\pagenotesubhead}
macros. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\notedivision}{\section*{\notesname}}
\renewcommand*{\pagenotesubhead}[3]{}
\end{lcode}
and remember to use \cmd{\printpagenotes*} at each place you want the
current set of notes to be printed.

\fancybreak{}

Say you have written a document with footnotes, but later on decide on
using end notes (page notes) instead. In that case you can use
\cmd{\foottopagenote} to make \cmd{\footnote}, \cmd{\footnotemark} and
\cmd{\footnotetext} works as if it was implemented using end notes. On
the other hand \cmd{\pagetofootnote} makes all  page notes into
footnotes (note that this might not work, because there are places
where page notes can be issued but foot notes cannot).

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\foottopagenote}\\ \cmd{\pagetofootnote} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(foottopagenote)%
  {\cs{foottopagenote}}%
  {Declaration which turns \cs{footnote}s into \cs{pagenote}s.}%
\glossary(pagetofootnote)%
  {\cs{pagetofootnote}}%
  {Declaration which turns \cs{pagenote}s into \cs{footnote}s.}%
  % You can have both footnotes and endnotes in the same
  % document. However you may start with all footnotes and later
  % decide you would have preferred endnotes instead, or
  % \emph{vice-versa}. The \cmd{\foottopagenote} declaration makes
  % \cmd{\footnote}s behave as \cmd{\pagenote}s, and
  % \cmd{\pagetofootnote} has the opposite effect.
In either conversion the optional argument will be
ignored as for \cmd{\pagenote} it can be arbitrary text whereas for
\cmd{\footnote} it must be a number.






%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%% start membook


%#% extend







%#% extstart include decorative-text.tex

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-04-24 17:14:15 +0200 (Wed, 24 Apr 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 442 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}


%%%%% end membook
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%






%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\clearpage
%%%\pagestyle{companion}
%%\chapterstyle{companion}
\defaultsecnum
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\chapter{Decorative text} \label{chap:signposts}


\newcommand{\tepi}[2]{\epigraph{#1}{#2}}

% \tepi{My soul, seek not the life of immortals; but enjoy to the full
%       the resources that are within your reach}
%      {\textit{Pythian Odes \\ Pindar}}
\tepi{Too servile a submission to the books and opinions of the ancients
      has spoiled many an ingenious man, and plagued the world with an
      abundance of pedants and coxcombs.}
     {James Puckle (1677?--1724)}


    By now we have covered most aspects of typesetting. As far as
the class is concerned this chapter describes the slightly more fun 
task of typesetting epigraphs\index{epigraph}.

     Some authors like to add an interesting quotation\index{quotation} 
at either the start or end of a chapter. The class provides commands
to assist in the typesetting of a single epigraph. Other authors like to 
add many such quotations\index{quotation} and the class provides 
environments to cater for these as well.
Epigraphs can be typeset at either the left, the center or the right of 
the typeblock\index{typeblock}. A few example epigraphs are exhibited here, and
others can be found in an article by
Christina Thiele~\cite{TTC199} where she reviewed the \Lpack{epigraph}
package~\cite{EPIGRAPH} which is included in the class.

 \section{Epigraphs} 
\index{epigraph|(}

% \tepi{The whole is more than the sum of the parts.}
%      {\textit{Metaphysica \\ Aristotle}}

 %\subsection{The \texttt{epigraph} command}

  The original inspiration for \cmd{\epigraph} was Doug Schenck's
 for the epigraphs in our book~\cite{EBOOK}. That was hard wired for
 the purpose at hand. The version here provides much more flexibility.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\epigraph}\marg{text}\marg{source} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(epigraph)%
  {\cs{epigraph}\marg{text}\marg{source}}%
  {Typesets the \meta{text} and \meta{source} of an epigraph.}
 The command \cmd{\epigraph}  typesets
 an epigraph using \meta{text} as the main text of the epigraph and
 \meta{source} being the original author (or book, article, etc.)
 of the quoted text. By default the epigraph is placed at the right hand 
 side of the typeblock\index{typeblock}, and the \meta{source} is typeset at the bottom
 right of the \meta{text}.


\begin{syntax}
\senv{epigraphs}  \\
  \cmd{\qitem}\marg{text}\marg{source} \\
  ... \\
\eenv{epigraphs} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(epigraphs)%
  {\senv{epigraphs}}%
  {Environment for several epigraphs.}
\glossary(qitem)%
  {\cs{qitem}\marg{text}\marg{source}}%
  {Typesets the \meta{text} and \meta{source} of an epigraph in an 
   \texttt{epigrpahs} environment.}
 The \Ie{epigraphs} environment typesets a list of epigraphs, and by default
 places them at the right hand side of the typeblock\index{typeblock}.
  Each epigraph in an \Ie{epigraphs} environment is specified by a 
 \cmd{\qitem} (analagous to the \cmd{\item}
 command in ordinary list environments).
 By default, the \meta{source} is typeset at the bottom right of the
 \meta{text}. 

 
 \section{General}

 \tepi{Example is the school of mankind, and they will learn at no other.}
      {\textit{Letters on a Regicide Peace}\\ \textsc{Edmund Burke}}

   The commands described in this section apply to both the \cmd{\epigraph}
command and the \Ie{epigraphs} environment. But first of all, note that an
epigraph immediately after a heading\index{heading} will cause the 
first paragraph\index{paragraph!indentation}
of the following text to be indented. If you want the initial paragraph
to have no indentation, then start it with the \cmd{\noindent} command.

\begin{syntax}
  \lnc{\epigraphwidth} \\
 \cmd{\epigraphposition}\marg{flush} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(epigraphwidth)%
  {\cs{epigraphwidth}}%
  {Textwidth for epigraphs.}
\glossary(epigraphposition)%
  {\cs{epigraphposition}\marg{flush}}%
  {Sets the horizontal placement of epigraphs.}
  The epigraphs are typeset in a minipage of width \lnc{\epigraphwidth}. 
The default value for this can be changed using the \cmd{\setlength} command. 
Typically,  epigraphs are typeset in a measure much less than the width of 
the typeblock\index{typeblock}. The horizontal position of an epigraph
in relation to the main typeblock is controlled by 
the \meta{flush} argument to the \cmd{\epigraphposition} declaration.
The default value is \texttt{flushright}, so that epigraphs are set
at the right hand side of the typeblock. This can be changed
to \texttt{flushleft} for positioning at the left hand side or to
\texttt{center} for positioning at the center of the 
typeblock\index{typeblock}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\epigraphtextposition}\marg{flush} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(epigraphtextposition)%
  {\cs{epigraphtextposition}\marg{flush}}
  {Sets the justification for epigraph text.}
 In order to avoid bad line breaks, the epigraph \meta{text} is normally 
typeset raggedright. 
    The \meta{flush} argument to the \cmd{\epigraphtextposition} 
declaration controls the \meta{text} typesetting style. By default this is 
\texttt{flushleft} (which produces raggedright text). The sensible values
are \texttt{center} for centered text, \texttt{flushright} for raggedleft
text, and \texttt{flushleftright} for normal justified text.

    If by any chance you want the \meta{text} to be typeset in some
other layout style, the easiest
way to do this is by defining a new environment which sets the paragraphing
parameters to your desired values. For example, as the \meta{text} is
typeset in a minipage, there is no paragraph indentation. If you
want the paragraphs to be indented and justified then define
a new environment like:
\begin{lcode}
\newenvironment{myparastyle}{\setlength{\parindent}{1em}}{}
\end{lcode}
 and use it as: 
\begin{lcode}
\epigraphtextposition{myparastyle}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\epigraphsourceposition}\marg{flush} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(epigraphsourceposition)%
  {\cs{epigraphsourceposition}\marg{flush}}%
  {Sets the placement of the source within an epigraph.}
 The \meta{flush} argument to the \cmd{\epigraphsourceposition}
declaration controls the position 
of the \meta{source}.
 The default value is \texttt{flushright}. It can be changed to
 \texttt{flushleft}, \texttt{center} or \texttt{flushleftright}.

 For example, to have epigraphs centered with the \meta{source} at the left,
 add the following to your document.
 \begin{lcode}
 \epigraphposition{center}
 \epigraphsourceposition{flushleft}
 \end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\epigraphfontsize}\marg{fontsize} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(epigraphfontsize)%
  {\cs{epigraphfontsize}\marg{fontsize}}%
  {Font size to be used for epigraphs.}
 Epigraphs are often typeset in a smaller font than the main text. The
\meta{fontsize} argument to the \cmd{\epigraphfontsize}
declaration sets the font size to be used.
 If you don't like the default value (\cmd{\small}), you can easily change
it to, say \cmd{\footnotesize} by:
\begin{lcode}
\epigraphfontsize{\footnotesize}
\end{lcode}
		
\begin{syntax}
 \lnc{\epigraphrule} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(epigraphrule)%
  {\cs{epigraphrule}}%
  {Thickness of the rule drawn between the text and source of an epigraph.}
 By default, a rule is drawn between the \meta{text} and \meta{source},
 with the rule thickness being given by the value of \lnc{\epigraphrule}.
 The value can be changed by using \cmd{\setlength}.
 A value of \texttt{0pt} will eliminate the rule. Personally, I dislike
 the rule in the list environments.

\begin{syntax}
 \lnc{\beforeepigraphskip} \\
 \lnc{\afterepigraphskip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(beforeepigraphskip)%
  {\cs{beforeepigraphskip}}%
  {Vertical space before an epigraph.}
\glossary(afterepigraphskip)%
  {\cs{afterepigraphskip}}%
  {Vertical space after an epigraph.}
 The two \verb?...skip? commands specify the amount of vertical space inserted
 before and after typeset epigraphs. Again, these can be changed by
 \cmd{\setlength}. It is desireable that the sum of their values should be an 
 integer multiple of the \lnc{\baselineskip}.

 Note that you can use normal LaTeX commands in the \meta{text} and
 \meta{source} arguments. You may wish to use different fonts for the
 \meta{text} (say roman) and the \meta{source} (say italic).

 The epigraph at the start of this section was specified as:
 \begin{lcode}
 \epigraph{Example is the school of mankind,
           and they will learn at no other.}
  {\textit{Letters on a Regicide Peace}\\ \textsc{Edmund Burke}}
 \end{lcode}

 \section{Epigraphs before chapter headings}

\begingroup
 \epigraphsourceposition{flushleft}
 \tepi{If all else fails, immortality can always be assured by spectacular
       error.}
      {\textsf{John Kenneth Galbraith}}
\endgroup

    The \cmd{\epigraph} command and the \Ie{epigraphs} environment typeset
 an epigraph at the point in the text where they are placed. The
 first thing that a \cmd{\chapter} command does is to start off a new page,
 so another mechanism is provided for placing an epigraph just before
 a chapter heading\index{heading!chapter}.
    
\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\epigraphhead}\oarg{distance}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(epigraphhead)%
  {\cs{epigraphhead}\oarg{distance}\marg{text}}%
  {Stores \meta{text} for printing at \meta{distance} below the page header.}
  The \cmd{\epigraphhead} macro  stores \meta{text} 
 for printing at \meta{distance} below the header\index{header} on a page.
 \meta{text} can be ordinary text or, more likely, can be either an
 \cmd{\epigraph} command or an \Ie{epigraphs} environment. By default, the 
 epigraph will be typeset at the righthand margin\index{margin!right}.
 If the command is immediately preceded by a \cmd{\chapter} or \cmd{\chapter*} 
 command, the epigraph is typeset on the chapter title page.

    The default value for the optional \meta{distance} argument is set so
 that an \cmd{\epigraph} consisting of a single line of 
quotation\index{quotation} and a single
line denoting the source is aligned with the bottom of the `Chapter X'
line produced by the \cmd{\chapter} command using the \cstyle{default} 
chapterstyle. In other cases you will
have to experiment with the \meta{distance} value. The value for
\meta{distance} can be either a integer or a real number. The units
are in terms of the current value for \lnc{\unitlength}. A typical value
for \meta{distance} for a single line quotation\index{quotation} and 
source for a \cmd{\chapter*} might be about 70 (points). A positive value
of \meta{distance} places the epigraph below the page heading and a negative
value will raise it above the page heading.

    Here's some example code:
 \begin{lcode}
 \chapter*{Celestial navigation}
 \epigraphhead[70]{\epigraph{Star crossed lovers.}{\textit{The Bard}}}
 \end{lcode}
 The \meta{text} argument is put into a minipage of width \lnc{\epigraphwidth}.
 If you use something other than \cmd{\epigraph} or \Ie{epigraphs} for the
 \meta{text} argument, you may have to do some positioning of the text
 yourself so that it is properly located in the minipage. For example
 \begin{lcode}
 \chapter{Short}
 \renewcommand{\epigraphflush}{center}
 \epigraphhead{\centerline{Short quote}}
 \end{lcode}

 The \cmd{\epigraphhead} command changes the page style for the page on
 which it is specified, so there should be no text between the
\cmd{\chapter} and the \cmd{\epigraphhead} commands. The page style
is identical to the \pstyle{plain} page style except for the inclusion of
the epigraph.
    If you want a more fancy style for epigraphed chapters you will have
to do some work yourself.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\epigraphforheader}\oarg{distance}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\epigraphpicture} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(epigraphforheader)%
  {\cs{epigraphforheader}\oarg{distance}\marg{text}}%
  {Puts \meta{text} into a zero-sized picture (\cs{epigraphpicture})
   at the coordinate position (0, -meta{distance}).}
\glossary(epigraphpicture)%
  {\cs{epigraphpicture}}%
  {A zero-sized picture holding the result of \cs{epigraphforheader}.}
The \cmd{\epigraphforheader} macro takes the same arguments as
\cmd{\epigraphhead} but puts \meta{text} into a zero-sized picture at
the coordinate position \verb?(0,-<distance>)?; the macro 
\cmd{\epigraphpicture}
holds the resulting picture. This can then be used as part of a 
chapter pagestyle, as in
\begin{lcode}
\makepagestyle{mychapterpagestyle}
...
\makeoddhead{mychapterpagestyle}{}{}{\epigraphpicture}
\end{lcode}
    Of course the \meta{text} argument for \cs{epigraphforheader} need not
be an \cs{epigraph}, it can be arbitrary text.

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\dropchapter}\marg{length} \\
 \cmd{\undodrop} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(dropchapter)%
  {\cs{dropchapter}\marg{length}}%
  {Lowers subsequent chapter heads by \meta{length}.}
\glossary(undodrop)%
  {\cs{undodrop}}%
  {Following a \cs{dropchapter} restores subsequent chapter heads to their 
   normal position.}
 If a long epigraph is placed before a chapter title it is possible that the
 bottom of the epigraph may interfere with the chapter title. The command
 \cmd{\dropchapter} will lower any subsequent chapter titles by 
 \meta{length}; a negative \meta{length} will raise the titles.
 The command \cmd{\undodrop} restores subsequent chapter titles to their default
 positions. For example:
 \begin{lcode}
 \dropchapter{2in}
 \chapter{Title}
 \epigraphhead{long epigraph}
 \undodrop
 \end{lcode}

\index{epigraph|)}

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\cleartoevenpage}\oarg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cleartoevenpage)%
  {\cs{cleartoevenpage}\oarg{text}}%
  {Clears the current page and moves to the next verso page; the optional
   \meta{text} is put on the skipped page (if there is one).}
 On occasions it may be desirable to put something (e.g., an epigraph, a map,
 a picture) on the page facing the start
 of a chapter, where the something belongs to the chapter that is about to 
 start rather than the chapter that has just ended. In order to do this 
 in a document that is going to be printed
 doublesided, the chapter must start on an odd numbered page and the 
 pre-chapter material put on the immediately preceding even numbered page.
 The \cmd{\cleartoevenpage} command is like \cmd{\cleardoublepage} except
 that the page following the command will be an even numbered page, and the
 command takes an optional argument 
 which is applied to the skipped page (if any).

    Here is an example:
\begin{lcode}
 ... end previous chapter.
 \cleartoevenpage
 \begin{center}
 \begin{picture}... \end{picture}
 \end{center}
 \chapter{Next chapter}
\end{lcode}
 If the style is such that chapter headings\index{heading!chapter} are put at the top of the pages,
 then it would be advisable to include \verb?\thispagestyle{empty}? 
(or perhaps \texttt{plain})
 immediately after \cmd{\cleartoevenpage} to avoid a heading related to the
 previous chapter from appearing on the page. 

 If the something is like a figure\index{figure} with a numbered caption and the numbering
 depends on the chapter numbering, then the numbers have to be hand set (unless
 you define a special chapter command for the purpose). For example:
\begin{lcode}
 ... end previous chapter.
 \cleartoevenpage[\thispagestyle{empty}] % a skipped page to be empty
 \thispagestyle{plain}
 \addtocounter{chapter}{1} % increment the chapter number
 \setcounter{figure}{0}    % initialise figure counter
 \begin{figure}
 ...
 \caption{Pre chapter figure}
 \end{figure}

 \addtocounter{chapter}{-1} % decrement the chapter number
 \chapter{Next chapter}     % increments chapter & resets figure numbers
 \addtocounter{figure}{1}   % to account for pre-chapter figure
\end{lcode}
 

 \subsection{Epigraphs on book or part pages}

\index{epigraph|(}

    If you wish to put an epigraphs on \cmd{\book} or \cmd{\part}
pages you have to do a little more work than in other cases. This
is because these division commands do some page flipping before and
after typesetting the title.

   One method is to put the epigraph into the page header as for epigraphs
before \cmd{\chapter} titles. By suitable adjustments the epigraph can be
placed anywhere on the page, independently of whatever else is on the page.
     A similar scheme may be used for epigraphs on other kinds of pages. 
 The essential
 trick is to make sure that the \pstyle{epigraph} pagestyle is used for
 the page.
    For an epigraphed bibliography\index{bibliography} 
or index\index{index}, the macros \cmd{\prebibhook}
or \cmd{\preindexhook} can be appropriately modified to do this.

    The other method is to subvert the \cmd{\beforepartskip} command 
for epigraphs before the title, or the \cmd{\afterpartskip} command
for epigraphs after the title (or the equivalents for \cmd{\book} pages).

    For example:
\begin{lcode}
\let\oldbeforepartskip\beforepartskip % save definition
\renewcommand*{\beforepartskip}{%
  \epigraph{...}{...}% an epigraph
  \vfil}
\part{An epigraphed part}
...
\renewcommand*{\beforepartskip}{%
  \epigraph{...}{...}% another epigraph
  \vfil}
\part{A different epigraphed part}
...
\let\beforepartskip\oldbeforepartskip % restore definition
\part{An unepigraphed part}
...
\end{lcode}


\index{epigraph|)}

%#% extend
%#% extstart include poetry.tex

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-04-24 17:14:15 +0200 (Wed, 24 Apr 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 442 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%\clearpage
%\pagestyle{Ruled}
%%\chapterstyle{demo}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

\chapter{Poetry} \label{chap:verse}


    The typesetting of a poem should ideally be dependent on the
particular poem. Individual problems do not usually admit of a
general solution, so this manual and code should be used more
as a guide towards some solutions rather than providing a ready
made solution for any particular piece of verse.

    The doggerel used as illustrative material has been taken 
from~\cite{RUMOUR}.

    Note that for the examples in this section I have made no attempt
to do other than use the minimal \alltx\ capabilities; in particular
I have made no attempt to do any special page breaking so some stanzas
may cross onto the next page --- most undesireable for publication.

\index{verse|(}
\index{verse!typesetting environments|(}

    The standard \ltx\ classes provide the \Ie{verse} environment which 
is defined as a particular kind of list. Within the environment you 
use \cmd{\\}\index{verse!end a line} to end a line, 
and a blank line will end\index{verse!end a stanza}\index{stanza!end} a 
stanza. For example, here is the text of a single stanza poem:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\garden}{
I used to love my garden \\
But now my love is dead \\
For I found a bachelor's button \\
In black-eyed Susan's bed.
}
\end{lcode}
\newcommand{\garden}{
I used to love my garden \\
But now my love is dead \\
For I found a bachelor's button \\
In black-eyed Susan's bed.
}
When this is typeset as a normal \ltx\ paragraph\index{paragraph} 
(with no paragraph indentation), i.e.,
\begin{lcode}
\noident\garden
\end{lcode}
it looks like: \\[\baselineskip]
\garden{}

\vspace*{\onelineskip}

   Typesetting it within the \Ie{verse} environment produces:% \\[\baselineskip]

\begin{verse}\index[lines]{I used to love my garden}  
\garden
\end{verse}

%\ablankline

The stanza could also be typeset within the \Ie{alltt} environment, defined
in the standard \Lpack{alltt} package~\cite{ALLTT}, 
using a normal font and no \cmd{\\} line endings.
\begin{lcode}
\begin{alltt}\normalfont
I used to love my garden 
But now my love is dead 
For I found a bachelor's button 
In black-eyed Susan's bed.
\end{alltt}
\end{lcode}
which produces:

\begin{alltt}\normalfont
I used to love my garden 
But now my love is dead 
For I found a bachelor's button 
In black-eyed Susan's bed.
\end{alltt}

The \Ie{alltt} environment is like the \Ie{verbatim} environment except that
you can use LaTeX macros inside it. 
   In the \Ie{verse} environment long lines\index{verse!long lines}  
will be wrapped and indented
but in the \Ie{alltt} environment there is no indentation. 

Some stanzas have certain lines\index{verse!indent line} indented, 
often alternate ones. To
typeset stanzas like this you have to add your own spacing. For
instance:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{verse}
There was an old party of Lyme \\
Who married three wives at one time. \\
\hspace{2em} When asked: `Why the third?' \\
\hspace{2em} He replied: `One's absurd, \\
And bigamy, sir, is a crime.'
\end{verse}
\end{lcode}
is typeset as: 
\begin{verse}\index[lines]{There was an old party of Lyme}
There was an old party of Lyme \\
Who married three wives at one time. \\
\hspace{2em} When asked: `Why the third?' \\
\hspace{2em} He replied: `One's absurd, \\
And bigamy, sir, is a crime.'
\end{verse}
\vspace{\onelineskip}

Using the \Ie{alltt} environment you can put in the spacing via ordinary
spaces. That is, this:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{alltt}\normalfont
There was an old party of Lyme
Who married three wives at one time.
      When asked: `Why the third?' 
      He replied: `One's absurd, 
And bigamy, sir, is a crime.'
\end{alltt}
\end{lcode}
is typeset as

\begin{alltt}
\normalfont
There was an old party of Lyme
Who married three wives at one time.
      When asked: `Why the third?' 
      He replied: `One's absurd, 
And bigamy, sir, is a crime.'
\end{alltt}

More exotically you could use the TeX \cmd{\parshape} 
command\footnote{See the \btitle{\tx book} for how to use this.}:
\begin{lcode}
\parshape = 5 0pt \linewidth 0pt \linewidth 
              2em \linewidth 2em \linewidth 0pt \linewidth
\noindent There was an old party of Lyme \\
Who married three wives at one time. \\
When asked: `Why the third?' \\
He replied: `One's absurd, \\
And bigamy, sir, is a crime.' \par
\end{lcode}
which will be typeset as:

\vspace*{\onelineskip}

\parshape = 5 0pt \linewidth 0pt \linewidth 
              2em \linewidth 2em \linewidth 0pt \linewidth
\noindent There was an old party of Lyme \\
Who married three wives at one time. \\
When asked: `Why the third?' \\
He replied: `One's absurd, \\
And bigamy, sir, is a crime.' \par


\vspace*{\onelineskip}

   This is about as much assistance as standard \alltx\ provides, except
to note that in the \Ie{verse} environment the \cmd{\\*} version of \cmd{\\}
will prevent\index{verse!prevent page break} a following page break. 
You can also make judicious use
of the \cmd{\needspace} macro to keep things together.

\index{verse!typesetting environments|)}

   Some books of poetry, and especially anthologies, have two or more
indexes\index{index}\index{verse!multiple indexes}, one, say for the 
poem titles and another for the 
first lines, and maybe even a third for the poets' names. 
If you are not using \Lclass{memoir} then 
the \Lpack{index}~\cite{INDEX} and \Lpack{multind}~\cite{MULTIND}
packages provide support for multiple indexes\index{index!multiple} 
in one document.

%\clearpage
\section{Classy verse} 

    The code provided by the \Lclass{memoir} class is meant to help
with some aspects of typesetting poetry but does not, and cannot,
provide a comprehensive solution to all the requirements that
will arise.

    The main aspects of typesetting poetry that differ from typesetting
plain text are:
\begin{itemize}
\item Poems are usually visually centered\index{verse!centering} on the page.
\item Some lines\index{verse!indent line} are indented, and often there 
      is a pattern\index{verse!indent pattern} to the indentation.
\item When a line is too wide\index{verse!long line} for the page it is 
      broken and the
      remaining portion indented with respect to the original start
      of the line.
\end{itemize}
These are the ones that the class attempts to deal with.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{verse}\oarg{length} ... \eenv{verse} \\
\lnc{\versewidth} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(verse)%
  {\senv{verse}\oarg{length}}%
  {Environment for typesetting verse; if given the midpoint of \meta{length}
   is placed at the center of the typeblock measure.}
\glossary(versewidth)%
  {\cs{versewidth}}%
  {Scratch length, typically for use in verse typesetting.}
The \Ie{verse} environment provided by the class is an extension
of the usual LaTeX environment. The environment takes one optional
parameter, which is a length; for example \verb?\begin{verse}[4em]?.
You may have noticed that the earlier verse examples are all
near the left margin\index{margin!left}, whereas verses usually look better 
if they
are typeset about the center of the page. The length parameter,
if given, should be about the length of an average line, and then
the entire contents\index{verse!centering} will be typeset with the mid 
point of the length centered horizontally on the page.

The length \lnc{\versewidth} is provided as a convenience. It may be used,
for example, to calculate the length of a line of text for use
as the optional argument to the \Ie{verse} environment: 
\begin{lcode}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{This is the average line,}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\vleftmargin} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(vleftmargin)%
  {\cs{vleftmargin}}%
  {General verse indent from the left of the typeblock.}
In the basic \ltx\ \Ie{verse} environment the body of the verse is indented
from the left of the typeblock by an amount \lnc{\leftmargini}, as is the
text in many other environments based on the basic \ltx\ \Ie{list}
environment. For the class's version of \Ie{verse} the default indent
is set by the length \lnc{\vleftmargin} (which is initially set to
\lnc{leftmargini}). For poems with particularly long 
lines\index{verse!long line} it could perhaps be
advantageous to eliminate any general indentation by:
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\vleftmargin}{0em}
\end{lcode}
If necessary the poem could even be moved into the left margin by giving
\lnc{\vleftmargin} a negative length value, such as -1.5em.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\stanzaskip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(stanzaskip)%
  {\cs{stanzaskip}}%
  {Vertical space between verse stanzas.}
    The vertical space\index{stanza!space} between stanzas is the 
length \lnc{\stanzaskip}. It can be changed by the usual methods.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\vin} \\
\lnc{\vgap} \\
\lnc{\vindent} \\
\end{syntax}
The command \cmd{\vin} is shorthand for \verb?\hspace*{\vgap}? for use
at the start of an indented\index{verse!indent space} line of verse. 
The length \lnc{\vgap}
(initially 1.5em) can be changed by \cmd{\setlength} or \cmd{\addtolength}.
When a verse line\index{verse!long line} is too long to fit within the 
typeblock\index{typeblock} it is wrapped\index{verse!wrapped line indent} 
to the next line with an initial indent given by the value of the length
\lnc{vindent}. Its initial value is twice the default value of \lnc{\vgap}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\\}\oarg{length} \\
\cmd{\\*}\oarg{length} \\
\cmdprint{\\!}\oarg{length} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(\\)%
  {\Vprint{\\}\oarg{length}}%
  {Ends a verse line, and adds \meta{length} vertical space.}
\glossary(\\*)%
  {\Vprint{\\*}\oarg{length}}%
  {Ends a line while preventing a pagebreak, and adds \meta{length} vertical space.}
\glossary(\\!)
  {\Vprint{\\!}\oarg{length}}%
  {Ends a verse stanza, and adds \meta{length} vertical space.}

Each line in the \Ie{verse} environment, except possibly for the last line
in a stanza\index{stanza!last line}, 
must be ended by \cmd{\\}, which comes in several variants. In each variant
the optional \meta{length} is the vertical space to be left before the next
line. The \cmd{\\*} form prohibits a page 
break\index{stanza!prevent page break} after the line. 
The \pixslashbang\ form is to be used only for the last 
line\index{stanza!last line!numbering} in a stanza
when the lines are being numbered; this is because the line 
numbers\index{line number} are incremented by the \cmd{\\} macro. 
It would normally be followed by a blank line.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\verselinebreak}\oarg{length} \\
\cmdprint{\\>}\oarg{length} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(verselinebreak)
  {\cs{verselinebreak}\oarg{length}}%
  {Makes a break in a verse line, indenting the next part by twice \cs{vgap},
   or by \meta{length} if it is given.}
\glossary(\\>)
  {\Vprint{\\>}\oarg{length}}%
  {Shorthand for \cs{verselinebreak}.}
Using \cmd{\verselinebreak} will cause later\index{stanza!line break}
text in the line to be typeset 
indented\index{stanza!line break!indent} on the following line. 
If the optional \meta{length} is not given
the indentation is twice \lnc{\vgap}, otherwise it is \meta{length}.
The broken line will count as a single line as far as the \Ie{altverse}
and \Ie{patverse} environments are concerned. The macro \cmd{\\>} is
shorthand for \cmd{\verselinebreak}, and unlike other members of the \cmd{\\}
family the optional \meta{length} is the indentation of the following 
partial\index{stanza!line break!indent} line, not a vertical skip. 
Also, the \cmd{\\>} macro does not increment any 
line number\index{line number}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\vinphantom}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(vinphantom)%
  {\cs{vinphantom}\marg{text}}%
  {Leaves a space as wide as \meta{text}.}
Verse lines are sometimes indented according to the space taken by
the text on the previous line. The macro \cmd{\vinphantom} can be used
at the start of a line\index{verse!indent space} to give an indentation 
as though the
line started with \meta{text}. For example here are a few lines from
the portion of \textit{Fridthjof's Saga} where Fridthjof and Ingeborg part:
\begin{egsource}{eg:fridthjof}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{Nay, nay, I leave thee not, 
                         thou goest too}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
\ldots \\* 
His judgement rendered, he dissolved the Thing. \\*
\flagverse{Ingeborg} And your decision? \\*
\flagverse{Fridthjof} \vinphantom{And your decision?} 
                      Have I ought to choose? \\*
Is not mine honour bound by his decree? \\*
And that I will redeem through Angantyr \\*
His paltry gold doth hide in Nastrand's flood. \\*
Today will I depart. \\*
\flagverse{Ingeborg} \vinphantom{Today will I depart.} 
                     And Ingeborg leave? \\*
\flagverse{Fridthjof} Nay, nay, I leave thee not, 
                      thou goest too. \\*
\flagverse{Ingeborg} Impossible! \\*
\flagverse{Fridthjof} \vinphantom{Impossible!} 
                      O! hear me, ere thou answerest.
\end{verse}
\end{egsource}

\begin{egresult}[Phantom text in verse]{eg:fridthjof}%
\settowidth{\versewidth}{Nay, nay, I leave thee not, 
                         thou goest too}%
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
\ldots\index[lines]{His judgement rendered, he dissolved the Thing} \\*
His judgement rendered, he dissolved the Thing. \\*
\flagverse{Ingeborg} And your decision? \\*
\flagverse{Fridthjof} \vinphantom{And your decision?} 
                      Have I ought to choose? \\*
Is not mine honour bound by his decree? \\*
And that I will redeem through Angantyr \\*
His paltry gold doth hide in Nastrand's flood. \\*
Today will I depart. \\*
\flagverse{Ingeborg} \vinphantom{Today will I depart.} 
                      And Ingeborg leave? \\*
\flagverse{Fridthjof} Nay, nay, I leave thee not, 
                      thou goest too. \\*
\flagverse{Ingeborg} Impossible! \\*
\flagverse{Fridthjof} \vinphantom{Impossible!} 
                       O! hear me, ere thou answerest.
\end{verse}
\end{egresult}

    Use of \cmd{\vinphantom} is not restricted to the start of verse lines ---
it may be used anywhere in text to leave some some 
blank\index{blank space} space.
For example, compare the two lines below, which are produced by this code:
\begin{lcode}
   \noindent Come away with me and be my love --- Impossible. \\
Come away with me \vinphantom{and be my love} --- Impossible.
\end{lcode}
\noindent Come away with me and be my love --- Impossible. \\
          Come away with me \vinphantom{and be my love} --- Impossible.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\vleftofline}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(vleftofline)%
  {\cs{vleftofline}\marg{text}}%
  {`Hanging left' \meta{text} at the start of a verse line.}
A verse line may start with something, for example open quote marks, 
where it is desireable that it is ignored as far as the alignment of the
rest of the line is concerned\footnote{Requested by Matthew 
Ford\index{Ford, Matthew} who also provided the example text.} --- a sort
of `hanging left punctuation'. When it is put at the start of a line
in the \Ie{verse} environment the \meta{text} is typeset but ignored as 
far as horizontal indentation is concerned.
Compare the two examples.

\begin{egsource}{eg.joel1}
\noindent ``No, this is what was spoken by the prophet Joel:
\begin{verse}
``\,`\,``In the last days,'' God says, \\
``I will pour out my spirit on all people. \\
Your sons and daughters will prophesy, \\
\ldots \\
And everyone who calls \ldots ''\,'
\end{verse}
\end{egsource}

\begin{egresult}[Verse with regular quote marks]{eg.joel1}
\noindent ``No, this is what was spoken by the prophet Joel:
\begin{verse}
``\,`\,``In the last days,'' God says, \\
``I will pour out my spirit on all people. \\
Your sons and daughters will prophesy, \\
\ldots \\
And everyone who calls \ldots ''\,'
\end{verse}
\end{egresult}

\begin{egsource}{eg.joel2}
\noindent ``No, this is what was spoken by the prophet Joel:
\begin{verse}
\vleftofline{``\,`\,``}In the last days,'' God says, \\
\vleftofline{``}I will pour out my spirit on all people. \\
Your sons and daughters will prophesy, \\
\ldots \\
And everyone who calls \ldots ''\,'
\end{verse}
\end{egsource}

\begin{egresult}[Verse with hanging left quote marks]{eg.joel2}
\noindent ``No, this is what was spoken by the prophet Joel:
\begin{verse}
\vleftofline{``\,`\,``}In the last days,'' God says, \\
\vleftofline{``}I will pour out my spirit on all people. \\
Your sons and daughters will prophesy, \\
\ldots \\
And everyone who calls \ldots ''\,'
\end{verse}
\end{egresult}



\subsection{Indented lines}

Within the \Ie{verse} environment stanzas are normally separated by a 
blank line in the input. 

\begin{syntax}
\senv{altverse} ... \eenv{altverse} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(altverse)%
  {\senv{altverse}}%
  {Alternate lines in the stanza are indented.}
Individual stanzas within \Ie{verse} may, however, 
be enclosed in the \Ie{altverse}\index{stanza!indent alternate lines} 
environment. This has the effect of
indenting the 2nd, 4th, etc., lines of the stanza by the length \lnc{\vgap}.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{patverse} ... \eenv{patverse} \\
\senv{patverse*} ... \eenv{patverse*} \\
\cmd{\indentpattern}\marg{digits} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(patverse)%
  {\senv{patverse}}%
  {Stanza lines are indented according to the \cs{indentpattern};
   lines after the pattern is completed are not indented.}
\glossary(patverse*)%
  {\senv{patverse*}}%
  {Like \Pe{patverse} except that the pattern will keep repeating.}
\glossary(indentpattern)%
  {\cs{indentpattern}\marg{digits}}%
  {Stanza lines in \Pe{patverse} environment are indented according to
   the \meta{digits} pattern.}
As an alternative to the \Ie{altverse} environment, 
individual stanzas within the \Ie{verse} environment may be enclosed
in the \Ie{patverse} environment. Within this environment the indentation
of each line is specified by an indentation\index{stanza!indent pattern} 
pattern, which consists
of an array of digits, \(d_{1}\) to \(d_{n}\), and the \(n\)th line is
indented by \(d_{n}\) times \lnc{\vgap}. However, the first line is
not indented, irrespective of the value of \(d_{1}\).

    The indentation pattern for a \Ie{patverse} or \Ie{patverse*}
environment is specified
via the \cmd{\indentpattern} command, where \meta{digits} is a string
of digits (e.g., \texttt{3213245281}). With the \Ie{patverse}
environment, if the pattern is
shorter than the number of lines in the stanza, the trailing lines will
not be indented. However, in the \Ie{patverse*} environment the pattern
keeps repeating until the end of the stanza.

\subsection{Numbering}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\flagverse}\marg{flag} \\
\lnc{\vleftskip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(flagverse)%
  {\cs{flagverse}\marg{flag}}%
  {Used at the start of a verse line to put \meta{flag} distance
  \cs{vleftskip} before the start of the line.}
\glossary(vleftskip)%
  {\cs{vleftskip}}%
  {Space between the argument to \cs{flageverse} and \cs{flagverse}.}
Putting \cmd{\flagverse} at the start of a line will typeset \meta{flag},
for example the stanza\index{stanza!number} number,
ending at a distance \lnc{\vleftskip} before the line. The default for
\lnc{\vleftskip} is 3em.

The lines in a poem may be numbered.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\linenumberfrequency}\marg{nth} \\
\cmd{\setverselinenums}\marg{first}\marg{startat} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setverselinenums)%
  {\cs{setverselinenums}\marg{first}\marg{startat}}%
  {The first line of the following verse is number \marg{first} and the
   first printed line number should be \meta{startat}.}
The declaration \cmd{\linenumberfrequency}\marg{nth} will cause every 
\meta{nth} line\index{line number!frequency} 
of succeeding verses to be numbered. 
For example, 
\verb?\linenumberfrequency{5}?
will number every fifth line. The default is \verb?\linenumberfrequency{0}? 
which prevents any numbering. The \cmd{\setverselinenums} macro can be
used to specify that the number of the first line of the following \Ie{verse}
shall be \meta{first} and the first printed number shall be \meta{startat}.
For example, perhaps you are quoting part of a numbered poem. The original
numbers every tenth line but if your extract starts with line 7, then
\begin{lcode}
\linenumberfrequency{10}
\setverselinenums{7}{10}
\end{lcode}
is what you will need.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\thepoemline} \\
\cmd{\linenumberfont}\marg{font-decl} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(thepoemline)%
  {\cs{thepoemline}}%
  {The numeric representation of verse line numbers (default arabic).}
    The \Icn{poemline} counter is used in numbering the lines, so the
number representation is \cmd{\thepoemline}, which defaults to 
arabic numerals, and they are typeset using the font 
specified\index{line number!font}
via \cmd{\linenumberfont}; the default is 
\begin{lcode}
\linenumberfont{\small\rmfamily}
\end{lcode}
for small numbers in the roman font. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\verselinenumbersright} \\
\cmd{\verselinenumbersleft} \\
\lnc{\vrightskip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(verselinenumbersright)%
  {\cs{verselinenumbersright}}%
  {Following this declaration verse line numbers are set at the right of the
   verse lines.}
\glossary(verselinenumbersleft)%
  {\cs{verselinenumbersleft}}%
  {Following this declaration verse line numbers are set at the left of the
   verse lines.}
\glossary(vrightskip)
  {\cs{vrightskip}}%
  {Verse line numbers are set distance \cs{vrightskip} into the margin.}
Following the declaration
\cmd{\verselinenumbersright}, which is the default, any verse line numbers
will be set\index{line number!position} in the righthand margin. 
The \cmd{\verselinenumbersleft}
declaration will set any subsequent line numbers to the left of the lines.
The numbers are set at a distance
\lnc{\vrightskip} (default 1em) into the margin. 


\section{Titles}

    The \cmd{\PoemTitle} command is provided for typesetting titles
of poems.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\PoemTitle}\oarg{fortoc}\oarg{forhead}\marg{title} \\
\cmd{\NumberPoemTitle} \\
\cmd{\PlainPoemTitle} \\
\cmd{\thepoem} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(PoemTitle)%
  {\cs{PoemTitle}\oarg{fortoc}\oarg{forhead}\marg{title}}%
  {Typesets the title for a poem and puts it into the ToC.}
\glossary(NumberPoemTitle)%
  {\cs{NumberPoemTitle}}%
  {Declaration for \cs{PoemTitle} to be numbered.}
\glossary(PlainPoemTitle)%
  {\cs{PlainPoemTitle}}%
  {Declaration for \cs{PoemTitle} to be unnumbered.}
\glossary(thepoem)%
  {\cs{thepoem}}%
  {Typeset the current Poem Title number}%
The \cmd{\PoemTitle} command takes the same arguments as the 
\cmd{\chapter} command; it typesets the title for a poem\index{poem title} 
and adds it to the ToC\index{poem title!in ToC}. 
Following the declaration \cmd{\NumberPoemTitle}
the title is numbered but there is no numbering after the
\cmd{\PlainPoemTitle} declaration. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\poemtoc}\marg{sec} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(poemtoc)%
  {\cs{poemtoc}}%
  {Kind of entry for a \cs{PoemTitle} in the ToC.}
The kind of entry made in the \toc\ by\index{poem title!in ToC} 
\cmd{\PoemTitle} is defined by \cmd{\poemtoc}. The initial definition is: 
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\poemtoc}{section}
\end{lcode}
for a section-like \toc\ entry. This can be changed to, say, \texttt{chapter}
or \texttt{subsection} or \ldots.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\poemtitlemark}\marg{forhead} \\
\cmd{\poemtitlepstyle} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(poemtitlemark)%
  {\cs{poemtitlemark}\marg{forhead}}%
  {Used to set marks for a \cs{PoemTitle}.}
\glossary(poemtitlepstyle)%
  {\cs{poemtitlepstyle}}%
  {Page style for a \cs{PoemTitle}.}
    The macro \cmd{\poemtitlemark}
is called with the argument \meta{forhead} so that it may be used
to set marks for use in a page header via the normal mark process. 
The \cmd{\poemtitlepstyle}
macro, which by default does nothing, is provided as a hook so that,
for example, it can be redefined to specify a particular pagestyle that should
be used. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\poemtitlemark}[1]{\markboth{#1}{#1}}
\renewcommand*{\poemtitlepstyle}{%
  \pagestyle{headings}%
  \thispagestyle{empty}}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\PoemTitle*}\oarg{forhead}\marg{title} \\
\cmd{\poemtitlestarmark}\marg{forhead} \\
\cmd{\poemtitlestarpstyle} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(PoemTitle*)%
  {\cs{PoemTitle*}\oarg{fortoc}\oarg{forhead}\marg{title}}%
  {Typesets an unnumbered title for a poem but does not add it to the ToC.}
\glossary(poemtitlestarmark)%
  {\cs{poemtitlestarmark}\marg{forhead}}%
  {Used to set marks for a \cs{PoemTitle*}.}
\glossary(poemtitlestarpstyle)%
  {\cs{poemtitlestarpstyle}}%
  {Page style for a \cs{PoemTitle*}.}

    The \cmd{\PoemTitle*} command produces an unnumbered title that is
not added to the ToC. Apart from that it operates in the same manner
as the unstarred version. The \cmd{\poemtitlestarmark} and 
\cmd{\poemtitlestarpstyle} can be redefined to set marks and pagestyles.

\subsection{Main Poem Title layout parameters}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\PoemTitleheadstart} \\
\cmd{\printPoemTitlenonum} \\
\cmd{\printPoemTitlenum} \\
\cmd{\afterPoemTitlenum} \\
\cmd{\printPoemTitletitle}\marg{title} \\
\cmd{\afterPoemTitle} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(PoemTitleheadstart)%
  {\cs{PoemTitleheadstart}}%
  {Called at the start of typesetting a \cs{PoemTitle}.}
\glossary(printPoemTitlenum)%
  {\cs{printPoemTitlenum}}%
  {Typesets the number for a \cs{PoemTitle}.}
\glossary(printPoemTitlenonum)%
  {\cs{printPoemTitlenonum}}%
  {Used instead of \cs{printPoemTitlenum} for an unnumbered \cs{PoemTitle}.}
\glossary(afterPoemTitlenum)%
  {\cs{afterPoemTitlenum}}%
  {Called after printing the number of a \cs{PoemTitle}.}
\glossary(printPoemTitletitle)%
  {\cs{printPoemTitletitle}\marg{title}}%
  {Typesets the title of a \cs{PoemTitle}.}
\glossary(afterPoemTitle)%
  {\cs{afterPoemTitle}}%
  {Called after printing the title of a \cs{PoemTitle}.}


    The essence of the code used to typeset a numbered \meta{title} from
a \cmd{\PoemTitle} is:
\begin{lcode}
\PoemTitleheadstart
\printPoemTitlenum
\afterPoemTitlenum
\printPoemTitletitle{title}
\afterPoemTitle
\end{lcode}
If the title is unnumbered then \cmd{\printPoemTitlenonum} is used
instead of the \cmd{\printPoemTitlenum} and 
\cmd{\afterPoemTitlenum} pair of macros.

    The various elements of this can be modified to change the layout.
By default the number is centered above the title, which is also typeset 
centered, and all in a \cmd{\large} font.

    The elements are detailed in the next section.

\subsection{Detailed Poem Title layout parameters}

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\beforePoemTitleskip} \\
\cmd{\PoemTitlenumfont} \\
\lnc{\midPoemTitleskip} \\
\cmd{\PoemTitlefont} \\
\lnc{\afterPoemTitleskip} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(beforePoemTitleskip)%
  {\cs{beforePoemTitleskip}}%
  {Vertical space before a poem title.}
\glossary(midPoemTitleskip)%
  {\cs{midPoemTitleskip}}%
  {Vertical space between the number and text of a poem title.}
\glossary(afterPoemTitleskip)%
  {\cs{afterPoemTitleskip}}%
  {Vertical space after a poem title}
\glossary(PoemTitlenumfont)%
  {\cs{PoemTitlenumfont}}%
  {Font for the number of a poem title}
\glossary(PoemTitlefont)%
  {\cs{PoemTitlefont}}%
  {Font for the text of a poem title}


As defined, \cmd{\PoemTitleheadstart} inserts vertical space 
before a poem title. The default definition is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\PoemTitleheadstart}{\vspace{\beforePoemTitleskip}}
\newlength{\beforePoemTitleskip}
  \setlength{\beforePoemTitleskip}{1\onelineskip}
\end{lcode}

\cmd{\printPoemTitlenum} typesets the number for a poem title.
The default definition, below, prints the number centered and in
a large font.
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\printPoemTitlenum}{\PoemTitlenumfont \thepoem}
\newcommand*{\PoemTitlenumfont}{\normalfont\large\centering}
\end{lcode}

The definition of \cmd{\printPoemTitlenonum}, which is used
when there is no number, is simply
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\printPoemTitlenonum}{}
\end{lcode}

\cmd{\afterPoemTitlenum} is called between setting the number 
and the title. It ends a paragraph (thus making sure any previous
\cmd{\centering} is used) and then may add some vertical
space. The default definition is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\afterPoemTitlenum}{\par\nobreak\vskip \midPoemTitleskip}
\newlength{\midPoemTitleskip}
  \setlength{\midPoemTitleskip}{0pt}
\end{lcode}

The default definition of \cmd{\printPoemTitletitle} is below.
It typesets the title centered and in a large font.
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\printPoemTitletitle}[1]{\PoemTitlefont #1}
\newcommand*{\PoemTitlefont}{\normalfont\large\centering}
\end{lcode}

The macro \cmd{\afterPoemTitle} finishes off the title 
typesetting. The default definition is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\afterPoemTitle}{\par\nobreak\vskip \afterPoemTitleskip}
\newlength{\afterPoemTitleskip}
  \setlength{\afterPoemTitleskip}{1\onelineskip}
\end{lcode}



%\clearpage
\section{Examples}

   Here are some sample verses using the class facilities.

First a Limerick, but titled\index{poem title} and centered:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\poemtoc}{subsection}
\PlainPoemTitle
\PoemTitle{A Limerick}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{There was a young man of Quebec}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
There was a young man of Quebec \\
Who was frozen in snow to his neck. \\
\vin When asked: `Are you friz?' \\
\vin He replied: `Yes, I is, \\
But we don't call this cold in Quebec.'
\end{verse}
\end{lcode}
which gets typeset as below. The \cmd{\poemtoc} is redefined
to \texttt{subsection} so that the \cmd{\poemtitle} titles
are entered\index{poem title!in ToC} into the \toc\ as 
subsections. The titles will not be numbered because of the
\cmd{\PlainPoemTitle} declaration.

\renewcommand{\poemtoc}{subsection}
\PlainPoemTitle
\PoemTitle{A Limerick}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{There was a young man of Quebec}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth] \index[lines]{There was a young man of Quebec}
There was a young man of Quebec \\
Who was frozen in snow to his neck. \\
\vin When asked: `Are you friz?' \\
\vin He replied: `Yes, I is, \\
But we don't call this cold in Quebec.'
\end{verse}

\vspace{\onelineskip}
%\ablankline

    Next is the Garden verse within the \Ie{altverse} environment. Unlike
earlier renditions this one is titled\index{poem title} and centered. 
\begin{lcode}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{But now my love is dead}
\PoemTitle{Love's lost}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
\begin{altverse}
\garden
\end{altverse}
\end{verse}
\end{lcode}
Note how the alternate lines\index{stanza!indent alternate lines} 
are automatically indented in the typeset result below.

\settowidth{\versewidth}{But now my love is dead}
\PoemTitle{Love's lost}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]\index[lines]{I used to love my garden}
\begin{altverse}
\garden
\end{altverse}
\end{verse}

\vspace{\onelineskip}
% \ablankline

It is left up to you how you might want to add information about
the author\index{poem!author} of a poem. Here is one example of a 
macro for this:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\attrib}[1]{%
   \nopagebreak{\raggedleft\footnotesize #1\par}}
\end{lcode}
\providecommand{\attrib}[1]{%
   \nopagebreak{\raggedleft\footnotesize #1\par}}

   This can be used as in the next bit of doggerel.
\begin{lcode}
\PoemTitle{Fleas}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{What a funny thing is a flea}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
What a funny thing is a flea. \\
You can't tell a he from a she. \\
But he can. And she can. \\
Whoopee!
\end{verse}
\attrib{Anonymous}
\end{lcode}

\PoemTitle{Fleas}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{What a funny thing is a flea}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]\index[lines]{What a funny thing is a flea}
What a funny thing is a flea. \\
You can't tell a he from a she. \\
But he can. And she can. \\
Whoopee!
\end{verse}
\attrib{Anonymous}

\vspace{\onelineskip}
%\ablankline

The next example demonstrates the automatic line wrapping for 
overlong\index{stanza!long line} lines.
\begin{lcode}
\PoemTitle{In the beginning}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{And objects at rest tended to 
                         remain at rest}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
Then God created Newton, \\
And objects at rest tended to remain at rest, \\
And objects in motion tended to remain in motion, \\
And energy was conserved
   and momentum was conserved
   and matter was conserved \\
And God saw that it was conservative.
\end{verse}
\attrib{Possibly from \textit{Analog}, circa 1950}
\end{lcode}

%%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
\PoemTitle{In the beginning}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{And objects at rest tended to remain at rest}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]\index[lines]{Then God created Newton}
Then God created Newton, \\
And objects at rest tended to remain at rest, \\
And objects in motion tended to remain in motion, \\
And energy was conserved
   and momentum was conserved
   and matter was conserved \\
And God saw that it was conservative.
\end{verse}
\attrib{Possibly from \textit{Analog}, circa 1950}

\vspace{\onelineskip}
%\ablankline

The following verse demonstrates the use of a forced\index{stanza!line break} 
linebreak; I have
used the \cmd{\\>} command instead of the more descriptive,
but discursive, \cmd{\verselinebreak}. It also
has a slightly different title\index{poem title!styling} style.
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\PoemTitlefont}{%
              \normalfont\large\itshape\centering}
\poemtitle{Mathematics}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{Than Tycho Brahe, or Erra Pater:}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
In mathematics he was greater \\
Than Tycho Brahe, or Erra Pater: \\
For he, by geometric scale, \\
Could take the size of pots of ale;\\ 
\settowidth{\versewidth}{Resolve by}%
Resolve, by sines \\>[\versewidth] and tangents straight, \\
If bread or butter wanted weight; \\
And wisely tell what hour o' the day \\
The clock does strike, by Algebra.
\end{verse}
\attrib{Samuel Butler (1612--1680)}
\end{lcode}

%%\clearpage

\renewcommand{\PoemTitlefont}{\normalfont\large\itshape\centering}
\PoemTitle{Mathematics}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{Than Tycho Brahe, or Erra Pater:}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]\index[lines]{In mathematics he was greater}
In mathematics he was greater \\
Than Tycho Brahe, or Erra Pater: \\
For he, by geometric scale, \\
Could take the size of pots of ale;\\ 
\settowidth{\versewidth}{Resolve by}%
Resolve, by sines \\>[\versewidth] and tangents straight, \\
If bread or butter wanted weight; \\
And wisely tell what hour o' the day \\
The clock does strike, by Algebra.
\end{verse}
\attrib{Samuel Butler (1612--1680)}

\vspace{\onelineskip}
%\ablankline
%\clearpage

Another limerick, but this time taking advantage of 
the \Ie{patverse}\index{verse!indent pattern}
environment. If you are typesetting a series of limericks 
a single \cmd{\indentpattern} will do for all of them.
\begin{lcode}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{There was a young lady of Ryde}
\indentpattern{00110}
\needspace{7\onelineskip}
\PoemTitle{The Young Lady of Ryde}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
\begin{patverse}
There was a young lady of Ryde \\
Who ate some apples and died. \\
The apples fermented \\
Inside the lamented \\
And made cider inside her inside.
\end{patverse}
\end{verse}
\end{lcode}
Note that I used the \cmd{\needspace} command to ensure that 
the limerick will not get broken across a page.

\settowidth{\versewidth}{There was a young lady of Ryde}
\indentpattern{00110}
\needspace{7\onelineskip}
\PoemTitle{The Young Lady of Ryde}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]\index[lines]{There was a young lady of Ryde}
\begin{patverse}
There was a young lady of Ryde \\
Who ate some apples and died. \\
The apples fermented \\
Inside the lamented \\
And made cider inside her inside.
\end{patverse}
\end{verse}

\vspace{\onelineskip}


    The next example is a song you may have heard of. This uses 
\cmd{\flagverse} for labelling\index{stanza!number} the stanzas, 
and because the lines are numbered\index{line number} they can be referred to. 

\begin{lcode}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{In a cavern, in a canyon,}
\PoemTitle{Clementine}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
\linenumberfrequency{2}
\begin{altverse}
\flagverse{1.} In a cavern, in a canyon, \\
Excavating for a mine, \\
Lived a miner, forty-niner, \label{vs:49} \\
And his daughter, Clementine. \\!
\end{altverse}

\begin{altverse}
\flagverse{\textsc{chorus}} Oh my darling, Oh my darling, \\
Oh my darling Clementine. \\
Thou art lost and gone forever, \\
Oh my darling Clementine.
\end{altverse}
\linenumberfrequency{0}
\end{verse}
The `forty-niner' in line~\ref{vs:49} of the song
refers to the gold rush of 1849.
\end{lcode}

\settowidth{\versewidth}{In a cavern, in a canyon,}
\PoemTitle{Clementine}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]\index[lines]{In a cavern, in a canyon}
\linenumberfrequency{2}
\begin{altverse}
\flagverse{1.} In a cavern, in a canyon, \\
Excavating for a mine, \\
Lived a miner, forty-niner, \label{vs:49} \\
And his daughter, Clementine. \\!
\end{altverse}

\begin{altverse}
\flagverse{\textsc{chorus}} Oh my darling, Oh my darling, \\
Oh my darling Clementine. \\
Thou art lost and gone forever, \\
Oh my darling Clementine.
\end{altverse}
\linenumberfrequency{0}
\end{verse}

\vspace{\onelineskip}

The `forty-niner' in line~\ref{vs:49} of the song
refers to the gold rush of 1849.

%\ablankline

 The last example is a much more ambitious use\index{stanza!indent pattern} 
of \cmd{\indentpattern}. In
this case it is defined as: 
\begin{lcode}
\indentpattern{0135554322112346898779775545653222345544456688778899}
\end{lcode}
and the result is shown on the next page.


\clearpage
\PoemTitle{Mouse's Tale}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{a mouse that morning}
\indentpattern{0135554322112346898779775545653222345544456688778899}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]\index[lines]{Fury said to}
\setlength{\vgap}{1em}
\begin{patverse}
\large Fury said to \\
  a mouse, That \\
  he met \\
  in the \\
  house, \\
\normalsize `Let us \\
  both go \\
  to law: \\
  \emph{I} will \\
  prosecute \\
  \textit{you.} --- \\
  Come, I'll \\
\small take no \\
  denial; \\
  We must \\
  have a \\
  trial: \\
  For \\
\footnotesize really \\
  this \\
  morning \\
  I've \\
  nothing \\
  to do.' \\
  Said the \\
  mouse to \\
\scriptsize the cur, \\
  Such a \\
  trial, \\
  dear sir, \\
  With no \\
  jury or \\
  judge, \\
  would be \\
  wasting \\
  our breath.' \\
\tiny  `I'll be \\
  judge, \\
  I'll be \\
  jury.' \\
  Said \\
  cunning \\
  old Fury; \\
  `I'll try \\
  the whole \\
  cause \\
  and \\
  condemn \\
  you \\
  to \\
  death.'  \par
\end{patverse}
\end{verse}
\attrib{Lewis Carrol, \textit{Alice's Adventures in Wonderland}, 1865}


\index{verse|)}

%#% extend
%#% extstart include boxes-verbatims-and-files.tex

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-04-24 17:14:15 +0200 (Wed, 24 Apr 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 442 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%% membook


%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\chapter{Boxes, verbatims and files} \label{chap:bvf}\label{chap:boxes}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

    The title of this chapter indicates that it deals with three 
disconnected topics, but there is method in the seeming peculiarity.
By the end of the chapter you will be able to write \ltx\ code that
lets you put things in your document source at one place and have them
typeset at a different place, or places. For example, if you are writing
a text book that includes questions and answers then you could write 
a question and answer together yet have the answer typeset at the
end of the book. 

    Writing in one place and printing in another is based on outputting
stuff to a file\index{file!write} and then inputting 
it\index{file!read} for processing at another place 
or time. This is just how \ltx\ produces the \toc. It is often important
when writing to a file that \ltx\ does no processing of any macros, which
implies that we need to be able to write verbatim. One use of verbatim
in \ltx\ is to typeset computer code or the like, and to clearly
distinguish the code from the main text it is often typeset within a box.
Hence the chapter title.

    The class extends the kinds of boxes\index{box} normally provided, 
extends the default verbatims\index{verbatim}, and provides a simple means 
of writing\index{file!write} and reading\index{file!read} files.

    One problem with verbatims\index{verbatim!in argument} is that they 
can not be used as part of
an argument to a command. For example to typeset something in a 
framed\index{frame!minipage}
\Ie{minipage} the obvious way is to use the \Ie{minipage} as the argument
to the \cmd{\fbox} macro:
\begin{lcode}
\fbox{\begin{minipage}{6cm} 
      Contents of framed minipage 
      \end{minipage}}
\end{lcode}
This works perfectly well until the contents includes some verbatim
material, whereupon you will get nasty 
error\index{\cs{verb} illegal in command argument} messages. However this 
particular conundrum is solvable, even if the solution is not particularly
obvious. Here it is.

    We can put things into a box, declared via \cmd{\newsavebox}, and typeset
the contents of the box later via \cmd{\usebox}. The most common way
of putting things into a save box is by the \cmd{\sbox} or \cmd{\savebox}
macros, but as the material for saving is one of the arguments to these 
macros this approach fails. But, \Ie{lrbox} is an environment form of
\cmd{\sbox}, so it can handle verbatim material. The code below,
after getting a new save box, defines a new \Ie{framedminipage} 
environment\index{frame!minipage!verbatim} which is used just 
like the standard \Ie{minipage}. 
The \Ie{framedminipage} 
starts an \Ie{lrbox} environment and then
starts a \Ie{minipage} environment, after which comes the contents.
At the end it closes the two environments and calls \cmd{\fbox} with its
argument being the contents of the saved box \emph{which have already been
typeset}.
\begin{lcode}
\newsavebox{\minibox}
\newenvironment{framedminipage}[1]{%
  \begin{lrbox}{\minibox}\begin{minipage}{#1}}%
  {\end{minipage}\end{lrbox}\fbox{\usebox{\minibox}}}
\end{lcode}

\vspace{\onelineskip}
\noindent\textbf{Question 1.} Can you think of any improvements to
  the definition of the \Ie{framedminipage} environment?

\vspace{\onelineskip}
\noindent\textbf{Question 2.} An answer to question 1 is at the end of this
  chapter. Suggest how it was put there.



\section{Boxes}

\index{box!framed|(}
\index{frame!box|(}

    \ltx\ provides some commands to put a box round some text. The class
extends the available kinds of boxes.


\begin{syntax}
\senv{framed} text \eenv{framed} \\
\senv{shaded} text \eenv{shaded} \\
\senv{snugshade} text \eenv{snugshade} \\
%%%%%\cmd{\frameasnormaltrue} \cmd{\frameasnormalfalse} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(framed)%
  {\senv{framed}}%
  {Put a ruled box around the contents of the environment; the box can include
   pagebreaks.}
\glossary(shaded)%
  {\senv{shaded}}%
  {Put a colored background behind the contents of the environment, which
   can include pagebreaks. The color extends into the margins a little.}
\glossary(snugshade)%
  {\senv{snugshade}}%
  {Like \Pe{shaded} but does not bleed into the margins.}
The \Ie{framed}, \Ie{shaded}, and \Ie{snugshade}  
environments, which were created by Donald Arseneau\index{Arseneau, Donald} 
as part of his \Lpack{framed} package~\cite{FRAMED},
put their contents
into boxes\index{box!include pagebreak} that break across pages. 
The \Ie{framed} environment delineates
the box by drawing a rectangular frame. If there is a pagebreak in
the middle of the box, frames are drawn on both pages.

    The \Ie{shaded} environment typesets the box with a 
shaded\index{box!shaded background} or
colored background. This requires the use of the \Lpack{color} 
package~\cite{COLOR}, which is one of the required \ltx\ packages,
or the \Lpack{xcolor} package~\cite{XCOLOR}.
The shading color is \texttt{shadecolor}, which you have to define before
using the environment. For
example, to have a light gray background:
\begin{lcode}
\definecolor{shadecolor}{gray}{0.9}
\end{lcode}
For complete information on this see the documentation for the
\Lpack{color} or \Lpack{xcolor} packages, or one of the \ltx\ books like the
\textit{Graphics Companion}~\cite{GCOMPANION}.
In the \Ie{snugshaded} environment the box clings more closely to its
contents than it does in the \Ie{shaded} environment.

%%    Following the declaration \cmd{\frameasnomaltrue}, which is the
%default, normal paragraphing is used for the framed text. On the
%%other hand, following the declaration \cmd{\frameasnormalfalse}
%the paragraphing follows the \Ie{minipage} style layout (i.e.,
%%no indentation of the first line).

    Be aware that these boxes are somewhat delicate; they do not work
in all circumstances. For example they will not work with the
\Lpack{multicol} package~\cite{MULTICOL}, and any floats or footnotes
in the boxes will disappear.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\FrameRule} \lnc{\FrameSep} \lnc{\FrameHeightAdjust} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(FrameRule)%
  {\cs{FrameRule}}%
  {Thickness of the rules around an \Pe{framed} environment.}
\glossary(FrameSep)%
  {\cs{FrameSep}}%
  {Separation between the surrounding box and text in a \Pe{framed} or
   \Pe{shaded} environment.}
\glossary(FrameHeightAdjust)%
  {\cs{FrameHeightAdjust}}%
  {Height of the top of a frame in a \Pe{framed} environment
  above the baseline at the top of a page.}
The \Ie{framed} environment puts the text into an `\cmd{\fbox}' with
the settings:
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\FrameRule}{\fboxrule}
\setlength{\FrameSep}{3\fboxsep}
\end{lcode}
The macro \cmd{\FrameHeightAdjust} specifies the height of the top of the frame
above the baseline at the top of a page; its initial definition is:
\begin{lcode}
\providecommand*{\FrameHeightAdjust}{0.6em}
\end{lcode}

\index{frame!box!styling}
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\MakeFramed}\marg{settings} \cmd{\endMakeFramed} \\
\cmd{\FrameCommand} \cmd{\FrameRestore} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(MakeFramed)%
  {\cs{MakeFramed}\marg{settings}}%
  {The \Pe{MakeFramed} environment is the workhorse for the
   \Pe{framed}, \Pe{shaded}, etc., environments.
   The \meta{settings} argument controls the final appearance and
   should include a \cs{FrameRestore} to reset things back to normal.}
\glossary(endMakeFramed)%
  {\cs{endMakeFramed}}%
  {Ends the \Pe{MakeFramed} environment.}
\glossary(FrameCommand)%
  {\cs{FrameCommand}}%
  {Draws a `frame'.}
\glossary(FrameRestore)%
  {\cs{FrameRestore}}%
  {Restores settings after a `frame'.}
Internally, the environments are specified using the \Ie{MakeFramed}
environment. The \meta{setting} should contain any adjustments to the 
text width
(applied to \lnc{\hsize} and using the \lnc{\width} of the frame itself)
and a `restore' command, which is normally the provided \cmd{\FrameRestore}
macro. The frame itself is drawn via the 
\cmd{\FrameCommand}, which can be changed to obtain other boxing styles. The
default definition equates to an \cmd{\fbox} and is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\FrameCommand}{%
  \setlength{\fboxrule}{\FrameRule}\setlength{\fboxsep}{\FrameSep}%
  \fbox}
\end{lcode}
For example, the \Ie{framed}, \Ie{shaded} and \Ie{snugshade} environments 
are defined as
\begin{lcode}
\newenvironment{framed}{% % uses default \FrameCommand
  \MakeFramed{\advance\hsize -\width \FrameRestore}}%
  {\endMakeFramed}
\newenvironment{shaded}{% % redefines \FrameCommand as \colorbox
  \def\FrameCommand{\fboxsep=\FrameSep \colorbox{shadecolor}}%
  \MakeFramed{\FrameRestore}}%
  {\endMakeFramed}
\newenvironment{snugshade}{% A tight version of shaded
  \def\FrameCommand{\colorbox{shadecolor}}%
  \MakeFramed{\FrameRestore\@setminipage}}%
  {\par\unskip\endMakeFramed}
\end{lcode}

    If you wanted a narrow, centered, framed\index{frame!narrow box} 
environment you could do something like this:
\begin{lcode}
\newenvironment{narrowframed}{%
  \MakeFramed{\setlength{\hsize}{22pc}\FrameRestore}}%
  {\endMakeFramed}
\end{lcode}
where \texttt{22pc} will be the width of the new framed environment.


\begin{syntax}
\senv{leftbar} text \eenv{leftbar} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(leftbar)%
  {\senv{leftbar}}%
  {Draws a thick vertical line in the left margin alongside the contents 
   of the environment.}

The \Ie{leftbar} environment draws a thick vertical line at the 
left\index{rule!in margin} of the text. It is defined as
\begin{lcode}
\newenvironment{leftbar}{%
  \def\FrameCommand{\vrule width 3pt \hspace{10pt}}%
  \MakeFramed{\advance\hsize -\width \FrameRestore}}%
  {\endMakeFramed}
\end{lcode}

    By changing the \meta{setting} for \cmd{\MakeFramed} and the
definition of \cmd{\FrameCommand} you can obtain a variety of framing
styles. For instance, to have rounded corners to the 
frame\index{frame!rounded corners} instead of
the normal sharp ones, you can use the \Lpack{fancybox} 
package~\cite{FANCYBOX} and the following code:
\begin{lcode}
\usepackage{fancybox}
\newenvironment{roundedframe}{%
  \def\FrameCommand{%
    \cornersize*{20pt}%
    \setlength{\fboxsep}{5pt}%
    \ovalbox}%
  \MakeFramed{\advance\hsize-\width \FrameRestore}}%
  {\endMakeFramed}
\end{lcode}

\index{frame!title|(}
     A framed environment is normally used to distinguish its contents
from the surrounding text. A title for the environment may be useful, and
if there was a pagebreak in the middle, a title on the continuation could
be desireable. Doing this takes a bit more work than I have shown so far.
This first part was inspired by a posting to \ctt\ by 
Donald Arseneau\index{Arseneau, Donald}.\footnote{On 2003/10/24 in the thread
\textit{framed.sty w/heading?}. The particulars are no longer applicable as 
the framing code in question then has since been revised.}.
\PWnote{2009/06/25}{Rewrote section and code for titled frames.}
\begin{comment}
This first part is from a posting to \ctt\ by 
Donald Arseneau\index{Arseneau, Donald}.\footnote{On 2003/10/24 in the thread
\textit{framed.sty w/heading?}}.

\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\FrameTitle}[2]{%
  \fboxrule=\FrameRule \fboxsep=\FrameSep
  \fbox{\vbox{\nobreak \vskip -0.7\FrameSep
    \rlap{\strut#1}\nobreak\nointerlineskip% left justified
    \vskip 0.7\FrameSep
    \hbox{#2}}}}
\newenvironment{framewithtitle}[2][\FrameFirst@Lab\ (cont.)]{%
  \def\FrameFirst@Lab{\textbf{#2}}%
  \def\FrameCont@Lab{\textbf{#1}}%
  \def\FrameCommand##1{%
    \FrameTitle{\FrameCurrent@Lab}{##1}%
    \global\let\FrameCurrent@Lab\FrameNext@Lab
    \global\let\FrameNext@Lab\FrameCont@Lab
  }%
  \global\let\FrameCurrent@Lab\FrameFirst@Lab
  \global\let\FrameNext@Lab\FrameFirst@Lab
  \MakeFramed{\advance\hsize-\width \FrameRestore}}%
  {\endMakeFramed}
\end{lcode}
\end{comment}

\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\FrameTitle}[2]{%
  \fboxrule=\FrameRule \fboxsep=\FrameSep
  \fbox{\vbox{\nobreak \vskip -0.7\FrameSep
    \rlap{\strut#1}\nobreak\nointerlineskip% left justified
    \vskip 0.7\FrameSep
    \hbox{#2}}}}
\newenvironment{framewithtitle}[2][\FrameFirst@Lab\ (cont.)]{%
  \def\FrameFirst@Lab{\textbf{#2}}%
  \def\FrameCont@Lab{\textbf{#1}}%
  \def\FrameCommand##1{%
    \FrameTitle{\FrameFirst@Lab}{##1}}%
  \def\FirstFrameCommand##1{%
    \FrameTitle{\FrameFirst@Lab}{##1}}%
  \def\MidFrameCommand##1{%
    \FrameTitle{\FrameCont@Lab}{##1}}%
  \def\LastFrameCommand##1{%
    \FrameTitle{\FrameCont@Lab}{##1}}%
  \MakeFramed{\advance\hsize-\width \FrameRestore}}%
  {\endMakeFramed}
\end{lcode}

The \Ie{framewithtitle} environment, which is the end goal of this
exercise, acts like the \Ie{framed} environment except that it puts
a left-justified title just after the top of the frame box and before the
regular contents.
\begin{syntax}
\senv{framewithtitle}\oarg{cont-title}\marg{title} text \\
 \eenv{framewithtitle} \\
\end{syntax}
The \meta{title} is set in a bold font. If the optional \meta{cont-title}
argument is given then \meta{cont-title} is used as the title on
any suceeding pages, otherwise the phrase `\meta{title} (cont.)' is used
for the continuation title.

    If you would like the titles centered, replace the line 
marked `left justified' in the code for \cmd{\FrameTitle} with the line:
\begin{lcode}
\rlap{\centerline{\strut#1}}\nobreak\nointerlineskip% centered
\end{lcode}

    The code for the \Ie{frametitle} environment is not obvious. The difficulty
in creating the environment was that the underlying framing code goes through
the `stuff' to be framed by first trying to fit it all onto one page 
(\cs{FrameCommand}). If it does not fit, then it takes as much as will fit
and typesets that using \cs{FirstFrameCommand}, then tries to typeset the 
remainder on the next page. If it all fits then it uses \cs{LastFrameCommand}.
If it doesn't fit, it typesets as much as it can using \cs{MidFrameCommand}, 
and then tries to set the remainder on the following page. The process repeats
until all has been set.

    If you would prefer to have the title at the top outside the frame the 
above code needs adjusting.
\begin{comment}
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\TitleFrame}[2]{%
  \fboxrule=\FrameRule \fboxsep=\FrameSep
  \vbox{\nobreak \vskip -0.7\FrameSep
    \rlap{\strut#1}\nobreak\nointerlineskip% left justified
    \vskip 0.7\FrameSep
    \noindent\fbox{#2}}}
\newenvironment{titledframe}[2][\FrameFirst@Lab\ (cont.)]{%
  \def\FrameFirst@Lab{\textbf{#2}}%
  \def\FrameCont@Lab{\textbf{#1}}%
  \def\FrameCommand##1{%
    \TitleFrame{\FrameCurrent@Lab}{##1}
    \global\let\FrameCurrent@Lab\FrameNext@Lab
    \global\let\FrameNext@Lab\FrameCont@Lab
  }%
  \global\let\FrameCurrent@Lab\FrameFirst@Lab
  \global\let\FrameNext@Lab\FrameFirst@Lab
  \MakeFramed{\hsize\textwidth
              \advance\hsize -2\FrameRule
              \advance\hsize -2\FrameSep
              \FrameRestore}}%
  {\endMakeFramed}
\end{lcode}
\end{comment}

\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\TitleFrame}[2]{%
  \fboxrule=\FrameRule \fboxsep=\FrameSep
  \vbox{\nobreak \vskip -0.7\FrameSep
    \rlap{\strut#1}\nobreak\nointerlineskip% left justified
    \vskip 0.7\FrameSep
    \noindent\fbox{#2}}}
\newenvironment{titledframe}[2][\FrameFirst@Lab\ (cont.)]{%
  \def\FrameFirst@Lab{\textbf{#2}}%
  \def\FrameCont@Lab{\textbf{#1}}%
  \def\FrameCommand##1{%
    \TitleFrame{\FrameFirst@Lab}{##1}}
  \def\FirstFrameCommand##1{%
    \TitleFrame{\FrameFirst@Lab}{##1}}
  \def\MidFrameCommand##1{%
    \TitleFrame{\FrameCont@Lab}{##1}}
  \def\LastFrameCommand##1{%
    \TitleFrame{\FrameCont@Lab}{##1}}
  \MakeFramed{\hsize\textwidth
              \advance\hsize -2\FrameRule
              \advance\hsize -2\FrameSep
              \FrameRestore}}%
  {\endMakeFramed}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\senv{titledframe}\oarg{cont-title}\marg{title} text \eenv{titledframe} \\
\end{syntax}
The \Ie{titledframe} environment is identical to \Ie{framewithtitle}
except that the title is placed just before the frame. Again, if
you would like a centered title, replace the line marked `left justified'
in \cmd{\TitleFrame} by
\begin{lcode}
\rlap{\centerline{\strut#1}}\nobreak\nointerlineskip% centered
\end{lcode}

    You can adjust the code for the \Ie{framewithtitle} and \Ie{titledframe}
environments to suit your own purposes, especially as they are not 
part of the class so you would have to type them in yourself anyway
if you wanted to use them, using whatever names you felt suitable.

\index{frame!title|)}

    The class provides two further environments in addition to those
from the \Lpack{framed} package.
\begin{syntax}
\senv{qframe} text \eenv{qframe} \\
\senv{qshade} text \eenv{qshade} \\
\end{syntax}

   When used within, say, a \Ie{quotation} environment, the \Ie{framed}
and \Ie{shaded} environments do not closely box the indented text. The
\Ie{qframe} and \Ie{qshade} environments do provide close 
boxing.\footnote{Donald Arseneau has said that he may put something similar
in a later version the \Ie{framed} package.}
The difference can be seen in the following \Ie{quotation}.

\begin{quotation}
This is the start of a \Ie{quotation} environment. It forms the basis showing
the difference between the \Ie{framed} and \Ie{qframe} environments.

\begin{qframe}
This is the second paragraph in the \Ie{quotation} environment and in turn it 
is within the \Ie{qframe} environment.
\end{qframe}

\begin{framed}
This is the third paragraph in the \Ie{quotation} environment and in turn it 
is within the \Ie{framed} environment.
\end{framed}

This is the fourth and final paragraph within the \Ie{quotation} environment
and is not within either a \Ie{qfame} or \Ie{framed} environment.
\end{quotation}

    If you want to put a frame inside an \Ie{adjustwidth} environment
then you may well find that \Ie{qframe} or \Ie{qshade} meet your
expections better than \Ie{framed} of \Ie{shaded}. Of course, it does
depend on what your expectations are.

\index{frame!box|)}
\index{box!framed|)}

\section{Long comments}

    The \% comment character can be used to comment out (part of) a
line of \tx\ code, but this gets tedious if you need to comment out
long chunks of code.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{comment} text to be skipped over \eenv{comment} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(comment)%
  {\senv{comment}}%
  {Skip over the environment.}
\index{comment out text}
As an extreme form of font changing, although it doesn't actually work that 
way, anything in a \Ie{comment} environment will not appear in the
document; effectively, \ltx\ throws it all away. This can be useful
to temporarily discard chunks of stuff instead of having to mark each line
with the \% comment character. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\newcomment}\marg{name} \\
\cmd{\commentsoff}\marg{name} \\
\cmd{\commentson}\marg{name} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(newcomment)%
  {\cs{newcomment}\marg{name}}%
  {Define a new comment environment called \meta{name}.}
\glossary(commentsoff)%
  {\cs{commentsoff}\marg{name}}%
  {Process contents of the \meta{name} comment environment.}
\glossary(commentson)%
  {\cs{commentson}\marg{name}}%
  {Skip contents of the \meta{name} comment environment.}
The class lets you define your own comment environment via the 
\cmd{\newcomment} command which defines a comment environment called
\meta{name}. In fact the class itself uses \verb?\newcomment{comment}? to
define the \Ie{comment} environment. A comment environment \meta{name}
may be switched off so that its contents are not ignored by using the
\cmd{\commentsoff} declaration. It may be switched on later by the
\cmd{\commentson} declaration. In either case \meta{name} must have
been previously declared as a comment environment via \cmd{\newcomment}.

    Suppose, for example, that you are preparing a draft document for 
review by some others and you want to include some notes for the reviewers.
Also, you want to include some private comments in the source for yourself.
You could use the \Ie{comment} environment for your private comments and
create another environment for the notes to the reviewers. These notes
should not appear in the final document. Your source might then look like:
\begin{lcode}
\newcomment{review}
\ifdraftdoc\else
  \commentsoff{review}
\fi
...
\begin{comment}
Remember to finagle the wingle!
\end{comment}
...
\begin{review}
\textit{REVIEWERS: Please pay particular attention to this section.}
\end{review}
...
\end{lcode}

    Comment environments cannot be nested, nor can they overlap. 
The environments in the code below will not work in the manner that might
be expected:
\begin{lcode}
\newcomment{acomment} \newcomment{mycomment}
\begin{comment}
  \begin{acomment} %% comments cannot be nested
  ...
  \end{acomment}
  ...
  \begin{mycomment}
  ...
\end{comment}
...
  \end{mycomment}  %% comments cannot overlap
\end{lcode}

    More encompassing \Ie{comment} environments are available if you
use Victor Eijkhout's \Lpack{comment} package~\cite{COMMENT}.


\section{Verbatims}

\index{verbatim|(}

    Standard \ltx\ defines the \cmd{\verb} and \cmd{\verb*} commands
for typesetting short pieces of text verbatim, short because they
cannot include a linebreak. For longer verbatim texts the
\Ie{verbatim} or \Ie{verbatim*} environments can be used. The star forms
indicate spaces in the verbatim text by outputing a \verb*? ? mark for 
each space. The class extends the standard verbatims in various ways.

\index{verbatim!short}
    If you have to write a lot of \cmd{\verb} text, as I have had to do for
this book, it gets tedious to keep on typing this sort of thing:
\verb?\verb!verbatim text!?. Remember that the character immediately after
the \cmd{\verb}, or \cmd{\verb*}, ends the verbatim processing.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\MakeShortVerb}\marg{backslash-char} \\
\cmd{\DeleteShortVerb}\marg{backslash-char} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(MakeShortVerb)%
  {\cs{MakeShortVerb}\marg{backslash-char}}%
  {Makes \meta{char} a shorthand for \cs{verb}\meta{char}.}
\glossary(DeleteShortVerb)%
  {\cs{DeleteShortVerb}\marg{backslash-char}}%
  {Returns \meta{char} to its normal meaning instead of being a shorthand 
   for \cs{verb}\meta{char}.}
The \cmd{\MakeShortVerb} macro takes a character preceded by a backslash
as its argument, say \verb?\!?, and makes that character equivalent to 
\verb?\verb!?. Using the character a second time will stop the verbatim 
processing.
Doing, for example \verb?\MakeShortVerb{\!}?, lets you then use 
\verb?!verbatim text!?
instead of the longer winded \verb?\verb!verbatim text!?. 

    You have to pick
as the short verb character one that you are unlikely to use; a good choice
is often the \verb?|? bar character as this rarely used in normal text.
This choice, though may be unfortunate if you want to have any tabulars with
vertical lines, as the bar character is used to specify those. The
\cmd{\DeleteShortVerb} macro is provided for this contingency; give it the
same argument as an earlier \cmd{\MakeShortVerb} and it will restore
the short verb character to its normal state.

    The \cmd{\MakeShortVerb} and \cmd{\DeleteShortVerb} macros come from the
\Lpack{shortvrb} package which is part of the \ltx\ base system, but I 
have found them so convenient that I added them to the class.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setverbatimfont}\marg{font-declaration} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setverbatimfont)%
  {\cs{setverbatimfont}\marg{fontspec}}%
  {Sets the font to be used for verbatim text.}
The default font\index{verbatim!changing font} for verbatims is the normal 
sized monospaced font. The declaration
\cmd{\setverbatimfont} can be used to specify a different font.
The class default is 
\begin{lcode}
\setverbatimfont{\normalfont\ttfamily}
\end{lcode}
To use a smaller version simply say 
\begin{lcode}
\setverbatimfont{\normalfont\ttfamily\small}
\end{lcode}

    A monospaced font is normally chosen as verbatim text is often used 
to present program code or typewritten text. If you want a more exotic
font, try this
\begin{lcode}
\setverbatimfont{\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{cmss}\selectfont}
\end{lcode}
and your verbatim text will then look like %%
\setverbatimfont{\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{cmss}\selectfont}
\begin{verbatim}
We are no longer using the boring old typewriter font
for verbatim text. We used the T1 encoding 
to make sure that characters that are often ligatures
like ``, or '', or ---, or <, or >, print as expected.
After this we will switch back to the default verbatim font via
\setverbatimfont{\normalfont\ttfamily}
\end{verbatim}
\setverbatimfont{\normalfont\ttfamily}
In the normal way of things with an OT1 fontencoding, 
typesetting the ligatures mentioned above
in the sans font produces: 
{\fontencoding{OT1}\fontfamily{cmss}\selectfont ligatures like ``, or '', or ---, or <, or >}, 
which is not what happens in the \cmd{\verbatim} environment.


\begin{syntax}
\senv{verbatim} anything \eenv{verbatim} \\
\senv{verbatim*} anything \eenv{verbatim*} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(verbatim)%
  {\senv{verbatim}}%
  {Typeset the contents verbatim.}
In the \Ie{verbatim} environment\footnote{This version of the \Ie{verbatim}
environment is heavily based on the \Lpack{verbatim} package~\cite{VERBATIM}
but does provide some extensions.}
 you can write anything you want (except
\eenv{verbatim}), and it will be typeset exactly as written. The \Ie{verbatim*}
environment is similar except, like with \cmd{\verb*}, spaces will be
indicated with a \verb*? ? mark.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\tabson}\oarg{number} \\
\cmd{\tabsoff} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(tabson)%
  {\cs{tabson}\oarg{number}}%
  {Set \meta{number} of spaces in a verbatim for a TAB character;
   default 4.}
\glossary(tabsoff)%
  {\cs{tabsoff}}%
  {Ignore extra TAB spaces in a verbatim.} 
\index{verbatim!with tab spaces}
The standard \Ie{verbatim} environment ignores any TAB characters; with
the class's environment after calling the \cmd{\tabson} declaration 
the environment will handle TAB characters. By default 4 spaces are used
to represent a TAB; the optional \meta{number} argument to the declaration
will set the number of spaces for a TAB to be \meta{number}.
Some folk like to use 8 spaces for a TAB, in which case they would need
to declare \verb?\tabson[8]?. Unremarkably, the declaration \cmd{\tabsoff}
switches off TABs. The class default is \cmd{\tabsoff}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\wrappingon} \\
\cmd{\wrappingoff} \\
\lnc{\verbatimindent} \\
\cmd{\verbatimbreakchar}\marg{char} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(wrappingon)%
  {\cs{wrappingon}}%
  {Wrap overlong verbatim lines.}
\glossary(wrappingoff)%
  {\cs{wrappingoff}}%
  {The normal behaviour of not wrapping overlong verbatim lines.}
\glossary(verbatimindent)%
  {\cs{verbatimindent}}%
  {Indent for wrapped overlong verbatim lines.}
\glossary(verbatimbreakchar)%
  {\cs{verbatimbreakchar}\marg{char}}%
  {Character indicating a verbatim line is being wrapped.}
As noted, whatever is written in a \Ie{verbatim} environment is output
just as written, even if lines are too long\index{verbatim!wrap long lines} 
to fit on the page. The
declaration \cmd{\wrappingon} lets the environment break lines so that they
do not overflow. The declaration \cmd{\wrappingoff} restores the normal
behaviour.

    The following is an example of how a wrapped verbatim line looks. In
the source the contents of the \Ie{verbatim} was written as a single line.
\wrappingon
\begin{verbatim}
This is an example of line wrapping in the verbatim environment. It is a single line in the source and the \wrappingon declaration has been used.
\end{verbatim}
\wrappingoff

   The wrapped portion of verbatim lines are indented from the left margin
by the length \lnc{\verbatimindent}. The value can be changed by the usual
length changing commands. The end of each line that has been wrapped is marked
with the \meta{char} character of the \cmd{\verbatimbreakchar} macro.
The class default is \verb?\verbatimbreakchar{\char`\%}?, so that lines are 
marked with \verb?%?.
To put a `/' mark at the end of wrapped lines you can do
\begin{lcode}
\setverbatimbreak{\char'\/}
\end{lcode}
or similarly if you would like another character. Another possibility
is
\begin{lcode}
\setverbatimchar{\char'\/\char'\*}
\end{lcode}
which will make `/*' the end marker.

\subsection{Boxed verbatims}

    Verbatim environments are often used to present program code or, as
in this book, \ltx\ code. For such applications it can be useful to
put the code in a box, or to number the code lines, or perhaps both.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{fboxverbatim} anything \eenv{fboxverbatim} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(fboxverbatim)%
  {\senv{fboxverbatim}}%
  {Puts a frame around the verbatim material. Page breaks are not allowed.}
The \Ie{fboxverbatim} environment\index{frame!verbatim}\index{verbatim!frame} 
typesets its contents verbatim and
puts a tightly fitting frame around the result; in a sense it is similar
to the \cmd{\fbox} command.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{boxedverbatim} anything \eenv{boxedverbatim} \\
\senv{boxedverbatim*} anything \eenv{boxedverbatim*} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(boxedverbatim)%
  {\senv{boxedverbatim}}%
  {May put a box around the verbatim material; lines may be numbered and page
   breaks are allowed.}
\glossary(boxedverbatim*)%
  {\senv{boxedverbatim*}}%
  {May put a box around the verbatim* material; lines may be numbered and page
   breaks are allowed.}
The \Ie{boxedverbatim} and \Ie{boxedverbatim*} environments are like
the \Ie{verbatim} and \Ie{verbatim*} environments except that a box,
allowing page breaks, may be put around the verbatim text and the lines
of text\index{line number} may be numbered.\index{boxed verbatim}\index{numbered lines}
The particular format of the output can be 
controlled as described below.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bvbox} \cmd{\bvtopandtail} \cmd{\bvsides} \cmd{\nobvbox} \\
\lnc{\bvboxsep} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(bvbox)%
  {\cs{bvbox}}%
  {Rectangular boxes will be drawn for \Pe{boxedverbatim} environments.}
\glossary(nobvbox)%
  {\cs{nobvbox}}%
  {\Pe{boxedverbatim} environments will not be framed in any way.}
\glossary(bvtopandtail)%
  {\cs{bvtopandtail}}%
  {Draw horizontal rules before and after \Pe{boxedverbatim} environments.}
\glossary(bvsides)%
  {\cs{bvsides}}%
  {Draw vertical rules on each side of \Pe{boxedverbatim} environments.}
\glossary(bvboxsep)%
  {\cs{bvboxsep}}%
  {Separation between text and framing in \Pe{boxedverbatim} environments.}
Four styles of boxes are provided and you can extend these. Following
the \cmd{\bvbox} declaration, a box is drawn round the verbatim text, breaking
at page boundaries if necessary; this is the default style. Conversely,
no boxes are drawn after the \cmd{\nobvbox} declaration. With the
\cmd{\bvtopandtail} declaration horizontal lines are drawn at the start and 
end of the verbatim text, and with the \cmd{\bvsides} declarations, vertical
lines are drawn at the left and right of the text. The separation between
the lines and the text is given by the length \lnc{\bvboxsep}.

    The following hooks are provided to set your own 
boxing\index{frame!verbatim!styling}\index{verbatim!frame!styling} style.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bvtoprulehook} \cmd{\bvtopmidhook} \cmd{\bvendrulehook} \\
\cmd{\bvleftsidehook} \cmd{\bvrightsidehook} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(bvtoprulehook)%
  {\cs{bvtoprulehook}}%
  {Called at the start of a \Pe{boxedverbatim} environment and after a pagebreak.}
\glossary(bvtopmidhook)%
  {\cs{bvtopmidhook}}%
  {Called after \cs{bvtoprulehook} at the start of a \Pe{boxedverbatim} environment.}
\glossary(bvendrulehook)%
  {\cs{bvendrulehook}}%
  {Called at the end of a \Pe{boxedverbatim} environment, and before a pagebreak.}
\glossary(bvleftsidehook)%
  {\cs{bvleftsidehook}}%
  {Called before each line in a \Pe{boxedverbatim} environment.}
\glossary(bvrightsidehook)%
  {\cs{bvrightsidehook}}%
  {Called after each line in a \Pe{boxedverbatim} environment.}
The macros \cmd{\bvtoprulehook} and \cmd{\bvendrulehook} are called at
the start and end of the \Ie{boxedverbatim} environment, and before and after
page breaks. The macros
\cmd{\bvleftsidehook} and \cmd{\bvrightsidehook} are called at the start
and end of each verbatim line. The macro \cmd{\bvtopmidhook} is
called after \cmd{\bvtoprulehook} at the start of the environment.
It can be used to add some space if \cmd{\bvtoprulehook} is empty.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bvperpagetrue} \cmd{\bvperpagefalse} \\
\cmd{\bvtopofpage}\marg{text} \cmd{\bvendofpage}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(bvperpagetrue)%
  {\cs{bvperpagetrue}}%
  {Visibly break a \Pe{boxedverbatim} at a page break using \cs{bvtopofpage}
   and \cs{bvendofpage}.}
\glossary(bvperpagefalse)%
  {\cs{bvperpagefalse}}%
  {Do not mark page breaks in a \Pe{boxedverbatim}.}
\glossary(bvtopofpage)%
  {\cs{bvtopofpage}\marg{text}}%
  {Use \meta{text} as the \Pe{boxedverbatim} page break marker at the top of 
   a page.}
\glossary(bvendofpage)%
  {\cs{bvendofpage}\marg{text}}%
  {Use \meta{text} as the \Pe{boxedverbatim} page break marker at the bottom 
   of a page.}
The command \cmd{\bvperpagetrue} indicates
that a box should be visibly broken at a pagebreak, while there should
be no visible break for \cmd{\bvperpagefalse}. 
If the box continues on to another page then it may be advantageous
to place some sort of heading before the verbatim continues. Following
the declaration \cmd{\bvperpagetrue} the \meta{text} argument to
\cmd{\bvtopofpage} will be typeset after any pagebreak. For example you
could set:
\begin{lcode}
\bvtopofpage{continued}
\end{lcode}
to print `continued' in the normal text font. 

By default, the class sets
\begin{lcode}
\bvendofpage{\hrule\kern-.4pt}
\end{lcode}
which causes the \cmd{\hrule} to be drawn at the end of a page as the
visible break (the rule is 0.4pt thick and the kern backs up
that amount after the rule, so it effectively takes no vertical space).
This is not always suitable. For instance, if there will be
a `continued' message at the top of the following page it may seem odd
to draw a line at the bottom of the previous page. In this case, setting
\begin{lcode}
\bvendofpage{}
\end{lcode}
will eliminate the rule.

As examples of the use of
these hooks, here is how some of the boxed verbatim styles are defined.

The default style is \cmd{\bvbox}, 
which puts separate full boxes on each page. 
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\bvbox}{%
  \bvperpagetrue
  \renewcommand{\bvtoprulehook}{\hrule \nobreak \vskip-.1pt}%
  \renewcommand{\bvleftsidehook}{\vrule}%
  \renewcommand{\bvrightsidehook}{\vrule}%
  \renewcommand{\bvendrulehook}{\hrule}%
  \renewcommand{\bvtopmidhook}{\rule{0pt}{2\fboxsep} \hss}%
}
\end{lcode}
The \cmd{\nobvbox} turns off all boxing, and is defined as
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\nobvbox}{%
  \bvperpagefalse
  \renewcommand{\bvtoprulehook}{}%
  \renewcommand{\bvleftsidehook}{}%
  \renewcommand{\bvrightsidehook}{}%
  \renewcommand{\bvendrulehook}{}%
  \renewcommand{\bvtopmidhook}{\rule{0pt}{2\fboxsep} \hss}%
}
\end{lcode}
The definitions of the other styles, \cmd{\bvtopandtail} and \cmd{\bvsides},
are intermediate between \cmd{\bvbox} and \cmd{\nobvbox} in the obvious
manner.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\linenumberfrequency}\marg{nth} \\
\cmd{\resetbvlinenumber} \\
\cmd{\setbvlinenums}\marg{first}\marg{startat} \\
\cmd{\linenumberfont}\marg{font declaration} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(linenumberfrequency)%
  {\cs{linenumberfrequency}\marg{nth}}%
  {Number every \meta{nth} line in a \Pe{boxedverbatim} or a \Pe{verse}.}
\glossary(resetbvlinenumber)%
  {\cs{resetbvlinenumber}}%
  {Resets the \Pe{boxedverbatim} line number to zero.}
\glossary(setbvlinenums)%
  {\cs{setbvlinenums}\marg{first}\marg{startat}}%
  {The first line of the following \Pe{boxedverbatim} is number \marg{first} 
   and the
   first printed line number should be \meta{startat}.}
\glossary(linenumberfont)%
  {\cs{linenumberfont}\marg{fontspec}}%
  {Specify the font for line numbers.}

The command \cmd{\linenumberfrequency} controls the 
numbering\index{line number!frequency} of lines in
a \Ie{boxedverbatim} --- every \meta{nth} line will be numbered. 
If \meta{nth} is 0 or less, 
then no lines are numbered, if \meta{nth} is 1 then each line is numbered,
and if \meta{nth} is \texttt{n}, where \texttt{n} is 2 or more, then 
only every \texttt{n}th line is numbered. Line numbering is continuous 
from one instance
of the \Ie{boxedverbatim} environment to the next. Outside the environment
the line numbers\index{line number!reset} can be reset at any time by the 
command \cmd{\resetbvlinenumber}.

The \cmd{\setbvlinenums} macro can be
used to specify that the number of the first line of the following 
\Ie{boxedverbatim}
shall be \meta{first} and the first printed number shall be \meta{startat}.

The \cmd{\linenumberfont} declaration sets
\meta{font declaration} as the font\index{line number!font} for the 
line numbers. The default specification for this is:
\begin{lcode}
\linenumberfont{\footnotesize\rmfamily}
\end{lcode}
Line numbers\index{line number!position} are always set at the left of 
the lines because there
is no telling how long a line might be and it might clash with a line number
set at the right.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bvnumbersinside} \\
\cmd{\bvnumbersoutside} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(bvnumbersinside)%
  {\cs{bvnumbersinside}}%
  {Line numbers typeset inside a \Pe{boxedverbatim} box.}
\glossary(bvnumbersoutside)%
  {\cs{bvnumbersoutside}}%
  {Line numbers typeset outside a \Pe{boxedverbatim} box.}
Line numbers are typeset inside the box after the declaration 
\cmd{\bvnumberinside} and are typeset outside the box after the
declaration \cmd{\bvnumbersoutside}. The default is to print
the numbers inside the box.

    Verbatim tabbing, but not wrapping, applies to the \Ie{boxedverbatim}
environment.

\subsection{New verbatims}

\index{verbatim!new|(}
    The class implementation of verbatims lets you define your
own kind of verbatim environment. Unfortunately this is not quite
as simple as saying
\begin{lcode}
\newverbatim{myverbatim}{...}{...} 
\end{lcode}
as you can for defining normal environments. Instead, the general scheme
is
\begin{lcode}
\newenvironment{myverbatim}%
{<non-verbatim stuff> \verbatim <more non-verbatim stuff>}%
{\endverbatim}
\end{lcode}
In particular, you cannot use either the \cmd{\begin} or \cmd{\end}
macros inside the definition of the new verbatim environment. For example,
the following code will not work
\begin{lcode}
\newenvironment{badverbatim}%
  {NBG\begin{verbatim}}{\end{verbatim}}
\end{lcode}
and this won't work either
\begin{lcode}
\newenvironment{badverbatim}%
  {\begin{env}\verbatim}{\endverbatim\end{env}}
\end{lcode}
And, as with the standard \Ie{verbatim} environment, you cannot use
the new one in the definition of a new command.

    For an example of something that does work, this next little piece of 
typesetting was done in a new verbatim environment I have called 
\texttt{verbexami}, which starts and ends with a horizontal rule, and it
shows the definition of \texttt{verbexami}.
\newenvironment{verbexami}%
  {\par\noindent\hrule The verbexami environment \verbatim}%
  {\endverbatim\hrule}

\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
\begin{verbexami}
\newenvironment{verbexami}%
  {\par\noindent\hrule The verbexami environment \verbatim}%
  {\endverbatim\hrule}
\end{verbexami}
\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}

    And this is a variation on the theme, with the environment again being
enclosed by horizontal rules.
\newenvironment{verbexamii}%
  {\vspace{0.5\baselineskip}\hrule 
   \vspace{0.2\baselineskip} Verbexamii \verbatim \textsc{Is this fun?}}%
  {\endverbatim\hrule\vspace{0.3\baselineskip}}

\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}
\begin{verbexamii}
\newenvironment{verbexamii}%
  {\vspace{0.5\baselineskip}\hrule \vspace{0.2\baselineskip}
    Verbexamii \verbatim \textsc{Is this fun?}}%
  {\endverbatim\hrule\vspace{0.3\baselineskip}}
\end{verbexamii}
\vspace{0.5\onelineskip}

    As no doubt you agree, these are not memorable examples of
the typesetter's art but do indicate that you can define your own
verbatim environments and may need to take a bit of care to get something
that passes muster.

    I will give some more useful examples, but mainly based on environments
for writing verbatim files as I think that these provide a broader
scope. 


\subsection{Example: the \texttt{lcode} environment}

    In this manual all the example \ltx\ code has been typeset in
the \Ie{lcode} environment; this is a verbatim environment defined
especially for the purpose. Below I describe the
code for defining my \Ie{lcode} environment, but first here 
is a simple definition of a verbatim environment, which I will 
call \texttt{smallverbatim},
that uses the \cmd{\small} font\index{verbatim!font} instead of the 
normalsize font.
\begin{lcode}
\newenvironment{smallverbatim}%
  {\setverbatimfont{\normalfont\ttfamily\small}%
   \verbatim}%
  {\endverbatim}
\end{lcode}

    The \Ie{verbatim} environment is implemented as a kind of \Ie{trivlist},
and lists usually have extra vertical space before and after them. For
my environment I did not want any extra spacing\index{list!spaces} 
so I defined the
macro \cmd{\@zeroseps} to zero the relevant list spacings. I also wanted
the code lines to be inset a little, so I defined a new length
called \lnc{\gparindent} to use as the indentation.
\begin{lcode}
\makeatletter
\newcommand{\@zeroseps}{\setlength{\topsep}{\z@}%
                        \setlength{\partopsep}{\z@}%
                        \setlength{\parskip}{\z@}}
\newlength{\gparindent} \setlength{\gparindent}{\parindent}
\setlength{\gparindent}{0.5\parindent}
% Now, the environment itself
\newenvironment{lcode}{\@zeroseps
  \renewcommand{\verbatim@startline}{%
                \verbatim@line{\hskip\gparindent}}
  \small\setlength{\baselineskip}{\onelineskip}\verbatim}%
  {\endverbatim
   \vspace{-\baselineskip}%
  \noindent
 }
\makeatother
\end{lcode}

    Unless you are intimately familiar with the inner workings of the
\Ie{verbatim} processing you deserve an explanation of the \Ie{lcode}
definition.

    Extremely roughly, the code for \cmd{\verbatim} looks like this:
\begin{lcode}
\def\verbatim{%
  \verbatim@font
  % for each line, until \end{verbatim}
    \verbatim@startline 
    % collect the characters in \verbatim@line 
    \verbatim@processline{\the\verbatim@line\par}
    % repeat for the next line
}
\end{lcode}
The code first calls \cmd{\verbatim@font} to set the font to be used.
Then, for each line it does the following:
\begin{itemize}
\item Calls the macro \cmd{\verbatim@startline} to start
      off the output version of the line.
\item Collects all the characters comprising the line 
      as a single token called \cmd{\verbatim@line}.
\item If the characters are the string `\verb?\end{verbatim}?' it finishes
      the verbatim environment.
\item Otherwise it calls the macro \cmd{\verbatim@processline} whose 
      argument is the characters in the 
      line, treated as a paragraph. It then starts all over again with
      the next line.
\end{itemize}

    I configured the \cmd{\verbatim@startline}
macro to indent the line of text using a horizontal skip of \lnc{\gparindent}.
The rest of the initialisation code, before calling \cmd{\verbatim}
to do the real processing, just sets up the vertical spacing. 


\index{verbatim!new|)}

\index{verbatim|)}




\section{Files}

\index{file|(}

    \ltx\ reads and writes various files as it processes a document.
Obviously it reads the document source file, or files, and it writes
the \pixfile{log} file recording what it has done. It also reads and writes
the \pixfile{aux} file, and may read and write other files like a 
\pixfile{toc} file. 

    On occasions it can be useful to get \ltx\ to read and/or write 
other files of your own choosing. Unfortunately standard \ltx\ does
not provide any easy method for doing this. The \Mname\ class
tries to rectify this.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\jobname} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(jobname)%
  {\cs{jobname}}%
  {The name of the document's main source file.}
When you run \ltx\ on your source file, say \texttt{fred.tex}, \ltx\
stores the name of this file (\texttt{fred}) in the macro \cmd{\jobname}.
\ltx\ uses this to name the various files that it writes out --- the
\pixfile{dvi} or \pixfile{pdf} file, the \pixfile{log} file, the
\pixfile{aux} file, etc.

\index{stream|(}

    \tx\ can read from 16 input streams\index{stream!limited number} 
and can write to 16 output
streams. Normally an input stream\index{stream!input} is allocated for each 
kind of file that will be read\index{file!read} and an 
output\index{stream!output} stream for each kind of file that will
be written\index{file!write}. On the input side, then, at least two 
streams are allocated, one for the source \pixfile{tex} file and 
one for the \pixfile{aux} file. 
On the output side again at least two streams are allocated, one for 
the \pixfile{log} file and one for the \pixfile{aux} file. 
When \pixfile{toc} and other similar
files are also part of the \ltx\ process you can see that many of the
16 input and output streams may be allocated before you can get to use one
yourself.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\newoutputstream}\marg{stream} \\
\cmd{\newinputstream}\marg{stream} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(newoutputstream)%
  {\cs{newoutputstream}\marg{stream}}%
  {Creates a new output stream called \meta{stream}.}
\glossary(newinputstream)%
  {\cs{newinputstream}\marg{stream}}%
  {Creates a new input stream called \meta{stream}.}
The macros \cmd{\newoutputstream} and \cmd{\newinputstream} respectively
create a new output\index{stream!new output} and input\index{stream!new input} 
stream called \meta{stream}, where \meta{stream}
should be a string of alphabetic characters, like \texttt{myout} or 
\texttt{myin}.
The \meta{stream} names must be unique, you cannot use the same name 
for two streams even if one is a input stream and the other is an output 
stream. If all the 16 streams of the given type have already been allocated
\tx\ will issue a message telling you about this, of the form:%
\index{No room for a new write}\index{No room for a new read}
\begin{lcode}
No room for a new write   % for an output stream
No room for a new read    % for an input stream
\end{lcode}

    The two \cs{new...stream} commands also provide two empty macros called
\verb?\atstreamopen<stream>? and \verb?\atstreamclose<stream>?. 
If these macros already exist then they are left undisturbed. 
For example if you do:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\atstreamopenmyout}{...}
\newoutputstream{myout}
\newinputstream{myin}
\end{lcode}
Then you will find that three new commands have been created like:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\atstreamclosemyout}{}
\newcommand{\atstreamopenmyin}{}
\newcommand{\atstreamclosemyin}{}
\end{lcode}
You can use \cmd{\renewcommand} to change the definitions of these if you
wish.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\IfStreamOpen}\marg{stream}\marg{true-code}\marg{false-code} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(IfStreamOpen)%
  {\cs{IfStreamOpen}\marg{stream}\marg{yes}\marg{no}}%
  {If \meta{stream} is open then the \meta{yes} argument is processed
   otherwise the \meta{no} argument is processed.}
The macro \cmd{\IfStreamOpen} checks whether or not the \meta{stream}
stream\index{stream!check open} is open. If it is then 
the \meta{true-code} argument is processed,
while when it is not open the \meta{false-code} argument is processed.

\subsection{Writing to a file}

\index{file!write|(}

    One stream may be used for writing to several different files, although not
simultaneously.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\openoutputfile}\marg{filename}\marg{stream} \\
\cmd{\closeoutputstream}\marg{stream} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(openoutputfile)%
  {\cs{openoutputfile}\marg{filename}\marg{stream}}%
  {Attaches the file \meta{filename} to the output \meta{stream}.}
\glossary(closeoutputstream)%
  {\cs{closeoutputstream}\marg{stream}}%
  {Detaches and closes the file associated with the output \meta{stream}.}
The command \cmd{\openoutputfile} opens\index{file!open} the file 
called \meta{filename},
either creating it if it does not exist, or emptying it if it already exists.
It then attaches the file to the output\index{stream!output} 
stream called \meta{stream} so that
it can be written to, and then finally calls the macro 
named \verb?\atstreamopen<stream>?. 

    The command \cmd{\closeoutputstream} firstly calls the macro named
\verb?\atstreamclose<stream>? then closes\index{stream!close output} the
output stream \meta{stream}, and finally detaches and 
closes\index{file!close} the associated file.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\addtostream}\marg{stream}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(addtostream)%
  {\cs{addtostream}\marg{stream}\marg{text}}%
  {Adds \meta{text} to the file associated with the output \meta{stream}.}
The \cmd{\addtostream} command writes \meta{text} to the output stream
\meta{stream}, and hence to whatever file is currently attached to the
stream. The \meta{stream} must be open. Any commands within the \meta{text}
argument will be processed before being written. To prevent command
expansion, precede the command in question with \cmd{\protect}.

    Writing\index{file!write!verbatim} verbatim text to a file is 
treated specially as it is likely
to be the most common usage.
\begin{syntax}
\senv{verbatimoutput}\marg{file} anything \eenv{verbatimoutput} \\
\senv{writeverbatim}\marg{stream} anything \eenv{writeverbatim} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(verbatimoutput)%
  {\senv{verbatimoutput}\marg{file}}%
  {The contents of the environment are written verbatim to the \meta{file} 
   file, overwriting anything previously in the file.}
\glossary(writeverbatim)%
  {\senv{writeverbatim}\marg{stream}}%
  {The contents of the environment are written verbatim to the \meta{stream} 
   stream.}
The text within a \Ie{verbatimoutput} environment is written verbatim
to the \meta{file} file. Alternatively, the contents of the
\Ie{writeverbatim} environment are written verbatim to the \meta{stream} 
stream. 

    Specifically, \Ie{verbatimoutput} opens the specified file, writes
to it, and then closes the file. This means that if \Ie{verbatimoutput}
is used more than once to write to a given
file, then only the contents of the last of these outputs is captured 
in the file.
On the other hand, you can use \Ie{writeverbatim} several times to write
to the file attached to the stream and, providing the stream has not
been closed in the meantime, all will be captured.

\index{file!write|)}

\subsection{Reading from a file}

\index{file!read|(}

   One stream may be used for reading from several files, although not
simultaneously.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\openinputfile}\marg{filename}\marg{stream} \\
\cmd{\closeinputstream}\marg{stream} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(openinputfile)%
  {\cs{openinputfile}\marg{filename}\marg{stream}}%
  {Attaches the file \meta{filename} to the input \meta{stream}.}
\glossary(closeinputstream)%
  {\cs{closeinputstream}\marg{stream}}%
  {Detaches and closes the file associated with the input \meta{stream}.}
The command \cmd{\openinputfile} opens\index{file!open} the file 
called \meta{filename}
and attaches it to the input\index{stream!input} stream called 
\meta{stream} so that
it can be read from. Finally it calls the macro named 
\verb?\atstreamopen<stream>?.
It is an error if \meta{filename} can not be found.

    The command \cmd{\closeinputstream} calls the macro named
\verb?\atstreamclose<stream>?, closes\index{stream!close input} the
output stream \meta{stream}, and then detaches and closes\index{file!close} 
the associated file.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\readstream}\marg{stream} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(readstream)%
  {\cs{readstream}\marg{stream}}%
  {Reads the entire contents of the file associated with the input \meta{stream}.}
The command \cmd{\readstream} reads the entire contents of the file
currently associated with the input stream \meta{stream}. This
provides the same functionality as \cmd{\input}\marg{filename}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\readaline}\marg{stream} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(readaline)%
  {\cs{readaline}\marg{stream}}%
  {Reads a single line from the file associated with the input \meta{stream}.}
The \cmd{\readaline} reads\index{file!read!single line} what \tx\ 
considers to be one line from
the file that is currently associated with the input stream \meta{stream}.

Multiple lines can be read by calling \cmd{\readaline} multiple times.
A warning is issued if there are no more lines to be read (i.e., the
end of the file has been reached).

Just as for writing, reading files\index{file!read!verbatim} 
verbatim is treated specially.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\verbatiminput}\marg{file} \cmd{\verbatiminput*}\marg{file} \\
\cmd{\boxedverbatiminput}\marg{file} \cmd{\boxedverbatiminput*}\marg{file} \\
\cmd{\readverbatim}\marg{stream} \cmd{\readverbatim*}\marg{stream} \\
\cmd{\readboxedverbatim}\marg{stream} \cmd{\readboxedverbatim*}\marg{stream} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(verbatiminput)%
  {\cs{verbatiminput}\marg{file}}%
  {Acts like \Pe{verbatim} except the contents is read from the \meta{file} file.}
\glossary(verbatiminput*)%
  {\cs{verbatiminput*}\marg{file}}%
  {Acts like \Pe{verbatim*} except the contents is read from the \meta{file} file.}
\glossary(boxedverbatiminput)%
  {\cs{boxedverbatiminput}\marg{file}}%
  {Acts like \Pe{boxedverbatim} except the contents is read from the \meta{file} file.}
\glossary(boxedverbatiminput*)%
  {\cs{boxedverbatiminput*}\marg{file}}%
  {Acts like \Pe{boxedverbatim*} except the contents is read from the \meta{file} file.}
\glossary(readverbatim)%
  {\cs{readverbatim}\marg{stream}}%
  {Acts like \Pe{verbatim} except the contents is read from the file 
   associated with the input \meta{stream}.}
\glossary(readverbatim*)%
  {\cs{readverbatim*}\marg{stream}}%
  {Acts like \Pe{verbatim*} except the contents is read from the file 
   associated with the input \meta{stream}.}
\glossary(readboxedverbatim)%
  {\cs{readboxedverbatim}\marg{stream}}%
  {Acts like \Pe{boxedverbatim} except the contents is read from the file 
   associated with the input \meta{stream}.}
\glossary(readboxedverbatim*)%
  {\cs{readboxedverbatim*}\marg{stream}}%
  {Acts like \Pe{boxedverbatim*} except the contents is read from the file 
   associated with the input \meta{stream}.}
The commands \cmd{\verbatiminput} and 
\cmd{\boxedverbatiminput},\index{frame!verbatim}\index{verbatim!frame} 
 and their
starred versions, act like the \Ie{verbatim} and \Ie{boxedverbatim}
environments, except that they get their text from the \meta{file} file.
It is an error if \meta{file} cannot be found.
Similarly, \cmd{\readverbatim} and \cmd{\readboxedverbatim} get their
text from the file currently attached to the \meta{stream} input stream.
It is an error if \meta{stream} is not open for input.

\index{file!read|)}

\subsection{Example: endnotes}

\LMnote{2010/10/28}{It is confusing for users that the manual contain
  an example as to how one manual provide endnotes, when memoir
  actually provide the functionality in a later section.}
\index{endnotes}
\begin{itshape}
  In an earier version of the manual, this section contained an
  example as to how one could make endnotes. The example is now
  irrelevant, since \theclass\ contain something similar to end notes
  called page notes, see section~\ref{sec:endnotes} on
  page~\pageref{sec:endnotes}. 

  Those interested in the code from the old example, can find it in
  the manual source (it has just been commented out).
\end{itshape}

\begin{comment}
\index{endnotes|(}

    Books like biographies often quote sources for quotations by the subject,
or sources for statements of fact and so on, at the end of the book or chapter.
These are often like a collected set of footnotes. The example shows
a somewhat rough and ready approach to implementing endnotes.

    Typically endnotes come in one of two forms: they are like a normal
footnote, except that the note text is on another page, or; there is
no mark in the body of the text and the note is identified via a small
quote from the text and its page number. 
The example is for the footnote-like form and for endnotes collected
at the end of the document, with an appropriate heading to distinguish
notes from different chapters.

     We have to be careful in choosing names for the macros we will be
defining for endnotes. Remember, you cannot use \cmd{\newcommand}
to define a new command whose name starts \cs{end...}, so \cs{endnote} 
appears to be out.
However, the \tx\ primitive \cmd{\def} command does let you define
a command starting with \cs{end...}. The syntax of the \cmd{\def} command, 
like 
that of many of \tx\ macros, looks strange to \ltx\ eyes. The major
disadvantage in using \cmd{\def} is that it will merrily overwrite any
previous definition with the same name (the \ltx\ \cmd{\newcommand} won't
let you do that). I could use \cmd{\def} for an \cs{endnote} macro, like
\begin{lcode}
\long\def\endnote#1{...}
\end{lcode}
I won't do that, though, as there is at least one \ltx\ class that includes
a \texttt{note} environment and that means that \cs{endnote} is already defined
in that class. To avoid potential pitfalls like that I'll use \cs{enote}
rather than the more evocative \cs{endnote}.

    We need a new counter for the endnotes, starting afresh with each chapter,
and to print in arabic numerals. 
\begin{lcode}
\newcounter{enote}[chapter]
  \renewcommand{\theenote}{\arabic{enote}}
\end{lcode}
And we need a macro to typeset the text of the note. This will take two
arguments, the number of the note, and the text.
\begin{lcode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\enotetext}[2]{%
  \par\noindent \textsuperscript{#1} #2\par
      \vspace{\baselineskip}}
\end{lcode}
This makes sure that it starts a new non-indented paragraph, then typesets
the first argument (the number) as a superscript and then processes the
second argument (the text of the note). After that it makes sure that 
any paragraph is ended and puts some vertical space in case there is
another note following.

    The basic idea is to define a command, \cs{enote}\marg{text}, like
\cmd{\footnote}, that will write \meta{text} to a file\index{file!write} 
which will be read in later to typeset the \meta{text}. 

    To this end, we need an output stream, and we will use a file with 
extension \pixfile{ent}, the first
part of the file name being the name of the \ltx\ source file; this is
available via the \cmd{\jobname} macro.
\begin{lcode}
\newoutputstream{notesout}
  \openoutputfile{\jobname.ent}{notesout}
\newcommand{\printendnotes}{%
  \closeoutputstream{notesout}%
  \input{\jobname.ent}}
\end{lcode}
The \cmd{\printendnotes} macro can be called at the appropriate place in the
document to print any endnotes. It closes the output file and 
then inputs it\index{file!read} to print the endnotes.

    As well as putting the notes into the file we are also going to
add a heading indicating the chapter. Rather than invent a completely
new kind of heading I'll simply use \cmd{\subsection*} --- the starred
form so that there will be no \prtoc{} entry.
\begin{lcode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\enotehead}[1]{%
  \subsection*{Notes for chapter #1}}
\end{lcode}
The argument to the \cs{enotehead} macro is the number of a chapter. Also
needed is a method for determining when this heading should be added to 
the endnote file. One simple way is using a counter holding the chapter
number. Initialise the counter to something that is an invalid
chapter number.
\begin{lcode}
\newcounter{savechap}
  \setcounter{savechap}{-1000}
\end{lcode}

    We have the pieces ready, and all that remains is to define
the \cs{enote} macro, which will take one argument --- the text of the
note.
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\enote}[1]{%
  \refstepcounter{enote}%      increment the counter
  \textsuperscript{\theenote}% typeset it as a superscript
  \ifnum\value{savechap}=\value{chapter}\else % in a new chapter
    \setcounter{savechap}{\value{chapter}%      save the number
    \addtostream{notesout}{\enotehead{\thechapter}}% the heading
  \fi
  \addtostream{notesout}{\enotetext{\theenote}{#1}}}
\end{lcode}
\cs{enote}, which is used just like \cmd{\footnote}, increments the 
counter for endnotes, typesets that as a superscript, and then writes
the \cs{enotetext} command to the endnotes file. Entries in the \pixfile{ent}
file will look like:
\begin{lcode}
...
\enotehead{3}     % for chapter 3
\enotetext{1}{First end note in chapter 3.}
\enotetext{2}{The next end note.}
...
\end{lcode}

    You can try this, perhaps changing the definition of \cs{enotetext}
to give a better looking presentation of an endnote. There is, however,
a caveat if you use \cs{enote}. 

\vspace{\onelineskip}
\noindent\textbf{Question 3.} What is the caveat?

If you can't
think what it might be, don't worry as it will be dealt with in another
example. 

\index{endnotes|)}
\end{comment}

\subsection{Example: end floats}

\index{end floats|(}

    There are some documents where all figures are required to be grouped
in one place, for instance at the end of the document or perhaps at the
end of each chapter. Grouping at the end of a document with 
chapters is harder, so we'll tackle that one.

   The basic idea is to write out verbatim\index{verbatim!write} 
each figure environment and then read them all back in at the end. 
We will use a stream,\index{stream} let's call
it \texttt{tryout}, and call our file for figures \file{tryout.fig}.
\begin{lcode}
\newoutputstream{tryout}
\openoutputfile{tryout.fig}{tryout}
\end{lcode}

    If all were simple, in the document we could then just do
\begin{lcode}
\begin{writeverbatim}{tryout}
\begin{figure} ... \end{figure}
\end{writeverbatim}
...
\closeoutputstream{tryout}
\input{tryout.fig}
\end{lcode}

    So, what's the problem?

    By default figure captions are numbered per chapter, and are preceeded
by the chapter number; more precisely, the definition of a figure number
is 
\begin{lcode}
\thechapter.\arabic{figure}
\end{lcode}
If we simply lump all the figures at 
the end, then they
will all be numbered as if they were in the final chapter. 
For the sake of argument assume that the last chapter is number 10.
The nth figure will then be numbered 10.n.
One thing that we
can do rather simply is to change the definition of the figure by using
another counter, let's call it \texttt{pseudo}, instead of the chapter.
\begin{lcode}
\newcounter{pseudo}
  \renewcommand{\thepseudo}{\arabic{pseudo}}
\renewcommand{\thefigure}{\thepseudo.\arabic{figure}}
\end{lcode}
Now, all we should have to do is arrange that the proper value of 
\texttt{pseudo}
is available before each figure is typeset at the end. The code around
the \Ie{figure} environments might then look like this
\begin{lcode}
\addtostream{tryout}{\protect\setcounter{pseudo}{\thechapter}}
\begin{writeverbatim}{tryout}
\begin{figure}...
\end{lcode}
and a part of the file might then look like
\begin{lcode}
...
\setcounter{pseudo}{4}
\begin{figure}...
\end{lcode}
The \cmd{\protect} before the \cmd{\setcounter} command will stop it
from expanding before it is written to the file, while the \cmd{\thechapter}
command \emph{will} be expanded to give the actual number of the current 
chapter. This looks better as now at least the figure will be numbered 4.n 
instead of 10.n.

    There is one last snag --- figure numbers are reset at the start of each
chapter --- but if we just dump the figures at the end of the document
then although the chapter part of the number will alter appropriately
because of the \texttt{pseudo} process,
the second part of the number will just increase continuously. It looks
as though we should write out a change to the chapter counter at the start
of each chapter. If we do that, then we should be able to get rid of the
\texttt{pseudo} counter, which sounds good. But, and this is almost the 
last but,
what if there are chapters after we have read in the figure file? To
cater for this the chapter number of the last chapter before the file must
be saved, and then restored after the figures have been processed.

    Finally, wouldn't it be much better for the user if everything was
wrapped up in an environment that handled all the messy stuff?

    Here is the final code that I am going to produce which, by the way,
is displayed in the \Ie{boxedverbatim} environment\index{line number} 
with line numbers and the following settings, just in case there is
a page break in the middle of the box.
\begin{lcode}
\nobvbox
\bvperpagetrue
\bvtopofpage{\begin{center}\normalfont%
             (Continued from previous page)\end{center}}
\bvendofpage{}
\resetbvlinenumber
\linenumberfrequency{1}
\bvnumbersoutside
\linenumberfont{\footnotesize\rmfamily}
\begin{boxedverbatim}
...
\end{lcode}

\nobvbox
\bvperpagetrue
\bvtopofpage{\begin{center}\normalfont%
             (Continued from previous page)\end{center}}
\bvendofpage{}
\resetbvlinenumber
\linenumberfrequency{1}
\bvnumbersoutside
\linenumberfont{\footnotesize\rmfamily}
\begin{boxedverbatim}
\newoutputstream{tryout}
\openoutputfile{\jobname.fig}{tryout}
\newcounter{pseudo}
\renewcommand{\thefigure}{\thepseudo.\arabic{figure}}
\newenvironment{writefigure}{%
  \ifnum\value{chapter}=\value{pseudo}\else
    \setcounter{pseudo}{\value{chapter}}
    \addtostream{tryout}{\protect\stepcounter{chapter}}
    \addtostream{tryout}{\protect\addtocounter{chapter}{-1}}
    \addtostream{tryout}{%
      \protect\setcounter{pseudo}{\thechapter}}
  \fi
  \addtostream{tryout}{\protect\begin{figure}}
  \writeverbatim{tryout}}%
 {\endwriteverbatim\finishwritefigure}
\newcommand{\finishwritefigure}{%
  \addtostream{tryout}{\protect\end{figure}}}
\newcommand{\printfigures}{%
  \closeoutputstream{tryout}%
  \input{\jobname.fig}%
}
\end{boxedverbatim}
\linenumberfrequency{0}
    The above code should be either put in the preamble\index{preamble} 
or in a separate package\index{package} file.

   The first four lines of the code perform the initial setup described
earlier. Lines 1 and 2 set up for outputting\index{file!write} to a file 
\verb?\jobname.fig?, which
is where the figures will be collected. Lines 3 and 4 create the 
new counter\index{new!counter}
we need and change the construction of the figure number. The rest of the code
defines a new environment\index{new!environment} \Ie{writefigure} 
which is to be used instead 
of the \Ie{figure} environment. It writes its content out to the 
\texttt{tryout} stream.

    In line 6 a check is made to see if the current values of the 
\Icn{chapter} and \Icn{pseudo} counters are the same; 
nothing is done if they are. If they are
different, it means that this is the first figure in the chapter and we have
to put appropriate information into the figure file. Line 7 sets the
\Icn{pseudo} counter to the value of the \Icn{chapter} counter 
(if there is another \Ie{writefigure} in the chapter it will then 
skip over the code in lines 7 to 11).
The next lines put (where N is the number of the current chapter):
\begin{lcode}
\stepcounter{chapter}
\addtocounter{chapter}{-1}
\setcounter{pseudo}{N}
\end{lcode}
into the figure file. Stepping the chapter number (by one) resets the 
following figure number, and then subtracting one from the stepped number
returns the chapter number to its original value. 
Finally the counter \Icn{pseudo} is set to the number of the 
current chapter.

    Line 13 puts
\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
\end{lcode}
into the figure file, and line 14 starts the 
\Ie{writeverbatim}\index{verbatim!write} environment.

    For the end of the \Ie{writefigure} environment (line 15), the 
\Ie{writeverbatim} environment is ended and after that the 
\cmd{\finishwritefigure} macro
is called. This is defined in lines 16 and 17, and simply writes
\begin{lcode}
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}
out to the figure file. The \cmd{\endwriteverbatim}, and any other kind of
\cs{end...verbatim}, command is very sensitive to anything that follows it,
and in this case did not like to be immediately followed by an
\verb?\addtostream{...}?, but did not mind it being wrapped up in 
the \cmd{\finishwritefigure} macro.

    The \cmd{\printfigures} macro defined in the last three lines of the code
simply closes the output stream\index{stream!output} and then inputs the 
figures\index{file!read} file.

    As an example of how this works, if we have the following source code:
\begin{lcode}
\chapter{The fifth chapter}
...
\begin{writefigure}
%% illustration and caption
\end{writefigure}
...
\begin{writefigure}
%% another illustration and caption
\end{writefigure}
\end{lcode}
then the figure file will contain the following (shown verbatim in the 
\Ie{fboxverbatim}\index{framed!verbatim} environment).

\begin{fboxverbatim}
\stepcounter{chapter}
\addtocounter{chapter}{-1}
\setcounter{pseudo}{5}
\begin{figure}
%% illustration and caption
\end{figure}
\begin{figure}
%% another illustration and caption
\end{figure}
\end{fboxverbatim}

\index{end floats|)}


\subsection{Example: questions and answers}

\index{questions and answers|(}

    Text books often have questions at the end of a chapter. Sometimes answers
are also provided at the end of the book, or in a separate teachers guide.
During the draft stages of such a book it is useful to keep the
questions and answers together in the source and paper drafts, only removing
or repositioning the answers towards the end of the writing process.

    This example provides an outline for meeting these desires. For 
pedagogical purposes I use a \cmd{\label} and \cmd{\ref} technique although
there are better methods. The example also shows that not
everything works as expected --- it is a reasonably accurate rendition
of the process that I actually went through in designing it.

    First we need a counter for the questions and we'll use an 
environment\index{environment!new}
for questions as these may be of any complexity. The environment takes one
argument --- a unique key to be used in a \cmd{\label}.
\begin{lcode}
\newcounter{question} \setcounter{question}{0}
\renewcommand{\thequestion}{\arabic{question}}
\newenvironment{question}[1]%
  {\refstepcounter{question}
   \par\noindent\textbf{Question \thequestion:}\label{#1}}%
  {\par}
\end{lcode}
I have used \cmd{\refstepcounter} to increment\index{counter!increment} 
the counter so that
the \cmd{\label} will refer to it, and not some external counter.

    We will use a file, called \verb?\jobname.ans? to collect the answers
and this will be written\index{file!write} to by a stream.\index{stream} 
There is also a convenience
macro, \cmd{\printanswers}, for the user to call to print the answers.
\begin{lcode}
\newoutputstream{ansout}
\end{lcode}


    A matching environment\index{environment!new} for answers is required. 
The argument to the environment is the key of the question.

   In \Lopt{draft} mode it is simple, just typeset the answer and no need to
bother with any file printing (remember that \piif{ifdraftdoc} is \ptrue\ for a 
\Lopt{draft} mode document). 
\begin{lcode}
\ifdraftdoc                       % when in draft mode
\newenvironment{answer}[1]%
  {\par\noindent\textbf{Answer \ref{#1}:}}%
  {\par}
\newcommand{\printanswers}{}
\else                             % when not in draft mode
\end{lcode}

   In \Lopt{final} mode the \Ie{answer} environment must write its contents 
verbatim to the \pixfile{ans} file for printing by \cmd{\printanswers}.
Dealing with these in reverse order, this is the definition of
\cmd{\printanswer} when not in \Lopt{draft} mode.
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\printanswers}{%
  \closeoutputstream{ansout}
  \input{\jobname.ans}}
\end{lcode}
 
    Now for the tricky bit, the \Ie{answer} environment. First define an
environment\index{environment!new} that makes sure our 
output\index{stream!output} stream is open, and which then
writes the answer title to the stream.
\begin{lcode}
\newenvironment{@nswer}[1]{\@bsphack
  \IfStreamOpen{ansout}{}{%
    \openoutputfile{\jobname.ans}{ansout}%
  }%
  \addtostream{ansout}{\par\noindent\textbf{Answer \ref{#1}:}}%
  }{\@esphack}
\end{lcode}
The macros \cmd{\@bsphack} and \cmd{\@esphack} are \ltx\ kernel macros
that will gobble\index{space!gobble} extraneous spaces around the 
environment. In other words,
this environment will take no space in the typeset result. The
\cmd{\IfStreamOpen} macro is used to test whether or not the stream is open, 
and if it isn't then it opens it. The answer title is then written
out to the stream. Now we can define the \Ie{answer} environment so that
its contents get written out\index{write!verbatim} verbatim.
\begin{lcode}
\newenvironment{answer}[1]%
  {\@bsphack\@nswer{#1}\writeverbatim{ansout}}%
  {\par\endwriteverbatim\end@nswer\@esphack}
\fi                               % end of \ifdraftdoc ...\else ...
\end{lcode}

    When I was testing this code I had a surprise as I got nasty error messages
from \ltx\ the first time around, but it worked fine when I processed the
source a second time! The problem lies in the code line
\begin{lcode}
\addtostream{ansout}{\par\noindent\textbf{Answer \ref{#1}:}}%
\end{lcode}  

    The first time around, \ltx\ processed the \cmd{\ref} command and of
course it was undefined. In this case \cmd{\ref} gets replaced by the
code to print the error message, which involves macros that have \texttt{@}
in their names, which \ltx\ only understands under special circumstances.
The second time around \cmd{\ref} gets replaced by the question number
and all is well. I then remembered that some commands need 
protecting\index{protect}
when they are written out, so I tried (I've wrapped the line to fit)
\begin{lcode}
\addtostream{ansout}{\par\noindent
  \protect\makeatletter\textbf{Answer 
  \protect\ref{#1}:}\protect\makeatother}%
\end{lcode}  
which did work but seemed very clumsy.

    I then took another line of attack, and looked at the definition
of \cmd{\ref} to see if I could come up with something that didn't
expand into \texttt{@} names. The result of this was
\begin{lcode}
\addtostream{ansout}{\par\noindent\textbf{Answer 
                                          \quietref{#1}:}}%
\end{lcode}  
In the kernel file \file{ltxref.dtx} I found the definition of \cmd{\ref}
and it used a macro \cmd{\@setref} (shown below) to do its work.
My \cmd{\quietref} locally changes the definition of \cmd{\@setref} 
and then calls \cmd{\ref}, which will then use the modified \cmd{\@setref}.
\begin{lcode}
\def\@setref#1#2#3{%        %% kernel definition
  \ifx#1\relax
    \protect\G@refundefinedtrue
    \nfss@text{\reset@font\bfseries ??}%
    \@latex@warning{Reference `#3' on page \thepage \space
                    undefined}%
  \else
    \expandafter#2#1\null
  \fi}

\DeclareRobustCommand{\quietref}[1]{\begingroup
  \def\@setref##1##2##3{%
    \ifx##1\relax ??\else
      \expandafter##2##1\null
    \fi
  \ref{#1}\endgroup}
\end{lcode}

    Having gone all round the houses, the simplest solution was actually
one that I had skipped over
\begin{lcode}
\addtostream{ansout}{\par\noindent\textbf{Answer 
                                          \protect\ref{#1}:}}%
\end{lcode}  

    The advantage of using the \cmd{\label} and \cmd{\ref} mechanism is that
a question and its answer need not be adjacent in the source; I think that
you have seen some of the disadvantages. Another disadvantage is that it
is difficult to use, although not impossible, if you want the answers in
a separate document.

    The real answer to all the problems is force an answer to come immediately
after the question in the source and to use the \Icn{question} counter
directly, as in the endnotes\index{endnotes} example. In the traditional manner,
this is left as an exercise for the 
reader.

\index{questions and answers|)}

\index{stream|)}

\index{file|)}

\section{Answers}

\noindent\textbf{Question 1.} As a convenience, the 
argument\index{argument!optional} to the 
environment could be made optional, defaulting, say, to the current
line width. If the default width is used the frame will be wider
than the line width, so we really ought to make the width argument
specify the width of the frame instead of the minipage. This 
means calculating a reduced width for the minipage based on
the values of \lnc{\fboxsep} and \lnc{\fboxrule}.
\begin{lcode}
\newsavebox{\minibox}
\newlength{\minilength}
\newenvironment{framedminipage}[1][\linewidth]{%
  \setlength{\minilength}{#1}
  \addtolength{\minilength}{-2\fboxsep} 
  \addtolength{\minilength}{-2\fboxrule}
  \begin{lrbox}{\minibox}\begin{minipage}{\minilength}}%
  {\end{minipage}\end{lrbox}\fbox{\usebox{\minibox}}}
\end{lcode}


\vspace{\onelineskip}
\noindent\textbf{Question 2.} There are at least three reasonable answers.
In increasing or decreasing order of probability (your choice) they are:
\begin{itemize}
\item I took Sherlock Holmes' advice and followed the methods outlined
   in the chapter;
\item I used a package, such as the \Lpack{answer} package which is designed
  for the purpose;
\item I just wrote the answers here.
\end{itemize}

\LMnote{2010/10/28}{Removed this answer as we have removed the question}
% \vspace{\onelineskip}
% \noindent\textbf{Question 3.} If \ltx\ writes text out to an external
% file which will be read by \ltx\ at some time, any 
% fragile\index{fragile} commands 
% in the text must be \cmd{\protect}ed.\index{protect}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%% mbook

%#% extend
%#% extstart include cross-referencing.tex

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-04-24 17:14:15 +0200 (Wed, 24 Apr 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 442 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\chapter{Cross referencing} \label{chap:xref}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

%\section{Introduction}

    A significant aspect of \ltx\ is that it provides a variety of
cross referencing\index{cross reference} methods, many of 
which are automatic. An example
of an automatic\index{cross reference!automatic} cross reference is the way in which a \cmd{\chapter}
command automatically adds its title and page number to the \toc,
or where a \cmd{\caption} adds itself to a \listofx.

    Some cross references have to be 
specifically\index{cross reference!specified} specified, such as
a reference in the text to a particular chapter number, and for
these \ltx\ provides a general mechanism that does not require you
to remember the particular number and more usefully does not require
you to remember to change the reference if the chapter number is later 
changed.

\section{Labels and references} \label{sec:lab&ref}

\index{reference!by number|(}

    The general \ltx\ cross reference method uses a pair of macros.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\label}\marg{labstr} \\
 \cmd{\ref}\marg{labstr} \cmd{\pageref}\marg{labstr} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(label)%
  {\cs{label}\marg{labstr}}%
  {Associates the current (section, caption, \ldots) number, and page number,
   to \meta{labstr}.}
\glossary(ref)%
  {\cs{ref}\marg{labstr}}%
  {Prints the (section, or other) number associated with \meta{labstr}
   from a \cs{label}.}
\glossary(pageref)%
  {\cs{pageref}\marg{labstr}}%
  {Prints the page number associated with \meta{labstr}
   from a \cs{label}.}
You can put a \cmd{\label} command where you want to label\index{label} 
some numbered
element in case you might want to refer to the number from elsewhere in
the document. The \meta{labstr} argument is a sequence of letters, digits, 
and punctuation symbols; upper and lower case letters are different.
The \cmd{\ref} macro prints the number\index{reference!to label} 
associated with \meta{labstr}. 
The \cmd{\pageref} macro prints the number of the 
page\index{reference!to page} where the
\cmd{\label} specifying the \meta{labstr} was placed.

    The \cmd{\label} and \cmd{\ref} mechanism is simple to use and
works well but
on occasions you might be surprised\index{reference!unexpected result}  
at what \cmd{\ref} prints.

    \ltx\ maintains a current \textit{ref} 
value\index{reference!current value} which is 
set\index{reference!set current value} by
the \cmd{\refstepcounter} command. This command is used by the sectioning
commands, by \cmd{\caption}, by numbered environments like
\Ie{equation}, by \cmd{\item} in an \Ie{enumerate} environment, and
so on. The \cmd{\label} command\index{label} writes an entry in the 
\pixfile{aux} file consisting of the \meta{labstr}, the current 
\textit{ref} value\index{reference!current value} and the curent 
page\index{page!current number} number. 
A \cmd{\ref} command picks up the \textit{ref}
value for \meta{labstr} and prints it. Similarly \cmd{\pageref} prints
the page number for \meta{labstr}.

    The critical point is that the \cmd{\label} command picks up the
value set by the \emph{most recent} visible\footnote{Remember, a
change within a group, such as an environment, is not visible
outside the group.}  \cmd{\refstepcounter}. 
\begin{itemize}
\item A \cmd{\label} after a \cmd{\section} picks up the \cmd{\section}
      number, not the \cmd{\chapter} number.
\item A \cmd{\label} after a \cmd{\caption} picks up the caption number.
\item A \cmd{\label} \emph{before} a \cmd{\caption} picks up the surrounding
      sectional number.
\end{itemize}
If you are defining your own macro that sets a counter, the counter value
will be invisible to any \cmd{\label} unless it is 
set\index{reference!set current value} using \cmd{\refstepcounter}. 



\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\fref}\marg{labstr} \cmd{\figurerefname} \\
\cmd{\tref}\marg{labstr} \cmd{\tablerefname} \\
\cmd{\pref}\marg{labstr} \cmd{\pagerefname} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(fref)%
  {\cs{fref}\marg{labstr}}%
  {Prints a named (\cs{figurerefname}) reference to a \cs{label}ed figure.}
\glossary(figurerefname)%
  {\cs{figurerefname}}%
  {Name for a figure used by \cs{fref}.}
\glossary(tref)%
  {\cs{tref}\marg{labstr}}%
  {Prints a named (\cs{tablerefname}) reference to a \cs{label}ed table.}
\glossary(tablerefname)%
  {\cs{tablerefname}}%
  {Name for a table used by \cs{tref}.}
\glossary(pref)%
  {\cs{pref}\marg{labstr}}%
  {Prints a named (\cs{pagerefname}) reference to a \cs{label} page reference.}
\glossary(pagerefname)%
  {\cs{pagerefname}}%
  {Name for a page used by \cs{pref}.}
    The class provides these more particular named\index{reference!to figure} 
references to a figure\index{figure!reference},
table\index{table!reference}\index{reference!to table} or 
page\index{page!reference}\index{reference!to page}. For example the 
default definitions of \cmd{\fref} and 
\cmd{\pref} are
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\fref}[1]{\figurerefname~\ref{#1}}
\newcommand{\pref}[1]{\pagerefname~\pageref{#1}}
\end{lcode}
and can be used as 
\begin{lcode}
\ldots footnote parameters are shown in~\fref{fig:fn} 
on~\pref{fig:fn}.
\end{lcode}
which in this document prints as: 
\begin{syntax}
\ldots footnote parameters are shown in~\fref{fig:fn} on~\pref{fig:fn}. \\
\end{syntax}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\Aref}\marg{labstr} \cmd{\appendixrefname} \\
\cmd{\Bref}\marg{labstr} \cmd{\bookrefname} \\
\cmd{\Pref}\marg{labstr} \cmd{\partrefname} \\
\cmd{\Cref}\marg{labstr} \cmd{\chapterrefname} \\
\cmd{\Sref}\marg{labstr} \cmd{\sectionrefname} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(Aref)%
  {\cs{Aref}\marg{labstr}}%
  {Prints a named (\cs{appendixrefname}) reference to a \cs{label}ed appendix.}
\glossary(appendixrefname)%
  {\cs{appendixrefname}}%
  {Name for an appendix used by \cs{Aref}.}
\glossary(Bref)%
  {\cs{Bref}\marg{labstr}}%
  {Prints a named (\cs{bookrefname}) reference to a \cs{label}ed book.}
\glossary(bookrefname)%
  {\cs{bookrefname}}%
  {Name for a book used by \cs{Bref}.}
\glossary(Pref)%
  {\cs{Pref}\marg{labstr}}%
  {Prints a named (\cs{partrefname}) reference to a \cs{label}ed part.}
\glossary(partrefname)%
  {\cs{partrefname}}%
  {Name for a part used by \cs{Pref}.}
\glossary(Cref)%
  {\cs{Cref}\marg{labstr}}%
  {Prints a named (\cs{chapterrefname}) reference to a \cs{label}ed chapter.}
\glossary(chapterrefname)%
  {\cs{chapterrefname}}%
  {Name for a chapter used by \cs{Cref}.}
\glossary(Sref)%
  {\cs{Sref}\marg{labstr}}%
  {Prints a named (\cs{sectionrefname}) reference to a \cs{label}ed section.}
\glossary(sectionrefname)%
  {\cs{sectionrefname}}%
  {Name for a section used by \cs{Sref}.}
Similarly, specific commands are supplied for referencing sectional 
divisions; \cmd{\Aref}\index{reference!to appendix} for \appendixrefname,
\cmd{\Bref}\index{reference!to book} for \bookrefname,
\cmd{\Pref}\index{reference!to part} for \partrefname, 
\cmd{\Cref}\index{reference!to chapter} for \chapterrefname,
and \cmd{\Sref}\index{reference!to section} for divisions 
below \chapterrefname. For example:
\begin{lcode}
This is \Sref{sec:lab&ref} in \Cref{chap:xref}.
\end{lcode}
This is \Sref{sec:lab&ref} in \Cref{chap:xref}.

\index{reference!by number|)}

\section{Reference by name} \label{sec:nxref}

\index{reference!by name|(}

    In technical works it is common to reference a chapter, say, by its
number. In non-technical works such cross references are likely to be
rare, and when they are given it is more likely that the chapter title
would be used instead of the number, as in:
\begin{lcode}
The chapter \textit{\titleref{chap:bringhurst}} describes \ldots
\end{lcode}
The chapter \textit{\titleref{chap:bringhurst}} describes \ldots

    There are two packages, \Lpack{nameref}~\cite{NAMEREF} and 
\Lpack{titleref}~\cite{TITLEREF},
 that let you refer to things by name instead of number.

    Name references were added to the class as a consequence of adding
a second optional argument to the sectioning commands. I found
that this broke the \Lpack{nameref} package, and hence the
\Lpack{hyperref} package as well, so they had to be fixed. The change 
also broke Donald Arseneau's \Lpack{titleref} package, and it turned out
that \Lpack{nameref} also clobbered \Lpack{titleref}. The class also
provides titles, like \cmd{\poemtitle}, that are not recognised by
either of the packages. From my viewpoint the most efficient
thing to do was to enable the class itself to provide name 
referencing.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\titleref}\marg{labstr} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(titleref)%
  {\cs{titleref}\marg{labstr}}%
  {Prints the (section, or other) title of the number associated 
   with \meta{labstr} from a \cs{label}.}
The macro \cmd{\titleref} is a class addition to the usual set of
cross referencing commands. Instead of printing a number it typesets
the title associated with the labelled number. This is really only useful
if there \emph{is} a title, such as from a \cmd{\caption} or
\cmd{\section} command. For example, look at this code 
and its result.

\begin{egsource}{eg:sec:nxref:1}
Labels may be applied to:
\begin{enumerate}
\item Chapters, sections, etc.            \label{sec:nxref:1}
...
\item Items in numbered lists, etc. \ldots \label{sec:nxref:5}
\end{enumerate}
Item \ref{sec:nxref:1} in section \textit{\titleref{sec:nxref}} 
mentions sections while item \titleref{sec:nxref:5}, on page 
\pageref{sec:nxref:5} in the same section, mentions things like
items in enumerated lists that should not be referenced 
by \verb?\titleref?.
\end{egsource}

\begin{egresult}[Named references should be to titled elements]{eg:sec:nxref:1}
Labels may be applied to:
\begin{enumerate}
\item Chapters, sections, etc.            \label{sec:nxref:1}
\item Captions
\item Legends
\item Poem titles
\item Items in numbered lists, etc. \ldots \label{sec:nxref:5}
\end{enumerate}
Item \ref{sec:nxref:1} in section \textit{\titleref{sec:nxref}} 
mentions sections while item\index{reference!unexpected result} 
\titleref{sec:nxref:5}, on page 
\pageref{sec:nxref:5} in the same section, mentions things like
items in enumerated lists 
that should not be referenced by \verb?\titleref?.
\end{egresult}

    As the above example shows, you have to be a little careful in using
\cmd{\titleref}.
Generally speaking, \cmd{\titleref}\marg{key} produces the last named 
thing before the \cmd{\label} that defines the \meta{key}. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\headnameref} \cmd{\tocnameref} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(headnameref)%
  {\cs{headnameref}}%
  {Use header title for sectional title references.}
\glossary(tocnameref)%
  {\cs{tocnameref}}%
  {Use \prtoc{} title for sectional title references.}
There can be three possibilities for the name of a sectional division;
the full name, the name in the \toc, and the name in the page header.
As far as \cmd{\titleref} is concerned it does not use the fullname, 
and so the choice simplifies to the \toc{} or page header. Following
the declaration \cmd{\headnameref} it uses the page header name.
Following the opposite declaration \cmd{\tocnameref}, which is the
default, it uses the \toc\ name.

\Note{} Specifically with the \Lclass{memoir} class, 
do not put a \cmd{\label} command inside an
argument to a \cmd{\chapter} or \cmd{\section} or \cmd{\caption}, etc.,
command. Most likely it will either be ignored or referencing it will
produce incorrect values. This restriction does not apply to the standard
classes, but in any case I think it is good practice not to embed any 
\cmd{\label} commands.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\currenttitle} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(currenttitle)%
  {\cs{currenttitle}}%
  {Gives the title of the last sectional division command.}
    If you just want to refer to the current title you can do so with
\cmd{\currenttitle}. This acts as though there had been a label associated
with the title and then \cmd{\titleref} had been used to refer to that label.
For example:
\begin{egsource}{eg:sec:nxref:2}
This sentence in the section titled `\currenttitle' is an example of the
use of the command \verb?\currenttitle?.
\end{egsource}

\begin{egresult}[Current title]{eg:sec:nxref:2}
This sentence in the section titled `\currenttitle' is an example of the
use of the command \verb?\currenttitle?.
\end{egresult}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\theTitleReference}\marg{num}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(theTitleReference)%
  {\cs{theTitleReference}\marg{num}\marg{text}}
  {Called by \cs{titleref} and \cs{currenttitle} with the number and
   text of the title to print the values.}
Both \cmd{\titleref} and \cmd{\currenttitle} use the \cmd{\theTitleReference}
to typeset the title. This is called with two arguments --- 
the number, \meta{num}, and the text, \meta{text}, of the title. The
default definition is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\theTitleReference}[2]{#2}
\end{lcode}
so that only the \meta{text} argument is printed. You could, for example,
change the definition to
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\theTitleReference}[2]{#1\space \textit{#2}}
\end{lcode}
to print the number followed by the title in italics. If you do this, only use
\cmd{\titleref} for numbered titles, as a printed number for an 
unnumbered title (a) makes no sense, and (b) will in any case be 
incorrect.

    The commands \cmd{\titleref}, \cmd{\theTitleReference} and 
\cmd{\currenttitle} are direct equivalents of those in the \Lpack{titleref}
package~\cite{TITLEREF}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\namerefon} \cmd{\namerefoff} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(namerefon)%
  {\cs{namerefon}}%
  {Makes \cs{titleref} operative.}
\glossary(namerefoff)%
  {\cs{namerefoff}}%
  {Makes \cs{titleref} inoperative.}

    The capability for referencing by name has one potentially
unfortunate side effect --- it causes some arguments, such as that
for \cmd{\legend}, to be moving\index{moving argument} arguments 
and hence any fragile\index{fragile} command
in the argument will need \cmd{\protect}ing. However, not every document
will require the use of \cmd{\titleref} and so the declaration
\cmd{\namerefoff} is provided to switch it off (the argument to
\cmd{\legend} would then not be moving). The declaration
\cmd{\namerefon}, which is the default, enables name referencing.

\index{reference!by name|)}


%#% extend
%#% extstart include backmatter.tex

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-05-02 16:10:51 +0200 (Thu, 02 May 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 454 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}


\LMnote{2010/06/09}{Several \cs{ixfile}'s changed to \cs{pixfile},
  with \cs{ixfile} only, no text appears in the output }


\chapter{\prBackmatter} \label{chap:backmatter}

The \pixbackmatter\ consists of reference and supportive elements for 
the \pixmainmatter;
things like bibliographies, indexes, glossaries, endnotes, and other
material. The class provides additional elements and features of such 
matter that are not in the standard classes.

\section{Bibliography} \label{sec:xref:bibliography}

\index{bibliography|(}

Just as a reminder the bibliography is typeset within the 
\Ie{thebibliography} environment.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bibname} \\
\senv{thebibliography}\marg{exlabel} \\
\cmd{\bibitem} ... \\
\eenv{thebibliography} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(bibname)%
  {\cs{bibname}}%
  {The title for a bibliography}
\glossary(thebibliography)%
  {\senv{thebibliography}\marg{exlabel}}%
  {Environment for typesetting a bibliography. \meta{exlabel} is an arbitrary
    piece of text as wide as the widest label for the bibliographic items.}
\glossary(bibitem)%
  {\cs{bibitem}}%
  {Starts a new bibliographic entry in a \Pe{thebibliography} listing.}
The environment takes one required argument, \meta{exlabel}, which is a 
piece of text
as wide as the widest label in the bibliography. The value of 
\cmd{\bibname} (default `Bibliography') is used
as the title. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bibintoc} \cmd{\nobibintoc} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(bibintoc)%
  {\cs{bibintoc}}%
  {Title of \Pe{thebibliography} will be added to the \prtoc.}
\glossary(nobibintoc)%
  {\cs{nobibintoc}}%
  {Title of \Pe{thebibliography} is not added to the \prtoc.}
The declaration \cmd{\bibintoc} will cause the \Ie{thebibliography}
environment to add the title\index{bibliography!title in ToC} to 
the \toc, while the declaration
\cmd{\nobibintoc} ensures that the title is not added to the \toc. 
The default is \cmd{\bibintoc}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cite}\oarg{detail}\marg{labstr-list} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(cite)%
  {\cs{cite}\oarg{detail}\marg{labstr-list}}%
  {Citation in the text to bibliographic items specified in the 
   \meta{labstr-list} of comma-separated bibliographic identifiers;
  optional information, e.g., page number, is supplied via \meta{detail}.}
Within the text you call out a bibliographic\index{cite bibliographic item} 
reference using the
\cmd{\cite} command, where \meta{labstr-list} is a comma-separated
list of identifiers for the cited works; there must be no spaces in this 
list. The optional \meta{detail} argument is for any additional
information regarding the citation such as a chapter or page number;
this is printed after the main reference. 

    Various aspects of a bibliography can be changed and at this point
it may be helpful to look at some of the internals of the \Ie{thebibliography}
environment, which is defined like this
\begin{lcode}
\newenvironment{thebibliography}[1]{%
  \bibsection
  \begin{bibitemlist}{#1}}%
  {\end{bibitemlist}\postbibhook}
\end{lcode}
The bibliographic entries are typeset as a list, the \Ie{bibitemlist}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bibsection} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(bibsection)%
  {\cs{bibsection}}%
  {Initialises the bibliography and typesets the title.}
The macro \cmd{\bibsection} defines the heading\index{bibliography!heading} 
for the \Ie{thebibliography}
environment; that is, everything before the actual list of items.
It is effectively defined as
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\bibsection}{%
  \chapter*{\bibname}
  \bibmark
  \ifnobibintoc\else
    \phantomsection
    \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\bibname}
  \fi
  \prebibhook}
\end{lcode}
If you want to change the heading, redefine \cmd{\bibsection}. For example,
to have the bibliography as a numbered section instead of an unnumbered
chapter, redefine it like
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\bibsection}{%
  \section{\bibname}
  \prebibhook}
\end{lcode}
If you use the \Lpack{natbib}~\cite{NATBIB} and/or the 
\Lpack{chapterbib}~\cite{CHAPTERBIB} packages with the \Lopt{sectionbib}
option, then they change \cmd{\bibsection} appropriately to typeset the
heading as a numbered section.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bibmark} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(bibmark)%
  {\cs{bibmark}}%
  {Can be used in pagestyles for page headers in a bibliography.}
\cs{bibmark} may be used in pagestyles for page headers in a bibliography.
Its default definition is: 
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\bibmark}{}
\end{lcode}
but could be redefined like, say,
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\bibmark}{\markboth{\bibname}{}}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\prebibhook} \cmd{\postbibhook} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(prebibhook)%
  {\cs{prebibhook}}%
  {Called between typesetting the title of a bibliography and starting
   the list of bibliographic entries.}
\glossary(postbibhook)%  
  {\cs{postbibhook}}%
  {Called after typesetting the list of of bibliographic entries.}
The commands \cmd{\prebibhook} and \cmd{postbibhook} are called after 
typesetting the title of the bibliography and after typesetting the list of
entries, respectively. By default, they are defined to do nothing. You may
wish to use one or other of these to provide some general 
information\index{bibliography!explanatory text} about
the bibliography. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\prebibhook}{%
CTAN is the Comprehensive \tx\ Archive Network and URLS for the 
several CTAN mirrors can be found at \url{http://www.tug.org}.}
\end{lcode}

\index{bibliography!list styling|(}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\biblistextra} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(biblistextra)%
  {\cs{biblistextra}}%
  {Called immediately after the \Pe{bibitemlist} is set up.}
Just at the end of setting up the \Ie{bibitemlist} the \cmd{\biblistextra}
command is called. By default this does nothing but you may change it to
do something useful. For instance, it can be used to change
the list parameters so that the entries are 
typeset flushleft.\index{bibliography!flushleft entries}
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\biblistextra}{%
  \setlength{\leftmargin}{0pt}%
  \setlength{\itemindent}{\labelwidth}%
  \addtolength{\itemindent}{\labelsep}}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setbiblabel}\marg{style} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(setbiblabel)%
  {\cs{setbiblabel}\marg{style}}%
  {Define the look of the bibliographic entry identifiers.}
The style of the labels\index{bibliography!label styling} marking the 
bibliographic entries can be set
via \cmd{\setbiblabel}. The default definition is
\begin{lcode}
\setbiblabel{[#1]\hfill}
\end{lcode}
where \verb?#1? is the citation mark position, which generates flushleft 
marks enclosed in square brackets. To have marks just
followed by a dot
\begin{lcode}
\setbiblabel{#1.\hfill}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bibitem}\oarg{label}\marg{labstr} \\
\cmd{\newblock} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(bibitem)%
  {\cs{bibitem}\oarg{label}\marg{labstr}}%
  {Introduces an entry in the bibliography. The \meta{labstr} argument
   corresponds to a \cs{cite}'s \meta{labstr} argument. The optional
   \meta{label} overides the default numerical printed entry label.}
\glossary(newblock)%
  {\cs{newblock}}%
  {Used in a bibliography to indicate a convenient place in an entry to
   have a pagebreak.}
Within the \Ie{bibitemlist} environment the entries are introduced
by \cmd{\bibitem} instead of the more normal \cmd{\item} macro.
The required \meta{labstr} argument is the identifier for the citation and
corresponds to a \meta{labstr} for \cmd{\cite}. The items in the list
are normally labelled numerically but this can be overriden by using
the optional \meta{label} argument. The \cmd{\newblock} command can be used
at appropriate places in the entry for encouraging a linebreak (this is
used by the \Lopt{openbib} option).

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\bibitemsep} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(bibitemsep)%
  {\cs{bibitemsep}}%
  {Vertical space between entries in a bibliography.}
In the listing the vertical space between entries is controlled by the
length \lnc{\bibitemsep}, which by default is set to the normal 
\lnc{\itemsep} value. The vertical space is 
\texttt{(\lnc{\bibitemsep} + \lnc{\parsep})}. If you wish to eliminate
the space between items do
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\bibitemsep}{-\parsep}
\end{lcode}

\index{bibliography!list styling|)}

\subsection{BibTex}

     Often the \Lbibtex\ program~\cite{BIBTEX} is used to generate the 
bibliography list from database(s) of 
bibliographic\index{bibliographic database} data. For \Lbibtex\ 
a bibliographic data base is a \pixfile{bib} file containing information
necessary to produce entries in a bibliography. \Lbibtex\ 
extracts the raw data from the files for each citation in the text and 
formats it for typesetting according to a particular style.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bibliography}\marg{bibfile-list} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(bibliography)%
  {\cs{bibliography}\marg{bibfile-list}}%
  {Print the bibliography having used \Pbibtex\ to extract entries from
   the \meta{bibfile-list} of comma-separated names of \file{bib} files.}
    The bibliography will be printed at the location of the \cmd{\bibliography}
command. Its argument is a comma-separated list of \Pbibtex\ \pixfile{bib} files 
which will be searched by \Lbibtex\ to generate the bibliography.
Only the file name(s) should be supplied, the extension must not be given.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\nocite}\marg{labstr} \verb?\nocite{*}? \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(nocite)%
  {\cs{nocite}\marg{labstr}}%
  {Add entry \meta{labstr} to the bibliography, but with no in-text citation.}
The command \cmd{\nocite} causes \Lbibtex\ to make an entry 
in the bibliography but no citation will appear in the text. The special
case \verb?\nocite{*}? causes \emph{every} entry in the database to be
listed in the bibliography.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bibliographystyle}\marg{style} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(bibliographystyle)%
  {\cs{bibliographystyle}\marg{style}}%
  {Typeset the bibliographic entries according to \meta{style}.}
Many different \Pbibtex\ styles\index{BibTeX style?\Pbibtex\ style}
are available and the particular one to be used is specified
by calling \cmd{\bibliographystyle} before the bibliography itself.
The `standard' bibliography \meta{style}s follow the general schemes
for mathematically oriented papers and are:
\begin{itemize}
\item[\texttt{plain}]\index{BibTeX style?\Pbibtex\ style!plain?\texttt{plain}} 
     The entry format is similar to one suggested by
     Mary-Claire van Leunen~\cite{LEUNEN92}, and entries are sorted
     alphabetically and labelled with numbers.
\item[\texttt{unsrt}]\index{BibTeX style?\Pbibtex\ style!unsrt?\texttt{unsrt}} 
     The format is the same as \texttt{plain} but
     that entries are ordered by the citation order in the text.
\item[\texttt{alpha}]\index{BibTeX style?\Pbibtex\ style!alpha?\texttt{alpha}} 
     The same as \texttt{plain} but entries are 
     labelled like `Wil89', formed from the author and publication date.
\item[\texttt{abbrv}]\index{BibTeX style?\Pbibtex\ style!abbrv?\texttt{abbrv}} 
     The same as \texttt{plain} except that some elements, like month 
     names, are abbreviated.
\end{itemize}
There are many other styles available, some of which are used
in collaboration with a package, one popular one being 
Patrick Daly's \Lpack{natbib}~\cite{NATBIB} package for the kinds of 
author-year citation styles used in the natural sciences. 
Another package is \Lpack{jurabib}~\cite{JURABIB} for citation styles
used in legal documents where the references are often given in footnotes
rather than listed at the end of the document.

    I assume you know how to 
generate\index{running BibTeX?running \Pbibtex} a bibliography using \Lbibtex,
so this is just a quick reminder. You first run \ltx\
on your document, having specified the bibliography style, cited
your reference material and listed the relevant \Lbibtex\ database(s). 
You then run \Lbibtex, and after running \ltx\ twice more the
bibliography should be complete. After a change to your citations you have to
run \ltx\ once, \Lbibtex\ once, and then \ltx\ twice more to get an 
updated set of references.

    The format and potential contents of a \Pbibtex\
database\index{BibTeX database?\Pbibtex\ database} file 
(a \pixfile{bib} file) are specified in detail in Lamport~\cite{LAMPORT94} 
and the first of the \btitle{Companions}~\cite{COMPANION}. 
Alternatively
there is the documentation by Oren Patashnik~\cite{BIBTEX} who wrote the
\Lbibtex\ program.

\index{BibTeX style?\Pbibtex\ style!changing|(}

    A \Pbibtex\ style, specified in a \pixfile{bst} file, is written 
using an anonymous stack based language
created specifically for this purpose. If you can't find a 
\Pbibtex\ style\index{BibTeX style?\Pbibtex\ style}
that provides what you want you can either use the 
\Lpack{makebst}~\cite{MAKEBST} package
which leads you through creating your own style via a question and answer
session, or you can directly write your own. If you choose the latter
approach then Patashnik's \textit{Designing BibTeX files}~\cite{BIBTEXHACK}
is essential reading. As he says, it is best to take an existing style and
modify it rather than starting from scratch. 

\begin{comment}

This is what I did for the
style for this book, as all I wanted was a slight change and extension
to the standard 
\texttt{alpha}\index{BibTeX style?\Pbibtex\ style!alpha?\texttt{alpha}}  
style, which is in \file{alpha.bst}\ixfile{bst}.

    There were three things that I wanted to do:
\begin{itemize}
\item Add an `isbn' field to the entries so an ISBN\index{ISBN} number 
      could be easily quoted;
\item Add an `annote' field so that I could perhaps provide an 
      annotated\index{bibliography!annotated}
      bibliography;
\item Use the modern \cmd{\emph} command instead of the deprecated \cmd{\em}
      command for titles;
\end{itemize}

    If you aren't interested in how I did it, skip the next part, 
but if you are you might find it easier to follow if you have a copy 
of the \pixfile{alpha.bst} file to hand. 

This is what I did, although not in this order as I kept flitting
back and forth in order to resolve the problems that arose.
\begin{itemize}
\item Copied the \pixfile{alpha.bst} file to a new file I called 
      \pixfile{typo.bst} as my new style was to be called \texttt{typo}.

\item Near the start of the file are some lines:
\begin{lcode}
ENTRY
  { address
    author
    ...
    year
    isbn
    annote
  }
\end{lcode}
at the end of which I added the \texttt{isbn} and \texttt{annote}. These are
the fields that may apear in an entry. Later I have to describe how these
fields are to be dealt with.

\item
    Shortly after the \texttt{ENTRY} list there is a set of \texttt{FUNCTION}
specifications, the 17th of which is called \texttt{emphasize}. This is the 
only place in the file where the \cmd{\em} macro appears, so this is what I 
have to modify so that the \texttt{typo} style will use \cmd{\emph} instead
of \cmd{\em}. My revised definition is:
\begin{lcode}
FUNCTION {emphasize}
{ duplicate$ empty$ 
    { pop$ "" }
%%    { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * }  % original, change to
    { "\emph{ " swap$ * "}" * }  % PW mod
  if$
}
\end{lcode}
I didn't (and still don't) know just how the function operated but my
modification worked.

\item
    After this were a lot of functions of the form \verb?{format.something}?
which I took to be the formatting instructions for the fields. Looking
at the various functions I added the following ones.
\begin{lcode}
%% PW added format.isbn
FUNCTION {format.isbn}
{ isbn empty$
  { "" }
  { new.block " ISBN " isbn * }
    if$
}

%% PW added format.annote
{ annote empty$
  { "" }
  { " \begin{quotation}\noindent " annote * 
    " \end{quotation} " * }
    if$
}

%% PW added fin.annote
{ annote empty$
  {  }
  { newline$ }
    if$
}
\end{lcode}
%$

\item
    The last thing that I had to do was to get the entries to write
out the new \texttt{annote} and \texttt{isbn} fields. As an example, here 
is the revised function for a \texttt{booklet} entry, which is one of the
shorter ones.
\begin{lcode}
FUNCTION {booklet}
{ output.bibitem
  format.authors output
  new.block
  format.title "title" output.check
  howpublished address new.block.checkb
  howpublished output
  address output
  format.date output
  format.isbn output    %% PW added
  new.block
  note output
  fin.entry
  format.annote write$  %% PW added
  fin.annote            %% PW added
}
\end{lcode}
%$

I added similar lines to all the other entry functions except, for example, 
the \texttt{article} function where I only added the \texttt{annote}
lines as I assumed that an article would not have an ISBN\index{ISBN}.

\end{itemize}

    It took me three or four attempts to make it all work as I didn't 
really know what I was doing. I basically copied something that looked
close to what I might need, changed some names, and tried it out. If it
didn't work then I tried something a bit different until it did.
For someone who knew what they were doing it would have been a trivial
task and they would probably have used a more elegant solution, but
it works and didn't take too long.
\end{comment}

\index{BibTeX style?\Pbibtex\ style!changing|)}


\index{bibliography|)}

\section{Index} \label{sec:xref:index}


   It is time to take a closer look at indexing. The class allows 
multiple indexes\index{index!multiple} and an index may be typeset as a 
single\indextwo{index}{single column} or a 
double\indextwo{index}{double column} column.

    The general process is to put indexing commands into your source text, 
and \ltx\ will write this raw indexing data to an \pixfile{idx} file. 
The raw index data is then processed, not by \ltx\ but by yourself if you 
have plenty of spare time on your hands, or more usually by a separate 
program, to create a sorted list of indexed items in a second file (usually
an \pixfile{ind} file). This can then be input to \ltx\ to print the sorted
index data.

\subsection{Printing an index}
\index{index!printing|(}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makeindex}\oarg{file} \\
\cmd{\printindex}\oarg{file} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(makeindex)%
  {\cs{makeindex}\oarg{file}}%
  {Preamble command to collect raw index information. By default this
   is written to file \cs{jobname}\texttt{.idx}. If the optional argument
   is used it may be written to file \meta{file}\texttt{.idx}.}
\glossary(printindex)%
  {\cs{printindex}\oarg{file}}%
  {Print the sorted index. By default this is read from file 
   \cs{jobname}\texttt{.ind}. If the optional argument is given
   it will read the data from file \meta{file}\texttt{.ind}.}
In order to make \ltx\ collect indexing information the declaration 
\cmd{\makeindex} must be put in the preamble\index{preamble}. By default
the raw index data is put into the \file{jobname.idx}\ixfile{idx} file. If
the optional \meta{file} argument is given then index data can be
output to \file{file.idx}. Several \cmd{\makeindex} declarations
can be used provided they each call for a different file.

    The \cmd{\printindex} command will print\index{index!print} an index 
where by default the indexed items are assumed to be in a file called 
\pixfile{jobname.ind}\ixfile{ind}. If the optional \meta{file} argument 
is given
then the indexed items are read from the file called \file{file.ind}.

%    The typical method of generating an \pixfile{ind} file containing
%the sorted index entries from the raw index data in an
%\pixfile{idx} file is to use the \Lmakeindex\ program~\cite{CHEN88}.


\begin{syntax}
\senv{theindex} entries \eenv{theindex} \\
\cmd{\onecolindex} \cmd{\twocolindex} \\
\cmd{\indexname} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(theindex)%
  {\senv{theindex}}%
  {Environment for typesetting an index}
\glossary(onecolindex)%
  {\cs{onecolindex}}%
  {Typeset index in one column.}
\glossary(twocolindex)%
  {\cs{twocolindex}}%
  {Typeset index in two columns (the default).}
\glossary(indexname)%
  {\cs{indexname}}%
  {Name used for the theindex title.}
The index entries are typeset within the \Ie{theindex} 
environment. By default it is typeset with two 
columns\indextwo{double column}{index}
but following the \cmd{\onecolindex} declaration the environment
uses a single\indextwo{index}{single column} column. 
The default two column behaviour is restored
after the \cmd{\twocolindex} declaration.
The index\indextwo{index}{name} title is given by the current value of 
\cmd{\indexname} (default `Index').

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\indexintoc} \cmd{\noindexintoc} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(indexintoc)%
  {\cs{indexintoc}}%
  {Add the index title to the \prtoc\ (the default).}
\glossary(noindexintoc)%
  {\cs{noindexintoc}}%
  {Do not add the index title to the \prtoc.}
The declaration \cmd{\indexintoc} will cause the \Ie{theindex}
environment to add the title\index{index!title in ToC} to the \toc, 
while the declaration
\cmd{\noindexintoc} ensures that the title is not added to the \toc. 
The default is \cmd{\indexintoc}.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\indexcolsep} \\
\lnc{\indexrule} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(indexcolsep)%
  {\ls{indexcolsep}}%
  {Width of the gutter in two column indexes.}
\glossary(indexrule)%
  {\ls{indexrule}}%
  {Width of the inter-column rule in two column indexes.}
The length \lnc{\indexcolsep} is the width of the gutter between the two
index columns\index{index!double column!gutter}
The length \lnc{\indexrule}, default
value 0pt, is the thickness of a vertical rule separating the two columns.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\preindexhook} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(preindexhook)%
  {\cs{preindexhook}}%
  {Called between typesetting an index's title and the start of the list.}
    The macro \cmd{\preindexhook}\index{index!explanatory text} 
is called after the title is typeset and
before the index listing starts. By default it does nothing but
can be changed. For example
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\preindexhook}{Bold page numbers are used 
  to indicate the main reference for an entry.}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\indexmark} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(indexmark)%
  {\cs{indexmark}}%
  {Can be used in pagestyles for page headers in an index.}
\cs{indexmark} may be used in pagestyles for page headers in an index.
Its default definition is: 
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\indexmark}{}
\end{lcode}
but could be redefined like, say,
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\indexmark}{\markboth{\indexname}{\indexname}}
\end{lcode}




\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\ignorenoidxfile} \\
\cmd{\reportnoidxfile} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(ignorenoidxfile)%
  {\cs{ignorenoidxfile}}%
  {Do not report attempts to use an \file{idx} file that has not been
   declared by \cs{makeindex}.}
\glossary(reportnoidxfile)%
  {\cs{reportnoidxfile}}%
  {Report attempts to use an \file{idx} file that has not been
   declared by \cs{makeindex}.}
Following the declaration \cmd{\ignorenoidxfile}, which is the default,
LaTeX will silently pass over attempts to use an \pixfile{idx} file which has
not been declared via \cmd{\makeindex}. After the declaration
\cmd{\reportnoidxfile} LaTeX will whinge about any attempts to 
write to an unopened file.

\index{index!printing|)}

\subsection{Preparing an index}

\index{index!preparation|(}

    It it is easy for a computer to provide a list of all the words you
have used, and where they were used. This is called a 
concordance\index{concordance}. 
Preparing an index, though, is not merely a gathering of words but 
is an intellectual
process that involves recognising and naming concepts, constructing a
logical hierarchy of these and providing links between related concepts.
No computer can do that for you though it can help with some tasks, such as
sorting things into alphabetical order, eliminating duplicates, and so forth.

    Several iterations may be required before you have an acceptable index.
Generally you pick out the important words or phrases used on the first pass.
Part of the skill of indexing is finding appropriate words to describe things
that may not be obvious from the text. If there are several ways of describing
something they may all be included using a `see' 
reference\index{index!see reference} to the most
obvious of the terms, alternatively you could 
use `see also'\index{index!see also reference} references
between the items. Entries should be broken down into subcategories so
that any particular item will not have a long string of page numbers and
your reader is more likely to quickly find the relevant place. After having 
got the first index you will most probably have to go back and correct
all the sins of ommission and commission, and start the cycle again.

    I found that indexing this manual was the most difficult part of preparing
it. It was easy to index the names of all the macros, environments, and so on
as I had commands that would simultaneously print and index these. It was
the concepts that was difficult. I inserted \cmd{\index} commands as I went
along at what seemed to be appropriate places but turned out not to be.
I would use slightly different words for the same thing, and what was worse
the same word for different things. It took a long time to improve it to 
its present rather pitiful state.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\index}\oarg{file}\marg{stuff} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(index)%
  {\cs{index}\oarg{file}\marg{stuff}}%
  {Add \meta{stuff} and the current page number to the raw index data. 
   By default this is written to
   file \cs{jobname}\texttt{.idx}. If the optional argument
   is given it will be written to file \meta{file}\texttt{.idx}.}
The \cmd{\index} macro specifies that \meta{stuff} is to appear in
an index. By default the raw index data --- the \meta{stuff} and the 
page number --- will be output
to the \pixfile{jobname.idx}\ixfile{idx} file, but if the optional \meta{file}
argument is given then output will be to the \file{file.idx} file.

    This book has two\index{index!multiple} indexes. 
The main index uses the default indexing
commands, while the second index does not. They are set up like this:
\begin{lcode}
% in preamble
\makeindex
\makeindex[lines]
% in body
...\index{main} ...\index[lines]{First line} ...
...
% at the end
\clearpage
% main index
\pagestyle{Index}
\renewcommand{\preindexhook}{%
The first page number is usually, but not always,
the primary reference to the indexed topic.\vskip\onelineskip}
\printindex

% second index
\clearpage
\pagestyle{ruled}
\renewcommand{\preindexhook}{}
\renewcommand{\indexname}{Index of first lines}
\onecolindex
\printindex[lines]
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\specialindex}\marg{file}\marg{counter}\marg{stuff} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(specialindex)%
  {\cs{specialindex}\marg{file}\marg{counter}\marg{stuff}}%
  {Add \meta{stuff} and the current value of \meta{counter}
   to the raw index data file \meta{file}\texttt{.idx}.}
The \cmd{\index} command uses the page number\index{reference!to page} 
as the reference for 
the indexed item. In contrast the \cmd{\specialindex} command uses
the \meta{counter} as the reference\index{reference!to counter} 
for the indexed \meta{stuff}.
It writes \meta{stuff} to the \file{file.idx} file, and also writes
the page number (in parentheses) and the value of the \meta{counter}.
This means that indexing can be with respect to something other than page 
numbers. However, if the \Lpack{hyperref} package is used the special
index links will be to pages even though they will appear to be with 
respect to the \meta{counter}; for example, if figure numbers are used
as the index reference the hyperref link will be to the page where the
figure caption appears and not to the figure itself.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\showindexmarks} \cmd{\hideindexmarks} \\
\cmd{\indexmarkstyle} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(showindexmarks)%
  {\cs{showindexmarks}}%
  {The \meta{stuff} argument to \cs{index} and \cs{specialindex} will
   be printed in the margin (for use in noting what has been indexed where).}
\glossary(hideindexmarks)%
  {\cs{hideindexmarks}}%
  {The \meta{stuff} argument to \cs{index} and \cs{specialindex} will
   not be printed in the margin (the default).}
\glossary(indexmarkstyle)%
  {\cs{indexmarkstyle}}%
  {Font style for printing index marks in the margin.}
The declaration \cmd{\showindexmarks} causes the argument to practically 
any \cmd{\index} and \cmd{\specialindex} to be 
printed\index{index!show indexed items} in the margin of the
page where the indexing command was issued. The argument is printed using
the \cmd{\indexmarkstyle} which is initially specified as
\begin{lcode}
\indexmarkstyle{\normalfont\footnotesize\ttfamily}
\end{lcode}
For reasons I don't fully understand, spaces in the argument are displayed
as though it was typeset using the starred version of \cmd{\verb}.
The \cmd{\hideindexmarks}, which is the default, turns off 
\cmd{\showindexmarks}.

    The standard classes just provide the plain \cmd{\index} command with
no optional \meta{file} argument. In those classes the contents of the
\file{jobname.idx} file is limited to the index entries actually seen in 
the document. In particular, if you are using \cmd{\include} for
some parts of the document and \cmd{\includeonly} to exclude one or more
files, then any \cmd{\index} entries in an excluded file will not appear
in the \file{jobname.idx} file. The new implementation of indexing eliminates 
that potential problem.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\item} \cmd{\subitem} \cmd{\subsubitem} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(item)%
  {\cs{item}}%
  {Introduces a main index entry.}
\glossary(subitem)%
  {\cs{subitem}}%
  {Introduces a subsidiary index entry.}
\glossary(subsubitem)%
  {\cs{subsubitem}}%
  {Introduces a third level index entry.}
The \Ie{theindex} environment\index{index!entry levels} supports 
three levels of entries.
A \cmd{\item} command
flags a main\index{index!main entry} entry; a subentry\index{index!subentry} 
of a main entry is indicated by
\cmd{\subitem} and a subentry\index{index!subentry!subsubentry} 
of a subentry is flagged by 
\cmd{\subsubitem}. For example a portion of an index might look like:
\egstart[-2em]
\begin{lcode}
\item bridge, 2,3,7
\subitem railway, 24
\subsubitem Tay, 37
\end{lcode}
\egmid
bridge, 2, 3, 7\\
\hspace*{2em} railway, 24 \\
\hspace*{4em} Tay, 37
\egend
\noindent if the Tay Bridge\footnote{A railway (railroad) bridge in Scotland
that collapsed in 1879 killing 90 people. The disaster lives for ever in
the poem \textit{The Tay Bridge Disaster} by William McGonagall (1830--?), 
the first verse of which goes:
\begin{verse}
Beautiful Railway Bridge of the Silv'ry Tay!\index[lines]{Beautiful 
  Railway Bridge of the Silv'ry Tay} \\
Alas! I am very sorry to say \\
That ninety lives have been taken away \\
On the last Sabbath day of 1879, \\
Which will be remember'd for a very long time.
\end{verse}}
was mentioned on page 37.


\subsection{MakeIndex}

    It is possible, but time consuming and error prone, to create your
index by hand from the output of the \cmd{\index} commands you have scattered
throughout the text. Most use the \Lmakeindex\ program to do this
for them; there is also the \Lprog{xindy} program~\cite{XINDY} 
but this is much less known. 


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\xindyindex} \\
\end{syntax}
It turns out that \Lprog{xindy} cannot handle a \Mname\ 
hyperindex\index{hyperindex} (which
can be obtained with the aid of the \Lpack{hyperref} package), although
\Lmakeindex\ can do so.\footnote{This deficiency in \Pprog{xindy}
was discovered by Frederic Connes\index{Connes, Frederic}, who also provided
the \cs{xindyindex} command.}
If you are going to use \Lprog{xindy} to process
the raw index data put \cmd{\xindyindex} in the preamble, which will prevent
hyperindexing\index{hyperindex}.

%%\index{MakeIndex?\Pmakeindex!raw data|(}
\Iprogsub{MakeIndex}{raw data|(}%

   \Lmakeindex\ reads an \pixfile{idx} file containg the raw index
data (which may include some commands to \Lmakeindex\ itself), sorts
the data, and then outputs an \pixfile{ind} file containing the sorted data,
perhaps with some \ltx\ commands to control the printing.
\Lmakeindex\ was created as a general purpose index processing program
and its operation can be controlled by a 
`makeindex configuration file'%
%%\index{MakeIndex?\Pmakeindex!configuration file}%
\Iprogsub{MakeIndex}{configuration file}%
\index{configuration file!MakeIndex?\Pmakeindex} 
(by default this is an \pixfile{ist} file). Such a file consists of two 
parts. The first
part specifies \Pmakeindex\ commands that can be included in the
\meta{stuff} argument to \cmd{\index}. The second part controls how 
the sorted index data is to be output.

    I will only describe the most common elements of what you can put in 
an \pixfile{ist} file; consult the \Pmakeindex\
manual~\cite{CHEN88}, or the \btitle{Companion}~\cite{COMPANION}, for all 
the details.

You can embed commands, in the form of single characters,
in the argument to \cmd{\index} that guide 
\Lmakeindex\ in converting the raw \pixfile{idx} file into an 
\pixfile{ind} file for final typesetting. The complete set of these
is given in \tref{tab:configin}. They all have defaults and you can modify
these via a \Lmakeindex\ configuration file.

\newcommand*{\kwd}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
\newcommand*{\kty}[1]{\textit{(#1)}}

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{\Pmakeindex\ configuration file input parameters} \label{tab:configin}
\begin{tabular}{llp{0.5\textwidth}}\toprule
\multicolumn{1}{c}{Keyword} & \multicolumn{1}{c}{Default} & \multicolumn{1}{c}{Description} \\ \midrule
\kwd{keyword} \kty{s} & \verb?"\\indexentry"? & 
  The argument to this command is a \Pmakeindex{} index entry \\
\kwd{arg\_open} \kty{c} & \verb?'{'? &
  Argument start delimeter \\
\kwd{arg\_close} \kty{c} & \verb?'}'? &
  Argument end delimeter \\
\kwd{range\_open} \kty{c} & \verb?'('? &
  Start of an explicit page range \\
\kwd{range\_close} \kty{c} & \verb?')'? &
  End of an explicit page range \\
\kwd{level} \kty{c} & \verb?'!'? &
  Character denoting a new subitem level \\
\kwd{actual} \kty{c} & \verb?'@'? &
  Character denoting that the following text is to appear in the
  actual index file \\
\kwd{encap} \kty{c} & \verb?'|'? &
  Character denoting that the rest of the argument is to be used as
  an encapsulating command for the page number \\
\kwd{quote} \kty{c} & \verb?'"'? &
  Character that escapes the following character \\
\kwd{escape} \kty{c} & \verb?'\\'? &
  Symbol with no special meaning unless followed by the \kwd{quote}
  character, when both characters will be printed. The \kwd{quote}
  and \kwd{escape} characters must be different. \\
\kwd{page\_compositor} \kty{s} & \verb?"-"? &
  Composite number separator \\
\bottomrule
\multicolumn{3}{c}{\kty{s} of type string, \kty{c} of type character} 
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

    In the simplest case you just use the name of the index item as the 
argument to the \cmd{\index} command. However, spaces are significant as far
as \Lmakeindex\ is concerned. The following three uses of \cmd{\index}
will result in three different entries in the final index \\
\verb*?\index{ entry}? \verb*?\index{entry}? \verb*?\index{entry }?

\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{small}
\begin{tabular}{ll|l}
p. v: & \verb?\index{Alf}? & \verb?\indexentry{Alf}{v}? \\
p. 1:  & \verb?\index{Alf}? & \verb?\indexentry{Alf}{1}? \\
p. 2:  & \verb?\index{Alf}? & \verb?\indexentry{Alf}{2}? \\
p. 3:  & \verb?\index{Alf}? & \verb?\indexentry{Alf}{3}? \\
p. 5: & \verb?\index{Alfabet|see{Bet}}? & \verb?\indexentry{Alfabet|see{Bet}}{5}? \\
p. 7: & \verb?\index{Alf@\textit{Alf}}? & \verb?\indexentry{Alf@\textit{Alf}}{7}? \\
         & \verb?\index{Bet|textbf}? & \verb?\indexentry{Bet|textbf}{7}? \\
p. 8:  & \verb?\index{Alf!Bet!Con}? & \verb?\indexentry{Alf!Bet!Con}{8}? \\
p. 9: & \verb?\index{Alf!Dan}? & \verb?\indexentry{Alf!Dan}{9}? \\
\end{tabular}\par
\end{small}
\caption{Raw indexing: (left) index commands in the source text; (right)
         \file{idx} file entries}
\end{figure}

\begin{figure}
\centering
\egstart
\begin{lcode}
\begin{theindex}
\item Alf, v, 1-3
  \subitem Bet
    \subsubitem Con, 8
  \subitem Dan, 9
\item \textit{Alf}, 7
\item Alfabet, \see{Bet}{5}
\indexspace
\item Bet, \textbf{7}
\end{theindex}
\end{lcode}
\egmid
Alf, v, 1-3 \\
\hspace*{2em} Bet \\
\hspace*{4em} Con, 8 \\
\hspace*{2em} Dan, 9 \\
\textit{Alf}, 7 \\
Alfabet, \textit{see} Bet \\[0.5\onelineskip]
Bet, \textbf{7}
\egend
\caption{Processed index: (left) alphabeticized \file{ind} file;
         (right) typeset index}
\end{figure}

\subsubsection{The \texttt{!} character}

    The \texttt{level} specifier starts a new minor level, or subitem,
with a maximum of two sub-levels. The default \texttt{level} specifier
is the special character \texttt{!}\index{"! (ls)?\texttt{"!} (level specifier)}. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\index{item!sub item!sub sub item}
\end{lcode}

\subsubsection{The \texttt{@} character}

    An indexable item may be represented in two portions, separated
by the \texttt{actual} specifier, which by default is the
\texttt{@} character\index{@ (as)?\texttt{@} (actual specifier)}. 
The portion before the \texttt{@} is used
when \Lmakeindex\ sorts the raw index data, and the portion after
the \texttt{@} is used as the entry text. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\index{MakeIndex@\textit{MakeIndex}}
\end{lcode}
will result in the final index entry of \verb?\textit{MakeIndex}? in the 
alphabetic position accorded to \verb?MakeIndex?. 
The same treatment can be applied for subitems:
\begin{lcode}
\index{program!MakeIndex@\textit{MakeIndex}!commands}
\end{lcode}

\subsubsection{The \texttt{|} character}

    Anything after the \texttt{encap} specifier, which by default
is the \texttt{|} character\index{"| (es)?\texttt{"|} (encap specifier)}, 
is treated as applying to the page number. In general
\begin{lcode}
\index{...|str}
\end{lcode}
will produce a page number, say n, in the form
\begin{lcode}
\str{n}
\end{lcode}
For example, if you wanted the page number of one particular entry
to be in a bold font, say to indicate that this is where the entry
is defined, you would do
\begin{lcode}
\index{entry|textbf}
\end{lcode}

    As a special case, if you want an index item to have a page range 
put the two
characters \verb?|(? at the end of the argument on the first page, and 
the character pair \verb?|)? at the end of the argument on the last page.
For example:
\begin{lcode}
... \index{range|(} pages about range  \index{range|)} ...
\end{lcode}
The two arguments must match exactly except for the final \verb?(? 
and \verb?)?. You can also do
\begin{lcode}
\index{...|(str}
\end{lcode}
which will produce a page range of the form
\begin{lcode}
\str{n-m}
\end{lcode}
In this case, if the range is only a single page, the result is simply
\begin{lcode}
\str{n}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\see}\marg{text}\marg{page} \cmd{seename} \\
\cmd{\seealso}\marg{text}\marg{page} \cmd{alsoname} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(see)%
  {\cs{see}}%
  {\textit{see} entry in an index using \cs{seename} for the wording.} 
\glossary(seename)%
  {\cs{seename}}%
  {Wording for a \textit{see} index entry.}
\glossary(seealso)%
  {\cs{seealso}}%
  {\textit{see also} entry in an index using \cs{alsoname} for the wording.} 
\glossary(alsoname)%
  {\cs{alsoname}}%
  {Wording for a \textit{see also} index entry.}
The macros \cmd{\see}\index{index!see reference} and 
\cmd{\seealso}\index{index!see also reference} are specifically for use in
an \cmd{\index} command after the \texttt{|}. The \cmd{\see} command
replaces the page number by the phrase `\textit{see} \meta{text}', 
while the \cmd{\seealso} command adds `\textit{see also} \meta{text}' 
to the entry. 
For example, in the source for this manual I have
\begin{lcode}
\index{chapter!style|see{chapterstyle}}
\index{figure|seealso{float}}
\end{lcode}
A \cmd{\see} or \cmd{\seealso}
should be used once only for a particular entry. The `see' texts for 
\cmd{\see} and \cmd{\seealso} are stored in \cmd{\seename}
and \cmd{\alsoname}, whose default definitions are:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\seename}{see}
\newcommand*{alsoname}{see also}
\end{lcode}

\subsubsection{The \texttt{"} and \texttt{\bs} characters}

    If, for some reason, you want to index something that includes one
of the \texttt{!}, \texttt{@}, \texttt{|} or \texttt{"} characters there
is the difficulty of persuading \Lmakeindex\ to ignore the special
meaning. This is solved by the \texttt{quote} specifier, which is
normally the \texttt{"} character\index{\" (qs)?\texttt{"} (quote specifier)}. 
The character
immediately after \texttt{"} is treated as non-special. For example,
if you needed to index the \texttt{@} and \texttt{!} characters:
\begin{lcode}
\index{"@ (commercial at)}
\index{"! (exclamation)}
\end{lcode}
The leading \texttt{"} is stripped off before entries are alphabetized.

    The \texttt{escape} specifier is used to strip the special meaning
from the \texttt{quote} specifier. This is usually the \texttt{\bs}
character\index{"\ (es)?\texttt{\bs} (escape specifier)}. 
So, to index the double quote character itself:
\begin{lcode}
\index{\" (double quote)}
\end{lcode}

\subsubsection{Example of using the special characters}

    Here is a short example of indexing the special characters. Given an
input like this in the document
\begin{lcode}
\index{exclamation mark ("!)}
\index{vicious|see{circle}}
\index{atsign@\texttt{"@} sign|\textbf}
\index{quote!double ("")}
\index{circle|see{vicious}}
\end{lcode}
then an index could eventually be produced that looks like:
\begin{quote}
\texttt{@} sign, \textbf{30}\\
circle, \textit{see} vicious\\
exclamation mark (!), 21 \\
quote \\
\hspace*{1.5em} double ("), 47 \\
vicious, \textit{see} circle\\
\end{quote}


%%\index{MakeIndex?\Pmakeindex!raw data|)}
\Iprogsub{MakeIndex}{raw data|)}%

\subsection{Controlling MakeIndex output}

%%\index{MakeIndex?\Pmakeindex!output styling|(}
\Iprogsub{MakeIndex}{output styling|(}%

Table~\ref{tab:configout} lists the parameters that control \Pmakeindex's
output, except for the keywords that control the setting of page numbers. 
The special characters and strings are not fixed within the
\Lmakeindex\ program. The program will read an \pixfile{ist} file
in which you can redefine all of \Lmakeindex's defaults.

\begin{table}
\begin{adjustwidth}{-1.5cm}{-1.5cm}
\centering
\caption{\Pmakeindex\ configuration file output parameters} \label{tab:configout}
\begin{tabular}{llp{0.5\textwidth}}\toprule
\multicolumn{1}{c}{Keyword} & \multicolumn{1}{c}{Default} & \multicolumn{1}{c}{Description} \\ \midrule
\kwd{preamble} \kty{s} & \verb?"\\begin{theindex}\n"? &
  Text for the start of the output file \\
\kwd{postamble} \kty{s} & \verb?"\n\n\\end{theindex}\n"? &
  Text at the end of the output file \\          \midrule
%\kwd{setpage\_prefix} \kty{s} & \verb?"\n\\setcounter{page}{"? &
%  Prefix for the command setting the page number \\ 
%\kwd{setpage\_suffix} \kty{s} & \verb?"}\n"? &
%  Suffix for the command setting the page number \\  \midrule
\kwd{group\_skip} \kty{s} & \verb?"\n\n\\indexspace\n"? &
  Vertical space before a new letter group \\
\kwd{heading\_prefix} \kty{s} & \verb?""? &
  Prefix for heading for a new letter group \\
\kwd{heading\_suffix} \kty{s} & \verb?""? &
  Suffix for heading for a new letter group \\
\kwd{headings\_flag} \kty{n} & \verb?0? &
  A value $= 0$ inserts nothing between letter groups. 
  A value $>0$ includes an uppercase instance of the new symbol,
  while a value $<0$ includes a lowercase instance, all
  within \kwd{heading\_prefix} and \kwd{heading\_suffix} \\ \midrule
\kwd{item\_0} \kty{s} & \verb?"\n\item "? &
  Command inserted in front of a level 0 entry \\
\kwd{item\_1} \kty{s} & \verb?"\n \subitem "? &
  As above for a level 1 entry \\
\kwd{item\_2} \kty{s} & \verb?"\n  \subsubitem "? &
  As above for a level 2 entry \\
\kwd{item\_01} \kty{s} & \verb?"\n \subitem "? &
  Command inserted in front of a level 1 entry starting at level 0 \\
\kwd{item\_12} \kty{s} & \verb?"\n  \subsubitem "? &
  Command inserted in front of a level 2 entry starting at level 1 \\
\kwd{item\_x1} \kty{s} & \verb?"\n \subitem "? &
  Command inserted in front of a level 1 entry when the parent level
  has no page numbers \\
\kwd{item\_x2} \kty{s} & \verb?"\n \subitem "? &
  As above for a level 2 entry \\                  \midrule
\kwd{delim\_0} \kty{s} & \verb?", "? &
  Delimiter between level 0 entry and first page number \\
\kwd{delim\_1} \kty{s} & \verb?", "? &
  As above for level 1 entry \\
\kwd{delim\_2} \kty{s} & \verb?", "? &
  As above for level 2 entry \\
\kwd{delim\_n} \kty{s} & \verb?", "? &
  Delimiter between page numbers \\
\kwd{delim\_r} \kty{s} & \verb?"-"? &
  Designator for a page range \\                  \midrule
\kwd{encap\_prefix} \kty{s} & \verb?"\\"? &
  Prefix in front of a page encapsulator \\
\kwd{encap\_infix} \kty{s} & \verb?"{"? &
  Infix for a page encapsulator \\
\kwd{encap\_suffix} \kty{s} & \verb?"}"? &
  Suffix for a page encapsulator \\                \midrule
\kwd{page\_precedence} \kty{s} & \verb?"rnaRA"? &
  Page number precedence for sorting. 
  \texttt{r} and \texttt{R} are lower- and uppercase roman;
  \texttt{a} and \texttt{A} are lower- and uppercase alphabetic;
  \texttt{n} is numeric \\                         \midrule
\kwd{line\_max} \kty{n} & \verb?"72"? &
  Maximum length of an output line  \\
\kwd{indent\_space} \kty{s} & \verb?"\t\t"? &
  Indentation commands for wrapped lines  \\
\kwd{indent\_length} \kty{n} & \verb?"16"? &
  Indentation length for wrapped lines  \\
\bottomrule
\multicolumn{3}{c}{\kty{s} of type string, \kty{n} of type number,
   \texttt{"\bs n"} and \texttt{"\bs t"} are newline and tab.} 
\end{tabular}
\end{adjustwidth}
\end{table}

    I have used a file called \file{memman.ist} for configuring
\Lmakeindex\ for this manual. Here it is:
\begin{lcode}
% MakeIndex style file  memman.ist

% @ is a valid character in some entries, use ? instead
actual '?'

% output main entry <entry> as: \item \idxmark{<entry>}, 
item_0  "\n\\item \\idxmark{"
delim_0 "}, "
% not forgetting the subitem case
item_x1 "} \n \\subitem "

% Wrap and uppercase head letters
headings_flag 1
heading_prefix "\\doidxbookmark{"
heading_suffix "}"
\end{lcode}

    Many items that I need to index include \texttt{@} as part of their
names, which is one of the special characters.
The \texttt{actual} line says that the character \texttt{?} performs 
the same function as the default \texttt{@} (and by implication, \texttt{@}
is not a special character as far as \Lmakeindex\ is concerned).

    The \verb?item_0? line says that a main entry in the generated index
starts 
\begin{lcode}
\item \idxmark{
\end{lcode}
and the \verb?delim_0? and \verb?item_x1? lines say that the main entry ends
\begin{lcode}
}, % or
}
    \subitem
\end{lcode}
Thus, main entries will appear in an \pixfile{ind} file like
\begin{lcode}
\item \idxmark{a main entry}, <list of page numbers> 
\item \idxmark{a main entry with no page numbers}
    \subitem subitem, <list of page numbers>
\end{lcode}

%%\index{MakeIndex?\Pmakeindex!output styling|)}
\Iprogsub{MakeIndex}{output styling|)}%


 Read the \Lmakeindex\ manual~\cite{CHEN88} for full details
on how to get \Lmakeindex\ to do what you want.

\LMnote{2009/06/30}{described \doidxbookmark}
The \verb?\doidxbookmark? that is used to wrap around the letter group
headers, can be used to not only style the group header, but can also
be used to add the headers in the bookmarks list. This can be done using
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\doidxbookmark}[1]{{\def\@tempa{Symbols}\def\@tempb{#1}%
  \centering\bfseries \ifx\@tempa\@tempb %
  Analphabetics 
  \phantomsection%
  \pdfbookmark[0]{Analphabetics}{Analphabetics-idx}%
%  \label{AnalphabeticsAnalphabeticsAnalphabetics-idx}%
  \else 
  #1%
  \phantomsection%
  \pdfbookmark[0]{#1}{#1-idx}%
%  \label{#1#1#1-idx}%
  \fi%
  \vskip\onelineskip\par}}
\end{lcode}
The labels are generally not needed but can be used to add a visual
representation of the index bookmarks into the index itself.


\subsection{Indexing and the \Lpack{natbib} package}

    The \Lpack{natbib} package~\cite{NATBIB} will make an index 
of citations if
\cmd{\citeindextrue} is put in the preamble after the \Lpack{natbib}
package is called for.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\citeindexfile} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(citeindexfile)%
  {\cs{citeindexfile}}%
  {File name for the citation index.}
The name of the file for the citation index is stored in the
macro \cmd{\citeindexfile}. This is initially defined as:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\citeindexfile}{\jobname}
\end{lcode}
That is, the citation entries will be written to the default 
\pixfile{idx} file.
This may be not what you want so you can change this, for example to:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\citeindexfile}{names}
\end{lcode}
If you do change \cmd{\citeindexfile} then you have to put
\begin{lcode}
\makeindex[\citeindexfile]
\end{lcode}
\emph{before}
\begin{lcode}
\usepackage[...]{natbib}
\end{lcode}

    So, there are effectively two choices, either along the lines of
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\citeindexfile}{authors} % write to authors.idx
\makeindex[\citeindexfile]
\usepackage{natbib}
\citeindextrue
...
\renewcommand{\indexname}{Index of citations}
\printindex[\citeindexfile]
\end{lcode}
or along the lines of
\begin{lcode}
\usepackage{natbib}
\citeindextrue
\makeindex
...
\printindex
\end{lcode}

\section{Glossaries}

    Unlike indexes, \ltx\ provides less than minimal support for 
glossaries. It provides a \cmd{\makeglossary} command for initiating a glossary
and a \cmd{\glossary} command which puts its argument, plus the page number,
into a \file{glo} file, and that's it. \Mname, combined with the
\Lmakeindex\ program~\cite{CHEN88}, enables you to generate 
and print a glossary in 
your document. The commands for creating a glossary are similar to those
for indexes.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makeglossary}\oarg{file} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(makeglossary)%
  {\cs{makeglossary}\oarg{file}}%
  {Opens file \cs{jobname.glo}, or \cs{file.glo}, for glossary entries}%

You have to put \cmd{\makeglossary} in your preamble if you want a glossary.
This opens a file called by default \verb?\jobname.glo?. If you use the 
optional \meta{file} argument the file \verb?file.glo? will be opened.
A glossary \file{glo} file is analagous to an index \file{idx} file.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\printglossary}\oarg{file} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(printglossary)%
  {\cs{printglossary}\oarg{file}}%
  {Prints the glossary from file \cs{jobname.gls}, or \cs{file.gls}}%
To print a glossary call \cmd{\printglossary} which will print the glossary
from file \verb?\jobname.gls?, or from \verb?file.gls? if the optional 
argument is used. A glossary \file{gls} file is analagous to an
index \file{ind} file.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\glossary}\oarg{file}\parg{key}\marg{term}\marg{desc} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(glossary)%
  {\cs{glossary}\oarg{file}\parg{key}\marg{term}\marg{description}}%
  {Adds \meta{term} and its description, \meta{desc}, to a glossary file ---
   \cs{jobname.glo} by default or to \cs{file.glo}. The optional argument
   \meta{key} can be used to provide a different sort key for \meta{term}.}

Use the \cmd{\glossary} command to add a \meta{term} and its description,
\meta{desc},
to a glossary file. By default this will be \verb?\jobname.glo? but if the
optional \meta{file} argument is given then the information will be written
to \verb?file.glo?. The \parg{key} argument is optional. If present then
\meta{key} will be added to the file to act as a sort key for the \meta{term},
otherwise \meta{term} will be used as the sort key.

    By using the optional \meta{file} arguments you can have several 
glossaries, subject to \tx's limitations on the number of files that can
be open at any one time.

   A simple glossary entry might be:
\begin{lcode}
\glossary{glossary}{A list of terms and their descriptions.}
\end{lcode}

    The glossary facilites are designed so that the \Lmakeindex\ program
can be used to convert the raw glossary data in a \file{glo} file into
the printable glossary in a \file{gls} file.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{theglossary} entry list \eenv{theglossary} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(theglossary)%
  {\senv{theglossary}}%
  {Environment for typesetting a glossary.}%

Glossary entries are typeset in a \Ie{theglossary} environment. It is assumed
that a \file{gls} file will contain a complete \Ie{theglossary} environment,
from \senv{theglossary} all the way through to \eenv{theglossary}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\glossitem}\marg{term}\marg{desc}\marg{ref}\marg{num} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(glossitem)%
  {\cs{glossitem}\marg{term}\marg{desc}\marg{ref}\marg{num}}%
  {Glossary entry used in a \Pe{theglossary} environment}%

A \cmd{\glossitem} is a glossary entry within a \Ie{theglossary} environment
for a \meta{term} with \meta{description}. The \meta{num} argument is the
page or section where the corresponding \cmd{\glossary} was issued. The
\meta{ref} argument, if not empty, might be the section or page number 
corresponding to the \meta{num} page or section number. The default definition
is
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\glossitem}[4]{#1 #2 #3 #4}
\end{lcode}
which is not very exciting. You may well prefer to use your own definition.

\subsection{Controlling the glossary}

\subsubsection{Setting up makeindex}

    If you just run \Lmakeindex\ on a \file{glo} file you will get lots
of errors; \Lmakeindex\ has to be configured to read a \file{glo}
file and generate a useful \file{gls} file as by default it expects to read
an index \file{idx} file and produce an index \file{ind} file. A configuration
file like an index \file{ist} file will be needed. There is no recommended
extension for such a file but I have come to favour \file{gst}. The
command line for \Lmakeindex\ to create a sorted glossary from the raw
data in a \file{glo} file, say \texttt{fred.glo}, using a configuration 
file called, say \texttt{basic.gst}, is
\begin{lcode}
makeindex -s basic.gst -o fred.gls fred.glo
\end{lcode}
For other jobs just change the file names appropriately.

    So, what is in a \file{gst} file? The potential contents were described
earlier, but at a minimum you need this:
\begin{lcode}
%%% basic.gst basic makindex glossary style file 
%%% Output style parameters
preamble "\\begin{theglossary}"
postamble "\n\\end{theglossary}\n"
item_0    "\n\\glossitem"
delim_0   "{\\memglonum{"
encap_suffix "}}}"
headings_flag 1
heading_prefix "\\doglobookmark{"
heading_suffix "}"
%%% Input style parameters
keyword "\\glossaryentry"
\end{lcode}

The \verb?keyword? line says that each entry in an input (\file{glo}) file
will be of the form:
\begin{lcode}
\glossaryentry{entry text}{number}
\end{lcode}
and by a miracle of coding, this is what \Pclass{memoir} will put in a 
\file{glo} file for each \cmd{\glossary} command.

    The \verb?preamble? and \verb?postamble? lines tell the program to start
and end its output file with \senv{theglossary} and \eenv{theglossary},
respectively.
The \verb?item_0? tells the program to start each output entry with
\cmd{\glossitem}. The \verb?delim_0? says that \verb?{\memglonum{?
should be put between the end of the entry text and the (page) number. Finally
\verb?encap_suffix? requests \verb?}}}? to be put after any `encapsulated'
(page) number.

    A complete listing of the possible entries in a configuration file,
also called a style file, for \Lmakeindex{} is in 
\tablerefname~\ref{tab:configin} and~\ref{tab:configout} with the exception
of the output file page number setting keywords.

\LMnote{2009/06/30}{Added bookmarks for letter groups in the glossary}
The \verb?\doglobookmark? macro can be used to add bookmarks for the
letter groups. In the case of this manual we do not write anything,
just add the letters to the glossary entry in the bookmark list. In
\Lpack{memsty} \verb?\doglobookmark? is defined as
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand\doglobookmark[1]{%
  \def\@tempa{Symbols}\def\@tempb{#1}%
  \ifx\@tempa\@tempb %
  \phantomsection\pdfbookmark[0]{Analphabetics}{Analphabetics-glo}%
  \else%
  \phantomsection\pdfbookmark[0]{#1}{#1-glo}%
  \fi%
}
\end{lcode}
\Lmakeindex\ uses the word 'Symbols' to specify the group that does not
start with a letter.


\subsubsection{Raw input data}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\@@wrglom@m}\marg{file}\marg{key}\marg{term}\marg{desc}\marg{ref}\marg{num}\\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\glossary} macro writes its arguments to the \file{aux} file
in the form of arguments to the \cmd{\@@wrglom@m} internal macro. In turn 
this calls a series of other macros that eventually write the data
to the \meta{file} \file{glo} file 
in the format (where \verb+@+ is the actual flag):
\begin{lcode}
\glossaryentry{key@{\memgloterm{term}} {\memglodesc{desc}}{\memgloref{ref}}
               |memglonumf}{num}
\end{lcode}
which \Lmakeindex\ then effectively converts into
\begin{lcode}
\glossitem{\memgloterm{term}}{\memglodesc{desc}}{\memgloref{ref}}
           {\memglonum{\memglonumf{num}}}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\memgloterm}\marg{term} \\
\cmd{\memglodesc}\marg{desc} \\
\cmd{\memgloref}\marg{ref} \\
\cmd{\memglonum}\marg{num} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(memgloterm)%
  {\cs{memgloterm}\marg{term}}%
  {Wrapper round a glossary term.}%
\glossary(memglodesc)%
  {\cs{memglodesc}\marg{desc}}%
  {Wrapper round a glossary description.}%
\glossary(memgloref)%
  {\cs{memgloref}\marg{ref}}%
  {Wrapper round a glossary ref.}%
\glossary(memglonum)%
  {\cs{memglonum}\marg{num}}%
  {Wrapper round glossary numbers.}%
These macros can be redefined to format the various parts of a glossary entry.
Their default definitions are simply
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\memgloterm}[1]{#1}
\newcommand{\memglodesc}[1]{#1}
\newcommand{\memgloref}[1]{#1}
\newcommand{\memglonum}[1]{#1}
\end{lcode}
For example, if you wanted the term in bold, the description in italics,
 and no numbers:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\memgloterm}[1]{\textbf{#1}}
\renewcommand{\memglodesc}[1]{\textit{#1}}
\renewcommand{\memglonum}[1]{}
\end{lcode}

   There are several macros that effect a glossary entry 
but which must not be directly modified (the \cs{memglonumf} shown above
as part of the \cmd{\glossaryentry} is one of these).
Each of the following \cs{changegloss...} macros takes an optional \meta{file}
argument. The changes to the underlying macro apply only to the 
glossary of that particular \meta{file} (or the \cs{jobname} file
if the argument is not present.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\changeglossactual}\oarg{file}\marg{char} \\
\cmd{\changeglossref}\oarg{file}\marg{thecounter} \\
\cmd{\changeglossnum}\oarg{file}\marg{thecounter} \\
\cmd{\changeglossnumformat}\oarg{file}\marg{format} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(changeglossactual)%
  {\cs{changeglossactual}\oarg{file}\marg{char}}%
  {Specifies \meta{char} as the \texttt{actual} character for 
   glossary \meta{file}.}%
\glossary(changeglossref)%
  {\cs{changeglossref}\oarg{file}\marg{thecounter}}%
  {Specifies \meta{thecounter} as the \meta{ref} for 
   glossary \meta{file}.}%
\glossary(changeglossnum)%
  {\cs{changeglossnum}\oarg{file}\marg{thecounter}}%
  {Specifies \meta{thecounter} as the \meta{num} for 
   glossary \meta{file}.}%
\glossary(changeglossnumformat)%
  {\cs{changeglossnumformat}\oarg{file}\marg{format}}%
  {Specifies \meta{format} as the format for \meta{num} for 
   glossary \meta{file}.}%

\cmd{\changeglossactual} sets \meta{char} as the \texttt{actual} character
for the \meta{file} glossary. It is initially \verb+@+. This must match 
with the \texttt{actual} specified for the \file{gst} file that will 
be applied.

\cmd{\changeglossref} specifies that \meta{thecounter} should be used
to generate the \meta{ref} for the \meta{file} glossary. It is
initially nothing.

\cmd{\changeglossnum} specifies that \meta{thecounter} should be used
to generate the \meta{num} for the \meta{file} glossary. It is
initially \cs{thepage}.

\cmd{\changeglossnumformat} specifies that \meta{format} should be used
to format the \meta{num} for the \meta{file} glossary. The format
of \meta{format} is \verb?|form?, where \verb?|? is the \texttt{encap}
character specified in the \file{gst} file, and \verb?form? is a
formatting command, taking one argument (the number), without any backslash. 
For example
\begin{lcode}
\changeglossnumformat{|textbf}
\end{lcode}
 to get bold numbers. It is
initially set as \verb?|memjustarg?, where this is defined as:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\memjustarg}[1]{#1}
\end{lcode}
There must be a format defined for the \meta{num} otherwise the arguments
to \cmd{\glossitem} will not be set correctly.


    The \cmd{\makeglossary} command uses the \cs{change...}
commands to define the initial versions, so only use the \cs{change...}
macros \emph{after} \cmd{\makeglossary}.
In this document an early version of the glossary was set up by
\begin{lcode}
\makeglossary
\changeglossactual{?}
\makeatletter 
\changeglossnum{\@currentlabel} 
\makeatother
\changeglossnum{\thepage}
\end{lcode}
The first call of \cmd{\changeglossnum} makes the number the current 
numbered chapter, or numbered section, or numbered \ldots. I didn't 
like that when I tried it, so the second call resets the number to 
the page number.

\subsubsection{The listing}

    The final glossary data in the \file{gls} file is typeset in the
\Ie{theglossary} environment, which is much like the \Ie{theindex}
and \Ie{thebibliography} environments.

    The environment starts off with a chapter-style unnumbered title.
There are several macros for specifying what happens after that.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\glossaryname} \\
\cmd{\glossarymark} \\
\cmd{\glossaryintoc} \cmd{\noglossaryintoc} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(glossaryname)%
  {\cs{glossaryname}}%
  {Name for a glossary.}%
\glossary(glossarymark)%
  {\cs{glossarymark}}%
  {Redefine to specify marks for headers.}%
\glossary(glossaryintoc)%
  {\cs{glossaryintoc}}%
  {Declaration to add glossary title to the ToC.}%
\glossary(noglossaryintoc)%
  {\cs{noglossaryintoc}}%
  {Declaration to prohibit adding glossary title to the ToC.}%

The title for the glossary is \cmd{\glossaryname} whose initial definition
is 
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}
\end{lcode}
\cmd{\glossarymark}, which by default does nothing, can be redefined to
set marks for headers. The glossary title will be added to the ToC
if the \cmd{\glossaryintoc} declaration is in force, but will not be
added to the ToC following the \cmd{\noglossaryintoc}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\preglossaryhook} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(preglossaryhook)%
  {\cs{preglossaryhook}}%
  {Vacuous macro called after a glossary title is typeset.}
The macro \cmd{\preglossaryhook} is called after the glossary title 
has been typeset. By default it does nothing, but you could redefine
it to, for example, add some explanatory material before the entries
start.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\onecolglossary} \cmd{\twocolglossary} \\
\lnc{\glossarycolsep} \lnc{\glossaryrule} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(onecolglossary)%
  {\cs{onecolglossary}}%
  {Declaration for a single column glossary.}%
\glossary(onecolglossaryfalse)%
  {\cs{twocolglossary}}%
  {Declaration for a two column glossary.}%
\glossary(glossarycolsep)%
  {\cs{glossarycolsep}}%
  {Columns separation in a two column glossary.}%
\glossary(glossaryrule)%
  {\cs{glossaryrule}}%
  {Width of inter-column rule in a two column glossary.}%

The glossary can be typeset in two columns (\cmd{\twocolglossary})
but by default (\cmd{\onecolglossary}) it is set in one column.
When two columns are used, the length \lnc{\glossarycolsep} is the
distance between the columns and the length \lnc{\glossaryrule} is
the width (default 0) of a vertical rule between the columns.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\begintheglossaryhook} \\
\cmd{\atendtheglossaryhook} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(begintheglossaryhook)%
  {\cs{begintheglossaryhook}}%
  {Vacuous macro called as the last thing by \senv{theglossary}.}
\glossary(atendtheglossaryhook)%
  {\cs{atendtheglossaryhook}}%
  {Vacuous macro called as the first thing by \eenv{theglossary}.}

The last thing that \senv{theglossary} does is call 
\cmd{\begintheglossaryhook}. Similarly, the first thing that is done at
the end of the environment is to call \cmd{\atendtheglossaryhook}.
By default these macros do nothing but you can redefine them.

    For example, if you wanted the glossary in the form of a description
list, the following will do that.
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\begintheglossaryhook}{\begin{description}}
\renewcommand*{\atendtheglossaryhook}{\end{description}}
\renewcommand{\glossitem}[4]{\item[#1:] #2 #3 #4}
\end{lcode}

\subsubsection{The glossary for this document}

    The following is the code I have used to produce the glossary
in this document.

This is the code in the \file{sty} file that I used.
\begin{lcode}
\makeglossary
\changeglossactual{?}
\changeglossnum{\thepage}
\changeglossnumformat{|hyperpage}%% for hyperlinks
\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Command summary}
\renewcommand*{\glossarymark}{\markboth{\glossaryname}{\glossaryname}}
\renewcommand{\glossitem}[4]{%
  \sbox\@tempboxa{#1 \space #2 #3 \makebox[2em]{#4}}%
  \par\hangindent 2em
  \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa<0.8\linewidth
    #1 \space #2 #3 \dotfill \makebox[2em][r]{#4}\relax
  \else
    #1 \dotfill \makebox[2em][r]{#4}\\
    #2 #3
  \fi}
\end{lcode}

    The redefinition of \cmd{\glossitem} works as follows (it is similar
to code used in the setting of a \cmd{\caption}):
\begin{enumerate}
\item Put the whole entry into a temporary box.
\item Set up a hanging paragraph with 2em indentation after the first line.
\item Check if the length of the entry is less than 80\% of the linewidth.
\item For a short entry set the name, description, and any reference then
      fill the remainder of the line with dots with the number at the right
      margin.
\item For a longer entry, set the title and number on a line, separated
      by a line of dots, then set the description (and reference) on
      the following lines.
\end{enumerate}

    The \file{gst} file I have used for this document has a few more items
than the basic one.
\begin{lcode}
%%% memman.gst makindex glossary style file for memman and friends
%%% Output style parameters
preamble "\\begin{theglossary}"
postamble "\n\\end{theglossary}\n"
group_skip "\n\\glossaryspace\n"
item_0    "\n\\glossitem"
delim_0   "{\\memglonum{"
encap_suffix "}}}"
indent_space "\t"
indent_length 2
%%% Input style parameters
keyword "\\glossaryentry"
actual '?'
page_compositor "."
\end{lcode}

The \verb?group_skip? line asks that \verb?\glossaryspace? be put between the 
last entry for one letter and the first for the next letter. 
The \verb?indent_space? and \verb?indent_length? give a smaller indent for
continuation lines in the output than the default.

    The \verb?actual? entry says that the input file will use \verb+?+ instead
of the default \verb+@+ as the flag for separating a key from the start of 
the real entry. The \verb?page_compositor? indicates that any compound numbers
will be like \verb?1.2.3? instead of the default \verb?1-2-3?.

In the document the raw data is collected by the \cmd{\glossary} commands 
in the body of the text. For instance, although I have not actually used
the first two:
\begin{lcode}
\glossary(cs)%
  {\cs{cs}\marg{name}}%
  {Typesets \texttt{name} as a macro name with preceding backslash,
   e.g., \cs{name}.}%
\glossary(gmarg)%
  {\cs{gmarg}\marg{arg}}%
  {Typesets \texttt{arg} as a required argument, e.g., \marg{arg}.}
\glossary(glossaryname)%
  {\cs{glossaryname}}%
  {Name for a glossary}%
\glossary(memgloterm)%
  {\cs{memgloterm}\marg{term}}%
  {Wrapper round a glossary term.}%
\end{lcode}

    Any change to the glossary entries will be reflected in the
\file{glo} produced from that LaTeX run. \Lmakeindex\ has to be run
the \file{glo} file using the appropriate \file{gst} configuration file, 
and then LaTeX run again to get the corrected, sorted and formatted result
printed by \cmd{\printglossary}.

    In particular, for this document, which also includes an index so that
can be processed when the glossary is processed.
\begin{lcode}
pdflatex memman
makeindex -s memman.gst -o memman.gls memman.glo
makeindex -s memman.ist memman     %%% for the index
makeindex lines                    %%% for the index of first lines
pdflatex memman
\end{lcode} 


%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

\LMnote{2013/05/02}{Section about endnotes moved page-notes.tex}



%#% extend
%#% extstart include miscellaneous.tex

\svnidlong
{$Ignore: $}
{$LastChangedDate: 2013-05-17 16:33:35 +0200 (Fri, 17 May 2013) $}
{$LastChangedRevision: 466 $}
{$LastChangedBy: daleif $}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%\clearpage
%\pagestyle{Ruled}
%%\chapterstyle{demo}
%\chapterstyle{veelo}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

\chapter{Miscellaneous} \label{chap:misc}

\setlength{\prechapterprecisshift}{-\onelineskip}

\chapterprecis{In which we talk of many things, but not shoes
               or ships or sealing wax, nor cabbages and kings.}

\noindent    This chapter started with the \cmd{\chapterprecis} command to add
the above text, which is also added to the \prtoc.

    The class provides a miscellany of minor facilities, which are described
here.

\section{Draft documents}

  The \Lopt{draft} option marks any overfull lines with black rectangles,
otherwise the appearance is the same as for a \Lopt{final} document.

\begin{syntax}
\piif{ifdraftdoc} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(ifdraftdoc)%
  {\cs{ifdraftdoc}}%
  {\ptrue\ if the \Popt{draft} class option has been used.}
The \piif{ifdraftdoc} macro is provided so that you can add extra
things that you might want to happen when processing a draft; for example
you might want to have each page header\index{header} (or footer\index{footer}) include the word `DRAFT'.
The code to do this can be put into a construct like the following:
\begin{lcode}
\ifdraftdoc
  % special things for a draft document
\else
  % perhaps special things for a non-draft document
\fi
\end{lcode}


\section{Change marks}

    When preparing a manuscript it normally goes through several iterations.
The macros described in this section can be used to identify changes made to 
a document throughout its lifecycle.

   The commands below implement a simplified version of the change
marking in the \Lclass{iso} class~\cite{ISOCLASS}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\changemarks} \cmd{\nochangemarks} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(changemarks)%
  {\cs{changemarks}}%
  {Print change marks.}
\glossary(nochangemarks)%
  {\cs{nochangemarks}}%
  {Do not print change marks.}
The change marking macros only work properly when the \Lopt{draft} class
option is used. Additionally, the marks are only printed when the 
\cmd{\changemarks} declaration is in effect. Using \cmd{\nochangemarks}
switches off any marking.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\added}\marg{change-id} \\
\cmd{\deleted}\marg{change-id} \\
\cmd{\changed}\marg{change-id} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(added)%
  {\cs{added}\marg{change-id}}%
  {Change mark for someting added; \meta{change-id} is put in the margin.}
\glossary(deleted)%
  {\cs{deleted}\marg{change-id}}%
  {Change mark for someting deleted; \meta{change-id} is put in the margin.}
\glossary(changed)%
  {\cs{changed}\marg{change-id}}%
  {Change mark for someting changed; \meta{change-id} is put in the margin.}
Each of these macros puts a symbol and \meta{change-id} into the 
margin\index{margin} near
where the command is given. The \cmd{\added} macro indicates that something
has been added to the manuscript and uses $\oplus$ as its symbol. The
\cmd{\deleted} macro is for indicating that something has been deleted and uses
the $\neq$ symbol. The macro \cmd{\changed} uses the $\Leftrightarrow$ symbol
to indicate that something has been changed.

    These marking commands should be attached to some word or punctuation
mark in the text otherwise extraneous spaces may creep into the typeset
document.

\section{Trim marks}

    When the class \Lopt{showtrims} option is used, trim
marks can be placed on each page, usually to indicate where the stock should
be trimmed to obtain the planned page size. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\showtrimsoff} \cmd{\showtrimson} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(showtrimsoff)%
  {\cs{showtrimsoff}}%
  {Switch off any trim marks.}
\glossary(showtrimson)%
  {\cs{showtrimson}}%
  {If the \Popt{showtrims} option has been used, switch on any trim marks 
  (this is the default).}
If the \Lopt{showtrims} class option has been used then the \cmd{\showtrimsoff}
declaration switches off the trim marks; the \cmd{\showtrimson} declaration,
which is the default, switches on the trim marks. These declarations do
nothing if the \Lopt{showtrims} option has not been used.

\LMnote{2013/05/01}{added caveat}
\begin{caveat}
  Most modern \LaTeX\ editors make use of the \emph{synctex} features
  in, say, pdf\LaTeX\ to enable \emph{reverse search} from the PDF
  previewer back tot he source code in the editor. That is, click in a
  certain manner in the PDF previewer and you will be taken to the
  corresponding (or there about) line in the source code.

  Apparently the \emph{synctex} feature does not like the trimmarks
  the class provide, or the \pstyle{showlocs} page style. The code
  line one is referred back to may be off by tens of lines.

  Currently, there is no known workarounds for this deficiency.
\end{caveat}



    Trim marks can be placed at each corner of the (trimmed) page, and also
at the middle of each side of the page.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\trimXmarks} \\
\cmd{\trimLmarks} \\
\cmd{\trimFrame} \\
\cmd{\trimNone} \\
\cmd{\trimmarkscolor} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(trimXmarks)%
  {\cs{trimXmarks}}%
  {Trim marks of crosses at the four corners of the trimmed page.}
\glossary(trimLmarks)%
  {\cs{trimLmarks}}%
  {Trim marks of `L' shapes at the four corners of the trimmed page.}
\glossary(trimFrame)%
  {\cs{trimFrame}}%
  {Trim mark of a frame drawn round the trimmed page boundary.}
\glossary(trimNone)%
  {\cs{trimNone}}%
  {No trim marks.}
\glossary(trimmarkscolor)%
  {\cs{trimmarkscolor}}%
  {Empty macro that can be redefined to give a specific color to the trimmarks.}

Some predefined trimming styles are provided. After the declaration
\cmd{\trimXmarks} marks in the shape of a cross are placed at the four
corners of the page. The declaration \cmd{\trimLmarks} calls for corner marks
in the shape of an `L', in various orientations depending on the particular
corner. After \cmd{\trimFrame} a frame will be drawn around each page, 
coinciding with the page boundaries. The declaration \cmd{\trimNone}
disables all kinds of trim marking. All three plus \cs{quarkmarks}
(described below) is visibly shown on \fref{fig:trimmarks}.

The macro \cs{trimmarkscolor} is despite its name a normal (empty)
macro. By redefining it one can change the color of the trimmarks,
handy for example if the document has a dark background color. To make
them blue use
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\trimmarkscolor}{\color{blue}}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\trimmarks} \\
\cmd{\tmarktl} \cmd{\tmarktr} \cmd{\tmarkbr} \cmd{\tmarkbl} \\
\cmd{\tmarktm} \cmd{\tmarkmr} \cmd{\tmarkbm} \cmd{\tmarkml} \\
\end{syntax}
\glossary(trimmarks)%
  {\cs{trimmarks}}%
  {Displays 8 (in)visible trim marks round the boundary of the trimmed page.}
\glossary(tmarktl)%
  {\cs{tmarktl}}%
  {Trim mark for top left of trimmed page.}
\glossary(tmarktm)%
  {\cs{tmarktm}}%
  {Trim mark for top middle of trimmed page.}
\glossary(tmark